Sinumerik 840D Sl - Sinumerik 828D Fundamentals - Programming Manual

March 26, 2018 | Author: yawwwsanane | Category: Cartesian Coordinate System, Coordinate System, Documentation, Kinematics, Geometry
Share
Report this link


Comments



Description

SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 840D sl/SINUMERIK 828D FundamentalsPreface Fundamental geometrical principles 1 Fundamental principles of NC programming 2 Creating an NC program 3 Tool change 4 Tool offsets 5 Spindle motion 6 Feed control 7 Geometry settings 8 Motion commands 9 Tool radius compensation 10 Path action 11 Coordinate transformations (frames) 12 Auxiliary function outputs 13 Supplementary commands 14 Other information 15 Tables 16 Appendix A SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 840D sl/ SINUMERIK 828D Fundamentals Programming Manual 06/2009 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Valid for Control System SINUMERIK 840D sl/840DE sl SINUMERIK 828D Software Version NCU system software for 840D sl/840DE sl 2.6 NCU System software for 828D 2.6 Legal information Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NÜRNBERG GERMANY Order number: 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Ⓟ 06/2009 Copyright © Siemens AG 2009. Technical data subject to change Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 3 Preface SINUMERIK Documentation The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in three parts: ● General Documentation ● User Documentation ● Manufacturer/service documentation Information on the following topics is available at http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/docu: ● Ordering documentation Here you can find an up-to-date overview of publications ● Downloading documentation Links to more information for downloading files from Service & Support. ● Researching documentation online Information on DOConCD and direct access to the publications in DOConWeb. ● Compiling individual documentation on the basis of Siemens contents with the My Documentation Manager (MDM), refer to http://www.siemens.com/mdm. My Documentation Manager provides you with a range of features for generating your own machine documentation. ● Training and FAQs Information on our range of training courses and FAQs (frequently asked questions) are available via the page navigation. Target group This publication is intended for: ● Programmers ● Project engineers Benefits With the programming manual, the target group can develop, write, test, and debug programs and software user interfaces. Preface Fundamentals 4 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Standard scope This Programming Manual describes the functionality afforded by standard functions. Extensions or changes made by the machine tool manufacturer are documented by the machine tool manufacturer. Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when servicing. Further, for the sake of simplicity, this documentation does not contain all detailed information about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case of installation, operation or maintenance. Technical Support If you have any questions, please contact our hotline: Europe/Africa Phone +49 180 5050 - 222 Fax +49 180 5050 - 223 €0.14/min. from German landlines, mobile phone prices may differ Internet http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request America Phone +1 423 262 2522 Fax +1 423 262 2200 E-mail mailto:[email protected] Asia/Pacific Phone +86 1064 757575 Fax +86 1064 747474 E-mail mailto:[email protected] Note You will find telephone numbers for other countries for technical support on the Internet: http://www.automation.siemens.com/partner Preface Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 5 Questions about the manual If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this documentation, please fax or e-mail us: Fax: +49 9131- 98 2176 E-mail: mailto:[email protected] A fax form is available in the appendix of this document. SINUMERIK Internet address http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik "Fundamentals" and "Job planning" Programming Manual The description of the NC programming is divided into two manuals: 1. Fundamentals This "Fundamentals" Programming Manual is intended for use by skilled machine operators with the appropriate expertise in drilling, milling and turning operations. Simple programming examples are used to explain the commands and statements which are also defined according to DIN 66025. 2. Job planning The Programming Manual "Job planning" is intended for use by technicians with in-depth, comprehensive programming knowledge. By virtue of a special programming language, the SINUMERIK control enables the user to program complex workpiece programs (e.g. for free-form surfaces, channel coordination, ...) and makes programming of complicated operations easy for technologists. Availability of the described NC language elements All NC language elements described in the manual are available for the SINUMERIK 840D sl. The availability regarding SINUMERIK 828D can be found in column "828D" of the "List of statements (Page 483) ". Preface Fundamentals 6 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 7 Table of contents Preface...................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Fundamental geometrical principles ........................................................................................................ 13 1.1 Workpiece positions.....................................................................................................................13 1.1.1 Workpiece coordinate systems....................................................................................................13 1.1.2 Cartesian coordinates..................................................................................................................14 1.1.3 Polar coordinates .........................................................................................................................18 1.1.4 Absolute dimensions....................................................................................................................19 1.1.5 Incremental dimension.................................................................................................................21 1.2 Working planes ............................................................................................................................23 1.3 Zero points and reference points .................................................................................................25 1.4 Coordinate systems .....................................................................................................................27 1.4.1 Machine coordinate system (MCS)..............................................................................................27 1.4.2 Basic coordinate system (BCS) ...................................................................................................31 1.4.3 Basic zero system (BZS) .............................................................................................................33 1.4.4 Settable zero system (SZS) .........................................................................................................34 1.4.5 Workpiece coordinate system (WCS)..........................................................................................35 1.4.6 What is the relationship between the various coordinate systems?............................................36 2 Fundamental principles of NC programming............................................................................................ 37 2.1 Name of an NC program..............................................................................................................37 2.2 Structure and contents of an NC program...................................................................................39 2.2.1 Blocks and block components .....................................................................................................39 2.2.2 Block rules....................................................................................................................................42 2.2.3 Value assignments.......................................................................................................................43 2.2.4 Comments....................................................................................................................................44 2.2.5 Skipping blocks ............................................................................................................................45 3 Creating an NC program.......................................................................................................................... 47 3.1 Basic procedure...........................................................................................................................47 3.2 Available characters.....................................................................................................................49 3.3 Program header ...........................................................................................................................51 3.4 Program examples.......................................................................................................................53 3.4.1 Example 1: First programming steps ...........................................................................................53 3.4.2 Example 2: NC program for turning.............................................................................................54 3.4.3 Example 3: NC program for milling..............................................................................................56 4 Tool change............................................................................................................................................. 59 4.1 Tool change without tool management ........................................................................................60 4.1.1 Tool change with T command......................................................................................................60 4.1.2 Tool change with M6....................................................................................................................61 4.2 Tool change with tool management (option)................................................................................63 4.2.1 Tool change with T command with active tool management (option)..........................................63 4.2.2 Tool change with M6 with active tool management (option)........................................................66 Table of contents Fundamentals 8 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 4.3 Behavior with faulty T programming ........................................................................................... 68 5 Tool offsets.............................................................................................................................................. 69 5.1 General information about the tool offsets.................................................................................. 69 5.2 Tool length compensation........................................................................................................... 70 5.3 Tool radius compensation........................................................................................................... 71 5.4 Tool compensation memory........................................................................................................ 72 5.5 Tool types.................................................................................................................................... 74 5.5.1 General information about the tool types.................................................................................... 74 5.5.2 Milling tools ................................................................................................................................. 75 5.5.3 Drills ............................................................................................................................................ 77 5.5.4 Grinding tools .............................................................................................................................. 78 5.5.5 Turning tools ............................................................................................................................... 80 5.5.6 Special tools................................................................................................................................ 82 5.5.7 Chaining rule............................................................................................................................... 83 5.6 Tool offset call (D) ....................................................................................................................... 84 5.7 Change in the tool offset data..................................................................................................... 87 5.8 Programmable tool offset (TOFFL, TOFF, TOFFR).................................................................... 88 6 Spindle motion......................................................................................................................................... 95 6.1 Spindle speed (S), direction of spindle rotation (M3, M4, M5).................................................... 95 6.2 Cutting rate (SVC)..................................................................................................................... 100 6.3 Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) ....................... 108 6.4 Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPSON, GWPSOF).......................................... 115 6.5 Programmable spindle speed limitation (G25, G26)................................................................. 118 7 Feed control........................................................................................................................................... 119 7.1 Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF).............................................................. 119 7.2 Traversing positioning axes (POS, POSA, POSP, FA, WAITP, WAITMC) .............................. 129 7.3 Position-controlled spindle operation (SPCON, SPCOF) ......................................................... 134 7.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS, SPOSA, M19, M70, WAITS)....................................................... 135 7.5 Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA, FPR, FPRAON, FPRAOF) .................................. 146 7.6 Programmable feedrate override (OVR, OVRRAP, OVRA) ..................................................... 150 7.7 Programmable acceleration override (ACC) (option)................................................................ 152 7.8 Feedrate with handwheel override (FD, FDA) .......................................................................... 154 7.9 Feedrate optimization for curved path sections (CFTCP, CFC, CFIN)..................................... 158 7.10 Several feedrate values in one block (F, ST, SR, FMA, STA, SRA)......................................... 161 7.11 Non-modal feedrate (FB) .......................................................................................................... 164 7.12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) ........................................................................................................... 165 8 Geometry settings.................................................................................................................................. 173 8.1 Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) ......................... 173 Table of contents Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 9 8.2 Selection of the working plane (G17/G18/G19) .........................................................................179 8.3 Dimensions ................................................................................................................................183 8.3.1 Absolute dimensions (G90, AC).................................................................................................183 8.3.2 Incremental dimensions (G91, IC) .............................................................................................186 8.3.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions for turning and milling (G90/G91) .................................190 8.3.4 Absolute dimension for rotary axes (DC, ACP, ACN)................................................................191 8.3.5 Inch or metric dimensions (G70/G700, G71/G710) ...................................................................194 8.3.6 Channel-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMON, DIAM90, DIAMOF, DIAMCYCOF) ............................................................................................................................197 8.3.7 Axis-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMONA, DIAM90A, DIAMOFA, DIACYCOFA, DIAMCHANA, DIAMCHAN, DAC, DIC, RAC, RIC) ............................................200 8.4 Position of workpiece for turning................................................................................................205 9 Motion commands ................................................................................................................................. 207 9.1 Travel commands with Cartesian coordinates (G0, G1, G2, G3, X..., Y..., Z...)........................209 9.2 Travel commands with polar coordinates ..................................................................................211 9.2.1 Reference point of the polar coordinates (G110, G111, G112).................................................211 9.2.2 Travel commands with polar coordinates (G0, G1, G2, G3, AP, RP)........................................213 9.3 Rapid traverse movement (G0, RTLION, RTLIOF) ...................................................................217 9.4 Linear interpolation (G1) ............................................................................................................222 9.5 Circular interpolation..................................................................................................................225 9.5.1 Circular interpolation types (G2/G3, ...) .....................................................................................225 9.5.2 Circular interpolation with center point and end point (G2/G3, X... Y... Z..., I... J... K...) ...........229 9.5.3 Circular interpolation with radius and end point (G2/G3, X... Y... Z.../ I... J... K..., CR) .............233 9.5.4 Circular interpolation with opening angle and center point (G2/G3, X... Y... Z.../ I... J... K..., AR)......................................................................................................................................236 9.5.5 Circular interpolation with polar coordinates (G2/G3, AP, RP)..................................................239 9.5.6 Circular interpolation with intermediate point and end point (CIP, X... Y... Z..., I1... J1... K1...)...........................................................................................................................................242 9.5.7 Circular interpolation with tangential transition (CT, X... Y... Z...)..............................................246 9.6 Helical interpolation (G2/G3, TURN) .........................................................................................250 9.7 Involute interpolation (INVCW, INVCCW)..................................................................................253 9.8 Contour definitions.....................................................................................................................259 9.8.1 Contour definitions: One straight line (ANG) .............................................................................260 9.8.2 Contour definitions: Two straight lines (ANG)............................................................................262 9.8.3 Contour definitions: Three straight line (ANG)...........................................................................265 9.8.4 Contour definitions: End point programming with angle............................................................269 9.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33)....................................................................................270 9.9.1 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33, SF) .............................................................................270 9.9.2 Programmable run-in and run-out paths (DITS, DITE) ..............................................................278 9.10 Thread cutting with increasing or decreasing lead (G34, G35) .................................................281 9.11 Tapping without compensating chuck (G331, G332) ................................................................283 9.12 Tapping with compensating chuck (G63) ..................................................................................288 9.13 Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON, LFOF, DILF, ALF, LFTXT, LFWP, LFPOS, POLF, POLFMASK, POLFMLIN)...............................................................................................290 9.14 Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM)....................................................295 Table of contents Fundamentals 10 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 10 Tool radius compensation...................................................................................................................... 301 10.1 Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) ................................................................. 301 10.2 Contour approach and retraction (NORM, KONT, KONTC, KONTT)....................................... 312 10.3 Compensation at the outside corners (G450, G451, DISC) ..................................................... 319 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction............................................................................................... 323 10.4.1 Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) ......................................................................................... 323 10.4.2 Approach and retraction with enhanced retraction strategies (G460, G461, G462)................. 335 10.5 Collision monitoring (CDON, CDOF, CDOF2) .......................................................................... 340 10.6 2D tool compensation (CUT2D, CUT2DF)................................................................................ 344 10.7 Keep tool radius compensation constant (CUTCONON, CUTCONOF) ................................... 347 10.8 Tools with a relevant cutting edge position............................................................................... 350 11 Path action............................................................................................................................................. 353 11.1 Exact stop (G60, G9, G601, G602, G603)................................................................................ 353 11.2 Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS)................. 357 12 Coordinate transformations (frames) ..................................................................................................... 369 12.1 Frames ...................................................................................................................................... 369 12.2 Frame instructions..................................................................................................................... 371 12.3 Programmable zero offset......................................................................................................... 376 12.3.1 Zero offset (TRANS, ATRANS)................................................................................................. 376 12.3.2 Axial zero offset (G58, G59)...................................................................................................... 381 12.4 Programmable rotation (ROT, AROT, RPL) ............................................................................. 384 12.5 Programmable frame rotations with solid angles (ROTS, AROTS, CROTS) ........................... 396 12.6 Programmable scale factor (SCALE, ASCALE)........................................................................ 398 12.7 Programmable mirroring (MIRROR, AMIRROR) ...................................................................... 403 12.8 Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME, TOROT, PAROT) ...................... 410 12.9 Deselect frame (G53, G153, SUPA, G500) .............................................................................. 414 12.10 Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF, CORROF) ............................................................ 415 13 Auxiliary function outputs....................................................................................................................... 419 13.1 M functions................................................................................................................................ 423 14 Supplementary commands .................................................................................................................... 427 14.1 Messages (MSG) ...................................................................................................................... 427 14.2 Working area limitation.............................................................................................................. 429 14.2.1 Working area limitation in BCS (G25/G26, WALIMON, WALIMOF) ......................................... 429 14.2.2 Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 ... WALCS10) ................................................ 433 14.3 Reference point approach (G74) .............................................................................................. 436 14.4 Fixed-point approach (G75, G751) ........................................................................................... 437 14.5 Travel to fixed stop (FXS, FXST, FXSW).................................................................................. 443 Table of contents Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 11 14.6 Acceleration behavior ................................................................................................................449 14.6.1 Acceleration mode (BRISK, BRISKA, SOFT, SOFTA, DRIVE, DRIVEA) .................................449 14.6.2 Influence of acceleration on following axes (VELOLIMA, ACCLIMA, JERKLIMA)....................452 14.6.3 Activation of technology-specific dynamic values (DYNNORM, DYNPOS, DYNROUGH, DYNSEMIFIN, DYNFINISH) ......................................................................................................454 14.7 Traversing with feedforward control, FFWON, FFWOF.............................................................456 14.8 Contour accuracy, CPRECON, CPRECOF...............................................................................457 14.9 Dwell time (G4) ..........................................................................................................................458 14.10 Internal preprocessing stop........................................................................................................460 15 Other information................................................................................................................................... 461 15.1 Axes ...........................................................................................................................................461 15.1.1 Main axes/Geometry axes .........................................................................................................463 15.1.2 Special axes...............................................................................................................................464 15.1.3 Main spindle, master spindle .....................................................................................................464 15.1.4 Machine axes.............................................................................................................................465 15.1.5 Channel axes .............................................................................................................................465 15.1.6 Path axes ...................................................................................................................................465 15.1.7 Positioning axes.........................................................................................................................466 15.1.8 Synchronized axes.....................................................................................................................467 15.1.9 Command axes..........................................................................................................................467 15.1.10 PLC axes....................................................................................................................................467 15.1.11 Link axes....................................................................................................................................468 15.1.12 Lead link axes ............................................................................................................................470 15.2 From travel command to machine movement ...........................................................................473 15.3 Path calculation..........................................................................................................................474 15.4 Addresses ..................................................................................................................................475 15.5 Identifiers....................................................................................................................................479 15.6 Constants...................................................................................................................................481 16 Tables.................................................................................................................................................... 483 16.1 List of statements.......................................................................................................................483 16.2 Addresses ..................................................................................................................................558 16.3 G function groups.......................................................................................................................568 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls........................................................................................................588 16.5 Predefined subroutine calls in motion-synchronous actions......................................................607 16.6 Predefined functions ..................................................................................................................608 A Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 617 A.1 List of abbreviations...................................................................................................................617 A.2 Feedback on the documentation................................................................................................623 A.3 Documentation overview............................................................................................................625 Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 627 Index...................................................................................................................................................... 655 Table of contents Fundamentals 12 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 13 Fundamental geometrical principles 1 1.1 1.1 Workpiece positions 1.1.1 Workpiece coordinate systems In order that the machine or the control can work with the positions specified in the NC program, these specifications have to be made in a reference system that can be transferred to the directions of motion of the machine axes. A coordinate system with the axes X, Y and Z is used for this purpose. DIN 66217 stipulates that machine tools must use clockwise, right-angled (Cartesian) coordinate systems. X+ X- Y+ Y- Z+ Z- 90° 90° 90° W Figure 1-1 Workpiece coordinate system for milling Fundamental geometrical principles 1.1 Workpiece positions Fundamentals 14 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Z+ Z- X+ X- Y+ 90° 90° 90° W Y- Figure 1-2 Workpiece coordinate system for turning The workpiece zero (W) is the origin of the workpiece coordinate system. Sometimes it is advisable or even necessary to work with negative position specifications. For this reason, positions that are to the left of the zero point are assigned a negative sign ("-"). 1.1.2 Cartesian coordinates The axes in the coordinate system are assigned dimensions. In this way, it is possible to clearly describe every point in the coordinate system and therefore every workpiece position through the direction (X, Y and Z) and three numerical values The workpiece zero always has the coordinates X0, Y0, and Z0. Fundamental geometrical principles 1.1 Workpiece positions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 15 Position specifications in the form of Cartesian coordinates To simplify things, we will only consider one plane of the coordinate system in the following example, the X/Y plane: X+ X- Y+ Y- 100 105 70 50 P1 P2 P3 P4 1 1 5 1 0 0 5 0 7 5 Points P1 to P4 have the following coordinates: Position Coordinates P1 X100 Y50 P2 X-50 Y100 P3 X-105 Y-115 P4 X70 Y-75 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.1 Workpiece positions Fundamentals 16 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example: Workpiece positions for turning With lathes, one plane is sufficient to describe the contour: Z X 7.5 15 25 35 P4 P3 P2 P1 Ø 2 5 Ø 4 0 Ø 6 0 Points P1 to P4 have the following coordinates: Position Coordinates P1 X25 Z-7.5 P2 X40 Z-15 P3 X40 Z-25 P4 X60 Z-35 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.1 Workpiece positions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 17 Example: Workpiece positions for milling For milling, the feed depth must also be described, i.e. the third coordinate (in this case Z) must also be assigned a numerical value. 2 0 4 5 6 0 P3 P3 P2 P2 10 30 5 20 15 P1 P1 45 Y+ Z+ Y+ X+ Points P1 to P3 have the following coordinates: Position Coordinates P1 X10 Y45 Z-5 P2 X30 Y60 Z-20 P3 X45 Y20 Z-15 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.1 Workpiece positions Fundamentals 18 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 1.1.3 Polar coordinates Polar coordinates can be used instead of Cartesian coordinates to describe workpiece positions. This is useful when a workpiece or part of a workpiece has been dimensioned with radius and angle. The point from which the dimensioning starts is called the "pole". Position specifications in the form of polar coordinates Polar coordinates are made up of the polar radius and the polar angle. The polar radius is the distance between the pole and the position. The polar angle is the angle between the polar radius and the horizontal axis of the working plane. Negative polar angles are in the clockwise direction, positive polar angles in the counterclockwise direction. Example Pole X Y P1 P2 30° 75° 15 3 0 6 0 1 0 0 Points P1 and P2 can then be described – with reference to the pole – as follows: Position Polar coordinates P1 RP=100 AP=30 P2 RP=60 AP=75 RP: Polar radius AP: Polar angle Fundamental geometrical principles 1.1 Workpiece positions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 19 1.1.4 Absolute dimensions Position specifications in absolute dimensions With absolute dimensions, all the position specifications refer to the currently valid zero point. Applied to tool movement this means: the position, to which the tool is to travel. Example: Turning Z X 7.5 15 25 35 P4 P3 P2 P1 Ø 2 5 Ø 4 0 Ø 6 0 In absolute dimensions, the following position specifications result for points P1 to P4: Position Position specification in absolute dimensions P1 X25 Z-7.5 P2 X40 Z-15 P3 X40 Z-25 P4 X60 Z-35 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.1 Workpiece positions Fundamentals 20 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example: Milling X Y 70 50 20 P2 P3 P1 6 0 3 5 2 0 In absolute dimensions, the following position specifications result for points P1 to P3: Position Position specification in absolute dimensions P1 X20 Y35 P2 X50 Y60 P3 X70 Y20 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.1 Workpiece positions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 21 1.1.5 Incremental dimension Position specifications in incremental dimensions In production drawings, the dimensions often do not refer to a zero point, but to another workpiece point. So that these dimensions do not have to be converted, they can be specified in incremental dimensions. In this method of dimensional notation, a position specification refers to the previous point. Applied to tool movement this means: The incremental dimensions describe the distance the tool is to travel. Example: Turning Z X 7.5 10 P4 P3 P2 P1 7.5 10 Ø 6 0 Ø 4 0 Ø 2 5 In incremental dimensions, the following position specifications result for points P2 to P4: Position Position specification in incremental dimensions The specification refers to: P2 X15 Z-7.5 P1 P3 Z-10 P2 P4 X20 Z-10 P3 Note With DIAMOF or DIAM90 active, the set distance in incremental dimensions (G91) is programmed as a radius dimension. Fundamental geometrical principles 1.1 Workpiece positions Fundamentals 22 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example: Milling The position specifications for points P1 to P3 in incremental dimensions are: X Y P1 20 20 30 P2 P3 2 0 1 5 2 0 In incremental dimensions, the following position specifications result for points P1 to P3: Position Position specification in incremental dimensions The specification refers to: P1 X20 Y35 Zero point P2 X30 Y20 P1 P3 X20 Y -35 P2 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.2 Working planes Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 23 1.2 1.2 Working planes An NC program must contain information about the plane in which the work is to be performed. Only then can the control unit calculate the correct tool offsets during the execution of the NC program. The specification of the working plane is also relevant for certain types of circular-path programming and polar coordinates. Two coordinate axes define a working plane. The third coordinate axis is perpendicular to this plane and determines the infeed direction of the tool (e.g. for 2D machining). Working planes for turning/milling G 1 9 G 1 7 Y X Z G 1 8 Figure 1-3 Working planes for turning Fundamental geometrical principles 1.2 Working planes Fundamentals 24 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 X Y Z G 1 9 G 1 8 G 1 7 Figure 1-4 Working planes for milling Programming of the working planes The working planes are defined in the NC program with the G commands G17, G18 and G19 as follows: G command Working plane Infeed direction Abscissa Ordinate Applicate G17 X/Y Z X Y Z G18 Z/X Y Z X Y G19 Y/Z X Y Z X Fundamental geometrical principles 1.3 Zero points and reference points Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 25 1.3 1.3 Zero points and reference points Various zero points and reference points are defined on an NC machine: Zero points M Machine zero The machine zero defines the machine coordinate system (MCS). All other reference points refer to the machine zero. W Workpiece zero = program zero The workpiece zero defines the workpiece coordinate system in relation to the machine zero. A Blocking point Can be the same as the workpiece zero (only for lathes). Reference points R Reference point Position defined by output cam and measuring system. The distance to the machine zero M must be known so that the axis position at this point can be set exactly to this value. B Starting point Can be defined by the program. The first machining tool starts here. T Toolholder reference point Is on the toolholder. By entering the tool lengths, the control calculates the distance between the tool tip and the toolholder reference point. N Tool change point Fundamental geometrical principles 1.3 Zero points and reference points Fundamentals 26 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Zero points and reference points for turning Z X R N B W A M Zero points for milling W2 W1 M Y X Fundamental geometrical principles 1.4 Coordinate systems Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 27 1.4 1.4 Coordinate systems A distinction is made between the following coordinate systems: ● Machine coordinate system (MCS) (Page 27) with the machine zero M ● Basic coordinate system (BCS) (Page 31) ● Basic zero system (BZS) (Page 33) ● Settable zero system (SZS) (Page 34) ● Workpiece coordinate system (WCS) (Page 35) with the workpiece zero W 1.4.1 Machine coordinate system (MCS) The machine coordinate system comprises all the physically existing machine axes. Reference points and tool and pallet changing points (fixed machine points) are defined in the machine coordinate system. M Ym Xm Zm If programming is performed directly in the machine coordinate system (possible with some G functions), the physical axes of the machine respond directly. Any workpiece clamping that is present is not taken into account. Fundamental geometrical principles 1.4 Coordinate systems Fundamentals 28 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Note If there are various machine coordinate systems (e.g. 5-axis transformation), then an internal transformation is used to map the machine kinematics on the coordinate system in which the programming is performed. Three-finger rule The orientation of the coordinate system relative to the machine depends on the machine type. The axis directions follow the so-called "three-finger rule" of the right hand (according to DIN 66217). Seen from in front of the machine, the middle finger of the right hand points in the opposite direction to the infeed of the main spindle. Therefore: ● the thumb points in the +X direction ● the index finger points in the +Y direction ● the middle finger points in the +Z direction +X +Y +Z Figure 1-5 "Three-finger rule" Fundamental geometrical principles 1.4 Coordinate systems Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 29 Rotary motions around the coordinate axes X, Y and Z are designated A, B and C. If the rotary motion is in a clockwise direction when looking in the positive direction of the coordinate axis, the direction of rotation is positive: mutually orthogonal axes Rotary axes, rotating around X, Y, Z A, B, C X, Y, Z +C +A +B 90° +X +Z +Y Fundamental geometrical principles 1.4 Coordinate systems Fundamentals 30 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Position of the coordinate system in different machine types The position of the coordinate system resulting from the "three-finger rule" can have a different orientation for different machine types. Here are a few examples: +Z +Y +X +C - C +X +Z -Y +X - Z - B + B +Y +X - Y +C - C +Z - B Fundamental geometrical principles 1.4 Coordinate systems Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 31 1.4.2 Basic coordinate system (BCS) The basic coordinate system (BCS) consists of three mutually perpendicular axes (geometry axes) as well as other special axes, which are not interrelated geometrically. Machine tools without kinematic transformation BCS and MCS always coincide when the BCS can be mapped onto the MCS without kinematic transformation (e.g. 5-axis transformation, TRANSMIT/TRACYL/TRAANG). On such machines, machine axes and geometry axes can have the same names. Machine zero point Machine coordinate system = BCS +Y +Z +X Figure 1-6 MCS = BCS without kinematic transformation Machine tools with kinematic transformation BCS and MCS do not coincide when the BCS is mapped onto the MCS with kinematic transformation (e.g. 5-axis transformation, TRANSMIT/TRACYL/TRAANG). On such machines the machine axes and geometry axes must have different names. Fundamental geometrical principles 1.4 Coordinate systems Fundamentals 32 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 MCS Basic coordinate system (BCS) Machine coordinate system (MCS) Kinematic transformation BCS BCS BCS MCS MCS Y X Z X Z Y Figure 1-7 Kinematic transformation between the MCS and BCS Machine kinematics The workpiece is always programmed in a two or three dimensional, right-angled coordinate system (WCS). However, such workpieces are being programmed ever more frequently on machine tools with rotary axes or linear axes not perpendicular to one another. Kinematic transformation is used to represent coordinates programmed in the workpiece coordinate system (rectangular) in real machine movements. References Function Manual, Extended Functions; Kinematic Transformation (M1) Function Manual, Special Functions; 3-Axis to 5-Axis Transformation (F2) Fundamental geometrical principles 1.4 Coordinate systems Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 33 1.4.3 Basic zero system (BZS) The basic zero system (BZS) is the basic coordinate system with a basic offset. Basic coordinate system (BCS) Basic zero system (BZS) Basic offset +X +Z +Y +X +Y +Z Basic offset The basic offset describes the coordinate transformation between BCS and BZS. It can be used, for example, to define the palette window zero. The basic offset comprises: ● Zero offset external ● DRF offset ● Overlaid movement ● Chained system frames ● Chained basic frames References Function Manual, Basic Functions; Axes, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Fundamental geometrical principles 1.4 Coordinate systems Fundamentals 34 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 1.4.4 Settable zero system (SZS) Settable zero offset The "settable zero system" (SZS) results from the basic zero system (BZS) through the settable zero offset. Settable zero offsets are activated in the NC program with the G commands G54...G57 and G505...G599 as follows: Settable zero system (SZS) Basic zero system (BZS) G54 ... G599 +X +Z +Y +X +Y +Z If no programmable coordinate transformations (frames) are active, then the "settable zero system" is the workpiece coordinate system (WCS). Fundamental geometrical principles 1.4 Coordinate systems Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 35 Programmable coordinate transformations (frames) Sometimes it is useful or necessary within an NC program, to move the originally selected workpiece coordinate system (or the "settable zero system") to another position and, if required, to rotate it, mirror it and/or scale it. This is performed using programmable coordinate transformations (frames). See Section: "Coordinate transformations (frames)" Note Programmable coordinate transformations (frames) always refer to the "settable zero system". 1.4.5 Workpiece coordinate system (WCS) The geometry of a workpiece is described in the workpiece coordinate system (WCS). In other words, the data in the NC program refer to the workpiece coordinate system. The workpiece coordinate system is always a Cartesian coordinate system and assigned to a specific workpiece. Fundamental geometrical principles 1.4 Coordinate systems Fundamentals 36 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 1.4.6 What is the relationship between the various coordinate systems? The example in the following figure should help clarify the relationships between the various coordinate systems: 1 2 3 3 4 4 SZS WCS BZS SZS WCS MCS= BCS Basic offset Workpiece 2 Workpiece 1 Pallet Programmable coordinate transformation Programmable coordinate transformation Settable work offset Settable work offset G54 y x z z z y y x x G55 x y z x y z z y x ① A kinematic transformation is not active, i.e. the machine coordinate system and the basic coordinate system coincide. ② The basic zero system (BZS) with the pallet zero result from the basic offset. ③ The "settable zero system" (SZS) for Workpiece 1 or Workpiece 2 is specified by the settable zero offset G54 or G55. ④ The workpiece coordinate system (WCS) results from programmable coordinate transformation. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 37 Fundamental principles of NC programming 2 Note DIN 66025 is the guideline for NC programming. 2.1 2.1 Name of an NC program Rules for program names Each NC program has a different name; the name can be chosen freely during program creation, taking the following conditions into account: ● The name should not have more than 24 characters as only the first 24 characters of a program name are displayed on the NC. ● Permissible characters are: – Letters: A...Z, a...z – Numbers: 0...9 – Underscores: _ ● The first two characters should be: – Two letters or – An underscore and a letter If this condition is satisfied, then an NC program can be called as subroutine from another program just by specifying the program name. However, if the program name starts with a number then the subroutine call is only possible via the CALL statement. Examples: _MPF100 SHAFT SHAFT_2 Fundamental principles of NC programming 2.1 Name of an NC program Fundamentals 38 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Files in punch tape format Externally created program files that are read into the NC via the RS-232-C must be present in punch tape format. The following additional rules apply for the name of a file in punch tape format: ● The program name must begin with "%": %<Name> ● The program name must have a 3-character identifier: %<Name>_xxx Examples: ● %_N_SHAFT123_MPF ● %Flange3_MPF Note The name of a file stored internally in the NC memory starts with "_N_". References For further information on transferring, creating and storing part programs, please refer to the Operating Manual for your user interface. Fundamental principles of NC programming 2.2 Structure and contents of an NC program Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 39 2.2 2.2 Structure and contents of an NC program 2.2.1 Blocks and block components Blocks An NC program consists of a sequence of NC blocks. Each block contains the data for the execution of a step in the workpiece machining. Block components NC blocks consist of the following components: ● Commands (statements) according to DIN 66025 ● Elements of the NC high-level language Commands according to DIN 66025 The commands according to DIN 66025 consist of an address character and a digit or sequence of digits representing an arithmetic value. Address character (address) The address character (generally a letter) defines the meaning of the command. Examples: Address character Meaning G G function (preparatory function) X Position data for the X axis S Spindle speed Digit sequence The digit sequence is the value assigned to the address character. The sequence of digits can contain a sign and decimal point. The sign always appears between the address letter and the sequence of digits. Positive signs (+) and leading zeroes (0) do not have to be specified. Fundamental principles of NC programming 2.2 Structure and contents of an NC program Fundamentals 40 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 A d d r e s s D i g i t s e q u e n c e Block A d d r e s s A d d r e s s D i g i t s e q u e n c e D i g i t s e q u e n c e X-50 S2000 G01 Elements of the NC high-level language As the command set according to DIN 66025 is no longer adequate for the programming of complex machining sequences in modern machine tools, it has been extended by the elements of the NC high-level language. These include, for example: ● Commands of the NC high-level language In contrast to the commands according to DIN 66025, the commands of the NC high-level language consist of several address letters, e.g. – OVR for speed override – SPOS for spindle positioning ● Identifiers (defined names) for: – System variables – User-defined variables – Subroutine – Keywords – Jump markers – Macros NOTICE An identifier must be unique and cannot be used for different objects. Fundamental principles of NC programming 2.2 Structure and contents of an NC program Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 41 ● Relational operators ● Logic operators ● Arithmetic functions ● Control structures References: Programming Manual, Job Planning; Section: Flexible NC programming Effectiveness of commands Commands are either modal or non-modal: ● Modal Modal commands retain their validity with the programmed value (in all following blocks) until: – A new value is programmed under the same command – A command is programmed that revokes the effect of the previously valid command ● Non-modal Non-modal commands only apply for the block in which they were programmed. End of program The last block in the execution sequence contains a special word for the end of program: M2, M17 or M30. Fundamental principles of NC programming 2.2 Structure and contents of an NC program Fundamentals 42 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 2.2.2 Block rules Start of block NC blocks can be identified at the start of the block by block numbers. These consist of the character "N" and a positive integer, e.g. N40 ... The order of the block numbers is arbitrary, however, block numbers in rising order are recommended. Note Block numbers must be unique within a program in order to achieve an unambiguous result when searching. End of block A block ends with character "LF" (LINE FEED = new line). Note "LF" does not have to be written. It is generated automatically by the line change. Block length A block can contain a maximum of 512 characters (including the comment and end-of-block character "LF"). Note Three blocks of up to 66 characters each are normally displayed in the current block display on the screen. Comments are also displayed. Messages are displayed in a separate message window. Fundamental principles of NC programming 2.2 Structure and contents of an NC program Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 43 Order of the statements In order to keep the block structure as clear as possible, the statements in a block should be arranged in the following order: N… G… X… Y… Z… F… S… T… D… M… H… Address Meaning N Address of block number G Preparatory function X,Y,Z Positional data F Feed S Spindle speed T Tool D Tool offset number M Additional function H Auxiliary function Note Certain addresses can be used repeatedly within a block, e.g. G…, M…, H… 2.2.3 Value assignments Values can be assigned to the addresses. The following rules apply: ● An "=" sign must be inserted between the address and the value if: – The address comprises more than one letter – The value includes more than one constant. The "="-sign can be omitted if the address is a single letter and the value consists of only one constant. ● Signs are permitted. ● Separators are permitted after the address letter. Fundamental principles of NC programming 2.2 Structure and contents of an NC program Fundamentals 44 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Examples: X10 Value assignment (10) to address X, "=" not required X1=10 Value assignment (10) to address (X) with numeric extension (1), "=" required X=10*(5+SIN(37.5)) Value assignment by means of a numeric expression, "=" required Note A numeric extension must always be followed by one of the special characters "=", "(", "[", ")", "]", ",", or an operator, in order to distinguish an address with numeric extension from an address letter with a value. 2.2.4 Comments To make an NC program easier to understand, comments can be added to the NC blocks. A comment is at the end of a block and is separated from the program section of the NC block by a semicolon (";"). Example 1: Program code Comments N10 G1 F100 X10 Y20 ; Comment to explain the NC block Example 2: Program code Comment N10 ; Company G&S, order no. 12A71 N20 ; Program written by H. Smith, Dept. TV 4 ;on November 21, 1994 N50 ; Section no. 12, housing for submersible pump type TP23A Note Comments are stored and appear in the current block display when the program is running. Fundamental principles of NC programming 2.2 Structure and contents of an NC program Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 45 2.2.5 Skipping blocks NC blocks, which are not to be executed in every program pass (e.g. execute a trial program run), can be skipped. Programming Blocks, which are to be skipped are marked with an oblique "/" in front of the block number. Several consecutive blocks can also be skipped. The statements in the skipped blocks are not executed; the program continues with the next block, which is not skipped. /N20 ... N10 ... N30 ... /N40 ... /N50 ... /N60 ... N70 ... N80 ... N90 ... N100 ... N110 ... N120 P r o g r a m e x e c u t i o n Example: Program code Comment N10 ; Is executed /N20 … ; Skipped N30 … ; Is executed /N40 … ; Skipped N70 … ; Is executed Fundamental principles of NC programming 2.2 Structure and contents of an NC program Fundamentals 46 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Skip levels Blocks can be assigned to skip levels (max. 10), which can be activated via the user interface. Programming is performed by assigning a forward slash, followed by the number of the skip level. Only one skip level can be specified for each block. Example: Program code Comment / ... ; Block is skipped (1st skip level) /0 ... ; Block is skipped (1st skip level) /1 N010... ; Block is skipped (2nd skip level) /2 N020... ; Block is skipped (3rd skip level) ... /7 N100... ; Block is skipped (8th skip level) /8 N080... ; Block is skipped (9th skip level) /9 N090... ; Block is skipped (10th skip level) Note The number of skip levels that can be used depends on a display machine data item. Note System and user variables can also be used in conditional jumps in order to control program execution. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 47 Creating an NC program 3 3.1 3.1 Basic procedure The programming of the individual operation steps in the NC language generally represents only a small proportion of the work in the development of an NC program. Programming of the actual instructions should be preceded by the planning and preparation of the operation steps. The more accurately you plan in advance how the NC program is to be structured and organized, the faster and easier it will be to produce a complete program, which is clear and free of errors. Clearly structured programs are especially advantageous when changes have to be made later. As every part is not identical, it does not make sense to create every program in the same way. However, the following procedure has shown itself to be suitable in the most cases. Procedure 1. Prepare the workpiece drawing – Define the workpiece zero – Draw the coordinate system – Calculate any missing coordinates 2. Define the machining sequence – Which tools are used when and for the machining of which contours? – In which order will the individual elements of the workpiece be machined? – Which individual elements are repeated (possibly also rotated) and should be stored in a subroutine? – Are there contour sections in other part programs or subroutines that could be used for the current workpiece? – Where are zero offsets, rotating, mirroring and scaling useful or necessary (frame concept)? Creating an NC program 3.1 Basic procedure Fundamentals 48 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 3. Create a machining plan Define all machining operations step-by-step, e.g. – Rapid traverse movements for positioning – Tool change – Define the machining plane – Retraction for checking – Switch spindle, coolant on/off – Call up tool data – Feed – Path correction – Approaching the contour – Retraction from the contour – etc. 4. Compile machining steps in the programming language – Write each individual step as an NC block (or NC blocks). 5. Combine the individual steps into a program Creating an NC program 3.2 Available characters Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 49 3.2 3.2 Available characters The following characters are available for writing NC programs: ● Upper-case characters: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N,(O),P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z ● Lower-case characters: a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, l, m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v, w, x, y, z ● Numbers: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 ● Special characters: See the table below. Special characters Meaning % Program start character (used only for writing programs on an external PC) ( For bracketing parameters or expressions ) For bracketing parameters or expressions [ For bracketing addresses or indexes ] For bracketing addresses or indexes < Less than > Greater than : Main block, end of label, chain operator = Assignment, part of equation / Division, block suppression * Multiplication + Addition - Subtraction, minus sign " Double quotation marks, identifier for character string ' Single quotation marks, identifier for special numerical values: hexadecimal, binary $ System variable identifiers _ Underscore, belonging to letters ? Reserved ! Reserved . Decimal point , Comma, parameter separator ; Comment start & Format character, same effect as space character LF End of block Tab character Separator Space character Separator (blank) Creating an NC program 3.2 Available characters Fundamentals 50 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 NOTICE Take care to differentiate between the letter "O" and the digit "0". Note No distinction is made between upper and lower-case characters (exception: tool call). Note Non-printable special characters are treated like blanks. Creating an NC program 3.3 Program header Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 51 3.3 3.3 Program header The NC blocks that are placed in front of the actual motion blocks for the machining of the workpiece contour, are called the program header. The program header contains information/statements regarding: ● Tool change ● Tool offsets ● Spindle motion ● Feed control ● Geometry settings (zero offset, selection of the working plane) Program header for turning The following example shows the typical structure of an NC program header for turning: Program code Comment N10 G0 G153 X200 Z500 T0 D0 ; Retract toolholder before tool turret is rotated. N20 T5 ; Swing in tool 5. N30 D1 ; Activate cutting edge data record of the tool. N40 G96 S300 LIMS=3000 M4 M8 ; Constant cutting rate (Vc) = 300 m/min, speed limitation = 3000 rpm, direction of rotation counterclockwise, cooling on. N50 DIAMON ; X axis will be programmed in diameter. N60 G54 G18 G0 X82 Z0.2 ; Call zero offset and working plane, approach starting position. ... Creating an NC program 3.3 Program header Fundamentals 52 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Program header for milling The following example shows the typical structure of an NC program header for milling: Program code Comment N10 T="SF12" ; Alternative: T123 N20 M6 ; Trigger tool change N30 D1 ; Activate cutting edge data record of the tool N40 G54 G17 ; Zero offset and working plane N50 G0 X0 Y0 Z2 S2000 M3 M8 ; Approach to the workpiece, spindle and coolant on ... If tool orientation / coordinate transformation is being used, any transformations still active should be deleted at the start of the program: Program code Comment N10 CYCLE800() ; Resetting of the swiveled plane N20 TRAFOOF ; Resetting of TRAORI, TRANSMIT, TRACYL, ... ... Creating an NC program 3.4 Program examples Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 53 3.4 3.4 Program examples 3.4.1 Example 1: First programming steps Program example 1 is to be used to perform and test the first programming steps on the NC. Procedure 1. Create a new part program (name) 2. Edit the part program 3. Select the part program 4. Activate single block 5. Start the part program References: Operating Manual for the existing user interface Note In order that the program can run on the machine, the machine data must have been set appropriately (→ machine manufacturer!). Note Alarms can occur during program verification. These alarms have to be reset first. Program example 1 Program code Comment N10 MSG("THIS IS MY NC PROGRAM") ; Message "THIS IS MY NC PROGRAM" displayed in the alarm line N20 F200 S900 T1 D2 M3 ; Feedrate, spindle, tool, tool offset, spindle clockwise N30 G0 X100 Y100 ; Approach position in rapid traverse N40 G1 X150 ; Rectangle with feedrate, straight line in X N50 Y120 ; Straight line in Y N60 X100 ; Straight line in X N70 Y100 ; Straight line in Y N80 G0 X0 Y0 ; Retraction in rapid traverse N100 M30 ; End of block Creating an NC program 3.4 Program examples Fundamentals 54 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 3.4.2 Example 2: NC program for turning Program example 2 is intended for the machining of a workpiece on a lathe. It contains radius programming and tool radius compensation. Note In order that the program can run on the machine, the machine data must have been set appropriately (→ machine manufacturer!). Dimension drawing of the workpiece 4 Ø 1 6 Ø 5 0 Ø 3 5 Ø 3 0 62 60 57 40 20 18 15 12 80 70 4 5 ° R3 R3 R3 R8 R10 Z X Figure 3-1 Top view Creating an NC program 3.4 Program examples Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 55 Program example 2 Program code Comment N5 G0 G53 X280 Z380 D0 ; Starting point N10 TRANS X0 Z250 ; Zero offset N15 LIMS=4000 ; Speed limitation (G96) N20 G96 S250 M3 ; Select constant cutting rate N25 G90 T1 D1 M8 ; Select tool selection and offset N30 G0 G42 X-1.5 Z1 ; Set tool with tool radius compensation N35 G1 X0 Z0 F0.25 N40 G3 X16 Z-4 I0 K-10 ; Turn radius 10 N45 G1 Z-12 N50 G2 X22 Z-15 CR=3 ; Turn radius 3 N55 G1 X24 N60 G3 X30 Z-18 I0 K-3 ; Turn radius 3 N65 G1 Z-20 N70 X35 Z-40 N75 Z-57 N80 G2 X41 Z-60 CR=3 ; Turn radius 3 N85 G1 X46 N90 X52 Z-63 N95 G0 G40 G97 X100 Z50 M9 ; Deselect tool radius compensation and approach tool change location N100 T2 D2 ; Call tool and select offset N105 G96 S210 M3 ; Select constant cutting rate N110 G0 G42 X50 Z-60 M8 ; Set tool with tool radius compensation N115 G1 Z-70 F0.12 ; Turn diameter 50 N120 G2 X50 Z-80 I6.245 K-5 ; Turn radius 8 N125 G0 G40 X100 Z50 M9 ; Retract tool and deselect tool radius compensation N130 G0 G53 X280 Z380 D0 M5 ; Approach tool change location N135 M30 ; End of program Creating an NC program 3.4 Program examples Fundamentals 56 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 3.4.3 Example 3: NC program for milling Program example 3 is intended for the machining of a workpiece on a vertical milling machine. It contains surface and side milling as well as drilling. Note In order that the program can run on the machine, the machine data must have been set appropriately (→ machine manufacturer!). Dimension drawing of the workpiece 1 3 . 5 2 0 5 1 0 ෘ 5 ෘ 30 Figure 3-2 Side view Creating an NC program 3.4 Program examples Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 57 8 0 6 0 80 100 45° 10 x 45° R25 R10 Figure 3-3 Top view Program example 3 Program code Comment N10 T="PF60" ; Preselection of the tool with name PF60. N20 M6 ; Load the tool into the spindle. N30 S2000 M3 M8 ; Speed, direction of rotation, cooling on. N40 G90 G64 G54 G17 G0 X-72 Y-72 ; Basic settings of the geometry and approach starting point. N50 G0 Z2 ; Z axis at safety clearance. N60 G450 CFTCP ; Behavior with active G41/G42. N70 G1 Z-10 F3000 ; Milling tool at working depth with feedrate = 3000 mm/min. N80 G1 G41 X-40 ; Activation of the milling tool radius compensation. N90 G1 X-40 Y30 RND=10 F1200 ; Travel to the contour with feedrate = 1200 mm/min. N100 G1 X40 Y30 CHR=10 N110 G1 X40 Y-30 N120 G1 X-41 Y-30 Creating an NC program 3.4 Program examples Fundamentals 58 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Program code Comment N130 G1 G40 Y-72 F3000 ; Deselection of the milling tool radius compensation. N140 G0 Z200 M5 M9 ; Retraction of the milling tool, spindle + cooling off. N150 T="SF10" ; Preselection of the tool with name SF10. N160 M6 ; Load the tool into the spindle. N170 S2800 M3 M8 ; Speed, direction of rotation, cooling on. N180 G90 G64 G54 G17 G0 X0 Y0 ; Basic settings of the geometry and approach starting point. N190 G0 Z2 N200 POCKET4(2,0,1,-5,15,0,0,0,0,0,800,1300,0,21,5,,,2,0.5) ; Call of the pocket milling cycle. N210 G0 Z200 M5 M9 ; Retraction of the milling tool, spindle + cooling off. N220 T="ZB6" ; Call center drill 6 mm. N230 M6 N240 S5000 M3 M8 N250 G90 G60 G54 G17 X25 Y0 ; Exact stop G60 for exact positioning. N260 G0 Z2 N270 MCALL CYCLE82(2,0,1,-2.6,,0) ; Modal call of the drilling cycle. N280 POSITION: ; Jump mark for repetition. N290 HOLES2(0,0,25,0,45,6) ; Position pattern for drilling. N300 ENDLABEL: ; End identifier for repetition. N310 MCALL ; Resetting of the modal call. N320 G0 Z200 M5 M9 N330 T="SPB5" ; Call twist drill D 5 mm. N340 M6 N350 S2600 M3 M8 N360 G90 G60 G54 G17 X25 Y0 N370 MCALL CYCLE82(2,0,1,-13.5,,0) ; Modal call of the drilling cycle. N380 REPEAT POSITION ; Repetition of the position description from centering. N390 MCALL ; Resetting of the drilling cycle N400 G0 Z200 M5 M9 N410 M30 ; End of program. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 59 Tool change 4 Tool change method In chain, rotary-plate and box magazines, a tool change normally takes place in two stages: 1. The tool is sought in the magazine with the T command. 2. The tool is then loaded into the spindle with the M command. In circular magazines on turning machines, the T command carries out the entire tool change, that is, locates and inserts the tool. Note The tool change method is set via a machine data (→ machine manufacturer). Conditions Together with the tool change: ● The tool offset values stored under a D number have to be activated. ● The appropriate working plane has to be programmed (basic setting: G18). This ensures that the tool length compensation is assigned to the correct axis. Tool management (option) The programming of the tool change is performed differently for machines with active tool management (option) than for machines without active tool management. The two options are therefore described separately. Tool change 4.1 Tool change without tool management Fundamentals 60 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 4.1 4.1 Tool change without tool management 4.1.1 Tool change with T command Function There is a direct tool change when the T command is programmed. Application For turning machines with circular magazine. Syntax Tool selection: T<number> T=<number> T<n>=<number> Tool deselection: T0 T0=<number> Meaning T: Command for tool selection including tool change and activation of the tool offset <n>: Spindle number as address extension Note: The possibility of programming a spindle number as address extension depends on the configuration of the machine; → see machine manufacturer's specifications) Number of the tool <number>: Range of values: 0 - 32000 T0: Command for deselection of the active tool Example Program code Comment N10 T1 D1 ; Loading of tool T1 and activation of the tool offset D1. ... N70 T0 ; Deselect tool T1. ... Tool change 4.1 Tool change without tool management Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 61 4.1.2 Tool change with M6 Function The tool is selected when the T command is programmed. The tool only becomes active with M6 (including tool offset). Application For milling machines with chain, rotary-plate or box magazines. Syntax Tool selection: T<number> T=<number> T<n>=<number> Tool change: M6 Tool deselection: T0 T0=<number> Significance T: Command for the tool selection <n>: Spindle number as address extension Note: The possibility of programming a spindle number as address extension depends on the configuration of the machine; → see machine manufacturer's specifications. Number of the tool <number>: Range of values: 0 - 32000 M6: M function for the tool change (according to DIN 66025) M6 activates the selected tool (T…) and the tool offset (D...). T0: Command for deselection of the active tool Tool change 4.1 Tool change without tool management Fundamentals 62 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example Program code Comment N10 T1 M6 ; Loading of tool T1. N20 D1 ; Selection of tool length compensation. N30 G1 X10 ... ; Machining with T1. ... N70 T5 ; Preselection of tool T5. N80 ... ; Machining with T1. ... N100 M6 ; Loading of tool T5. N110 D1 G1 X10 ... ; Machining with tool T5 ... Tool change 4.2 Tool change with tool management (option) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 63 4.2 4.2 Tool change with tool management (option) Tool management The optional "Tool management" function ensures that at any given time the correct tool is in the correct location and that the data assigned to the tool are up to date. It also allows fast tool changes and avoids both scrap by monitoring the tool service life and machine downtimes by using spare tools. Tool name On a machine tool with active tool management, the tools must be assigned a name and number for clear identification (e.g. "Drill", "3"). The tool call can then be via the tool name, e.g. T="Drill" NOTICE The tool name may not contain any special characters. 4.2.1 Tool change with T command with active tool management (option) Function There is a direct tool change when the T command is programmed. Application For turning machines with circular magazine. Syntax Tool selection: T=<location> T=<name> T<n>=<location> T<n>=<name> Tool deselection: T0 Tool change 4.2 Tool change with tool management (option) Fundamentals 64 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Significance Command for tool change and activation of the tool offset The following specifications are possible: <location>: Number of the magazine location T=: <name>: Name of tool Note: The correct notation (upper/lower case) must be observed when programming a tool name. <n>: Spindle number as address extension Note: The possibility of programming a spindle number as address extension depends on the configuration of the machine; → see machine manufacturer's specifications) T0: Command for the tool deselection (magazine location not occupied) Note If the selected magazine location is not occupied in a tool magazine, the command acts as for T0. The selection of the next occupied magazine location can be used to position the empty location. Example A circular magazine has locations 1 to 20 with the following tool assignment: Location Tool Tool group State 1 Drill, duplo no. = 1 T15 Blocked 2 Not occupied 3 Drill, duplo no. = 2 T10 Enabled 4 Drill, duplo no. = 3 T1 Active 5 ... 20 Not occupied Tool change 4.2 Tool change with tool management (option) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 65 1 2 3 4 5 20 The following tool call is programmed in the NC program: N10 T=1 The call is processed as follows: 1. Magazine location 1 is considered and the tool identifier determined. 2. The tool management recognizes that this tool is blocked and therefore cannot be used. 3. A tool search for T="drill" is initiated in accordance with the search method set: "Find the active tool; or else, select the one with the next highest duplo number." 4. The following usable tool is then found: "Drill", duplo no. 3 (at magazine location 4) This completes the tool selection process and the tool change is initiated. Note If the "Select the first available tool from the group" search method is employed, the sequence must first be defined within the tool group being loaded. In this case group T10 is loaded, as T15 is blocked. When the strategy "Take the first tool with "active" status from the group" is applied, T1 is loaded. Tool change 4.2 Tool change with tool management (option) Fundamentals 66 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 4.2.2 Tool change with M6 with active tool management (option) Function The tool is selected when the T command is programmed. The tool only becomes active with M6 (including tool offset). Application For milling machines with chain, rotary-plate or box magazines. Syntax Tool selection: T=<location> T=<name> T<n>=<location> T<n>=<name> Tool change: M6 Tool deselection: T0 Significance Command for the tool selection The following specifications are possible: <location>: Number of the magazine location T=: <name>: Name of tool Note: The correct notation (upper/lower case) must be used when programming a tool name. <n>: Spindle number as address extension Note: The possibility of programming a spindle number as an address extension depends on the configuration of the machine; → see machine manufacturer's specifications. M6: M function for the tool change (according to DIN 66025) M6 activates the selected tool (T…) and the tool offset (D...). T0: Command for tool deselection (magazine location not occupied) Tool change 4.2 Tool change with tool management (option) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 67 Note If the selected magazine location is not occupied in a tool magazine, the command acts as for T0. The selection of the next occupied magazine location can be used to position the empty location. Example Program code Comment N10 T=1 M6 ; Loading of the tool from magazine location 1. N20 D1 ; Selection of tool length compensation. N30 G1 X10 ... ; Machining with tool T=1. ... N70 T="Drill" ; Preselection of the tool with name "Drill". N80 ... ; Machining with tool T=1. ... N100 M6 ; Loading of the drill. N140 D1 G1 X10 ... ; Machining with drill. ... Tool change 4.3 Behavior with faulty T programming Fundamentals 68 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 4.3 4.3 Behavior with faulty T programming The behavior with faulty T programming depends on the configuration of the machine: MD22562 TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE Bit Value Meaning 0 Basic setting! With the T programming, a check is made immediately as to whether the NCK recognizes the T number. If not, an alarm is triggered. 7 1 The programmed T number will only be checked following D selection. If the NCK does not recognize the tool number, an alarm is issued during D selection. This response is desirable if, for example, tool programming is also intended to achieve positioning and the tool data is not necessarily available (circular magazine). Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 69 Tool offsets 5 5.1 5.1 General information about the tool offsets Workpiece dimensions are programmed directly (e.g. according to the production drawing). Therefore, tool data such as milling tool diameter, cutting edge position of the turning tool (counterclockwise/clockwise turning tool) and tool length does not have to be taken into consideration when creating the program. The control corrects the travel path When machining a workpiece, the tool paths are controlled according to the tool geometry such that the programmed contour can be machined using any tool. In order that the control can calculate the tool paths, the tool data must be entered in the tool compensation memory of the control. Only the required tool (T...) and the required offset data record (D...) are called via the NC program. While the program is being processed, the control fetches the offset data it requires from the tool compensation memory and corrects the tool path individually for different tools: Programmed contour Corrected tool path Tool offsets 5.2 Tool length compensation Fundamentals 70 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 5.2 5.2 Tool length compensation The tool length compensation compensates for the differences in length between the tools used. The tool length is the distance between the toolholder reference point and the tool tip: F F F F This length is measured and entered in the tool compensation memory of the control together with definable wear values. From this data, the control calculates the traversing movements in the infeed direction. Note The offset value for the tool length is dependent upon the spatial orientation of the tool. Tool offsets 5.3 Tool radius compensation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 71 5.3 5.3 Tool radius compensation The contour and tool path are not identical. The milling tool or cutting edge center must travel along a path that is equidistant from the contour. To do this, the control requires data about the tool form (radius) from the tool compensation memory. Depending on the radius and the machining direction, the programmed tool center point path is offset during the program processing in such a way that the tool edge travels exactly along the programmed contour: Equidistant Equidistant NOTICE Tool radius compensation is applied according to the default CUT2D or CUT2DF (see " 2D tool compensation (CUT2D, CUT2DF) (Page 344) "). References The various options for the tool radius compensation are described in detail in Section "Tool radius compensations". Tool offsets 5.4 Tool compensation memory Fundamentals 72 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 5.4 5.4 Tool compensation memory The following data must be available in the tool compensation memory of the control for each tool edge: ● Tool type ● Cutting edge position ● Tool geometry variables (length, radius) This data is entered as tool parameters (max. 25). Which parameters are required for a tool depends on the tool type. Any tool parameters that are not required must be set to "zero" (corresponds to the default setting of the system). NOTICE Values that have been entered once in the compensation memory are included in the processing at each tool call. Tool type The tool type (drill, milling or turning tool) determines which geometry data is necessary and how this is taken into account. Cutting edge position The cutting edge position describes the position of the tool tip P in relation to the cutting edge center point S. The cutting edge position is required together with the cutting edge radius for the calculation of the tool radius compensation for turning tools (tool type 5xx). Tool offsets 5.4 Tool compensation memory Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 73 L 1 L2 F P S R P = tool tip S = cutting edge center point R = radius Tool geometry variables (length, radius) F Radius L e n g t h The tool geometry variables consist of several components (geometry, wear). The control computes the components to a certain dimension (e.g. overall length 1, total radius). The respective overall dimension becomes effective when the compensation memory is activated. How these values are calculated in the axes is determined by the tool type and the current plane (G17/G18/G19). References Function Manual, Basic Functions; Tool Offsets (W1); Section "Tool edge" Tool offsets 5.5 Tool types Fundamentals 74 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 5.5 5.5 Tool types 5.5.1 General information about the tool types Tools are divided into tool types. Each tool type is assigned a 3-digit number. The first digit assigns the tool type to one of the following groups depending on the technology used: Tool type Tool group 1xy Milling tools 2xy Drills 3xy Reserved 4xy Grinding tools 5xy Turning tools 6xy Reserved 7xy Special tools such as a slotting saw Tool offsets 5.5 Tool types Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 75 5.5.2 Milling tools The following tool types are available in the "Milling tools" group: 100 Milling tool according to CLDATA (Cutter Location Data) 110 Ballhead cutter (cylindrical die milling tool) 111 Ballhead cutter (tapered die milling tool) 120 End mill (without corner rounding) 121 End mill (with corner rounding) 130 Angle head cutter (without corner rounding) 131 Angle head cutter (with corner rounding) 140 Facing tool 145 Thread cutter 150 Side mill 151 Saw 155 Bevel cutter (without corner rounding) 156 Bevel cutter (with corner rounding) 157 Tapered die milling tool 160 Drill and thread milling cutter Tool parameters The following figures provide an overview of which tool parameters (DP...) for milling tools are entered in the compensation memory: F F' DP3 DP6 DP21 DP1 1xy Entries in tool parameters Geometry length 1 Geometry radius Adapter length Wear values as required Set remaining values to 0 G17: G18: G19: Length 1 in Z Radius in X/Y Length 1 in Y Radius in Z/X Length 1 in X Radius in Y/Z F´-Toolholder reference point F-Reference point adapter (with tool inserted=toolholder reference point) Effect Length 1 Length 1 Total Length 1 Adapter A fixed assignment is possible for G17, G18, G19 e.g. length1=X, length2=Z, length3=Y (see /FB1/W1 Tool compens.) Tool offsets 5.5 Tool types Fundamentals 76 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 DP1 DP6 DP3 DP21 DP22 DP23 1xy F' F X Y Z Z Y Y Z X X Wear values acc. to requirements Set remaining values to 0 Effect G17: G18: G19: Length 1 in Y Length 2 in X Length 3 in Z Radius/TRC in Z/X Length 1 in X Length 2 in Z Length 3 in Y Radius/TRC in Y/Z Length 1 in Z Length 2 in Y Length 3 in X Radius/TRC in X/Y Entries in tool parameters Tool base dimension length 3 Tool base dimension length 2 T o o l b a s e d i m e n s i o n l e n g t h 1 F´- Toolholder reference point F - Toolholder reference point Radius A fixed assignment is possible for G17, G18, G19 e.g. length 1=X, length 2=Y, length 3=Z (see /FB1/W1 Tool compensation) Base length 1 Base length 2 Base length 3 Geometry length 1 Geometry radius Note Brief description of the tool parameters can be found on the user interface. For further information, see: References: Function Manual, Basic Functions; Tool Offset (W1) Tool offsets 5.5 Tool types Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 77 5.5.3 Drills The following tool types are available in the "Drills" group: 200 Twist drill 205 Drill 210 Boring bar 220 Center drill 230 Countersink 231 Counterbore 240 Tap regular thread 241 Tap fine thread 242 Tap Whitworth thread 250 Reamer Tool parameters The following figure provides an overview of which tool parameters (DP...) for drills are entered in the compensation memory: F DP1 DP3 2xy Entries in tool parameters Length 1 Wear values as required Set remaining values to 0 G17: Length 25.40 mm Z Length 1 in Y Length 25.40 mm X G18: G19: F - Toolholder reference point Length 1 Effect Note Brief description of the tool parameters can be found on the user interface. For further information, see: References: Function Manual, Basic Functions; Tool Offset (W1) Tool offsets 5.5 Tool types Fundamentals 78 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 5.5.4 Grinding tools The following tool types are available in the "Grinding tools" group: 400 Surface grinding wheel 401 Surface grinding wheel with monitoring 402 Surface grinding wheel without monitoring without base dimension (TOOLMAN) 403 Surface grinding wheel with monitoring without base dimension for grinding wheel peripheral speed GWPS 410 Facing wheel 411 Facing wheel (TOOLMAN) with monitoring 412 Facing wheel (TOOLMAN) without monitoring 413 Facing wheel with monitoring without base dimension for grinding wheel peripheral speed GWPS 490 Dresser Tool parameters The following figure provides an overview of which tool parameters (DP...) for grinding tools are entered in the compensation memory: Entries in the tool parameters Length 1 Length 2 Radius Spindle number Chaining rule Minimum wheel radius Min. wheel width Actual wheel width Maximum speed Angle of the inclined wheel Parameter No. for radius calculation Wear values correspond to the requirement Other values should be set to 0 Effect Length 1 in Y Length 2 in X Radius in X/Y Length 1 in X Length 2 in Z Radius in Z/X Length 1 in Z Length 2 in Y Radius in Y/Z F: Tool carrier reference point Radius Geometry Length 2 Basis length 2 B a s i s L e n g t h 1 G e o m e t r y L e n g t h 1 Position * * Tool nose position Max. peripheral speed F' F DP1 DP3 DP4 DP6 TPG1 TPG2 TPG4 TPG5 TPG6 TPG7 TPG8 TPG3 TPG9 DP2 G17: G18: G19: 403 ෰ Tool offsets 5.5 Tool types Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 79 Note Brief description of the tool parameters can be found on the user interface. For further information, see: References: Function Manual, Basic Functions; Tool Offset (W1) Tool offsets 5.5 Tool types Fundamentals 80 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 5.5.5 Turning tools The following tool types are available in the "Turning tools" group: 500 Roughing tool 510 Finishing tool 520 Plunge cutter 530 Parting tool 540 Threading tool 550 Button tool/forming tool (TOOLMAN) 560 Rotary drill (ECOCUT) 580 Probe with cutting edge position parameters Tool parameters The following figures provide an overview of which tool parameters (DP...) for turning tools are entered in the compensation memory: Z X F R S P Turning tool e.g. G18: Z/X plane F - Toolholder reference point Length 2 (Z) Tool tip P (tool edge 1 = Dn) L e n g t h 1 ( X ) S - position of tool nose center R - radius of tool nose (tool radius) Tool offsets 5.5 Tool types Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 81 Z X 1 2 4 5 P Z X 7 6 8 9 P=S 3 DP1 DP2 DP3 DP4 DP6 5xy 1...9 Entries in tool parameters Length 1 Length 2 Radius Effect G17: G18: G19: Length 1 in Y Length 2 in X Length 1 in X Length 2 in Z Length 1 in Z Length 2 in Y Wear values as required Set remaining values to 0 The tool parameter DP2 specifies the length of the tool nose. Position value 1 to 9 possible. Tool nose position DP2 Note: Parameters length 1, length 2 refer to the point with tool nose position 1-8; but to S (S=P) with 9 Note Brief description of the tool parameters can be found on the user interface. For further information, see: References: Function Manual, Basic Functions; Tool Offset (W1) Tool offsets 5.5 Tool types Fundamentals 82 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 5.5.6 Special tools The following tool types are available in the "Special tools" group: 700 Slotting saw 710 3D probe 711 Edge probe 730 Stop Tool parameters The following figure provides an overview of which tool parameters (DP...) for "Slotting saw" tool type are entered in the compensation memory: Entries in tool parameters DP3 Base length 1 DP4 Base length 2 DP6 Geometry diameter DP7 Geometry zero width DP8 Geometry overshoot Wear values as required Set remaining values to 0 Effect Slot width b Tool base dimension Length 2 Excess dim. k T o o l b a s e d i m e n s i o n L e n g t h 1 D i a m e t e r d G17: Half diameter (L1) in X Plane selection Excess dim. in (L2) Y 1st-2nd axis (X-Y) Saw blade in (R) X/Y G18: Half diameter (L1) in Y Plane selection Excess dim. in (L2) X 1st-2nd axis (X-Z) Saw blade in (R) Z/X G19: Half diameter (L1) in Z Plane selection Excess dim. in (L2) Z 1st-2nd axis (Y-Z) Saw blade in (R) Y/Z Note Brief description of the tool parameters can be found on the user interface. For further information, see: References: Function Manual, Basic Functions; Tool Offset (W1) Tool offsets 5.5 Tool types Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 83 5.5.7 Chaining rule The geometry tool length compensations, wear and base dimension can be chained for both the left and the right tool nose radius compensation, i.e. if the tool length compensations are changed for the left cutting edge, then the values are also automatically entered for the right cutting edge and vice versa. References Function Manual, Extended Functions; Grinding (W4) Tool offsets 5.6 Tool offset call (D) Fundamentals 84 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 5.6 5.6 Tool offset call (D) Function Cutting edges 1 to 8 (with active TOOLMAN 12) of a tool can be assigned different tool offset data records (e.g. different offset values for the left and right cutting edge of a grooving tool). Activation of the offset data (including the data for the tool length compensation) of a special cutting edge is performed by calling the D number. When D0 is programmed, offsets for the tool have no effect. A tool radius compensation must also be activated via G41/G42. Note Tool length offsets take immediate effect when the D number is programmed. If no D number is programmed, the default setting defined via the machine data is active for a tool change (→ see machine manufacturer's specifications). Syntax Activation of a tool offset data record: D<number> Activate the tool radius compensation: G41 ... G42 ... Deactivation of the tool offsets: D0 G40 Significance D: Command for the activation of an offset data record for the active tool The tool length compensation is applied with the first programmed traverse of the associated length compensation axis. Notice: A tool length compensation can also take effect without D programming, when the automatic activation of a tool edge has been configured for the tool change (→ see machine manufacturer's specifications). Tool offsets 5.6 Tool offset call (D) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 85 The tool offset data record to be activated is specified via the <number> parameter. The type of D programming depends on the configuration of the machine (see paragraph "Type of D programming"). <number>: Range of values: 0 - 32,000 D0: Command for the deactivation of the offset data record for the active tool G41: Command for the activation of the tool radius compensation with machining direction left of the contour G42: Command for the activation of the tool radius compensation with machining direction right of the contour G40: Command for the deactivation of the tool radius compensation Note The tool radius compensation is described in detail in the section "Tool radius compensation" section. Type of D programming The type of D programming is defined via machine data. This can be done as follows: ● D number = cutting edge number D numbers ranging from 1 to max. 12 are available for every tool T<number> or T="Name" (with TOOLMAN). These D numbers are assigned directly to the tool cutting edges. A compensation data record ($TC_DPx[t,d]) belongs to each D number (= cutting edge number). ● Free selection of D numbers The D numbers can be freely assigned to the cutting edge numbers of a tool. The upper limit for the D numbers that can be used is limited by a machine data. ● Absolute D number without reference to the T number Independence between D number and T number can be selected in systems without tool management. The reference of T number, cutting edge and offset by the D number is defined by the user. The range of D numbers is between 1 and 32000. References: Function Manual, Basic Functions; Tool Offset (W1), Function Manual, Tool Management, Chapter: "Variants of D-number assignments" Tool offsets 5.6 Tool offset call (D) Fundamentals 86 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Examples Example 1: Tool change with T command (turning) Program code Comment N10 T1 D1 ; Load tool T1 and activate tool offset data record D1 of T1. N11 G0 X... Z... ; The tool length compensations are applied. N50 T4 D2 ; Load tool T4 and activate tool offset data record D2 of T4. ... N70 G0 Z... D1 ; Activate other cutting edge D1 for tool T4. Example 2: Different offset values for the left and right cutting edge of a grooving tool N40... D6 Z-5 N30 G1 D1 X10 Z X N20 G0 N10 T2 X35 Z-20 -5 -20 10 Tool offsets 5.7 Change in the tool offset data Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 87 5.7 5.7 Change in the tool offset data Effectiveness A change in the tool offset data takes effect the next time the T or D number is programmed. Set tool offset data to be active immediately The following machine data can be used to specify that entered tool offset data takes effect immediately: MD9440 $MM_ACTIVATE_SEL_USER DANGER If MD9440 is set, tool offsets resulting from changes in tool offset data during the part program stop, are applied when the part program is continued. Tool offsets 5.8 Programmable tool offset (TOFFL, TOFF, TOFFR) Fundamentals 88 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 5.8 5.8 Programmable tool offset (TOFFL, TOFF, TOFFR) Function The user can use the commands TOFFL/TOFF and TOFFR to modify the effective tool length or the effective tool radius in the NC program, without changing the tool offset data stored in the compensation memory. These programmed offsets are deleted again at the end of the program. Tool length offset Depending on the type of programming, programmed tool length offsets are assigned either to the tool length components L1, L2 and L3 (TOFFL) stored in the compensation memory or to the geometry axes (TOFF). The programmed offsets are treated accordingly for a plane change (G17/G18/G19 ↔ G17/G18/G19): ● If the offset values are assigned to the tool length components, the directions in which the programmed offsets apply, are replaced accordingly. ● If the offset values are assigned to the geometry axes, a plane change does not effect the assignment in relation to the coordinate axes. Tool radius offset The command TOFFR is available for the programming of a tool radius offset. Syntax Tool length offset: TOFFL=<value> TOFFL[1]=<value> TOFFL[2]=<value> TOFFL[3]=<value> TOFF[<geometry axis>]=<value> Tool radius offset: TOFFR=<value> Tool offsets 5.8 Programmable tool offset (TOFFL, TOFF, TOFFR) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 89 Significance TOFFL: Command for the compensation of the effective tool length TOFFL can be programmed with or without index: • Without index: TOFFL= The programmed offset value is applied in the same direction as the tool length component L1 stored in the compensation memory. • With index: TOFFL[1]=, TOFFL[2]= or TOFFL[3]= The programmed offset value is applied in the same direction as the tool length component L1, L2 or L3 stored in the offset memory. The commands TOFFL and TOFFL[1] have an identical effect. Note: How these tool length offset values are calculated in the axes is determined by the tool type and the current working plane (G17/G18/G19). TOFF: Command for the compensation of the tool length in the component parallel to the specified geometry axis TOFF is applied in the direction of the tool length component, which is effective with non-rotated tool (orientable toolholder or orientation transformation) parallel to the <geometry axis> specified in the index. Note: A frame does not influence the assignment of the programmed values to the tool length components, i.e. the workpiece coordinate system (WCS) is not used for the assignment of the tool length components to the geometry axes, but the tool in the basic tool position. <geometry axis> Identifier of the geometry axis TOFFR: Command for the compensation of the effective tool radius TOFFR changes the effective tool radius with active tool radius compensation by the programmed offset value. Offset value for the tool length or radius <value>: Type: REAL Tool offsets 5.8 Programmable tool offset (TOFFL, TOFF, TOFFR) Fundamentals 90 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Note The TOFFR command has almost the same effect as the OFFN command (see "Tool radius compensation (Page 301)"). There is only a difference with active peripheral curve transformation (TRACYL) and active slot side compensation. In this case, the tool radius is affected by OFFN with a negative sign, but by TOFFR with a positive sign. OFFN and TOFFR can be effective simultaneously. They then generally have an additive effect (except for slot side compensation). Further syntax rules ● The tool length can be changed simultaneously in all three components. However, commands of the TOFFL/TOFFL[1..3] group and commands of the TOFF[<geometry axis>] may not be used simultaneously in one block. TOFFL and TOFFL[1] may also not be written simultaneously in one block. ● If all three tool length components are not programmed in a block, the components not programmed remain unchanged. In this way, it is possible to build up offsets for several components block-by-block. However, this only applies as long as the tool components have been modified either only with TOFFL or only with TOFF. Changing the programming type from TOFFL to TOFF or vice versa deletes any previously programmed tool length offsets (see example 3). Tool offsets 5.8 Programmable tool offset (TOFFL, TOFF, TOFFR) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 91 Supplementary conditions ● Evaluation of setting data The following setting data is evaluated when assigning the programmed offset values to the tool length components: SD42940 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST (change of tool length components on change of planes). SD42950 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE (assignment of the tool length compensation independent of tool type) If this setting data has valid values not equal to 0, then these take preference over the contents of G code group 6 (plane selection G17 - G19) or the tool type ($TC_DP1[<T no.>, <D no.>]) contained in the tool data, i.e. this setting data influences the evaluation of the offsets in the same way as the tool length components L1 to L3. ● Tool change All offset values are retained during a tool change (cutting edge change), e.g. they are also effective for the new tool (new cutting edge). Examples Example 1: Positive tool length offset The active tool is a drill with length L1 = 100 mm. The active plane is G17, i.e. the drill points in the Z direction. The effective drill length is to be increased by 1 mm. The following variants are available for the programming of this tool length offset: TOFFL=1 or TOFFL[1]=1 or TOFF[Z]=1 Tool offsets 5.8 Programmable tool offset (TOFFL, TOFF, TOFFR) Fundamentals 92 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example 2: Negative tool length offset The active tool is a drill with length L1 = 100 mm. The active plane is G18, i.e. the drill points in the Y direction. The effective drill length is to be decreased by 1 mm. The following variants are available for the programming of this tool length offset: TOFFL=-1 or TOFFL[1]=-1 or TOFF[Y]=1 Example 3: Changing the programming type from TOFFL to TOFF The active tool is a milling tool. The active plane is G17. Program code Comment N10 TOFFL[1]=3 TOFFL[3]=5 ; Effective offsets: L1=3, L2=0, L3=5 N20 TOFFL[2]=4 ; Effective offsets: L1=3, L2=4, L3=5 N30 TOFF[Z]=1.3 ; Effective offsets: L1=0, L2=0, L3=1.3 Example 4: Plane change Program code Comment N10 $TC_DP1[1,1]=120 N20 $TC_DP3[1,1]= 100 ; Tool change L1=100mm N30 T1 D1 G17 N40 TOFF[Z]=1.0 ; Offset in Z direction (corresponds to L1 for G17). N50 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 ; Machine axis position X0 Y0 Z101 N60 G18 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 ; Machine axis position X0 Y100 Z1 N70 G17 N80 TOFFL=1.0 ; Offset in L1 direction (corresponds to Z for G17). N90 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 ; Machine axis position X0 Y0 Z101. N100 G18 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 ; Machine axis position X0 Y101 Z0. In this example, the offset of 1 mm in the Z axis is retained when changing to G18 in block N60; the effective tool length in the Y axis is the unchanged tool length of 100 mm. However, in block N100, the offset is effective in the Y axis when changing to G18 as it was assigned to tool length L1 in the programming and this length component is effective in the Y axis with G18. Tool offsets 5.8 Programmable tool offset (TOFFL, TOFF, TOFFR) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 93 Further information Applications The "Programmable tool offset" function is especially interesting for ball mills and milling tools with corner radii as these are often calculated in the CAM system to the ball center instead of the ball tip. However, generally the tool tip is measured when measuring the tool and stored as tool length in the compensation memory. System variables for reading the current offset values The currently effective offsets can be read with the following system variables: System variables Meaning $P_TOFFL [<n>] with 0 ≤ n ≤ 3 Reads the current offset value of TOFFL (for n = 0) or TOFFL[1...3] (for n = 1, 2, 3) in the preprocessing context. $P_TOFF [<geometry axis>] Reads the current offset value of TOFF[<geometry axis>] in the preprocessing context. $P_TOFFR Reads the current offset value of TOFFR in the preprocessing context. $AC_TOFFL[<n>] with 0 ≤ n ≤ 3 Reads the current offset value of TOFFL (for n = 0) or TOFFL[1...3] (for n = 1, 2, 3) in the main run context (synchronized actions). $AC_TOFF[<geometry axis>] Reads the current offset value of TOFF[<geometry axis>] in the main run context (synchronized actions). $AC_TOFFR Reads the current offset value of TOFFR in the main run context (synchronized actions). Note The system variables $AC_TOFFL, $AC_TOFF and AC_TOFFR trigger an automatic preprocessing stop when reading from the preprocessing context (NC program). Tool offsets 5.8 Programmable tool offset (TOFFL, TOFF, TOFFR) Fundamentals 94 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 95 Spindle motion 6 6.1 6.1 Spindle speed (S), direction of spindle rotation (M3, M4, M5) Function The spindle speed and direction of rotation values set the spindle in rotary motion and provide the conditions for chip removal. Z X X X Figure 6-1 Spindle motion during turning Other spindles may be available in addition to the main spindle (e.g. the counterspindle or an actuated tool on turning machines). As a rule, the main spindle is declared the master spindle in the machine data. This assignment can be changed using an NC command. Spindle motion 6.1 Spindle speed (S), direction of spindle rotation (M3, M4, M5) Fundamentals 96 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Syntax S... / S<n>=... M3 / M<n>=3 M4 / M<n>=4 M5 / M<n>=5 SETMS(<n>) ... SETMS Significance S… : Spindle speed in rpm for the master spindle S<n>=... : Spindle speed in rpm for spindle <n> Note: The speed specified with S0=… applies to the master spindle. M3: Direction of spindle rotation clockwise for master spindle M<n>=3: Spindle direction of rotation CW for spindle <n> M4: Direction of spindle rotation counterclockwise for master spindle M<n>=4: Spindle direction of rotation CCW for spindle <n> M5: Spindle stop for master spindle M<n>=5: Spindle stop for spindle <n> SETMS(<n>): Set spindle <n> as master spindle SETMS: If SETMS is programmed without a spindle name, the configured master spindle is used instead. Note Up to three S-values can be programmed per NC block, e.g.: S... S2=... S3=... Note SETMS must be in a separate block. Spindle motion 6.1 Spindle speed (S), direction of spindle rotation (M3, M4, M5) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 97 Example S1 is the master spindle, S2 is the second spindle. The part is to be machined from two sides. To do this, it is necessary to divide the operations into steps. After the cut-off point, the synchronizing device (S2) takes over machining of the workpiece after the cut off. To do this, this spindle S2 is defined as the master spindle to which G95 then applies. S1 S2 Program code Comment N10 S300 M3 ; Speed and direction of rotation for drive spindle = preset master spindle ... ; Machining of the right-hand workpiece side N100 SETMS(2) ; S2 is now the master spindle N110 S400 G95 F… ; Speed for new master spindle ... ; Machining of the left-hand workpiece side N160 SETMS ; Switching back to master spindle S1 Spindle motion 6.1 Spindle speed (S), direction of spindle rotation (M3, M4, M5) Fundamentals 98 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information Interpretation of the S-value for the master spindle If function G331 or G332 is active in G function group 1 (modally valid motion commands), the programmed S-value will always be interpreted as the speed in rpm. Otherwise, the interpretation of the S-value will depend upon G function group 15 (feedrate type): If G96, G961 or G962 is active, the S-value is interpreted as a constant cutting rate in m/min; otherwise, it is interpreted as a speed in rpm. Changing from G96/G961/G962 to G331/G332 sets the value of the constant cutting rate to zero; changing from G331/G332 to a function within the G function group other than G331/G332 sets the speed value to zero. The corresponding S-values have to be reprogrammed if required. Preset M commands M3, M4, M5 In a block with axis commands, functions M3, M4, M5 are activated before the axis movements commence (basic setting on the control). Example: Program code Comment N10 G1 F500 X70 Y20 S270 M3 ; The spindle ramps up to 270 rpm, then the movements are executed in X and Y. N100 G0 Z150 M5 ; Spindle stop before the retraction movement in Z. Note Machine data can be used to set when axis movements should be executed; either once the spindle has powered up to the setpoint speed, or immediately after the programmed switching operations have been traversed. Spindle motion 6.1 Spindle speed (S), direction of spindle rotation (M3, M4, M5) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 99 Working with multiple spindles 5 spindles (master spindle plus 4 additional spindles) can be available in one channel at the same time. One of the spindles is defined in machine data as the master spindle. Special functions such as thread cutting, tapping, revolutional feedrate, and dwell time apply to this spindle. For the remaining spindles (e.g. a second spindle and an actuated tool) the numbers corresponding to the speed and the direction of rotation/spindle stop must be specified. Example: Program code Comment N10 S300 M3 S2=780 M2=4 ; Master spindle: 300 rpm, CW rotation 2nd spindle: 780 rpm, CCW rotation Programmable switchover of master spindle The SETMS(<n>) command can be used in the NC program to define any spindle as the master spindle. SETMS must be in a separate block. Example: Program code Comment N10 SETMS (2) ; Spindle 2 is now the master spindle. Note The speed specified with S..., along with the functions programmed with M3, M4, M5, now apply to the newly declared master spindle. If SETMS is programmed without a spindle name, the master spindle programmed in the machine data is used instead. Spindle motion 6.2 Cutting rate (SVC) Fundamentals 100 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 6.2 6.2 Cutting rate (SVC) Function As an alternative to the spindle speed, the tool cutting rate, which is more commonly used in practice, can be programmed for milling operations. Speed Tool radius Cutting rate The control uses the radius of the active tool to calculate the effective spindle speed from the programmed tool cutting rate: S = (SVC * 1000) / (RT * 2π) S: Spindle speed in rpm SVC: Cutting rate in m/min or feet/min where: RT: Radius of the active tool in mm The tool type ($TC_DP1) of the active tool is not taken into account. The programmed cutting rate is independent of the path feedrate F and G function group 15. The direction of rotation and the spindle start are programmed using M3 and M4 respectively and the spindle stop using M5. A change to the tool radius data in the offset memory will be applied the next time a tool offset is selected or the next time the active offset data is updated. Changing the tool or selecting/deselecting a tool offset data record generates a recalculation of the effective spindle speed. Spindle motion 6.2 Cutting rate (SVC) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 101 Conditions The programming of the cutting speed requires: ● the geometric ratios of a rotating tool (milling cutter or drilling tool) ● An active tool offset data record Syntax SVC[<n>]=<value> Note In the block with SVC, the tool radius must be known; in other words, a corresponding tool including a tool offset data record must be active or selected in the block. There is no fixed sequence for SVC and T/D selection during programming in the same block. Significance Cutting rate [<n>]: Number of spindle This address extension specifies which spindle the programmed cutting rate is to be applied for. In the absence of an address extension, the rate is always applied to the master spindle. Note: A separate cutting rate can be preset for each spindle. Note: Programming SVC without an address extension requires that the master spindle has the active tool. If the master spindle changes, the user will need to select a tool accordingly. SVC: Unit: m/min or ft/min (dependent upon G700/G710) Spindle motion 6.2 Cutting rate (SVC) Fundamentals 102 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Note Changing between SVC and S Changing between SVC and S programming is possible at will, even while the spindle is turning. In each case, the value that is not active is deleted. Note Maximum tool speed System variable $TC_TP_MAX_VELO[<tool number>] can be used to preset a maximum tool speed (spindle speed). If no speed limit has been defined, there will be no monitoring. Note SVC programming is not possible if the following are active: • G96/G961/G962 • GWPS • SPOS/SPOSA/M19 • M70 Conversely, programming one of these commands will lead to the deselection of SVC. Note The tool paths of "standard tools" generated e.g. using CAD systems which already take the tool radius into account and only contain the deviation from the standard tool in the tool nose radius are not supported in conjunction with SVC programming. Spindle motion 6.2 Cutting rate (SVC) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 103 Examples The following shall apply to all examples: Toolholder = spindle (for standard milling) Example 1: Milling cutter 6 mm radius Program code Comment N10 G0 X10 T1 D1 ; Selection of milling cutter with e.g. $TC_DP6[1,1] = 6 (tool radius = 6 mm) N20 SVC=100 M3 ; Cutting rate = 100 m/min ⇒ Resulting spindle speed: S = (100 m/min * 1,000) / (6.0 mm * 2 * 3.14) = 2653.93 rpm N30 G1 X50 G95 FZ=0.03 ; SVC and tooth feedrate ... Example 2: Tool selection and SVC in the same block Program code Comment N10 G0 X20 N20 T1 D1 SVC=100 ; Tool and offset data record selection together with SVC in block (no specific sequence) N30 X30 M3 ; Spindle start with CW direction of rotation, cutting rate 100 m/min N40 G1 X20 F0.3 G95 ; SVC and revolutional feedrate Example 3: Defining cutting rates for two spindles Program code Comment N10 SVC[3]=100 M6 T1 D1 N20 SVC[5]=200 ; The tool radius of the active tool offset is the same for both spindles. The effective speed is different for spindle 3 and spindle 5. Spindle motion 6.2 Cutting rate (SVC) Fundamentals 104 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example 4: Assumptions: Master or tool change is determined by the toolholder. MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER > 1 In the event of a tool change the old tool offset is retained. A tool offset for the new tool is only activated when D is programmed: MD20270 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = - 2 Program code Comment N10 $TC_MPP1[9998,1]=2 ; Magazine location is toolholder N11 $TC_MPP5[9998,1]=1 ; Magazine location is toolholder 1 N12 $TC_MPP_SP[9998,1]=3 ; Toolholder 1 is assigned to spindle 3 N20 $TC_MPP1[9998,2]=2 ; Magazine location is toolholder N21 $TC_MPP5[9998,2]=4 ; Magazine location is toolholder 4 N22 $TC_MPP_SP[9998,2]=6 ; Toolholder 4 is assigned to spindle 6 N30 $TC_TP2[2]="WZ2" N31 $TC_DP6[2,1]=5.0 ; Radius = 5.0 mm of T2, offset D1 N40 $TC_TP2[8]="WZ8" N41 $TC_DP6[8,1]=9.0 ; Radius = 9.0 mm of T8, offset D1 N42 $TC_DP6[8,4]=7.0 ; Radius = 7.0 mm of T8, offset D4 ... N100 SETMTH(1) ; Set master toolholder number N110 T="WZ2" M6 D1 ; Tool T2 is loaded and offset D1 is activated. N120 G1 G94 F1000 M3=3 SVC=100 ; S3 = (100 m/min * 1,000) / (5.0 mm * 2 * 3.14) = 3184.71 rpm N130 SETMTH(4) ; Set master toolholder number N140 T="WZ8" ; Corresponds to T8="WZ8" N150 M6 ; Corresponds to M4=6 Tool "WZ8" is in the master toolholder, but because MD20270=–2, the old tool offset remains active. N160 SVC=50 ; S3 = (50 m/min * 1,000) / (5.0 mm * 2 * 3.14) = 1592.36 rpm The offset applied to toolholder 1 is still active and toolholder 1 is assigned to spindle 3. N170 D4 Offset D4 of the new tool "WZ8" becomes active (in toolholder 4). N180 SVC=300 ; S6 = (300 m/min * 1,000) / (7.0 mm * 2 * 3.14) = 6824.39 rpm Spindle 6 is assigned to toolholder 4. Spindle motion 6.2 Cutting rate (SVC) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 105 Example 5: Assumptions: Spindles are toolholders at the same time: MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 0 In the event of a tool change tool offset data record D4 is selected automatically. MD20270 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = 4 Program code Comment N10 $TC_MPP1[9998,1]=2 ; Magazine location is toolholder N11 $TC_MPP5[9998,1]=1 ; Magazine location is toolholder 1 = spindle 1 N20 $TC_MPP1[9998,2]=2 ; Magazine location is toolholder N21 $TC_MPP5[9998,2]=3 ; Magazine location is toolholder 3 = spindle 3 N30 $TC_TP2[2]="WZ2" N31 $TC_DP6[2,1]=5.0 ; Radius = 5.0 mm of T2, offset D1 N40 $TC_TP2[8]="WZ8" N41 $TC_DP6[8,1]=9.0 ; Radius = 9.0 mm of T8, offset D1 N42 $TC_DP6[8,4]=7.0 ; Radius = 7.0 mm of T8, offset D4 ... N100 SETMS(1) ; Spindle 1 = master spindle N110 T="WZ2" M6 D1 ; Tool T2 is loaded and offset D1 is activated. N120 G1 G94 F1000 M3 SVC=100 ; S1 = (100 m/min * 1,000) / (5.0 mm * 2 * 3.14) = 3184.71 rpm N200 SETMS(3) ; Spindle 3 = master spindle N210 M4 SVC=150 ; S3 = (150 m/min * 1,000) / (5.0 mm * 2 * 3.14) = 4777.07 rpm Refers to tool offset D1 of T="WZ2", S1 continues to turn at previous speed. N220 T="WZ8" ; Corresponds to T8="WZ8" N230 M4 SVC=200 ; S3 = (200 m/min * 1,000) / (5.0 mm * 2 * 3.14) = 6369.43 rpm Refers to tool offset D1 of T="WZ2". N240 M6 ; Corresponds to M3=6 Tool "WZ8" is in the master spindle, tool offset D4 of the new tool becomes active. N250 SVC=50 ; S3 = (50 m/min * 1,000) / (7.0 mm * 2 * 3.14) = 1137.40 rpm Offset D4 on master spindle is active. N260 D1 ; Offset D1 of new tool "WZ8" active. N270 SVC[1]=300 ; S1 = (300 m/min * 1,000) / (9.0 mm * 2 * 3.14) = 5307.86 rpm S3 = (50 m/min * 1,000) / (9.0 mm * 2 * 3.14) = 884.64 rpm ... Spindle motion 6.2 Cutting rate (SVC) Fundamentals 106 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information Tool radius The following tool offset data (associated with the active tool) affect the tool radius when: ● $TC_DP6 (radius - geometry) ● $TC_DP15 (radius - wear) ● $TC_SCPx6 (offset for $TC_DP6) ● $TC_ECPx6 (offset for $TC_DP6) The following are not taken into account: ● Online radius compensation ● Allowance on the programmed contour (OFFN) Tool radius compensation (G41/G42) Although tool radius compensation (G41/G42) and SVC both refer to the tool radius, with regard to function, they are not linked and are independent of one another. Tapping without compensating chuck (G331, G332) SVC programming is also possible in conjunction with G331 or G332. Synchronized actions SVC cannot be programmed from synchronized actions. Spindle motion 6.2 Cutting rate (SVC) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 107 Reading the cutting rate and the spindle speed programming variant The cutting rate of a spindle and the speed programming variant (spindle speed S or cutting rate SVC) can be read using system variables: ● With preprocessing stop in the part program via system variables: $AC_SVC[<n>] Cutting rate applied when the current main run record for spindle number <n> was preprocessed. Spindle speed programming variant applied when the current main run record for spindle number <n> was preprocessed. Value: Significance: 1 Spindle speed S in rpm $AC_S_TYPE[<n>] 2 Cutting rate SVC in m/min or ft/min ● Without preprocessing stop in the part program via system variables: $P_SVC[<n>] Programmed cutting rate for spindle <n> Programmed spindle speed programming variant for spindle <n> Value: Significance: 1 Spindle speed S in rpm $P_S_TYPE[<n>] 2 Cutting rate SVC in m/min or ft/min Spindle motion 6.3 Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) Fundamentals 108 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 6.3 6.3 Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) Function When the "Constant cutting rate" function is active, the spindle speed is modified as a function of the respective workpiece diameter so that the cutting rate S in m/min or ft/min remains constant at the tool edge. Spindle speed reduced Cutting rate constant Spindle speed increased This results in the following advantages: ● Uniformity and consequently improved surface quality of turned parts ● Machining process is kinder to tools Syntax Activating/Deactivating constant cutting rate for the master spindle: G96/G961/G962 S... ... G97/G971/G972/G973 Speed limitation for the master spindle: LIMS=<value> LIMS[<spindle>]=<value> Other reference axis for G96/G961/G962: SCC[<axis>] Spindle motion 6.3 Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 109 Note SCC[<axis>] can be programmed together with G96/G961/G962 or in isolation. Significance G96: Constant cutting rate with feedrate type G95: ON G95 is activated automatically with G96. If G95 has not been activated previously, a new feedrate value F... will have to be specified when G96 is called. G961: Constant cutting rate with feedrate type G94: ON Constant cutting rate with feedrate type G94 or G95: ON G962: Note: See " Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) (Page 119)" for information about G94 and G95. In conjunction with G96, G961 or G962, S... is not interpreted as a spindle speed but as a cutting rate. The cutting rate is always applied to the master spindle. Unit: m/min (for G71/G710) or feet/min (for G70/G700) S... : Range of values: 0.1 m/min to 9999 9999.9 m/min G97: Deactivate constant cutting rate with feedrate type G95 After G97 (or G971), S... is again interpreted as a spindle speed in rpm. In the absence of a new spindle speed being specified, the last speed set with G96 (or G961) is retained. G971: Deactivate constant cutting rate with feedrate type G94 G972: Deactivate constant cutting rate with feedrate type G94 or G95 G973: Deactivate constant cutting rate without activating spindle speed limitation Spindle motion 6.3 Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) Fundamentals 110 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Speed limitation for the master spindle (only applied if G96/G961/G97 active) On machines with selectable master spindles, limitations of differing values can be programmed for up to four spindles within one block. <spindle>: Number of spindle LIMS: <value>: Spindle speed upper limit in rpm SCC: If any of the G96/G961/G962 functions are active, SCC[<axis>] can be used to assign any geometry axis as a reference axis. Note When G96/G961/G962 is selected for the first time, a constant cutting rate S... must be entered; when G96/G961/G962 is selected again, the entry is optional. Note The speed limitation programmed with LIMS must not exceed the speed limit programmed with G26 or defined in the setting data. Note The reference axis for G96/G961/G962 must be a geometry axis assigned to the channel at the time when SCC[<axis>] is programmed. SCC[<axis>] can also be programmed when any of the G96/G961/G962 functions are active. Examples Example 1: Activating the constant cutting rate with speed limitation Program code Comment N10 SETMS (3) N20 G96 S100 LIMS=2500 ; Constant cutting rate = 100 m/min, max. speed 2,500 rpm ... N60 G96 G90 X0 Z10 F8 S100 LIMS=444 ; Max. speed = 444 rpm Spindle motion 6.3 Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 111 Example 2: Defining speed limitation for 4 spindles Speed limitations are defined for spindle 1 (master spindle) and spindles 2, 3, and 4: Program code N10 LIMS=300 LIMS[2]=450 LIMS[3]=800 LIMS[4]=1500 ... Example 3: Y-axis assignment for face cutting with X axis Program code Comment N10 G18 LIMS=3000 T1 D1 ; Speed limitation to 3,000 rpm N20 G0 X100 Z200 N30 Z100 N40 G96 S20 M3 ; Constant cutting rate = 20 m/min, is dependent upon X axis. N50 G0 X80 N60 G1 F1.2 X34 ; Face cutting in X at 1.2 mm/revolution. N70 G0 G94 X100 N80 Z80 N100 T2 D1 N110 G96 S40 SCC[Y] ; Y axis is assigned to G96 and G96 is activated (can be achieved in a single block). Constant cutting rate = 40 m/min, is dependent upon X axis. ... N140 Y30 N150 G01 F1.2 Y=27 ; Grooving in Y, feedrate F = 1.2 mm/revolution. N160 G97 ; Constant cutting rate off. N170 G0 Y100 Spindle motion 6.3 Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) Fundamentals 112 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information Calculation of the spindle speed The ENS position of the face axis (radius) is the basis for calculating the spindle speed from the programmed cutting rate. Note Frames between WCS and SZS (e.g. programmable frames such as SCALE, TRANS or ROT) are taken into account in the calculation of the spindle speed and can bring about a change in speed (for example, if there is a change in the effective diameter in the case of SCALE). Speed limitation LIMS If a workpiece that varies greatly in diameter needs to be machined, it is advisable to specify a speed limit for the spindle with LIMS (maximum spindle speed). This prevents excessively high speeds with small diameters. LIMS is only applied when G96, G961, and G97 are active. LIMS is not applied when G971is selected. LlMS Note On loading the block into the main run, all programmed values are transferred into the setting data. Spindle motion 6.3 Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 113 Deactivating the constant cutting rate (G97/G971/G973) After G97/G971, the control interprets an S value as a spindle speed in rpm again. If you do not specify a new spindle speed, the last speed set with G96/G961 is retained. The G96/G961 function can also be deactivated with G94 or G95. In this case, the last speed programmed S... is used for subsequent machining operations. G97 can be programmed without G96 beforehand. The function then has the same effect as G95; LIMS can also be programmed. Using G973, the constant cutting rate can be deactivated without activating a spindle speed limitation. Note The transverse axis must be defined in machine data. Rapid traverse G0 With rapid traverse G0, there is no change in speed. Exception: If the contour is approached in rapid traverse and the next NC block contains a G1/G2/G3/etc. path command, the speed is adjusted in the G0approach block for the next path command. Other reference axis for G96/G961/G962 If any of the G96/G961/G962 functions are active, SCC[<axis>] can be used to assign any geometry axis as a reference axis. If the reference axis changes, which will in turn affect the TCP (tool center point) reference position for the constant cutting rate, the resulting spindle speed will be reached via the set braking or acceleration ramp. Axis replacement of the assigned channel axis The reference axis property for G96/G961/G962 is always assigned to a geometry axis. In the event of an axis exchange involving the assigned channel axis, the reference axis property for G96/G961/G962 is retained in the old channel. A geometry axis exchange will not affect how the geometry axis is assigned to the constant cutting rate. If the TCP reference position for G96/G961/G962 is affected by a geometry axis exchange, the spindle will reach the new speed via a ramp. Spindle motion 6.3 Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) Fundamentals 114 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 If no new channel axis is assigned as a result of a geometry axis exchange (e.g. GEOAX(0,X)), the spindle speed will be frozen in accordance with G97. Examples for geometry axis exchange with assignments of the reference axis: Program code Comment N05 G95 F0.1 N10 GEOAX(1, X1) ; Channel axis X1 becomes first geometry axis. N20 SCC[X] ; First geometry axis (X) becomes reference axis for G96/G961/G962. N30 GEOAX(1, X2) ; Channel axis X2 becomes first geometry axis. N40 G96 M3 S20 ; Reference axis for G96 is channel axis X2. Program code Comment N05 G95 F0.1 N10 GEOAX(1, X1) ; Channel axis X1 becomes first geometry axis. N20 SCC[X1] ; X1 and implicitly the first geometry axis (X) becomes the reference axis for G96/G961/G962. N30 GEOAX(1, X2) ; Channel axis X2 becomes first geometry axis. N40 G96 M3 S20 ; Reference axis for G96 is X2 or X, no alarm. Program code Comment N05 G95 F0.1 N10 GEOAX(1, X2) ; Channel axis X2 becomes first geometry axis. N20 SCC[X1] ; X1 is not a geometry axis, alarm. Program code Comment N05 G0 Z50 N10 X35 Y30 N15 SCC[X] ; Reference axis for G96/G961/G962 is X. N20 G96 M3 S20 ; Constant cutting rate ON at 10 mm/min. N25 G1 F1.5 X20 ; Face cutting in X at 1.5 mm/revolution. N30 G0 Z51 N35 SCC[Y] ; Reference axis for G96 is Y, reduction in spindle speed (Y30). N40 G1 F1.2 Y25 ; Face cutting in Y at 1.2 mm/revolution. References: Function Manual, Basic Functions; Transverse Axes (P1) and Feedrates (V1) Spindle motion 6.4 Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPSON, GWPSOF) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 115 6.4 6.4 Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPSON, GWPSOF) Function The "Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPS)" function is used to set the grinding wheel speed so that, taking account of the current radius, the grinding wheel peripheral speed remains constant. Syntax GWPSON(<t no.>) GWPSOF(<t no.>) S.../S<n>=... Significance GWPSON: Select constant grinding wheel peripheral speed GWPSOF: Deselect constant grinding wheel peripheral speed <t no.>: It is only necessary to specify the T number if the tool with this T number is not active. S…: Peripheral speed in m/s or ft/s for the master spindle S<n>=… : Peripheral speed in m/s or ft/s for spindle <n> Note: The peripheral speed specified with S0=… applies to the master spindle. Note A grinding wheel peripheral speed can only be programmed for grinding tools (types 400 to 499). Spindle motion 6.4 Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPSON, GWPSOF) Fundamentals 116 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example A constant grinding wheel peripheral speed is to be used for grinding tools T1 and T5. T1 is the active tool. Program code Comment N20 T1 D1 ; Select T1 and D1. N25 S1=1000 M1=3 ; 1000 rpm for spindle 1 N30 S2=1500 M2=3 ; 1500 rpm for spindle 2 … N40 GWPSON ; Selection of GWPS for active tool. N45 S1=60 ; Set GWPS to 60 m/s for active tool. … N50 GWPSON(5) ; GWPS selection for tool 5 (spindle 2). N55 S2=40 ; Set GWPS to 40 m/s for spindle 2. … N60 GWPSOF ; Deactivate GWPS for active tool. N65 GWPSOF(5) ; Deactivate GWPS for tool 5 (spindle 2). Further information Tool-specific parameters In order to activate the function "Constant peripheral speed", the tool-specific grinding data $TC_TPG1, $TC_TPG8 and $TC_TPG9 must be set accordingly. When the GWPS function is active, even online offset values (= wear parameters; cf. "Grinding-specific tool monitoring in the parts program TMON, TMOF" or PUTFTOC, PUTFTOCF) must be taken into account when changing speed. Select GWPS: GWPSON, programming GWPS After selecting the GWPS with GWPSON, each subsequent S value for this spindle is interpreted as a grinding wheel peripheral speed. Selection of grinding wheel peripheral speed with GWPSON does not cause the automatic activation of tool length compensation or tool monitoring. The GWPS can be active for several spindles on a channel with different tool numbers. If GWPS is to be selected for a new tool on a spindle where GWPS is already active, the active GWPS must first be deselected with GWPSOF. Spindle motion 6.4 Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPSON, GWPSOF) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 117 Deactivate GWPS: GWPSOF When GWPS is deselected with GWPSOF, the last speed to be calculated remains valid as the setpoint. GWPS programming is reset at the end of the parts program or on RESET. Query active GWPS: $P_GWPS[<spindle no.>] This system variable can be used to query from the parts program whether the GWPS is active for a specific spindle. TRUE: GWPS is active. FALSE: GWPS is inactive. Spindle motion 6.5 Programmable spindle speed limitation (G25, G26) Fundamentals 118 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 6.5 6.5 Programmable spindle speed limitation (G25, G26) Function The minimum and maximum spindle speeds defined in the machine and setting data can be modified by means of a part program command. Programmed spindle speed limitations are possible for all spindles of the channel. CAUTION A spindle speed limitation programmed with G25 or G26 overwrites the speed limits in the setting data and, therefore, remains stored even after the end of the program. Syntax G25 S… S1=… S2=… G26 S… S1=… S2=… Significance G25: Lower spindle speed limit G26: Upper spindle speed limit Minimum or maximum spindle speed(s) Note: A maximum of three spindle speed limits can be programmed for each block. S... S1=… S2=… : Range of values: 0.1 to 9999 9999.9 rpm Example Program code Comment N10 G26 S1400 S2=350 S3=600 ; Upper speed limit for master spindle, spindle 2 and spindle 3. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 119 Feed control 7 7.1 7.1 Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) Function These commands are used in the NC program to set the feedrates for all axes involved in the machining sequence. Syntax G93/G94/G95 F... FGROUP(<axis1>,<axis2>, etc.) FGREF[<rotary axis>]=<reference radius> FL[<axis>]=<value> Significance G93: Inverse-time feedrate (in rpm) G94: Linear feedrate (in mm/min, inch/min or °/min) G95: Revolutional feedrate (in mm/revolution or inch/revolution) G95 refers to the revolutions of the master spindle (usually the cutting spindle or the main spindle on the turning machine) F... : Feedrate of the geometry axes involved in the movement The unit set with G93/G94/G95 applies. FGROUP: The feedrate programmed under F is valid for all axes specified under FGROUP (geometry axes/rotary axes). FGREF: FGREF is used to program the effective radius (<reference radius>) for each of the rotary axes specified under FGROUP. Limit velocity for synchronized/path axes The unit set with G94 applies. One FL value can be programmed per axis (channel axes, geometry axis or orientation axis). FL: <axis>: The axis identifiers of the basic coordinate system should be used (channel axes, geometry axes). Feed control 7.1 Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) Fundamentals 120 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Examples Example 1: Mode of operation of FGROUP The following example is intended to demonstrate the effect of FGROUP on the path and path feedrate. The variable $AC_TIME contains the time of the block start in seconds. It can only be used in synchronized actions. Program code Comment N100 G0 X0 A0 N110 FGROUP(X,A) N120 G91 G1 G710 F100 ; Feedrate = 100 mm/min or 100 degrees/min N130 DO $R1=$AC_TIME N140 X10 ; Feedrate = 100 mm/min, path = 10 mm, R1 = approx. 6 s N150 DO $R2=$AC_TIME N160 X10 A10 ; Feedrate = 100 mm/min, path = 14.14 mm, R2 = approx. 8 s N170 DO $R3=$AC_TIME N180 A10 ; Feedrate = 100 degrees/min, path = 10 degrees, R3 = approx. 6 s N190 DO $R4=$AC_TIME N200 X0.001 A10 ; Feedrate = 100 mm/min, path = 10 mm, R4 = approx. 6 s N210 G700 F100 ; Feedrate = 2540 mm/min or 100 degrees/min N220 DO $R5=$AC_TIME N230 X10 ; Feedrate = 2540 mm/min, path = 254 mm, R5 = approx. 6 s N240 DO $R6=$AC_TIME N250 X10 A10 ; Feedrate = 2540 mm/min, path = 254.2 mm, R6 = approx. 6 s N260 DO $R7=$AC_TIME N270 A10 ; Feedrate = 100 degrees/min, path = 10 degrees, R7 = approx. 6 s N280 DO $R8=$AC_TIME N290 X0.001 A10 ; Feedrate = 2540 mm/min, path = 10 mm, R8 = approx. 0.288 s N300 FGREF[A]=360/(2*$PI) ; Set 1 degree = 1 inch via the effective radius. N310 DO $R9=$AC_TIME N320 X0.001 A10 ; Feedrate = 2540 mm/min, path = 254 mm, R9 = approx. 6 s N330 M30 Example 2: Traverse synchronized axes with limit velocity FL The path velocity of the path axes is reduced if the synchronized axis Z reaches the limit velocity. Program code N10 G0 X0 Y0 N20 FGROUP(X) N30 G1 X1000 Y1000 G94 F1000 FL[Y]=500 N40 Z-50 Feed control 7.1 Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 121 Example 3: Helical interpolation Path axes X and Y traverse with the programmed feedrate, the infeed axis Z is a synchronized axis. X Y Z Y 10 25 15 2 0 Program code Comment N10 G17 G94 G1 Z0 F500 ; Feed of the tool. N20 X10 Y20 ; Approach of the starting position N25 FGROUP(X,Y) ; Axes X/Y are path axes, Z is a synchronized axis. N30 G2 X10 Y20 Z-15 I15 J0 F1000 FL[Z]=200 ; On the circular path, the feedrate is 1,000 mm/min, traversing in the Z direction is synchronized. ... N100 FL[Z]=$MA_AX_VELO_LIMIT[0,Z] ; The limit speed is deselected by reading the speed from the MD. Read the value from the MD. N110 M30 ; End of program. Feed control 7.1 Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) Fundamentals 122 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information Feedrate for path axes (F) The path feedrate is generally composed of the individual speed components of all geometry axes participating in the movement and refers to the center point of the cutter or the tip of the turning tool. X Y F Movement on Y Movement on X The feedrate is specified under address F. Depending on the default setting in the machine data, the units of measurement specified with the G commands are either in mm or inch. One F value can be programmed per NC block. The feedrate unit is defined using one of the G commands G93/G94/G95. The feedrate F acts only on path axes and remains active until a new feedrate is programmed. Separators are permitted after the address F. Examples: F100 or F 100 F.5 F=2*FEED Feedrate type (G93/G94/G95) The G commands G93, G94 and G95 are modal. In the event of switching between G93, G94 and G95, the path feedrate value has to be reprogrammed. When machining with rotary axes, the feedrate can also be specified in degrees/min. Feed control 7.1 Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 123 Inverse-time feedrate (G93) The inverse-time feedrate specifies the time required to execute the motion commands in a block. Unit: rpm Example: N10 G93 G01 X100 F2 Significance: the programmed path is traversed in 0.5 min. 0.5 min X Y G93 X... F2 Note If the path lengths vary greatly from block to block, a new F value should be specified in each block with G93. When machining with rotary axes, the feedrate can also be specified in degrees/min. Feedrate for synchronized axes The feedrate programmed under address F applies to all the path axes programmed in a block but not to the synchronized axes. The synchronized axes are controlled such that they require the same time for their path as the path axes, and all axes reach their end point at the same time. Limit velocity for synchronized axes (FL) The FL command can be used to program a limit velocity for synchronized axes. In the absence of a programmed FL, the rapid traverse velocity applies. FL is deselected by assignment to MD (MD36200 $MA_AX_VELO_LIMIT). Feed control 7.1 Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) Fundamentals 124 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Traverse path axis as synchronized axis (FGROUP) FGROUP is used to define whether a path axis should be traversed with path feedrate or as a synchronized axis. In helical interpolation, for example, it is possible to define that only two geometry axes, X and Y, are to be traversed at the programmed feedrate. The infeed axis Z is the synchronized axis in this case. Example: FGROUP(X,Y) Change FGROUP The setting made with FGROUP can be changed: 1. By reprogramming FGROUP: e.g. FGROUP(X,Y,Z) 2. By programming FGROUP without a specific axis: FGROUP() In accordance with FGROUP(), the initial setting in the machine data applies: Geometry axes are now once again traversed in the path axis grouping. Note With FGROUP, axis identifiers must be the names of channel axes. Units of measurement for feedrate F In addition to the geometrical settings G700 and G710, the G commands are also used to define the measuring system for the feedrates F. In other words: ● For G700: [inch/min] ● For G710: [mm/min] Note G70/G71 have no effect on feedrate settings. Unit of measurement for synchronized axes with limit speed FL The unit set for F using G command G700/G710 is also valid for FL. Feed control 7.1 Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 125 Unit for rotary and linear axes For linear and rotary axes which are combined with FGROUP and traverse a path together, the feedrate is interpreted in the unit of the linear axes (depending on the default with G94/G95, in mm/min or inch/min and mm/rev or inch/rev). The tangential velocity of the rotary axis in mm/min or inch/min is calculated according to the following formula: F[mm/min] = F'[degrees/min] * π * D[mm]/360[degrees] F: Tangential velocity F': Angular velocity π: Circle constant where: D: Diameter D F F' Feed control 7.1 Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) Fundamentals 126 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Traverse rotary axes with path velocity F (FGREF) For machining operations, in which the tool or the workpiece or both are moved by a rotary axis, the effective machining feedrate is to be interpreted as a path feed in the usual way by reference to the F value. This requires the specification of an effective radius (reference radius) for each of the rotary axes involved. The unit of the reference radius depends on the G70/G71/G700/G710 setting. All axes involved must be included in the FGROUP command to be taken into account in the calculation of the path feedrate. In order to ensure compatibility with the behavior with no FGREF programming, the factor 1 degree = 1 mm is activated on system power up and RESET. This corresponds to a reference radius of FGREF= 360 mm/(2π) = 57.296 mm. Note This default is independent of the active basic system (MD10240 $MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC) and the currently active G70/G71/G700/G710 setting. Special situations: Program code N100 FGROUP(X,Y,Z,A) N110 G1 G91 A10 F100 N120 G1 G91 A10 X0.0001 F100 With this type of programming, the F value programmed in N110 is evaluated as the rotary axis feedrate in degrees/min, while the feedrate evaluation in N120 is either 100 inch/min or 100 mm/min, dependent upon the currently active G70/G71/G700/G710 setting. CAUTION FGREF evaluation also works if only rotary axes are programmed in the block. The normal F value interpretation as degree/min applies in this case only if the radius reference corresponds to the FGREF default: • For G71/G710: FGREF[A]=57.296 • For G70/G700: FGREF[A]=57.296/25.4 Feed control 7.1 Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 127 Read reference radius The value of the reference radius of a rotary axis can be read using system variables: ● In synchronized actions or with preprocessing stop in the part program via system variable: $AA_FGREF[<axis>] Current main run value ● Without preprocessing stop in the part program via system variable: $PA_FGREF[<axis>] Programmed value If no values are programmed, the default 360 mm/(2π) = 57.296 mm (corresponding to 1 mm per degree) will be read in both variables. For linear axes, the value in both variables is always 1 mm. Read path axes affecting velocity The axes involved in path interpolation can be read using system variables: ● In synchronized actions or with preprocessing stop in the part program via system variables: $AA_FGROUP[<axis>] Returns the value "1" if the specified axis affects the path velocity in the current main run record by means of the basic setting or through FGROUP programming. Otherwise, the variable returns the value "0". $AC_FGROUP_MASK Returns a bit key of the channel axes programmed with FGROUP which are to affect the path velocity. ● Without preprocessing stop in the part program via system variables: $PA_FGROUP[<axis>] Returns the value "1" if the specified axis affects the path velocity by means of the basic setting or through FGROUP programming. Otherwise, the variable returns the value "0". $P_FGROUP_MASK Returns a bit key of the channel axes programmed with FGROUP which are to affect the path velocity. Feed control 7.1 Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) Fundamentals 128 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Path reference factors for orientation axes with FGREF With orientation axes the mode of operation of the FGREF[] factors is dependent upon whether the change in the orientation of the tool is implemented by means of rotary axis or vector interpolation. In the case of rotary axis interpolation, as is the case with rotary axes, the relevant FGREF factors of the orientation axes are calculated individually as reference radius for the axis paths. In the case of vector interpolation, an effective FGREF factor, which is calculated as the geometric mean value of the individual FGREF factors, is applied. FGREF[effective] = nth root of [(FGREF[A] * FGREF[B]...)] A: Axis identifier of 1st orientation axis B: Axis identifier of 2nd orientation axis C: Axis identifier of 3rd orientation axis where: n: Number of orientation axes Example: Since there are two orientation axes for a standard 5-axis transformation, the effective factor is, therefore, the root of the product of the two axial factors: FGREF[effective] = square root of [(FGREF[A] * FGREF[B])] Note It is, therefore, possible to use the effective factor for orientation axes FGREF to define a reference point on the tool to which the programmed path feedrate refers. Feed control 7.2 Traversing positioning axes (POS, POSA, POSP, FA, WAITP, WAITMC) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 129 7.2 7.2 Traversing positioning axes (POS, POSA, POSP, FA, WAITP, WAITMC) Function Positioning axes are traversed independently of the path axes at a separate, axis-specific feedrate. There are no interpolation commands. The POS/POSA/POSP commands are used to traverse the positioning axes and coordinate the motion sequences at the same time. The following are typical examples of positioning axes: ● Pallet feed equipment ● Gauging stations WAITP can be used to identify a position in the NC program where the program is to wait until an axis programmed with POSA in a previous NC block reaches its end position. WAITMC loads the next NC block immediately when the specified wait marker is received. Syntax POS[<axis>]=<position> POSA[<axis>]=<position> POSP[<axis>]=(<end position>,<partial length>,<mode>) FA[<axis>]=<value> WAITP(<axis>) ; Programming in a separate NC block. WAITMC(<wait marker>) Feed control 7.2 Traversing positioning axes (POS, POSA, POSP, FA, WAITP, WAITMC) Fundamentals 130 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Significance Move positioning axis to specified position POS and POSA have the same functionality but differ in their block change behavior: • POS delays the enabling of the NC block until the position has been reached. • POSA enables the NC block even if the position has not been reached. <axis>: Name of the axis to be traversed (channel or geometry axis identifier) Axis position to be approached POS/POSA: <position>: Type: REAL Move positioning axis to specified end position in sections <end position>: Axis end position to be approached <partial length>: Length of a section Approach mode = 0: For the last two sections, the path remaining until the end position is split into two residual sections of equal size (preset). <mode>: = 1: The partial length is adjusted so that the total of all calculated partial lengths corresponds exactly to the path up to the end position. POSP: Note: POSP is used specifically to program oscillating motion. References: Programming Manual, Job Planning; Chapter "Oscillation" Feedrate for the specified positioning axis <axis>: Name of the axis to be traversed (channel or geometry axis identifier) Feedrate <value>: Unit: mm/min or inch/min or deg/min FA: Note: Up to 5 FA values can be programmed for each NC block. Feed control 7.2 Traversing positioning axes (POS, POSA, POSP, FA, WAITP, WAITMC) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 131 Wait for a positioning axis to be traversed The subsequent blocks are not processed until the specified positioning axis programmed in a previous NC block with POSA has reached its end position (with exact stop fine). <axis>: Name of the axis (channel or geometry axis identifier) for which the WAITP command is to be applied WAITP: Note: With WAITP, an axis can be made available as an oscillating axis or for traversing as a concurrent positioning axis (via PLC). WAITMC: Wait for the specified wait marker to be received When the wait marker is received, the next NC block is loaded immediately. <wait marker>: Number of the wait marker CAUTION Travel with POSA If a command, which implicitly causes a preprocessing stop, is read in a following block, this block is not executed until all other blocks, which are already preprocessed and stored have been executed. The previous block is stopped in exact stop (as G9). Feed control 7.2 Traversing positioning axes (POS, POSA, POSP, FA, WAITP, WAITMC) Fundamentals 132 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Examples Example 1: Travel with POSA and access to machine status data The control generates an internal preprocessing stop on access to machine status data ($A...). Machining is stopped until all preprocessed and saved blocks have been executed in full. Program code Comment N40 POSA[X]=100 N50 IF $AA_IM[X]==R100 GOTOF LABEL1 ; Access to machine status data. N60 G0 Y100 N70 WAITP(X) N80 LABEL1: N... Example 2: Wait for end of travel with WAITP Pallet feed equipment Axis U: Pallet store Transport of workpiece pallet to working area Axis V: Transfer line to a gauging station where spot checks are carried out to assist the process Program code Comment N10 FA[U]=100 FA[V]=100 ; Axis-specific feedrate specifications for the individual positioning axes U and V N20 POSA[V]=90 POSA[U]=100 G0 X50 Y70 ; Traverse positioning and path axes N50 WAITP(U) ; Program execution does not resume until axis U reaches the end point programmed in N20. … Feed control 7.2 Traversing positioning axes (POS, POSA, POSP, FA, WAITP, WAITMC) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 133 Further information Travel with POSA Block step enable or program execution is not affected by POSA. The movement to the end position can be performed during execution of subsequent NC blocks. Travel with POS The next block is not executed until all axes programmed under POS reach their end positions. Wait for end of travel with WAITP After a WAITP, assignment of the axis to the NC program is no longer valid; this applies until the axis is programmed again. This axis can then be operated as a positioning axis through the PLC, or as a reciprocating axis from the NC program/PLC or HMI. Block change in the braking ramp with IPOBRKA and WAITMC An axis is only decelerated if the wait marker has not yet been reached or if another end-of- block criterion is preventing the block change. After a WAITMC, the axis starts immediately if no other end-of-block criterion is preventing the block change. Feed control 7.3 Position-controlled spindle operation (SPCON, SPCOF) Fundamentals 134 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 7.3 7.3 Position-controlled spindle operation (SPCON, SPCOF) Function Position-controlled spindle mode may be advisable in some cases, e.g. in conjunction with large-pitch thread cutting with G33, where better quality can be achieved. The SPCON NC command is used to switch over to position-controlled spindle mode. Note SPCON requires a maximum of 3 interpolation cycles. Syntax SPCON/SPCON(<n>)/SPCON(<n>,<m>, etc.) ... SPCOF/SPCOF(<n>)/SPCOF(<n>,<m>, etc.) Significance SPCON: Activate position-controlled mode The specified spindle is switched over from speed control to position control. SPCON s modal and is retained until SPCOF. SPCOF: Deactivate position-controlled mode The specified spindle is switched over from position control to speed control. <n>: Number of the spindle to be switched over. If a spindle number is not specified, SPCON/SPCOF will be applied to the master spindle. <n>,<m>, etc.: SPCON or SPCOF can even be used to switch over multiple spindles in one block. Note The speed is specified with S…. M3, M4 and M5 apply in respect of the directions of rotation and spindle stop. Note With synchronized spindle setpoint value linkage, the master spindle must be operated in position-control mode. Feed control 7.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS, SPOSA, M19, M70, WAITS) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 135 7.4 7.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS, SPOSA, M19, M70, WAITS) Function SPOS, SPOSA or M19 can be used to set spindles to specific angular positions, e.g. during tool change. Angle position SPOS, SPOSA and M19 induce a temporary switchover to position-controlled mode until the next M3/M4/M5/M41 to M45. Positioning in axis mode The spindle can also be operated as a path axis, synchronized axis or positioning axis at the address defined in the machine data. When the axis identifier is specified, the spindle is in axis mode. M70 switches the spindle directly to axis mode. End of positioning The end-of-motion criterion when positioning the spindle can be programmed using FINEA, CORSEA, IPOENDA or IPOBRKA. The program advances to the next block if the end of motion criteria for all spindles or axes programmed in the current block plus the block change criterion for path interpolation are fulfilled. Synchronization In order to synchronize spindle movements, WAITS can be used to wait until the spindle position is reached. Feed control 7.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS, SPOSA, M19, M70, WAITS) Fundamentals 136 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Conditions The spindle to be positioned must be capable of operation in position-controlled mode. Syntax Position spindle: SPOS=<value>/SPOS[<n>]=<value> SPOSA=<value>/SPOSA[<n>]=<value> M19/M<n>=19 Switch spindle over to axis mode: M70/M<n>=70 Define end-of-motion criterion: FINEA/FINEA[S<n>] COARSEA/COARSEA[S<n>] IPOENDA/IPOENDA[S<n>] IPOBRKA/IPOBRKA(<axis>[,<instant in time>]) ; Programming in a separate NC block. Synchronize spindle movements: WAITS/WAITS(<n>,<m>) ; Programming in a separate NC block. Feed control 7.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS, SPOSA, M19, M70, WAITS) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 137 Significance Set spindle to specified angle SPOS and SPOSA have the same functionality but differ in their block change behavior: • SPOS delays the enabling of the NC block until the position has been reached. • SPOSA enables the NC block even if the position has not been reached. <n>: Number of the spindle to be positioned. If a spindle number is not specified or if the spindle number is set to "0", SPOS or SPOSA will be applied to the master spindle. Angular position to which the spindle is to be set. Unit: degrees Type: REAL The following options are available about programming the position approach mode: =AC(<value>): Absolute dimensions Range of values: 0 … 359.9999 =IC(<value>): Incremental dimensions Range of values: 0 … ±99 999.999 =DC(<value>): Approach absolute value directly =ACN(<value>): Absolute dimension, approach in negative direction =ACP(<value>): Absolute dimension, approach in positive direction SPOS/SPOSA: <value>: =<value>: as DC(<value>) Feed control 7.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS, SPOSA, M19, M70, WAITS) Fundamentals 138 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 M<n>=19: Set the master spindle (M19 or M0=19) or spindle number <n> (M<n>=19) to the angular position preset with SD43240 $SA_M19_SPOS with the position approach mode preset in SD43250 $SA_M19_SPOSMODE. The NC block is not enabled until the position has been reached. M<n>=70: Switch the master spindle (M70 or M0=70) or spindle number <n> (M<n>=70) over to axis mode. No defined position is approached. The NC block is enabled after the switchover has been performed. FINEA: Motion end when "Exact stop fine" reached COARSEA: Motion end when "Exact stop coarse" reached IPOENDA: End of motion on reaching "interpolator stop" Spindle for which the programmed end-of-motion criterion is to be effective <n>: Spindle number S<n>: If a spindle is not specified in [S<n>] or a spindle number of "0" is specified, the programmed end-of-motion criterion will be applied to the master spindle. A block change is possible in the braking ramp. <axis>: Channel axis identifier Instant in time of the block change with reference to the braking ramp Unit: Percent Range of values: 100 (application point of the braking ramp) to 0 (end of the braking ramp) IPOBRKA: <instant in time>: If a value is not assigned to the <instant in time> parameter, the current value of the setting data is applied: SD43600 $SA_IPOBRAKE_BLOCK_EXCHANGE Note: IBOBRKA with an instant in time of "0" is identical to IPOENDA. Feed control 7.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS, SPOSA, M19, M70, WAITS) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 139 Synchronization command for the specified spindle(s) The subsequent blocks are not processed until the specified spindle(s) programmed in a previous NC block with SPOSA has (have) reached its (their) end position(s) (with exact stop fine). WAITS after M5: Wait for the specified spindle(s) to come to a standstill. WAITS after M3/M4: Wait for the specified spindle(s) to reach their setpoint speed. WAITS: <n>,<m>: Numbers of the spindles to which the synchronization command is to be applied. If a spindle number is not specified or if the spindle number is set to "0", WAITS will be applied to the master spindle. Note Three spindle positions are possible for each NC block. Note With incremental dimensions IC(<value>), spindle positioning can take place over several revolutions. Note If position control was activated with SPCON prior to SPOS, this remains active until SPCOF is issued. Note The control detects the transition to axis mode automatically from the program sequence. Explicit programming of M70 in the part program is, therefore, essentially no longer necessary. However, M70 can continue to be programmed, e.g to increase the legibility of the part program. Feed control 7.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS, SPOSA, M19, M70, WAITS) Fundamentals 140 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Examples Example 1: Position spindle with negative direction of rotation Spindle 2 is to be positioned at 250° with negative direction of rotation: Program code Comment N10 SPOSA[2]=ACN(250) ; The spindle is decelerated if necessary and accelerated in the opposite direction to that of the positioning movement. DC (250) AC (250) 250° 0° X Feed control 7.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS, SPOSA, M19, M70, WAITS) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 141 Example 2: Spindle positioning in axis mode Program variant 1: Program code Comment ... N10 M3 S500 ... N90 SPOS[2]=0 ; Position control on, spindle 2 positioned to 0, axis mode can be used in the next block. N100 X50 C180 ; Spindle 2 (C axis) is traversed with linear interpolation synchronized with X. N110 Z20 SPOS[2]=90 ; Spindle 2 is positioned to 90 degrees. Program variant 2: Program code Comment ... N10 M3 S500 ... N90 M2=70 ; Spindle 2 switches to axis mode. N100 X50 C180 ; Spindle 2 (C axis) is traversed with linear interpolation synchronous to X. N110 Z20 SPOS[2]=90 ; Spindle 2 is positioned to 90 degrees. Feed control 7.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS, SPOSA, M19, M70, WAITS) Fundamentals 142 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example 3: Drill cross holes in turned part Cross holes are to be drilled in this turned part. The running drive spindle (master spindle) is stopped at zero degrees and then successively turned through 90°, stopped and so on. Z X X Program code Comment .... N110 S2=1000 M2=3 ; Switch on cross drilling attachment. N120 SPOSA=DC(0) ; Set main spindle to 0° immediately, the program will advance to the next block straight away. N125 G0 X34 Z-35 ; Switch on the drill while the spindle is taking up position. N130 WAITS ; Wait for the main spindle to reach its position. N135 G1 G94 X10 F250 ; Feedrate in mm/min (G96 is suitable only for the multi-edge turning tool and synchronous spindle, but not for power tools on the cross slide.) N140G0 X34 N145 SPOS=IC(90) ; The spindle is positioned through 90° with read halt in a positive direction. N150 G1 X10 N155 G0 X34 N160 SPOS=AC(180) ; The spindle is positioned at 180° relative to the spindle zero point. N165 G1 X10 N170 G0 X34 N175 SPOS=IC(90) ; The spindle turns in a positive direction through 90° from the absolute 180° position, ending up in the absolute 270° position. N180 G1 X10 N185 G0 X50 ... Feed control 7.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS, SPOSA, M19, M70, WAITS) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 143 Further information Positioning with SPOSA The block step enable or program execution is not affected by SPOSA. The spindle positioning can be performed during execution of subsequent NC blocks. The program moves onto the next block if all the functions (except for spindle) programmed in the current block have reached their block end criterion. The spindle positioning operation may be programmed over several blocks (see WAITS). NOTICE If a command, which implicitly causes a preprocessing stop, is read in a following block, execution of this block is delayed until all positioning spindles are stationary. Positioning with SPOS/M19 The block step enabling condition is met when all functions programmed in the block reach their end-of-block criterion (e.g. all auxiliary functions acknowledged by the PLC, all axes at their end point) and the spindle reaches the programmed position. Velocity of the movements: The velocity and the delay response for positioning are stored in the machine data. The configured values can be modified by programming or by synchronized actions, see: ● Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA, FPR, FPRAON, FPRAOF) (Page 146) ● Programmable acceleration override (ACC) (option) (Page 152) Specification of spindle positions: As the G90/G91 commands are not effective here, the corresponding dimensions apply explicitly, e.g. AC, IC, DC, ACN, ACP. If no specifications are made, traversing automatically takes place as for DC. Feed control 7.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS, SPOSA, M19, M70, WAITS) Fundamentals 144 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Synchronize spindle movements with WAITS WAITS can be used to identify a point at which the NC program waits until one or more spindles programmed with SPOSA in a previous NC block reach their positions. Example: Program code Comment N10 SPOSA[2]=180 SPOSA[3]=0 ... N40 WAITS(2,3) ; The block waits until spindles 2 and 3 have reached the positions specified in block N10. WAITS can be used after M5 to wait until the spindle(s) has (have) stopped. WAITS can be used after M3/M4 to wait until the spindle(s) has (have) reached the specified speed/direction of rotation. Note If the spindle has not yet been synchronized with synchronization marks, the positive direction of rotation is taken from the machine data (state on delivery). Feed control 7.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS, SPOSA, M19, M70, WAITS) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 145 Position spindle from rotation (M3/M4) When M3 or M4 is active, the spindle comes to a standstill at the programmed value. DC = AC DC = AC Direction of rotation Programmed angle Programmed angle Direction of rotation There is no difference between DC and AC dimensioning. In both cases, rotation continues in the direction selected by M3/M4 until the absolute end position is reached. With ACN and ACP, deceleration takes place if necessary, and the appropriate approach direction is taken. With IC, the spindle rotates additionally to the specified value starting at the current spindle position. Position a spindle from standstill (M5) The exact programmed distance is traversed from standstill (M5). Feed control 7.5 Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA, FPR, FPRAON, FPRAOF) Fundamentals 146 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 7.5 7.5 Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA, FPR, FPRAON, FPRAOF) Function Positioning axes such as workpiece transport systems, tool turrets and end supports are traversed independently of path and synchronized axes. A separate feedrate is therefore defined for each positioning axis. A separate axial feedrate can also be programmed for spindles. It is also possible to derive the revolutional feedrate for path and synchronized axes or for individual positioning axes/spindles from another rotary axis or spindle. Syntax Feedrate for positioning axis: FA[<axis>]=… Axis feedrate for spindle: FA[SPI(<n>)]=… FA[S<n>]=… Derive revolutional feedrate for path/synchronized axes: FPR (<rotary axis>) FPR(SPI(<n>)) FPR(S<n>) Derive rotational feedrate for positioning axes/spindles: FPRAON(<axis>,<rotary axis>) FPRAON(<axis>,SPI(<n>)) FPRAON(<axis>,S<n>) FPRAON(SPI(<n>),<rotary axis>) FPRAON(S<n>,<rotary axis>) FPRAON(SPI(<n>),SPI(<n>)) FPRAON(S<n>,S<n>) FPRAOF(<axis>,SPI(<n>), etc.) FPRAOF(<axis>,S<n>, etc.) Feed control 7.5 Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA, FPR, FPRAON, FPRAOF) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 147 Significance Feedrate for the specified positioning axis or positioning speed (axial feedrate) for the specified spindle Unit: mm/min or inch/min or deg/min FA[...]=... : Range of values: … 999 999.999 mm/min, deg/min … 39 999.9999 inch/min FPR(...): FPR is used to identify the rotary axis (<rotary axis>) or spindle (SPI(<n>)/S<n>) from which the revolutional feedrate for the revolutional feedrate of the path and synchronized axes programmed under G95 is to be derived. FPRAON(...): Derive rotational feedrate for positioning axes and spindles The first parameter (<axis>/SPI(<n>)/S<n>) identifies the positioning axis/spindle to be traversed with revolutional feedrate. The second parameter (<rotary axis>/SPI(<n>)/S<n>) identifies the rotary axis/spindle from which the revolutional feedrate is to be derived. Note: The second parameter can be omitted, in which case the feedrate will be derived from the master spindle. FPRAOF(...): FPRAOF is used to deselect the derived revolutional feedrate for the specified axes or spindles. <axis>: Axis identifier (positioning or geometry axis) Spindle identifier SPI(<n>) and S<n> are identical in terms of function. <n>: Spindle number SPI(<n>)/S<n>: Note: SPI converts spindle numbers into axis identifiers. The transfer parameter (<n>) must contain a valid spindle number. Feed control 7.5 Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA, FPR, FPRAON, FPRAOF) Fundamentals 148 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Note The programmed feedrate FA[...] is modal. Up to five feedrates for positioning axes or spindles can be programmed in each NC block. Note The derived feedrate is calculated according to the following formula: Derived feedrate = programmed feedrate * absolute master feedrate Examples Example 1: Synchronous spindle coupling With synchronous spindle coupling, the positioning speed of the following spindle can be programmed independently of the master spindle, e.g. for positioning operations. Program code Comment ... FA[S2]=100 ; Positioning speed of the following spindle (spindle 2) = 100 deg/min ... Example 2: Derived revolutional feedrate for path axes Path axes X, Y must be traversed at the revolutional feedrate derived from rotary axis A: Program code ... N40 FPR(A) N50 G95 X50 Y50 F500 ... Example 3: Derive revolutional feedrate for master spindle Program code Comment N30 FPRAON(S1,S2) ; The revolutional feedrate for the master spindle (S1) must be derived from spindle 2. N40 SPOS=150 ; Position master spindle. N50 FPRAOF(S1) ; Deselect revolutional feedrate for the master spindle. Feed control 7.5 Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA, FPR, FPRAON, FPRAOF) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 149 Example 4: Derive revolutional feedrate for positioning axis Program code Comment N30 FPRAON(X) ; The revolutional feedrate for positioning axis X must be derived from the master spindle. N40 POS[X]=50 FA[X]=500 ; The positioning axis is traversing at 500 mm/revolution of the master spindle. N50 FPRAOF(X) Further information FA[…] The feedrate type is always G94. When G70/G71 is active, the unit is metric/inches according to the default setting in the machine data. G700/G710 can be used to modify the unit in the program. NOTICE If no FA is programmed, the value defined in the machine data applies. FPR(…) As an extension of the G95command (revolutional feedrate referring to the master spindle), FPR allows the revolutional feedrate to be derived from any chosen spindle or rotary axis. G95 FPR(…) is valid for path and synchronized axes. If the rotary axis/spindle specified in the FPR command is operating on position control, then the setpoint linkage is active. Otherwise the actual-value linkage is effective. FPRAON(…) FPRAON is used to derive the revolutional feedrate for positioning axes and spindles from the current feedrate of another rotary axis or spindle. FPRAOF(…) The revolutional feedrate can be deactivated for one or a number of axes/spindles simultaneously with the FPRAOF command. Feed control 7.6 Programmable feedrate override (OVR, OVRRAP, OVRA) Fundamentals 150 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 7.6 7.6 Programmable feedrate override (OVR, OVRRAP, OVRA) Function The velocity of path/positioning axes and spindles can be modified in the NC program. Syntax OVR=<value> OVRRAP=<value> OVRA[<axis>]=<value> OVRA[SPI(<n>)]=<value> OVRA[S<n>]=<value> Significance OVR: Feedrate modification for path feedrate F OVRRAP: Feedrate modification for rapid traverse velocity OVRA: Feedrate modification for positioning feedrate FA or for spindle speed S <axis>: Axis identifier (positioning or geometry axis) Spindle identifier SPI(<n>) and S<n> are identical in terms of function. <n>: Spindle number SPI(<n>)/S<n>: Note: SPI converts spindle numbers into axis identifiers. The transfer parameter (<n>) must contain a valid spindle number. Feedrate modification in percent The value refers to or is combined with the feedrate override set on the machine control panel. Range of values: … 200%, integers <value>: Note: With path and rapid traverse override, the maximum velocities set in the machine data are not overshot. Feed control 7.6 Programmable feedrate override (OVR, OVRRAP, OVRA) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 151 Examples Example 1: Set feedrate override: 80% Program code Comment N10 ... F1000 N20 OVR=50 ; The programmed path feedrate F1000 is changed in F400 (1000 * 0.8 * 0.5). ... Example 2: Program code Comment N10 OVRRAP=5 ; The rapid traverse velocity is reduced to 5%. ... N100 OVRRAP=100 ; The rapid traverse velocity is reset to 100% (= default setting). Example 3: Program code Comment N... OVR=25 OVRA[A1]=70 ; The path feedrate is reduced to 25% and the positioning feedrate for positioning axis A1 is reduced to 70%. Example 4: Program code Comment N.. OVRA[SPI(1)]=35 ; The speed for spindle 1 is reduced to 35%. or Program code Comment N.. OVRA[S1]=35 ; The speed for spindle 1 is reduced to 35%. Feed control 7.7 Programmable acceleration override (ACC) (option) Fundamentals 152 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 7.7 7.7 Programmable acceleration override (ACC) (option) Function In critical program sections, it may be necessary to limit the acceleration to below the maximum values, e.g. to prevent mechanical vibrations from occurring. The programmable acceleration override can be used to modify the acceleration for each path axis or spindle via a command in the NC program. The limit is effective for all types of interpolation. The values defined in the machine data apply as 100% acceleration. Syntax ACC[<axis>]=<value> ACC[SPI(<n>)]=<value> ACC(S<n>)=<value> Deactivate: ACC[...]=100 Syntax ACC: Acceleration change for the specified path axis or speed change for the specified spindle. <axis>: Channel axis name of path axis Spindle identifier SPI(<n>) and S<n> are identical in terms of function. <n>: Spindle number SPI(<n>)/S<n>: Note: SPI converts spindle numbers into axis identifiers. The transfer parameter (<n>) must contain a valid spindle number. Acceleration change in percent The value refers to or is combined with the feedrate override set on the machine control panel. <value>: Range of values: 1 to 200%, integers NOTICE With a greater acceleration rate, the values permitted by the manufacturer may be exceeded. Feed control 7.7 Programmable acceleration override (ACC) (option) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 153 Example Program code Comment N50 ACC[X]=80 ; The axis slide in the X direction should only be traversed with 80% acceleration. N60 ACC[SPI(1)]=50 ; Spindle 1 should only accelerate or brake with 50% of the acceleration capacity. Further information Acceleration override programmed with ACC The acceleration override programmed with ACC[...] is always taken into consideration on output as in system variable $AA_ACC. Readout in the parts program and in synchronized actions takes place at different times in the NC processing run. In the part program The value written in the part program is then only taken into consideration in system variable $AA_ACC as written in the part program if ACC has not been changed in the meantime by a synchronized action. In synchronized actions The following thus applies: The value written to a synchronized action is then only considered in system variable $AA_ACC as written to the synchronized action if ACC has not been changed in the meantime by a part program. The preset acceleration can also be changed via synchronized actions (see Function Manual, Synchronized Actions). Example: Program code ... N100 EVERY $A_IN[1] DO POS[X]=50 FA[X]=2000 ACC[X]=140 The current acceleration value can be called with system variable $AA_ACC[<axis>]. Machine data can be used to define whether the last ACC value set should apply on RESET/part program end or whether 100% should apply. Feed control 7.8 Feedrate with handwheel override (FD, FDA) Fundamentals 154 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 7.8 7.8 Feedrate with handwheel override (FD, FDA) Function The FD and FDA commands can be used to traverse axes with handwheels during execution of the part program. The programmed settings for traversing the axes are then overlaid with the handwheel pulses evaluated as path or velocity defaults. Path axes In the case of path axes, the programmed path feedrate can be overlaid. The handwheel is evaluated as the first geometry axis of the channel. The handwheel pulses evaluated per interpolation cycle dependent on the direction of rotation correspond to the path velocity to be overlaid. The path velocity limit values which can be achieved by means of handwheel override are: ● Minimum: 0 ● Maximum: Machine data limit values of the path axes involved in traversing Note Path feedrate The path feedrate F and the handwheel feedrate FD cannot be programmed in the same NC block. Positioning axes In the case of positioning axes, the travel path or velocity can be overlaid as an axial value. The handwheel assigned to the axis is evaluated. ● Path override The handwheel pulses evaluated dependent on the direction of rotation correspond to the axis path to be traveled. Only handwheel pulses in the direction of the programmed position are evaluated. ● Velocity override The handwheel pulses evaluated per interpolation cycle dependent on the direction of rotation correspond to the axial velocity to be overlaid. The path velocity limit values which can be achieved by means of handwheel override are: – Minimum: 0 – Maximum: Machine data limit values of the positioning axis A detailed description of how to set handwheel parameters appears in: References: /FB2/ Function Manual, Extended Functions; Manual Travel and Handwheel Travel (H1) Feed control 7.8 Feedrate with handwheel override (FD, FDA) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 155 Syntax FD=<velocity> FDA[<axis>]=<velocity> Significance FD=<velocity>: Path feedrate and enabling of velocity override with handwheel <velocity>: • Value = 0: Not allowed! • Value ≠ 0: Path velocity FDA[<axis>]=<velocity>: Axial feedrate <velocity>: • Value = 0: Path default with handwheel • Value ≠ 0: Axial velocity <axis>: Axis identifier of positioning axis Note FD and FDA are non-modal. Example Z X Path definition: The grinding wheel oscillating in the Z direction is traversed to the workpiece in the X direction with the handwheel. The operator can continue to feed manually until the sparks are flying uniformly. Activating "Delete distance-to-go" switches to the next NC block and machining continues in AUTOMATIC mode. Feed control 7.8 Feedrate with handwheel override (FD, FDA) Fundamentals 156 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information Traverse path axes with velocity override (FD=<velocity>) The following conditions must be met for the part program block in which path velocity override is programmed: ● Path command G1, G2 or G3 active ● Exact stop G60 active ● Linear feedrate G94 active Feedrate override The feedrate override only affects the programmed path velocity and not the velocity component generated with the handwheel (exception: (except if feed override = 0). Example: Program code Description N10 X… Y… F500 ; Feedrate = 500 mm/min N20 X… Y… FD=700 ; ; ; ; ; Feedrate = 700 mm/min and velocity override with handwheel. Acceleration from 500 to 700 mm/min in N20. The handwheel can be used to vary the speed dependent on the direction of rotation between 0 and the maximum value (machine data). Traverse positioning axes with path default (FDA[<axis>]=0) In the NC block with programmed FDA[<axis>]=0 the feed is set to zero so that the program cannot generate any travel movement. The programmed travel movement to the target position is now controlled exclusively by the operator rotating the handwheel. Feed control 7.8 Feedrate with handwheel override (FD, FDA) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 157 Example: Program code Description ... N20 POS[V]=90 FDA[V]=0 ; ; ; ; Target position = 90 mm, axial feedrate = 0 mm/min and path override with handwheel. Velocity of axis V at start of block = 0 mm/min. Path and speed defaults are set using handwheel pulses Direction of movement, travel velocity The axes follow the path set by the handwheel in the direction of the sign. Forward and backwards travel is possible dependent on the direction of rotation. The faster the handwheel rotates, the higher the traversing speed. Traversing range: The traversing range is limited by the starting position and the programmed end point. Traverse positioning axis with velocity override (FDA[<axis>]=<velocity>) In NC blocks with programmed FDA[…]=…, the feedrate from the last programmed FA value is accelerated or decelerated to the value programmed under FDA. Starting from the current feedrate FDA, the handwheel can be turned to accelerate the programmed movement to the target position or decelerate it to zero. The values set as parameters in the machine data serve as the maximum velocity. Example: Program code Description N10 POS[V]=… FA[V]=100 ; Axial feedrate = 100 mm/min N20 POS[V]=100 FAD[V]=200 ; ; ; ; ; ; Axial target position = 100, axial feedrate = 200 mm/min and velocity override with handwheel. Acceleration from 100 to 200 mm/min in N20. The handwheel can be used to vary the velocity dependent on the direction of rotation between 0 and the maximum value (machine data). Traversing range: The traversing range is limited by the starting position and the programmed end point. Feed control 7.9 Feedrate optimization for curved path sections (CFTCP, CFC, CFIN) Fundamentals 158 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 7.9 7.9 Feedrate optimization for curved path sections (CFTCP, CFC, CFIN) Function With activated offset mode G41/G42, the programmed feedrate for the milling cutter radius initially refers to the milling cutter center path (see the chapter titled "Coordinate transformations (frames)"). When you mill a circle (the same applies to polynomial and spline interpolation) the extent to which the feedrate varies at the cutter edge is so significant under certain circumstances that it can impair the quality of the machined part. Example: Milling a small outside radius with a large tool. The path that the outside of the milling tool must travel is considerably longer than the path along the contour. Tool path Contour Because of this, machining at the contour takes place with a very low feedrate. To prevent adverse effects, the feedrate needs to be controlled accordingly for curved contours. Syntax CFTCP CFC CFIN Feed control 7.9 Feedrate optimization for curved path sections (CFTCP, CFC, CFIN) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 159 Significance CFTCP: Constant feedrate on the milling cutter center path The control keeps the feedrate constant and feedrate offsets are deactivated. CFC: Constant feedrate at the contour (tool cutting edge). This function is preset per default. CFIN: Constant feedrate at the tool cutting edge only at concave contours, otherwise on the milling cutter center path. The feedrate is reduced for inside radii. Example X Y 20 10 20 55 30 4 0 1 0 In this example, the contour is first produced with CFC-corrected feedrate. During finishing, the cutting base is also machined with CFIN. This prevents the cutting base being damaged at the outside radii by a feedrate that is too high. Program code Comment N10 G17 G54 G64 T1 M6 N20 S3000 M3 CFC F500 G41 N30 G0 X-10 N40 Y0 Z-10 ; Feed to first cutting depth N50 CONTOUR1 ; Subroutine call N40 CFIN Z-25 ; Feed to second cutting depth N50 CONTOUR1 ; Subroutine call N60 Y120 N70 X200 M30 Feed control 7.9 Feedrate optimization for curved path sections (CFTCP, CFC, CFIN) Fundamentals 160 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information Constant feedrate on contour with CFC c o n s t a n t constant reduced increased The feedrate is reduced for inside radii and increased for outside radii. This ensures a constant speed at the tool edge and thus at the contour. Feed control 7.10 Several feedrate values in one block (F, ST, SR, FMA, STA, SRA) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 161 7.10 7.10 Several feedrate values in one block (F, ST, SR, FMA, STA, SRA) Function The "Multiple feedrates in one block" function can be used to activate different feedrate values for an NC block, a dwell time or a retraction motion-synchronously, dependent on external digital and/or analog inputs. The HW input signals are combined in one input byte. Syntax F2=... to F7=... ST=... SR=... FMA[2,<axis>]=... to FMA[7,<axis>]=... STA[<axis>]=... SRA[<axis>]=... Significance The path feedrate is programmed under the address F and remains valid during the absence of an input signal. In addition to the path feedrate, up to 6 further feedrates can be programmed in the block. The numerical expansion indicates the bit number of the input that activates the feedrate when changed: F2=... to F7=... : Effective: non-modal Dwell time in s (for grinding technology: sparking-out time) Input bit: 1 ST=... : Effective: non-modal Retraction path The unit for the retraction path refers to the current valid unit of measurement (mm or inch). Input bit: 0 SR=... : Effective: non-modal Feed control 7.10 Several feedrate values in one block (F, ST, SR, FMA, STA, SRA) Fundamentals 162 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 The axial feedrate is programmed under the address FA and remains valid during the absence of an input signal. In addition to the axial feedrate FA up to 6 further feedrates per axis can be programmed in the block with FMA. The first parameter indicates the bit number of the input and the second the axis for which the feedrate is to apply. FMA[2,<axis>]=... to FMA[7,<axis>]=... : Effective: non-modal Axial dwell time in s (for grinding technology: sparking-out time) Input bit: 1 STA[<axis>]=... : Effective: non-modal Axial retraction path Input bit: 0 SRA[<axis>]=... : Effective: non-modal Note If input bit 1 is activated for the dwell time or bit 0 for the return path, the distance to go for the path axes or the relevant single axes is deleted and the dwell time or return started. Note The axial feedrate (FA or FMA value) or path feedrate (F value) corresponds to 100% feedrate. The "Multiple feedrate values in one block" function can be used to achieve feedrates smaller than or equal to the axial feedrate or path feedrate. Note If feedrates, dwell time or return path are programmed for an axis on account of an external input, this axis must not be programmed as POSA axis (positioning axis over multiple blocks) in this block. Note Look Ahead is also active for multiple feedrates in one block. In this way, the current feedrate is restricted by the Look Ahead value. Feed control 7.10 Several feedrate values in one block (F, ST, SR, FMA, STA, SRA) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 163 Examples Example 1: Path motion Program code Comment F7=1000 ; 7 corresponds to input bit 7 F2=20 ; 2 corresponds to input bit 2 ST=1 ; Dwell time (s) input bit 1 SR=0.5 ; Return path (mm) input bit 0 Example 2: Axial motion Program code Comment FMA[3,x]=1000 ; Axial feedrate with the value 1,000 for X axis, 3 corresponds to input bit 3. Example 3: Multiple operations in one block Program code Comment N20 T1 D1 F500 G0 X100 ; Initial setting N25 G1 X105 F=20 F7=5 F3=2.5 F2=0.5 ST=1.5 SR=0.5 ; Normal feedrate with F, roughing with F7, finishing with F3, smooth-finishing with F2, dwell time 1.5 s, return path 0.5 mm ... Feed control 7.11 Non-modal feedrate (FB) Fundamentals 164 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 7.11 7.11 Non-modal feedrate (FB) Function The "Non-modal feedrate" function can be used to define a separate feedrate for a single block. After this block, the previous modal feedrate is active again. Syntax FB=<value> Significance FB: Feedrate for current block only <VALUE>: The programmed value must be greater than zero. Values are interpreted based on the active feedrate type: • G94: feedrate in mm/min or degrees/min • G95: feedrate in mm/rev or inch/rev • G96: Constant cutting rate Note If no traversing motion is programmed in the block (e.g. computation block), the FB has no effect. If no explicit feedrate for chamfering/rounding is programmed, then the value of FB also applies for any chamfering/rounding contour element in this block. Feedrate interpolations FLIN, FCUB, etc. are also possible without restriction. Simultaneous programming of FB and FD (handwheel travel with feedrate override) or F (modal path feedrate) is not possible. Example Program code Comment N10 G0 X0 Y0 G17 F100 G94 ; Initial setting N20 G1 X10 ; Feedrate 100 mm/min N30 X20 FB=80 ; Feedrate 80 mm/min N40 X30 ; Feedrate is 100 mm/min again. ... Feed control 7.12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 165 7.12 7.12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) Function Primarily for milling operations, the tooth feedrate, which is more commonly used in practice, can be programmed instead of the revolutional feedrate: Feedrate path per tooth The control uses the $TC_DPNT (number of teeth) tool parameter associated with the active tool offset data record to calculate the effective revolutional feedrate for each traversing block from the programmed tooth feedrate. F = FZ * $TC_DPNT F: Revolutional feedrate in mm/rev or inch/rev FZ: Tooth feedrate in mm/tooth or inch/tooth where: $TC_DPNT: Tool parameter: Number of teeth/rev The tool type ($TC_DP1) of the active tool is not taken into account. The programmed tooth feedrate is independent of the tool change and the selection/deselection of a tool offset data record; it is retained in modal format. A change to the $TC_DPNT tool parameter associated with the active tool cutting edge will be applied the next time a tool offset is selected or the next time the active offset data is updated. Feed control 7.12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) Fundamentals 166 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Changing the tool or selecting/deselecting a tool offset data set generates a recalculation of the effective revolutional feedrate. Note The tooth feedrate refers only to the path (axis-specific programming is not possible). Syntax G95 FZ... Note In the block, G95 and FZ can be programmed together or in isolation. There is no fixed programmed sequence. Significance G95: Type of feedrate: Revolutional feedrate in mm/rev or inch/rev (dependent upon G700/G710) For G95 see "Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) (Page 119)" Tooth feedrate Activation: with G95 Effective: modal FZ: Unit: mm/tooth or inch/tooth (dependent upon G700/G710) Note Switchover between G95 F... and G95 FZ... Switching over between G95 F... (revolutional feedrate) and G95 FZ... (tooth feedrate) will delete the non-active feedrate value in each case. Feed control 7.12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 167 Note Derive feedrate with FPR As is the case with the revolutional feedrate, FPR can also be used to derive the tooth feedrate of any rotary axis or spindle (see "Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA, FPR, FPRAON, FPRAOF) (Page 146)"). CAUTION Tool change/Changing the master spindle A subsequent tool change or changing the master spindle must be taken into account by the user by means of corresponding programming, e.g. reprogramming FZ. CAUTION Technological concerns such as climb milling or conventional milling, front face milling or peripheral face milling, etc., along with the path geometry (straight line, circle, etc.), are not taken into account automatically. Therefore, these factors have to be given consideration when programming the tooth feedrate. Examples Example 1: Milling cutter with 5 teeth ($TC_DPNE = 5) Program code Comment N10 G0 X100 Y50 N20 G1 G95 FZ=0.02 ; Tooth feedrate 0.02 mm/tooth N30 T3 D1 ; Load tool and activate tool offset data record. M40 M3 S200 ; Spindle speed 200 rpm N50 X20 ; Milling with: FZ = 0.02 mm/tooth ⇒ effective revolutional feedrate: F = 0.02 mm/tooth * 5 teeth/rev = 0.1 mm/rev or: F = 0.1 mm/rev * 200 rpm = 20 mm/min … Feed control 7.12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) Fundamentals 168 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example 2: Switchover between G95 F... and G95 FZ... Program code Comment N10 G0 X100 Y50 N20 G1 G95 F0.1 ; Revolutional feedrate 0.1 mm/rev N30 T1 M6 N35 M3 S100 D1 N40 X20 N50 G0 X100 M5 N60 M6 T3 D1 ; Load tool with e.g. 5 teeth ($TC_DPNT = 5). N70 X22 M3 S300 N80 G1 X3 G95 FZ=0.02 ; Change G95 F… to G95 FZ…, tooth feedrate active with 0.02 mm/tooth. … Example 3: Derive tooth feedrate of a spindle (FBR) Program code Comment … N41 FPR(S4) ; Tool in spindle 4 (not the master spindle). N51 G95 X51 FZ=0.5 ; Tooth feedrate 0.5 mm/tooth dependent upon spindle S4. … Example 4: Subsequent tool change Program code Comment N10 G0 X50 Y5 N20 G1 G95 FZ=0.03 ; Tooth feedrate 0.03 mm/tooth N30 M6 T11 D1 ; Load tool with e.g. 7 teeth ($TC_DPNT = 7). N30 M3 S100 N40 X30 ; Effective revolutional feedrate 0.21 mm/rev N50 G0 X100 M5 N60 M6 T33 D1 ; Load tool with e.g. 5 teeth ($TC_DPNT = 5). N70 X22 M3 S300 N80 G1 X3 ; Tooth feedrate modal 0.03 mm/tooth ⇒ effective revolutional feedrate: 0.15 mm/rev … Feed control 7.12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 169 Example 5: Changing the master spindle Program code Comment N10 SETMS (1) ; Spindle 1 is the master spindle. N20 T3 D3 M6 ; Tool 3 is changed to spindle 1. N30 S400 M3 ; Speed S400 of spindle 1 (and, therefore, T3). N40 G95 G1 FZ0.03 ; Tooth feedrate 0.03 mm/tooth N50 X50 ; Path motion, the effective feedrate is dependent upon: - The tooth feedrate FZ - The speed of spindle 1 - The number of teeth of the active tool T3 N60 G0 X60 ... N100 SETMS(2) ; Spindle 2 becomes the master spindle. N110 T1 D1 M6 ; Tool 1 is changed to spindle 2. N120 S500 M3 ; Speed S500 of spindle 2 (and, therefore, T1). N130 G95 G1 FZ0.03 X20 ; Path motion, the effective feedrate is dependent upon: - The tooth feedrate FZ - The speed of spindle 2 - The number of teeth of the active tool T1 Note Following the change in master spindle (N100) the user also has to select an offset affecting the tool actuated by spindle 2. Feed control 7.12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) Fundamentals 170 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information Changing between G93, G94 and G95 FZ can also be programmed when G95 is not active, although it will have no effect and is deleted when G95 is selected. In other words, when changing between G93, G94, and G95, in the same way as with F, the FZ value is also deleted. Reselection of G95 Reselecting G95 when G95 is already active has no effect (unless a change between F and FZ has been programmed). Non-modal feedrate (FB) When G95 FZ... (modal) is active, a non-modal feedrate FB... is interpreted as a tooth feedrate. SAVE mechanism In subprograms with the SAVE attribute FZ is written to the value prior to the subprogram starting (in the same way as F). Multiple feedrate values in one block The "Multiple feedrate values in one block" function is not possible with tooth feedrate. Synchronized actions FZ cannot be programmed from synchronized actions. Feed control 7.12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 171 Read tooth feedrate and path feedrate type The tooth feedrate and the path feedrate type can be read using system variables. ● With preprocessing stop in the part program via system variables: $AC_FZ Tooth feedrate effective when the current main run record was preprocessed. Path feedrate type effective when the current main run record was preprocessed. Value: Significance: 0 mm/min 1 mm/rev 2 inch/min 3 inch/rev 11 mm/tooth $AC_F_TYPE 31 inch/tooth ● Without preprocessing stop in the part program via system variables: $P_FZ Programmed tooth feedrate Programmed path feedrate type Value: Significance: 0 mm/min 1 mm/rev 2 inch/min 3 inch/rev 11 mm/tooth $P_F_TYPE 31 inch/tooth Note If G95 is not active, the $P_FZ and $AC_FZ variables will always return a value of zero. Feed control 7.12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) Fundamentals 172 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 173 Geometry settings 8 8.1 8.1 Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) Function The workpiece zero in relation to the zero point of the basic coordinate system is set up by the settable zero offset (G54 to G57 and G505 to G599) in all axes. In this way it is possible to call zero points program-wide per G command (e.g. for different devices). Milling: Z X Y Z X Y G 5 4 Geometry settings 8.1 Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) Fundamentals 174 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Turning: M W X Z G54 Note During turning, for example, the offset value for returning of the chuck is entered in G54. Syntax Activating settable zero offset: G54 ... G57 G505 ... G599 Deactivating settable zero offset: G500 G53 G153 SUPA Geometry settings 8.1 Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 175 Meaning G54 to G57: Call of the 1st to 4th settable zero offset (ZO) G505 to G599: Call of the 5th to 99th settable zero offset Deactivation of the current settable zero offset G500=zero frame: (default setting; contains no offset, rotation, mirroring or scaling) Deactivation of the settable zero offset until the next call, activation of the entire basic frame ($P_ACTBFRAME). G500: G500 not equal to 0: Activation of the first settable zero offset ($P_UIFR[0]) and activation of the entire basic frame ($P_ACTBFRAME) or possibly a modified basic frame is activated. G53: G53 suppresses the settable work offset and the programmable work offset non-modally. G153: G153 has the same effect as G53 and also suppresses the entire basic frame. SUPA: SUPA has the same effect as G153 and also suppresses: • Handwheel offsets (DRF) • Overlaid movements • External zero offset • PRESET offset References: See Section "Coordinate transformations (frames)" for the programmable zero offset. Note The basic setting at the start of the program, e.g. G54 or G500, can be set via machine data. Geometry settings 8.1 Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) Fundamentals 176 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example Y X G 5 4 G 5 6 G 5 5 Y M X M Y X Y X TRANS X10 M0 Three workpieces that are arranged on a pallet in accordance with the zero offset values G54 to G56 are to be machined in succession. The machining sequence is programmed in subroutine L47. Program code Comment N10 G0 G90 X10 Y10 F500 T1 ; Approach N20 G54 S1000 M3 ; Call of the first ZO, spindle clockwise N30 L47 ; Program pass as subroutine N40 G55 G0 Z200 ; Call of the second ZO, Z via obstruction N50 L47 ; Program pass as subroutine N60 G56 ; Call of the third ZO N70 L47 ; Program pass as subroutine N80 G53 X200 Y300 M30 ; Suppress zero offset, end of program Geometry settings 8.1 Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 177 Further information Setting offset values On the operator panel or universal interface, enter the following values in the internal control zero offset table: ● Coordinates for the offset ● Angle for rotated clamping ● Scaling factors (if required) X Y X Y O ffse t R o t a t e Scaling Zero offset G54 to G57 The call of one of the four commands G54 to G57 in the NC program moves the zero point from the basic coordinate system to the workpiece coordinate system. Geometry settings 8.1 Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) Fundamentals 178 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 X Y X Y X Y X Y In the next NC block with a programmed movement, all of the positional parameters and thus the tool movements refer to the workpiece zero, which is now valid. Note With the four available zero offsets, it is possible (e.g. for multiple machining) to simultaneously describe four workpiece clampings and call them in the program. Further settable zero offsets: G505 to G599 The command numbers G505 to G599 are available for further settable zero offsets. Therefore, a total of 100 settable zero offsets can be created in the zero point memory via machine data including the four preset zero offsets G54 to G57. Geometry settings 8.2 Selection of the working plane (G17/G18/G19) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 179 8.2 8.2 Selection of the working plane (G17/G18/G19) Function The specification of the working plane, in which the desired contour is to be machined also defines the following functions: ● The plane for tool radius compensation ● The infeed direction for tool length compensation depending on the tool type ● The plane for circular interpolation Z Y X G 1 8 G 1 9 G 1 7 l n f e e d l n f e e d l n f e e d Syntax G17 G18 G19 Significance G17: Working plane X/Y Infeed direction Z, plane selection 1st - 2nd geometry axis G18: Working plane Z/X Infeed direction Y, plane selection 3rd - 1st geometry axis G19: Working plane Y/Z Infeed direction X, plane selection 2nd - 3rd geometry axis Geometry settings 8.2 Selection of the working plane (G17/G18/G19) Fundamentals 180 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Note In the default setting, G17 (X/Y plane) is defined for milling and G18 (Z/X plane) is defined for turning. When calling the tool path correction G41/G42 (see Section "Tool radius compensation"), the working plane must be defined so that the control can correct the tool length and radius. Example The "conventional" approach for milling is: 1. Define working plane (G17 default setting for milling). 2. Select tool type (T) and tool offset values (D). 3. Switch on path correction (G41). 4. Program traversing movements. Program code Comment N10 G17 T5 D8 ; Selection of working plane X/Y, call tool. Tool length compensation is performed in the Z direction. N20 G1 G41 X10 Y30 Z-5 F500 ; Radius compensation is performed in the X/Y plane. N30 G2 X22.5 Y40 I50 J40 ; Circular interpolation/tool radius compensation in the X/Y plane. Geometry settings 8.2 Selection of the working plane (G17/G18/G19) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 181 Further information General It is recommended that the working plane G17 to G19 be selected at the start of the program. In the default setting, the Z/X plane is preset for turning G18. Turning: G 1 9 G 1 7 Y X Z G 1 8 The control requires the specification of the working plane for the calculation of the direction of rotation (see circular interpolation G2/G3). Machining on inclined planes Rotate the coordinate system with ROT (see Section "Coordinate system offset") to position the coordinate axes on the inclined surface. The working planes rotate accordingly. Geometry settings 8.2 Selection of the working plane (G17/G18/G19) Fundamentals 182 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Tool length compensation on inclined planes As a general rule, the tool length compensation always refers to the fixed, non-rotated working plane. Milling: Note The tool length components can be calculated according to the rotated working planes with the functions for "Tool length compensation for orientable tools". The offset plane is selected with CUT2D, CUT2DF. For further information on this and for the description of the available calculation methods, refer to Section "Tool offsets" The control provides convenient coordinate transformation functions for the spatial definition of the working plane. For further information, see Section "Coordinate system offset". Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 183 8.3 8.3 Dimensions The basis of most NC programs is a workpiece drawing with specific dimensions. These dimensions can be: ● In absolute dimensions or in incremental dimensions ● In millimeters or inches ● In radius or diameter (for turning) Specific programming commands are available for the various dimension options so that the data from a dimension drawing can be transferred directly (without conversion) to the NC program. 8.3.1 Absolute dimensions (G90, AC) Function With absolute dimensions, the position specifications always refer to the zero point of the currently valid coordinate system, i.e. the absolute position is programmed, on which the tool is to traverse. Modal absolute dimensions Modal absolute dimensions are activated with the G90 command. Generally it applies to all axes programmed in subsequent NC blocks. Non-modal absolute dimensions With preset incremental dimensions (G91), the AC command can be used to set non-modal absolute dimensions for individual axes. Note Non-modal absolute dimensions (AC) are also possible for spindle positioning (SPOS, SPOSA) and interpolation parameters (I, J, K). Syntax G90 <axis>=AC(<value>) Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals 184 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Significance G90: Command for the activation of modal absolute dimensions AC: Command for the activation of non-modal absolute dimensions <axis>: Axis identifier of the axis to be traversed <value>: Position setpoint of the axis to be traversed in absolute dimensions Examples Example 1: Milling X Y Z X 20 25 5 2 5 3 5 Program code Comment N10 G90 G0 X45 Y60 Z2 T1 S2000 M3 ; Absolute dimension input, in rapid traverse to position XYZ, tool selection, spindle on with clockwise direction of rotation. N20 G1 Z-5 F500 ; Linear interpolation, feed of the tool. N30 G2 X20 Y35 I=AC(45) J=AC(35) ; Clockwise circular interpolation, circle end point and circle center point in absolute dimensions. N40 G0 Z2 ; Traverse N50 M30 ; End of block Note For information on the input of the circle center point coordinates I and J, see Section "Circular interpolation". Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 185 Example 2: Turning Z X 15 21 27 W 1 0 2 . 5 Ø 1 1 Program code Comment N5 T1 D1 S2000 M3 ; Loading of tool T1, spindle on with clockwise direction of rotation. N10 G0 G90 X11 Z1 ; Absolute dimension input, in rapid traverse to position XZ. N20 G1 Z-15 F0.2 ; Linear interpolation, feed of the tool. N30 G3 X11 Z-27 I=AC(-5) K=AC(-21) ; Counterclockwise circular interpolation, circle end point and circle center point in absolute dimensions. N40 G1 Z-40 ; Traverse N50 M30 ; End of block Note For information on the input of the circle center point coordinates I and J, see Section "Circular interpolation". See also Absolute and incremental dimensions for turning and milling (G90/G91) (Page 190) Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals 186 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 8.3.2 Incremental dimensions (G91, IC) Function With incremental dimensions, the position specification refers to the last point approached, i.e. the programming in incremental dimensions describes by how much the tool is to be traversed. Modal incremental dimensions Modal incremental dimensions are activated with the G91 command. Generally it applies to all axes programmed in subsequent NC blocks. Non-modal incremental dimensions With preset absolute dimensions (G90), the IC command can be used to set non-modal incremental dimensions for individual axes. Note Non-modal incremental dimensions (IC) are also possible for spindle positioning (SPOS, SPOSA) and interpolation parameters (I, J, K). Syntax G91 <axis>=IC(<value>) Significance G91: Command for the activation of modal incremental dimensions IC: Command for the activation of non-modal incremental dimensions <axis>: Axis identifier of the axis to be traversed <value>: Position setpoint of the axis to be traversed in incremental dimensions G91 extension For certain applications, such as scratching, it is necessary that only the programmed distance is traversed in incremental dimensions. The active zero offset or tool length compensation is not traversed. Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 187 This behavior can be set separately for the active zero offset and tool length compensation via the following setting data: SD42440 $SC_FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG (zero offsets in frames) SD42442 $SC_TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG (tool length compensations) Value Meaning 0 With incremental programming (incremental dimensions) of an axis, the zero offset or the tool length compensation is not traversed. 1 With incremental programming (incremental dimensions) of an axis, the zero offset or the tool length compensation is traversed. Examples Example 1: Milling X Y Z X 20 25 5 2 5 3 5 Program code Comment N10 G90 G0 X45 Y60 Z2 T1 S2000 M3 ; Absolute dimension input, in rapid traverse to position XYZ, tool selection, spindle on with clockwise direction of rotation N20 G1 Z-5 F500 ; Linear interpolation, feed of the tool. N30 G2 X20 Y35 I0 J-25 ; Clockwise circular interpolation, circle end point in absolute dimensions, circle center point in incremental dimensions. N40 G0 Z2 ; Traverse N50 M30 ; End of block Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals 188 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Note For information on the input of the circle center point coordinates I and J, see Section "Circular interpolation". Example 2: Turning Z X 15 21 27 W 1 0 2 . 5 Ø 1 1 Program code Comment N5 T1 D1 S2000 M3 ; Loading of tool T1, spindle on with clockwise direction of rotation. N10 G0 G90 X11 Z1 ; Absolute dimension input, in rapid traverse to position XZ. N20 G1 Z-15 F0.2 ; Linear interpolation, feed of the tool. N30 G3 X11 Z-27 I-8 K-6 ; Counterclockwise circular interpolation, circle end point in absolute dimensions, circle center point in incremental dimensions. N40 G1 Z-40 ; Traverse N50 M30 ; End of block Note For information on the input of the circle center point coordinates I and J, see Section "Circular interpolation". Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 189 Example 3: Incremental dimensions without traversing of the active zero offset Settings: ● G54 contains an offset in X of 25 ● SD42440 $SC_FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG = 0 Program code Comment N10 G90 G0 G54 X100 N20 G1 G91 X10 ; Incremental dimensions active, traversing in X of 10 mm (the zero offset is not traversed). N30 G90 X50 ; Absolute dimensions active, traverse to position X75 (the zero offset is traversed). See also Absolute and incremental dimensions for turning and milling (G90/G91) (Page 190) Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals 190 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 8.3.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions for turning and milling (G90/G91) The two following figures illustrate the programming with absolute dimensions (G90) or incremental dimensions (G91) using turning and milling technology examples. Milling: X Y 10 50 60 8 5 G90 G91 G 9 0 3 0 2 0 3 5 G 9 1 Turning: 7.5 Ø 2 5 Z X G91 G90 G 9 1 G 9 0 Note On conventional turning machines, it is usual to consider incremental traversing blocks in the transverse axis as radius values, while diameter specifications apply for the reference dimensions. This conversion for G90 is performed using the commands DIAMON, DIAMOF or DIAM90. Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 191 8.3.4 Absolute dimension for rotary axes (DC, ACP, ACN) Function The non-modal and G90/G91-independent commands DC, ACP and ACN are available for the positioning of rotary axes in absolute dimensions. DC, ACP and ACN differ in the basic approach strategy: Maximum traversing range DC ACP ACN Syntax <rotary axis>=DC(<value>) <rotary axis>=ACP(<value>) <rotary axis>=ACN(<value>) Significance <rotary axis>: Identifier of the rotary axis that is to be traversed (e.g. A, B or C) DC: Command for the direct approach to the position The rotary axis approaches the programmed position directly on the shortest path. The rotary axis traverses a maximum range of 180°. ACP: Command to approach the position in a positive direction The rotary axis traverses to the programmed position in the positive direction of axis rotation (counterclockwise). Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals 192 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 ACN: Command to approach the position in a negative direction The rotary axis traverses to the programmed position in the negative direction of axis rotation (clockwise). Rotary axis position to be approached in absolute dimensions <value>: Range of values: 0 - 360 degrees Note The positive direction of rotation (clockwise or counterclockwise) is set in the machine data. Note The traversing range between 0° and 360° must be set in the machine data (modulo behavior) for positioning with direction specification (ACP, ACN). G91 or IC must be programmed to traverse modulo rotary axes more than 360° in a block. Note The commands DC, ACP and ACN can also be used for spindle positioning (SPOS, SPOSA) from standstill. Example: SPOS=DC(45) Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 193 Example Milling on a rotary table Z X 5 X Y 270° The tool is stationary, the table turns to 270° in a clockwise direction to produce a circular groove. Program code Comment N10 SPOS=0 ; Spindle in position control N20 G90 G0 X-20 Y0 Z2 T1 ; Absolute dimensions, feed tool T1 in rapid traverse. N30 G1 Z-5 F500 ; Lower tool during feed N40 C=ACP(270) ; Table turns clockwise to 270 degrees (positive), the tool mills a circular groove. N50 G0 Z2 M30 ; Retraction, end of program References Function Manual, Extended Functions; Rotary Axes (R2) Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals 194 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 8.3.5 Inch or metric dimensions (G70/G700, G71/G710) Function The following G functions can be used to switch between the metric measuring system and the inch measuring system. Syntax G70/G71 G700/G710 Significance G70: Activation of the inch measuring system The inch measuring system is used to read and write geometric data in units of length. Technological data in units of length, e.g. feedrates, tool offsets or settable work offsets, as well as machine data and system variables, are read and written using the parameterized basic system (MD10240 $MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC). G71: Activation of the metric measuring system The metric measuring system is used to read and write geometric data in units of length. Technological data in units of length, e.g. feedrates, tool offsets or settable work offsets, as well as machine data and system variables, are read and written using the parameterized basic system (MD10240 $MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC). G700: Activation of the inch measuring system All geometrical and technological data in units of length (see above) is read and written using the inch measuring system. G710: Activation of the metric measuring system All geometrical and technological data in units of length (see above) is read and written using the metric measuring system. Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 195 Example Changeover between inch system and metric system The parameterized basic system is metric: MD10240 $MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC = TRUE X Y 20 1.18" 90 G71 G71 G70 G70 2.75" 3 . 5 4 " 3 . 2 2 " 3 0 Program code Comment N10 G0 G90 X20 Y30 Z2 S2000 M3 T1 ; X=20 mm, Y=30 mm, Z=2 mm, F=rapid traverse mm/min N20 G1 Z-5 F500 ; Z=-5 mm, F=500 mm/min N30 X90 ; X=90 mm N40 G70 X2.75 Y3.22 ; Prog. meas. system: inch X=2.75 inch, Y=3.22 inch, F=500 mm/min N50 X1.18 Y3.54 ; X=1.18 inch, Y=3.54 inch, F=500 mm/min N60 G71 X20 Y30 ; Prog. meas. system: metric X=20 mm, Y=30 mm, F=500 mm/min N70 G0 Z2 ; Z=2 mm, F=rapid traverse mm/min N80 M30 ; End of program Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals 196 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information G70/G71 With G70/G71 active, only the following geometric data is interpreted in the relevant measuring system: ● Position data (X, Y, Z, …) ● Circular-path programming: – Interpolation point coordinates (I1, J1, K1) – Interpolation parameters (I, J, K) – Circle radius (CR) ● Pitch (G34, G35) ● Programmable zero offset (TRANS) ● Polar radius (RP) Synchronized actions If, in a synchronized action (condition component and/or action component) no explicit measuring system is programmed (G70/G71/G700/G710), the measuring system which was active in the channel at the point of execution will be applied to the synchronized action (condition component and/or action component). NOTICE Read position data in synchronized actions If a measuring system has not been explicitly programmed in the synchronized action (condition component and/or action component) position data specified in units of length in the synchronized action are always read in the parameterized basic system. References ● Function Manual, Basic Functions; Speeds, Setpoint/Actual-Value System, Closed-Loop Control (G2), Section "Metric/inch dimension system" ● Programming Manual, Job Planning; Section "Motion-synchronous actions" ● Function Manual, Synchronized Actions Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 197 8.3.6 Channel-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMON, DIAM90, DIAMOF, DIAMCYCOF) Function During turning, the dimensions for the transverse axis can be specified in the diameter (①) or in the radius (②): 1 2 W W Z X Z X 3 0 2 0 1 5 1 0 So that the dimensions from a technical drawing can be transferred directly (without conversion) to the NC program, channel-specific diameter or radius programming is activated using the modal commands DIAMON, DIAM90, DIAMOF, and DIAMCYCOF. Note The channel-specific diameter/radius programming refers to the geometry axis defined as transverse axis via MD20100 $MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF (→ see machine manufacturer's specifications). Only one transverse axis per channel can be defined via MD20100. Syntax DIAMON DIAM90 DIAMOF Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals 198 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Significance Command for the activation of the independent channel-specific diameter programming The effect of DIAMON is independent of the programmed dimensions mode (absolute dimensions G90 or incremental dimensions G91): • for G90: Dimensions in the diameter DIAMON: • for G91: Dimensions in the diameter Command for the activation of the dependent channel-specific diameter programming The effect of DIAM90 depends on the programmed dimensions mode: • for G90: Dimensions in the diameter DIAM90: • for G91: Dimensions in the radius Command for the deactivation of the channel-specific diameter programming Channel-specific radius programming takes effect when diameter programming is deactivated. The effect of DIAMOF is independent of the programmed dimensions mode: • for G90: Dimensions in the radius DIAMOF: • for G91: Dimensions in the radius DIAMCYCOF: Command for the deactivation of channel-specific diameter programming during cycle processing. In this way, computations in the cycle can always be made in the radius. The last G function active in this group remains active for the position indicator and the basic block indicator. Note With DIAMON or DIAM90, the transverse-axis actual values will always be displayed as a diameter. This also applies to reading of actual values in the workpiece coordinate system with MEAS, MEAW, $P_EP[x] and $AA_IW[x]. Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 199 Example Program code Comment N10 G0 X0 Z0 ; Approach starting point. N20 DIAMOF ; Diameter programming off. N30 G1 X30 S2000 M03 F0.7 ; X axis = transverse axis, radius programming active; traverse to radius position X30. N40 DIAMON ; The diameter programming is active for the transverse axis. N50 G1 X70 Z-20 ; Traverse to diameter position X70 and Z-20. N60 Z-30 N70 DIAM90 ; Diameter programming for absolute dimensions and radius programming for incremental dimensions. N80 G91 X10 Z-20 ; Incremental dimensions active. N90 G90 X10 ; Absolute dimensions active. N100 M30 ; End of program. Further information Diameter values (DIAMON/DIAM90) The diameter values apply for the following data: ● Actual value display of the transverse axis in the workpiece coordinate system ● JOG mode: Increments for incremental dimensions and handwheel travel ● Programming of end positions: Interpolation parameters I, J, K for G2/G3, if these have been programmed absolutely with AC. If I, J, K are programmed incrementally (IC), the radius is always calculated. ● Reading actual values in the workpiece coordinate system for: MEAS, MEAW, $P_EP[X], $AA_IW[X] Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals 200 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 8.3.7 Axis-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMONA, DIAM90A, DIAMOFA, DIACYCOFA, DIAMCHANA, DIAMCHAN, DAC, DIC, RAC, RIC) Function In addition to channel-specific diameter programming, the axis-specific diameter programming function enables the modal or non-modal dimensions and display in the diameter for one or more axes. Note The axis-specific diameter programming is only possible for axes that are permitted as further transverse axes for the axis-specific diameter programming via MD30460 $MA_BASE_FUNCTION_MASK (→ see machine manufacturer's specifications). Syntax Modal axis-specific diameter programming for several transverse axes in the channel: DIAMONA[<axis>] DIAM90A[<axis>] DIAMOFA[<axis>] DIACYCOFA[<axis>] Acceptance of the channel-specific diameter/radius programming: DIAMCHANA[<axis>] DIAMCHAN Non-modal axis-specific diameter/radius programming: <axis>=DAC(<value>) <axis>=DIC(<value>) <axis>=RAC(<value>) <axis>=RIC(<value>) Meaning Modal axis-specific diameter programming Command for the activation of the independent axis-specific diameter programming The effect of DIAMONA is independent of the programmed dimensions mode (G90/G91 or AC/IC): • for G90, AC: Dimensions in the diameter DIAMONA: • for G91, IC: Dimensions in the diameter Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 201 Command for the activation of the dependent axis-specific diameter programming The effect of DIAM90A depends on the programmed dimensions mode: • for G90, AC: Dimensions in the diameter DIAM90A: • for G91, IC: Dimensions in the radius Command for the deactivation of the axis-specific diameter programming Axis-specific radius programming takes effect when diameter programming is deactivated. The effect of DIAMOFA is independent of the programmed dimensions mode: • for G90, AC: Dimensions in the radius DIAMOFA: • for G91, IC: Dimensions in the radius DIACYCOFA: Command for the deactivation of axis-specific diameter programming during cycle processing. In this way, computations in the cycle can always be made in the radius. The last G function active in this group remains active for the position indicator and the basic block indicator. Axis identifier of the axis for which the axis-specific diameter programming is to be activated Permitted axis identifiers are as follows: • Geometry/channel axis name or • Machine axis name <axis>: Range of values: The axis specified must be a known axis in the channel. Other conditions: • The axis must be permitted for the axis-specific diameter programming via MD30460 $MA_BASE_FUNCTION_MASK. • Rotary axes are not permitted to serve as transverse axes. Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals 202 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Acceptance of the channel-specific diameter/radius programming DIAMCHANA: With the DIAMCHANA[<axis>] command, the specified axis accepts the channel status of the diameter/radius programming and is then assigned to the channel-specific diameter/radius programming. DIAMCHAN: With the DIAMCHAN command, all axes permitted for the axis-specific diameter programming accept the channel status of the diameter/radius programming and are then assigned to the channel-specific diameter/radius programming. Non-modal axis-specific diameter/radius programming The non-modal axis-specific diameter/radius programming specifies the dimension type as a diameter or radius value in the part program and synchronized actions. The modal status of diameter/radius programming remains unchanged. DAC: The DAC command sets the following dimensions to non-modal for the specified axis: Diameter in absolute dimensions DIC: The DIC command sets the following dimensions to non-modal for the specified axis: Diameter in incremental dimensions RAC: The RAC command sets the following dimensions to non-modal for the specified axis: Radius in absolute dimensions RIC: The RIC command sets the following dimensions to non-modal for the specified axis: Radius in incremental dimensions Note With DIAMONA[<axis>] or DIAM90A[<axis>], the transverse-axis actual values are always displayed as a diameter. This also applies to reading of actual values in the workpiece coordinate system with MEAS, MEAW, $P_EP[x] and $AA_IW[x]. Note During the replacement of an additional transverse axis because of a GET request, the status of the diameter/radius programming in the other channel is accepted with RELEASE[<axis>]. Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 203 Examples Example 1: Modal axis-specific diameter/radius programming X is the transverse axis in the channel, axis-specific diameter programming is permitted for Y. Program code Comment N10 G0 X0 Z0 DIAMON ; Channel-specific diameter programming active for X. N15 DIAMOF ; Channel-specific diameter programming off. N20 DIAMONA[Y] ; Modal axis-specific diameter programming active for Y. N25 X200 Y100 ; Radius programming active for X. N30 DIAMCHANA[Y] ; Y accepts the status of the channel-specific diameter/radius programming and is assigned to this. N35 X50 Y100 ; Radius programming active for X and Y. N40 DIAMON ; Channel-specific diameter programming on. N45 X50 Y100 ; Diameter programming active for X and Y. Example 2: Non-modal axis-specific diameter/radius programming X is the transverse axis in the channel, axis-specific diameter programming is permitted for Y. Program code Comment N10 DIAMON ; Channel-specific diameter programming on. N15 G0 G90 X20 Y40 DIAMONA[Y] ; Modal axis-specific diameter programming active for Y. N20 G01 X=RIC(5) ; Dimensions effective in this block for X: Radius in incremental dimensions. N25 X=RAC(80) ; Dimensions effective in this block for X: Radius in absolute dimensions. N30 WHEN $SAA_IM[Y]> 50 DO POS[X]=RIC(1) ; X is command axis. Dimensions effective in this block for X: Radius in incremental dimensions. N40 WHEN $SAA_IM[Y]> 60 DO POS[X]=DAC(10) ; X is command axis. Dimensions effective in this block for X: Radius in absolute dimensions. N50 G4 F3 Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Fundamentals 204 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information Diameter values (DIAMONA/DIAM90A) The diameter values apply for the following data: ● Actual value display of the transverse axis in the workpiece coordinate system ● JOG mode: Increments for incremental dimensions and handwheel travel ● Programming of end positions: Interpolation parameters I, J, K for G2/G3, if these have been programmed absolutely with AC. If I, J, K are programmed incrementally (IC), the radius is always calculated. ● Reading actual values in the workpiece coordinate system for: MEAS, MEAW, $P_EP[X], $AA_IW[X] Non-modal axis-specific diameter programming (DAC, DIC, RAC, RIC) The statements DAC, DIC, RAC, RIC are permissible for any commands for which channel- specific diameter programming is relevant: ● Axis position: X..., POS, POSA ● Oscillating: OSP1, OSP2, OSS, OSE, POSP ● Interpolation parameters: I, J, K ● Contour definition: Straight line with specified angle ● Rapid retraction: POLF[AX] ● Movement in tool direction: MOVT ● Smooth approach and retraction: G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341 Geometry settings 8.4 Position of workpiece for turning Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 205 8.4 8.4 Position of workpiece for turning Axis identifiers The two geometry axes perpendicular to one another are usually called: Longitudinal axis = Z axis (abscissa) Transverse axis = X axis (ordinate) Workpiece zero Whereas the machine zero is permanently defined, the workpiece zero can be freely selected on the longitudinal axis. Generally the workpiece zero is on the front or rear side of the workpiece. Both the machine and the workpiece zero are on the turning center. The settable offset on the X axis is therefore zero. Workpiece Machine Workpiece zero rear Workpiece zero front Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece Machine G54...G599 or TRANS or TRANS W M G54 ...G599 M X X Z Z X X Z M Machine zero W Workpiece zero Z Longitudinal axis X Transverse axis G54 to G599 or TRANS Call for the position of the workpiece zero Geometry settings 8.4 Position of workpiece for turning Fundamentals 206 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Transverse axis Generally the dimensions for the transverse axis are diameter specifications (double path dimension compared to other axes): Longitudinal axis T r a n s v e r s e a x i s D 1 W D 2 M Z X The geometry axis that is to serve as transverse axis is defined in the machine data (→ machine manufacturer). Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 207 Motion commands 9 Contour elements The programmed workpiece contour can be made up of the following contour elements: ● Straight lines ● Circular arcs ● Helical curves (through overlaying of straight lines and circular arcs) Travel commands The following travel commands are available for the creation of these contour elements: ● Rapid traverse motion (G0) ● Linear interpolation (G1) ● Circular interpolation clockwise (G2) ● Circular interpolation counterclockwise (G3) The travel commands are modal. Target positions A motion block contains the target positions for the axes to be traversed (path axes, synchronized axes, positioning axes). The target positions can be programmed in Cartesian coordinates or in polar coordinates. CAUTION The axis address may only be programmed once per block. Starting point - target point The traversing motion is always for the last point reached to the programmed target position. This target position is then the starting position for the next travel command. Motion commands 8.4 Position of workpiece for turning Fundamentals 208 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Workpiece contour The motion blocks produce the workpiece contour when performed in succession: Z X 3 1 2 4 5 Figure 9-1 Motion blocks for turning 6 5 4 3 2 1 Figure 9-2 Motion blocks for milling NOTICE Before machining, the workpiece must be positioned in such a way that the tool or workpiece cannot be damaged. Motion commands 9.1 Travel commands with Cartesian coordinates (G0, G1, G2, G3, X..., Y..., Z...) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 209 9.1 9.1 Travel commands with Cartesian coordinates (G0, G1, G2, G3, X..., Y..., Z...) Function The position specified in the NC block with Cartesian coordinates can be approached with rapid traverse motion G0, linear interpolation G1 or circular interpolation G2 /G3. Syntax G0 X... Y... Z... G1 X... Y... Z... G2 X... Y... Z... ... G3 X... Y... Z... ... Significance G0: Command for the activation of the rapid traverse motion G1: Command for the activation of the linear interpolation G2: Command for the activation of the clockwise circular interpolation G3: Command for the activation of the counterclockwise circular interpolation X...: Cartesian coordinate of the target position in the X direction Y...: Cartesian coordinate of the target position in the Y direction Z...: Cartesian coordinate of the target position in the Z direction Note In addition to the coordinates of the target position X..., Y..., Z..., the circular interpolation G2 / G3 also requires further data (e.g. the circle center point coordinates; see "Circular interpolation types (Page 225)"). Motion commands 9.1 Travel commands with Cartesian coordinates (G0, G1, G2, G3, X..., Y..., Z...) Fundamentals 210 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example Y- X- X- 2 0 6 3 6 X+ Y+ 20 X+ Z+ Program code Comment N10 G17 S400 M3 ; Selection of the working plane, spindle clockwise N20 G0 X40 Y-6 Z2 ; Approach of the starting position specified with Cartesian coordinates in rapid traverse N30 G1 Z-3 F40 ; Activation of the linear interpolation, feed of the tool N40 X12 Y-20 ; Travel on an inclined line to an end position specified with Cartesian coordinates N50 G0 Z100 M30 ; Retraction in rapid traverse for tool change Motion commands 9.2 Travel commands with polar coordinates Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 211 9.2 9.2 Travel commands with polar coordinates 9.2.1 Reference point of the polar coordinates (G110, G111, G112) Function The point from which the dimensioning starts is called the pole. The pole can be specified in Cartesian or polar coordinates. The reference point for the pole coordinates is clearly defined with the G110 to G112 commands. Absolute or incremental dimension inputs therefore have no effect. Syntax G110/G111/G112 X… Y… Z… G110/G111/G112 AP=… RP=… Significance G110 ...: With the command G110, the following pole coordinates refer to the last position reached. G111 ...: With the command G111, the following pole coordinates refer to the zero point of the current workpiece coordinate system. G112 ...: With the command G112, the following pole coordinates refer to the last valid pole. Note: The commands G110...G112 must be programmed in a separate NC block. X… Y… Z…: Specification of the pole in Cartesian coordinates Specification of the pole in polar coordinates Polar angle Angle between the polar radius and the horizontal axis of the working plane (e.g. X axis for G17). The positive direction of rotation runs counterclockwise. AP=…: Range of values: ± 0…360° AP=… RP=…: RP=…: Polar radius The specification is always in absolute positive values in [mm] or [inch]. Motion commands 9.2 Travel commands with polar coordinates Fundamentals 212 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Note It is possible to switch block-by-block in the NC program between polar and Cartesian dimensions. It is possible to return directly to the Cartesian system by using Cartesian coordinate identifiers (X..., Y..., Z...). The defined pole is moreover retained up to program end. Note If no pole has been specified, the zero point of the current workpiece coordinate system applies. Example 60° G112 (X) G111 (Y) G111 (X) G110 (X) 30° G110 (Y) G112 (Y) Y X Pole 1 Pole 2 Pole 3 Poles 1 to 3 are defined as follows: • Pole 1 with G111 X… Y… • Pole 2 with G110 X… Y… • Pole 3 with G112 X… Y… Motion commands 9.2 Travel commands with polar coordinates Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 213 9.2.2 Travel commands with polar coordinates (G0, G1, G2, G3, AP, RP) Function Travel commands with polar coordinates are useful when the dimensions of a workpiece or part of the workpiece are measured from a central point and the dimensions are specified in angles and radii (e.g. for drilling patterns). n m 306° 234° 162° 90° 18° Y X Syntax G0/G1/G2/G3 AP=… RP=… Significance G0: Command for the activation of rapid traverse motion G1: Command for the activation of linear interpolation G2: Command for the activation of clockwise circular interpolation G3: Command for the activation of counter-clockwise circular interpolation Motion commands 9.2 Travel commands with polar coordinates Fundamentals 214 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Polar angle Angle between the polar radius and the horizontal axis of the working plane (e.g. X axis for G17). The positive direction of rotation runs counter-clockwise. Range of values: ± 0…360° The angle can be specified either incremental or absolute: AP=AC(...): Absolute dimension input AP=IC(...): Incremental dimension input With incremental dimension input, the last programmed angle applies as reference. AP: The polar angle remains stored until a new pole is defined or the working plane is changed. RP: Polar radius The specification is always in absolute positive values in [mm] or [inch]. The polar radius remains stored until a new value is entered. Note The polar coordinates refer to the pole specified with G110 ... G112 and apply in the working plane selected with G17 to G19. Note The 3rd geometry axis, which lies perpendicular to the working plane, can also be specified in Cartesian coordinates. Z AP RP This enables spatial parameters to be programmed in cylindrical coordinates. Example: G17 G0 AP… RP… Z… Motion commands 9.2 Travel commands with polar coordinates Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 215 Supplementary conditions ● No Cartesian coordinates such as interpolation parameters, axis addresses, etc. may be programmed for the selected working plane in NC blocks with polar end point coordinates. ● If a pole has not been defined with G110 ... G112, then the zero point of the current workpiece coordinate system is automatically considered as the pole: A P = 3 0 A P = 5 0 A P = l C ( 2 0 ) 30° 20° X Y ● Polar radius RP = 0 The polar radius is calculated from the distance between the starting point vector in the pole plane and the active pole vector. The calculated polar radius is then saved as modal. This applies irrespective of the selected pole definition (G110 ... G112). If both points have been programmed identically, this radius = 0 and alarm 14095 is generated. ● Only polar angle AP has been programmed If no polar radius RP has been programmed in the current block, but a polar angle AP, then when there is a difference between the current position and pole in the workpiece coordinates, this difference is used as polar radius and saved as modal. If the difference = 0, then the pole coordinates are specified again and the modal polar radius remains at zero. Motion commands 9.2 Travel commands with polar coordinates Fundamentals 216 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example Creation of a drilling pattern 3 0 3 8 Y X 72° 43 72° 72° 72° 18° The positions of the holes are specified in polar coordinates. Each hole is machined with the same production sequence: Rough-drilling, drilling as dimensioned, reaming … The machining sequence is stored in the subroutine. Program code Comment N10 G17 G54 ; Working plane X/Y, workpiece zero. N20 G111 X43 Y38 ; Specification of the pole. N30 G0 RP=30 AP=18 Z5G0 ; Approach starting point, specification in cylindrical coordinates. N40 L10 ; Subprogram call. N50 G91 AP=72 ; Approach next position in rapid traverse, polar angle in incremental dimensions, polar radius from block N30 remains saved and does not have to be specified. N60 L10 ; Subprogram call. N70 AP=IC(72) . N80 L10 … N90 AP=IC(72) N100 L10 … N110 AP=IC(72) N120 L10 … N130 G0 X300 Y200 Z100 M30 ; Retract tool, end of program. N90 AP=IC(72) N100 L10 … See also Circular interpolation types (G2/G3, ...) (Page 225) Motion commands 9.3 Rapid traverse movement (G0, RTLION, RTLIOF) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 217 9.3 9.3 Rapid traverse movement (G0, RTLION, RTLIOF) Function Rapid traverse motion is used: ● For rapid positioning of the tool ● To travel around the workpiece ● To approach tool change points ● To retract the tool Non-linear interpolation is activated with the part program command RTLIOF, linear interpolation is activated with the part program command RTLION. Note The function is not suitable for workpiece machining! Syntax G0 X… Y… Z… G0 AP=… G0 RP=… RTLIOF RTLION Significance Command for the activation of the rapid traverse motion G0: Active: modal X... Y... Z...: End point in Cartesian coordinates AP=...: End point in polar coordinates, in this case polar angle RP=...: End point in polar coordinates, in this case polar radius RTLIOF: Nonlinear interpolation (each path axis interpolates as a single axis) RTLION: Linear interpolation (path axes are interpolated together) Note G0 cannot be replaced by G. Motion commands 9.3 Rapid traverse movement (G0, RTLION, RTLIOF) Fundamentals 218 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Examples Example 1: Milling X Y 30 80 N 6 0 N 2 0 6 5 2 0 Program code Comment N10 G90 S400 M3 ; Absolute dimension input, spindle clockwise N20 G0 X30 Y20 Z2 ; Approach of the starting position N30 G1 Z-5 F1000G1 ; Feed of the tool N40 X80 Y65 ; Travel on a straight line N50 G0 Z2 N60 G0 X-20 Y100 Z100 M30 ; Retract tool, end of program Motion commands 9.3 Rapid traverse movement (G0, RTLION, RTLIOF) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 219 Example 2: Turning Z X Ø 2 5 50 Ø 6 0 N80 N 2 0 35 7.5 Program code Comment N10 G90 S400 M3 ; Absolute dimension input, spindle clockwise N20 G0 X25 Z5 ; Approach of the starting position N30 G1 G94 Z0 F1000G1 ; Feed of the tool N40 G95 Z-7.5 F0.2 N50 X60 Z-35 ; Travel on a straight line N60 Z-50 N70 G0 X62 N80 G0 X80 Z20 M30 ; Retract tool, end of program Motion commands 9.3 Rapid traverse movement (G0, RTLION, RTLIOF) Fundamentals 220 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information Rapid traverse velocity The tool movement programmed with G0 is executed at the highest traversing speed (rapid traverse). The rapid traverse speed is defined separately for each axis in machine data. If the rapid traverse movement is executed simultaneously on several axes, the rapid traverse speed is determined by the axis, which requires the most time for its section of the path. X Z Y Path component (Z) Path component (Y) Path component (X) P a th o f r a p id tr a v e r s e m o v e m e n t Traverse path axes as positioning axes with G0 Path axes can travel in one of two different modes to execute movements in rapid traverse: ● Linear interpolation (previous behavior): The path axes are interpolated together. ● Non-linear interpolation: Each path axis interpolates as a single axis (positioning axis) independently of the other axes of the rapid traverse motion. With non-linear interpolation, the setting for the appropriate positioning axis (BRISKA, SOFTA, DRIVEA) applies with reference to the axial jerk. NOTICE Since a different contour can be traversed in nonlinear interpolation mode, synchronized actions that refer to coordinates of the original path are not operative in some cases! Motion commands 9.3 Rapid traverse movement (G0, RTLION, RTLIOF) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 221 Linear interpolation applies in the following cases: ● For a G-code combination with G0 that does not permit positioning axis motion (e.g. G40/G41/G42) ● For a combination of G0 with G64 ● When the compressor is active ● When a transformation is active Example: Program code G0 X0 Y10 G0 G40 X20 Y20 G0 G95 X100 Z100 M3 S100 Path POS[X]=0 POS[Y]=10 is traversed in path mode. No revolutional feedrate is active if path POS[X]=100 POS[Z]=100 is traversed. Settable block change time with G0 For single-axis interpolation, a new end-of-motion criterion FINEA or COARSEA or IPOENDA can be set for block change even within the braking ramp. Consecutive axes are handled in G0 like positioning axes. With the combination of ● "Block change settable in the braking ramp of the single axis interpolation" and ● "Traversing path axes in rapid traverse movement as positioning axes with G0" all axes can travel to their end point independently of one another. In this way, two sequentially programmed X and Z axes are treated like positioning axes in conjunction with G0. The block change to axis Z can be initiated by axis X as a function of the braking ramp time setting (100-0%). Axis Z starts to move while axis X is still in motion. Both axes approach their end point independently of one another. For further information, please refer to "Feed control and spindle motion". Motion commands 9.4 Linear interpolation (G1) Fundamentals 222 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 9.4 9.4 Linear interpolation (G1) Function With G1 the tool travels on paraxial, inclined or straight lines arbitrarily positioned in space. Linear interpolation permits machining of 3D surfaces, grooves, etc. Milling: Syntax G1 X… Y… Z … F… G1 AP=… RP=… F… Significance G1: Linear interpolation with feedrate (linear interpolation) X... Y... Z...: End point in Cartesian coordinates AP=...: End point in polar coordinates, in this case polar angle RP=...: End point in polar coordinates, in this case polar radius Motion commands 9.4 Linear interpolation (G1) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 223 F...: Feedrate in mm/min. The tool travels at feedrate F along a straight line from the current starting point to the programmed destination point. You can enter the destination point in Cartesian or polar coordinates. The workpiece is machined along this path. Example: G1 G94 X100 Y20 Z30 A40 F100 The end point on X, Y, Z is approached at a feedrate of 100 mm/min; the rotary axis A is traversed as a synchronized axis, ensuring that all four movements are completed at the same time. Note G1 is modal. Spindle speed S and spindle direction M3/M4 must be specified for the machining. Axis groups, for which path feedrate F applies, can be defined with FGROUP. You will find more information in the "Path behavior" section. Examples Example 1: Machining of a groove (milling) 20 80 2 15 80 20 X Z Y Y The tool travels from the starting point to the end point in the X/Y direction. Infeed takes place simultaneously in the Z direction. Motion commands 9.4 Linear interpolation (G1) Fundamentals 224 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Program code Comment N10 G17 S400 M3 ; Selection of the working plane, spindle clockwise N20 G0 X20 Y20 Z2 ; Approach of the starting position N30 G1 Z-2 F40 ; Feed of the tool N40 X80 Y80 Z-15 ; Travel on an inclined line N50 G0 Z100 M30 ; Retraction for tool change Example 2: Machining of a groove (turning) Y- X- X- 2 0 6 3 6 X+ Y+ 20 X+ Z+ Program code Comment N10 G17 S400 M3 ; Selection of the working plane, spindle clockwise N20 G0 X40 Y-6 Z2 ; Approach of the starting position N30 G1 Z-3 F40 ; Feed of the tool N40 X12 Y-20 ; Travel on an inclined line N50 G0 Z100 M30 ; Retraction for tool change Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 225 9.5 9.5 Circular interpolation 9.5.1 Circular interpolation types (G2/G3, ...) Possibilities of programming circular movements The control provides a range of different ways to program circular movements. This allows you to implement almost any type of drawing dimension directly. The circular movement is described by the: ● Center point and end point in the absolute or incremental dimension (default) ● Radius and end point in Cartesian coordinates ● Opening angle and end point in Cartesian coordinates or center point under the addresses ● Polar coordinates with the polar angle AP= and the polar radius RP= ● Intermediate and end point ● End point and tangent direction at the start point. Syntax G2/G3 X… Y… Z… I=AC(…) J=AC(…) K=AC(…) ; Absolute center point and end point with reference to the workpiece zero G2/G3 X… Y… Z… I… J… K… ; Center point in incremental dimensions with reference to the circle starting point G2/G3 X… Y… Z… CR=… ; Circle radius CR= and circle end position in Cartesian coordinates X..., Y..., Z... G2/G3 X… Y… Z… AR=… ; Opening angle AR= end point in Cartesian coordinates X..., Y..., Z... Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals 226 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 G2/G3 I… J… K… AR=… ; Opening angle AR= center point at addresses I..., J..., K... G2/G3 AP=… RP=… ; Polar coordinates with the polar angle AP= and the polar radius RP= CIP X… Y… Z… I1=AC(…) J1=AC(…) K1=(AC…) ; The intermediate point at addresses I1=, J1=, K1= CT X… Y… Z… ; Circle through starting and end point and tangent direction at starting point Significance G2: Circular interpolation, clockwise G3: Circular interpolation, counterclockwise CIP: Circular interpolation through intermediate point CT: Circle with tangential transition defines the circle X Y Z : End point in Cartesian coordinates I J K : Circle center point in Cartesian coordinates in X, Y, Z direction CR= : Circle radius AR= : Opening angle AP= : End point in polar coordinates, in this case polar angle RP= : End point in polar coordinates, in this case polar radius corresponding to circle radius I1= J1= K1= : Intermediate points in Cartesian coordinates in X, Y, Z direction Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 227 Examples Example 1: Milling X l J Y 90 25.52 115 133 269.3° 1 1 3 . 3 7 0 4 4 . 4 8 5 0 The following program lines contain an example for each circular-path programming possibility. The necessary dimensions are shown in the production drawing on the right. Program code Comment N10 G0 G90 X133 Y44.48 S800 M3 ; Approach starting point N20 G17 G1 Z-5 F1000 ; Feed of the tool N30 G2 X115 Y113.3 I-43 J25.52 ; Circle end point, center point in incremental dimensions N30 G2 X115 Y113.3 I=AC(90) J=AC(70) ; Circle end point, center point in absolute dimensions N30 G2 X115 Y113.3 CR=-50 ; Circle end point, circle radius N30 G2 AR=269.31 I-43 J25.52 ; Opening angle, center point in incremental dimensions N30 G2 AR=269.31 X115 Y113.3 ; Opening angle, circle end point N30 N30 CIP X80 Y120 Z-10 ; Circle end point and intermediate point I1=IC(-85.35) J1=IC(-35.35) K1=-6 ; Coordinates for all three geometry axes N40 M30 ; End of program Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals 228 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example 2: Turning 1 3 5.94 4 ° 75 Z X 54.25 25 95 Ø 1 2 Ø 3 3 . 3 3 Ø 7 0 Ø 9 3 . 3 3 Ø 4 0 3 0 1 4 2.326° Program code Comment N.. ... N120 G0 X12 Z0 N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.2 N130 G3 X70 Y-75 I-3.335 K-29.25 ; Circle end point, center point in incremental dimensions N130 G3 X70 Y-75 I=AC(33.33) K=AC(-54.25) ; Circle end point, center point in absolute dimensions N130 G3 X70 Z-75 CR=30 ; Circle end point, circle radius N130 G3 X70 Z-75 AR=135.944 ; Opening angle, circle end point N130 G3 I-3.335 K-29.25 AR=135.944 ; Opening angle, center point in incremental dimensions N130 G3 I=AC(33.33) K=AC(-54.25) AR=135.944 ; Opening angle, center point in absolute dimensions N130 G111 X33.33 Z-54.25 ; Polar coordinates N135 G3 RP=30 AP=142.326 ; Polar coordinates N130 CIP X70 Z-75 I1=93.33 K1=-54.25 ; Circular arc with intermediate point and end point N140G1 Z-95 N.. ... N40 M30 ; End of program Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 229 9.5.2 Circular interpolation with center point and end point (G2/G3, X... Y... Z..., I... J... K...) Function Circular interpolation enables machining of full circles or arcs. The circular movement is described by: ● The end point in Cartesian coordinates X, Y, Z and ● The circle center point at addresses I, J, K. If the circle is programmed with a center point but no end point, the result is a full circle. Syntax G2/G3 X… Y… Z… I… J… K… G2/G3 X… Y… Z… I=AC(…) J=AC(…) K=(AC…) Significance G2: Circular interpolation clockwise G3: Circular interpolation counter-clockwise X Y Z : End point in Cartesian coordinates I: Coordinates of the circle center point in the X direction J: Coordinates of the circle center point in the Y direction K: Coordinates of the circle center point in the Z direction =AC(…): Absolute dimensions (non-modal) Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals 230 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Note G2 and G3 are modal. The default settings G90/G91 absolute and incremental dimensions are only valid for the circle end point. Per default, the center point coordinates I, J, K are entered in incremental dimensions in relation to the circle starting point. You can program the absolute center point dimensions in relation to the workpiece zero block-by-block with: I=AC(…), J=AC(…), K=AC(…). One interpolation parameter I, J, K with value 0 can be omitted, but the associated second parameter must always be specified. Examples Example 1: Milling l J J = A C ( . . . ) l = AC(...) X Y 17.203 17.500 . 50.000 t 5 0 . 0 0 0 3 8 . 0 2 9 3 0 . 2 1 1 Circle end point Circle starting point Center point data using incremental dimensions N10 G0 X67.5 Y80.211 N20 G3 X17.203 Y38.029 I–17.5 J–30.211 F500 Center point data using absolute dimensions N10 G0 X67.5 Y80.211 N20 G3 X17.203 Y38.029 I=AC(50) J=AC(50) Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 231 Example 2: Turning 75 Z X 25 95 3 0 Ø 7 0 Ø 4 0 Center point data using incremental dimensions N120 G0 X12 Z0 N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.2 N130 G3 X70 Z-75 I-3.335 K-29.25 N135 G1 Z-95 Center point data using absolute dimensions N120 G0 X12 Z0 N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.2 N130 G3 X70 Z-75 I=AC(33.33) K=AC(-54.25) N135 G1 Z-95 Further information Indication of working plane Z X Y G 1 7 G 1 8 G 1 9 Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals 232 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 The control needs the working plane parameter (G17 to G19) to calculate the direction of rotation for the circle (G2 is clockwise or G3 is counter-clockwise). Z Y X G2 G3 G3 G2 G2 G3 9 8 It is advisable to specify the working plane generally. Exception: You can also machine circles outside the selected working plane (not with arc angle and helix parameters). In this case, the axis addresses that you specify as an end point determine the circle plane. Programmed feedrate FGROUP can be used to specify which axes are to be traversed with a programmed feedrate. For more information please refer to the Path behavior section. Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 233 9.5.3 Circular interpolation with radius and end point (G2/G3, X... Y... Z.../ I... J... K..., CR) Function The circular motion is described by the: ● Circle radius CR=and ● End point in Cartesian coordinates X, Y, Z. In addition to the circle radius, you must also specify the leading sign +/– to indicate whether the traversing angle is to be greater than or less than 180°. A positive leading sign can be omitted. Note There is no practical limitation on the maximum size of the programmable radius. Syntax G2/G3 X… Y… Z… CR= G2/G3 I… J… K… CR= Significance G2: Circular interpolation clockwise G3: Circular interpolation counter-clockwise X Y Z : End point in Cartesian coordinates. These specifications depend on the travel commands G90/G91 or ...=AC(...)/...=IC(..) I J K : Circle center point in Cartesian coordinates (in X, Y, Z direction) The identifiers have the following meanings: I: Coordinate of the circle center point in the X direction J: Coordinate of the circle center point in the Y direction K: Coordinate of the circle center point in the Z direction CR= : Circle radius The identifiers have the following meanings: CR=+…: Angle less than or equal to 180° CR=–…: Angle more than 180° Note You don't need to specify the center point with this procedure. Full circles (traversing angle 360°) are not programmed with CR=, but via the circle end position and interpolation parameters. Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals 234 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Examples Example 1: Milling X Y 17.203 67.500 C R = 3 4 . 9 1 3 CR = -... CR = +... 8 0 . 5 1 1 3 8 . 0 2 9 Program code N10 G0 X67.5 Y80.511 N20 G3 X17.203 Y38.029 CR=34.913 F500 ... Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 235 Example 2: Turning 75 Z X 25 95 3 0 Ø 7 0 Ø 4 0 Program code ... N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.2 N130 G3 X70 Z-75 CR=30 N135 G1 Z-95 ... Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals 236 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 9.5.4 Circular interpolation with opening angle and center point (G2/G3, X... Y... Z.../ I... J... K..., AR) Function The circular movement is described by: ● The opening angle AR = and ● The end point in Cartesian coordinates X, Y, Z or ● The circle center at addresses I, J, K Syntax G2/G3 X… Y… Z… AR= G2/G3 I… J… K… AR= Significance G2: Circular interpolation clockwise G3: Circular interpolation counter-clockwise X Y Z : End point in Cartesian coordinates I J K : Circle center point in Cartesian coordinates (in X, Y, Z direction) The identifiers have the following meanings: I: Coordinate of the circle center point in the X direction J: Coordinate of the circle center point in the Y direction K: Coordinate of the circle center point in the Z direction AR= : Opening angle, range of values 0° to 360° =AC(…): Absolute dimensions (non-modal) Note Full circles (traversing angle 360°) cannot be programmed with AR=, but must be programmed using the circle end position and interpolation parameters. The center point coordinates I, J, K are normally entered in incremental dimensions with reference to the circle starting point. You can program the absolute center point dimensions in relation to the workpiece zero block-by-block with: I=AC(…), J=AC(…), K=AC(…). One interpolation parameter I, J, K with value 0 can be omitted, but the associated second parameter must always be specified. Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 237 Examples Example 1: Milling X Y 17.203 17.500 50.000 l J 5 0 . 0 0 0 3 8 . 0 2 9 3 0 . 2 1 1 1 4 0 . 1 3 4 ° Aperture angle Circle starting point Program code N10 G0 X67.5 Y80.211 N20 G3 X17.203 Y38.029 AR=140.134 F500 N20 G3 I–17.5 J–30.211 AR=140.134 F500 Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals 238 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example 2: Turning Z X 54.25 25 95 Ø 3 3 . 3 3 3 0 Ø 4 0 1 4 2 .326 ° Program code N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.2 N130 G3 X70 Z-75 AR=135.944 N130 G3 I-3.335 K-29.25 AR=135.944 N130 G3 I=AC(33.33) K=AC(-54.25) AR=135.944 N135 G1 Z-95 Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 239 9.5.5 Circular interpolation with polar coordinates (G2/G3, AP, RP) Function The circular movement is described by: ● The polar angle AP=... ● The polar radius RP=... The following rule applies: ● The pole lies at the circle center. ● The polar radius corresponds to the circle radius. Syntax G2/G3 AP= RP= Significance G2: Circular interpolation clockwise G3: Circular interpolation counter-clockwise X Y Z : End point in Cartesian coordinates AP= : End point in polar coordinates, in this case polar angle RP= : End point in polar coordinates, in this case polar radius corresponds to circle radius Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals 240 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Examples Example 1: Milling G 1 1 1 X Y R P = 3 4 . 9 1 3 50.000 67.500 8 0 . 5 1 1 5 0 . 0 0 0 A P = 2 0 0 . 0 5 2° 8 0 . 2 1 1 Program code N10 G0 X67.5 Y80.211 N20 G111 X50 Y50 N30 G3 RP=34.913 AP=200.052 F500 Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 241 Example 2: Turning Z X 54.25 25 95 Ø 3 3 . 3 3 3 0 Ø 4 0 1 4 2 .326 ° Program code N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.2 N130 G111 X33.33 Z-54.25 N135 G3 RP=30 AP=142.326 N140 G1 Z-95 Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals 242 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 9.5.6 Circular interpolation with intermediate point and end point (CIP, X... Y... Z..., I1... J1... K1...) Function CIP can be used to program arcs. These arcs can also be inclined in space. In this case, you describe the intermediate and end points with three coordinates. The circular movement is described by: ● The intermediate point at addresses I1=, J1=, K1= and ● The end point in Cartesian coordinates X, Y, Z. X Y l1 J1 Y K1 Z lntermediate point The traversing direction is determined by the order of the starting point, intermediate point and end point. Syntax CIP X… Y… Z… I1=AC(…) J1=AC(…) K1=(AC…) Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 243 Meaning CIP: Circular interpolation through intermediate point X Y Z : End point in Cartesian coordinates. These specifications depend on the travel commands G90/G91 or ...=AC(...)/...=IC(..) I1= J1= K1= : Circle center point in Cartesian coordinates (in X, Y, Z direction) The identifiers have the following meanings: I: Coordinate of the circle center point in the X direction J: Coordinate of the circle center point in the Y direction K: Coordinate of the circle center point in the Z direction =AC(…): Absolute dimensions (non-modal) =IC(…): Incremental dimensions (non-modal) Note CIP is modal. Input in absolute and incremental dimensions The G90/G91 defaults for absolute or incremental dimensions are valid for the intermediate and circle end points. With G91, the circle starting point is used as the reference for the intermediate point and end point. Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals 244 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Examples Example 1: Milling X Z Y Y 85.35 80 130 10 6 2 1 2 0 6 0 3 5 . 3 5 In order to machine an inclined circular groove, a circle is described by specifying the intermediate point with three interpolation parameters, and the end point with 3 coordinates. Program code Comment N10 G0 G90 X130 Y60 S800 M3 ; Approach starting point. N20 G17 G1 Z-2 F100 ; Feed of the tool. N30 CIP X80 Y120 Z-10 ; Circle end point and intermediate point. I1= IC(-85.35)J1=IC(-35.35) K1=-6 ; Coordinates for all 3 geometry axes. N40 M30 ; End of program. Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 245 Example 2: Turning 75 Z X 54.25 25 95 Ø 7 0 Ø 4 0 Ø 9 3 . 3 3 Program code N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.2 N130 CIP X70 Z-75 I1=IC(26.665) K1=IC(-29.25) N130 CIP X70 Z-75 I1=93.33 K1=-54.25 N135 G1 Z-95 Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals 246 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 9.5.7 Circular interpolation with tangential transition (CT, X... Y... Z...) Function The Tangential transition function is an expansion of the circle programming. The circle is defined by: ● The start and end point and ● The tangent direction at the start point. The G code CT produces an arc that lies at a tangent to the contour element programmed previously. 1 2 S E L1 L2 L3 S E CT1 CT2 CT3 Arc S-E at a tangent to the straight line 1-2 Arcs that lie at a tangent depend on the previous contour element Determination of the tangent direction The tangent direction in the starting point of a CT block is determined from the end tangent of the programmed contour of the last block with a traversing motion. There can be any number of blocks without traversing information between this block and the current block. Syntax CT X… Y… Z… Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 247 Significance CT: Circle with tangential transition X... Y... Z...: End point in Cartesian coordinates Note CT is modal. As a rule, the circle is clearly defined by the tangent direction as well as the starting point and end point. Examples Example 1: Milling X Y 30 80 3 0 1 5 50 60 70 with TRC Milling a circular arc with CT directly after the straight part. Program code Comment N10 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 G90 T1 D1 N20 G41 X30 Y30 G1 F1000 ; Activation of TRC. N30 CT X50 Y15 ; Circular-path programming with tangential transition. N40 X60 Y-5 N50 G1 X70 N60 G0 G40 X80 Y0 Z20 N70 M30 Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals 248 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example 2: Turning Z X 42 30 Ø 7 0 Ø 2 3 . 2 9 3 Ø 4 0 Ø 5 8 . 1 4 6 Program code Comment N110 G1 X23.293 Z0 F10 N115 X40 Z-30 F0.2 N120 CT X58.146 Z-42 ; Circular-path programming with tangential transition. N125 G1 X70 Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 249 Further information Splines In the case of splines, the tangential direction is defined by the straight line through the last two points. In the case of A and C splines with active ENAT or EAUTO, this direction is generally not the same as the direction at the end point of the spline. The transition of B splines is always tangential, the tangent direction is defined as for A or C splines and active ETAN. Frame change If a frame change takes place between the block defining the tangent and the CT block, the tangent is also subjected to this change. Limit case If the extension of the start tangent runs through the end point, a straight line is produced instead of a circle (limit case: circle with infinite radius). In this special case, TURN must either not be programmed or the value must be TURN=0. Note When the values tend towards this limit case, circles with an unlimited radius are produced and machining with TURN unequal 0 is generally aborted with an alarm due to violation of the software limits. Position of the circle plane The position of the circle plane depends on the active plane (G17-G19). If the tangent of the previous block does not lie in the active plane, its projection in the active plane is used. If the start and end points do not have the same position components perpendicular to the active plane, a helix is produced instead of a circle. Motion commands 9.6 Helical interpolation (G2/G3, TURN) Fundamentals 250 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 9.6 9.6 Helical interpolation (G2/G3, TURN) Function The helical interpolation enables, for example, the production of threads or oil grooves. With helical interpolation, two motions are superimposed and executed in parallel: ● A plane circular motion on which ● A vertical linear motion is superimposed. Syntax G2/G3 X… Y… Z… I… J… K… TURN= G2/G3 X… Y… Z… I… J… K… TURN= G2/G3 AR=… I… J… K… TURN= G2/G3 AR=… X… Y… Z… TURN= G2/G3 AP… RP=… TURN= Significance G2: Travel on a circular path in clockwise direction G3: Travel on a circular path in counterclockwise direction X Y Z : End point in Cartesian coordinates I J K : Circle center point in Cartesian coordinates AR: Opening angle TURN= : Number of additional circular passes in the range from 0 to 999 AP= : Polar angle RP= : Polar radius Motion commands 9.6 Helical interpolation (G2/G3, TURN) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 251 Note G2 and G3 are modal. The circular motion is performed in those axes that are defined by the specification of the working plane. Example X Z Y Y 27.5 -20 -5 20 3 2 . 9 9 2 0 5 Program code Comment N10 G17 G0 X27.5 Y32.99 Z3 ; Approach of the starting position. N20 G1 Z-5 F50 ; Feed of the tool. N30 G3 X20 Y5 Z-20 I=AC(20) J=AC(20) TURN=2 ; Helix with the specifications: Execute 2 full circles after the starting position, then travel to end point. N40 M30 ; End of program. Motion commands 9.6 Helical interpolation (G2/G3, TURN) Fundamentals 252 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information Sequence of motions 1. Approach starting point 2. Execute the full circles programmed with TURN=. 3. Approach circle end position, e.g. as part rotation. 4. Execute steps 2 and 3 across the infeed depth. The pitch, with which the helix is to be machined is calculated from the number of full circles plus the programmed circle end position (executed across the infeed depth). Start point 1st full circle 2nd full circle 3rd full circle End point as partial rotation Target point Programming the end point for helical interpolation Please refer to circular interpolation for a detailed description of the interpolation parameters. Programmed feedrate For helical interpolation, it is advisable to specify a programmed feedrate override (CFC). FGROUP can be used to specify which axes are to be traversed with a programmed feedrate. For more information please refer to the Path behavior section. Motion commands 9.7 Involute interpolation (INVCW, INVCCW) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 253 9.7 9.7 Involute interpolation (INVCW, INVCCW) Function The involute of the circle is a curve traced out from the end point on a "piece of string" unwinding from the curve. Involute interpolation allows trajectories along an involute. It is executed in the plane in which the basic circle is defined and runs from the programmed starting point to the programmed end point. Circle center point (X 0 ,Y 0 ) Radius Y X (X,Y) End point Basic circle Starting point The end point can be programmed in two ways: 1. Directly via Cartesian coordinates 2. Indirectly by specifying an opening angle (also refer to the programming of the opening angle for the circular-path programming) If the starting point and the end point are in the plane of the basic circle, then, analogous to the helical interpolation for circles, there is a superimposition to a curve in space. With additional specification of paths perpendicular to the active plane, an involute can be traversed in space (comparable to the helical interpolation for circles). Motion commands 9.7 Involute interpolation (INVCW, INVCCW) Fundamentals 254 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Syntax INVCW X... Y... Z... I... J... K... CR=... INVCCW X... Y... Z... I... J... K... CR=... INVCW I... J... K... CR=... AR=... INVCCW I... J... K... CR=... AR=... Meaning INVCW: Command to travel on an involute in clockwise direction INVCCW: Command to travel on an involute in counterclockwise direction X... Y... Z... : Direct programming of the end point in Cartesian coordinates I... J... K... : Interpolation parameters for the description of the center point of the basic circle in Cartesian coordinates Note: The coordinate specifications refer to the starting point of the involute. CR=... : Radius of the basic circle Indirect programming of the end point through specification of an opening angle (angle of rotation) The origin of the opening angle is the line from the circle center point to the starting point. AR > 0: The path of the involute moves away from the basic circle. AR=... : AR < 0: The path of the involute moves towards the basic circle. For AR < 0, the maximum angle of rotation is restricted by the fact that the end point must always be outside the basic circle. Motion commands 9.7 Involute interpolation (INVCW, INVCCW) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 255 Indirect programming of the end point through specification of an opening angle NOTICE With the indirect programming of the end point through specification of an opening angle AR, the sign of the angle must be taken into account, as a sign change would result in another involute and therefore another path. This is demonstrated in the following example: End points Starting point 1 1 1 2 2 2 AR The specifications of the radius and center point of the basic circle as well as the starting point and direction of rotation (INVCW/INVCCW) are the same for involutes 1 and 2. The only difference is in the sign of the opening angle: ● With AR > 0, the path is on involute 1 and end point 1 is approached. ● With AR < 0, the path is on involute 2 and end point 2 is approached. Motion commands 9.7 Involute interpolation (INVCW, INVCCW) Fundamentals 256 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Supplementary conditions ● Both the starting point and the end point must be outside the area of the basic circle of the involute (circle with radius CR around the center point specified by I, J, K). If this condition is not satisfied, an alarm is generated and the program processing is aborted. ● The two options for the programming of the end point (directly via Cartesian coordinates or indirectly via the specification of an opening angle) are mutually exclusive. Consequently, only one of the two programming options may be used in a block. ● If the programmed end point does not lie exactly on the involute defined by the starting point and basic circle, interpolation takes place between the two involutes defined by the starting and end points (see following figure). Starting point End point Basic circle Radius max. deviation The maximum deviation of the end point is determined by a machine data (→ machine manufacturer). If the deviation of the programmed end point in the radial direction is greater than that by the MD, then an alarm is generated and the program processing aborted. Motion commands 9.7 Involute interpolation (INVCW, INVCCW) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 257 Examples Example 1: Counterclockwise involute from the starting point to the programmed end point and back again as clockwise involute N20 Starting point: X = 10 Y = 0 N20 End point: X = 32.77 Y = 32.77 N30 N20 Y X CR = 5 Program code Comment N10 G1 X10 Y0 F5000 ; Approach of the starting position. N15 G17 ; Selection of the X/Y plane as working plane. N20 INVCCW X32.77 Y32.77 CR=5 I-10 J0 ; Counterclockwise involute, end point in Cartesian coordinates. N30 INVCW X10 Y0 CR=5 I-32.77 J-32.77 ; Clockwise involute, starting point is end point from N20, new end point is starting point from N20, new circle center point refers to a new starting point and is the same as the old circle center point. ... Motion commands 9.7 Involute interpolation (INVCW, INVCCW) Fundamentals 258 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example 2: Counterclockwise involute with indirect programming of the end point through specification of an opening angle AR = 360 Starting point: X = 10 Y = 0 Y X CR = 5 Program code Comment N10 G1 X10 Y0 F5000 ; Approach of the starting position. N15 G17 ; Selection of the X/Y plane as working plane. N20 INVCCW CR=5 I-10 J0 AR=360 ; Counterclockwise involute and away from the basic circle (as positive angle specification) with one full revolution (360 degrees). ... References For more information about machine data and supplementary conditions that are relevant to involute interpolation, see: Function Manual, Basic Functions; Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2), Chapter: "Settings for involute interpolation" Motion commands 9.8 Contour definitions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 259 9.8 9.8 Contour definitions Function The contour definition programming is used for the quick input of simple contours. Programmable are contour definitions with one, two, three or more points with the transition elements chamfer or rounding, through specification of Cartesian coordinates and/or angles. Arbitrary further NC addresses can be used, e.g. address letters for further axes (single axes or axis perpendicular to the machining plane), auxiliary function specifications, G codes, velocities, etc. in the blocks that describe contour definitions. Note Contour calculator The contour definitions can be programmed easily with the aid of the contour calculator. This is a user interface tool that enables the programming and graphic display of simple and complex workpiece contours. The contours programmed via the contour calculator are transferred to the part program. References: Operating Manual Assigning parameters The identifiers for angle, radius and chamfer are defined via machine data: MD10652 $MN_CONTOUR_DEF_ANGLE_NAME (name of the angle for contour definitions) MD10654 $MN_RADIUS_NAME (name of the radius for contour definitions) MD10656 $MN_CHAMFER_NAME (name of the chamfer for contour definitions) Note See machine manufacturer's specifications. Motion commands 9.8 Contour definitions Fundamentals 260 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 9.8.1 Contour definitions: One straight line (ANG) Note In the following description it is assumed that • G18 is active (⇒ active working plane is the Z/X plane). (However, the programming of contour definitions is also possible without restrictions with G17 or G19.) • The following identifiers have been defined for angle, radius and chamfer: – ANG (angle) – RND (radius) – CHR (chamfer) Function The end point of the straight line is defined by the following specifications: ● Angle ANG ● One Cartesian end point coordinate (X2 or Z2) X1, Z1 X2, Z2 Z X ANG ANG: Angle of the straight line X1, Z1: Start coordinates X2, Z2: End point coordinates of the straight line Motion commands 9.8 Contour definitions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 261 Syntax X… ANG=… Z… ANG=… Significance X... : End point coordinate in the X direction Z... : End point coordinate in the Z direction ANG: Identifier for the angle programming The specified value (angle) refers to the abscissa of the active working plane (Z axis with G18). Example Program code Comment N10 X5 Z70 F1000 G18 ; Approach of the starting position. N20 X88.8 ANG=110 ; Straight line with angle specification. N30 ... or Program code Comment N10 X5 Z70 F1000 G18 ; Approach of the starting position. N20 Z39.5 ANG=110 ; Straight line with angle specification. N30 ... Motion commands 9.8 Contour definitions Fundamentals 262 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 9.8.2 Contour definitions: Two straight lines (ANG) Note In the following description it is assumed that: • G18 is active (⇒ active working plane is the Z/X plane). (However, the programming of contour definitions is also possible without restrictions with G17 or G19.) • The following identifiers have been defined for angle, radius and chamfer: – ANG (angle) – RND (radius) – CHR (chamfer) Function The end point of the first straight line can be programmed by specifying the Cartesian coordinates or by specifying the angle of the two straight lines. The end point of the second straight line must always be programmed with Cartesian coordinates. The intersection of the two straight lines can be designed as a corner, curve or chamfer. Can also be rounding or chamfer ANG1 X Z X3, Z3 X1, Z1 ANG2 X2, Z2 X1, Z1 ANG1: Angle of the first straight line ANG2: Angle of the second straight line X1, Z1: Start coordinates of the first straight line X2, Z2: End point coordinates of the first straight line or start coordinates of the second straight line X3, Z3: End point coordinates of the second straight line Motion commands 9.8 Contour definitions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 263 Syntax 1. Programming of the end point of the first straight line by specifying the angle ● Corner as transition between the straight lines: ANG=… X… Z… ANG=… ● Rounding as transition between the straight lines: ANG=… RND=... X… Z… ANG=… ● Chamfer as transition between the straight lines: ANG=… CHR=... X… Z… ANG=… 2. Programming of the end point of the first straight line by specifying the coordinates ● Corner as transition between the straight lines: X… Z… X… Z… ● Rounding as transition between the straight lines: X… Z… RND=... X… Z… ● Chamfer as transition between the straight lines: X… Z… CHR=... X… Z… Motion commands 9.8 Contour definitions Fundamentals 264 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Significance ANG=... : Identifier for angle programming The specified value (angle) refers to the abscissa of the active working plane (Z axis with G18). RND=... : Identifier for the programming of a rounding The specified value corresponds to the radius of the rounding: RND Rounding CHR=... : Identifier for the programming of a chamfer The specified value corresponds to the width of the chamfer in the direction of motion: Angle bisector Chamfer CHR X... : Coordinates in the X direction Z... : Coordinates in the Z direction Note For further information on the programming of a chamfer or rounding, see "Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM) (Page 295)". Motion commands 9.8 Contour definitions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 265 Example Program code Comment N10 X10 Z80 F1000 G18 ; Approach of the starting position. N20 ANG=148.65 CHR=5.5 ; Straight line with angle and chamfer specification. N30 X85 Z40 ANG=100 ; Straight line with angle and end point specification. N40 ... 9.8.3 Contour definitions: Three straight line (ANG) Note In the following description it is assumed that: • G18 is active (⇒ active working plane is the Z/X plane). (However, the programming of contour definitions is also possible without restrictions with G17 or G19.) • The following identifiers have been defined for angle, radius and chamfer: – ANG (angle) – RND (radius) – CHR (chamfer) Function The end point of the first straight line can be programmed by specifying the Cartesian coordinates or by specifying the angle of the two straight lines. The end point of the second and third straight lines must always be programmed with Cartesian coordinates. The intersection of the straight lines can be designed as a corner, a curve, or a chamfer. Note The programming described here for a three point contour definition can be expanded arbitrarily for contour definitions with more than three points. Motion commands 9.8 Contour definitions Fundamentals 266 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Can also be rounding or chamfer Z X3, Z3 X1, Z1 X2, Z2 X4, Z4 ANG1 X ANG2 ANG1: Angle of the first straight line ANG2: Angle of the second straight line X1, Z1: Start coordinates of the first straight line X2, Z2: End point coordinates of the first straight line or start coordinates of the second straight line X3, Z3: End point coordinates of the second straight line or start coordinates of the third straight line X4, Z4: End point coordinates of the third straight line Syntax 1. Programming of the end point of the first straight line by specifying the angle ● Corner as transition between the straight lines: ANG=… X… Z… ANG=… X… Z… ● Rounding as transition between the straight lines: ANG=… RND=... X… Z… ANG=… RND=... X… Z… Motion commands 9.8 Contour definitions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 267 ● Chamfer as transition between the straight lines: ANG=… CHR=... X… Z… ANG=… CHR=... X… Z… 2. Programming of the end point of the first straight line by specifying the coordinates ● Corner as transition between the straight lines: X… Z… X… Z… X… Z… ● Rounding as transition between the straight lines: X… Z… RND=... X… Z… RND=... X… Z… ● Chamfer as transition between the straight lines: X… Z… CHR=... X… Z… CHR=... X… Z… Significance ANG=... : Identifier for angle programming The specified value (angle) refers to the abscissa of the active working plane (Z axis with G18). RND=... : Identifier for programming a rounding The specified value corresponds to the radius of the rounding: RND Rounding Motion commands 9.8 Contour definitions Fundamentals 268 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 CHR=... : Identifier for programming a chamfer The specified value corresponds to the width of the chamfer in the direction of motion: Angle bisector Chamfer CHR X... : Coordinates in the X direction Z... : Coordinates in the Z direction Note For further information on the programming of a chamfer or rounding, see "Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM)". Example Program code Comment N10 X10 Z100 F1000 G18 ; Approach of the starting position. N20 ANG=140 CHR=7.5 ; Straight line with angle and chamfer specification. N30 X80 Z70 ANG=95.824 RND=10 ; Straight line to intermediate point with angle and chamfer specification. N40 X70 Z50 ; Straight line to end point. Motion commands 9.8 Contour definitions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 269 9.8.4 Contour definitions: End point programming with angle Function If the address letter A appears in an NC block, either none, one or both of the axes in the active plane may also be programmed. Number of programmed axes ● If no axis of the active plane has been programmed, then this is either the first or second block of a contour definition consisting of two blocks. If it is the second block of such a contour definition, then this means that the starting point and end point in the active plane are identical. The contour definition is then at best a motion perpendicular to the active plane. ● If exactly one axis of the active plane has been programmed, then this is either a single straight line whose end point can be clearly defined via the angle and programmed Cartesian coordinate or the second block of a contour definition consisting of two blocks. In the second case, the missing coordinate is set to the same as the last (modal) position reached. ● If two axes of the active plane have been programmed, then this is the second block of a contour definition consisting of two blocks. If the current block has not been preceded by a block with angle programming without programmed axes of the active plane, then this block is not permitted. Angle A may only be programmed for linear or spline interpolation. Motion commands 9.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Fundamentals 270 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 9.9 9.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) 9.9.1 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33, SF) Function Threads with constant lead can be machined with G33: ● Cylinder thread ③ ● Face thread ② ● Tapered thread ① 3 2 1 Note Technical requirement for thread cutting with G33 is a variable-speed spindle with position measuring system. Motion commands 9.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 271 Multiple thread Multiple thread (thread with offset cuts) can be machined by specifying a starting point offset. The programming is performed in the G33 block at address SF. Starting point offset in ° Starting angle for thread (setting data) X Z Note If no starting point offset is specified, the "starting angle for thread" defined in the setting data is used. Thread chain A thread chain can be machined with several G33 blocks programmed in succession: Z X 2nd set with G33 3 r d s e t w i t h G 3 3 1st set with G33 Motion commands 9.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Fundamentals 272 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Note With continuous-path mode G64, the blocks are linked by the look-ahead velocity control in such a way that there are no velocity jumps. Direction of rotation of the thread The direction of rotation of the thread is determined by the direction of rotation of the spindle: ● Clockwise with M3 produces a right-hand thread ● Counterclockwise with M4 produces a left-hand thread Syntax Cylinder thread: G33 Z… K… G33 Z… K… SF=… Face thread: G33 X… I… G33 X… I… SF=… Tapered thread: G33 X… Z… K… G33 X… Z… K… SF=… G33 X… Z… I… G33 X… Z… I… SF=… Significance G33: Command for thread cutting with constant lead X... Y... Z... : End point(s) in Cartesian coordinates I... : Thread lead in X direction J... : Thread lead in Y direction K... : Thread lead in Z direction Z: Longitudinal axis X: Transverse axis Z... K... : Thread length and lead for cylinder threads X... I... : Thread diameter and thread lead for face threads Motion commands 9.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 273 Thread lead for tapered threads The specification (I... or K...) refers to the taper angle: < 45°: The thread lead is specified with K... (thread lead in longitudinal direction). > 45°: The thread lead is specified with I.. (thread lead in transverse direction). I... or K... : = 45°: The thread lead can be specified with I... or K.... Starting point offset (only required for multiple threads) The starting point offset is specified as an absolute angle position. SF=... : Value range: 0.0000 to 359.999 degrees Examples Example 1: Double cylinder thread with 180° starting point offset Starting point 0° Starting point 180° Z X 100 Ø 1 0 0 10 Program code Comment N10 G1 G54 X99 Z10 S500 F100 M3 ; Work offset, approach starting point, activate spindle. N20 G33 Z-100 K4 ; Cylinder thread: end point in Z N30 G0 X102 ; Retraction to starting position. N40 G0 Z10 N50 G1 X99 N60 G33 Z-100 K4 SF=180 ; 2nd cut: Starting point offset 180° N70 G0 X110 ; Retract tool. N80 G0 Z10 N90 M30 ; End of program. Motion commands 9.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Fundamentals 274 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example 2: Tapered thread with angle less than 45° Ø 1 1 0 Ø 5 0 60 X Z Program code Comment N10 G1 X50 Z0 S500 F100 M3 ; Approach starting point, activate spindle. N20 G33 X110 Z-60 K4 ; Tapered thread: End point in X and Z, specification of thread lead with K... in Z direction (since angle < 45°). N30 G0 Z0 M30 ; Retraction, end of program. Motion commands 9.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 275 Further information Feedrate for thread cutting with G33 From the programmed spindle speed and the thread lead, the control calculates the required feedrate with which the turning tool is traversed over the thread length in the longitudinal and/or transverse direction. The feedrate F is not taken into account for G33, the limitation to maximum axis velocity (rapid traverse) is monitored by the control. F e e d r a t e L e a d Speed Cylinder thread The cylinder thread is described by: ● Thread length ● Thread lead The thread length is entered with one of the Cartesian coordinates X, Y or Z in absolute or incremental dimensions (for turning machines preferably in the Z direction). Allowance must also be made for the run-in and run-out paths, across which the feed is accelerated or decelerated. Motion commands 9.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Fundamentals 276 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 The thread lead is entered at addresses I, J, K (K is preferable for turning machines). Z X Z K R u n - i n p a t h R u n - o u t p a t h Face thread The face thread is described by: ● Thread diameter (preferably in the X direction) ● Thread lead (preferably with I) l X Lead D i a m e t e r Motion commands 9.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 277 Tapered thread The tapered thread is described by: ● End point in the longitudinal and transverse direction (taper contour) ● Thread lead The taper contour is entered in Cartesian coordinates X, Y, Z in absolute or incremental dimensions - preferentially in the X and Z direction for machining on turning machines. Allowance must also be made for the run-in and run-out paths, across which the feed is accelerated or decelerated. The specification of the lead depends on the taper angle (angle between the longitudinal axis and the outside of the taper): >45° l X Z <45° K X Z Motion commands 9.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Fundamentals 278 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 9.9.2 Programmable run-in and run-out paths (DITS, DITE) Function The DITS and DITE commands can be used to program the path ramp for acceleration and braking, providing a means of adapting the feedrate accordingly if the tool run-in/run-out is too short: ● Run-in path too short Because of the shoulder at the thread run-in, there is not much room for the tool starting ramp - this must then be specified shorter using DITS. ● Run-out path too short Because of the shoulder at the thread run-out, there is not much room for the tool braking ramp, introducing a risk of collision between the workpiece and the tool cutting edge. The tool braking ramp can be specified shorter using DITE. However, there is still a risk of collision. Run-out: Program a shorter thread, reduce the spindle speed. Run-in/run-out path (dependent on machining direction) X Z Syntax DITS=<value> DITE=<value> Motion commands 9.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 279 Significance DITS: Define thread run-in path DITE: Define thread run-out path Value specification for the run-in/run-out path <value>: Range of values: -1, 0, ... n Note Only paths, and not positions, are programmed with DITS and DITE. Note The DITS and DITE commands relate to setting data SD42010 $SC_THREAD_RAMP_DISP[0,1], in which the programmed paths are written. If no run-in/deceleration path is programmed before or in the first thread block, the corresponding value is determined by the current value of SD42010. References: Function Manual, Basic Functions; Feedrates (V1) Example Program code Comment ... N40 G90 G0 Z100 X10 SOFT M3 S500 N50 G33 Z50 K5 SF=180 DITS=1 DITE=3 ; Start of smoothing with Z=53. N60 G0 X20 Motion commands 9.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Fundamentals 280 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information If the run-in and/or run-out path is very short, the acceleration of the thread axis is higher than the configured value. This causes an acceleration overload on the axis. Alarm 22280 ("Programmed run-in path too short") is then issued for the thread run-in (with the appropriate configuration in MD11411 $MN_ENABLE_ALARM_MASK). The alarm is purely for information and has no effect on part program execution. MD10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be used to specify that the value written by the part program is written to the corresponding setting data during RESET. The values are, therefore, retained following power off/on. Note DITE acts at the end of the thread as a rounding clearance. This achieves a smooth change in the axis movement. When a block with the DITS and/or DITE command is loaded to the interpolator, the path programmed under DITS is written to SD42010 $SC_THREAD_RAMP_DISP[0] and the path programmed under DITE is written to SD42010 $SC_THREAD_RAMP_DISP[1]. The current dimensions setting (inch/metric) is applied to the programmed run-in/run-out path. Motion commands 9.10 Thread cutting with increasing or decreasing lead (G34, G35) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 281 9.10 9.10 Thread cutting with increasing or decreasing lead (G34, G35) Function With the commands G34 and G35, the G33 functionality has been extended with the option of programming a change in the thread lead at address F. With G34, this results in a linear increase and with G35 to a linear decrease of the thread lead. The commands G34 and G35 can therefore be used for the machining of self-tapping threads. Syntax Cylinder thread with increasing lead: G34 Z… K… F... Cylinder thread with decreasing lead: G35 Z… K… F... Face thread with increasing lead: G34 X… I… F... Face thread with decreasing lead: G35 X… I… F... Taper thread with increasing lead: G34 X… Z… K… F... G34 X… Z… I… F... Taper thread with decreasing lead: G35 X… Z… K… F... G35 X… Z… I… F... Significance G34: Command for thread cutting with linear increasing lead G35: Command for thread cutting with linear decreasing lead X... Y... Z... : End point(s) in Cartesian coordinates I... : Thread lead in X direction J... : Thread lead in Y direction K... : Thread lead in Z direction Thread lead change If you already know the starting and final lead of a thread, you can calculate the thread lead change to be programmed according to the following equation: k e 2 - k a 2 F = 2 * l G [mm/rev 2 ] The identifiers have the following meanings: F...: ka: Thread lead (thread lead of axis target point coordinate) [mm/rev] Motion commands 9.10 Thread cutting with increasing or decreasing lead (G34, G35) Fundamentals 282 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 kG: Starting thread lead (programmed under I, J, or K) [mm/rev] IG: Thread length [mm] Example Program code Comment N1608 M3 S10 ; Spindle on. N1609 G0 G64 Z40 X216 ; Approach starting point. N1610 G33 Z0 K100 SF=R14 ; Thread cutting with constant lead (100 mm/rev) N1611 G35 Z-200 K100 F17.045455 ; Lead decrease: 17.0454 mm/rev2 Lead at end of block: 50mm/rev N1612 G33 Z-240 K50 ; Traverse thread block without jerk. N1613 G0 X218 N1614 G0 Z40 N1615 M17 References Function Manual, Basic Functions; Feedrates (V1), Section "Linear increasing/decreasing thread lead change with G34 and G35" Motion commands 9.11 Tapping without compensating chuck (G331, G332) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 283 9.11 9.11 Tapping without compensating chuck (G331, G332) Condition With regard to technology, tapping without compensating chuck requires a position- controlled spindle with position measuring system. Function Tapping without compensating chuck is programmed using the G331 and G332 commands. The spindle prepared for tapping can make the following movements in position-controlled operation with distance measuring system: ● G331: Tapping with thread lead in tapping direction up to end point ● G332: Retraction movement with the same lead as G331 Z X K Right-hand or left-hand threads are defined by the sign of the lead: ● Positive lead → clockwise (as M3) ● Negative lead → counter-clockwise (as M4) The desired speed is also programmed at address S. Motion commands 9.11 Tapping without compensating chuck (G331, G332) Fundamentals 284 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Syntax SPOS=<value> G331 S... G331 X… Y… Z… I… J… K… G332 X… Y… Z… I… J… K… ● SPOS (or M70) only has to be programmed prior to tapping: – For threads requiring multiple machining operations for their production – For production processes requiring a defined thread starting position Conversely, when machining multiple threads one after the other, SPOS (or M70) does not have to be programmed (advantage: saves time). ● The spindle speed has to be in a dedicated G331 block without axis motion before tapping (G331 X… Y… Z… I… J… K…). Significance Command: Tapping The hole is defined by the drilling depth and the thread lead. G331: Effective: modal Command: Tapping retraction This movement is described with the same lead as the G331 movement. The direction of rotation of the spindle is reversed automatically. G332: Effective: modal X... Y... Z... : Drilling depth (end point of the thread in Cartesian coordinates) I... : Thread lead in X direction J... : Thread lead in Y direction K... : Thread lead in Z direction Value range of lead: ±0.001 to 2000.00 mm/rev Note After G332 (retraction), the next thread can be tapped with G331. Motion commands 9.11 Tapping without compensating chuck (G331, G332) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 285 Note Second gear-stage data record To achieve effective adaptation of spindle speed and motor torque and be able to accelerate faster, a second gear-stage data record for two further configurable switching thresholds (maximum speed and minimum speed) can be preset in axis-specific machine data deviating from the first gear step data record and also independent of these speed switching thresholds. Please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications for further details. References: Function Manual, Basic Functions; Spindles (S1), Chapter: "Configurable gear adaptations". Examples Example 1: Output the programmed drilling speed in the current gear stage Program code Comment N05 M40 S500 ; Gear stage 1 is engaged since the programmed spindle speed of 500 rpm is in the range between 20 and 1,028 rpm. ... N55 SPOS=0 ; Align spindle. N60 G331 Z-10 K5 S800 ; Machine thread, spindle speed is 800 rpm in gear stage 1. The appropriate gear stage for the programmed spindle speed S500 with M40 is determined on the basis of the first gear-stage data record. The programmed drilling speed S800 is output in the current gear stage and, if necessary, is limited to the maximum speed of the gear stage. No automatic gear-stage change is possible following an SPOS operation. In order for an automatic change in gear stage to be performed, the spindle must be in speed- control mode. Note If gear stage 2 is selected at a spindle speed of 800 rpm, then the switching thresholds for the maximum and minimum speed must be configured in the relevant machine data of the second gear-stage data record (see the examples below). Motion commands 9.11 Tapping without compensating chuck (G331, G332) Fundamentals 286 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example 2: Application of the second gear-stage data record The switching thresholds of the second gear-stage data record for the maximum and minimum speed are evaluated for G331/G332 and when programming an S value for the active master spindle. Automatic M40 gear-stage change must be active. The gear stage as determined in the manner described above is compared with the active gear stage. If they are found to be different, a gear-stage change is performed. Program code Comment N05 M40 S500 ; Gear stage 1 is selected. ... N50 G331 S800 ; Master spindle with second gear-stage data record: Gear stage 2 is selected. N55 SPOS=0 ; Align spindle. N60 G331 Z-10 K5 ; Tapping, spindle acceleration from second gear-stage data record. Example 3: No speed programming → monitoring of the gear stage If no speed is programmed when using the second gear-stage data record with G331, then the last speed programmed will be used to produce the thread. The gear stage does not change. However, monitoring is performed in this case to check that the last speed programmed is within the preset speed range (defined by the maximum and minimum speed thresholds) for the active gear stage. If it is not, alarm 16748 is signaled. Program code Comment N05 M40 S800 ; Gear stage 1 is selected, the first gear-stage data record is active. ... N55 SPOS=0 N60 G331 Z-10 K5 ; Monitoring of spindle speed 800 rpm with gear-stage data record 2: Gear stage 2 should be active, alarm 16748 is signaled. Motion commands 9.11 Tapping without compensating chuck (G331, G332) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 287 Example 4: Gear stage cannot be changed → monitoring of gear stage If the spindle speed is programmed in addition to the geometry in the G331 block when using the second gear-stage data record, if the speed is not within the preset speed range (defined by the maximum and minimum speed thresholds) of the active gear stage, it will not be possible to change gear stages, because the path motion of the spindle and the infeed axis (axes) would not be retained. As in the example above, the speed and gear stage are monitored in the G331 block and alarm 16748 is signaled if necessary. Program code Comment N05 M40 S500 ; Gear stage 1 is selected. ... N55 SPOS=0 N60 G331 Z-10 K5 S800 ; Gear stage cannot be changed, monitoring of spindle speed 800 rpm with gear-stage data record 2: Gear stage 2 should be active, alarm 16748 is signaled. Example 5: Programming without SPOS Program code Comment N05 M40 S500 ; Gear stage 1 is selected. ... N50 G331 S800 ; Master spindle with second gear-stage data record: Gear stage 2 is selected. N60 G331 Z-10 K5 ; Machine thread, spindle acceleration from second gear-stage data record. Thread interpolation for the spindle starts from the current position, which is determined by the previously processed section of the part program, e.g. if the gear stage was changed. Therefore, it might not be possible to remachine the thread. Note Please note that when machining with multiple spindles, the drill spindle also has to be the master spindle. SETMS(<spindle number>) can be programmed to set the drill spindle as the master spindle. Motion commands 9.12 Tapping with compensating chuck (G63) Fundamentals 288 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 9.12 9.12 Tapping with compensating chuck (G63) Function With G63 you can tap a compensating chuck. The following are programmed: ● Drilling depth in Cartesian coordinates ● Spindle speed and spindle direction ● Feedrate The chuck compensates for any deviations occurring in the path. Z X Retraction movement Programming also with G63, but with spindle rotation in the opposite direction. Syntax G63 X… Y… Z… Significance G63: Tapping with compensating chuck X... Y... Z... : Drilling depth (end point) in Cartesian coordinates Motion commands 9.12 Tapping with compensating chuck (G63) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 289 Note G63 is non-modal. After a block with programmed G63, the last interpolation command programmed (G0, G1, G2, etc.) is reactivated. Feedrate Note The programmed feed must match the ratio of the speed to the thread lead of the tap. Thumb rule: Feedrate F in mm/min = spindle speed S in rpm x thread lead in mm/rev Not only the feedrate, but also the spindle speed override switch are set to 100% with G63. Examples Example 1: Program code Comment N10 SPOS[n]=0 ; Prepare tapping. N20 G0 X0 Y0 Z2 ; Approach starting point. N30 G331 Z-50 K-4 S200 ; Tapping, drilling depth 50, lead K negative = counterclockwise spindle rotation. N40 G332 Z3 K-4 ; Retraction, automatic reversal of direction. N50 G1 F1000 X100 Y100 Z100 S300 M3 ; Spindle operates in spindle mode again. N60 M30 ; End of program. Example 2: In this example, an M5 thread is to be drilled. The lead of an M5 thread is 0.8 (according to the table). With a selected speed of 200 rpm, the feedrate F is 160 mm/min. Program code Comment N10 G1 X0 Y0 Z2 S200 F1000 M3 ; Approach starting point, activate spindle. N20 G63 Z-50 F160 ; Tapping, drilling depth 50. N30 G63 Z3 M4 ; Retraction, programmed reversal of direction. N40 M30 ; End of program. Motion commands 9.13 Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON, LFOF, DILF, ALF, LFTXT, LFWP, LFPOS, POLF, POLFMASK, POLFMLIN) Fundamentals 290 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 9.13 9.13 Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON, LFOF, DILF, ALF, LFTXT, LFWP, LFPOS, POLF, POLFMASK, POLFMLIN) Function The "Fast retraction for thread cutting (G33)" function can be used to interrupt thread cutting without causing irreparable damage in the following circumstances: ● NC Stop/NC RESET ● Switching of a rapid input (see "Fast retraction from the contour" in the Programming Manual, Job Planning) Retraction movement to a specific retraction position can be programmed by: ● Specifying the length of the retraction path and the retraction distance or ● Specifying an absolute retraction position Fast retraction cannot be used in the context of tapping (G331/G332). Syntax Fast retraction for thread cutting with specification of the length of the retraction path and the retraction direction: G33 ... LFON DILF=<value> LFTXT/LFWP ALF=<value> Fast retraction for thread cutting with specification of an absolute retraction position: POLF[<geometry axis name>/<machine axis name>]=<value> LFPOS POLFMASK/POLFMLIN(<axis 1 name>,<axis 2 name>, etc.) G33 ... LFON Disable fast retraction for thread cutting: LFOF Significance LFON: Enable fast retraction for thread cutting (G33) LFOF: Disable fast retraction for thread cutting (G33) Define length of retraction path DILF= : The value preset during MD configuration (MD21200 $MC_LIFTFAST_DIST) can be modified in the part program by programming DILF. Note: The configured MD value is always active following NC-RESET. Motion commands 9.13 Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON, LFOF, DILF, ALF, LFTXT, LFWP, LFPOS, POLF, POLFMASK, POLFMLIN) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 291 The retraction direction is controlled in conjunction with ALF with G functions LFTXT and LFWP. LFTXT: The plane in which the retraction movement is executed is calculated from the path tangent and the tool direction (default setting). LFTXT LFWP: LFWP: The plane in which the retraction movement is executed is the active working plane. The direction is programmed in discrete degree increments with ALF in the plane of the retraction movement. With LFTXT, retraction in the tool direction is defined for ALF=1. With LFWP, the direction in the working/machining plane has the following assignment: • G17 (X/Y plane) ALF=1 ; Retraction in the X direction ALF=3 ; Retraction in the Y direction • G18 (Z/X plane) ALF=1 ; Retraction in the Z direction ALF=3 ; Retraction in the X direction • G19 (Y/Z plane) ALF=1 ; Retraction in the Y direction ALF=3 ; Retraction in the Z direction ALF= : References: Programming options with ALF are also described in "Traverse direction for fast retraction from the contour" in the Programming Manual, Job Planning. LFPOS: Retraction of the axis declared using POLFMASK or POLFMLIN to the absolute axis position programmed with POLF. POLFMASK: Release of axes (<axis 1 name>,<axis 1 name>, etc.) for independent retraction to absolute position Motion commands 9.13 Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON, LFOF, DILF, ALF, LFTXT, LFWP, LFPOS, POLF, POLFMASK, POLFMLIN) Fundamentals 292 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 POLFMLIN: Release of axes for retraction to absolute position in linear relation Note: Depending on the dynamic response of all the axes involved, the linear relation cannot always be established before the lift position is reached. Define absolute retraction position for the geometry axis or machine axis in the index Effective: modal POLF[]: =<value>: In the case of geometry axes, the assigned value is interpreted as a position in the workpiece coordinate system. In the case of machine axes, it is interpreted as a position in the machine coordinate system. The values assigned can also be programmed as incremental dimensions: =IC<value> Note LFON or LFOF can always be programmed, but the evaluation is performed exclusively during thread cutting (G33). Note POLF with POLFMASK/POLFMLIN are not restricted to thread cutting applications. Motion commands 9.13 Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON, LFOF, DILF, ALF, LFTXT, LFWP, LFPOS, POLF, POLFMASK, POLFMLIN) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 293 Examples Example 1: Enable fast retraction for thread cutting Program code Comment N55 M3 S500 G90 G18 ; Active machining plane ... ; Approach of the starting position N65 MSG ("thread cutting") ; Feed of the tool MM_THREAD: N67 $AC_LIFTFAST=0 ; Reset before starting the thread. N68 G0 Z5 N68 X10 N70 G33 Z30 K5 LFON DILF=10 LFWP ALF=7 ; Enable fast retraction for thread cutting. Retraction path = 10 mm Retraction plane: Z/X (because of G18) Retraction direction: -X (with ALF=3: Retraction direction +X) N71 G33 Z55 X15 N72 G1 ; Deselect thread cutting. N69 IF $AC_LIFTFAST GOTOB MM_THREAD ; If thread cutting has been interrupted. N90 MSG ("") ... N70 M30 Example 2: Deactivate fast retraction before tapping Program code Comment N55 M3 S500 G90 G0 X0 Z0 ... N87 MSG ("tapping") N88 LFOF ; Deactivate fast retraction before tapping. N89 CYCLE... ; Tapping cycle with G33. N90 MSG ("") ... N99 M30 Motion commands 9.13 Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON, LFOF, DILF, ALF, LFTXT, LFWP, LFPOS, POLF, POLFMASK, POLFMLIN) Fundamentals 294 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example 3: Fast retraction to absolute retraction position Path interpolation of X is suppressed in the event of a stop and a motion executed to position POLF[X] at maximum velocity instead. The motion of the other axes continues to be determined by the programmed contour or the thread lead and the spindle speed. Program code Comment N10 G0 G90 X200 Z0 S200 M3 N20 G0 G90 X170 N22 POLF[X]=210 LFPOS N23 POLFMASK(X) ; Activate (enable) fast retraction from axis X. N25 G33 X100 I10 LFON N30 X135 Z-45 K10 N40 X155 Z-128 K10 N50 X145 Z-168 K10 N55 X210 I10 N60 G0 Z0 LFOF N70 POLFMASK() ; Disable lift for all axes. M30 Motion commands 9.14 Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 295 9.14 9.14 Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM) Function Contour corners within the active working plane can be executed as roundings or chamfers. For optimum surface quality, a separate feedrate can be programmed for chamfering/rounding. If a feedrate is not programmed, the standard path feedrate F will be applied. The "Modal rounding" function can be used to round multiple contour corners in the same way one after the other. Syntax Chamfer the contour corner: G... X... Z... CHR/CHF=<value> FRC/FRCM=<value> G... X... Z... Round the contour corner: G... X... Z... RND=<value> FRC=<value> G... X... Z... Modal rounding: G... X... Z... RNDM=<value> FRCM=<value> ... RNDM=0 Note The technology (feedrate, feedrate type, M commands, etc.) for chamfering/rounding is derived from either the previous or the next block dependent on the setting of bit 0 in machine data MD20201 $MC_CHFRND_MODE_MASK (chamfer/rounding behavior). The recommended setting is the derivation from the previous block (bit 0 = 1). Motion commands 9.14 Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM) Fundamentals 296 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Significance Chamfer the contour corner CHF=… : <value>: Length of the chamfer (unit corresponding to G70/G71) Chamfer the contour corner CHR=… : <value>: Width of the chamfer in the original direction of motion (unit corresponding to G70/G71) Round the contour corner RND=… : <value>: Radius of the rounding (unit corresponding to G70/G71) Modal rounding (rounding multiple contour corners in the same way one after the other) Radius of the roundings (unit corresponding to G70/G71) RNDM=… : <value>: Modal rounding is deactivated with RNDM=0. Non-modal feedrate for chamfering/rounding FRC=… : <value>: Feedrate in mm/min (with active G94) or mm/rev (with active G95) Modal feedrate for chamfering/rounding Feedrate in mm/min (with active G94) or mm/rev (with active G95) FRCM=… : <value>: FRCM=0 deactivates modal feedrate for chamfering/rounding and activates the feedrate programmed under F. Note Chamfering/Rounding If the values programmed for chamfering (CHF/CHR) or rounding (RND/RNDM) are too high for the contour elements involved, chamfering or rounding will automatically be reduced to an appropriate value. No chamfering/rounding is performed if: • No straight or circular contour is available in the plane • A movement takes place outside the plane • The plane is changed • A number of blocks specified in the machine data not to contain any information about traversing (e.g., only command outputs) is exceeded Motion commands 9.14 Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 297 Note FRC/FRCM FRC/FRCM has no effect if a chamfer is traversed with G0; the command can be programmed according to the F value without error message. FRC is only effective if a chamfer/rounding is programmed in the block or if RNDM has been activated. FRC overwrites the F or FRCM value in the current block. The feedrate programmed under FRC must be greater than zero. FRCM=0 activates the feedrate programmed under F for chamfering/rounding. If FRCM is programmed, the FRCM value will need to be reprogrammed like F on change G94 ↔ G95, etc. If only F is reprogrammed and if the feedrate type FRCM > 0 before the change, an error message will be output. Examples Example 1: Chamfering between two straight lines X Z G1 G 1 CHR C H F ˞ Bisector Chamfer e.g. G18: • MD20201 Bit 0 = 1 (derived from previous block) • G71 is active. • The width of the chamfer in the direction of motion (CHR) should be 2 mm and the feedrate for chamfering 100 mm/min. Motion commands 9.14 Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM) Fundamentals 298 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Programming can be performed in two ways: ● Programming with CHR Program code ... N30 G1 Z… CHR=2 FRC=100 N40 G1 X… ... ● Programming with CHF Program code ... N30 G1 Z… CHF=2(cosα*2) FRC=100 N40 G1 X… ... Example 2: Rounding between two straight lines RND=... X Z G1 G 1 Rounding e.g. G18: • MD20201 Bit 0 = 1 (derived from previous block) • G71 is active. • The radius of the rounding should be 2 mm and the feedrate for rounding 50 mm/min. Program code ... N30 G1 Z… RND=2 FRC=50 N40 G1 X… ... Motion commands 9.14 Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 299 Example 3: Rounding between straight line and circle The RND function can be used to insert a circle contour element with tangential connection between the linear and circle contours in any combination. RND=... X Z G1 G 3 e.g. G18: Rounding • MD20201 Bit 0 = 1 (derived from previous block) • G71 is active. • The radius of the rounding should be 2 mm and the feedrate for rounding 50 mm/min. Program code ... N30 G1 Z… RND=2 FRC=50 N40 G3 X… Z… I… K… ... Example 4: Modal rounding to deburr sharp workpiece edges Program code Comment ... N30 G1 X… Z… RNDM=2 FRCM=50 ; Activate modal rounding. Radius of rounding: 2 mm Feedrate for rounding: 50 mm/min N40... N120 RNDM=0 ; Deactivate modal rounding. ... Motion commands 9.14 Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM) Fundamentals 300 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example 5: Apply technology from following block or previous block ● MD20201 Bit 0 = 0: Derived from following block (default setting!) Program code Comment N10 G0 X0 Y0 G17 F100 G94 N20 G1 X10 CHF=2 ; Chamfer N20-N30 with F=100 mm/min N30 Y10 CHF=4 ; Chamfer N30-N40 with FRC=200 mm/min N40 X20 CHF=3 FRC=200 ; Chamfer N40-N60 with FRCM=50 mm/min N50 RNDM=2 FRCM=50 N60 Y20 ; Modal rounding N60-N70 with FRCM=50 mm/min N70 X30 ; Modal rounding N70-N80 with FRCM=50 mm/min N80 Y30 CHF=3 FRC=100 ; Chamfer N80-N90 with FRC=100 mm/min N90 X40 ; Modal rounding N90-N100 with F=100 mm/min (deselection of FRCM) N100 Y40 FRCM=0 ; Modal rounding N100-N120 with G95 FRC=1 mm/rev N110 S1000 M3 N120 X50 G95 F3 FRC=1 ... M02 ● MD20201 Bit 0 = 1: Derived from previous block (recommended setting!) Program code Comment N10 G0 X0 Y0 G17 F100 G94 N20 G1 X10 CHF=2 ; Chamfer N20-N30 with F=100 mm/min N30 Y10 CHF=4 FRC=120 ; Chamfer N30-N40 with FRC=120 mm/min N40 X20 CHF=3 FRC=200 ; Chamfer N40-N60 with FRC=200 mm/min N50 RNDM=2 FRCM=50 N60 Y20 ; Modal rounding N60-N70 with FRCM=50 mm/min N70 X30 ; Modal rounding N70-N80 with FRCM=50 mm/min N80 Y30 CHF=3 FRC=100 ; Chamfer N80-N90 with FRC=100 mm/min N90 X40 ; Modal rounding N90-N100 with FRCM=50 mm/min N100 Y40 FRCM=0 ; Modal rounding N100-N120 with F=100 mm/min N110 S1000 M3 N120 X50 CHF=4 G95 F3 FRC=1 ; Chamfer N120-N130 with G95 FRC=1 mm/rev N130 Y50 ; Modal rounding N130-N140 with F=3 mm/rev N140 X60 ... M02 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 301 Tool radius compensation 10 10.1 10.1 Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) Function When tool radius compensation (TRC) is active, the control automatically calculates the equidistant tool paths for various tools. Equidistant Equidistant Syntax G0/G1 X... Y… Z... G41/G42 [OFFN=<value>] ... G40 X... Y… Z... Significance G41: Activate TRC with machining direction left of the contour. G42: Activate TRC with machining direction right of the contour. OFFN=<value>: Allowance on the programmed contour (normal contour offset) (optional), e.g. to generate equidistant paths for rough finishing. G40: Deactivate TRC. Tool radius compensation 10.1 Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) Fundamentals 302 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Note In the NC block with G40/G41/G42, G0 or G1 has to be active and at least one axis has to be specified on the selected working plane. If only one axis is specified on activation, the last position on the second axis is added automatically and traversed with both axes. The two axes must be active as geometry axes in the channel. This can be achieved by means of GEOAX programming. Examples Example 1: Milling X Y 50 N10 N 2 0 5 0 Compensation on Y Compensation on X Program code Comment N10 G0 X50 T1 D1 ; Only tool length compensation is activated. X50 is approached without compensation. N20 G1 G41 Y50 F200 ; Radius compensation is activated, point X50/Y50 is approached with compensation. N30 Y100 … Tool radius compensation 10.1 Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 303 Example 2: "Conventional" procedure based on the example of milling "Conventional" procedure: 1. Tool call 2. Change tool. 3. Activate working plane and tool radius compensation. X Y 20 7 40 80 Z Y 2 0 4 0 5 0 7 0 Program code Comment N10 G0 Z100 ; Retraction for tool change. N20 G17 T1 M6 ; Tool change N30 G0 X0 Y0 Z1 M3 S300 D1 ; Call tool offset values, select length compensation. N40 Z-7 F500 ; Feed in tool. N50 G41 X20 Y20 ; Activate tool radius compensation, tool machines to the left of the contour. N60 Y40 ; Mill contour. N70 X40 Y70 N80 X80 Y50 N90 Y20 N100 X20 N110 G40 G0 Z100 M30 ; Retract tool, end of program. Tool radius compensation 10.1 Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) Fundamentals 304 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example 3: Turning Ø 2 0 Ø 1 0 0 20 20 1 X Z Program code Comment … N20 T1 D1 ; Only tool length compensation is activated. N30 G0 X100 Z20 ; X100 Z20 is approached without compensation. N40 G42 X20 Z1 ; Radius compensation is activated, point X20/Z1 is approached with compensation. N50 G1 Z-20 F0.2 … Tool radius compensation 10.1 Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 305 Example 4: Turning 4 Ø 1 6 Ø 5 0 Ø 3 5 Ø 3 0 62 60 57 40 20 18 15 12 80 70 4 5 ° R3 R3 R3 R8 R10 Z X Program code Comment N5 G0 G53 X280 Z380 D0 ; Starting point N10 TRANS X0 Z250 ; Zero offset N15 LIMS=4000 ; Speed limitation (G96) N20 G96 S250 M3 ; Select constant feedrate N25 G90 T1 D1 M8 ; Select tool selection and offset N30 G0 G42 X-1.5 Z1 ; Set tool with tool radius compensation N35 G1 X0 Z0 F0.25 N40 G3 X16 Z-4 I0 K-10 ; Turn radius 10 N45 G1 Z-12 N50 G2 X22 Z-15 CR=3 ; Turn radius 3 N55 G1 X24 N60 G3 X30 Z-18 I0 K-3 ; Turn radius 3 N65 G1 Z-20 N70 X35 Z-40 N75 Z-57 N80 G2 X41 Z-60 CR=3 ; Turn radius 3 N85 G1 X46 Tool radius compensation 10.1 Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) Fundamentals 306 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Program code Comment N90 X52 Z-63 N95 G0 G40 G97 X100 Z50 M9 ; Deselect tool radius compensation and approach tool change location N100 T2 D2 ; Call tool and select offset N105 G96 S210 M3 ; Select constant cutting rate N110 G0 G42 X50 Z-60 M8 ; Set tool with tool radius compensation N115 G1 Z-70 F0.12 ; Turn diameter 50 N120 G2 X50 Z-80 I6.245 K-5 ; Turn radius 8 N125 G0 G40 X100 Z50 M9 ; Retract tool and deselect tool radius compensation N130 G0 G53 X280 Z380 D0 M5 ; Approach tool change location N135 M30 ; End of program Further information The control requires the following information in order to calculate the tool paths: ● Tool no. (T...), cutting edge no. (D...) ● Machining direction (G41/G42) ● Working plane (G17/G18/G19) Tool no. (T...), cutting edge no. (D...) The distance between tool path and workpiece contour is calculated from the milling cutter radii or cutting edge radii and the tool point direction parameters. G42 G42 G41 G41 G41 With a flat D number structure, only the D number has to be programmed. Tool radius compensation 10.1 Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 307 Machining direction (G41/G42) From this information, the control detects the direction, in which the tool path is to be displaced. Note A negative offset value has the same significance as a change of offset side (G41 ↔ G42). Working plane (G17/G18/G19) From this information, the control detects the plane and therefore the axis directions for compensation. +Z +X +Y L e n g t h L e n g t h Radius R a d i u s R a d i u s Example: Milling cutter Program code Comment ... N10 G17 G41 … ; The tool radius compensation is performed in the X/Y plane, the tool length compensation is performed in the Z direction. ... Note On 2-axis machines, tool radius compensation is only possible in "real" planes, usually with G18. Tool radius compensation 10.1 Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) Fundamentals 308 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Tool length compensation The wear parameter assigned to the diameter axis on tool selection can be defined as the diameter value using an MD. This assignment is not automatically altered when the plane is subsequently changed. To do this, the tool must be selected again after the plane has been changed. Turning: X Y Z Length 2 L e n g t h L e n g t h Radius R a d i u s Length 1 NORM and KONT can be used to define the tool path on activation and deactivation of compensation mode (see "Contour approach and retraction (NORM, KONT, KONTC, KONTT) (Page 312)"). Tool radius compensation 10.1 Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 309 Point of intersection The intersection point is selected in the setting data: SD42496 $SC_CUTCOM_CLSD_CONT (response of tool radius compensation with closed contour) Value Significance FALSE If two intersections appear on the inside when offsetting an (virtually) closed contour, which consists of two circle blocks following on from one another, or from one circle block and one linear block, the intersection positioned closest to the end of block on the first partial contour is selected, in accordance with standard procedure. A contour is deemed to be (virtually) closed if the distance between the starting point of the first block and the end point of the second block is less than 10% of the effective compensation radius, but not more than 1,000 path increments (corresponds to 1 mm with 3 decimal places). TRUE In the same situation as described above, the intersection positioned on the first partial contour closer to the block start is selected. Change in compensation direction (G41 ↔ G42) A change in compensation direction (G41 ↔ G42) can be programmed without an intermediate G40. G41 G42 Tool radius compensation 10.1 Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) Fundamentals 310 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Changing the working plane The working plane (G17/G18/G19) cannot be changed if G41/G42 is active. Change in tool offset data record (D…) The tool offset data record can be changed in compensation mode. A modified tool radius is active with effect from the block, in which the new D number is programmed. CAUTION The radius change or compensation movement is performed across the entire block and only reaches the new equidistance at the programmed end point. In the case of linear movements, the tool travels along an inclined path between the starting point and end point: NC block with modified radius correction Traverse path Programmed path Circular interpolation produces spiral movements. Tool radius compensation 10.1 Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 311 Changing the tool radius The change can be made e.g. using system variables. The sequence is the same as when changing the tool offset data record (D…). CAUTION The modified values only take effect the next time T or D is programmed. The change only applies with effect from the next block. Compensation mode Compensation mode may only be interrupted by a certain number of consecutive blocks or M functions which do not contain drive commands or positional data in the compensation plane. Note The number of consecutive blocks or M commands can be set in a machine data item (see machine manufacturer's specifications). Note A block with a path distance of zero also counts as an interruption! Tool radius compensation 10.2 Contour approach and retraction (NORM, KONT, KONTC, KONTT) Fundamentals 312 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 10.2 10.2 Contour approach and retraction (NORM, KONT, KONTC, KONTT) Function If tool radius compensation is active (G41/G42), the NORM, KONT, KONTC or KONTT command can be used to adapt the tool's approach and retract paths to the required contour profile or blank form. KONTC or KONTT ensure observance of the continuity conditions in all three axes. It is, therefore, permissible to program a path component perpendicular to the offset plane simultaneously. Condition The KONTC and KONTT commands will only be available if the "Polynomial interpolation" option has been enabled in the control. Syntax G41/G42 NORM/KONT/KONTC/KONTT X... Y... Z... ... G40 X... Y... Z... Significance NORM: Activate direct approach/retraction to/from a straight line. The tool is oriented perpendicular to the contour point. KONT: Activate approach/retraction with travel around the starting/end point according to the programmed corner behavior G450 or G451. KONTC: Activate approach/retraction with constant curvature. KONTT: Activate approach/retraction with constant tangent. Note Only G1 blocks are permissible as original approach/retraction blocks for KONTC and KONTT. The control replaces these with polynomials for the appropriate approach/retract path. Tool radius compensation 10.2 Contour approach and retraction (NORM, KONT, KONTC, KONTT) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 313 General conditions KONTT and KONTC are not available in 3D variants of tool radius compensation (CUT3DC, CUT3DCC, CUT3DF). If they are programmed, the control switches internally to NORM without an error message. Example KONTC The full circle is approached beginning at the circle center point. The direction and curvature radius at the block end point of the approach block are identical to the values of the next circle. Infeed takes place in the Z direction in both approach/retraction blocks simultaneously. The figure below shows the perpendicular projection of the tool path. Figure 10-1 Perpendicular projection The associated NC program segment is as follows: Program code Comment $TC_DP1[1,1]=121 ; Milling tool $TC_DP6[1,1]=10 ; Radius 10 mm N10 G1 X0 Y0 Z60 G64 T1 D1 F10000 N20 G41 KONTC X70 Y0 Z0 ; Approach N30 G2 I-70 ; Full circle N40 G40 G1 X0 Y0 Z60 ; Retract N50 M30 Tool radius compensation 10.2 Contour approach and retraction (NORM, KONT, KONTC, KONTT) Fundamentals 314 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 At the same time as the curvature is being adapted to the circular path of the full circle, traversing is performed from Z60 to the plane of the circle Z0: Figure 10-2 3D representation. Further information Approach/Retraction with NORM 1. Approach: If NORM is activated, the tool will move directly to the compensated start position along a straight line (irrespective of the preset approach angle programmed for the travel movement) and is positioned perpendicular to the path tangent at the starting point. Compensated tool path Compensated tool path Tangent R a d i u s G42 G 4 2 Tool radius compensation 10.2 Contour approach and retraction (NORM, KONT, KONTC, KONTT) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 315 2. Retract: The tool is perpendicular to the last compensated path end point and then moves (irrespective of the preset approach angle programmed for the travel movement) directly in a straight line to the next uncompensated position, e.g. to the tool change point. G41 G 4 1 R a d i u s Tangent Modifying approach/retract angles introduces a collision risk: CAUTION Modified approach/retract angles must be taken into account during programming in order that potential collisions can be avoided. Tool radius compensation 10.2 Contour approach and retraction (NORM, KONT, KONTC, KONTT) Fundamentals 316 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Approach/Retraction with KONT Prior to the approach the tool can be located in front of or behind the contour. The path tangent at the starting point serves as a separation line: Start point Behind contour ln front of contour Path tangent Accordingly, two scenarios need to be distinguished where approach/retraction with KONT is concerned: 1. The tool is located in front of the contour. → The approach/retract strategy is the same as with NORM. 2. The tool is located behind the contour. – Approach: The tool travels around the starting point either along a circular path or over the intersection of the equidistant paths depending on the programmed corner behavior (G450/G451). The commands G450/G451 apply to the transition from the current block to the next block: G450 G450 G451 G451 Tool radius compensation 10.2 Contour approach and retraction (NORM, KONT, KONTC, KONTT) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 317 In both cases (G450/G451), the following approach path is generated: Approach point Approach path Starting point Tool radius A straight line is drawn from the uncompensated approach point. This line is a tangent to a circle with circle radius = tool radius. The center point of the circle is on the starting point. – Retract: The same applies to retraction as to approach, but in the reverse order. Approach/Retraction with KONTC The contour point is approached/exited with constant curvature. There is no jump in acceleration at the contour point. The path from the start point to the contour point is interpolated as a polynomial. Approach/Retraction with KONTC The contour point is approached/exited with constant tangent. A jump in the acceleration can occur at the contour point. The path from the start point to the contour point is interpolated as a polynomial. Tool radius compensation 10.2 Contour approach and retraction (NORM, KONT, KONTC, KONTT) Fundamentals 318 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Differences between KONTC and KONTT The figure below shows the differences in approach/retraction behavior between KONTT and KONTC. A circle with a radius of 20 mm about the center point at X0 Y-40 is compensated with a tool with an external radius of 20 mm. The tool center point therefore moves along a circular path with radius 40 mm. The end point of the approach blocks is at X40 Y30. The transition between the circular block and the retraction block is at the zero point. Due to the extended continuity of curvature associated with KONTC, the retraction block first executes a movement with a negative Y component. This will often be undesired. This response does not occur with the KONTT retraction block. However, with this block, an acceleration step change occurs at the block transition. If the KONTT or KONTC block is the approach block rather than the retraction block, the contour is exactly the same, but it is machined in the opposite direction. Tool radius compensation 10.3 Compensation at the outside corners (G450, G451, DISC) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 319 10.3 10.3 Compensation at the outside corners (G450, G451, DISC) Function With tool radius compensation activated (G41/G42), command G450 or G451 can be used to define the course of the compensated tool path when traveling around outside corners: G450 P* G451 P* With G450 the tool center point travels around the workpiece corner across an arc with tool radius. With G451 the tool center point approaches the intersection of the two equidistants, which lie in the distance between the tool radius and the programmed contour. G451 applies only to circles and straight lines. Note G450/G451 is also used to define the approach path with KONT active and approach point behind the contour (see "Contour approach and retraction (NORM, KONT, KONTC, KONTT) (Page 312)"). The DISC command can be used to distort the transition circles with G450, thereby producing sharper contour corners. Tool radius compensation 10.3 Compensation at the outside corners (G450, G451, DISC) Fundamentals 320 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Syntax G450 [DISC=<value>] G451 Significance G450: G450 is used to travel around workpiece corners on a circular path. Flexible programming of the circular path with G450 (optional) Type: INT Range of values: 0, 1, 2 to 100 0 Transition circle DISC: <value>: Significance: 100 Intersection of the equidistant paths (theoretical value) G451: G451 is used to approach the intersection point of the two equidistant paths in the case of workpiece corners. The tool backs off from the workpiece corner. Note DISC only applies with call of G450, but can be programmed in a previous block without G450. Both commands are modal. Example X Y 10 50 5 Z Y 1 0 3 0 6 0 In this example, a transition radius is programmed for all outside corners (corresponding to the programming of the corner behavior in block N30). This prevents the tool stopping and backing off at the change of direction. Tool radius compensation 10.3 Compensation at the outside corners (G450, G451, DISC) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 321 Program code Comment N10 G17 T1 G0 X35 Y0 Z0 F500 ; Starting conditions N20 G1 Z-5 ; Feed in tool. N30 G41 KONT G450 X10 Y10 ; Activate TRC with KONT approach/retract mode and corner behavior G450. N40 Y60 ; Mill the contour. N50 X50 Y30 N60 X10 Y10 N80 G40 X-20 Y50 ; Deactivate compensation mode, retraction on transition circle. N90 G0 Y100 N100 X200 M30 Further information G450/G451 At intermediate point P*, the control executes operations such as infeed movements or switching functions. These operations are programmed in blocks inserted between the two blocks forming the corner. With G450 the transition circle belongs to the next travel command with respect to the data. DISC When DISC values greater than 0 are specified, intermediate circles are shown with a magnified height – the result is transition ellipses or parabolas or hyperbolas: DlSC=100 DlSC=0 An upper limit can be defined in machine data – generally DISC=50. Tool radius compensation 10.3 Compensation at the outside corners (G450, G451, DISC) Fundamentals 322 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Traversing behavior When G450 is activated and with acute contour angles and high DISC values, the tool is lifted off the contour at the corners. In the case of contour angles equal to or greater than 120°, there is uniform travel around the contour: 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 0.2 0.4 50 40 30 20 10 0.6 0.8 1.0 DlSC= DlSC=100 S/R R - Tool radius S - Traverse overshoot S/R - Normalized overshoot (in relation to tool radius) Contour angle (degrees) When G451 is activated and with acute contour angles, superfluous non-cutting tool paths can result from lift-off movements. A parameter can be used in the machine data to define automatic switchover to transition circle in such cases. Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 323 10.4 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction 10.4.1 Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) Function The SAR (Smooth Approach and Retraction) function is used to achieve a tangential approach to the start point of a contour, regardless of the position of the start point. G1 DlSR G0 G247 Progr. contour This function is used preferably in conjunction with the tool radius compensation, but this is not mandatory. The approach and retraction movement consists of a maximum of four sub-movements: ● Start point of the movement P0 ● Intermediate points P1, P2 and P3 ● End point P4 Points P0, P3 and P4 are always defined. Intermediate points P1 and P2 can be omitted, according to the parameters defined and the geometrical conditions. Syntax G140 G141 to G143 G147, G148 G247, G248 G347, G348 G340, G341 DISR=..., DISCL=..., FAD=... Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Fundamentals 324 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Significance G140: Approach and retraction direction dependent on the current compensation side (basic setting) G141: Approach from the left or retraction to the left G142: Approach from the right or retraction to the right G143: Approach and retraction direction dependent on the relative position of the start or end point to the tangent direction G147: Approach with a straight line G148: Retraction with a straight line G247: Approach with a quadrant G248: Retraction with a quadrant G347: Approach with a semicircle G348: Retraction with a semicircle G340: Approach and retraction in space (basic setting) G341: Approach and retraction in the plane DISR: Approach and retraction with straight lines (G147/G148) Distance of the milling tool edge to the starting point of the contour Approach and retraction along circles (G247, G347/G248, G348) Radius of the tool center path Notice: For REPOS with a semicircle, DISR is the circle diameter DISCL: DISCL=... distance of the end point of the fast feed movement to the machining plane DISCL=AC(...) specification of the absolute position of the end point of the fast feed movement FAD: Speed of the slow feed movement FAD=... the programmed value is applied corresponding to the G code of group 15 (feedrate; G93, G94, etc.) FAD=PM(...) the programmed value is interpreted irrespective of the active G code, group 15 as linear feedrate (as G94) FAD=PR(...) the programmed value is interpreted irrespective of the active G code, group 15 as revolutional feedrate (as G95). Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 325 Example Tool center path Tool Helix Semicircle P4app P4ret Contour P3ret P3appP3ret P0app P0ret 5 y x 20 30 40 50 60 80 20 ● Smooth approach (block N20 activated) ● Approach with quadrant (G247) ● Approach direction not programmed, G140 applies, i.e. TRC is active (G41) ● Contour offset OFFN=5 (N10) ● Current tool radius=10, and so the effective compensation radius for TRC=15, the radius of the SAR contour =25, with the result that the radius of the tool center path is equal to DISR=10 ● The end point of the circle is obtained from N30, since only the Z position is programmed in N20 ● Infeed movement – From Z20 to Z7 (DISCL=AC(7)) with rapid traverse. – Then to Z0 with FAD=200. – Approach circle in X-Y-plane and following blocks with F1500 (for this velocity to take effect in the following blocks, the active G0 in N30 must be overwritten with G1, otherwise the contour would be machined further with G0). ● Smooth retraction (block N60 activated) ● Retraction with quadrant (G248) and helix (G340) ● FAD not programmed, since irrelevant for G340 ● Z=2 in the starting point; Z=8 in the end point, since DISCL=6 ● When DISR=5, the radius of the SAR contour=20, the radius of the tool center point path=5 Retraction movements from Z8 to Z20 and the movement parallel to the X-Y plane to X70 Y0. Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Fundamentals 326 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Program code Comment $TC_DP1[1,1]=120 ; Tool definition T1/D1 $TC_DP6[1,1]=10 ; Radius N10 G0 X0 Y0 Z20 G64 D1 T1 OFFN=5 ; (P0app) N20 G41 G247 G341 Z0 DISCL=AC(7) DISR=10 F1500 FAD=200 ; Approach (P3app) N30 G1 X30 Y-10 ; (P4app) N40 X40 Z2 N50 X50 ; (P4ret) N60 G248 G340 X70 Y0 Z20 DISCL=6 DISR=5 G40 F10000 ; Retraction (P3ret) N70 X80 Y0 ; (P0ret) N80 M30 Further information Selecting the approach and retraction contour The appropriate G command can be used: ● to approach or retract with a straight line (G147, G148), ● a quadrant (G247, G248) or ● a semicircle (G347, G348). Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 327 P1 P3 P4 DlSR P0 P3 P4 P0 P3 P4 DlSR DlSR for approach/return with a straight line (G147) Contour Approach and retraction, shown with intermediate point P4 (with simultaneous activation of tool radius compensation) for approach/return with quadrant (G247) Contour for approach/return with semicircle (G347) Contour Tool center path Tool Tool Tool center path Tool Tool center path Selecting the approach and retraction direction Use the tool radius compensation (G140, basic setting) to determine the approach and retraction direction with positive tool radius: ● G41 active → approach from left ● G42 active → approach from right G141, G142 and G143 provide further approach options. The G codes are only significant when the approach contour is a quadrant or a semicircle. Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Fundamentals 328 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Motion steps between start point and end point (G340 and G341). The approach characteristic from P0 to P4 is shown in the figure below: P4 DlSCL DlSCL G340 G341 P4 P2 P1 P0 P1 P0 P2 ,P3 P3 Machining plane lnfeed movement Straight line, circle or helix Straight or circle Approach movement depending on G340/G341 In cases which include the position of the active plane G17 to G19 (circular plane, helical axis, infeed motion perpendicular to the active plane), any active rotating FRAME is taken into account. Length of the approach straight line or radius for approach circles (DISR) (see figure "Selecting approach/retraction contour") ● Approach/retract with straight lines DISR specifies the distance of the cutter edge from the starting point of the contour, i.e. the length of the straight line when TRC is active is the sum of the tool radius and the programmed value of DISR. The tool radius is only taken into account if it is positive. The resultant line length must be positive, i.e. negative values for DISR are allowed provided that the absolute value of DISR is less than the tool radius. ● Approach/retract with circles DISR specifies the radius of the tool center point path. If TRC is activated, a circle is produced with a radius that results in the tool center point path with the programmed radius. Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 329 Distance of the point from the machining plane (DISCL) (see figure when selecting approach/retraction contour) If the position of point P2 is to be specified by an absolute reference on the axis perpendicular to the circle plane, the value must be programmed in the form DISCL=AC(...). The following applies for DISCL=0: ● With G340: The whole of the approach motion now only consists of two blocks (P1, P2 and P3 are combined). The approach contour is formed by P1 to P4. ● With G341: The whole approach contour consists of three blocks (P2 and P3 are combined). If P0 and P4 are on the same plane, only two blocks result (infeed movement from P1 to P3 is omitted). ● The point defined by DISCL is monitored to ensure that it is located between P1 and P3, i.e. the sign must be identical for the component perpendicular to the machining plane in all motions that possess such a component. ● On detection of a direction reversal, a tolerance defined by the machine data SAR_CLEARANCE_TOLERANCE is permitted. Programming the end point P4 for approach or P0 for retraction The end point is generally programmed with X... Y... Z... ● Programming during approach – P4 in SAR block. – P4 is defined by means of the end point of the next traversing block. More blocks can be inserted between an SAR block and the next traversing block without moving the geometry axes. Example: Program code Comment $TC_DP1[1,1]=120 ; Milling tool T1/D1 $TC_DP6[1,1]=7 ; Tool with 7 mm radius N10 G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z30 D1 T1 N20 X10 N30 G41 G147 DISCL=3 DISR=13 Z=0 F1000 N40 G1 X40 Y-10 N50 G1 X50 ... Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Fundamentals 330 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 N30/N40 can be replaced by: 1. Program code Comment N30 G41 G147 DISCL=3 DISR=13 X40 Y-10 Z0 F1000 2. Program code Comment N30 G41 G147 DISCL=3 DISR=13 F1000 N40 G1 X40 Y-10 Z0 0 10 20 30 40 50 X -10 Y DlSR=13 P4 Z=30 Z=3 Z=0 Machining up to this point with G0, continuing with G1 F1000 Contour Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 331 ● Programming during retraction – For an SAR block without programmed geometry axis, the contour ends in P2. The position in the axes that form the machining plane are obtained from the retraction contour. The axis component perpendicular to this is defined by DISCL. If DISCL=0, movement runs fully in the plane. – If in the SAR block only the axis perpendicular to the machining plane is programmed, the contour will end at P1. The positions of the remaining axes will result, as described above. If the SAR block is also the TRC disable block, an additional path from P1 to P0 is inserted such that no motion results at the end of the contour when disabling the TRC. – If only one axis on the machining plane is programmed, the missing second axis is modally added from its last position in the previous block. – For an SAR block without programmed geometry axis, the contour ends in P2. The position in the axes that form the machining plane are obtained from the retraction contour. The axis component perpendicular to this is defined by DISCL. If DISCL=0, movement runs fully in the plane. – If in the SAR block only the axis perpendicular to the machining plane is programmed, the contour will end at P1. The positions of the remaining axes will result, as described above. If the SAR block is also the TRC disable block, an additional path from P1 to P0 is inserted such that no motion results at the end of the contour when disabling the TRC. – If only one axis on the machining plane is programmed, the missing second axis is modally added from its last position in the previous block. P4 P1 P0 Contour (preceding block) Tool Tool center path Following block without compensation SAR block (G248 G40 ...) Retraction with SAR and simultaneous deactivation of TRC Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Fundamentals 332 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Approach and retraction velocities ● Velocity of the previous block (G0): All motions from P0 up to P2 are executed at this velocity, i.e. the motion parallel to the machining plane and the part of the infeed motion up to the safety clearance. ● Programming with FAD: Specification of the feedrate for – G341: infeed movement perpendicular to the machining plane from P2 to P3 – G340: from point P2 or P3 to P4 If FAD is not programmed, this part of the contour is also traversed at the modally active speed of the previous block, if no F word is programmed in the SAR block. ● Programmed feedrate F: This feedrate value is effective as of P3 or P2 if FAD is not programmed. If no F word is programmed in the SAR block, the speed of the previous block is active. Example: Program code Comment $TC_DP1[1,1]=120 ; Milling tool T1/D1 $TC_DP6[1,1]=7 ; Tool with 7 mm radius N10 G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z20 D1 T1 N20 G41 G341 G247 DISCL=AC(5) DISR=13 FAD 500 X40 Y-10 Z=0 F200 N30 X50 N40 X60 ... Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 333 0 10 20 30 40 50 X -10 Y 0 X Z 10 20 G0 F500 G0 F2000 F2000 5 60 P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 During retraction, the roles of the modally active feedrate from the previous block and the programmed feedrate value in the SAR block are reversed, i.e. the actual retraction contour is traversed with the old feedrate and a new speed programmed with the F word applies from P2 up to P0. P0 P1 P2 /P3 P4 No velocity programmed Only F programmed Only FAD programmed F and FAD programmed Rapid traverse if G0 is active, otherwise with old/new F word Velocity of the previous block (old F word) lnfeed velocity programmed with FAD New modal velocity programmed with F Velocities in the SAR subblocks on retraction with G340 Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Fundamentals 334 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 P4 P3 P2 P1 P0 Velocities in the SAR subblocks on retraction with G341 New modal velocity programmed with F lnfeed velocity programmed with FAD Velocity of the previous block (old F word) Rapid traverse if G0 is active, otherwise with old/new F word F and FAD programmed Only FAD programmed Only F programmed No velocity programmed P4 P3 P2 P1 P0 No velocity programmed Only F programmed Only FAD programmed F and FAD programmed Rapid traverse if G0 is active, otherwise with old/new F word Velocity of the previous block (old F word) Retraction speed programmed with FAD New modal velocity programmed with F Velocities in the SAR subblocks on retraction Reading positions Points P3 and P4 can be read in the WCS as a system variable during approach. ● $P_APR: reading P ● 3 (initial point) ● $P_AEP: reading P ● 4 (contour starting point) ● $P_APDV: read whether $P_APR and $P_AEP contain valid data Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 335 10.4.2 Approach and retraction with enhanced retraction strategies (G460, G461, G462) Function In certain special geometrical situations, special extended approach and retraction strategies, compared with the previous implementation with activated collision detection for the approach and retraction block, are required in order to activate or deactivate tool radius compensation. A collision detection can result, for example, in a section of the contour not being completely machined, see following figure: 10 20 50 100 10 N20 N30 Y X N10 Center point path with tool radius compensation Programmed contour Tool radius Figure 10-3 Retraction behavior with G460 Syntax G460 G461 G462 Significance G460: As previously (activation of the collision detection for the approach and retraction block) G461: Insertion of a circle in the TRC block, if it is not possible to have an intersection whose center point is in the end point of the uncorrected block, and whose radius is the same as the tool radius. Up to the intersection, machining is performed with an auxiliary circle around the contour end point (i.e. up to the end of the contour). G462: Insertion of a circle in the TRC block, if it is not possible to have an intersection; the block is extended by its end tangent (default setting). Machining is performed up to the extension of the last contour element (i.e. until shortly before the end of the contour). Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Fundamentals 336 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Note The approach behavior is symmetrical to the retraction behavior. The approach/retraction behavior is determined by the state of the G command in the approach/retraction block. The approach behavior can therefore be set independently of the retraction behavior. Examples Example 1: Retraction behavior with G460 The following example describes only the situation for deactivation of tool radius compensation: The behavior for approach is exactly the same. Program code Comment G42 D1 T1 ; Tool radius 20 mm ... G1 X110 Y0 N10 X0 N20 Y10 N30 G40 X50 Y50 Example 2: Approach with G461 Program code Comment N10 $TC_DP1[1,1]=120 ; Milling tool type N20 $TC_DP6[1,1]=10 ; Tool radius N30 X0 Y0 F10000 T1 D1 N40 Y20 N50 G42 X50 Y5 G461 N60 Y0 F600 N70 X30 N80 X20 Y-5 N90 X0 Y0 G40 N100 M30 Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 337 Further information G461 If no intersection is possible between the last TRC block and a preceding block, the offset curve of this block is extended with a circle whose center point lies at the end point of the uncorrected block and whose radius is equal to the tool radius. The control attempts to cut this circle with one of the preceding blocks. 10 20 50 100 10 N20 N30 Y X N10 Center point path with tool radius compensation Programmed contour Auxiliary curve Figure 10-4 Retraction behavior with G461 Collision monitoring CDON, CDOF If CDOF is active (see section Collision monitoring, CDON, CDOF), the search is aborted when an intersection is found, i.e., the system does not check whether further intersections with previous blocks exist. If CDON is active, the search continues for further intersections after the first intersection is found. An intersection point, which is found in this way, is the new end point of a preceding block and the start point of the deactivation block. The inserted circle is used exclusively to calculate the intersection and does not produce a traversing movement. Note If no intersection is found, alarm 10751 (collision danger) is output. Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Fundamentals 338 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 G462 If no intersection is possible between the last TRC block and a preceding block, a straight line is inserted, on retraction with G462 (initial setting), at the end point of the last block with tool radius compensation (the block is extended by its end tangent). The search for the intersection is then identical to the procedure for G461. 10 20 50 100 10 N20 N30 Y X N10 Center point path with tool radius compensa- tion Programmed contour Auxiliary curve Retraction behavior with G462 (see example) With G462, the corner generated by N10 and N20 in the example program is not machined to the full extent actually possible with the tool used. However, this behavior may be necessary if the part contour (as distinct from the programmed contour), to the left of N20 in the example, is not permitted to be violated even with y values greater than 10 mm. Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 339 Corner behavior with KONT If KONT is active (travel round contour at start or end point), the behavior differs according to whether the end point is in front of or behind the contour. ● End point in front of contour If the end point is in front of the contour, the retraction behavior is the same as with NORM. This property does not change even if the last contour block for G451 is extended with a straight line or a circle. Additional circumnavigation strategies to avoid a contour violation in the vicinity of the contour end point are therefore not required. ● End point behind contour If the end point is behind the contour, a circle or straight line is always inserted depending on G450/G451. In this case, G460-462 has no effect. If the last traversing block in this situation has no intersection with a preceding block, an intersection with the inserted contour element or with the straight line of the end point of the bypass circle to the programmed endpoint can result. If the inserted contour element is a circle (G450), and this forms an interface with the preceding block, this is equal to the interface that would occur with NORM and G461. In general, however, a remaining section of the circle still has to be traversed. For the linear part of the retraction block, no further calculation of intersection is required. In the second case, if no interface of the inserted contour element with the preceding blocks is found, the intersection between the retraction straight line and a preceding block is traversed. Therefore, a behavior that deviates from G460 can only occur with active G461 or G462 either if NORM is active or the behavior with KONT is geometrically identical to that with NORM. Tool radius compensation 10.5 Collision monitoring (CDON, CDOF, CDOF2) Fundamentals 340 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 10.5 10.5 Collision monitoring (CDON, CDOF, CDOF2) Function With the collision detection and active tool radius compensation, the tool paths are monitored through look-ahead contour calculation. This Look Ahead function allows possible collisions to be detected in advance and permits the control to actively avoid them. Collision detection can be activated or deactivated in the NC program. Syntax CDON CDOF CDOF2 Significance CDON: Command for the activation of the collision detection. CDOF: Command for the deactivation of the collision detection. With deactivated collision detection, a search is made in the previous traversing block (at inside corners) for a common intersection for the current block; if necessary the search is extended to even earlier blocks . Note: CDOF can be used to avoid the faulty detection of bottlenecks, resulting, for example, from missing information that is not available in the NC program. Tool radius compensation 10.5 Collision monitoring (CDON, CDOF, CDOF2) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 341 CDOF2: Command for the deactivation of the collision detection during 3D circumferential milling. The tool offset direction is determined from adjacent block parts with CDOF2. CDOF2 is only effective for 3D circumferential milling and has the same significance as CDOF for all other types of machining (e.g. 3D face milling). Note The number of NC blocks that are included in the collision detection, can be set via machine data. Example Milling on the center point path with standard tool The NC program describes the center point path of a standard tool. The contour for a tool that is actually used results in undersize, which is shown unrealistically large to demonstrate the geometric relationships in the following figure. The control also only has an overview of three blocks in the example. N20 N10 N30 P1 P2 N40 Part contour Compensa- tion motion U n d e r s i z e N o r m a l s i z e Offset on the starting point of N20 Offset on the end point of N10 Programmed original path (standard tool) Corrected set path (offset curve) Figure 10-5 Compensation motion for missing intersection Since an intersection exists only between the offset curves of the two blocks N10 and N40, the two blocks N20 and N30 would have to be omitted. In the example, the control does not know in block N40 if N10 has to be completely processed. Only a single block can therefore be omitted. With active CDOF2, the compensation motion shown in the figure is executed and not stopped. In this situation, an active CDOF or CDON would result in an alarm. Tool radius compensation 10.5 Collision monitoring (CDON, CDOF, CDOF2) Fundamentals 342 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information Program test To avoid program stops, the tool with the largest radius from the range of used tools should always be used during the program test. Examples of compensation motions for critical machining situations The following examples show critical machining situations that are detected by the control and compensated through modified tool paths. In all examples, a tool with too large a radius has been used for the machining of the contour. Example 1: Bottleneck detection Programmed contour Tool path As the tool radius selected for the machining of this inside contour is too large, the "bottleneck" is bypassed. An alarm is output. Tool radius compensation 10.5 Collision monitoring (CDON, CDOF, CDOF2) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 343 Example 2: Contour path shorter than tool radius Programmed contour Tool path The tool bypasses the workpiece corner on a transition circle, then continues on the programmed path. Example 3: Tool radius too large for internal machining Programmed contour Tool path In such cases, the contours are machined only as much as is possible without causing a contour violation. References Function Manual, Basic Functions; Tool Offset (W1), Chapter: "Collision detection and bottleneck detection" Tool radius compensation 10.6 2D tool compensation (CUT2D, CUT2DF) Fundamentals 344 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 10.6 10.6 2D tool compensation (CUT2D, CUT2DF) Function With CUT2D or CUT2DF you define how the tool radius compensation is to act or to be interpreted when machining in inclined planes. Tool length compensation The tool length compensation generally always refers to the fixed, non-rotated working plane. 2D tool radius compensation with contour tools The tool radius compensation for contour tools is used for automatic cutting-edge selection in the case of non-axially symmetrical tools that can be used for piece-by-piece machining of individual contour segments. Syntax CUT2D CUT2DF 2D tool radius compensation for contour tools is activated if either of the two machining directions G41 or G42 is programmed with CUT2D or CUT2DF. Note If tool radius compensation is not activated, a contour tool will behave like a standard tool with only the first cutting edge. Significance CUT2D: Activate 2 1/2 D radius compensation (default) CUT2DF: Activate 2 1/2 D radius compensation, tool radius compensation relative to the current frame or to inclined planes CUT2D is used when the orientation of the tool cannot be changed and the workpiece is rotated for machining on inclined surfaces. CUT2D is generally the standard setting and does not, therefore, have to be specified explicitly. Tool radius compensation 10.6 2D tool compensation (CUT2D, CUT2DF) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 345 Cutting-edge selection with contour tools Up to a maximum of 12 cutting edges can be assigned to each contour tool in any order. Machine manufacturer The valid tool types for non-axially symmetrical tools and the maximum number of cutting edges (Dn = D1 to D12) are defined by the machine manufacturer via machine data. Please contact the machine manufacturer if not all of the 12 cutting edges are available. Further information Tool radius compensation, CUT2D As for many applications, tool length compensation and tool radius compensation are calculated in the fixed working plane specified with G17 to G19. X X Z Z Example of G17 (X/Y plane): Tool radius compensation is active in the non-rotated X/Y plane, tool length compensation in the Z direction. Tool offset values For machining on inclined surfaces, the tool compensation values have to be defined accordingly, or be calculated using the functions for "Tool length compensation for orientable tools". For more information on this calculation method, see chapter "Tool orientation and tool length compensation". Tool radius compensation 10.6 2D tool compensation (CUT2D, CUT2DF) Fundamentals 346 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Tool radius compensation, CUT2DF In this case, it is possible to arrange the tool orientation perpendicular to the inclined working plane on the machine. X X Z Z If a frame containing a rotation is programmed, the compensation plane is also rotated with CUT2DF. The tool radius compensation is calculated in the rotated machining plane. Note The tool length compensation continues to be active relative to the non-rotated working plane. Definition of contour tools, CUT2D, CUT2DF A contour tool is defined by the number of cutting edges (on the basis of D nos) associated with a T no. The first cutting edge of a contour tool is the cutting edge that is selected when the tool is activated. If, for example, D5 is activated on T3 D5, then it is this cutting edge and the subsequent cutting edges that define the contour tool either partially or as a whole. The previous cutting edges will be ignored. References Function Manual, Basic Functions; Tool Offset (W1) Tool radius compensation 10.7 Keep tool radius compensation constant (CUTCONON, CUTCONOF) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 347 10.7 10.7 Keep tool radius compensation constant (CUTCONON, CUTCONOF) Function The "Keep tool radius compensation constant" function is used to suppress tool radius compensation for a number of blocks, whereby a difference between the programmed and the actual tool center path traveled set up by tool radius compensation in the previous blocks is retained as the compensation. It can be an advantage to use this method when several traversing blocks are required during line milling in the reversal points, but the contours produced by the tool radius compensation (follow strategies) are not wanted. It can be used independently of the type of tool radius compensation (2 1 /2D, 3D face milling, 3D circumferential milling). Syntax CUTCONON CUTCONOF Significance CUTCONON: Command to activate the "Keep tool radius compensation constant" function CUTCONOF: Command to deactivate the "Keep tool radius compensation constant" function Tool radius compensation 10.7 Keep tool radius compensation constant (CUTCONON, CUTCONOF) Fundamentals 348 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example - 10 50 Y X N140 N130 N120 N110 N100 N90 N80 N70 Contour with TRC Contour without TRC Program code Comment N10 ; Definition of tool d1. N20 $TC_DP1[1,1] = 110 ; Type N30 $TC_DP6[1,1]= 10. ; Radius N40 N50 X0 Y0 Z0 G1 G17 T1 D1 F10000 N60 N70 X20 G42 NORM N80 X30 N90 Y20 N100 X10 CUTCONON ; Activation of the compensation suppression. N110 Y30 KONT ; If required, insert bypass circle when deactivating the compensation suppression. N120 X-10 CUTCONOF N130 Y20 NORM ; No bypass circle when deactivating the TRC. N140 X0 Y0 G40 N150 M30 Tool radius compensation 10.7 Keep tool radius compensation constant (CUTCONON, CUTCONOF) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 349 Further information Tool radius compensation is normally active before the compensation suppression and is still active when the compensation suppression is deactivated again. In the last traversing block before CUTCONON, the offset point in the block end point is approached. All following blocks in which offset suppression is active are traversed without offset. However, they are offset by the vector from the end point of the last offset block to its offset point. These blocks can have any type of interpolation (linear, circular, polynomial). The deactivation block of the compensation suppression, i.e. the block that contains CUTCONOF, is compensated normally. It starts in the offset point of the starting point. One linear block is inserted between the end point of the previous block, i.e. the last programmed traversing block with active CUTCONON, and this point. Circular blocks, for which the circle plane is perpendicular to the compensation plane (vertical circles), are treated as though they had CUTCONON programmed. This implicit activation of the offset suppression is automatically canceled in the first traversing block that contains a traversing motion in the offset plane and is not such a circle. Vertical circle in this sense can only occur during circumferential milling. Tool radius compensation 10.8 Tools with a relevant cutting edge position Fundamentals 350 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 10.8 10.8 Tools with a relevant cutting edge position In the case of tools with a relevant tool point direction (turning and grinding tools – tool types 400–599; see chapter "Sign evaluation wear"), a change from G40 to G41/G42 or vice-versa is treated as a tool change. If a transformation is active (e.g., TRANSMIT), this leads to a preprocessing stop (decoding stop) and hence possibly to deviations from the intended part contour. This original functionality changes with regard to: 1. Preprocessing stop on TRANSMIT 2. Calculation of intersection points at approach and retraction with KONT 3. Tool change with active tool radius compensation 4. Tool radius compensation with variable tool orientation at transformation Further information The original functionality has been modified as follows: ● A change from G40 to G41/G42 and vice-versa is no longer treated as a tool change. Therefore, a preprocessing stop no longer occurs with TRANSMIT. ● The straight line between the tool edge center points at the block start and block end is used to calculate intersection points with the approach and retraction block. The difference between the tool edge reference point and the tool edge center point is superimposed on this movement. On approach and retraction with KONT (tool circumnavigates the contour point, see above subsection "Contour approach and retraction"), superimposition takes place in the linear part block of the approach or retraction motion. The geometric conditions are therefore identical for tools with and without a relevant tool point direction. Deviations from the previous behavior occur only in relatively rare cases where the approach or retraction block does not intersect with an adjacent traversing block, see the following figure: Tool radius compensation 10.8 Tools with a relevant cutting edge position Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 351 Last position of the cutting edge center point On the contour Programmed retraction block Block without Point of intersection with the previous block Cutting edge reference point Cutting edge center point Tool end position Cutting edge reference point Center path Last position of the cutting edge center point ● In circle blocks and in motion blocks containing rational polynomials with a denominator degree > 4, it is not permitted to change a tool with active tool radius compensation in cases where the distance between the tool edge center point and the tool edge reference point changes. With other types of interpolation, it is now possible to change when a transformation is active (e.g., TRANSMIT). ● For tool radius compensation with variable tool orientation, the transformation from the tool edge reference point to the tool edge center point can no longer be performed by means of a simple zero offset. Tools with a relevant tool point direction are therefore not permitted for 3D peripheral milling (an alarm is output). Note The subject is irrelevant with respect to face milling as only defined tool types without relevant tool point direction are permitted for this operation anyway. (A tool with a type, which has not been explicitly approved, is treated as a ball end mill with the specified radius. A tool point direction parameter is ignored). Tool radius compensation 10.8 Tools with a relevant cutting edge position Fundamentals 352 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 353 Path action 11 11.1 11.1 Exact stop (G60, G9, G601, G602, G603) Function In exact stop traversing mode, all path axes and special axes involved in the traversing motion that are not traversed modally, are decelerated at the end of each block until they come to a standstill. Exact stop is used when sharp outside corners have to be machined or inside corners finished to exact dimensions. The exact stop specifies how exactly the corner point has to be approached and when the transition is made to the next block: ● "Exact stop fine" The block change is performed as soon as the axis-specific tolerance limits for "Exact stop fine" are reached for all axes involved in the traversing motion. ● "Exact stop coarse" The block change is performed as soon as the axis-specific tolerance limits for "Exact stop coarse" are reached for all axes involved in the traversing motion. ● "Interpolator end" The block change is performed as soon as the control has calculated a set velocity of zero for all axes involved in the traversing motion. The actual position or the following error of the axes involved are not taken into account Note The tolerance limits for "Exact stop fine" and "Exact stop coarse" can be set for each axis via the machine data. Syntax G60 ... G9 ... G601/G602/G603, etc. Path action 11.1 Exact stop (G60, G9, G601, G602, G603) Fundamentals 354 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Significance G60: Command for activation of the modal exact stop G9: Command for activation of the non-modal exact stop G601: Command for activation of the exact stop criterion "Exact stop fine" G602: Command for activation of the exact stop criterion "Exact stop coarse" G603: Command for activation of the exact stop criterion "Interpolator end" Note The commands for activating the exact stop criteria (G601/G602/G603) are only effective if G60 or G9 is active. Example Program code Comment N5 G602 ; Criterion "Exact stop coarse" selected. N10 G0 G60 Z... ; Exact stop modal active. N20 X... Z... ; G60 continues to act. ... N50 G1 G601 ; Criterion "Exact stop fine" selected. N80 G64 Z... ; Switchover to continuous-path mode. ... N100 G0 G9 ; Exact stop acts only in this block. N110 ... ; Continuous-path mode active again. Path action 11.1 Exact stop (G60, G9, G601, G602, G603) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 355 Further information G60, G9 G9 generates the exact stop in the current block, G60 in the current block and in all following blocks. Continuous-path-mode commands G64 or G641 - G645 are used to deactivate G60. G601, G602 Programmed path with G601 Block advance with G602 The movement is decelerated and stopped briefly at the corner point. Note Do not set the limits for the exact stop criteria any tighter than necessary. The tighter the limits, the longer it takes to position and approach the target position. Path action 11.1 Exact stop (G60, G9, G601, G602, G603) Fundamentals 356 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 G603 The block change is initiated when the control has calculated a set velocity of zero for the axes involved. At this point, the actual value lags behind by a proportionate factor depending on the dynamic response of the axes and the path velocity. The workpiece corners can now be rounded. Programmed path Traversed path with F1 Traversed path with F2 F1 < F2 Block change Configured exact stop criterion A channel-specific setting can be made for G0 and the other commands in the first G function group indicating that contrary to the programmed exact stop criterion a preset criterion should be used automatically (see machine manufacturer's specifications). References Function Manual, Basic Functions, Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, Look Ahead (B1) Path action 11.2 Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 357 11.2 11.2 Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) Function In continuous-path mode, the path velocity at the end of the block (for the block change) is not decelerated to a level which would permit the fulfillment of an exact stop criterion. The objective of this mode is, in fact, to avoid rapid deceleration of the path axes at the block- change point so that the axis velocity remains as constant as possible when the program moves to the next block. To achieve this objective, the "LookAhead" function is also activated when continuous-path mode is selected. Continuouspath mode with smoothing facilitates the tangential shaping and/or smoothing of angular block transitions caused by local changes in the programmed contour. Continuouspath operation: ● Rounds the contour ● Reduces machining times by eliminating braking and acceleration processes that are required to fulfill the exact-stop criterion ● Improves cutting conditions because of the more constant velocity Continuouspath mode is suitable if: ● A contour needs to be traversed as quickly as possible (e.g. with rapid traverse) ● The exact contour may deviate from the programmed contour within a specific tolerance for the purpose of obtaining a continuous contour Continuous-path mode is not suitable if: ● A contour needs to be traversed precisely ● An absolutely constant velocity is required Note Continuous-path mode is interrupted by blocks which trigger a preprocessing stop implicitly, e.g. due to: • Access to specific machine status data ($A...) • Auxiliary function outputs Path action 11.2 Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) Fundamentals 358 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Syntax G64... G641 ADIS=… G641 ADISPOS=… G642... G643... G644... G645... Meaning G64: Continuous-path mode with reduced velocity as per the overload factor G641: Continuous-path mode with smoothing as per distance criterion ADIS=... : Distance criterion with G641 for path functions G1, G2, G3, etc. ADISPOS=... : Distance criterion with G641 for rapid traverse G0 The distance criterion (= rounding clearance) ADIS or ADISPOS describes the maximum distance the rounding block may cover before the end of the block, or the distance after the end of block within which the rounding block must be terminated respectively. Note: If ADIS/ADISPOS is not programmed, a value of "zero" applies and the traversing behavior therefore corresponds to G64. The rounding clearance is automatically reduced (by up to 36%) for short traversing distances. G642: Continuous-path mode with smoothing within the defined tolerances In this mode, under normal circumstances smoothing takes place within the maximum permissible path deviation. However, instead of these axis-specific tolerances, observation of the maximum contour deviation (contour tolerance) or the maximum angular deviation of the tool orientation (orientation tolerance) can be configured. Note: Expansion to include contour and orientation tolerance is only supported on systems featuring the "Polynomial interpolation" option. Path action 11.2 Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 359 G643: Continuous-path mode with smoothing within the defined tolerances (block-internal) G643 differs from G642 in that is not used to generate a separate rounding block; instead, axis-specific block-internal rounding movements are inserted. The rounding clearance can be different for each axis. G644: Continuous-path mode with smoothing with maximum possible dynamic response Note: G644 is not available with an active kinematic transformation. The system switches internally to G642. G645: Continuous-path mode with smoothing and tangential block transitions within the defined tolerances G645 has the same effect on corners as G642. With G645, rounding blocks are also only generated on tangential block transitions if the curvature of the original contour exhibits a jump in at least one axis. Note Rounding cannot be used as a substitute for smoothing (RND). The user should not make any assumptions with respect to the appearance of the contour within the rounding area. The type of rounding can depend on dynamic conditions, e.g. on the tool path velocity. Rounding on the contour is therefore only practical with small ADIS values. RND must be used if a defined contour is to be traversed at the corner. NOTICE If a rounding movement initiated by G641, G642, G643, G644 or G645 is interrupted, the starting or end point of the original traversing block (as appropriate for REPOS mode) will be used for subsequent repositioning (REPOS), rather than the interruption point. Path action 11.2 Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) Fundamentals 360 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example 7 X Y 10 60 80 100 Z Y 7 0 5 0 4 0 1 0 Exact stop fine The two outside corners on the groove are to be approached exactly. Otherwise machining should be performed in continuous-path mode. Program code Comment N05DIAMOF ; Radius as dimension. N10 G17 T1 G41 G0 X10 Y10 Z2 S300 M3 ; Approach starting position, activate spindle, path compensation. N20 G1 Z-7 F8000 ; Tool infeed. N30 G641 ADIS=0.5 ; Contour transitions are smoothed. N40 Y40 N50 X60 Y70 G60 G601 ; Approach position exactly with exact stop fine. N60 Y50 N70 X80 N80 Y70 N90 G641 ADIS=0.5 X100 Y40 ; Contour transitions are smoothed. N100 X80 Y10 N110 X10 N120 G40 G0 X-20 ; Deactivate path compensation. N130 Z10 M30 ; Retract tool, end of program. Path action 11.2 Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 361 Further information Continuous-path mode G64 In continuous-path mode, the tool travels across tangential contour transitions with as constant a path velocity as possible (no deceleration at block boundaries). LookAhead deceleration is applied before corners and blocks with exact stop. C o n s t a n t v e l o c i t y Corners are also traversed at a constant velocity. In order to minimize the contour error, the velocity is reduced according to an acceleration limit and an overload factor. Note The extent of smoothing of the contour transitions depends on the feedrate and the overload factor. The overload factor can be set in MD32310 $MA_MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR. Setting MD20490 $MC_IGNORE_OVL_FACTOR_FOR_ADIS means that block transitions will always be rounded irrespective of the set overload factor. Path action 11.2 Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) Fundamentals 362 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 The following points should be noted in order to prevent an undesired stop in path motion (relief cutting): ● Auxiliary functions enabled after the end of the movement or before the next movement interrupt continuous-path mode (exception: high-speed auxiliary functions). ● Positioning axes always traverse according to the exact stop principle, positioning window fine (as for G601). If an NC block has to wait for positioning axes, continuous- path mode is interrupted on the path axes. However, intermediate blocks containing only comments, calculation blocks or subprogram calls do not affect continuous-path mode. Note If FGROUP does not contain all the path axes, there is often a step change in the velocity at block transitions for those axes excluded from FGROUP; the control limits this change in velocity to the permissible values set in MD32300 $MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL and MD32310 $MA_MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR. This braking operation can be avoided through the application of a rounding function, which "smoothes" the specific positional interrelationship between the path axes. LookAhead predictive velocity control In continuous-path mode the control automatically determines the velocity control for several NC blocks in advance. This enables acceleration and deceleration across multiple blocks with almost tangential transitions. Look Ahead is particularly suitable for the machining of movement sequences comprising short traverse paths with high path feedrates. The number of NC blocks included in the Look Ahead calculation can be defined in machine data. Feedrate programmed Block path G64: Predictive velocity control G60: Phase constant velocity cannot be reached N12 N11 N10 N9 N8 N7 N6 N5 N4 N3 N2 N1 F Path action 11.2 Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 363 Continuous-path mode with smoothing as per distance criterion (G641) With G641, the control inserts transition elements at contour transitions. The rounding clearance ADIS (or ADISPOS for G0) specifies the maximum extent to which the corners can be rounded. Within this rounding clearance, the control is free to ignore the path construct and replace it with a dynamically optimized distance. Disadvantage: Only one ADIS value is available for all axes. The effect of G641 is similar to RNDM; however, it is not restricted to the axes of the working plane. Like G64, G641 works with LookAhead predictive velocity control. Corner rounding blocks with a high degree of curvature are approached at reduced velocity. Example: Program code Comment N10 G641 ADIS=0.5 G1 X... Y... ; The rounding block must begin no more than 0.5 mm before the programmed end of the block and must finish 0.5 mm after the end of the block. This setting remains modal. ADlS/ADlSPOS Max. 0.5 mm Max. 0.5 mm Programmed end of contour Note Smoothing cannot and should not replace the functions for defined smoothing (RND, RNDM, ASPLINE, BSPLINE, CSPLINE). Path action 11.2 Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) Fundamentals 364 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Smoothing with axial precision with G642 With G642, smoothing does not take place within a defined ADIS range, but the axial tolerances defined with MD33100 $MA_COMPRESS_POS_TOL are complied with. The rounding clearance is determined based on the shortest rounding clearance of all axes. This value is taken into account when generating a rounding block. Block-internal smoothing with G643 The maximum deviations from the precise contour in the case of smoothing with G643 are defined for each axis using machine data MD33100 $MA_COMPRESS_POS_TOL. G643 is not used to generate a separate rounding block, but axis-specific block-internal rounding movements are inserted. In the case of G643, the rounding clearance of each axis can be different. Smoothing with contour and orientation tolerance with G642/G643 MD20480 $MC_SMOOTHING_MODE can be used to configure rounding with G642 and G643 so that instead of the axis-specific tolerances, a contour tolerance and an orientation tolerance can be applied. The contour tolerance and orientation tolerance are set in the channel-specific setting data: SD42465 $SC_SMOOTH_CONTUR_TOL (maximum contour deviation) SD42466 $SC_SMOOTH_ORI_TOL (maximum angular deviation of the tool orientation) The setting data can be programmed in the NC program; this means that it can be specified differently for each block transition. Very different specifications for the contour tolerance and the tolerance of the tool orientation can only take effect with G643. Note Expansion to include contour and orientation tolerance is only supported on systems featuring the "Polynomial interpolation" option. Note An orientation transformation must be active for smoothing within the orientation tolerance. Path action 11.2 Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 365 Corner rounding with greatest possible dynamic response in G644 Smoothing with maximum possible dynamic response is configured in the thousands place with MD20480 $MC_SMOOTHING_MODE. Value Significance 0 Specification of maximum axial deviations with: MD33100 $MA_COMPRESS_POS_TOL 1 Specification of maximum rounding clearance by programming: ADIS=... or ADISPOS=... 2 Specification of the maximum possible frequencies of each axis occurring in the rounding area with: MD32440 $MA_LOOKAH_FREQUENCY The rounding area is defined such that no frequencies in excess of the specified maximum can occur while the rounding motion is in progress. 3 When rounding with G644, neither the tolerance nor the rounding distance are monitored. Each axis traverses around a corner with the maximum possible dynamic response. With SOFT, both the maximum acceleration and the maximum jerk of each axis is maintained. With the BRISK command, the jerk is not limited; instead, each axis travels at the maximum possible acceleration. Smoothing of tangential block transitions with G645 With G645, the smoothing movement is defined so that the acceleration of all axes involved remains smooth (no jumps) and the parameterized maximum deviations from the original contour (MD33120 $MA_PATH_TRANS_POS_TOL) are not exceeded. In the case of angular non-tangential block transitions, the smoothing behavior is the same as with G642. Path action 11.2 Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) Fundamentals 366 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 No intermediate rounding blocks An intermediate rounding block is not inserted in the following cases: ● The axis stops between the two blocks. This occurs when: – The following block contains an auxiliary function output before the movement. – The following block does not contain a path movement. – An axis is traversed for the first time as a path axis for the following block when it was previously a positioning axis. – An axis is traversed for the first time as a positioning axis for the following block when it was previously a path axis. – The previous block traverses geometry axes and the following block does not. – The following block traverses geometry axes and the previous block does not. – Before tapping, the following block uses G33 as preparatory function and the previous block does not. – A change is made between BRISK and SOFT. – Axes involved in the transformation are not completely assigned to the path motion (e.g. for oscillation, positioning axes). ● The rounding block would slow down the part program execution. This occurs: – Between two very short blocks. Since each block requires at least one interpolation cycle, the added intermediate block would double the machining time. – If a block transition G64 (continuous-path mode without smoothing) can be traversed without a reduction in velocity. Corner rounding would increase the machining time. This means that the value of the permitted overload factor (MD32310 $MA_MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR) affects whether a block transition is rounded or not. The overload factor is only taken into account for corner rounding with G641/G642. The overload factor has no effect in the case of smoothing with G643 (this behavior can also be set for G641 and G642 by setting MD20490 $MC_IGNORE_OVL_FACTOR_FOR_ADIS to TRUE). Path action 11.2 Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 367 ● Rounding is not parameterized. This occurs when: – For G641 in G0 blocks ADISPOS = 0 (default!) – For G641 in non-G0 blocks ADIS = 0 (default!) – For G641 on transition from G0 and non-G0 or non-G0 and G0 respectively, the smaller value from ADISPOS and ADIS applies. – ForG642/G643, all axis-specific tolerances are zero. ● The block does not contain traversing motion (zero block). This occurs when: – Synchronized actions are active. Normally, the interpreter eliminates zero blocks. However, if synchronous actions are active, this zero block is included and also executed. In so doing, an exact stop is initiated corresponding to the active programming. This allows the synchronous action to also switch. – Zero blocks are generated by program jumps. Continuous-path mode in rapid traverse G0 One of the specified functions G60/G9 or G64, or G641 - G645, also has to be specified for rapid traverse motion. Otherwise, the default in the machine data is used. Message as executable block During continuous-path mode, a message from the part program can also be output as executable block. To do this, the MSG command must be programmed with the second call parameter and the parameter value "1": MSG("Text",1) If MSG is programmed without the second parameter, the message is output with the next executable block. References For further information about continuous-path mode see: Function Manual, Basic Functions; Continuous-Path Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1). Path action 11.2 Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) Fundamentals 368 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 369 Coordinate transformations (frames) 12 12.1 12.1 Frames Frame The frame is a self-contained arithmetic rule that transforms one Cartesian coordinate system into another Cartesian coordinate system. Basic frame (basic offset) The basic frame describes coordinate transformation from the basic coordinate system (BCS) to the basic zero system (BZS) and has the same effect as settable frames. See Basic coordinate system (BCS) (Page 31). Settable frames Settable frames are the configurable work offsets which can be called from within any NC program with the G54 to G57 and G505 to G599 commands. The offset values are predefined by the user and stored in the zero offset memory on the control. They are used to define the settable zero system (SZS). See: ● Settable zero system (SZS) (Page 34) ● Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) (Page 173) Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.1 Frames Fundamentals 370 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Programmable frames Sometimes it is useful or necessary to move the originally selected workpiece coordinate system (or the "settable zero system") to another position within an NC program and, if required, to rotate it, mirror it and/or scale it. This can be achieved using programmable frames. Rotation around the Z axis W o r k o f f s e t X0 Y0 Z0 Z1=Z2 X2 Y2 X1 Y1 See Frame instructions (Page 371). Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.2 Frame instructions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 371 12.2 12.2 Frame instructions Function The operations for programmable frames apply in the current NC program. They function as either additive or substitute elements: ● Substitute operation Deletes all previously programmed frame operations. The reference is provided by the last settable work offset called (G54 to G57, G505 to G599). TRANS, ATRANS SCALE, ASCALE MlRROR,AMlRROR ROT AROT Y X Y X Y X Y X ● Additive operation Appended to existing frames. The reference is provided by the currently set workpiece zero or the last workpiece zero programmed with a frame operation. TRANS ATRANS Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.2 Frame instructions Fundamentals 372 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Applications ● Offset the zero point to any position on the workpiece. ● Align the coordinate axes by rotating parallel to the desired working plane. Y 1 X 1 Z 1 X 0 Y 0 Z 0 Advantages In one setting: ● Inclined surfaces can be machined ● Drill holes with various angles can be produced ● Multi-face machining can be performed Note Depending on the machine kinematics, the conventions for working plane and tool offsets must be taken into account for the machining in inclined working planes Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.2 Frame instructions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 373 Syntax Substitute operations: Additive operations: TRANS X… Y… Z… ATRANS X… Y… Z… ROT X… Y… Z… AROT X… Y… Z… ROT RPL=… AROT RPL=… ROTS/CROTS X... Y... AROTS X... Y... SCALE X… Y… Z… ASCALE X… Y… Z… MIRROR X0/Y0/Z0 AMIRROR X0/Y0/Z0 Note Each frame operation is programmed in a separate NC block. Significance TRANS, ATRANS SCALE, ASCALE MlRROR,AMlRROR ROT AROT X Z X Z X Z X Z Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.2 Frame instructions Fundamentals 374 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 TRANS/ATRANS: Workpiece coordinate system offset in the direction of the specified geometry axis or axes Workpiece coordinate system rotation: • By linking individual rotations around the specified geometry axis or axes or • Around the angle RPL=... in the current working plane (G17/G18/G19) Direction of rotation: Z Y X + - + + - - With RPY notation: Z, Y', X'' Rotation sequence: With Euler angle: Z, X', Z'' The angles of rotation are only defined unambiguously in the following ranges: -180 ≤ x ≤ 180 -90 < y < 90 With RPY notation: -180 ≤ z ≤ 180 0 ≤ x < 180 -180 ≤ y ≤ 180 ROT/AROT: Range of values: With Euler angle: -180 ≤ z ≤ 180 Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.2 Frame instructions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 375 ROTS/AROTS: Workpiece coordinate system rotation by means of the specification of solid angles The orientation of a plane in space is defined unambiguously by specifying two solid angles. Therefore, up to 2 solid angles may be programmed: ROTS/AROTS X... Y... / Z... X... / Y... Z... CROTS: CROTS works in the same way as ROTS but refers to the valid frame in the database. SCALE/ASCALE: Scaling in the direction of the specified geometry axis or axes to increase/reduce the size of a contour MIRROR/AMIRROR: Workpiece coordinate system mirroring by means of mirroring (direction change) the specified geometry axis Value: freely selectable (in this case "0") Note Frame operations can be used individually or combined at will. CAUTION Frame operations are executed in the programmed sequence. Note Additive statements are frequently used in subroutines. The basic functions defined in the main program are not lost after the end of the subroutine if the subroutine has been programmed with the SAVE attribute. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.3 Programmable zero offset Fundamentals 376 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 12.3 12.3 Programmable zero offset 12.3.1 Zero offset (TRANS, ATRANS) Function TRANS/ATRANS can be used to program work offsets for all path and positioning axes in the direction of the axis specified in each case. This means that it is possible to work with changing zero points, e.g. during repetitive machining operations at different workpiece positions. Milling: Turning: Z Y M X M Z M Y X G 5 4 TRANS X Z W M TRANS G54 Syntax TRANS X… Y… Z… ATRANS X… Y… Z… Note Each frame operation is programmed in a separate NC block. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.3 Programmable zero offset Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 377 Significance TRANS: Absolute work offset, with reference to the currently valid workpiece zero set with G54 to G57, G505 to G599. ATRANS: As TRANS, but with additive work offset X... Y... Z... : Offset values in the direction of the specified geometry axes Examples Example 1: Milling Y X Y M X M Y X Y X G 5 4 10 50 1 0 5 0 With this workpiece, the illustrated shapes recur several times in the same program. The machining sequence for this shape is stored in a subroutine. Work offset is used to set the workpiece zeros required in each case and then call the subprogram. Program code Comment N10 G1 G54 ; Working plane X/Y, workpiece zero N20 G0 X0 Y0 Z2 ; Approach starting point N30 TRANS X10 Y10 ; Absolute offset N40 L10 ; Subroutine call N50 TRANS X50 Y10 ; Absolute offset N60 L10 ; Subroutine call N70 M30 ; End of program Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.3 Programmable zero offset Fundamentals 378 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example 2: Turning X Z M W 140 130 150 Program code Comment N.. ... N10 TRANS X0 Z150 ; Absolute offset N15 L20 ; Subroutine call N20 TRANS X0 Z140 (or ATRANS Z-10) ; Absolute offset N25 L20 ; Subroutine call N30 TRANS X0 Z130 (or ATRANS Z-10) ; Absolute offset N35 L20 ; Subroutine call N.. ... Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.3 Programmable zero offset Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 379 Further information TRANS X... Y... Z... Translation through the offset values programmed in the specified axis directions (path, synchronized axes and positioning axes). The reference is provided by the last settable work offset called (G54 to G57, G505 to G599). NOTICE The TRANS command resets all frame components of the previously activated programmable frame. TRANS TRANS Note ATRANS can be used to program an offset to be added to existing frames. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.3 Programmable zero offset Fundamentals 380 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 ATRANS X... Y... Z... Translation through the offset values programmed in the specified axis directions. The currently set or last programmed zero point is used as the reference. TRANS ATRANS Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.3 Programmable zero offset Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 381 12.3.2 Axial zero offset (G58, G59) Function The G58 and G59 functions can be used to substitute translation components of the programmable work offset with specific axes: ● G58 is used for the absolute translation component (coarse offset). ● G59 is used for the additive translation component (fine offset). Z M Z Y M Y X M X G 5 4 Translation a b s o lu te tra n s la tio n G 5 8 T R A N S additive tra. G59 ATRANS Conditions The G58 and G59 functions can only be used if fine offset has been configured (MD24000 $MC_FRAME_ADD_COMPONENTS = 1). Syntax G58 X… Y… Z… A… G59 X… Y… Z… A… Note Each of the substitute operations G58 and G59 has to be programmed in a separate NC block. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.3 Programmable zero offset Fundamentals 382 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Significance G58: G58 replaces the absolute translation component of the programmable work offset for the specified axis, but the programmed additive offset remains valid The reference is provided by the last settable work offset called (G54 to G57, G505 to G599). G59: G59 replaces the additive translation component of the programmable work offset for the specified axis, but the programmed absolute offset remains valid X… Y… Z…: Offset values in the direction of the specified geometry axes Example Program code Comment ... N50 TRANS X10 Y10 Z10 ; Absolute translation component X10 Y10 Z10 N60 ATRANS X5 Y5 ; Additive translation component X5 Y5 ⇒ Total offset: X15 Y15 Z10 N70 G58 X20 ; Absolute translation component X20 + additive translation component X5 Y5 ⇒ Total offset X25 Y15 Z10 N80 G59 X10 Y10 ; Additive translation component X10 Y10 + absolute translation component X20 Y10 ⇒ Total offset X30 Y20 Z10 ... Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.3 Programmable zero offset Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 383 Further information The absolute translation component is modified by the following commands: ● TRANS ● G58 ● CTRANS ● CFINE ● $P_PFRAME[X,TR] The additive translation component is modified by the following commands: ● ATRANS ● G59 ● CTRANS ● CFINE ● $P_PFRAME[X,FI] The table below describes the effect of various program commands on the absolute and additive offsets. Command Coarse or absolute offset Fine or additive offset Comment TRANS X10 10 unchanged Absolute offset for X G58 X10 10 unchanged Overwrites absolute offset for X $P_PFRAME[X,TR]=10 10 unchanged Progr. offset in X ATRANS X10 unchanged Fine (old) + 10 Additive offset for X G59 X10 unchanged 10 Overwriting additive offset for X $P_PFRAME[X,FI]=10 unchanged 10 Progr. fine offset in X CTRANS(X,10) 10 0 Offset for X CTRANS() 0 0 Deselection of offset (including fine offset component) CFINE(X,10) 0 10 Fine offset in X Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.4 Programmable rotation (ROT, AROT, RPL) Fundamentals 384 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 12.4 12.4 Programmable rotation (ROT, AROT, RPL) Function ROT/AROT can be used to rotate the workpiece coordinate system around each of the three geometry axes X, Y, Z or through an angle RPL in the selected working plane G17 to G19 (or around the perpendicular infeed axis). This allows inclined surfaces or multiple workpiece faces to be machined in one setting. Syntax ROT X… Y… Z… ROT RPL=… AROT X… Y… Z… AROT RPL=… Note Each frame operation is programmed in a separate NC block. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.4 Programmable rotation (ROT, AROT, RPL) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 385 Significance ROT: Absolute rotation, with reference to the currently valid workpiece zero set with G54 to G57, G505 to G599. RPL: Rotation in the plane: Angle through which the coordinate system is rotated (plane set with G17 to G19) The sequence in which the rotation is to be performed can be specified via the machine data. The default setting is RPY notation (= Roll, Pitch, Yaw) with Z, Y, X. AROT: Additive rotation in relation to the currently valid set or programmed zero point X... Y... Z... : Rotation in space: Geometry axes around which the rotation is performed Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.4 Programmable rotation (ROT, AROT, RPL) Fundamentals 386 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Examples Example 1: Rotation in the plane X Y 30 60° 45° 7 20 55 1 0 3 5 4 0 R 7 1 2 8 With this workpiece, the shapes shown recur in a program. In addition to the zero offset, rotations have to be performed, as the shapes are not arranged paraxially. Program code Comment N10 G17 G54 ; Working plane X/Y, workpiece zero N20 TRANS X20 Y10 ; Absolute offset N30 L10 ; Subroutine call N40 TRANS X55 Y35 ; Absolute offset N50 AROT RPL=45 ; Rotation of the coordinate system through 45° N60 L10 ; Subroutine call N70 TRANS X20 Y40 ; Absolute offset (resets all previous offsets) N80 AROT RPL=60 ; Additive rotation through 60° N90 L10 ; Subroutine call N100 G0 X100 Y100 ; Retraction N110 M30 ; End of program Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.4 Programmable rotation (ROT, AROT, RPL) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 387 Example 2: Spatial rotation X Z 30° X Y r 7 30 7 10 45 2 0 1 0 1 2 8 5 In this example, paraxial and inclined workpiece surfaces are to be machined in a clamping. Condition: The tool must be aligned perpendicular to the inclined surface in the rotated Z direction. Program code Comment N10 G17 G54 ; Working plane X/Y, workpiece zero N20 TRANS X10 Y10 ; Absolute offset N30 L10 ; Subroutine call N40 ATRANS X35 ; Additive offset N50 AROT Y30 ; Rotation around the Y axis N60 ATRANS X5 ; Additive offset N70 L10 ; Subroutine call N80 G0 X300 Y100 M30 ; Retraction, end of program Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.4 Programmable rotation (ROT, AROT, RPL) Fundamentals 388 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Example 3: Multi-face machining Z Z X X Y Y G 1 7 G 1 7 In this example, identical shapes are machined in two workpiece surfaces perpendicular to one another via subroutines. In the new coordinate system on the right-hand workpiece surface, infeed direction, working plane and the zero point have been set up as on the top surface. Therefore, the conditions required for the subroutine execution still apply: working plane G17, coordinate plane X/Y, infeed direction Z. Program code Comment N10 G17 G54 ; Working plane X/Y, workpiece zero N20 L10 ; Subroutine call N30 TRANS X100 Z-100 ; Absolute offset Z X Y Z X Y -100 100 Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.4 Programmable rotation (ROT, AROT, RPL) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 389 Program code Comment N40 AROT Y90 ; Rotation of the coordinate system around Y Z X Y Z X Y AROT Y90 N50 AROT Z90 ; Rotation of the coordinate system around Z Z X Y Z X Y AROT Z90 N60 L10 ; Subroutine call N70 G0 X300 Y100 M30 ; Retraction, end of program Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.4 Programmable rotation (ROT, AROT, RPL) Fundamentals 390 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information Rotation in the plane The coordinate system is rotated: ● in the plane selected with G17 to G19. Substitute operation ROT RPL=... or additive operation AROT RPL=... ● in the current plane around the angle of rotation programmed with RPL=.... Z X Y G 1 7 G 1 8 G 1 9 Z X Y Z G 1 7 G 1 9 G 1 8 ROT Note See "Rotation in space" for more information. Plane change WARNING If you program a change of plane (G17 to G19) after a rotation, the angles of rotation programmed for the relevant axes are retained and continue to apply in the new working plane. It is, therefore, advisable to deactivate rotation before a change of plane. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.4 Programmable rotation (ROT, AROT, RPL) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 391 Deactivate rotation For all axes: ROT (without axis parameter) CAUTION All frame components of the previously programmed frame are reset. ROT X... Y... Z... The coordinate system is rotated through the programmed angle around the specified axes. The center of rotation is provided by the last settable work offset specified (G54 to G57, G505 to G599). NOTICE The ROT command resets all frame components of the previously activated programmable frame. X Y Note AROT can be used to program a new rotation to be added to existing frames. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.4 Programmable rotation (ROT, AROT, RPL) Fundamentals 392 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 AROT X... Y... Z... Rotation through the angle values programmed in the axis direction parameters. The center of rotation is the currently set or last programmed zero point. A R O T ROT Y X Note In the case of both operations, please bear in mind the sequence and direction in which the rotations are being executed! Direction of rotation The following is defined as the positive direction of rotation: The view in the direction of the positive coordinate axis and clockwise rotation. Z Y X + - + + - - Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.4 Programmable rotation (ROT, AROT, RPL) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 393 Order of rotation Up to 3 geometry axes can be rotated simultaneously in one NC block. The sequence in which the rotations are to be executed is defined using machine data (MD10600 $MN_FRAME_ANGLE_INPUT_MODE): ● RPY notation: Z, Y', X'' or ● Euler angles: Z, X', Z'' RPY notation (the default setting) results in the following sequence: 1. Rotation around the 3rd geometry axis (Z) 2. Rotation around the 2nd geometry axis (Y) 3. Rotation around the 1st geometry axis (X) Z Y 0 1 2 X This order applies if the geometry axes are programmed in a single block. It also applies irrespective of the input sequence. If only two axes are to be rotated, the parameter for the 3rd axis (value zero) can be omitted. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.4 Programmable rotation (ROT, AROT, RPL) Fundamentals 394 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Value range with RPY angle The angles are defined uniquely only within the following value ranges: Rotation around 1st geometry axis: -180° ≤ X ≤ +180° Rotation around 2nd geometry axis: -90° ≤ Y ≤ +90° Rotation around 3rd geometry axis: -180° ≤ Z ≤ +180° All possible rotations can be represented with this value range. Values outside the range are normalized by the control into the above range during writing and reading. This value range applies to all frame variables. Examples of reading back in RPY $P_UIFR[1] = CROT(X, 10, Y, 90, Z, 40) returns on reading back: $P_UIFR[1] = CROT(X, 0, Y, 90, Z, 30) $P_UIFR[1] = CROT(X, 190, Y, 0, Z, -200) returns on reading back $P_UIFR[1] = CROT(X, -170, Y, 0, Z, 160) When frame rotation components are read and written, the value range limits must be observed to ensure that the same results are obtained for read or write, or repeat write operations. Value range with Euler angle The angles are defined uniquely only within the following value ranges: Rotation around 1st geometry axis: 0° ≤ X ≤ +180° Rotation around 2nd geometry axis: -180° ≤ Y ≤ +180° Rotation around 3rd geometry axis: -180° ≤ Z ≤ +180° All possible rotations can be represented with this value range. Values outside the range are normalized by the control into the above range. This value range applies to all frame variables. CAUTION To ensure the angles written are read back unambiguously, it is absolutely essential to observe the defined value ranges. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.4 Programmable rotation (ROT, AROT, RPL) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 395 Note If you want to define the order of the rotations individually, program the desired rotation successively for each axis with AROT. The working plane also rotates The working plane defined with G17, G18 or G19 rotates with the spatial rotation. Example: Working plane G17 X/Y, the workpiece coordinate system is positioned on the top surface of the workpiece. Translation and rotation is used to move the coordinate system to one of the side faces. Working plane G17 also rotates. This feature can be used to program plane destination positions in X/Y coordinates and the infeed in the Z direction. Z Z X X Y Y G 1 7 G 1 7 Condition: The tool must be positioned perpendicular to the working plane. The positive direction of the infeed axis points in the direction of the toolholder. Specifying CUT2DF activates the tool radius compensation in the rotated plane. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.5 Programmable frame rotations with solid angles (ROTS, AROTS, CROTS) Fundamentals 396 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 12.5 12.5 Programmable frame rotations with solid angles (ROTS, AROTS, CROTS) Function Orientations in space can be defined by programming frame rotations with solid angles. The ROTS, AROTS and CROTS commands are available for this purpose. ROTS and AROTS behave in the same way asROT and AROT. Syntax The orientation of a plane in space is defined unambiguously by specifying two solid angles. Therefore, up to 2 solid angles may be programmed: ● When programming the solid angles X and Y, the new X axis lies in the old Z/X plane. ROTS X... Y... AROTS X... Y... CROTS X... Y... ● When programming the solid angles Z and X, the new Z axis lies in the old Y/Z plane. ROTS Z... X... AROTS Z... X... CROTS Z... X... ● When programming the solid angles Y and Z, the new Y axis lies in the old X/Y plane. ROTS Y... Z... AROTS Y... Z... CROTS Y... Z... Note Each frame operation is programmed in a separate NC block. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.5 Programmable frame rotations with solid angles (ROTS, AROTS, CROTS) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 397 Significance ROTS: Absolute frame rotations with solid angles, with reference to the currently valid workpiece zero set with G54 to G57, G505 to G599. AROTS: Additive frame rotations with solid angles with reference to the currently valid set or programmed zero point CROTS: Frame rotations with solid angles, with reference to the valid frame in the database with rotations in the specified axes X… Y… / Z… X… / Y… Z… : Specification of solid angles Note ROTS/AROTS/CROTS can also be programmed together with RPL to generate a rotation in the plane set with G17 to G19: ROTS/AROTS/CROTS RPL=... Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.6 Programmable scale factor (SCALE, ASCALE) Fundamentals 398 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 12.6 12.6 Programmable scale factor (SCALE, ASCALE) Function SCALE/ASCALE can be used to program up or down scale factors for all path, synchronized, and positioning axes in the direction of the axes specified in each case. This makes it possible, therefore, to take geometrically similar shapes or different shrinkage allowances into account in the programming. Syntax SCALE X… Y… Z… ASCALE X… Y… Z… Note Each frame operation is programmed in a separate NC block. Significance SCALE: Scale up/down absolute in relation to the currently valid coordinate system set with G54 to G57, G505 to G599. ASCALE: Scale up/down additive in relation to the currently valid set or programmed coordinate system X… Y… Z…: Scale factors in the direction of the specified geometry axes Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.6 Programmable scale factor (SCALE, ASCALE) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 399 Example X Y 15 40 35° 1 5 2 0 The pocket occurs twice on this workpiece, but with different sizes and rotated in relation to one another. The machining sequence is stored in the subroutine. The required workpiece zeroes are set with work offset and rotation, the contour is scaled down with scaling and the subprogram is then called again. Program code Comment N10 G17 G54 ; Working plane X/Y, workpiece zero N20 TRANS X15 Y15 ; Absolute offset N30 L10 ; Machine large pocket N40 TRANS X40 Y20 ; Absolute offset N50 AROT RPL=35 ; Rotation in the plane through 35° N60 ASCALE X0.7 Y0.7 ; Scaling factor for the small pocket N70 L10 ; Machine small pocket N80G0 X300 Y100 M30 ; Retraction, end of program Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.6 Programmable scale factor (SCALE, ASCALE) Fundamentals 400 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information SCALE X... Y... Z... You can specify an individual scale factor for each axis, by which the shape is to be reduced or enlarged. The scale refers to the workpiece coordinate system set with G54 to G57, G505 to G599. CAUTION The SCALE command resets all frame components of the previously activated programmable frame. X Z Y Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.6 Programmable scale factor (SCALE, ASCALE) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 401 ASCALE X... Y... Z... The ASCALE command is used to program scale changes to be added to existing frames. In this case, the last valid scale factor is multiplied by the new one. The currently set or last programmed coordinate system is used as the reference for the scale change. AROT TRANS A S C A L E Scaling and offset Note If an offset is programmed with ATRANS after SCALE, the offset values will also be scaled. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.6 Programmable scale factor (SCALE, ASCALE) Fundamentals 402 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Different scale factors CAUTION Please take great care when using different scale factors! Circular interpolations can, for example, only be scaled using identical factors. Note However, different scale factors can be used specifically to program distorted circles. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.7 Programmable mirroring (MIRROR, AMIRROR) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 403 12.7 12.7 Programmable mirroring (MIRROR, AMIRROR) Function MIRROR/AMIRROR can be used to mirror workpiece shapes on coordinate axes. All traversing movements programmed after the mirror call (e.g. in the subprogram) are executed with mirroring. Syntax MIRROR X... Y... Z... AMIRROR X... Y... Z... Note Each frame operation is programmed in a separate NC block. Significance MIRROR: Mirror absolute in relation to the currently valid coordinate system set with G54 to G57, G505 to G599. AMIRROR: Additive mirror image with reference to the currently valid set or programmed coordinate system X... Y... Z... : Geometry axis whose direction is to be changed. The value specified here can be chosen freely, e.g. X0 Y0 Z0. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.7 Programmable mirroring (MIRROR, AMIRROR) Fundamentals 404 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Examples Example 1: Milling X X X Y Y Y 3 4 2 1 X Y The contour shown here is programmed once as a subprogram. The 3 other contours are generated using mirroring. The workpiece zero is located at the center of the contours. Program code Comment N10 G17 G54 ; Working plane X/Y, workpiece zero N20 L10 ; Machine first contour at top right N30 MIRROR X0 ; Mirror X axis (the direction is changed in X) N40 L10 ; Machine second contour at top left N50 AMIRROR Y0 ; Mirror Y axis (the direction is changed in Y) N60 L10 ; Machine third contour at bottom left N70 MIRROR Y0 ; MIRROR resets previous frames. Mirror Y axis (the direction is changed in Y) N80 L10 ; Machine fourth contour at bottom right N90 MIRROR ; Deactivate mirroring N100 G0 X300 Y100 M30 ; Retraction, end of program Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.7 Programmable mirroring (MIRROR, AMIRROR) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 405 Example 2: Turning Spindle 1 Spindle 2 M M W W X X Z Z 140 120 600 1 1 The actual machining is stored as a subprogram and execution at the respective spindle is implemented by means of mirroring and offsets. Program code Comment N10 TRANS X0 Z140 ; Zero offset to W ... ; Machining of the first side with spindle 1 N30 TRANS X0 Z600 ; Zero offset to spindle 2 N40 AMIRROR Z0 ; Mirroring of the Z axis N50 ATRANS Z120 ; Zero offset to W1 ... ; Machining of the second side with spindle 2 Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.7 Programmable mirroring (MIRROR, AMIRROR) Fundamentals 406 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information MIRROR X... Y... Z... The mirror is programmed by means of an axial change of direction in the selected working plane. Example: Working plane G17 X/Y The mirror (on the Y axis) requires a direction change in X and, accordingly, is programmed with MIRROR X0. The contour is then mirrored on the opposite side of the mirror axis Y. X Y MlRROR X MlRROR Y Mirroring is implemented in relation to the currently valid coordinate system set with G54 to G57, G505 to G599. CAUTION The MIRROR command resets all frame components of the previously activated programmable frame. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.7 Programmable mirroring (MIRROR, AMIRROR) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 407 AMIRROR X... Y... Z... A mirror image, which is to be added to an existing transformation, is programmed with AMIRROR. The currently set or last programmed coordinate system is used as the reference. TRANS AMlRROR Deactivate mirroring For all axes: MIRROR (without axis parameter) All frame components of the previously programmed frame are reset. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.7 Programmable mirroring (MIRROR, AMIRROR) Fundamentals 408 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Tool radius compensation Note The mirror command causes the control to automatically change the path compensation commands (G41/G42 or G42/G41) according to the new machining direction. X Y G42 MlRROR X G41 G02 G03 The same applies to the direction of circle rotation (G2/G3 or G3/G2). Note If you program an additive rotation with AROT after MIRROR, you may have to work with reversed directions of rotation (positive/negative or negative/positive). Mirrors on the geometry axes are converted automatically by the control into rotations and, where appropriate, mirrors on the mirror axis specified in the machine data. This also applies to settable zero offsets. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.7 Programmable mirroring (MIRROR, AMIRROR) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 409 Mirror axis The axis to be mirrored can be set in machine data: MD10610 $MN_MIRROR_REF_AX = <value> Value Significance 0 Mirroring is performed around the programmed axis (negation of values). 1 The reference axis is the X axis. 2 The reference axis is the Y axis. 3 The reference axis is the Z axis. Interpreting the programmed values Machine data is used to specify how the programmed values are to be interpreted: MD10612 $MN_MIRROR_TOGGLE = <value> Value Significance 0 Programmed axis values are not evaluated. 1 Programmed axis values are evaluated: • For programmed axis values ≠ 0 the axis is mirrored if it has not yet been mirrored. • For a programmed axis value = 0 mirroring is deactivated. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.8 Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME, TOROT, PAROT) Fundamentals 410 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 12.8 12.8 Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME, TOROT, PAROT) Function TOFRAME generates a rectangular frame whose Z axis coincides with the current tool orientation. This means that the user can retract the tool in the Z direction without risk of collision (e.g. after a tool break in a 5-axis program). The position of the X and Y axes is determined by the setting in machine data MD21110 $MC_X_AXES_IN_OLD_X_Z_PLANE (coordinate system with automatic frame definition). The new coordinate system is either left as generated from the machine kinematics or is turned around the new Z axis additionally so that the new X axis lies in the old Z/X plane (see machine manufacturer's specifications). The resulting frame describing the orientation is written in the system variable for the programmable frame ($P_PFRAME). TOROT only overwrites the rotation component in the programmed frame. All other components remain unchanged. TOFRAME and TOROT are designed for milling operations in which G17 (working plane X/Y) is typically active. In the case of turning operations or generally when G18 or G19 is active, however, frames are needed where the X or Y axis matches the orientation of the tool. These frames are programmed with the TOFRAMEX/TOROTX or TOFRAMEY/TOROTY commands. PAROT aligns the workpiece coordinate system on the workpiece. Basic Basic Basic Z' X' Y' Z X Y 45° Z' X'' Y'' Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.8 Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME, TOROT, PAROT) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 411 Syntax TOFRAME/TOFRAMEZ/TOFRAMEY/TOFRAMEX ... TOROTOF TOROT/TOROTZ/TOROTY/TOROTX ... TOROTOF PAROT ... PAROTOF Significance TOFRAME: Align the Z axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame TOFRAMEZ: As TOFRAME TOFRAMEY: Align the Y axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame TOFRAMEX: Align the X axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame TOROT: Align the Z axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame The rotation defined with TOROT is the same as that defined with TOFRAME. TOROTZ: As TOROT TOROTY: Align the Y axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame TOROTX: Align the X axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame TOROTOF: Deactivate orientation parallel to tool orientation Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.8 Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME, TOROT, PAROT) Fundamentals 412 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 PAROT: Rotate frame to align workpiece coordinate system on workpiece Translations, scaling and mirroring in the active frame remain valid. PAROTOF: The workpiece-specific frame rotation activated with PAROT is deactivated with PAROTOF. Note The TOROT command ensures consistent programming with active orientable toolholders for each kinematic type. Just as in the situation for rotatable toolholders, PAROT can be used to activate a rotation of the work table. This defines a frame which changes the position of the workpiece coordinate system in such a way that no compensatory movement is performed on the machine. Language command PAROT is not rejected if no toolholder with orientation capability is active. Example Program code Comment N100 G0 G53 X100 Z100 D0 N120 TOFRAME N140 G91 Z20 ; TOFRAME is included in the calculation, all programmed geometry axis movements refer to the new coordinate system. N160 X50 ... Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.8 Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME, TOROT, PAROT) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 413 Further information Assigning axis direction If one of the TOFRAMEX, TOFRAMEY, TOROTX, TOROTY commands is programmed instead of TOFRAME/TOFRAMEZ or TOROT/TOROTZ, the axis direction commands listed in this table will apply: Command Tool direction (applicate) Secondary axis (abscissa) Secondary axis (ordinate) TOFRAME/TOFRAMEZ / TOROT/TOROTZ Z X Y TOFRAMEY/TOROTY Y Z X TOFRAMEX/TOROTX X Y Z Separate system frame for TOFRAME or TOROT The frames resulting from TOFRAME or TOROT can be written in a separate system frame $P_TOOLFRAME. For this purpose, bit 3 must be enabled in machine data MD28082 $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK. The programmable frame remains unchanged. Differences occur when the programmable frame is processed further elsewhere. References For further information about machines with orientable toolholder, see: ● Programming Manual, Job Planning; Chapter: "Tool orientation" ● Function Manual, Basic Functions; Tool Offset (W1), Chapter: "Toolholder with orientation capability" Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.9 Deselect frame (G53, G153, SUPA, G500) Fundamentals 414 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 12.9 12.9 Deselect frame (G53, G153, SUPA, G500) Function When executing certain processes, such as approaching the tool change point, various frame components have to be defined and suppressed at different times. Settable frames can either be deactivated modally or suppressed non-modally. Programmable frames can be suppressed or deleted non-modally. Syntax Non-modal suppression: G53/G153/SUPA Modal deactivation: G500 Delete: TRANS/ROT/SCALE/MIRROR Meaning G53: Non-modal suppression of all programmable and settable frames G153: G153 has the same effect as G53 and also suppresses the entire basic frame ($P_ACTBFRAME). SUPA: SUPA has the same effect as G153 and also suppresses: • Handwheel offsets (DRF) • Overlaid movements • External work offset • PRESET offset G500: Modal deactivation of all settable frames (G54 to G57, G505 to G599) if G500 does not contain a value. TRANS/ROT/SCALE/MIRROR: TRANS/ROT/SCALE/MIRROR without an axis parameter will delete the programmable frames. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.10 Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF, CORROF) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 415 12.10 12.10 Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF, CORROF) Function The additive work offsets set by means of handwheel traversal (DRF offsets) and the position offsets programmed using system variable $AA_OFF[<axis>] can be deselected using the part program commands DRFOF and CORROF. Deselection triggers a preprocessing stop and the position component of the deselected overlaid movement (DRF offset or position offset) is written to the position in the basic coordinate system (in other words, no axes are traversed). The value of system variable $AA_IM[<axis>] (current machine coordinate system setpoint of an axis) does not change; the value of system variable $AA_IW[<axis>] (current workpiece coordinate system setpoint of an axis) does change, because it now contains the deselected component from the overlaid movement. Syntax DRFOF CORROF(<axis>,"<character string>"[,<axis>,"<character string>"]) Significance Command for the deactivation (deselection) of DRF handwheel offsets for all active axes in the channel DRFOF: Active: modal Command for the deactivation (deselection) of the DRF offset/position offset ($AA_OFF) for individual axes Effective: modal <axis>: Axis identifier (channel, geometry or machine axis identifier) == "DRF": DRF offset of axis is deselected CORROF: "<character string>": == "AA_OFF": $AA_OFF position offset of axis is deselected Note CORROF is only possible from the part program, not via synchronized actions. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.10 Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF, CORROF) Fundamentals 416 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Examples Example 1: Axial deselection of a DRF offset (1) A DRF offset is generated in the X axis by DRF handwheel traversal. No DRF offsets are operative for any other axes in the channel. Program code Comment N10 CORROF(X,"DRF") ; CORROF has the same effect as DRFOF here. ... Example 2: Axial deselection of a DRF offset (2) A DRF offset is generated in the X and Y axes by DRF handwheel traversal. No DRF offsets are operative for any other axes in the channel. Program code Comment N10 CORROF(X,"DRF") ; Only the DRF offset of the X axis is deselected; the DRF offset of the Y axis is retained (in the case of DRFOF both offsets would have been deselected). ... Example 3: Axial deselection of a $AA_OFF position offset Program code Comment N10 WHEN TRUE DO $AA_OFF[X]=10 G4 F5 ; A position offset == 10 is interpolated for the X axis. ... N80 CORROF(X,"AA_OFF") ; The position offset of the X axis is deselected with: $AA_OFF[X]=0 The X axis is not traversed. The position offset is added to the current position of the X axis. … Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.10 Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF, CORROF) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 417 Example 4: Axial deselection of a DRF offset and a $AA_OFF position offset (1) A DRF offset is generated in the X axis by DRF handwheel traversal. No DRF offsets are operative for any other axes in the channel. Program code Comment N10 WHEN TRUE DO $AA_OFF[X]=10 G4 F5 ; A position offset == 10 is interpolated for the X axis. ... N70 CORROF(X,"DRF",X,"AA_OFF") ; Only the DRF offset and the position offset of the X axis are deselected; the DRF offset of the Y axis is retained. ... Example 5: Axial deselection of a DRF offset and a $AA_OFF position offset (2) A DRF offset is generated in the X and Y axes by DRF handwheel traversal. No DRF offsets are operative for any other axes in the channel. Program code Comment N10 WHEN TRUE DO $AA_OFF[X]=10 G4 F5 ; A position offset == 10 is interpolated for the X axis. ... N70 CORROF(Y,"DRF",X,"AA_OFF") ; The DRF offset of the Y axis and the position offset of the X axis are deselected; the DRF offset of the X axis is retained. ... Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.10 Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF, CORROF) Fundamentals 418 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information $AA_OFF_VAL Once the position offset has been deselected by means of $AA_OFF, system variable $AA_OFF_VAL (integrated distance of axis override) for the corresponding axis will equal zero. $AA_OFF in JOG mode In JOG mode too, if $AA_OFF changes, the position offset will be interpolated as an overlaid movement if this function has been enabled via machine data MD 36750 $MA_AA_OFF_MODE. $AA_OFF in synchronized action If a synchronized action which immediately resets $AA_OFF (DO $AA_OFF[<axis>]=<value>) is active when the position offset is deselected using the CORROF(<axis>,"AA_OFF") part program command, then $AA_OFF will be deselected and not reset, and alarm 21660 will be signaled. However, if the synchronized action becomes active later, e.g. in the block after CORROF, $AA_OFF will remain set and a position offset will be interpolated. Automatic channel axis exchange If an axis for which CORROF has been programmed is active in another channel, it will be pulled into the channel when the axis changes (condition: MD30552 $MA_AUTO_GET_TYPE > 0) and then the position offset and/or the DRF offset will be deselected. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 419 Auxiliary function outputs 13 Function The auxiliary function output sends information to the PLC indicating when the NC program needs the PLC to perform specific switching operations on the machine tool. The auxiliary functions are output, together with their parameters, to the PLC interface. The values and signals must be processed by the PLC user program. Auxiliary functions The following auxiliary functions can be transferred to the PLC: Auxiliary Function Address Tool selection T Tool offset D, DL Feedrate F/FA Spindle speed S M functions M H functions H For each function group or single function, machine data is used to define whether the output is triggered before, with or after the traversing motion. The PLC can be programmed to acknowledge auxiliary function outputs in various ways. Auxiliary function outputs 12.10 Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF, CORROF) Fundamentals 420 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Properties Important properties of the auxiliary function are shown in the following overview table: Address extension Value Function Meaning Range Range Type Meaning Explanations Maximum number per block - 0 (implicit) 0 ... 99 INT Function The address extension is 0 for the range between 0 and 99. Mandatory without address extension: M0, M1, M2, M17, M30 Spindle no. 1 - 12 1 ... 99 INT Function M3, M4, M5, M19, M70 with address extension spindle no. (e.g. M2=5; spindle stop for spindle 2). Without spindle number, the function applies for the master spindle. M Any 0 - 99 100 ... 2147483647 INT Function User M function* 5 S Spindle no. 1 - 12 0 ... ± 1,8*10 308 REAL Spindle speed Without spindle number, the function applies for the master spindle. 3 H Any 0 - 99 0 ... ± 2147483647 ± 1,8*10 308 INT REAL Any Functions have no effect in the NCK; only to be implemented on the PLC.* 3 T Spindle no. (for active tool manageme nt) 1 - 12 0 - 32000 (or tool names with active tool management) INT Tool selection Tool names are not passed to the PLC interface. 1 D - - 0 - 12 INT Tool offset selection D0: Deselection Default setting: D1 1 DL Location- dependent offset 1 - 6 0 ... ± 1,8*10 308 REAL Tool fine offset selection Refers to previously selected D number. 1 F - - 0.001 - 999 999.999 REAL Path feedrate 6 FA Axis No. 1 - 31 0.001 - 999 999.999 REAL Axial feedrate * The meaning of the functions is defined by the machine manufacturer (see machine manufacturer's specifications). Auxiliary function outputs 12.10 Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF, CORROF) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 421 Further information Number of function outputs per NC block Up to 10 function outputs can be programmed in one NC block. Auxiliary functions can also be output from the action component of synchronized actions. References: Function Manual, Synchronized Actions Grouping The functions described can be grouped together. Group assignment is predefined for some M commands. The acknowledgment behavior can be defined by the grouping. High-speed function outputs (QU) Functions, which have not been programmed as high-speed outputs, can be defined as high- speed outputs for individual outputs with the keyword QU. Program execution continues without waiting for the acknowledgment of the miscellaneous function (the program waits for the transport acknowledgment). This helps avoid unnecessary hold points and interruptions to traversing movements. Note The appropriate machine data must be set for the "High-speed function outputs" function (→ machine manufacturer). Function outputs for travel commands The transfer of information as well as waiting for the appropriate response takes time and therefore influences the traversing movements. Auxiliary function outputs 12.10 Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF, CORROF) Fundamentals 422 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 High-speed acknowledgment without block change delay Block change behavior can be influenced by machine data. When the "without block change delay" setting is selected, the system response with respect to high-speed auxiliary functions is as follows: Auxiliary function output Response Before the movement The block transition between blocks with high-speed auxiliary functions occurs without interruption and without a reduction in velocity. The auxiliary function output takes place in the first interpolation cycle of the block. The following block is executed with no acknowledgment delay. During the movement The block transition between blocks with high-speed auxiliary functions occurs without interruption and without a reduction in velocity. The auxiliary function output takes place during the block. The following block is executed with no acknowledgment delay. After the movement The movement stops at the end of the block. The auxiliary function output takes place at the end of the block. The following block is executed with no acknowledgment delay. CAUTION Function outputs in continuous-path mode Function outputs before the traversing movements interrupt the continuous-path mode (G64/G641) and generate an exact stop for the previous block. Function outputs after the traversing movements interrupt the continuous-path mode (G64/G641) and generate an exact stop for the current block. Important: A wait for an outstanding acknowledgment signal from the PLC can also interrupt the continuous-path mode, e.g. for M command sequences in blocks with extremely short path lengths. Auxiliary function outputs 13.1 M functions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 423 13.1 13.1 M functions Function The M functions initiate switching operations, such as "Coolant ON/OFF" and other functions on the machine. Syntax M<value> M[<address extension>] = <value> Significance M: Address for the programming of the M functions. <address extension>: The extended address notation applies for some M functions (e.g. specification of the spindle number for spindle functions). Assignment is made to a certain machine function through the value assignment (M function number). Type: INT <value>: Range of values: 0 ... 2147483647 (max. INT value) Auxiliary function outputs 13.1 M functions Fundamentals 424 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Predefined M functions Certain important M functions for program execution are supplied as standard with the control: M function Meaning M0* Programmed stop M1* Optional stop M2* End of main program with return to beginning of program M3 Spindle clockwise M4 Spindle counterclockwise M5 Spindle stop M6 Tool change (default setting) M17* End of subroutine M19 Position the spindle M30* End of program (as M2) M40 Automatic gear change M41 Gear stage 1 M42 Gear stage 2 M43 Gear stage 3 M44 Gear stage 4 M45 Gear stage 5 M70 Spindle is switched to axis mode NOTICE Extended address notation cannot be used for the functions marked with *. The commands M0, M1, M2, M17 and M30 are always issued after the traversing movement. Auxiliary function outputs 13.1 M functions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 425 M functions defined by the machine manufacturer All free M function numbers can be used by the machine manufacturer, e.g. for switching functions to control the clamping devices or for the activation/deactivation of further machine functions. NOTICE The functions assigned to the free M function numbers are machine-specific. A certain M function can therefore have a different functionality on another machine. Refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications for the M functions available on a machine and their functions. Examples Example 1: Maximum number of M functions in a block Program code Comment N10 S... N20 X... M3 ; M function in the block with axis movement, spindle accelerates before the X axis movement N180 M789 M1767 M100 M102 M376 ; Maximum of five M functions in the block Example 2: M function as high-speed output Program code Comment N10 H=QU(735) ; Fast output for H735. N10 G1 F300 X10 Y20 G64 ; N20 X8 Y90 M=QU(7) ; Fast output for M7. M7 has been programmed as high-speed output so that the continuous-path mode (G64) is not interrupted. Note Only use this function in special cases as, for example, the chronological alignment is changed in combination with other function outputs. Auxiliary function outputs 13.1 M functions Fundamentals 426 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information about the predefined M commands Programmed stop: M0 The machining is stopped in the NC block with M0. You can now remove chips, remeasure, etc. Programmed stop 1 - optional stop: M1 M1 can be set via: ● HMI / dialog box "Program Control" or ● NC/PLC interface The program execution of the NC is stopped by the programmed blocks. Programmed stop 2 - an auxiliary function associated with M1 with stop in the program execution Programmed stop 2 can be set via the HMI / dialog box "Program Control" and allows the technological sequences to be interrupted at any time at the end of the part to be machined. In this way, the operator can interrupt the production, e.g. to remove chip flows. End of program: M2, M17, M30 A program is terminated with M2, M17 or M30 and reset to the start of the program. If the main program is called from another program (as subroutine), M2/M30 has the same effect as M17 and vice versa, i.e. M17 has the same effect in the main program as M2/M30. Spindle functions: M3, M4, M5, M19, M70 The extended address notation with specification of the spindle number applies for all spindles. Example: Program code Comment M2=3 ; Clockwise spindle rotation for the second spindle If an address extension has not been programmed, the function applies for the master spindle. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 427 Supplementary commands 14 14.1 14.1 Messages (MSG) Function Messages can be programmed to provide the user with information about the current machining situation during program execution. Syntax MSG("<message text>") MSG () Significance MSG: Keyword for the programming of a message text. Character string that is to be displayed as a message. Type: STRING <message text>: A message text can be up to 124 characters long and is displayed in two lines (2*62 characters). Contents of variables can also be displayed in message texts. A message can be deleted by programming MSG() without message text. Supplementary commands 14.1 Messages (MSG) Fundamentals 428 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Examples Example 1: Activate/delete messages Program code Comment N10 MSG ("Roughing the contour") ; Activate message N20 X… Y… N … N90 MSG () ; Delete message from N10 Example 2: Message text contains variable Program code Comment N10 R12=$AA_IW [X] ; Current position of the X axis in R12 N20 MSG ("Check position of X axis"<<R12<<) ; Activate message N … N90 MSG () ; Delete message from N20 Supplementary commands 14.2 Working area limitation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 429 14.2 14.2 Working area limitation 14.2.1 Working area limitation in BCS (G25/G26, WALIMON, WALIMOF) Function G25/G26 limits the working area (working field, working space) in which the tool can traverse. The areas outside the working area limitations defined with G25/G26 are inhibited for any tool motion. X Z W M Working area Protected zone The coordinates for the individual axes apply in the basic coordinate system: Z Y G 2 5 Y G 2 5 Y G 2 6 Y G 2 6 X G 2 5 X G 2 5 Z G 2 6 Z X Basic coordinate control Supplementary commands 14.2 Working area limitation Fundamentals 430 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 The working area limitation for all validated axes must be programmed with the WALIMON command. The WALIMOF command deactivates the working area limitation. WALIMON is the default setting. Therefore, it only has to be programmed if the working area limitation has been disabled beforehand. Syntax G25 X…Y…Z… G26 X…Y…Z… WALIMON WALIMOF Significance G25: Lower working area limitation Assignment of values in channel axes in the basic coordinate system G26: Upper working area limitation Assignment of values in channel axes in the basic coordinate system X… Y… Z…: Lower or upper working area limits for individual channel axes The limits specified refer to the basic coordinate system. WALIMON: Switch working area limitation on for all axes WALIMOF: Switch working area limitation off for all axes In addition to programming values using G25/G26, values can also be entered using axis- specific setting data: SD43420 $SA_WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS (Working area limitation plus) SD43430 $SA_WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS (Working area limitation minus) Activating and de-activating the working area limitation, parameterized using SD43420 and SD43430, are carried-out for a specific direction using the axis-specific setting data that becomes immediately effective: SD43400 $SA_WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE (Working area limitation active in the positive direction) SD43410 $SA_WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE (Working area limitation active in the negative direction) Using the direction-specific activation/de-activation, it is possible to limit the working range for an axis in just one direction. Supplementary commands 14.2 Working area limitation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 431 Note The programmed working area limitation, programmed with G25/G26, has priority and overwrites the values entered in SD43420 and SD43430. Note G25/G26 can also be used to program limits for spindle speeds at the address S. For more information see " Programmable spindle speed limitation (G25, G26) (Page 118) ". Example X B X+ X- Z B 300 30 8 0 8 0 W M Working area Protected zone Using the working area limitation G25/26, the working area of a lathe is limited so that the surrounding devices and equipment - such as revolver, measuring station, etc. - are protected against damage. Default setting: WALIMON Program code Comment N10 G0 G90 F0.5 T1 N20 G25 X-80 Z30 ; Define the lower limit for the individual coordinate axes N30 G26 X80 Z330 ; Define the upper limit N40 L22 ; Cutting program N50 G0 G90 Z102 T2 ; To tool change point N60 X0 N70 WALIMOF ; Deactivate working area limitation N80 G1 Z-2 F0.5 ; Drilling N90 G0 Z200 ; Back N100 WALIMON ; Activate working area limitation N110 X70 M30 ; End of program Supplementary commands 14.2 Working area limitation Fundamentals 432 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Further information Reference point at the tool When tool length compensation is active, the tip of the tool is monitored as reference point, otherwise it is the toolholder reference point. Consideration of the tool radius must be activated separately. This is done using channel- specific machine data: MD21020 $MC_WORKAREA_WITH_TOOL_RADIUS If the tool reference point lies outside the working area defined by the working area limitation or if this area is left, the program sequence is stopped. Note If transformations are active, then tool data are taken into consideration (tool length and tool radius) can deviate from the described behavior. References: /FB1/ Function Manual, Basic Functions; Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones (A3), Chapter: "Monitoring the working area limitation" Programmable working area limitation, G25/G26 An upper (G26) and a lower (G25) working area limitation can be defined for each axis. These values are effective immediately and remain effective for the corresponding MD setting (→ MD10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB) after RESET and after being powered-up again. Note The CALCPOSI subroutine is described in the Job Planning Programming Manual Using this subroutine before any traversing motion is made, it can be checked as to whether the predicted path is moved through taking into account the working area limits and/or the protection zones. Supplementary commands 14.2 Working area limitation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 433 14.2.2 Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 ... WALCS10) Function In addition to the working area limitation with WALIMON (see "Working area limitation in BCS (G25/G26, WALIMON, WALIMOF) (Page 429)") there is an additional working area limitation that is activated using the G commands WALCS1 to WALCS10. Contrary to the working area limitation with WALIMON, the working area here is not in the basic coordinate system, but is limited coordinate system-specific in the workpiece coordinate system (WCS) or in the settable zero system (SZS). Using the G commands WALCS1 - WALCS10, a data set (working area limitation group) is selected under the up to ten channel-specific data sets for the coordinate system-specific working area limitations. A data set contains the limit values for all axes in the channel. The limitations are defined by channel-specific system variables. Application The working area limitation with WALCS1 - WALCS10 ("Working area limitation in the WCS/SZS") is mainly used for working area limitations for conventional lathes. They allow the programmer to use the defined "end stops" - when moving the axis "manually" to define a working area limitation referred to the workpiece. Syntax The "working area limitation in the "WCS/SZS" is activated by selecting a working area limitation group. G commands are used to make the selection: WALCS1 Activating working area limitation group No. 1 ... WALCS10 Activating working area limitation group No. 10 The de-activation of the "working area limitation in the WCS/SZS" is realized using G commands: WALCS0 De-activating the active working area limitation group Supplementary commands 14.2 Working area limitation Fundamentals 434 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Meaning The working area limitations of the individual axes are set and the reference frame (WCS or SZS), in which the working area limits are to be effective, activated with WALCS1 - WALCS10, by writing to channel-specific system variables: System variable Description Setting the working area limits $AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE [WALimNo, ax] Validity of the working area limitation in the positive axis direction. $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_PLUS [WALimNo, ax] Working area limitation in the positive axis direction. Only effective, if: $AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE = TRUE $AC_WORKAREA_CS_MINUS_ENABLE [WALimNo, ax] Validity of the working area limitation in the negative axis direction. $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_MINUS [WALimNo, ax] Working area limitation in the negative axis direction. Only effective, if: $AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE = TRUE Selecting the reference frame Coordinate system to which the working area limitation group is referred: Value Description 1 Workpiece coordinate system (WCS) $AC_WORKAREA_CS_COORD_SYSTEM [WALimNo] 3 Settable zero system (SZS) <WALimNo>: Number of the working area limitation group. <ax>: Channel axis name of the axis for which the value is valid. Example Three axes are defined in the channel: X, Y and Z A working area limitation group No. 2 is to be defined and then activated in which the axes are to be limited in the WCS acc. to the following specifications: ● X axis in the plus direction: 10 mm ● X axis in the minus direction: No limitation ● Y axis in the plus direction: 34 mm ● Y axis in the minus direction: -25 mm ● Z axis in the plus direction: No limitation ● Z axis in the minus direction: -600 mm Supplementary commands 14.2 Working area limitation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 435 Program code Comment ... ; N51 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_COORD_SYSTEM[2]=1 ; The working area limitation of working area limitation group 2 applies in the WCS. N60 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE[2,X]=TRUE ; N61 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_PLUS[2,X]=10 ; N62 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_MINUS_ENABLE[2,X]=FALSE ; N70 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE[2,Y]=TRUE ; N73 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_PLUS[2,Y]=34 ; N72 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_MINUS_ENABLE[2,Y]=TRUE ; N73 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_MINUS[2,Y]=–25 ; N80 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE[2,Z]=FALSE ; N82 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_MINUS_ENABLE[2,Z]=TRUE ; N83 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_PLUS[2,Z]=–600 ; ... N90 WALCS2 ; Activating working area limitation group No. 2. ... Further information Effectivity The working area limitation with WALCS1 - WALCS10 acts independently of the working area limitation with WALIMON. If both functions are active, that limit becomes effective which the axis motion first reaches. Reference point at the tool Taking into account the tool data (tool length and tool radius) and therefore the reference point at the tool when monitoring the working area limitation corresponds to the behavior for the working area limitation with WALIMON. Supplementary commands 14.3 Reference point approach (G74) Fundamentals 436 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 14.3 14.3 Reference point approach (G74) Function When the machine has been powered up (where incremental position measuring systems are used), all of the axis slides must approach their reference mark. Only then can traversing movements be programmed. The reference point can be approached in the NC program with G74. Syntax G74 X1=0 Y1=0 Z1=0 A1=0 … ; Programmed in a separate NC block Significance G74: Search for reference X1=0 Y1=0 Z1=0 … : Specified machine axis address X1, Y1, Z1… Search for reference for linear axes A1=0 B1=0 C1=0 … : Specified machine axis address A1, B1, C1… Search for reference for rotary axes. Note A transformation must not be programmed for an axis which is to approach the reference point with G74. The transformation is deactivated with command TRAFOOF. Example When the measurement system is changed, the reference point is approached and the workpiece zero point is initialized. Program code Comment N10 SPOS=0 ; Spindle in position control N20 G74 X1=0 Y1=0 Z1=0 C1=0 ; Reference point approach for linear axes and rotary axes N30 G54 ; Zero offset N40 L47 ; Cutting program N50 M30 ; End of program Supplementary commands 14.4 Fixed-point approach (G75, G751) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 437 14.4 14.4 Fixed-point approach (G75, G751) Function The non-modal command G75/G751 can be used to move axes individually and independently of one another to fixed points in the machine space, e.g. to tool change points, loading points, pallet change points, etc. The fixed points are positions in the machine coordinate system which are stored in the machine data (MD30600 $MA_FIX_POINT_POS[n]). A maximum of four fixed points can be defined for each axis. The fixed points can be approached from every NC program irrespective of the current tool or workpiece positions. An internal preprocessing stop is executed prior to moving the axes. The approach can be made directly (G75) or via an intermediate point (G751): Fixed point G 7 5 X Z Fixed point lntermediate position X Z G751 Supplementary commands 14.4 Fixed-point approach (G75, G751) Fundamentals 438 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Conditions The following conditions must be satisfied to approach fixed points with G75/G751: ● The fixed-point coordinates must have been calculated exactly and written to machine data. ● The fixed points must be located within the valid traversing range (→ note the software limit switch limits!) ● The axes to be traversed must be referenced. ● No tool radius compensation must be active. ● A kinematic transformation may not be active. ● None of the axes to be traversed must be involved in active transformation. ● None of the axes to be traversed must be a following axis in an active coupling. ● None of the axes to be traversed must be an axis in a gantry grouping. ● Compile cycles must not activate motion components. Syntax G75/G751 <axis name><axis position> ... FP=<n> Significance G75: Approach fixed point directly G751: Approach fixed point via intermediate point <axis name>: Name of the machine axis to be traversed to the fixed point All axis identifiers are permitted. <axis position>: In the case of G75 the specified position value is irrelevant. A value of "0" is, therefore, usually specified. Things are different for G751, where the position of the intermediate point to be approached has to be specified as the value. Fixed point that is to be approached Fixed point number <n>: Range of values: 1, 2, 3, 4 FP=: Note: In the absence of FP=<n> or a fixed point number, or if FP=0 has been programmed, this is interpreted as FP=1 and fixed point 1 is approached. Supplementary commands 14.4 Fixed-point approach (G75, G751) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 439 Note Multiple axes can be programmed in one G75/751 block. The axes are then traversed simultaneously to the specified fixed point. Note The following applies for G751: Axes which are to only approach the fixed point without first moving to an intermediate point cannot be programmed. Note The value of the address FP must not be greater than the number of fixed points specified for each programmed axis (MD30610 $MA_NUM_FIX_POINT_POS). Examples Example 1: G75 For a tool change, axes X (= AX1) and Z (= AX3) need to move to the fixed machine axis position 1 where X = 151.6 and Z = -17.3. Machine data: ● MD30600 $MA_FIX_POINT_POS[AX1,0] = 151.6 ● MD30600 $MA_FIX_POINT[AX3,0] = 17.3 NC program: Program code Comment … N100 G55 ; Activate adjustable work offset. N110 X10 Y30 Z40 ; Approach positions in workpiece coordinate system. N120 G75 X0 Z0 FP=1 M0 ; The X axis moves to 151.6 and the Z axis moves to 17.3 (in the machine coordinate system). Each axis travels at the maximum velocity it is capable of reaching. No additional movements are permitted to be active in this block. To continue to prevent any additional movements once the end positions have been reached, a stop is inserted here. N130 X10 Y30 Z40 ; The position of N110 is approached again. The work offset is reactivated. … Supplementary commands 14.4 Fixed-point approach (G75, G751) Fundamentals 440 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Note If the "Tool management with magazines" function is active, the auxiliary function T… or M... (typically M6) will not be sufficient to trigger a block change inhibit at the end of G75 motion. Reason: With "Tool management with magazines is active", auxiliary functions for tool change are not output to the PLC. Example 2: G751 Position X20 Z30 is to be approached first, followed by the fixed machine axis position 2. Program code Comment … N40 G751 X20 Z30 FP=2 ; Position X20 Z30 is approached first in rapid traverse as a path. Then the distance from X20 Z30 to the second fixed point in the X and Y axis is traversed, as with G75. … Further information G75 The axes are traversed as machine axes in rapid traverse. The motion is mapped internally using the "SUPA" (suppress all frames) and "G0 RTLIOF" (rapid traverse motion with single- axis interpolation) functions. If the conditions for "RTLIOF" (single-axis interpolation) are not met, the fixed point is approached as a path. When the fixed point is reached, the axes come to a standstill within the "Exact stop fine" tolerance window. Supplementary commands 14.4 Fixed-point approach (G75, G751) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 441 G751 The intermediate position is approached with rapid traverse and active offset (tool offset, frames, etc.), and the axes move with interpolation. The next fixed-point approach is executed as with G75. Once the fixed point has been reached the offsets are reactivated (as with G75). Additional axis movements The following additional axis movements are taken into account at the point at which the G75/G751 block is interpolated: ● External work offset ● DRF ● Synchronization offset ($AA_OFF) After this, the additional axis movements are not permitted to change until the end of traversing is reached by the G75/G751 block. Additional movements following interpretation of the G75/G751 block will offset the approach to the fixed point accordingly. The following additional movements are not taken into account, irrespective of the point at which interpolation takes place, and will offset the target position accordingly. ● Online tool offset ● Additional movements from compile cycles in the BCS and machine coordinate system Active frames All active frames are ignored. Traversing is performed in the machine coordinate system. Working area limitation in the workpiece coordinate system/SZS Coordinate-system-specific working area limitation (WALCS0 ... WALCS10) is not effective in the block with G75/G751. The destination point is monitored as the starting point of the following block. Supplementary commands 14.4 Fixed-point approach (G75, G751) Fundamentals 442 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Axis/Spindle movements with POSA/SPOSA If programmed axes/spindles were previously traversed with POSA or SPOSA, these movements will be completed first before the fixed point is approached. Spindle functions in the G75/G751 block If the spindle is excluded from "Fixed-point approach", then additional spindle functions (e.g. positioning with SPOS/SPOSA) can be programmed in the G75/G751 block. Modulo axes In the case of modulo axes, the fixed point is approached along the shortest distance. References For further information about "Fixed-point approach", see: Function Manual, Extended Functions; Manual and Handwheel Travel (H1), Chapter: "Fixed- point approach in JOG" Supplementary commands 14.5 Travel to fixed stop (FXS, FXST, FXSW) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 443 14.5 14.5 Travel to fixed stop (FXS, FXST, FXSW) Function The "Travel to fixed stop" function can be used to establish defined forces for clamping workpieces, such as those required for tailstocks, quills and grippers. The function can also be used for the approach of mechanical reference points. Programmed end position Fixed stop monitoring window Start position Actual position after "Travel to fixed stop" With sufficiently reduced torque, it is also possible to perform simple measurement operations without connecting a probe. The "travel to fixed stop" function can be implemented for axes as well as for spindles with axis-traversing capability. Syntax FXS[<axis>]=… FXST[<axis>]=… FXSW[<axis>]=… FXS[<axis>]=… FXST[<axis>]=… FXS[<axis>]=… FXST[<axis>]=… FXSW[<axis>]=… Supplementary commands 14.5 Travel to fixed stop (FXS, FXST, FXSW) Fundamentals 444 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Significance Command for activation and deactivation of the "Travel to fixed stop" function FXS[<axis>]=1: Activate function FXS: FXS=[<axis>]=0: Deactivate function FXST: Optional command for setting the clamping torque Specified as % of the maximum drive torque FXSW: Optional command for setting the window width for the fixed stop monitoring Specified in mm, inches or degrees <axis>: Machine axis name Machine axes (X1, Y1, Z1, etc.) are programmed Note The commands FXS, FXST and FXSW are modal. The programming of FXST and FXSW is optional: If no parameter is specified, the last programmed value or the value set in the relevant machine data applies. Activate travel to fixed stop: FXS[<axis>] = 1 The movement to the destination point can be described as a path or positioning axis movement. With positioning axes, the function can be performed across block boundaries. Travel to fixed stop can be performed simultaneously for several axes and parallel to the movement of other axes. The fixed stop must be located between the start and end positions. Example: Program code Comment X250 Y100 F100 FXS[X1]=1 FXST[X1]=12.3 FXSW[X1]=2 ; Axis X1 travels with feed F100 (parameter optional) to destination position X=250 mm. The clamping torque is 12.3% of the maximum drive torque, monitoring is performed in a 2 mm wide window. ... Supplementary commands 14.5 Travel to fixed stop (FXS, FXST, FXSW) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 445 CAUTION It is not permissible to program a new position for an axis if the "Travel to fixed stop" function has already been activated for an axis/spindle. Spindles must be switched to position-controlled mode before the function is selected. Deactivate travel to fixed stop: FXS[<axis>] = 0 Deselection of the function triggers a preprocessing stop. The block with FXS[<axis>]=0 may and should contain traversing movements. Example: Program code Comment X200 Y400 G01 G94 F2000 FXS[X1]=0 ; Axis X1 is retracted from the fixed stop to position X = 200 mm. All other parameters are optional. ... CAUTION The traversing movement to the retraction position must move away from the fixed stop, otherwise damage to the stop or to the machine may result. The block change takes place when the retraction position has been reached. If no retraction position is specified, the block change takes place immediately the torque limit has been deactivated. Supplementary commands 14.5 Travel to fixed stop (FXS, FXST, FXSW) Fundamentals 446 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Clamping torque (FXST) and monitoring window (FXSW) Any programmed torque limiting FXST is effective from the block start, i.e. the fixed stop is also approached at a reduced torque. FXST and FXSW can be programmed and changed in the part program at any time. The changes take effect before traversing movements in the same block. Programming of a new fixed stop monitoring window causes a change not only in the window width, but also in the reference point for the center of the window if the axis has moved prior to reprogramming. The actual position of the machine axis when the window is changed is the new window center point. CAUTION The window must be selected such that only a breakaway from the fixed stop causes the fixed stop monitoring to respond. Further information Rise ramp A rate of rise ramp for the new torque limit can be defined in MD to prevent any abrupt changes to the torque limit setting (e.g. insertion of a quill). Alarm suppression The fixed stop alarm can be suppressed for applications by the part program by masking the alarm in a machine data item and activating the new MD setting with NEW_CONF. Activating The commands for travel to fixed stop can be called from synchronized actions or technology cycles. They can be activated without initiation of a motion, the torque is limited instantaneously. As soon as the axis is moved via a setpoint, the limit stop monitor is activated. Supplementary commands 14.5 Travel to fixed stop (FXS, FXST, FXSW) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 447 Activation from synchronized actions Example: If the expected event ($R1) occurs and travel to fixed stop is not yet running, FXS should be activated for axis Y. The torque must correspond to 10% of the rated torque value. The width of the monitoring window is set to the default. Program code N10 IDS=1 WHENEVER (($R1=1) AND ($AA_FXS[Y]==0)) DO $R1=0 FXS[Y]=1 FXST[Y]=10 The normal part program must ensure that $R1 is set at the desired point in time. Deactivation from synchronized actions Example: If an anticipated event ($R3) has occurred and the status "Limit stop contacted" (system variable $AA_FXS) is reached, then FXS must be deselected. Program code IDS=4 WHENEVER (($R3==1) AND ($AA_FXS[Y]==1)) DO FXS[Y]=0 FA[Y]=1000 POS[Y]=0 Fixed stop reached When the fixed stop has been reached: ● The distance-to-go is deleted and the position setpoint is corrected. ● The drive torque increases to the programmed limit value FXSW and then remains constant. ● Fixed stop monitoring is activated within the specified window width. Supplementary commands 14.5 Travel to fixed stop (FXS, FXST, FXSW) Fundamentals 448 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Supplementary conditions ● Measurement with deletion of distance-to-go "Measure with deletion of distance-to-go" (MEAS command) and "Travel to fixed stop" cannot be programmed at the same time in one block. Exception: One function acts on a path axis and the other on a positioning axis or both act on positioning axes. ● Contour monitoring Contour monitoring is not performed while "Travel to fixed stop" is active. ● Positioning axes For "Travel to fixed stop" with positioning axes, the block change is performed irrespective of the fixed stop movement. ● Link and container axes Travel to fixed stop is also permitted for link and container axes. The status of the assigned machine axis is maintained beyond the container rotation. This also applies for modal torque limiting with FOCON. References: – Function Manual, Extended Functions; Several Control Panels on Multiple NCUs, Distributed Systems (B3) – Programming Manual, Job Planning; Subject: "Travel to fixed stop (FXS and FOCON/FOCOF)" ● Travel to fixed stop is not possible: – With gantry axes – For concurrent positioning axes that are controlled exclusively from the PLC (FXS must be selected from the NC program). ● If the torque limit is reduced too far, the axis will not be able to follow the specified setpoint; the position controller then goes to the limit and the contour deviation increases. In this operating state, an increase in the torque limit may result in sudden, jerky movements. To ensure that the axis can follow the setpoint, check the contour deviation to make sure it is not greater than the deviation with an unlimited torque. Supplementary commands 14.6 Acceleration behavior Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 449 14.6 14.6 Acceleration behavior 14.6.1 Acceleration mode (BRISK, BRISKA, SOFT, SOFTA, DRIVE, DRIVEA) Function The following part program commands are available for programming the current acceleration mode: ● BRISK, BRISKA The single axes or the path axes traverse with maximum acceleration until the programmed feedrate is reached (acceleration without jerk limitation). ● SOFT, SOFTA The single axes or the path axes traverse with constant acceleration until the programmed feedrate is reached (acceleration with jerk limitation). ● DRIVE, DRIVEA The single axes or the path axes traverse with maximum acceleration up to a programmed velocity limit (MD setting!). The acceleration rate is then reduced (MD setting) until the programmed feedrate is reached. BRlSK (time- optimized) SOFT (protecting the mechanical system) Setpoint P a t h v e l o c i t y Time Figure 14-1 Path velocity curve with BRISK and SOFT Supplementary commands 14.6 Acceleration behavior Fundamentals 450 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 P a t h v e l o c i t y Time Limit of constant acceleration Setpoint Figure 14-2 Path velocity curve with DRIVE Syntax BRISK BRISKA(<axis1>,<axis2>,…) SOFT SOFTA(<axis1>,<axis2>,…) DRIVE DRIVEA(<axis1>,<axis2>,…) Significance BRISK: Command for activating the "acceleration without jerk limitation" for the path axes. BRISKA: Command for activating the "acceleration without jerk limitation" for single axis movements (JOG, JOG/INC, positioning axis, oscillating axis, etc.). SOFT: Command for activating the "acceleration with jerk limitation" for the path axes. SOFTA: Command for activating the "acceleration with jerk limitation" for single axis movements (JOG, JOG/INC, positioning axis, oscillating axis, etc.). DRIVE: Command for activating the reduced acceleration above a configured velocity limit (MD35220 $MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT) for the path axes. Supplementary commands 14.6 Acceleration behavior Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 451 DRIVEA: Command for activating the reduced acceleration above a configured velocity limit (MD35220 $MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT) for single axis movements (JOG, JOG/INC, positioning axis, oscillating axis, etc.). (<axis1>,<axis2>, etc.): Single axes for which the called acceleration mode is to apply. Supplementary conditions Changing acceleration mode during machining If the acceleration mode is changed in a part program during machining (BRISK ↔ SOFT), then there is a block change with exact stop at the end of the block during the transition even with continuous-path mode. Examples Example 1: SOFT and BRISKA Program code N10 G1 X… Y… F900 SOFT N20 BRISKA(AX5,AX6) ... Example 2: DRIVE and DRIVEA Program code N05 DRIVE N10 G1 X… Y… F1000 N20 DRIVEA (AX4, AX6) ... References Function Manual, Basic Functions; Acceleration (B2) Supplementary commands 14.6 Acceleration behavior Fundamentals 452 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 14.6.2 Influence of acceleration on following axes (VELOLIMA, ACCLIMA, JERKLIMA) Function In the case of axis couplings (tangential correction, coupled motion, master value coupling, electronic gear; → see Programming Manual, Job Planning) following axes/spindles are traversed dependent on one or more master axes/spindles. The dynamics limits of the following axes/spindles can be manipulated using the VELOLIMA, ACCLIMA, and JERKLIMA functions from the part program or from synchronized actions, even if the axis coupling is already active. Note The JERKLIMA function is not available for all types of coupling. References: • Function Manual, Special Functions; Axis Couplings (M3) • Function Manual, Extended Functions; Synchronous Spindle (S3) Note Availability for SINUMERIK 828D The VELOLIMA, ACCLIMA and JERKLIMA functions can only be used with SINUMERIK 828D in conjunction with the "coupled motion" function! Syntax VELOLIMA(<axis>)=<value> ACCLIMA(<axis>)=<value> JERKLIMA(<axis>)=<value> Significance VELOLIMA: Command to correct the parameterized maximum velocity ACCLIMA: Command to correct the parameterized maximum acceleration JERKLIMA: Command to correct the parameterized maximum jerk <axis>: Following axis whose dynamics limits need to be corrected <value>: Percentage offset value Supplementary commands 14.6 Acceleration behavior Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 453 Examples Example 1: Correction of the dynamics limits for a following axis (AX4) Program code Comment ... VELOLIMA[AX4]=75 ; Limits correction to 75% of the maximum axial velocity stored in the machine data ACCLIMA[AX4]=50 ; Limits correction to 50% of the maximum axial acceleration stored in the machine data JERKLIMA[AX4]=50 ; Limits correction to 50% of the maximum axial jerk stored in the machine data ... Example 2: Electronic gear Axis 4 is coupled to axis X via an "electronic gear" coupling. The acceleration capacity of the following axis is limited to 70% of the maximum acceleration. The maximum permissible velocity is limited to 50% of the maximum velocity. Once the coupling has been activated successfully, the maximum permissible velocity is restored to 100%. Program code Comment ... N120 ACCLIMA[AX4]=70 ; Reduced maximum acceleration N130 VELOLIMA[AX4]=50 ; Reduced maximum velocity ... N150 EGON(AX4,"FINE",X,1,2) ; Activation of the EG coupling ... N200 VELOLIMA[AX4]=100 ; Full maximum velocity ... Example 3: Influencing master value coupling by static synchronized action Axis 4 is coupled to X by master value coupling. The acceleration response is limited to position 80% by static synchronized action 2 from position 100. Program code Comment ... N120 IDS=2 WHENEVER $AA_IM[AX4] > 100 DO ACCLIMA[AX4]=80 ; Synchronized action N130 LEADON(AX4, X, 2) ; Master value coupling on ... Supplementary commands 14.6 Acceleration behavior Fundamentals 454 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 14.6.3 Activation of technology-specific dynamic values (DYNNORM, DYNPOS, DYNROUGH, DYNSEMIFIN, DYNFINISH) Function Using the "Technology" G group, the appropriate dynamic response can be activated for five varying technological machining steps. Dynamic values and G commands can be configured and are, therefore, dependent on machine data settings (→ machine manufacturer). References: Function Manual, Basic Functions; Continuous-Path Mode, Exact Stop, Look Ahead (B1) Syntax Activate dynamic values: DYNNORM DYNPOS DYNROUGH DYNSEMIFIN DYNFINISH Note The dynamic values are already active in the block in which the associated G command is programmed. Machining is not stopped. Read or write a specific field element: R<m>=$MA...[n,X] $MA...[n,X]=<value> Significance DYNNORM: G command for activating normal dynamic response DYNPOS: G command for activating the dynamic response for positioning mode, tapping DYNROUGH: G command for activating the dynamic response for roughing DYNSEMIFIN: G command for activating the dynamic response for finishing DYNFINISH: G command for activating the dynamic response for smooth-finishing Supplementary commands 14.6 Acceleration behavior Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 455 R<m>: R-parameter with number <m> $MA...[n,X]: Machine data with field element affecting dynamic response Array index Range of values: 0 ... 4 0 Normal dynamic response (DYNNORM) 1 Dynamic response for positioning mode (DYNPOS) 2 Dynamic response for roughing (DYNROUGH) 3 Dynamic response for finishing (DYNSEMIFIN) <n>: 4 Dynamic response for smooth-finishing (DYNFINISH) <X> : Axis address <value>: Dynamic value Examples Example 1: Activate dynamic values Program code Comment DYNNORM G1 X10 ; Basic position DYNPOS G1 X10 Y20 Z30 F… ; Positioning mode, tapping DYNROUGH G1 X10 Y20 Z30 F10000 ; Roughing DYNSEMIFIN G1 X10 Y20 Z30 F2000 ; Finishing DYNFINISH G1 X10 Y20 Z30 F1000 ; Smooth finishing Example 2: Read or write a specific field element Maximum acceleration for roughing, axis X Program code Comment R1=$MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL[2,X] ; Read $MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL[2,X]=5 ; Write Supplementary commands 14.7 Traversing with feedforward control, FFWON, FFWOF Fundamentals 456 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 14.7 14.7 Traversing with feedforward control, FFWON, FFWOF Function The feedforward control reduces the velocity-dependent overtravel when contouring towards zero. Traversing with feedforward control permits higher path accuracy and thus improved machining results. Syntax FFWON FFWOF Significance FFWON: Command to activate the feedforward control FFWOF: Command to deactivate the feedforward control Note The type of feedforward control and which path axes are to be traversed with feedforward control is specified via machine data. Default: Velocity-dependent feedforward control Option: Acceleration-dependent feedforward control Example Program code N10 FFWON N20 G1 X… Y… F900 SOFT Supplementary commands 14.8 Contour accuracy, CPRECON, CPRECOF Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 457 14.8 14.8 Contour accuracy, CPRECON, CPRECOF Function In machining operations without feedforward control (FFWON), errors may occur on curved contours as a result of velocity-related differences between setpoint and actual positions. The programmable contour accuracy function CPRECON makes it possible to store a maximum permissible contour violation in the NC program which must never be overshot. The magnitude of the contour violation is specified with setting data $SC_CONTPREC. The Look Ahead function allows the entire path to be traversed with the programmed contour accuracy. Syntax CPRECON CPRECOF Significance CPRECON: Activate programmable contour accuracy CPRECOF: Deactivate programmable contour accuracy Note A minimum velocity can be defined via the setting data item $SC_MINFEED, which is not undershot, and the same value can also be written directly out from the part program via the system variable $SC_CONTPREC. On the basis of the value of the contour violation $SC_CONTPREC and the servo gain factor (velocity/following error ratio) of the geometry axes concerned, the control calculates the maximum path velocity at which the contour violation produced by the overtravel does not exceed the minimum value stored in the setting data. Example Program code Comment N10 X0 Y0 G0 N20 CPRECON ; Activate contour accuracy N30 F10000 G1 G64 X100 ; Machining at 10 m/min in continuous-path mode N40 G3 Y20 J10 ; Automatic feed limitation in circular block N50 X0 ; Feedrate without limitation 10 m/min Supplementary commands 14.9 Dwell time (G4) Fundamentals 458 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 14.9 14.9 Dwell time (G4) Function G4 can be used to program a "dwell time" between two NC blocks during which workpiece machining is interrupted. Note G4 interrupts continuous-path mode. Application For example, for relief cutting. Syntax G4 F…/S<n>=... Note G4 must be programmed in a separate NC block. Supplementary commands 14.9 Dwell time (G4) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 459 Significance G4: Activate dwell time F…: The dwell time is programmed in seconds at address F. The dwell time is programmed in spindle revolutions at address S. S<n>=…: <n>: The numeric extension indicates the number of the spindle to which the dwell time is to be applied. In the absence of a numeric extension (S...) the dwell time will be applied to the master spindle. Note Addresses F and S are only used for time parameters in the G4 block. The feedrate F... and the spindle speed S... programmed upstream of the G4 block are retained. Example Program code Comment N10 G1 F200 Z-5 S300 M3 ; Feedrate F, spindle speed S N20 G4 F3 ; Dwell time: 3 s N30 X40 Y10 N40 G4 S30 ; Dwelling 30 revolutions of the spindle (at S=300 rpm and 100% speed override, corresponds to t = 0.1 min). N50 X... ; The feedrate and spindle speed programmed in N10 continue to apply. Supplementary commands 14.10 Internal preprocessing stop Fundamentals 460 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 14.10 14.10 Internal preprocessing stop Function The control generates an internal preprocessing stop on access to machine status data ($A...). The following block is not executed until all preprocessed and saved blocks have been executed in full. The previous block is stopped in exact stop (as G9). Example Program code Comments ... N40 POSA[X]=100 N50 IF $AA_IM[X]==R100 GOTOF MARKE1 ; Access to machine status data ($A...), the control generates an internal preprocessing stop. N60 G0 Y100 N70 WAITP(X) N80 LABEL1: ... Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 461 Other information 15 15.1 15.1 Axes Axis types A distinction is made between the following types of axes when programming: ● Machine axes ● Channel axes ● Geometry axes ● Special axes ● Path axes ● Synchronized axes ● Positioning axes ● Command axes (motion-synchronous actions) ● PLC axes ● Link axes ● Lead link axes Other information 15.1 Axes Fundamentals 462 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Machine axes Positioning axes Geometry axes Synchr. axes PLC axes Command axes Positioning axes Machine axes Special axes Channel axes Kinematic transformation Geometry axes Path axes Behavior of programmed axis types Geometry, synchronized and positioning axes are programmed. ● Path axes traverse with feedrate F in accordance with the programmed travel commands. ● Synchronized axes traverse synchronously to path axes and take the same time to traverse as all path axes. ● Positioning axes traverse asynchronously to all other axes. These traversing movements take place independently of path and synchronized movements. ● Command axes traverse asynchronously to all other axes. These traversing movements take place independently of path and synchronized movements. ● PLC axes are controlled by the PLC and can traverse asynchronously to all other axes. The traversing movements take place independently of path and synchronized movements. Other information 15.1 Axes Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 463 15.1.1 Main axes/Geometry axes The main axes define a right-angled, right-handed coordinate system. Tool movements are programmed in this coordinate system. In NC technology, the main axes are called geometry axes. This term is also used in this Programming Manual. Replaceable geometry axes The "Replaceable geometry axes" function (see Function Manual, Job Planning) can be used to alter the geometry axes grouping configured using machine data from the part program. Here any geometry axis can be replaced by a channel axis defined as a synchronous special axis. Axis identifier For turning machines: Geometry axes X and Z are used, and sometimes Y. Tools Revolver swivel axis Special spindle Special axis Tail- stock Geometry axes Main spindle (master spindle) C axis X Z For milling machines: Geometry axes X, Y and Z are used. Further information A maximum of three geometry axes are used for programming frames and the workpiece geometry (contour). The identifiers for geometry and channel axes may be the same, provided a reference is possible. Geometry axis and channel axis names can be the same in any channel so that the same programs can be executed. Other information 15.1 Axes Fundamentals 464 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 15.1.2 Special axes In contrast to the geometry axes, no geometrical relationship is defined between the special axes. Typical special axes are: ● Tool revolver axes ● Swivel table axes ● Swivel head axes ● Loader axes Axis identifier On a turning machine with circular magazine, for example: ● Revolver position U ● Tailstock V Programming example Program code Comment N10 G1 X100 Y20 Z30 A40 F300 ; Path axis movements N20 POS[U]=10POS[X]=20 FA[U]=200 FA[X]=350 ; Positioning axis movements N30 G1 X500 Y80 POS[U]=150FA[U]=300 F550 ; Path and positioning axis N40 G74 X1=0 Z1=0 ; Approach home position 15.1.3 Main spindle, master spindle The machine kinematics determine, which spindle is the main spindle. This spindle is usually declared as the master spindle in the machine data. This assignment can be changed with the SETMS(<spindle number>) program command. SETMS can be used without specifying a spindle number to switch back to the master spindle defined in the machine data. Special functions such as thread cutting are supported by the master spindle. Spindle identifier S or S0 Other information 15.1 Axes Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 465 15.1.4 Machine axes Machine axes are the axes physically existing on a machine. The movements of axes can still be assigned by transformations (TRANSMIT, TRACYL, or TRAORI) to the machine axes. If transformations are intended for the machine, different axis names must be specified during the commissioning (machine manufacturer). The machine axis names are only programmed in special circumstances (e.g. for reference point or fixed point approach). Axis identifier The axis identifiers can be set in the machine data. Standard identifiers: X1, Y1, Z1, A1, B1, C1, U1, V1 There are also standard axis identifiers that can always be used: AX1, AX2, …, AX<n> 15.1.5 Channel axes Channel axes are all axes, which traverse in a channel. Axis identifier X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V 15.1.6 Path axes Path axes define the path and therefore the movement of the tool in space. The programmed feed is active for this path. The axes involved in this path reach their position at the same time. As a rule, these are the geometry axes. However, default settings define, which axes are the path axes, and therefore determine the velocity. Path axes can be specified in the NC program with FGROUP. For more information about FGROUP, see "Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) (Page 119)". Other information 15.1 Axes Fundamentals 466 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 15.1.7 Positioning axes Positioning axes are interpolated separately; in other words, each positioning axis has its own axis interpolator and its own feedrate. Positioning axes do not interpolate with the path axes. Positioning axes are traversed by the NC program or the PLC. If an axis is to be traversed simultaneously by the NC program and the PLC, an error message appears. Typical positioning axes are: ● Loaders for moving workpieces to machine ● Loaders for moving workpieces away from machine ● Tool magazine/turret Types A distinction is made between positioning axes with synchronization at the block end or over several blocks. POS axes Block change occurs at the end of the block when all the path and positioning axes programmed in this block have reached their programmed end point. POSA axes The movement of these positioning axes can extend over several blocks. POSP axes The movement of these positioning axes for approaching the end position takes place in sections. Note Positioning axes become synchronized axes if they are traversed without the special POS/POSA identifier. Continuous-path mode (G64) for path axes is only possible if the positioning axes (POS) reach their final position before the path axes. Path axes programmed with POS/POSA are removed from the path axis grouping for the duration of this block. For more information about POS, POSA, and POSP, see "Traversing positioning axes (POS, POSA, POSP, FA, WAITP, WAITMC) (Page 129)". Other information 15.1 Axes Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 467 15.1.8 Synchronized axes Synchronized axes traverse synchronously to the path from the start position to the programmed end position. The feedrate programmed in F applies to all the path axes programmed in the block, but does not apply to synchronized axes. Synchronized axes take the same time as the path axes to traverse. A synchronized axis can be a rotary axis, which is traversed synchronously to the path interpolation. 15.1.9 Command axes Command axes are started from synchronized actions in response to an event (command). They can be positioned, started, and stopped fully asynchronous to the parts program. An axis cannot be moved from the part program and from synchronized actions simultaneously. Command axes are interpolated separately; in other words, each command axis has its own axis interpolator and its own feedrate. References: Function Manual, Synchronized Actions 15.1.10 PLC axes PLC axes are traversed by the PLC via special function blocks in the basic program; their movements can be asynchronous to all other axes. Traversing movements take place independently of path and synchronized movements. Other information 15.1 Axes Fundamentals 468 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 15.1.11 Link axes Link axes are axes, which are physically connected to another NCU and whose position is controlled from this NCU. Link axes can be assigned dynamically to channels of another NCU. Link axes are non-local axes from the perspective of a specific NCU. Drive system 1 Drive system 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Link module (HW) Link module (HW) Channel 1 Link communication NCU 1 NCU 2 A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 The axis container concept is used for the dynamic modification of the assignment to an NCU. Axis exchange with GET and RELEASE from the part program is not available for link axes. Further information Prerequisites ● The participating NCUs, NCU1 and NCU2, must be connected by means of high-speed communication via the link module. References: Configuration Manual, NCU ● The axis must be configured appropriately by machine data. ● The "Link axis" option must be installed. Other information 15.1 Axes Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 469 Description The position control is implemented on the NCU on which the axis is physically connected to the drive. This NCU also contains the associated axis VDI interface. The position setpoints for link axes are generated on another NCU and communicated via the NCU link. The link communication must provide the means of interaction between the interpolators and the position controller or PLC interface. The setpoints calculated by the interpolators must be transported to the position control loop on the home NCU and, vice versa, the actual values must be returned from there back to the interpolators. References: For more detailed information about link axes see: Function Manual, Advanced Functions; Multiple Operator Panels and NCUs (B3) Axis container An axis container is a circular buffer data structure, in which local axes and/or link axes are assigned to channels. The entries in the circular buffer can be shifted cyclically. In addition to the direct reference to local axes or link axes, the link axis configuration in the logical machine axis image also allows references to axis containers. This type of reference consists of: ● A container number and ● a slot (circular buffer location within the container) The entry in a circular buffer location contains: ● a local axis or ● a link axis Axis container entries contain local machine axes or link axes from the perspective of an individual NCU. The entries in the logical machine axis image (MD10002 $MN_AXCONF_LOGIC_MACHAX_TAB) of an individual NCU are fixed. References: The axis container function is described in: Function Manual, Advanced Functions; Multiple Operator Panels and NCUs (B3) Other information 15.1 Axes Fundamentals 470 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 15.1.12 Lead link axes A leading link axis is one that is interpolated by one NCU and utilized by one or several other NCUs as the master axis for controlling slave axes. ... Drive system 1 Drive system 2 lnterpolator Servo lnterpolator Servo NCU link modules Setpoints of A1 Controlled by following axis (axes) Actual values of A1 NCU n A1 NCU 1 B1 B2 NCU 2 An axial position controller alarm is sent to all other NCUs, which are connected to the affected axis via a leading link axis. NCUs that are dependent on the leading link axis can utilize the following coupling relationships with it: ● Master value (setpoint, actual master value, simulated master value) ● Coupled motion ● Tangential correction ● Electronic gear (ELG) ● Synchronous spindle Other information 15.1 Axes Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 471 Programming Master NCU: Only the NCU, which is physically assigned to the master value axis can program travel motions for this axis. The travel program must not contain any special functions or operations. NCUs of slave axes: The travel program on the NCUs of the slave axes must not contain any travel commands for the leading link axis (master value axis). Any violation of this rule triggers an alarm. The leading link axis is addressed in the usual way via channel axis identifiers. The states of the leading link axis can be accessed by means of selected system variables. Further information Conditions ● The dependent NCUs, i.e., NCU1 to NCU<n> (n equals max. of 8), must be interconnected via the link module for high-speed communication. References: Configuration Manual, NCU ● The axis must be configured appropriately via machine data. ● The "Link axis" option must be installed. ● The same interpolation cycle must be configured for all NCUs connected to the leading link axis. Restrictions ● A master axis which is a leading link axis cannot be a link axis, i.e. it cannot be traversed by NCUs other than its home NCU. ● A master axis which is a leading link axis cannot be a container axis, i.e. it cannot be addressed alternately by different NCUs. ● A leading link axis cannot be the programmed leading axis in a gantry grouping. ● Couplings with leading link axes cannot be cascaded. ● Axis replacement can only be implemented within the home NCU of the leading link axis. Other information 15.1 Axes Fundamentals 472 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 System variables The following system variables can be used in conjunction with the channel axis identifier of the leading link axis: System variables Significance $AA_LEAD_SP Simulated master value - position $AA_LEAD_SV Simulated master value - velocity If these system variables are updated by the home NCU of the master axis, the new values are also transferred to any other NCUs, which wish to control slave axes as a function of this master axis. References: Function Manual, Extended Functions; Multiple Operator Panels and NCUs (B3) Other information 15.2 From travel command to machine movement Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 473 15.2 15.2 From travel command to machine movement The relationship between the programmed axis movements (travel commands) and the resulting machine movements is illustrated in the following figure: Axis movement programmed in the workpiece coordinate system Description of the workpiece geometry via geometry axes (e.g. X, Y, Z) Contour in Cartesian coordinate system of the channel (BCS) Tool radius compensation Movement of tool zero in BCS Tool length compensation Kinematic transformation (if active) Movement of machine axes of channel abc Rotary axes for 5-axis transformation Remaining traversing instructions via so-called special axes (e.g. C, U, V) Description of tool orientation by means of orientation vector/Euler angle Frame calculation: - Offset (TRANS) - Rotation (ROT) - Scaling (SCALE) Frame calculation: - Offset - Scaling Other information 15.3 Path calculation Fundamentals 474 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 15.3 15.3 Path calculation The path calculation determines the distance to be traversed in a block, taking into account all offsets and compensations. In general: Distance = setpoint - actual value + zero offset (ZO) + tool offset (TO) X Z M W ZO WK W K T Absolute position Set- point value A b s o l u t e p o s i t i o n S e t - p o i n t v a l u e If a new zero offset and a new tool offset are programmed in a new program block, the following applies: ● With absolute dimensioning: Distance = (absolute dimension P2 - absolute dimension P1) + (WO P2 - WO P1) + (TO P2 - TO P1). ● With incremental dimensioning: Distance = incremental dimension + (WO P2 - WO P1) + (TO P2 - TO P1). Reference dimension (setpoint) for P2 Distance Reference dimension (setpoint) for P1 Motion Actual value 1 Actual value 2 WO P2 WO P1 Tool offset P2 Tool offset P1 M W P1 P2 Other information 15.4 Addresses Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 475 15.4 15.4 Addresses Fixed and settable addresses Addresses can be divided into two groups: ● Fixed addresses These addresses are permanently set, i.e. the address characters cannot be changed. ● Settable addresses The machine manufacturer may assign another name to these addresses via machine data. Some important addresses are listed in the following table. The last column indicates whether it is a fixed or a settable address. Address Meaning (default setting) Name A=DC(...) A=ACP(...) A=ACN(...) Rotary axis Settable ADIS Rounding clearance for path functions Fixed B=DC(...) B=ACP(...) B=ACN(...) Rotary axis Settable C=DC(...) C=ACP(...) C=ACN(...) Rotary axis Settable CHR=... Chamfer the contour corner Fixed D... Cutting edge number Fixed F... Feedrate Fixed FA[axis]=... or FA[spindle]=... or [SPI(spindle)]=... Axial feedrate (only if spindle no. defined by variable) Fixed G... Preparatory function Fixed H... H=QU(...) Auxiliary function Auxiliary function without read stop Fixed I... Interpolation parameter Settable J... Interpolation parameter Settable K... Interpolation parameter Settable L... Subroutine call Fixed M... M=QU Additional function Additional function without read stop Fixed N... Subblock Fixed OVR Path override Fixed P... Number of program passes Fixed POS[Axis]=... Positioning axis Fixed POSA[Axis]=... Positioning axis across block boundary Fixed Other information 15.4 Addresses Fundamentals 476 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 SPOS=... SPOS[n]=... Spindle position Fixed SPOSA=... SPOSA[n Spindle position across block boundary Fixed Q... Axis Settable R0=... to Rn=... R... - R parameter, n can be set via MD (standard 0 - 99) - Axis Fixed Settable RND Round the contour corner Fixed RNDM Round contour corner (modal) Fixed S... Spindle speed Fixed T... Tool number Fixed U... Axis Settable V... Axis Settable W... Axis Settable X... X=AC(...) X=IC Axis " absolute " incremental Settable Y... Y=AC(...) Y=IC Axis Settable Z... Z=AC(...) Z=IC Axis Settable AR+=... Opening angle Settable AP=... Polar angle Settable CR=... Circle radius Settable RP=... Polar radius Settable Note Settable addresses Settable addresses must be unique within the control, i.e. the same address name may not be used for different address types. A distinction is made between the following address types: • Axis values and end points • Interpolation parameters • Feedrates • Corner rounding criteria • Measurement • Axis, spindle behavior Other information 15.4 Addresses Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 477 Modal/non-modal addresses Modal addresses remain valid with the programmed value (in all subsequent blocks) until a new value is programmed at the same address. Non-modal addresses only apply in the block, in which they were programmed. Example: Program code Comment N10 G01 F500 X10 ; N20 X10 ; Feedrate F from N10 remains active until a new feedrate is entered. Addresses with axial extension In addresses with axial extension, an axis name is inserted in square brackets after the address. The axis name assigns the axis. Example: Program code Comment FA[U]=400 ; Axis-specific feedrate for U axis. Fixed addresses with axial extension: Address Meaning (default setting) AX Axis value (variable axis programming) ACC Axial acceleration FA Axial feedrate FDA Axis feedrate for handwheel override FL Axial feedrate limitation IP Interpolation parameter (variable axis programming) OVRA Axial override PO Polynomial coefficient POS Positioning axis POSA Positioning axis across block boundary Other information 15.4 Addresses Fundamentals 478 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Extended address notation Extended address notation enables a larger number of axes and spindles to be organized in a system. An extended address consists of a numeric extension and an arithmetic expression assigned with an "=" character. The numeric extension has one or two digits and is always positive. The extended address notation is only permitted for the following direct addresses: Address Meaning X, Y, Z, … Axis addresses I, J, K Interpolation parameters S Spindle speed SPOS, SPOSA Spindle position M Special functions H Auxiliary functions T Tool number F Feedrate Examples: Program code Comment X7 ; No "=" required, 7 is a value, but the "=" character can also be used here X4=20 ; Axis X4; "=" is required CR=7.3 ; Two letters; "=" is required S1=470 ; Speed for first spindle: 470 RPM M3=5 ; Spindle stop for third spindle The numeric extension can be replaced by a variable for addresses M, H, S and for SPOS and SPOSA. The variable identifier is enclosed in square brackets. Examples: Program code Comment S[SPINU]=470 ; Speed for the spindle, whose number is stored in the SPINU variable. M[SPINU]=3 ; Clockwise rotation for the spindle, whose number is stored in the SPINU variable. T[SPINU]=7 ; Selection of the tool for the spindle, whose number is stored in the SPINU variable. Other information 15.5 Identifiers Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 479 15.5 15.5 Identifiers The commands according to DIN 66025 are supplemented with so-called identifiers by the NC high-level language. Identifiers can stand for: ● System variables ● User-defined variables ● Subroutines ● Keywords ● Jump markers ● Macros Note Identifiers must be unique. It is not permissible to use the same identifier for different objects. Rules for names The following rules apply when assigning identifier names: ● Maximum number of characters: – For program names: 24 – Axis identifiers: 8 – Variable identifiers: 31 ● Permissible characters are: – Letters – Numbers – Underscores ● The first two characters must be letters or underscores. ● Separators are not permitted between the individual characters. Note Reserved keywords must not be used as identifiers. Other information 15.5 Identifiers Fundamentals 480 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Reserved character combinations The following reservations must be noted when assigning cycle identifiers in order to avoid name collisions: ● All identifiers beginning with "CYCLE" or "_" are reserved for SIEMENS cycles. ● All identifiers beginning with "CCS" are reserved for SIEMENS compile cycles. ● User compile cycles begin with "CC”. Note Users should select identifiers, which either begin with "U" (User) or contain underscores, as these identifiers are not used by the system, compile cycles or SIEMENS cycles. Further reservations are: ● The identifier "RL" is reserved for conventional turning machines. ● All identifiers beginning with "E_ " are reserved for EASY-STEP programming. Variable identifiers In variables used by the system, the first letter is replaced by the "$" character. Examples: System variables Meaning $P_IFRAME Active settable frame $P_F Programmed path feedrate Note The "$" character may not be used for user-defined variables. Other information 15.6 Constants Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 481 15.6 15.6 Constants Integer constants An integer constant is an integer value with or without sign, e.g. a value assignment to an address. Examples: X10.25 Assignment of the value +10.25 to address X X-10.25 Assignment of the value -10.25 to address X X0.25 Assignment of the value +0.25 to address X X.25 Assignment of the value +0.25 to address X without leading "0" X=-.1EX-3 Assignment of the value -0.1*10 -3 to address X X0 Assignment of the value 0 to address X (X0 cannot be replaced by X) Note If, in an address, which permits decimal point input, more decimal places are specified than actually provided for the address, then they are rounded to fit the number of places provided. Hexadecimal constants Constants can also be interpreted in hexadecimal format. The letters "A" to "F" stand for the digits 10 to 15. Hexadecimal constants are enclosed in single quotation marks and start with the letter "H", followed by the value in hexadecimal notation. Separators are allowed between the letters and digits. Example: Program code Comment $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK='H3C7F' ; Assignment of hexadecimal constants to machine data: MD18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Other information 15.6 Constants Fundamentals 482 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Note The maximum number of characters is limited by the value range of the integer data type. Binary constants Constants can also be interpreted in binary format. In this case, only the digits "0" and "1" are used. Binary constants are enclosed in single quotation marks and start with the letter "B", followed by the binary value. Separators are allowed between the digits. Example: Program code Comment $MN_AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC='B10000001' ; The assignment of binary constants sets Bit0 and Bit7 in the machine data. Note The maximum number of characters is limited by the value range of the integer data type. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 483 Tables 16 16.1 16.1 List of statements Legend: Reference to the document containing the detailed description of the operation: PG Programming Manual, Fundamentals PGA Programming Manual, Job Planning BHD Operating Manual, HMI sl Turning BHF Operating Manual, HMI sl Milling FB1 ( ) Function Manual, Basic Functions (with the alphanumeric abbreviation of the corresponding function description in brackets) FB2 ( ) Function Manual, Extended Functions (with the alphanumeric abbreviation of the corresponding function description in brackets) FB3 ( ) Function Manual, Special Functions (with the alphanumeric abbreviation of the corresponding function description in brackets) FBSI Function Manual, Safety Integrated FBSY Function Manual, Synchronized Actions 1) FBW Function Manual, Tool Management Effectiveness of the operation: m modal 2) n non-modal Availability for SINUMERIK 828D (D = Turning, F = Milling): ● Standard ○ Option 3) - Not available 4) Default setting at beginning of program (factory settings of the control, if nothing else programmed). Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F : NC main block number, jump label termination, concatenation operator PGA ● ● ● ● * Operator for multiplication PGA ● ● ● ● + Operator for addition PGA ● ● ● ● - Operator for subtraction PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 484 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F < Comparison operator, less than PGA ● ● ● ● << Concatenation operator for strings PGA ● ● ● ● <= Comparison operator, less than or equal to PGA ● ● ● ● = Assignment operator PGA ● ● ● ● >= Comparison operator, greater than or equal to PGA ● ● ● ● / Operator for division PGA ● ● ● ● /0 … … /7 Block is skipped (1st skip level) Block is skipped (8th skip level) PG Skipping blocks (Page 45) ● ○ ● ○ ● ○ ● ○ A Axis name PGA m/n ● ● ● ● A2 Tool orientation: RPY or Euler angle PGA n ● ● ● ● A3 Tool orientation: Direction/surface normal vector component PGA n ● ● ● ● A4 Tool orientation: Surface normal vector for beginning of block PGA n ● ● ● ● A5 Tool orientation: Surface normal vector for end of block PGA n ● ● ● ● ABS Absolute value (amount) PGA ● ● ● ● AC Absolute dimensions of coordinates/positions PG Absolute dimensions (G90, AC) (Page 183) n ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 485 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F ACC Effect of current axial acceleration PG Programmable acceleration override (ACC) (option) (Page 152) m ● ● ● ● ACCLIMA Effect of current maximum axial acceleration PG Influence of acceleration on following axes (VELOLIMA, ACCLIMA, JERKLIMA) (Page 452) m ● ● ● ● ACN Absolute dimensions for rotary axes, approach position in negative direction PG Absolute dimension for rotary axes (DC, ACP, ACN) (Page 191) n ● ● ● ● ACOS Arc cosine (trigon. function) PGA ● ● ● ● ACP Absolute dimensions for rotary axes, approach position in positive direction PG Absolute dimension for rotary axes (DC, ACP, ACN) (Page 191) n ● ● ● ● ACTBLOCNO Output of current block number of an alarm block, even if "current block display suppressed" (DISPLOF) is active. PGA ● ● ● ● ADDFRAME Inclusion and possible activation of a measured frame PGA, FB1(K2) ● ● ● ● ADIS Rounding clearance for path functions G1, G2, G3, ... PG Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) (Page 357) m ● ● ● ● ADISPOS Rounding clearance for rapid traverse G0 PG Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) (Page 357) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 486 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F ADISPOSA Size of the tolerance window for IPOBRKA PGA m ● ● ● ● ALF LIFTFAST angle PGA m ● ● ● ● AMIRROR Programmable mirroring PG Programmable mirroring (MIRROR, AMIRROR) (Page 403) n ● ● ● ● AND Logical AND PGA ● ● ● ● ANG Contour angle PG Contour definitions: One straight line (ANG) (Page 260) n ● ● ● ● AP Polar angle PG Travel commands with polar coordinates (G0, G1, G2, G3, AP, RP) (Page 213) m/n ● ● ● ● APR Read/show access protection PGA ● ● ● ● APRB Read access right, OPI PGA ● ● ● ● APRP Read access right, part program PGA ● ● ● ● APW Write access protection PGA ● ● ● ● APWB Write access right, OPI PGA ● ● ● ● APWP Write access right, part program PGA ● ● ● ● APX Definition of the access right for executing the specified language element PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 487 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F AR Opening angle PG Circular interpolation with opening angle and center point (G2/G3, X... Y... Z.../ I... J... K..., AR) (Page 236) m/n ● ● ● ● AROT Programmable rotation PG Programmable rotation (ROT, AROT, RPL) (Page 384) n ● ● ● ● AROTS Programmable frame rotations with solid angles PG Programmable frame rotations with solid angles (ROTS, AROTS, CROTS) (Page 396) n ● ● ● ● SL Macro definition PGA ● ● ● ● ASCALE Programmable scaling PG Programmable scale factor (SCALE, ASCALE) (Page 398) n ● ● ● ● ASIN Arithmetic function, arc sine PGA ● ● ● ● ASPLINE Akima spline PGA m - ○ - ○ ATAN2 Arc tangent 2 PGA ● ● ● ● ATOL Axis-specific tolerance for compressor functions, orientation smoothing and smoothing types PGA - ● - ● ATRANS Additive programmable translation PG Zero offset (TRANS, ATRANS) (Page 376) n ● ● ● ● AX Variable axis identifier PGA m/n ● ● ● ● AXCSWAP Advance container axis PGA - - - - Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 488 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F AXCTSWE Advance container axis PGA - - - - AXCTSWED Rotate axis container PGA - - - - AXIS Axis identifier, axis address PGA ● ● ● ● AXNAME Converts input string into axis identifier PGA ● ● ● ● AXSTRING Converts string spindle number PGA ● ● ● ● AXTOCHAN Request axis for a specific channel. Possible from NC program and synchronized action. PGA ● ● ● ● AXTOSPI Converts axis identifier into a spindle index PGA ● ● ● ● B Axis name PGA m/n ● ● ● ● B2 Tool orientation: RPY or Euler angle PGA n ● ● ● ● B3 Tool orientation: Direction/surface normal vector component PGA n ● ● ● ● B4 Tool orientation: Surface normal vector for beginning of block PGA n ● ● ● ● B5 Tool orientation: Surface normal vector for end of block PGA n ● ● ● ● B_AND Bit AND PGA ● ● ● ● B_OR Bit OR PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 489 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F B_NOT Bit negation PGA ● ● ● ● B_XOR Bit exclusive OR PGA ● ● ● ● BAUTO Definition of the first spline section by means of the next 3 points PGA m - ○ - ○ BLOCK Together with the keyword TO defines the program part to be processed in an indirect subprogram call PGA ● ● ● ● BLSYNC Processing of interrupt routine is only to start with the next block change PGA ● ● ● ● BNAT 4) Natural transition to first spline block PGA m - ○ - ○ BOOL Data type: Boolean value TRUE/FALSE or 1/0 PGA ● ● ● ● BOUND Tests whether the value falls within the defined value range. If the values are equal, the test value is returned. PGA ● ● ● ● BRISK 4) Fast non-smoothed path acceleration PG Acceleration mode (BRISK, BRISKA, SOFT, SOFTA, DRIVE, DRIVEA) (Page 449) m ● ● ● ● BRISKA Switch on brisk path acceleration for the programmed axes PG Acceleration mode (BRISK, BRISKA, SOFT, SOFTA, DRIVE, DRIVEA) (Page 449) ● ● ● ● BSPLINE B-spline PGA m - ○ - ○ BTAN Tangential transition to first spline block PGA m - ○ - ○ Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 490 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F C Axis name PGA m/n ● ● ● ● C2 Tool orientation: RPY or Euler angle PGA n ● ● ● ● C3 Tool orientation: Direction/surface normal vector component PGA n ● ● ● ● C4 Tool orientation: Surface normal vector for beginning of block PGA n ● ● ● ● C5 Tool orientation: Surface normal vector for end of block PGA n ● ● ● ● CAC Absolute position approach PGA ● ● ● ● CACN Absolute approach of the value listed in the table in negative direction PGA ● ● ● ● CACP Absolute approach of the value listed in the table in positive direction PGA ● ● ● ● CALCDAT Calculates radius and center point of circle from 3 or 4 points PGA ● ● ● ● CALCPOSI Checking for protection zone violation, working area limitation and software limits PGA ● ● ● ● CALL Indirect subroutine call PGA ● ● ● ● CALLPATH Programmable search path for subroutine calls PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 491 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F CANCEL Cancel modal synchronized action PGA ● ● ● ● CASE Conditional program branch PGA ● ● ● ● CDC Direct approach of a position PGA ● ● ● ● CDOF 4) Collision detection OFF PG Collision monitoring (CDON, CDOF, CDOF2) (Page 340) m ● ● ● ● CDOF2 Collision detection OFF, for 3D circumferential milling PG Collision monitoring (CDON, CDOF, CDOF2) (Page 340) m ● ● ● ● CDON Collision detection ON PG Collision monitoring (CDON, CDOF, CDOF2) (Page 340) m ● ● ● ● CFC 4) Constant feedrate on contour PG Feedrate optimization for curved path sections (CFTCP, CFC, CFIN) (Page 158) m ● ● ● ● CFIN Constant feedrate for internal radius only, not for external radius PG Feedrate optimization for curved path sections (CFTCP, CFC, CFIN) (Page 158) m ● ● ● ● CFINE Assignment of fine offset to a FRAME variable PGA ● ● ● ● CFTCP Constant feedrate in tool center point (center point path) PG Feedrate optimization for curved path sections (CFTCP, CFC, CFIN) (Page 158) m ● ● ● ● CHAN Specify validity range for data PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 492 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F CHANDATA Set channel number for channel data access PGA ● ● ● ● CHAR Data type: ASCII character PGA ● ● ● ● CHECKSUM Forms the checksum over an array as a fixed- length STRING PGA ● ● ● ● CHF Chamfer; value = length of chamfer PG Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM) (Page 295) n ● ● ● ● CHKDM Uniqueness check within a magazine FBW ● ● ● ● CHKDNO Check for unique D numbers PGA ● ● ● ● CHR Chamfer; value = length of chamfer in direction of movement PG Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM) (Page 295) ● ● ● ● CIC Approach position by increments PGA ● ● ● ● CIP Circular interpolation through intermediate point PG Circular interpolation with intermediate point and end point (CIP, X... Y... Z..., I1... J1... K1...) (Page 242) m ● ● ● ● CLEARM Reset one/several markers for channel coordination PGA - - - - CLRINT Deselect interrupt: PGA ● ● ● ● CMIRROR Mirror on a coordinate axis PGA ● ● ● ● COARSEA Motion end when "Exact stop coarse" reached PGA m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 493 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F COMPCAD Compressor ON: Optimum surface quality for CAD programs PGA m - ○ - ○ COMPCURV Compressor ON: Polynomials with constant curvature PGA m - ○ - ○ COMPLETE Control instruction for reading and writing data PGA ● ● ● ● COMPOF 4) Compressor OFF PGA m - ○ - ○ COMPON Compressor ON PGA - ○ - ○ CONTDCON Tabular contour decoding ON PGA ● ● ● ● CONTPRON Activate reference preprocessing PGA ● ● ● ● CORROF All active overlaid movements are deselected PG Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF, CORROF) (Page 415) ● ● ● ● COS Cosine (trigon. function) PGA ● ● ● ● COUPDEF Definition ELG group/synchronous spindle group PGA ○ - ○ - COUPDEL Delete ELG group PGA ○ - ○ - COUPOF ELG group/synchronous spindle pair ON PGA ○ - ○ - COUPOFS Deactivate ELG group/synchronous spindle pair with stop of following spindle PGA ○ - ○ - COUPON ELG group/synchronous spindle pair ON PGA ○ - ○ - Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 494 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F COUPONC Transfer activation of ELG group/synchronous spindle pair with previous programming PGA ○ - ○ - COUPRES Reset ELG group PGA ○ - ○ - CP Path motion PGA m ● ● ● ● CPRECOF 4) Programmable contour accuracy OFF PG Contour accuracy, CPRECON, CPRECOF (Page 457) m ● ● ● ● CPRECON Programmable contour accuracy ON PG Contour accuracy, CPRECON, CPRECOF (Page 457) m ● ● ● ● CPROT Channel-specific protection zone ON/OFF PGA ● ● ● ● CPROTDEF Definition of a channel- specific protection zone PGA ● ● ● ● CR Circle radius PG Circular interpolation with radius and end point (G2/G3, X... Y... Z.../ I... J... K..., CR) (Page 233) n ● ● ● ● CROT Rotation of the current coordinate system. PGA ● ● ● ● CROTS Programmable frame rotations with solid angles (rotation in the specified axes) PG Programmable frame rotations with solid angles (ROTS, AROTS, CROTS) (Page 396) n ● ● ● ● CRPL Frame rotation in any plane FB1(K2) ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 495 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F CSCALE Scale factor for multiple axes PGA ● ● ● ● CSPLINE Cubic spline PGA m - ○ - ○ CT Circle with tangential transition PG Circular interpolation with tangential transition (CT, X... Y... Z...) (Page 246) m ● ● ● ● CTAB Define following axis position according to leading axis position from curve table PGA - - - - CTABDEF Table definition ON PGA - - - - CTABDEL Clear curve table PGA - - - - CTABEND Table definition OFF PGA - - - - CTABEXISTS Checks the curve table with number n PGA - - - - CTABFNO Number of curve tables still possible in the memory PGA - - - - CTABFPOL Number of polynomials still possible in the memory PGA - - - - CTABFSEG Number of curve segments still possible in the memory PGA - - - - CTABID Returns table number of the nth curve table PGA - - - - CTABINV Define leading axis position according to following axis position from curve table PGA - - - - Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 496 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F CTABISLOCK Returns the lock state of the curve table with number n PGA - - - - CTABLOCK Delete and overwrite, lock PGA - - - - CTABMEMTYP Returns the memory in which curve table number n is created PGA - - - - CTABMPOL Max. number of polynomials still possible in the memory PGA - - - - CTABMSEG Max. number of curve segments still possible in the memory PGA - - - - CTABNO Number of defined curve tables in SRAM or DRAM FB3(M3) - - - - CTABNOMEM Number of defined curve tables in SRAM or DRAM PGA - - - - CTABPERIOD Returns the table periodicity of curve table number n PGA - - - - CTABPOL Number of polynomials already used in the memory PGA - - - - CTABPOLID Number of the curve polynomials used by the curve table with number n PGA - - - - CTABSEG Number of curve segments already used in the memory PGA - - - - CTABSEGID Number of the curve segments used by the curve table with number n PGA - - - - Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 497 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F CTABSEV Returns the final value of the following axis of a segment of the curve table PGA - - - - CTABSSV Returns the initial value of the following axis of a segment of the curve table PGA - - - - CTABTEP Returns the value of the leading axis at curve table end PGA - - - - CTABTEV Returns the value of the the following axis at curve table end PGA - - - - CTABTMAX Returns the maximum value of the following axis of the curve table PGA - - - - CTABTMIN Returns the minimum value of the following axis of the curve table PGA - - - - CTABTSP Returns the value of the leading axis at curve table start PGA - - - - CTABTSV Returns the value of the following axis at curve table start PGA - - - - CTABUNLOCK Revoke delete and overwrite lock PGA - - - - CTOL Contour tolerance for compressor functions, orientation smoothing and smoothing types PGA - ○ - ○ CTRANS Zero offset for multiple axes PGA ● ● ● ● CUT2D 4) 2D tool offset PG 2D tool compensation (CUT2D, CUT2DF) (Page 344) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 498 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F CUT2DF 2D tool offset The tool offset is applied relative to the current frame (inclined plane). PG 2D tool compensation (CUT2D, CUT2DF) (Page 344) m ● ● ● ● CUT3DC 3D tool offset circumferential milling PGA m - - - - CUT3DCC 3D tool offset circumferential milling with limitation surfaces PGA m - - - - CUT3DCCD 3D tool offset circumferential milling with limitation surfaces with differential tool PGA m - - - - CUT3DF 3D tool offset face milling PGA m - - - - CUT3DFF 3D tool offset face milling with constant tool orientation dependent on active frame PGA m - - - - CUT3DFS 3D tool offset face milling with constant tool orientation independent of active frame PGA m - - - - CUTCONOF 4) Constant radius compensation OFF PG Keep tool radius compensation constant (CUTCONON, CUTCONOF) (Page 347) m ● ● ● ● CUTCONON Constant radius compensation ON PG Keep tool radius compensation constant (CUTCONON, CUTCONOF) (Page 347) m ● ● ● ● CUTMOD Activate "Modification of the offset data for rotatable tools" PGA ● ● ● ● CYCLE... Measuring cycles BHD/BHF Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 499 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F D Tool offset number PG Tool offset call (D) (Page 84) ● ● ● ● D0 With D0, offsets for the tool are ineffective. PG Tool offset call (D) (Page 84) ● ● ● ● DAC Absolute non-modal axis- specific diameter programming PG Axis-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMONA, DIAM90A, DIAMOFA, DIACYCOFA, DIAMCHANA, DIAMCHAN, DAC, DIC, RAC, RIC) (Page 200) n ● ● ● ● DC Absolute dimensions for rotary axes, approach position directly PG Absolute dimension for rotary axes (DC, ACP, ACN) (Page 191) n ● ● ● ● DEF Variable definition PGA ● ● ● ● DEFINE Keyword for macro definitions PGA ● ● ● ● DEFAULT Branch in CASE branch PGA ● ● ● ● DELAYFSTON Define the start of a stop delay section PGA m ● ● ● ● DELAYFSTOF Define the end of a stop delay section PGA m ● ● ● ● DELDL Delete additive offsets PGA ● ● ● ● DELDTG Deletion of distance-to-go PGA ● ● ● ● DELETE Delete the specified file. The file name can be specified with path and file identifier. PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 500 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F DELTOOLENV Delete data records describing tool environments FB1(W1) ● ● ● ● DIACYCOFA Axis-specific modal diameter programming: OFF in cycles FB1(P1) m ● ● ● ● DIAM90 Diameter programming for G90, radius programming for G91 PGA Channel-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMON, DIAM90, DIAMOF, DIAMCYCOF) (Page 197) m ● ● ● ● DIAM90A Axis-specific modal diameter programming for G90 and AC, radius programming for G91 and IC PG Axis-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMONA, DIAM90A, DIAMOFA, DIACYCOFA, DIAMCHANA, DIAMCHAN, DAC, DIC, RAC, RIC) (Page 200) m ● ● ● ● DIAMCHAN Transfer of all axes from MD axis functions to diameter programming channel status PG Axis-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMONA, DIAM90A, DIAMOFA, DIACYCOFA, DIAMCHANA, DIAMCHAN, DAC, DIC, RAC, RIC) (Page 200) ● ● ● ● DIAMCHANA Transfer of the diameter programming channel status PG Axis-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMONA, DIAM90A, DIAMOFA, DIACYCOFA, DIAMCHANA, DIAMCHAN, DAC, DIC, RAC, RIC) (Page 200) ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 501 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F DIAMCYCOF Channel-specific diameter programming: OFF in cycles FB1(P1) m ● ● ● ● DIAMOF 4) Diameter programming: OFF Normal position, see machine manufacturer PG Channel-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMON, DIAM90, DIAMOF, DIAMCYCOF) (Page 197) m ● ● ● ● DIAMOFA Axis-specific modal diameter programming: OFF Normal position, see machine manufacturer PG Axis-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMONA, DIAM90A, DIAMOFA, DIACYCOFA, DIAMCHANA, DIAMCHAN, DAC, DIC, RAC, RIC) (Page 200) m ● ● ● ● DIAMON Diameter programming: ON PG Channel-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMON, DIAM90, DIAMOF, DIAMCYCOF) (Page 197) m ● ● ● ● DIAMONA Axis-specific modal diameter programming: ON Activation, see machine manufacturer PG Axis-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMONA, DIAM90A, DIAMOFA, DIACYCOFA, DIAMCHANA, DIAMCHAN, DAC, DIC, RAC, RIC) (Page 200) m ● ● ● ● DIC Relative non-modal axis- specific diameter programming PG Axis-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMONA, DIAM90A, DIAMOFA, DIACYCOFA, DIAMCHANA, DIAMCHAN, DAC, DIC, RAC, RIC) (Page 200) n ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 502 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F DILF Retraction path (length) PG Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON, LFOF, DILF, ALF, LFTXT, LFWP, LFPOS, POLF, POLFMASK, POLFMLIN) (Page 290) m ● ● ● ● DISABLE Interrupt OFF PGA ● ● ● ● DISC Transition circle overshoot tool radius compensation PG Compensation at the outside corners (G450, G451, DISC) (Page 319) m ● ● ● ● DISCL Clearance between the end point of the fast infeed motion and the machining plane PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) ● ● ● ● DISPLOF Suppress current block display PGA ● ● ● ● DISPLON Revoke suppression of the current block display PGA ● ● ● ● DISPR Path differential for repositioning PGA n ● ● ● ● DISR Distance for repositioning PGA n ● ● ● ● DITE Thread run-out path PG Programmable run-in and run- out paths (DITS, DITE) (Page 278) m ● ● ● ● DITS Thread run-in path PG Programmable run-in and run- out paths (DITS, DITE) (Page 278) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 503 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F DIV Integer division PGA ● ● ● ● DL Select location- dependent additive tool offset (DL, total set-up offset) PGA m - - - - DO Keyword for synchronized action, triggers action when condition is fulfilled PGA ● ● ● ● DRFOF Deactivation of handwheel offsets (DRF) PG Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF, CORROF) (Page 415) m ● ● ● ● DRIVE Velocity-dependent path acceleration PG Acceleration mode (BRISK, BRISKA, SOFT, SOFTA, DRIVE, DRIVEA) (Page 449) m ● ● ● ● DRIVEA Activate bent acceleration characteristic curve for the programmed axes PG Acceleration mode (BRISK, BRISKA, SOFT, SOFTA, DRIVE, DRIVEA) (Page 449) ● ● ● ● DYNFINISH Dynamic response for smooth finishing PG Activation of technology-specific dynamic values (DYNNORM, DYNPOS, DYNROUGH, DYNSEMIFIN, DYNFINISH) (Page 454) m ● ● ● ● DYNNORM Standard dynamic response PG Activation of technology-specific dynamic values (DYNNORM, DYNPOS, DYNROUGH, DYNSEMIFIN, DYNFINISH) (Page 454) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 504 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F DYNPOS Dynamic response for positioning mode, tapping PG Activation of technology-specific dynamic values (DYNNORM, DYNPOS, DYNROUGH, DYNSEMIFIN, DYNFINISH) (Page 454) m ● ● ● ● DYNROUGH Dynamic response for roughing PG Activation of technology-specific dynamic values (DYNNORM, DYNPOS, DYNROUGH, DYNSEMIFIN, DYNFINISH) (Page 454) m ● ● ● ● DYNSEMIFIN Dynamic response for finishing PG Activation of technology-specific dynamic values (DYNNORM, DYNPOS, DYNROUGH, DYNSEMIFIN, DYNFINISH) (Page 454) m ● ● ● ● DZERO Marks all D numbers of the TO unit as invalid PGA ● ● ● ● EAUTO Definition of the last spline section by means of the last 3 points PGA m - ○ - ○ EGDEF Definition of an electronic gear PGA - - - - EGDEL Delete coupling definition for the following axis PGA - - - - EGOFC Turn off electronic gear continuously PGA - - - - EGOFS Turn off electronic gear selectively PGA - - - - EGON Turn on electronic gear PGA - - - - EGONSYN Turn on electronic gear PGA - - - - Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 505 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F EGONSYNE Turn on electronic gear, with specification of approach mode PGA - - - - ELSE Program branch, if IF condition not fulfilled PGA ● ● ● ● ENABLE Interrupt ON PGA ● ● ● ● ENAT 4) Natural transition to next traversing block PGA m - ○ - ○ ENDFOR End line of FOR counter loop PGA ● ● ● ● ENDIF End line of IF branch PGA ● ● ● ● ENDLABEL End label for part program repetitions with REPEAT PGA, FB1(K1) ● ● ● ● ENDLOOP End line of endless program loop LOOP PGA ● ● ● ● ENDPROC End line of program with start line PROC ● ● ● ● ENDWHILE End line of WHILE loop PGA ● ● ● ● ETAN Tangential transition to next traversing block at spline begin PGA m - ○ - ○ EVERY Execute synchronized action on transition of condition from FALSE to TRUE PGA ● ● ● ● EX Keyword for value assignment in exponential notation PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 506 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F EXECSTRING Transfer of a string variable with the executing part program line PGA ● ● ● ● EXECTAB Execute an element from a motion table PGA ● ● ● ● EXECUTE Program execution ON PGA ● ● ● ● EXP Exponential function ex PGA ● ● ● ● EXTCALL Execute external subprogram PGA ● ● ● ● EXTERN Declaration of a subprogram with parameter transfer PGA ● ● ● ● F Feedrate value (in conjunction with G4 the dwell time is also programmed with F) PG Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) (Page 119) ● ● ● ● FA Axial feedrate PG Traversing positioning axes (POS, POSA, POSP, FA, WAITP, WAITMC) (Page 129) m ● ● ● ● FAD Infeed rate for soft approach and retraction PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) ● ● ● ● FALSE Logical constant: Incorrect PGA ● ● ● ● FB Non-modal feedrate PG Non-modal feedrate (FB) (Page 164) ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 507 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F FCTDEF Define polynomial function PGA - - - - FCUB Feedrate variable according to cubic spline PGA m ● ● ● ● FD Path feedrate for handwheel override PG Feedrate with handwheel override (FD, FDA) (Page 154) n ● ● ● ● FDA Axis feedrate for handwheel override PG Feedrate with handwheel override (FD, FDA) (Page 154) n ● ● ● ● FENDNORM Corner deceleration OFF PGA m ● ● ● ● FFWOF 4) Feedforward control OFF PG Traversing with feedforward control, FFWON, FFWOF (Page 456) m ● ● ● ● FFWON Feedforward control ON PG Traversing with feedforward control, FFWON, FFWOF (Page 456) m ● ● ● ● FGREF Reference radius for rotary axes or path reference factors for orientation axes (vector interpolation) PG Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) (Page 119) m ● ● ● ● FGROUP Definition of axis/axes with path feedrate PG Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) (Page 119) ● ● ● ● FI Parameter for access to frame data: Fine offset PGA ● ● ● ● FIFOCTRL Control of preprocessing buffer PGA m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 508 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F FILEDATE Returns date of most recent write access to file PGA ● ● ● ● FILEINFO Returns summary information listing FILEDATE, FILESIZE, FILESTAT, and FILETIME PGA ● ● ● ● FILESIZE Returns current file size PGA ● ● ● ● FILESTAT Returns file status of rights for read, write, execute, display, delete (rwxsd) PGA ● ● ● ● FILETIME Returns time of most recent write access to file PGA ● ● ● ● FINEA End of motion when "Exact stop fine" reached PGA m ● ● ● ● FL Limit velocity for synchronized axis PG m ● ● ● ● FLIN Feed linear variable PGA m ● ● ● ● FMA Multiple feedrates axial PG Several feedrate values in one block (F, ST, SR, FMA, STA, SRA) (Page 161) m - - - - FNORM 4) Feedrate normal to DIN 66025 PGA m ● ● ● ● FOCOF Deactivate travel with limited torque/force PGA m ○ - ○ - FOCON Activate travel with limited torque/force PGA m ○ - ○ - Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 509 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F FOR Counter loop with fixed number of passes PGA ● ● ● ● FP Fixed point: Number of fixed point to be approached PG Fixed-point approach (G75, G751) (Page 437) n ● ● ● ● FPO Feedrate characteristic programmed via a polynomial PGA - - - - FPR Rotary axis identifier PG Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA, FPR, FPRAON, FPRAOF) (Page 146) ● ● ● ● FPRAOF Deactivate revolutional feedrate PG Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA, FPR, FPRAON, FPRAOF) (Page 146) ● ● ● ● FPRAON Activate revolutional feedrate PG Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA, FPR, FPRAON, FPRAOF) (Page 146) ● ● ● ● FRAME Data type for the definition of coordinate systems PGA ● ● ● ● FRC Feedrate for radius and chamfer PG Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM) (Page 295) n ● ● ● ● FRCM Feedrate for radius and chamfer, modal PG Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM) (Page 295) m ● ● ● ● FROM The action is executed if the condition is fulfilled once and as long as the synchronized action is active PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 510 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F FTOC Change fine tool offset PG ● ● ● ● FTOCOF 4) Online fine tool offset OFF PGA m ● ● ● ● FTOCON Online fine tool offset ON PGA m ● ● ● ● FXS Travel to fixed stop ON PG m ● ● ● ● FXST Torque limit for travel to fixed stop PG m ● ● ● ● FXSW Monitoring window for travel to fixed stop PG ● ● ● ● FZ Tooth feedrate PG Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) (Page 165) m ● ● ● ● G0 Linear interpolation with rapid traverse (rapid traverse motion) PG Rapid traverse movement (G0, RTLION, RTLIOF) (Page 217) m ● ● ● ● G1 4) Linear interpolation with feedrate (linear interpolation) PG Linear interpolation (G1) (Page 222) m ● ● ● ● G2 Circular interpolation clockwise PG Circular interpolation types (G2/G3, ...) (Page 225) m ● ● ● ● G3 Circular interpolation counter-clockwise PG Circular interpolation types (G2/G3, ...) (Page 225) m ● ● ● ● G4 Dwell time, preset PG Dwell time (G4) (Page 458) n ● ● ● ● G5 Oblique plunge-cut grinding PGA n ● ● ● ● G7 Compensatory motion during oblique plunge-cut grinding PGA n ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 511 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F G9 Exact stop - deceleration PG Exact stop (G60, G9, G601, G602, G603) (Page 353) n ● ● ● ● G17 4) Selection of working plane X/Y PG Selection of the working plane (G17/G18/G19) (Page 179) m ● ● ● ● G18 Selection of working plane Z/X PG Selection of the working plane (G17/G18/G19) (Page 179) m ● ● ● ● G19 Selection of working plane Y/Z PG Selection of the working plane (G17/G18/G19) (Page 179) m ● ● ● ● G25 Lower working area limitation PG Programmable spindle speed limitation (G25, G26) (Page 118) n ● ● ● ● G26 Upper working area limitation PG Programmable spindle speed limitation (G25, G26) (Page 118) n ● ● ● ● G33 Thread cutting with constant lead PG Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) (Page 270) m ● ● ● ● G34 Thread cutting with linear increasing lead PG Thread cutting with increasing or decreasing lead (G34, G35) (Page 281) m ● ● ● ● G35 Thread cutting with linear decreasing lead PG Thread cutting with increasing or decreasing lead (G34, G35) (Page 281) m ● ● ● ● G40 4) Tool radius compensation OFF PG Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) (Page 301) m ● ● ● ● G41 Tool radius compensation left of contour PG Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) (Page 301) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 512 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F G42 Tool radius compensation right of contour PG Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) (Page 301) m ● ● ● ● G53 Suppression of current work offset (non-modal) PG Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) (Page 173) n ● ● ● ● G54 1st adjustable work offset PG Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) (Page 173) m ● ● ● ● G55 2nd adjustable work offset PG Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) (Page 173) m ● ● ● ● G56 3rd adjustable work offset PG Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) (Page 173) m ● ● ● ● G57 4th adjustable work offset PG Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) (Page 173) m ● ● ● ● G58 Axial programmable work offset, absolute, coarse offset PG Axial zero offset (G58, G59) (Page 381) n ● ● ● ● G59 Axial programmable work offset, additive, fine offset PG Axial zero offset (G58, G59) (Page 381) n ● ● ● ● G60 4) Exact stop - velocity deceleration PG Exact stop (G60, G9, G601, G602, G603) (Page 353) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 513 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F G62 Corner deceleration at inside corners when tool radius offset is active (G41, G42) PGA m ● ● ● ● G63 Tapping with compensating chuck PG Tapping with compensating chuck (G63) (Page 288) n ● ● ● ● G64 Continuous-path mode PG Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) (Page 357) m ● ● ● ● G70 Inch dimensions for geometric specifications (lengths) PG Inch or metric dimensions (G70/G700, G71/G710) (Page 194) m ● ● ● ● G71 4) Metric dimensions for geometric specifications (lengths) PG Inch or metric dimensions (G70/G700, G71/G710) (Page 194) m ● ● ● ● G74 Search for reference PG Reference point approach (G74) (Page 436) n ● ● ● ● G75 Fixed point approach PG Fixed-point approach (G75, G751) (Page 437) n ● ● ● ● G90 4) Absolute dimensions PG Absolute dimensions (G90, AC) (Page 183) m/n ● ● ● ● G91 Incremental dimensions PG Incremental dimensions (G91, IC) (Page 186) m/n ● ● ● ● G93 Inverse-time feedrate rpm PG Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) (Page 119) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 514 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F G94 4) Linear feedrate F in mm/min or inch/min and degree/min PG Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) (Page 119) m ● ● ● ● G95 Revolutional feedrate F in mm/rev or inch/rev PG Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) (Page 119) m ● ● ● ● G96 Constant cutting rate (as for G95) ON PG Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) (Page 108) m ● ● ● ● G97 Constant cutting rate (as for G95) OFF PG Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) (Page 108) m ● ● ● ● G110 Pole programming relative to the last programmed setpoint position PG Reference point of the polar coordinates (G110, G111, G112) (Page 211) n ● ● ● ● G111 Pole programming relative to zero of current workpiece coordinate system PG Reference point of the polar coordinates (G110, G111, G112) (Page 211) n ● ● ● ● G112 Pole programming relative to the last valid pole PG Reference point of the polar coordinates (G110, G111, G112) (Page 211) n ● ● ● ● G140 4) SAR approach direction defined by G41/G42 PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 515 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F G141 SAR approach direction to left of contour PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) m ● ● ● ● G142 SAR approach direction to right of contour PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) m ● ● ● ● G143 SAR approach direction tangent-dependent PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) m ● ● ● ● G147 Soft approach with straight line PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) n ● ● ● ● G148 Soft retraction with straight line PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) n ● ● ● ● G153 Suppression of current frames including basic frame PG Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) (Page 173) n ● ● ● ● G247 Soft approach with quadrant PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) n ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 516 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F G248 Soft retraction with quadrant PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) n ● ● ● ● G290 Switch over to SINUMERIK mode ON FBW m ● ● ● ● G291 Switch over to ISO2/3 mode ON FBW m ● ● ● ● G331 Rigid tapping, positive lead, clockwise PG Tapping without compensating chuck (G331, G332) (Page 283) m ● ● ● ● G332 Rigid tapping, negative lead, counter-clockwise PG Tapping without compensating chuck (G331, G332) (Page 283) m ● ● ● ● G340 4) Spatial approach block (depth and in plane at the same time (helix)) PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) m ● ● ● ● G341 Initial infeed on perpendicular axis (z), then approach in plane PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) m ● ● ● ● G347 Soft approach with semicircle PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) n ● ● ● ● G348 Soft retraction with semicircle PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) n ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 517 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F G450 4) Transition circle PG Compensation at the outside corners (G450, G451, DISC) (Page 319) m ● ● ● ● G451 Intersection of equidistances PG Compensation at the outside corners (G450, G451, DISC) (Page 319) m ● ● ● ● G460 4) Activation of collision detection for the approach and retraction block PG Approach and retraction with enhanced retraction strategies (G460, G461, G462) (Page 335) m ● ● ● ● G461 Insertion of a circle into the TRC block PG Approach and retraction with enhanced retraction strategies (G460, G461, G462) (Page 335) m ● ● ● ● G462 Insertion of a straight line into the TRC block PG Approach and retraction with enhanced retraction strategies (G460, G461, G462) (Page 335) m ● ● ● ● G500 4) Deactivation of all adjustable frames, basic frames are active PG Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) (Page 173) m ● ● ● ● G505 to G599 5th ... 99th adjustable work offset PG Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) (Page 173) m ● ● ● ● G601 4) Block change on exact stop fine PG Exact stop (G60, G9, G601, G602, G603) (Page 353) m ● ● ● ● G602 Block change on exact stop coarse PG Exact stop (G60, G9, G601, G602, G603) (Page 353) m ● ● ● ● G603 Block change at IPO block end PG Exact stop (G60, G9, G601, G602, G603) (Page 353) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 518 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F G621 Corner deceleration at all corners PGA m ● ● ● ● G641 Continuous-path mode with smoothing as per distance criterion (= programmable rounding clearance) PG Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) (Page 357) m ● ● ● ● G642 Continuous-path mode with smoothing within the defined tolerances PG Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) (Page 357) m ● ● ● ● G643 Continuous-path mode with smoothing within the defined tolerances (block- internal) PG Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) (Page 357) m ● ● ● ● G644 Continuous-path mode with smoothing with maximum possible dynamic response PG Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) (Page 357) m ● ● ● ● G645 Continuous-path mode with smoothing and tangential block transitions within the defined tolerances PG Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) (Page 357) m ● ● ● ● G700 Inch dimensions for geometric and technological specifications (lengths, feedrate) PG Inch or metric dimensions (G70/G700, G71/G710) (Page 194) m ● ● ● ● G710 4) Metric dimensions for geometric and technological specifications (lengths, feedrate) PG Inch or metric dimensions (G70/G700, G71/G710) (Page 194) m ● ● ● ● G751 Approach fixed point via intermediate point PG Fixed-point approach (G75, G751) (Page 437) n ● ● ● ● G810 4) , ..., G819 G group reserved for the OEM user PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 519 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F G820 4) , ..., G829 G group reserved for the OEM user PGA ● ● ● ● G931 Feedrate specified by traversing time m ● ● ● ● G942 Freeze linear feedrate and constant cutting rate or spindle speed m ● ● ● ● G952 Freeze revolutional feedrate and constant cutting rate or spindle speed m ● ● ● ● G961 Constant cutting rate and linear feedrate PG Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) (Page 108) m ● ● ● ● G962 Linear or revolutional feedrate and constant cutting rate PG Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) (Page 108) m ● ● ● ● G971 Freeze spindle speed and linear feedrate PG Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) (Page 108) m ● ● ● ● G972 Freeze linear or revolutional feedrate and constant spindle speed PG Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) (Page 108) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 520 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F G973 Revolutional feedrate without spindle speed limitation PG Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) (Page 108) m ● ● ● ● GEOAX Assign new channel axes to geometry axes 1 - 3 PGA ● ● ● ● GET Replace enabled axis between channels PGA ● ● ● ● GETACTT Gets active tool from a group of tools with the same name FBW ● ● ● ● GETACTTD Gets the T number associated with an absolute D number PGA ● ● ● ● GETD Replace axis directly between channels PGA ● ● ● ● GETDNO Returns the D number of a cutting edge (CE) of a tool (T) PGA ● ● ● ● GETEXET Reading of the loaded T number FBW ● ● ● ● GETFREELOC Find a free space in the magazine for a given tool FBW ● ● ● ● GETSELT Return selected T number FBW ● ● ● ● GETT Get T number for tool name FBW ● ● ● ● GETTCOR Read out tool lengths and/or tool length components FB1(W1) ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 521 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F GETTENV Read T, D and DL numbers FB1(W1) ● ● ● ● GOTO Jump operation first forward then backward (direction initially to end of program and then to beginning of program) PGA ● ● ● ● GOTOB Jump backward (toward the beginning of the program) PGA ● ● ● ● GOTOC As GOTO, but suppress alarm 14080 "Jump destination not found" PGA ● ● ● ● GOTOF Jump forward (toward the end of the program) PGA ● ● ● ● GOTOS Jump back to beginning of program PGA ● ● ● ● GP Keyword for the indirect programming of position attributes PGA ● ● ● ● GWPSOF Deselect constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPS) PG Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPSON, GWPSOF) (Page 115) n ● ● ● ● GWPSON Select constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPS) PG Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPSON, GWPSOF) (Page 115) n ● ● ● ● H... Auxiliary function output to the PLC PG/FB1(H2) Auxiliary function outputs (Page 419) ● ● ● ● HOLES1 Drilling pattern cycle, hole sequence BHD/BHF ● ● ● ● HOLES2 Drilling pattern cycle, hole circle BHD/BHF ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 522 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F I Interpolation parameters PG Circular interpolation with center point and end point (G2/G3, X... Y... Z..., I... J... K...) (Page 229) n ● ● ● ● I1 Intermediate point coordinate PG Circular interpolation with opening angle and center point (G2/G3, X... Y... Z.../ I... J... K..., AR) (Page 236) n ● ● ● ● IC Incremental dimensions PG Incremental dimensions (G91, IC) (Page 186) n ● ● ● ● ICYCOF All blocks of a technology cycle are processed in one interpolation cycle following ICYCOF PGA ● ● ● ● ICYCON Each block of a technology cycle is processed in a separate interpolation cycle following ICYCON PGA ● ● ● ● ID Identifier for modal synchronized actions PGA m ● ● ● ● IDS Identifier for modal static synchronized actions PGA ● ● ● ● IF Introduction of a conditional jump in the part program/technology cycle PGA ● ● ● ● INDEX Define index of character in input string PGA ● ● ● ● INIPO Initialization of variables at POWER ON PGA ● ● ● ● INIRE Initialization of variables at reset PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 523 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F INICF Initialization of variables at NewConfig PGA ● ● ● ● INIT Selection of a particular NC program for execution in a particular channel PGA - - - - INITIAL Generation of an INI file across all areas PGA ● ● ● ● INT Data type: Integer with sign PGA ● ● ● ● INTERSEC Calculate intersection between two contour elements PGA ● ● ● ● INVCCW Trace involute, counter- clockwise PG Involute interpolation (INVCW, INVCCW) (Page 253) m - - - - INVCW Trace involute, clockwise PG Involute interpolation (INVCW, INVCCW) (Page 253) m - - - - INVFRAME Calculate the inverse frame from a frame FB1(K2) ● ● ● ● IP Variable interpolation parameter PGA ● ● ● ● IPOBRKA Motion criterion from braking ramp activation PGA m ● ● ● ● IPOENDA End of motion when “IPO stop” reached PGA m ● ● ● ● IPTRLOCK Freeze start of the untraceable program section at next machine function block PGA m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 524 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F IPTRUNLOCK Set end of untraceable program section at current block at time of interruption PGA m ● ● ● ● ISAXIS Check if geometry axis 1 specified as parameter PGA ● ● ● ● ISD Insertion depth PGA m ● ● ● ● ISFILE Check whether the file exists in the NCK application memory PGA ● ● ● ● ISNUMBER Check whether the input string can be converted to a number PGA ● ● ● ● ISOCALL Indirect call of a program programmed in an ISO language PGA ● ● ● ● ISVAR Check whether the transfer parameter contains a variable declared in the NC PGA ● ● ● ● J Interpolation parameters PG Circular interpolation with center point and end point (G2/G3, X... Y... Z..., I... J... K...) (Page 229) n ● ● ● ● J1 Intermediate point coordinate PG Circular interpolation with intermediate point and end point (CIP, X... Y... Z..., I1... J1... K1...) (Page 242) n ● ● ● ● JERKA Activate acceleration response set via MD for programmed axes ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 525 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F JERKLIM Reduction or overshoot of maximum axial jerk PGA m ● ● ● ● JERKLIMA Reduction or overshoot of maximum axial jerk PG Influence of acceleration on following axes (VELOLIMA, ACCLIMA, JERKLIMA) (Page 452) m ● ● ● ● K Interpolation parameters PG Circular interpolation with center point and end point (G2/G3, X... Y... Z..., I... J... K...) (Page 229) n ● ● ● ● K1 Intermediate point coordinate PG Circular interpolation with intermediate point and end point (CIP, X... Y... Z..., I1... J1... K1...) (Page 242) n ● ● ● ● KONT Travel around contour on tool offset PG Contour approach and retraction (NORM, KONT, KONTC, KONTT) (Page 312) m ● ● ● ● KONTC Approach/retract with continuous-curvature polynomial PG Contour approach and retraction (NORM, KONT, KONTC, KONTT) (Page 312) m ● ● ● ● KONTT Approach/retract with continuous-tangent polynomial PG Contour approach and retraction (NORM, KONT, KONTC, KONTT) (Page 312) m ● ● ● ● L Subprogram number PGA n ● ● ● ● LEAD Lead angle 1. Tool orientation 2. Orientation polynomial PGA m ● - ● - ● - ● - Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 526 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F LEADOF Master value coupling OFF PGA - - - - LEADON Master value coupling ON PGA - - - - LENTOAX Provides information about the assignment of tool lengths L1, L2, and L3 of the active tool to the abscissa, ordinate and applicate FB1(W1) ● ● ● ● LFOF 4) Fast retraction for thread cutting OFF PG Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON, LFOF, DILF, ALF, LFTXT, LFWP, LFPOS, POLF, POLFMASK, POLFMLIN) (Page 290) m ● ● ● ● LFON Fast retraction for thread cutting ON PG Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON, LFOF, DILF, ALF, LFTXT, LFWP, LFPOS, POLF, POLFMASK, POLFMLIN) (Page 290) m ● ● ● ● LFPOS Retraction of the axis declared with POLFMASK or POLFMLIN to the absolute axis position programmed with POLF PG Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON, LFOF, DILF, ALF, LFTXT, LFWP, LFPOS, POLF, POLFMASK, POLFMLIN) (Page 290) m ● ● ● ● LFTXT The plane of the retraction movement for fast retraction is determined from the path tangent and the current tool direction PG Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON, LFOF, DILF, ALF, LFTXT, LFWP, LFPOS, POLF, POLFMASK, POLFMLIN) (Page 290) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 527 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F LFWP The plane of the retraction movement for fast retraction is determined by the current working plane (G17/G18/G19) PG Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON, LFOF, DILF, ALF, LFTXT, LFWP, LFPOS, POLF, POLFMASK, POLFMLIN) (Page 290) m ● ● ● ● LIFTFAST Fast retraction PG ● ● ● ● LIMS Speed limitation for G96/G961 and G97 PG Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) (Page 108) m ● ● ● ● LLI Lower limit value of variables PGA ● ● ● ● LN Natural logarithm PGA ● ● ● ● LOCK Disable synchronized action with ID (stop technology cycle) PGA ● ● ● ● LONGHOLE Milling pattern cycle of elongated holes on a circle BHD/BHF - - - - LOOP Introduction of an endless loop PGA ● ● ● ● M0 Programmed stop PG M functions (Page 423) ● ● ● ● M1 Optional stop PG M functions (Page 423) ● ● ● ● M2 End of main program with return to beginning of program PG M functions (Page 423) ● ● ● ● M3 Direction of spindle rotation clockwise for master spindle PG M functions (Page 423) ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 528 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F M4 Direction of spindle rotation counter- clockwise for master spindle PG M functions (Page 423) ● ● ● ● M5 Spindle stop for master spindle PG M functions (Page 423) ● ● ● ● M6 Tool change PG M functions (Page 423) ● ● ● ● M17 End of subprogram PG M functions (Page 423) ● ● ● ● M19 For SSL accumulated spindle programming PG M functions (Page 423) ● ● ● ● M30 End of program, same effect as M2 PG M functions (Page 423) ● ● ● ● M40 Automatic gear change PG M functions (Page 423) ● ● ● ● M41 to M45 Gear stage 1, ..., 5 PG M functions (Page 423) ● ● ● ● M70 Transition to axis mode PG M functions (Page 423) ● ● ● ● MASLDEF Define master/slave axis grouping PGA ● ● ● ● MASLDEL Uncouple master/slave axis grouping and clear grouping definition PGA ● ● ● ● MASLOF Deactivation of a temporary coupling PGA ● ● ● ● MASLOFS Deactivation of a temporary coupling with automatic slave axis stop PGA ● ● ● ● MASLON Activation of a temporary coupling PGA ● ● ● ● MATCH Search for string in string PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 529 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F MAXVAL Larger value of two variables (arithm. function) PGA ● ● ● ● MCALL Modal subprogram call PGA ● ● ● ● MEAC Continuous measurement without deletion of distance-to-go PGA n - - - - MEAFRAME Frame calculation from measuring points PGA ● ● ● ● MEAS Measurement with touch- trigger probe PGA n ● ● ● ● MEASA Measurement with deletion of distance-to-go PGA n - - - - MEASURE Calculation method for workpiece and tool measurement FB2(M5) ● ● ● ● MEAW Measurement with touch- trigger probe without deletion of distance-to-go PGA n ● ● ● ● MEAWA Measurement without deletion of distance-to-go PGA n - - - - MI Access to frame data: Mirroring PGA ● ● ● ● MINDEX Define index of character in input string PGA ● ● ● ● MINVAL Smaller value of two variables (arithm. function) PGA ● ● ● ● MIRROR Programmable mirroring PGA Programmable mirroring (MIRROR, AMIRROR) (Page 403) n ● ● ● ● MMC Call the dialog window interactively from the part program on the HMI PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 530 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F MOD Modulo division PGA ● ● ● ● MODAXVAL Determine modulo position of a modulo rotary axis PGA ● ● ● ● MOV Start positioning axis PGA ● ● ● ● MSG Programmable messages PG Messages (MSG) (Page 427) m ● ● ● ● MVTOOL Language command to move tool FBW ● ● ● ● N NC auxiliary block number PG Block rules (Page 42) ● ● ● ● NCK Specification of range of validity for data PGA ● ● ● ● NEWCONF Apply modified machine data (corresponds to "Activate machine data") PGA ● ● ● ● NEWT Create new tool PGA ● ● ● ● NORM 4) Standard setting in starting point and end point with tool offset PG Contour approach and retraction (NORM, KONT, KONTC, KONTT) (Page 312) m ● ● ● ● NOT Logic NOT (negation) PGA ● ● ● ● NPROT Machine-specific protection zone ON/OFF PGA ● ● ● ● NPROTDEF Definition of a machine- specific protection zone PGA ● ● ● ● NUMBER Convert input string to number PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 531 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F OEMIPO1 OEM interpolation 1 PGA m ● ● ● ● OEMIPO2 OEM interpolation 2 PGA m ● ● ● ● OF Keyword in CASE branch PGA ● ● ● ● OFFN Allowance on the programmed contour PG Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) (Page 301) m ● ● ● ● OMA1 OEM address 1 m ● ● ● ● OMA2 OEM address 2 m ● ● ● ● OMA3 OEM address 3 m ● ● ● ● OMA4 OEM address 4 m ● ● ● ● OMA5 OEM address 5 m ● ● ● ● OR Logic operator, OR operation PGA ● ● ● ● ORIAXES Linear interpolation of machine axes or orientation axes PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIAXPOS Orientation angle via virtual orientation axes with rotary axis positions m ● ● ● ● ORIC 4) Orientation changes at outside corners are overlaid on the circle block to be inserted PGA m ● ● ● ● ORICONCCW Interpolation on a circular peripheral surface in CCW direction PGA/FB3(F3) m ● ● ● ● ORICONCW Interpolation on a circular peripheral surface in CW direction PGA/FB3(F4) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 532 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F ORICONIO Interpolation on a circular peripheral surface with intermediate orientation setting PGA/FB3(F4) m ● ● ● ● ORICONTO Interpolation on circular peripheral surface in tangential transition (final orientation) PGA/FB3(F5) m ● ● ● ● ORICURVE Interpolation of orientation with specification of motion of two contact points of tool PGA/FB3(F6) m ● ● ● ● ORID Orientation changes are performed before the circle block PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIEULER Orientation angle via Euler angle PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIMKS Tool orientation in the machine coordinate system PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIPATH Tool orientation in relation to path PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIPATHS Tool orientation in relation to path, blips in the orientation characteristic are smoothed PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIPLANE Interpolation in a plane (corresponds to ORIVECT), large-radius circular interpolation PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIRESET Initial tool orientation with up to 3 orientation axes PGA ● ● ● ● ORIROTA Angle of rotation to an absolute direction of rotation PGA m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 533 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F ORIROTC Tangential rotational vector in relation to path tangent PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIROTR Angle of rotation relative to the plane between the start and end orientation PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIROTT Angle of rotation relative to the change in the orientation vector PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIRPY Orientation angle via RPY angle (XYZ) PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIRPY2 Orientation angle via RPY angle (ZYX) PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIS Change in orientation PGA m ● ● ● ● ORISOF 4) Smoothing of the orientation characteristic OFF PGA m ● ● ● ● ORISON Smoothing of the orientation characteristic ON PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIVECT Large-radius circular interpolation (identical to ORIPLANE) PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIVIRT1 Orientation angle via virtual orientation axes (definition 1) PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIVIRT2 Orientation angle via virtual orientation axes (definition 1) PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIWKS 4) Tool orientation in the workpiece coordinate system PGA m ● ● ● ● OS Oscillation on/off PGA - - - - OSB Oscillating: Starting point FB2(P5) m - - - - OSC Continuous tool orientation smoothing PGA m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 534 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F OSCILL Axis: 1 - 3 infeed axes PGA m - - - - OSCTRL Oscillation options PGA m - - - - OSD Smoothing of tool orientation by specifying smoothing distance with SD PGA m ● ● ● ● OSE Oscillation end position PGA m - - - - OSNSC Oscillating: Number of spark-out cycles PGA m - - - - OSOF 4) Tool orientation smoothing OFF PGA m ● ● ● ● OSP1 Oscillating: Left reversal point PGA m - - - - OSP2 Oscillation right reversal point PGA m - - - - OSS Tool orientation smoothing at end of block PGA m ● ● ● ● OSSE Tool orientation smoothing at start and end of block PGA m ● ● ● ● OST Smoothing of tool orientation by specifying angular tolerance in degrees with SD (maximum deviation from programmed orientation characteristic) PGA m ● ● ● ● OST1 Oscillating: Stopping point in left reversal point PGA m - - - - OST2 Oscillating: Stopping point in right reversal point PGA m - - - - Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 535 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F OTOL Orientation tolerance for compressor functions, orientation smoothing and smoothing types PGA - ● - ● OVR Speed offset PGA Programmable feedrate override (OVR, OVRRAP, OVRA) (Page 150) m ● ● ● ● OVRA Axial speed offset PGA Programmable feedrate override (OVR, OVRRAP, OVRA) (Page 150) m ● ● ● ● OVRRAP Rapid traverse override PGA Programmable feedrate override (OVR, OVRRAP, OVRA) (Page 150) m ● ● ● ● P Number of subprogram cycles PGA ● ● ● ● PAROT Align workpiece coordinate system on workpiece PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME, TOROT, PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● PAROTOF Deactivate frame rotation in relation to workpiece PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME, TOROT, PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● PCALL Call subprograms with absolute path and parameter transfer PGA ● ● ● ● PDELAYOF Punching with delay OFF PGA m - - - - PDELAYON 4) Punching with delay ON PGA m - - - - Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 536 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F PHU Physical unit of a variable PGA ● ● ● ● PL 1. B spline: Node clearance 2. Polynomial interpolation: Length of the parameter interval for polynomial interpolation PGA 1. 2. n - - ○ - - - ○ - PM Per minute PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) ● ● ● ● PO Polynomial coefficient for polynomial interpolation PGA n - - - - POCKET3 Milling cycle, rectangular pocket (any milling cutter) BHD/BHF ● ● ● ● POCKET4 Milling cycle, circular pocket (any milling cutter) BHD/BHF ● ● ● ● POLF LIFTFAST retraction position PG/PGA Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON, LFOF, DILF, ALF, LFTXT, LFWP, LFPOS, POLF, POLFMASK, POLFMLIN) (Page 290) m ● ● ● ● POLFA Start retraction position of single axes with $AA_ESR_TRIGGER PG Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON, LFOF, DILF, ALF, LFTXT, LFWP, LFPOS, POLF, POLFMASK, POLFMLIN) (Page 290) m ● ● ● ● POLFMASK Enable axes for retraction without a connection between the axes PG Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON, LFOF, DILF, ALF, LFTXT, LFWP, LFPOS, POLF, POLFMASK, POLFMLIN) (Page 290) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 537 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F POLFMLIN Enable axes for retraction with a linear connection between the axes PG Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON, LFOF, DILF, ALF, LFTXT, LFWP, LFPOS, POLF, POLFMASK, POLFMLIN) (Page 290) m ● ● ● ● POLY Polynomial interpolation PGA m - - - - POLYPATH Polynomial interpolation can be selected for the AXIS or VECT axis groups PGA m - - - - PON Punching ON PGA m - - - - PONS Punching ON in interpolation cycle PGA m - - - - POS Position axis PG Traversing positioning axes (POS, POSA, POSP, FA, WAITP, WAITMC) (Page 129) ● ● ● ● POSA Position axis across block boundary PG Traversing positioning axes (POS, POSA, POSP, FA, WAITP, WAITMC) (Page 129) ● ● ● ● POSM Position magazine FBW ● ● ● ● POSP Positioning in sections (oscillating) PG Traversing positioning axes (POS, POSA, POSP, FA, WAITP, WAITMC) (Page 129) ● ● ● ● POSRANGE Determine whether the currently interpolated position setpoint of an axis is located in a window at a predefined reference position PGA ● ● ● ● POT Square (arithmetic function) PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 538 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F PR Per revolution PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) ● ● ● ● PREPRO Identify subprograms with preparation PGA ● ● ● ● PRESETON Set actual values for programmed axes PGA ● ● ● ● PRIO Keyword for setting the priority for interrupt processing PGA ● ● ● ● PROC First operation in a program PGA ● ● ● ● PTP Point-to-point motion PGA m ● ● ● ● PTPG0 Point-to-point motion only with G0, otherwise CP PGA m ● ● ● ● PUNCHACC Travel-dependent acceleration for nibbling PGA - - - - PUTFTOC Tool fine offset for parallel dressing PGA ● ● ● ● PUTFTOCF Tool fine offset dependent on a function for parallel dressing defined with FCTDEF PGA ● ● ● ● PW B spline, point weight PGA n - ○ - ○ QECLRNOF Quadrant error compensation learning OFF PGA ● ● ● ● QECLRNON Quadrant error compensation learning ON PGA ● ● ● ● QU Fast additional (auxiliary) function output PG Auxiliary function outputs (Page 419) ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 539 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F R... Arithmetic parameter also as settable address identifier and with numerical extension PGA ● ● ● ● RAC Absolute non-modal axis- specific radius programming PG Axis-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMONA, DIAM90A, DIAMOFA, DIACYCOFA, DIAMCHANA, DIAMCHAN, DAC, DIC, RAC, RIC) (Page 200) n ● ● ● ● RDISABLE Read-in disable PGA ● ● ● ● READ Reads one or more lines in the specified file and stores the information read in the array PGA ● ● ● ● REAL Data type: Floating-point variable with sign (real numbers) PGA ● ● ● ● REDEF Setting for machine data, NC language elements and system variables, specifying the user groups they are displayed for PGA ● ● ● ● RELEASE Release machine axes for axis exchange PGA ● ● ● ● REP Keyword for initialization of all elements of an array with the same value PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 540 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F REPEAT Repetition of a program loop PGA ● ● ● ● REPEATB Repetition of a program line PGA ● ● ● ● REPOSA Linear repositioning with all axes PGA n ● ● ● ● REPOSH Repositioning with semicircle PGA n ● ● ● ● REPOSHA Repositioning with all axes; geometry axes in semicircle PGA n ● ● ● ● REPOSL Linear repositioning PGA n ● ● ● ● REPOSQ Repositioning in a quadrant PGA n ● ● ● ● REPOSQA Linear repositioning with all axes, geometry axes in quadrant PGA n ● ● ● ● RESET Reset technology cycle PGA ● ● ● ● RESETMON Language command for setpoint activation FBW ● ● ● ● RET End of subprogram PGA ● ● ● ● RIC Relative non-modal axis- specific radius programming PG n ● ● ● ● RINDEX Define index of character in input string PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 541 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F RMB Repositioning to start of block PGA m ● ● ● ● RME Repositioning to end of block PGA m ● ● ● ● RMI 4) Repositioning to interrupt point PGA m ● ● ● ● RMN Repositioning to the nearest path point PGA m ● ● ● ● RND Round the contour corner PG Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM) (Page 295) n ● ● ● ● RNDM Modal rounding PG Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM) (Page 295) m ● ● ● ● ROT Programmable rotation PG Programmable rotation (ROT, AROT, RPL) (Page 384) n ● ● ● ● ROTS Programmable frame rotations with solid angles PG Programmable frame rotations with solid angles (ROTS, AROTS, CROTS) (Page 396) n ● ● ● ● ROUND Rounding of decimal places PGA ● ● ● ● ROUNDUP Rounding up of an input value PGA ● ● ● ● RP Polar radius PG Travel commands with polar coordinates (G0, G1, G2, G3, AP, RP) (Page 213) m/n ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 542 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F RPL Rotation in the plane PG Programmable frame rotations with solid angles (ROTS, AROTS, CROTS) (Page 396) n ● ● ● ● RT Parameter for access to frame data: Rotation PGA ● ● ● ● RTLIOF G0 without linear interpolation (single-axis interpolation) PG Rapid traverse movement (G0, RTLION, RTLIOF) (Page 217) m ● ● ● ● RTLION G0 with linear interpolation PG Rapid traverse movement (G0, RTLION, RTLIOF) (Page 217) m ● ● ● ● S Spindle speed (with G4, G96/G961 different significance) PG Spindle speed (S), direction of spindle rotation (M3, M4, M5) (Page 95) m/n ● ● ● ● SAVE Attribute for saving information when subprograms are called PGA ● ● ● ● SBLOF Suppress single block PGA ● ● ● ● SBLON Revoke suppression of single block PGA ● ● ● ● SC Parameter for access to frame data: Scaling PGA ● ● ● ● SCALE Programmable scaling PG Programmable scale factor (SCALE, ASCALE) (Page 398) n ● ● ● ● SCC Selective assignment of transverse axis to G96/G961/G962. Axis identifiers may take the form of geometry, channel or machine axes PG Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) (Page 108) ● ● ● ● SCPARA Program servo parameter set PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 543 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F SD Spline degree PGA n - ○ - ○ SEFORM Structuring operation in the Step editor to generate the step view for HMI Advanced PGA ● ● ● ● SET Keyword for initialization of all elements of an array with listed values PGA ● ● ● ● SETAL Set alarm PGA ● ● ● ● SETDNO Assign the D number of a cutting edge (CE) of a tool (T) PGA ● ● ● ● SETINT Define which interrupt routine is to be activated when an NCK input is present PGA ● ● ● ● SETM Setting of markers in dedicated channel PGA - - - - SETMS Reset to the master spindle defined in machine data Spindle speed (S), direction of spindle rotation (M3, M4, M5) (Page 95) ● ● ● ● SETMS(n) Set spindle n as master spindle PG Spindle speed (S), direction of spindle rotation (M3, M4, M5) (Page 95) ● ● ● ● SETMTH Set master toolholder number FBW ● ● ● ● SETPIECE Set piece number for all tools assigned to the spindle FBW ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 544 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F SETTA Activate tool from wear group FBW ● ● ● ● SETTCOR Modification of tool components taking all general conditions into account FB1(W1) ● ● ● ● SETTIA Deactivate tool from wear group FBW ● ● ● ● SF Starting point offset for thread cutting PG Thread cutting with constant lead (G33, SF) (Page 270) m ● ● ● ● SIN Sine (trigon. function) PGA ● ● ● ● SIRELAY Activate the safety functions parameterized with SIRELIN, SIRELOUT, and SIRELTIME FBSI ● ● ● ● SIRELIN Initialize input variables of function block FBSI ● ● ● ● SIRELOUT Initialize output variables of function block FBSI ● ● ● ● SIRELTIME Initialize timers of function block FBSI ● ● ● ● SLOT1 Milling pattern cycle, groove on a circle BHD/BHF ● ● ● ● SLOT2 Milling pattern cycle, circular groove BHD/BHF ● ● ● ● SOFT Soft path acceleration PG Acceleration mode (BRISK, BRISKA, SOFT, SOFTA, DRIVE, DRIVEA) (Page 449) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 545 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F SOFTA Activate soft axis acceleration for the programmed axes PG Acceleration mode (BRISK, BRISKA, SOFT, SOFTA, DRIVE, DRIVEA) (Page 449) ● ● ● ● SON Nibbling ON PGA m - - - - SONS Nibbling ON in interpolation cycle PGA m - - - - SPATH 4) Path reference for FGROUP axes is arc length PGA m ● ● ● ● SPCOF Switch master spindle or spindle(s) from position control to speed control PG Position-controlled spindle operation (SPCON, SPCOF) (Page 134) m ● ● ● ● SPCON Switch master spindle or spindle(s) from speed control to position control PGA Position-controlled spindle operation (SPCON, SPCOF) (Page 134) m ● ● ● ● SPI Converts spindle number into axis identifier PGA ● ● ● ● SPIF1 4) Fast NCK inputs/outputs for punching/nibbling byte 1 FB2(N4) m - - - - SPIF2 Fast NCK inputs/outputs for punching/nibbling byte 2 FB2(N4) m - - - - SPLINEPATH Define spline grouping PGA - ○ - ○ SPN Number of path sections per block PGA n - - - - SPOF 4) Stroke OFF, nibbling, punching OFF PGA m - - - - Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 546 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F SPOS Spindle position PG Positioning spindles (SPOS, SPOSA, M19, M70, WAITS) (Page 135) m ● ● ● ● SPOSA Spindle position across block boundaries PG Positioning spindles (SPOS, SPOSA, M19, M70, WAITS) (Page 135) m ● ● ● ● SPP Length of a path section PGA m - - - - SQRT Square root (arithmetic function) PGA ● ● ● ● SR Oscillation retraction path for synchronized action PG Several feedrate values in one block (F, ST, SR, FMA, STA, SRA) (Page 161) n - - - - SRA Oscillation retraction path with external input axial for synchronized action PG Several feedrate values in one block (F, ST, SR, FMA, STA, SRA) (Page 161) m - - - - ST Oscillation sparking-out time for synchronized action PG Several feedrate values in one block (F, ST, SR, FMA, STA, SRA) (Page 161) n - - - - STA Oscillation sparking-out time axial for synchronized action PG Several feedrate values in one block (F, ST, SR, FMA, STA, SRA) (Page 161) m - - - - START Start selected programs simultaneously in several channels from current program PGA - - - - STARTFIFO 4) Execute; fill preprocessing memory simultaneously PGA m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 547 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F STAT Position of joints PGA n ● ● ● ● STOPFIFO Stop machining; fill preprocessing memory until STARTFIFO is detected, preprocessing memory is full or end of program PGA m ● ● ● ● STOPRE Preprocessing stop until all prepared blocks in main run are executed PGA ● ● ● ● STOPREOF Revoke preprocessing stop PGA ● ● ● ● STRING Data type: Character string PGA ● ● ● ● STRINGFELD Selection of a single character from the progr. string field PGA ● ● ● ● STRINGIS Checks the present scope of NC language and the NC cycle names, user variables, macros, and label names belonging specifically to this command to establish whether these exist, are valid, defined or active PGA ● ● ● ● STRINGVAR Selection of a single character from the progr. string PGA - - - - STRLEN Define string length PGA ● ● ● ● SUBSTR Define index of character in input string PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 548 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F SUPA Suppression of current work offset, including programmed offsets, system frames, handwheel offsets (DRF), external work offset, and overlaid movement PG Deselect frame (G53, G153, SUPA, G500) (Page 414) n ● ● ● ● SVC Tool cutting rate PG Cutting rate (SVC) (Page 100) m ● ● ● ● SYNFCT Evaluation of a polynomial as a function of a condition in the motion-synchronous action PGA ● ● ● ● SYNR The variable is read synchronously, i.e. at the time of execution PGA ● ● ● ● SYNRW The variable is read and written synchronously, i.e. at the time of execution PGA ● ● ● ● SYNW The variable is written synchronously, i.e. at the time of execution PGA ● ● ● ● T Call tool (only change if specified in machine data; otherwise M6 command necessary) PG Tool change with T command (Page 60) ● ● ● ● TAN Tangent (trigon. function) PGA ● ● ● ● TANG Definition of axis grouping tangential correction PGA - - - - Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 549 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F TANGDEL Deletion of definition of axis grouping tangential correction PGA - - - - TANGOF Tangential correction OFF PGA - - - - TANGON Tangential correction ON PGA - - - - TCA Tool selection/tool change irrespective of tool status FBW ● ● ● ● TCARR Request toolholder (number "m") PGA - ● - ● TCI Load tool from buffer into magazine FBW ● ● ● ● TCOABS 4) Determine tool length components from the orientation of the current toolholder PGA m - ● - ● TCOFR Determine tool length components from the orientation of the active frame PGA m - ● - ● TCOFRX Determine tool orientation of an active frame on selection of tool, tool points in X direction PGA m - ● - ● TCOFRY Determine tool orientation of an active frame on selection of tool, tool points in Y direction PGA m - ● - ● TCOFRZ Determine tool orientation of an active frame on selection of tool, tool points in Z direction PGA m - ● - ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 550 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F THETA Angle of rotation PGA n ● ● ● ● TILT Tilt angle PGA m ● ● ● ● TLIFT In tangential control insert intermediate block at contour corners PGA - - - - TMOF Deselect tool monitoring PGA ● ● ● ● TMON Activate tool monitoring PGA ● ● ● ● TO Designates the end value in a FOR counter loop PGA ● ● ● ● TOFF Tool length offset in the direction of the tool length component that is effective parallel to the geometry axis specified in the index PG Programmable tool offset (TOFFL, TOFF, TOFFR) (Page 88) m ● ● ● ● TOFFL Tool length offset in the direction of the tool length component L1, L2 or L3 PG Programmable tool offset (TOFFL, TOFF, TOFFR) (Page 88) m ● ● ● ● TOFFOF Deactivate online tool offset PGA ● ● ● ● TOFFON Activate online tool length offset PGA ● ● ● ● TOFFR Tool radius offset PG Programmable tool offset (TOFFL, TOFF, TOFFR) (Page 88) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 551 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F TOFRAME Align the Z axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME, TOROT, PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● TOFRAMEX Align the X axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME, TOROT, PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● TOFRAMEY Align the Y axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME, TOROT, PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● TOFRAMEZ As TOFRAME PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME, TOROT, PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● TOLOWER Convert the letters of a string into lowercase PGA ● ● ● ● TOOLENV Save current states which are of significance to the evaluation of the tool data stored in the memory FB1(W1) ● ● ● ● TOROT Align the Z axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME, TOROT, PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● TOROTOF Frame rotations in tool direction OFF PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME, TOROT, PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 552 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F TOROTX Align the X axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME, TOROT, PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● TOROTY Align the Y axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME, TOROT, PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● TOROTZ As TOROT PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME, TOROT, PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● TOUPPER Convert the letters of a string into uppercase PGA ● ● ● ● TOWBCS Wear values in basic coordinate system (BCS) PGA m - ● - ● TOWKCS Wear values in the coordinate system of the tool head for kinetic transformation (differs from machine coordinate system through tool rotation) PGA m - ● - ● TOWMCS Wear values in machine coordinate system PGA m - ● - ● TOWSTD Initial setting value for offsets in tool length PGA m - ● - ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 553 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F TOWTCS Wear values in the tool coordinate system (toolholder ref. point T at the tool holder) PGA m - ● - ● TOWWCS Wear values in workpiece coordinate system PGA m - ● - ● TR Offset component of a frame variable PGA ● ● ● ● TRAANG Transformation inclined axis PGA - - ○ - TRACON Cascaded transformation PGA - - ○ - TRACYL Cylinder: Peripheral surface transformation PGA ○ ○ ○ ○ TRAFOOF Deactivate active transformations in the channel PGA ● ● ● ● TRAILOF Asynchronous coupled motion OFF PGA ● ● ● ● TRAILON Asynchronous coupled motion ON PGA ● ● ● ● TRANS Programmable offset PG Zero offset (TRANS, ATRANS) (Page 376) n ● ● ● ● TRANSMIT Pole transformation (face machining) PGA ○ ○ ○ ○ TRAORI 4-axis, 5-axis transformation, generic transformation PGA - ● - ● TRUE Logical constant: True PGA ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 554 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F TRUNC Truncation of decimal places PGA ● ● ● ● TU Axis angle PGA n ● ● ● ● TURN Number of turns for helix PG Helical interpolation (G2/G3, TURN) (Page 250) n ● ● ● ● ULI Upper limit value of variables PGA ● ● ● ● UNLOCK Enable synchronized action with ID (continue technology cycle) PGA ● ● ● ● UNTIL Condition for end of REPEAT loop PGA ● ● ● ● UPATH Path reference for FGROUP axes is curve parameter PGA m ● ● ● ● VAR Keyword: Type of parameter transfer PGA ● ● ● ● VELOLIM Reduction of an overshoot of the maximum axial velocity PGA m ● ● ● ● VELOLIMA Reduction or overshoot of the maximum axial velocity PG Influence of acceleration on following axes (VELOLIMA, ACCLIMA, JERKLIMA) (Page 452) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 555 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F WAITC Wait for the coupling block change criterion to be fulfilled for the axes/spindles PGA - - ○ - WAITE Wait for end of program in another channel PGA - - - - WAITM Wait for marker in specified channel; terminate previous block with exact stop PGA - - - - WAITMC Wait for marker in specified channel; exact stop only if the other channels have not yet reached the marker. PGA - - - - WAITP Wait for end of traversing PG Traversing positioning axes (POS, POSA, POSP, FA, WAITP, WAITMC) (Page 129) ● ● ● ● WAITS Wait for spindle position to be reached PG Positioning spindles (SPOS, SPOSA, M19, M70, WAITS) (Page 135) ● ● ● ● WALCS0 Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation deselected PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 ... WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALCS1 Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 1 active PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 ... WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALCS2 Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 2 active PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 ... WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals 556 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F WALCS3 Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 3 active PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 ... WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALCS4 Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 4 active PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 ... WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALCS5 Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 5 active PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 ... WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALCS6 Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 6 active PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 ... WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALCS7 Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 7 active PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 ... WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALCS8 Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 8 active PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 ... WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALCS9 Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 9 active PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 ... WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALCS10 Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 10 active PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 ... WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALIMOF BCS working area limitation OFF PG Working area limitation in BCS (G25/G26, WALIMON, WALIMOF) (Page 429) m ● ● ● ● WALIMON 4) BCS working area limitation ON PG Working area limitation in BCS (G25/G26, WALIMON, WALIMOF) (Page 429) m ● ● ● ● Tables 16.1 List of statements Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 557 Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D - - - - - F - - - - - D - - - - - F WHEN The action is executed cyclically when the condition is fulfilled. PGA ● ● ● ● WHENEVER The action is executed once whenever the condition is fulfilled. PGA ● ● ● ● WHILE Start of WHILE program loop PGA ● ● ● ● WRITE Write text to file system Appends a block to the end of the specified file. PGA ● ● ● ● WRTPR Delays the machining job without interrupting continuous-path mode ● ● ● ● X Axis name PG Travel commands with Cartesian coordinates (G0, G1, G2, G3, X..., Y..., Z...) (Page 209) m/n ● ● ● ● XOR Logic exclusive OR PGA ● ● ● ● Y Axis name PG Travel commands with Cartesian coordinates (G0, G1, G2, G3, X..., Y..., Z...) (Page 209) m/n ● ● ● ● Z Axis name PG Travel commands with Cartesian coordinates (G0, G1, G2, G3, X..., Y..., Z...) (Page 209) m/n ● ● ● ● Tables 16.2 Addresses Fundamentals 558 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 16.2 16.2 Addresses List of addresses The list of addresses consists of: ● Address letters ● Fixed addresses ● Fixed addresses with axis expansion ● Settable addresses Address letters The following address letters are available: Letter Meaning Numeric extension A Settable address identifier x B Settable address identifier x C Settable address identifier x D Selection/deselection of tool length compensation, tool cutting edge E Settable address identifier F Feedrate dwell time in seconds x G G function H H function x I Settable address identifier x J Settable address identifier x K Settable address identifier x L Subroutines, subroutine call M M function x N Subblock number O Unassigned P Number of program runs Q Settable address identifier x R Variable identifier (arithmetic parameter) / settable address identifier without numerical extension x S Spindle value dwell time in spindle revolutions x x T Tool number x U Settable address identifier x V Settable address identifier x W Settable address identifier x X Settable address identifier x Y Settable address identifier x Tables 16.2 Addresses Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 559 Letter Meaning Numeric extension Z Settable address identifier x % Start character and separator for file transfer : Main block number / Skip identifier Available fixed addresses Axis identifier Address type Modal/ non- modal G70/ G71 G700/ G710 G90/ G91 IC AC DC, ACN, ACP CIC, CAC, CDC, CACN, CACP Qu Data type L Subroutine no. n Integer without sign P Number of subroutine passes n Integer without sign N Block number n Integer without sign G G function See list of G func- tions Integer without sign F Feed, dwell time m, n x x Real without sign OVR Override m Real without sign S Spindle, dwell time m, n x Real without sign SPOS Spindle position m x x x Real SPOSA Spindle position beyond block limits m x x x Real T Tool number m x Integer without sign D Offset number m x Integer without sign M, H, Auxiliary functions n x M: Integer without sign H: Real Tables 16.2 Addresses Fundamentals 560 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Fixed addresses with axis expansion Axis identifier Address type Modal/ non- modal G70/ G71 G700/ G710 G90/ G91 IC AC DC, ACN, ACP CIC, CAC, CDC, CACN, CACP Qu Data type AX: Axis Variable axis identifier *) x x x x x x Real IP: Interpola- tion para- meter Variable interpolation parameter n x x x x x Real POS: Positioning axis Positioning axis m x x x x x x x Real POSA: Positioning axis above end of block Positioning axis across block boundaries m x x x x x x x Real POSP: Positioning axis in parts Positioning axis in parts (oscillation) m x x x x x x Real: End position / Real: Partial length Integer: Option PO: Polynomial Polynomial coefficient n x x Real without sign 1 - 8 times FA: Feed axial Axial feedrate m x x Real without sign FL: Feed limit Axial feed limit m x Real without sign OVRA: Override Axial override m x Real without sign ACC: Axial acceleration Axial acceleration m Real without sign FMA: Feedrate multiple axial Synchronous feedrate axial m x Real without sign STA: Sparking- out time axial Sparking out time axial m Real without sign Tables 16.2 Addresses Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 561 Axis identifier Address type Modal/ non- modal G70/ G71 G700/ G710 G90/ G91 IC AC DC, ACN, ACP CIC, CAC, CDC, CACN, CACP Qu Data type SRA: Sparking- out retract Retraction path on external input axial m x x Real without sign OS: Oscillating ON/OFF Oscillation ON/OFF m Integer without sign OST1: Oscillating time 1 Stopping time at left reversal point (oscillation) m Real OST2: Oscillating time 2 Stopping time at right reversal point (oscillation) m Real OSP1: Oscillating position 1 Left reversal point (oscillation) m x x x x x x Real OSP2: Oscillating position 2 Right reversal point (oscillation) m x x x x x x Real OSB: Oscillating start position m x x x x x x Real OSE: Oscillating end position Oscillation end position m x x x x x x Real OSNSC: Oscillating: number spark-out cycles Number of spark-out cycles (oscillation) m Integer without sign OSCTRL: Oscillating control Oscillation control options m Integer without sign: set options, integer without sign: reset options OSCILL: Oscillating Axis assignment for oscillation activate oscillation m Axis: 1 - 3 infeed axes Tables 16.2 Addresses Fundamentals 562 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Axis identifier Address type Modal/ non- modal G70/ G71 G700/ G710 G90/ G91 IC AC DC, ACN, ACP CIC, CAC, CDC, CACN, CACP Qu Data type FDA: Feedrate DRF axial Axis feedrate for handwheel override n x Real without sign FGREF Reference radius m x x Real without sign POLF LIFTFAST position m x x Real without sign FXS: Fixed stop Travel to fixed stop ON m Integer without sign FXST: Fixed stop torque Torque limit for travel to fixed stop m Real FXSW: Fixed stop window Monitoring window for travel to fixed stop m Real In these addresses, an axis or an expression of axis type is specified in square brackets. The data type in the above column shows the type of value assigned. *) Absolute end points: modal, incremental end points: non-modal, otherwise modal/non- modal depending on syntax of G function. Settable addresses Axis identifier Address type Modal/ non- modal G70/ G71 G700/ G710 G90/ G91 IC AC DC, ACN, ACP CIC, CAC, CDC, CACN, CACP Qu Max. num- ber Data type Axis values and end points X, Y, Z, A, B, C Axis *) x x x x x x 8 Real AP: Angle polar Polar angle m/n* x x x 1 Real RP: Polar radius Polar radius m/n* x x x x x 1 Real without sign Tables 16.2 Addresses Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 563 Axis identifier Address type Modal/ non- modal G70/ G71 G700/ G710 G90/ G91 IC AC DC, ACN, ACP CIC, CAC, CDC, CACN, CACP Qu Max. num- ber Data type Tool orientation A2, B2, C2 1 ) Euler angle or RPY angle n 3 Real A3, B3, C3 Direction vector component n 3 Real A4, B4, C4 for start of block Normal vector component n 3 Real A5, B5, C5 for end of block Normal vector component n 3 Real A6, B6, C6 standardized vector Direction vector component n 3 Real A7, B7, C7 standardized vector Inter- mediate orientation component n 3 Real LEAD: Lead angle Lead angle m 1 Real THETA: Third degree of freedom tool orientation Angle of rotation, rotation around the tool direction n x x x 1 Real TILT: Tilt angle Tilt angle m 1 Real ORIS: Orientation smoothing factor Orientation change (referring to the path) m 1 Real Tables 16.2 Addresses Fundamentals 564 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Axis identifier Address type Modal/ non- modal G70/ G71 G700/ G710 G90/ G91 IC AC DC, ACN, ACP CIC, CAC, CDC, CACN, CACP Qu Max. num- ber Data type Interpolation parameters I, J, K** I1, J1, K1 Interpola- tion para- meter Inter- mediate point coordinate n n x x x x x x** x x** x 3 Real Real RPL: Rotation plane Rotation in the plane n 1 Real CR: Circle radius Circle radius n x x 1 Real without sign AR: Angle circular Opening angle 1 Real without sign TURN Number of turns for helix n 1 Integer without sign PL: Parameter interval length Parameter interval length n 1 Real without sign PW: Point weight n 1 Real without sign SD: Spline degree Spline degree n 1 Integer without sign TU: Turn Turn m Integer without sign STAT: State State m Integer without sign SF: Spindle offset Starting point offset for thread cutting m 1 Real DISR: Distance for repositioning Distance for reposition- ing n x x 1 Real without sign DISPR: Distance path for repositioning Repos path difference n x x 1 Real without sign ALF: Angle lift fast Fast retraction angle m 1 Integer without sign Tables 16.2 Addresses Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 565 Axis identifier Address type Modal/ non- modal G70/ G71 G700/ G710 G90/ G91 IC AC DC, ACN, ACP CIC, CAC, CDC, CACN, CACP Qu Max. num- ber Data type DILF: Distance lift fast Fast retraction length m x x 1 Real FP Fixed point: Number of fixed point to approach n 1 Integer without sign RNDM: Round modal Modal rounding m x x 1 Real without sign RND: Round Non-modal rounding n x x 1 Real without sign CHF: Chamfer Chamfer non-modal n x x 1 Real without sign CHR: Chamfer Chamfer in initial direction of motion n x x 1 Real without sign ANG: Angle Contour angle n 1 Real ISD: Insertion depth Insertion depth m x x 1 Real DISC: Distance Transition circle overshoot tool offset m x x 1 Real without sign OFFN Offset contour - normal m x x 1 Real DITS Thread run- in path m x x 1 Real DITE Thread run- out path m x x 1 Real Tables 16.2 Addresses Fundamentals 566 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Axis identifier Address type Modal/ non- modal G70/ G71 G700/ G710 G90/ G91 IC AC DC, ACN, ACP CIC, CAC, CDC, CACN, CACP Qu Max. num- ber Data type Nibbling/punching SPN: Stroke/punch number 1) Number of path sections per block n 1 INT SPP: Stroke/punch path 1) Length of a path section m 1 Real Grinding ST: Sparking-out time Sparking- out time n 1 Real without sign SR: Sparking-out retract path Return path n x x 1 Real without sign Approximate positioning criteria ADIS Rounding clearance m x x 1 Real without sign ADISPOS Rounding clearance for rapid traverse m x x 1 Real without sign Measurement MEAS: Measure Measure with touch- trigger probe n 1 Integer without sign MEAW: Measure without deleting distance-to-go Measure without deleting distance-to- go n 1 Integer without sign Axis, spindle behavior LIMS: Limit spindle speed Spindle speed limitation m 1 Real without sign Tables 16.2 Addresses Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 567 Axis identifier Address type Modal/ non- modal G70/ G71 G700/ G710 G90/ G91 IC AC DC, ACN, ACP CIC, CAC, CDC, CACN, CACP Qu Max. num- ber Data type Feedrates FAD Speed of the slow infeed motion n x 1 Real without sign FD: Feed DRF Path feed for hand- wheel override n x 1 Real without sign FRC Feed for radius and chamfer n x Real without sign FRCM Feed for radius and chamfer, modal m x Real without sign OEM addresses OMA1: OEM address 1 1) OEM address 1 m x x x 1 Real OMA2: OEM address 2 1) OEM address 2 m x x x 1 Real OMA3: OEM address 3 1) OEM address 3 m x x x 1 Real OMA4: OEM address 4 1) OEM address 4 m x x x 1 Real OMA5: OEM address 5 1) OEM address 5 m x x x 1 Real *) Absolute end points: modal, incremental end points: non-modal, otherwise modal/non- modal depending on syntax of G function. **) As circle center points, IPO parameters act incrementally. They can be programmed in absolute mode with AC. The address modification is ignored when the parameters have other meanings (e.g. thread lead). 1 ) The keyword is not valid for NCU571. Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals 568 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 16.3 16.3 G function groups The G functions are divided into function groups. Only one G function of a group can be programmed in a block. A G function can be either modal (until it is canceled by another function of the same group) or only effective for the block in which it is programmed (non- modal) Key: 1) Internal number (e.g. for PLC interface) Configurability of the G function as a delete setting for the function group on power up, reset or end of part program with MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES: + Configurable 2) - Not configurable Effectiveness of the G function: m modal 3) n non-modal Default setting If no function from the group is programmed with modal G functions, the default setting, which can be changed in the machine data (MD20150 $MN_$MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES), applies: SAG Default setting Siemens AG 4) MM Default setting Machine Manufacturer (see machine manufacturer's specifications) 5) The G function is not valid for NCU571. Group 1: Modally valid motion commands STD 4) G function No. 1) Meaning MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G0 1. Rapid traverse + m G1 2. Linear interpolation (linear interpolation) + m x G2 3. Circular interpolation clockwise + m G3 4. Circular interpolation counterclockwise + m CIP 5. Circular interpolation through intermediate point + m ASPLINE 6. Akima spline + m BSPLINE 7. B-spline + m CSPLINE 8. Cubic spline + m POLY 9. Polynomial interpolation + m G33 10. Thread cutting with constant lead + m G331 11. Tapping + m G332 12. Retraction (tapping) + m Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 569 OEMIPO1 5) 13. Reserved + m OEMIPO2 5) 14. Reserved + m CT 15. Circle with tangential transition + m G34 16. Thread cutting with linear increasing lead + m G35 17. Thread cutting with linear decreasing lead + m INVCW 18. Involute interpolation clockwise + m INVCCW 19. Involute interpolation counter-clockwise + m If no function from the group is programmed with modal G functions, the default setting, which can be changed in the machine data (MD20150 $MN_$MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES), applies: Group 2: Non-modally valid motions, dwell time STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G4 1. Dwell time preset - n G63 2. Tapping without synchronization - n G74 3. Reference point approach with synchronization - n G75 4. Fixed-point approach - n REPOSL 5. Linear repositioning - n REPOSQ 6. Repositioning in a quadrant - n REPOSH 7. Repositioning in semicircle - n REPOSA 8. Linear repositioning with all axes - n REPOSQA 9. Linear repositioning with all axes, geometry axes in quadrant - n REPOSHA 10. Repositioning with all axes; geometry axes in semicircle - n G147 11. Approach contour with straight line - n G247 12. Approach contour with quadrant - n G347 13. Approach contour with semicircle - n G148 14. Leave contour with straight line - n G248 15. Leave contour with quadrant - n G348 16. Leave contour with semicircle - n G5 17. Oblique plunge-cut grinding - n G7 18. Compensatory motion during oblique plunge-cut grinding - n Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals 570 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Group 3: Programmable frame, working area limitation and pole programming STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM TRANS 1. TRANSLATION: Programmable offset - n ROT 2. ROTATION: Programmable rotation - n SCALE 3. SCALE: Programmable scaling - n MIRROR 4. MIRROR: Programmable mirroring - n ATRANS 5. Additive TRANSLATION: Additive programmable offset - n AROT 6. Additive ROTATION: Programmable rotation - n ASCALE 7. Additive SCALE: Programmable scaling - n AMIRROR 8. Additive MIRROR: Programmable mirroring - n 9. Unassigned G25 10. Minimum working area limitation/spindle speed limitation - n G26 11. Maximum working area limitation/spindle speed limitation - n G110 12. Pole programming relative to the last programmed setpoint position - n G111 13. Polar programming relative to origin of current workpiece coordinate system - n G112 14. Pole programming relative to the last valid pole - n G58 15. Programmable offset, absolute axial substitution - n G59 16. Programmable offset, additive axial substitution - n ROTS 17. Rotation with solid angle - n AROTS 18. Additive rotation with solid angle - n Group 4: FIFO STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM STARTFIFO 1. Start FIFO Execute and simultaneously fill preprocessing memory + m x STOPFIFO 2. STOP FIFO, stop machining; fill preprocessing memory until STARTFIFO is detected, FIFO is full or end of program + m FIFOCTRL 3. Activation of automatic preprocessing memory control + m Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 571 Group 6: Plane selection STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G17 1. Plane selection 1st - 2nd geometry axis + m x G18 2. Plane selection 3rd - 1st geometry axis + m G19 3. Plane selection 2nd - 3rd geometry axis + m Group 7: Tool radius compensation STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G40 1. No tool radius compensation + m x G41 2. Tool radius compensation left of contour - m G42 3. Tool radius compensation right of contour - m Group 8: Settable zero offset STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G500 1. Deactivation of adjustable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599) + m x G54 2. 1st settable zero offset + m G55 3. 2nd adjustable work offset + m G56 4. 3rd adjustable work offset + m G57 5. 4th adjustable work offset + m G505 6. 5th adjustable work offset + m ... ... ... + m G599 100. 99th adjustable work offset + m Each of the G functions in this group is used to activate an adjustable user frame $P_UIFR[ ]. G54 corresponds to frame $P_UIFR[1], G505 corresponds to frame $P_UIFR[5]. The number of adjustable user frames and, therefore, the number of G functions in this group, can be parameterized using machine data MD28080 $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES. Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals 572 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Group 9: Frame suppression STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G53 1. Suppression of current frames: Programmable frame including system frame for TOROT and TOFRAME and active adjustable frame (G54 to G57, G505 to G599). - n SUPA 2. As for G153 including suppression of system frames for actual-value setting, scratching, ext. work offset, PAROT including handwheel offsets (DRF), [external work offset], overlaid movement - n G153 3. As for G53 including suppression of all channel- specific and/or NCU-global basic frames - n Group 10: Exact stop - continuous-path mode STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G60 1. Exact stop + m x G64 2. Continuous-path mode + m G641 3. Continuous-path mode with smoothing as per distance criterion (= programmable rounding clearance) + m G642 4. Continuous-path mode with smoothing within the defined tolerances + m G643 5. Continuous-path mode with smoothing within the defined tolerances (block-internal) + m G644 6. Continuous-path mode with smoothing with maximum possible dynamic response + m G645 7. Continuous-path mode with smoothing and tangential block transitions within the defined tolerances + m Group 11: Exact stop, non-modal STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G9 1. Exact stop - n Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 573 Group 12: Block change criteria at exact stop (G60/G9) STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G601 1. Block change at exact stop fine + m x G602 2. Block change at exact stop coarse + m G603 3. Block change at IPO - end of block + m Group 13: Workpiece measuring inch/metric STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G70 1. Input system inches (length) + m G71 2. Input system metric mm (lengths) + m x G700 3. Input system inch, inch/min (lengths + velocity + system variable) + m G710 4. Input system metric mm, mm/min (lengths + velocity + system variable) + m Group 14: Workpiece measuring absolute/incremental STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G90 1. Absolute dimension + m x G91 2. Incremental dimension input + m Group 15: Feed type STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G93 1. Inverse-time feedrate 1/rpm + m G94 2. Linear feedrate in mm/min, inch/min + m x G95 3. Revolutional feedrate in mm/rev, inch/rev + m G96 4. Constant cutting rate and type of feedrate as for G95 ON + m G97 5. Constant cutting rate and type of feedrate as for G95 OFF + m G931 6. Feedrate specification by means of traversing time, deactivate constant path velocity + m Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals 574 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 G961 7. Constant cutting rate and type of feedrate as for G94 ON + m G971 8. Constant cutting rate and type of feedrate as for G94 OFF + m G942 9. Freeze linear feedrate and constant cutting rate or spindle speed + m G952 10. Freeze revolutional feedrate and constant cutting rate or spindle speed + m G962 11. Linear feedrate or revolutional feedrate and constant cutting rate + m G972 12. Freeze linear feedrate or revolutional feedrate and constant cutting rate + m G973 13 Revolutional feedrate without spindle speed limitation (G97 without LIMS for ISO mode) + m Group 16: Feedrate override on inside and outside curvature STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM CFC 1. Constant feedrate at contour effective for internal and external radius + m x CFTCP 2. Constant feedrate in tool center point (center point path) + m CFIN 3. Constant feedrate for internal radius only, acceleration for external radius + m Group 17: Approach and retraction response, tool offset STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM NORM 1. Normal position at starting and end points + m x KONT 2. Travel around contour at starting and end points + m KONTT 3. Approach/retraction with constant tangent + m KONTC 4. Approach/retraction with constant curvature + m Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 575 Group 18: Corner behavior, tool offset STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G450 1. Transition circle (tool travels around workpiece corners on a circular path) + m x G451 2. Intersection of equidistant paths (tool backs off from the workpiece corner) + m Group 19: Curve transition at beginning of spline STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM BNAT 1. Natural transition to first spline block + m x BTAN 2. Tangential transition to first spline block + m BAUTO 3. Definition of the first spline section by means of the next 3 points + m Group 20: Curve transition at end of spline STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM ENAT 1. Natural transition to next traversing block + m x ETAN 2. Tangential transition to next traversing block + m EAUTO 3. Definition of the last spline section by means of the last 3 points + m Group 21: Acceleration profile STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM BRISK 1. Fast non-smoothed path acceleration + m x SOFT 2. Soft smoothed path acceleration + m DRIVE 3. Velocity-dependent path acceleration + m Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals 576 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Group 22: Tool offset type STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM CUT2D 1. 2½D tool offset determined by G17-G19 + m x CUT2DF 2. 2½D tool offset determined by frame The tool offset is effective in relation to the current frame (inclined plane). + m CUT3DC 5) 3. 3D tool offset circumferential milling + m CUT3DF 5) 4. 3D tool offset face milling with non-constant tool orientation + m CUT3DFS 5) 5. 3D tool offset face milling with constant tool orientation independent of active frame + m CUT3DFF 5) 6. 3D tool offset face milling with fixed tool orientation dependent on active frame + m CUT3DCC 5) 7. 3D tool offset circumferential milling with limitation surfaces + m CUT3DCCD 5) 8. 3D tool offset circumferential milling with limitation surfaces and differential tool + m Group 23: Collision monitoring at inside contours STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM CDOF 1. Collision detection OFF + m x CDON 2. Collision detection ON + m CDOF2 3. Collision detection OFF (currently only for CUT3DC) + m Group 24: Feedforward control STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM FFWOF 1. Feedforward control OFF + m x FFWON 2. Feedforward control ON + m Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 577 Group 25: Tool orientation reference STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM ORIWKS 5) 1. Tool orientation in workpiece coordinate system (WCS) + m x ORIMKS 5) 2. Tool orientation in machine coordinate system (MCS) + m Group 26: Repositioning point for REPOS STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM RMB 1. Reapproach to start of block position + m RMI 2. Reapproach to interruption point + m x RME 3. Repositioning to end-of-block position + m RMN 4. Reapproach to nearest path point + m Group 27: Tool offset for change in orientation at outside corners STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM ORIC 5) 1. Orientation changes at outside corners are superimposed on the circle block to be inserted + m x ORID 5) 2. Orientation changes are performed before the circle block + m Group 28: Working area limitation STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM WALIMON 1. Working area limitation ON + m x WALIMOF 2. Working area limitation OFF + m Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals 578 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Group 29: Radius/diameter programming STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM DIAMOF 1. Modal channel-specific diameter programming OFF Deactivation activates channel-specific radius programming. + m x DIAMON 2. Modal independent channel-specific diameter programming ON The effect is independent of the programmed dimensions mode (G90/G91). + m DIAM90 3. Modal dependent channel-specific diameter programming ON The effect is dependent on the programmed dimensions mode (G90/G91). + m DIAMCYCOF 4. Modal channel-specific diameter programming during cycle processing OFF + m Group 30: NC block compression STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM COMPOF 5) 1. NC block compression OFF + m x COMPON 5) 2. Compressor function COMPON ON + m COMPCURV 5) 3. Compressor function COMPCURV ON + m COMPCAD 5) 4. Compressor function COMPCAD ON + m Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 579 Group 31: OEM G function group STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G810 5) 1. OEM G function - m G811 5) 2. OEM G function - m G812 5) 3. OEM G function - m G813 5) 4. OEM G function - m G814 5) 5. OEM G function - m G815 5) 6. OEM G function - m G816 5) 7. OEM G function - m G817 5) 8. OEM G function - m G818 5) 9. OEM G function - m G819 5) 10. OEM G function - m Two G function groups are reserved for the OEM user. This enables the OEM to program functions that can be customized. Group 32: OEM G function group STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G820 5) 1. OEM - G function - m G821 5) 2. OEM G function - m G822 5) 3. OEM G function - m G823 5) 4. OEM G function - m G824 5) 5. OEM G function - m G825 5) 6. OEM G function - m G826 5) 7. OEM G function - m G827 5) 8. OEM G function - m G828 5) 9. OEM G function - m G829 5) 10. OEM G function - m Two G function groups are reserved for the OEM user. This enables the OEM to program functions that can be customized. Group 33: Settable fine tool offset STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM FTOCOF 5) 1. Online fine tool offset OFF + m x FTOCON 5) 2. Online fine tool offset ON - m Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals 580 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Group 34: Tool orientation smoothing STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM OSOF 5) 1. Tool orientation smoothing OFF + m x OSC 5) 2. Continuous tool orientation smoothing + m OSS 5) 3. Tool orientation smoothing at end of block + m OSSE 5) 4. Tool orientation smoothing at start and end of block + m OSD 5) 5 Block-internal smoothing with specification of path length + m OST 5) 6 Block-internal smoothing with specification of angular tolerance + m Group 35: Punching and nibbling STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM SPOF 5) 1. Stroke OFF, nibbling and punching OFF + m x SON 5) 2. Nibbling ON + m PON 5) 3. Punching ON + m SONS 5) 4. Nibbling ON in interpolation cycle - m PONS 5) 5. Punching ON in interpolation cycle - m Group 36: Punching with delay STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM PDELAYON 5) 1. Punching with delay ON + m x PDELAYOF 5) 2. Punching with delay OFF + m Group 37: Feed profile STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM FNORM 5) 1. Feed normal (as per DIN 66025) + m x FLIN 5) 2. Feed linear variable + m FCUB 5) 3. Feedrate variable according to cubic spline + m Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 581 Group 38: Assignment of fast inputs/outputs for punching/nibbling STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM SPIF1 5) 1. Fast NCK inputs/outputs for punching/nibbling byte 1 + m x SPIF2 5) 2. Fast NCK inputs/outputs for punching/nibbling byte 2 + m Group 39: Programmable contour accuracy STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM CPRECOF 1. Programmable contour precision OFF + m x CPRECON 2. Programmable contour precision ON + m Group 40: Tool radius compensation constant STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM CUTCONOF 1. Constant tool radius compensation OFF + m x CUTCONON 2. Constant tool radius compensation ON + m Group 41: Interruptible thread cutting STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM LFOF 1. Interruptible thread cutting OFF + m x LFON 2. Interruptible thread cutting ON + m Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals 582 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Group 42: Toolholder STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM TCOABS 1. Determine tool length components from the current tool orientation + m x TCOFR 2. Determine tool length components from the orientation of the active frame + m TCOFRZ 3. Determine tool orientation of an active frame on selection of tool, tool points in Z direction + m TCOFRY 4. Determine tool orientation of an active frame on selection of tool, tool points in Y direction + m TCOFRX 5. Determine tool orientation of an active frame on selection of tool, tool points in X direction m Group 43: SAR approach direction STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G140 1. SAR approach direction defined by G41/G42 + m x G141 2. SAR approach direction to left of contour + m G142 3. SAR approach direction to right of contour + m G143 4. SAR approach direction tangent-dependent + m Group 44: SAR path segmentation STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G340 1. Spatial approach block; in other words, infeed depth and approach in plane in one block + m x G341 2. Start with infeed on perpendicular axis (Z), then approach in plane + m Group 45: Path reference for FGROUP axes STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM SPATH 1. Path reference for FGROUP axes is arc length + m x UPATH 2. Path reference for FGROUP axes is curve parameter + m Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 583 Group 46: Plane selection for fast retraction STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM LFTXT 1. The plane is determined from the path tangent and the current tool orientation + m x LFWP 2. The plane is determined by the current working plane (G17/G18/G19) + m LFPOS 3. Axial retraction to a position + m Group 47: Mode switchover for external NC code STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G290 1. Activate SINUMERIK language mode + m x G291 2. Activate ISO language mode + m Group 48: Approach and retraction response with tool radius compensation STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM G460 1. Collision detection for approach and retraction block ON + m x G461 2. Extend border block with arc if no intersection in TRC block + m G462 3. Extend border block with straight line if no intersection in TRC block + m Group 49: Point-to-point motion STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM CP 1. Path motion + m x PTP 2. Point-to-point motion (synchronized axis motion) + m PTPG0 3. Point-to-point motion only with G0, otherwise path motion CP + m Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals 584 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Group 50: Orientation programming STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM ORIEULER 1. Orientation angle via Euler angle + m x ORIRPY 2. Orientation angle via RPY angle (rotation sequence XYZ) + m ORIVIRT1 3. Orientation angle via virtual orientation axes (definition 1) + m ORIVIRT2 4. Orientation angle via virtual orientation axes (definition 2) + m ORIAXPOS 5. Orientation angle via virtual orientation axes with rotary axis positions + m ORIRPY2 6. Orientation angle via RPY angle (rotation sequence ZYX) + m Group 51: Interpolation type for orientation programming STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM ORIVECT 1. Large-radius circular interpolation (identical to ORIPLANE) + m x ORIAXES 2. Linear interpolation of machine axes or orientation axes + m ORIPATH 3. Tool orientation trajectory referred to path + m ORIPLANE 4. Interpolation in plane (identical to ORIVECT) + m ORICONCW 5. Interpolation on a peripheral surface of the cone in clockwise direction + m ORICONCCW 6. Interpolation on the peripheral surface of a taper in the counter-clockwise direction + m ORICONIO 7. Interpolation on a conical peripheral surface with intermediate orientation setting + m ORICONTO 8. Interpolation on a peripheral surface of the cone with tangential transition + m ORICURVE 9. Interpolation with additional space curve for orientation + m ORIPATHS 10. Tool orientation in relation to path, blips in the orientation characteristic are smoothed + m Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 585 Group 52: Frame rotation in relation to workpiece STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM PAROTOF 1. Frame rotation in relation to workpiece OFF + m x PAROT 2. Frame rotation in relation to workpiece ON The workpiece coordinate system is aligned on the workpiece. + m Group 53: Frame rotation in relation to tool STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM TOROTOF 1. Frame rotation in relation to tool OFF + m x TOROT 2. Align the Z axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame + m TOROTZ 3. As TOROT + m TOROTY 4. Align the Y axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame + m TOROTX 5. Align the X axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame + m TOFRAME 6. Align the Z axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame + m TOFRAMEZ 7. As TOFRAME + m TOFRAMEY 8. Align the Y axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame + m TOFRAMEX 9. Align the X axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame + m Group 54: Vector rotation for polynomial programming STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM ORIROTA 1. Vector rotation absolute + m x ORIROTR 2. Vector rotation relative + m ORIROTT 3. Vector rotation tangential + m ORIROTC 4. Tangential rotational vector in relation to path tangent + m Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals 586 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Group 55: Rapid traverse with/without linear interpolation STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM RTLION 1. Rapid traverse motion with linear interpolation ON + m x RTLIOF 2. Rapid traverse motion with linear interpolation OFF Rapid traverse motion is achieved with single-axis interpolation. + m Group 56: Inclusion of tool wear STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM TOWSTD 1. Initial setting value for offsets in tool length + m x TOWMCS 2. Wear values in the machine coordinate system + m TOWWCS 3. Wear values in the workpiece coordinate system + m TOWBCS 4. Wear values in the basic coordinate system (BCS) + m TOWTCS 5. Wear values in the tool coordinate system (toolholder ref. point T at the tool holder) + m TOWKCS 6. Wear values in the coordinate system of the tool head for kinetic transformation (differs from machine coordinate system through tool rotation) + m Group 57: Corner deceleration STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM FENDNORM 1. Corner deceleration OFF + m x G62 2. Corner deceleration at inside corners when tool radius compensation is active (G41/G42) + m G621 3. Corner deceleration at all corners + m Tables 16.3 G function groups Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 587 Group 59: Dynamic response mode for path interpolation STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM DYNNORM 1. Standard dynamic, as previously + m x DYNPOS 2. Positioning mode, tapping + m DYNROUGH 3. Roughing + m DYNSEMIFIN 4. Finishing + m DYNFINISH 5. Smooth-finishing + m Group 60: Working area limitation STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM WALCS0 1. Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation OFF + m x WALCS1 2. WCS working area limitation group 1 active + m WALCS2 3. WCS working area limitation group 2 active + m WALCS3 4 WCS working area limitation group 3 active + m WALCS4 5 WCS working area limitation group 4 active + m WALCS5 6 WCS working area limitation group 5 active + m WALCS6 7 WCS working area limitation group 6 active + m WALCS7 8 WCS working area limitation group 7 active + m WALCS8 9 WCS working area limitation group 8 active + m WALCS9 10 WCS working area limitation group 9 active + m WALCS10 11 WCS working area limitation group 10 active + m Group 61: Tool orientation smoothing STD 4) G function No. 1) Significance MD20150 2) W 3) SAG MM ORISOF 1. Tool orientation smoothing OFF + m x ORISON 2. Tool orientation smoothing ON + m Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals 588 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 16.4 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls 1. Coordinate system Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd-15th parameter 4th-16th parameter Explanation PRESETON AXIS*: Axis identifier Machine axis REAL: Preset offset G700/G7100 context 3rd-15th parameter as 1 ... 4th-16th parameter as 2 ... Sets the actual value for programmed axes. One axis identifier is programmed at a time, with its respective value in the next parameter. PRESETON can be used to program preset offsets for up to 8 axes. DRFOF Deletes the DRF offset for all axes assigned to the channel. *) As a general rule, geometry or special axis identifiers can also be used instead of the machine axis identifier, as long as the reference is unambiguous. 2. Axis groupings Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st-8th parameter Explanation FGROUP Channel axis identifiers Variable F value reference: defines the axes to which the path feed refers. Maximum axis number: 8 The default setting for the F value reference is activated with FGROUP ( ) without parameters. 1st-8th parameter 2nd-9th parameter Explanation SPLINEPATH INT: Spline group (must be 1) AXIS: Geometry or special axis identifier Definition of the spline group Maximum number of axes: 8 BRISKA AXIS Switch on brisk axis acceleration for the programmed axes SOFTA AXIS Switch on jerk limited axis acceleration for programmed axes JERKA AXIS The acceleration behavior set in machine data $MA_AX_JERK_ENABLE is active for the programmed axes. Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 589 3. Coupled motion Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter 2nd param. 3rd param. 4th param. 5th param. 6th param. Explanation TANG AXIS: Axis name following axis AXIS: Leading axis 1 AXIS: Leading axis 2 REAL: Coupling factor CHAR: Option: "B": follow-up in basic coord. system "W": follow-up in work- piece coord. system CHAR Optimizat ion: "S" default "P" autom. with rounding travel, angle tolerance Preparatory statement for the definition of a tangential follow-up: The tangent for the follow-up is determined by the two master axes specified. The coupling factor specifies the relationship between a change in the angle of tangent and the following axis. It is usually 1. Optimization: See PGA TANGON AXIS: Axis name following axis REAL: Offset Angle REAL: Round- ing travel REAL: Angle toler- ance Tangential follow-up mode ON: par. 3, 4 with TANG Par. 6 = "P" TANGOF AXIS: Axis name following axis Tangential follow-up mode OFF TLIFT AXIS: Following axis REAL: Lift-off path REAL: Factor Tangential lift: tangential follow-up mode, stop at contour end rotary axis lift-off possible TRAILON AXIS: Following axis AXIS: Leading axis REAL: Coupling factor Trailing ON: Asynchronous coupled motion ON TRAILOF AXIS: Following axis AXIS: Leading axis Trailing OFF: Asynchronous coupled motion OFF Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals 590 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 6. Revolutional feedrate Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter 2nd parameter Explanation FPRAON AXIS: Axis, for which revolutional feedrate is activated AXIS: Axis/spindle, from which revolutional feedrate is derived. If no axis has been programmed, the revolutional feedrate is derived from the master spindle. Feedrate per revolution axial ON: Axial revolutional feedrate ON. FPRAOF AXIS: Axis for which revolutional feedrate is deactivated Feedrate per revolution axial OFF: Axial revolutional feedrate OFF. The revolutional feedrate can be deactivated for several axes at once. You can program as many axes as are permitted in a block. FPR AXIS: Axis/spindle, from which revolutional feedrate is derived. If no axis has been programmed, the revolutional feedrate is derived from the master spindle. Feedrate per revolution: Selection of a rotary axis or spindle from which the revolutional feedrate of the path is derived if G95 is programmed. If no axis/spindle has been programmed, the revolutional feedrate is derived from the master spindle. The setting made with FPR is modal. It is also possible to program a spindle instead of an axis: FPR(S1) or FPR(SPI(1)) Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 591 7. Transformations Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter 2nd parameter Explanation TRACYL REAL: Working diameter INT: Number of the transformation Cylinder: Peripheral surface transformation Several transformations can be set per channel. The transformation number specifies which transformation is to be activated. If the second parameter is omitted, the transformation group defined in the MD is activated. TRANSMIT INT: Number of the transformation Transmit: Polar transformation Several transformations can be set per channel. The transformation number specifies which transformation is to be activated. If the parameter is omitted, the transformation group defined in the MD is activated. TRAANG REAL: Angle INT: Number of the transformation Transformation inclined axis: Several transformations can be set per channel. The transformation number specifies which transformation is to be activated. If the second parameter is omitted, the transformation group defined in the MD is activated. If no angle programmed: TRAANG ( ,2) or TRAANG, the last angle applies modally. TRAORI INT: Number of the transformation Transformation oriented: 4, 5-axis transformation Several transformations can be set per channel. The transformation number specifies which transformation is to be activated. TRACON INT: Number of the transformation REAL: Further parameters, MD-dependent Transformation concentrated: Cascaded transformation; the meaning of the parameters depends on the type of cascading. TRAFOOF Deactivate transformation For each transformation type, there is one command for one transformation per channel. If there are several transformations of the same transformation type per channel, the transformation can be selected with the corresponding command and parameters. It is possible to deselect the transformation by a transformation change or an explicit deselection. Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals 592 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 8. Spindles Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter 2nd parameter and others Explanation SPCON INT: Spindle number INT: Spindle number Spindle position control ON: Switch to position-controlled spindle operation. SPCOF INT: Spindle number INT: Spindle number Spindle position control OFF: Switch to speed-controlled spindle operation. SETMS INT: Spindle number Set master spindle: Declaration of spindle as master spindle for current channel. With SETMS( ), the machine-data default applies automatically without any need for parameterization. 9. Grinding Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter Explanation GWPSON INT: Spindle number Grinding wheel peripheral speed ON: Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed ON. If the spindle number is not programmed, then grinding wheel peripheral speed is selected for the spindle of the active tool. GWPSOF INT: Spindle number Grinding wheel peripheral speed OFF. Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed OFF. If the spindle number is not programmed, grinding wheel peripheral speed is deselected for the spindle of the active tool. TMON INT: Spindle number Tool monitoring ON: If no T number is programmed, monitoring is activated for the active tool. TMOF INT: T number Tool monitoring OFF: If no T number is programmed, monitoring is deactivated for the active tool. Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 593 10. Stock removal Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter 4th parameter Explanation CONTPRON REAL [ , 11]: Contour table CHAR: Stock removal method "L": Longitudinal turning: External mach. "P": Face turning: External mach. "N": Face turning: Internal machining "G": Longitudinal turning: Internal machining INT: Number of relief cuts INT: Status of calculation: 0: unchanged 1: Calculation forwards and backwards Contour preparation on: Activate reference-point editing. The contour programs or NC blocks which are called in the following steps are divided into individual movements and stored in the contour table. The number of relief cuts is returned. CONTDCON REAL [ , 6]: Contour table INT: 0: In programmed direction Contour decoding The blocks for a contour are stored in a named table with one table line per block and coded to save memory. EXECUTE INT: Error status EXECUTE: Activate program execution. This switches back to normal program execution from reference-point-editing mode or after setting up a protection zone. 11. Execute table Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter Explanation EXECTAB REAL [ 11]: Element from motion table Execute table: Execute an element from a motion table. Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals 594 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 12. Protection zones Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter 4th parameter 5th parameter Explanation CPROTDEF INT: Number of the protection zone BOOL: TRUE: Tool-oriented protection zone INT: 0: 4th and 5th parameters not evaluated 1: 4th parameter evaluated 2: 5th parameter evaluated 3: 4th and 5th parameters evaluated REAL: Limit in plus direction REAL: Limit in minus direction Channel- specific protection zone definition: Definition of a channel- specific protection zone NPROTDEF INT: Number of the protection zone BOOL: TRUE: Tool-oriented protection zone INT: 0: 4th and 5th parameters not evaluated 1: 4th parameter evaluated 2: 5th parameter evaluated 3: 4th and 5th parameters evaluated REAL: Limit in plus direction REAL: Limit in minus direction NCK- specific protection zone definition: Definition of a machine- specific protection zone Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 595 CPROT INT: Number of the protection zone INT: Option 0: Protection zone OFF 1: Preactivate protection zone 2: Protection zone ON 3: Preactivate protection zone with conditional stop, only with protection zones active REAL: Offset of protection zone in 1st geometry axis REAL: Offset of protection zone in 2nd geometry axis REAL: Offset of protection zone in 3rd geometry axis Channel- specific protection zone ON/OFF NPROT INT: Number of the protection zone INT: Option 0: Protection zone OFF 1: Preactivate protection zone 2: Protection zone ON 3: Preactivate protection zone with conditional stop, only with protection zones active REAL: Offset of protection zone in 1st geometry axis REAL: Offset of protection zone in 2nd geometry axis REAL: Offset of protection zone in 3rd geometry axis Machine- specific protection zone ON/OFF EXECUTE VAR INT: Error status EXECUTE: Activate program execution. This switches back to normal program execution from reference point editing mode or after setting up a protection zone. 13. Preprocessing/single block STOPRE Stop processing: Preprocessing stop until all prepared blocks are executed in main run Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals 596 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 14. Interrupts Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter Explanation ENABLE INT: Number of the interrupt input Activate interrupt: Activates the interrupt routine assigned to the hardware input with the specified number. An interrupt is enabled after the SETINT statement. DISABLE INT: Number of the interrupt input Deactivate interrupt: Deactivates the interrupt routine assigned to the hardware input with the specified number. Fast retraction is not executed. The assignment between the hardware input and the interrupt routine made with SETINT remains valid and can be reactivated with ENABLE. CLRINT INT: Number of the interrupt input Select interrupt: Cancel the assignment of interrupt routines and attributes to an interrupt input. The interrupt routine is deactivated and no reaction occurs when the interrupt is generated. 15. Motion synchronization Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter Explanation CANCEL INT: Number of synchronized action Aborts the modal motion-synchronous action with the specified ID 16. Function definition Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter 4th-7th parameter Explanation FCTDEF INT: Function number REAL: Lower limit value REAL: Upper limit value REAL: Coefficients a0 – a3 Define polynomial. This is evaluated in SYFCT or PUTFTOCF. Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 597 17. Communication Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter 2nd parameter Explanation MMC STRING: Command CHAR: Acknowledgement mode** "N": Without acknowledgment "S": Synchronous acknowledgment "A": Asynchronous acknowledgment MMC command: Command ON MMC command interpreter for the configuration of windows via NC program see /IAM/ Commissioning CNC; Expanding base software and HMI Embedded/Advanced in BE1 user interface ** Acknowledgement mode: Commands are acknowledged on request from the executing component (channel, NC, etc.). Without acknowledgement: Program execution is continued when the command has been transmitted. The sender is not informed if the command cannot be executed successfully. 18. Program coordination Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter 4th parameter 5th param eter 6th-8th param eter Explanation INIT # INT: Channel numbers 1 - 10 or STRING: Channel name $MC_CHAN _NAME STRING: path CHAR: Acknowledg ement mode** Selection of a module for execution in a channel. 1 : 1st channel; 2 : 2nd channel. As an alternative to the channel number, the channel name defined in $MC_CHAN_NAME can also be used. START # INT: Channel numbers 1 - 10 or STRING: Channel name $MC_CHAN _NAME Starts selected programs simultaneously on multiple channels from running program. The command has no effect on the existing channel. 1 : 1st channel; 2 : 2nd channel or channel name defined in $MC_CHAN_NAME. Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals 598 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 WAITE # INT: or channel numbers 1 - 10 STRING: Channel name $MC_CHAN _NAME Wait for end of program: Waits until end of program in another channel (number or name). WAITM # INT: Marker numbers 0-9 INT: Channel numbers 1 - 10 or STRING: Channel name $MC_CHAN _NAME Wait: Wait for a marker to be reached in other channels. The program waits until the WAITM with the relevant marker has been reached in the other channel. The number of the own channel can also be specified. WAITMC # INT: Marker numbers 0-9 INT: Channel numbers 1 - 10 or STRING: Channel name $MC_CHAN _NAME Wait: Waits conditionally for a marker to be reached in other channels. The program waits until the WAITMC with the relevant marker has been reached in the other channel. Exact stop only if the other channels have not yet reached the marker. WAITP AXIS: Axis identifier AXIS: Axis identifier AXIS: Axis identifier AXIS: Axis identifier AXIS: Axis identi- fier AXIS: Axis identi- fier Wait for positioning axis: Wait for positioning axes to reach their programmed end point. WAITS INT: Spindle number INT: Spindle number INT: Spindle number INT: Spindle number INT: Spin- dle num- ber Wait for positioning spindle: Wait until programmed spindles previously programmed with SPOSA reach their programmed end point. RET End of subroutine with no function output to the PLC. GET # AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS Assign machine axis GETD# AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS Assign machine axis directly RELEASE # AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS Release machine axis Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 599 PUTFTOC # REAL: Offset value INT: Parameter number INT: Channel number or STRING: Channel name $MC_CHAN _NAME INT: Spindle number Put fine tool correction: Fine tool compensation PUTFTOCF # INT: No. of function The number used here must be specified in FCTDEF. VAR REAL: Reference value *) INT: Parameter number INT: Channel numbers 1 - 10 or STRING: Channel name $MC_CHAN _NAME INT: Spin- dle num- ber Put fine tool correction function dependent: Change online tool compensation according to a function defined with FCTDEF (max. 3rd degree polynomial). The SPI function can also be used to program a spindle instead of an axis: GET(SPI(1)) #) The keyword is not valid for NCU571. ** Acknowledgement mode: Commands are acknowledged on request from the executing component (channel, NC, etc.). Without acknowledgement: Program execution is continued when the command has been transmitted. The executing component is not informed if the command cannot be executed successfully. Acknowledgment mode "N" or "n". Synchronous acknowledgement: The program execution is paused until the receiving component acknowledges the command. If the acknowledgement is positive, the next command is executed. If the acknowledgement is negative an error is output. Acknowledgement "S", "s" or to be omitted. For some commands, the acknowledgement response is predefined, for others it is programmable. The acknowledgement response for program-coordination commands is always synchronous. If the acknowledgement mode is not specified, synchronous acknowledgement is the default response. Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals 600 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 19. Data access Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter Explanation CHANDATA INT: Channel number Set channel number for channel data access (only permitted in initialization block); the subsequent accesses refer to the channel set with CHANDATA. 20. Messages Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter 2nd parameter Explanation MSG STRING: STRING: signal INT: Continuous- path-mode call parameter Message modal: The message is active until the next message is queued. If the 2nd parameter = 1 is programmed, e.g. MSG(Text, 1), the message will even be output as an executable block in continuous-path mode. 22. Alarms Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter 2nd parameter Explanation SETAL INT: Alarm number (cycle alarms) STRING: Character string Set alarm: Sets alarm. A character string with up to four parameters can be specified in addition to the alarm number. The following predefined parameters are available: %1 = channel number %2 = block number, label %3 = text index for cycle alarms %4 = additional alarm parameters 23. Compensation Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter- 4th parameter Explanation QECLRNON AXIS: Axis number Quadrant error compensation learning ON: Quadrant error compensation learning ON QECLRNOF Quadrant error compensation learning OFF: Quadrant error compensation learning OFF Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 601 24. Tool management Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter Explanation DELT STRING[32]: Tool designation INT: Duplo number Delete tool. Duplo number can be omitted. GETSELT VAR INT: T number (return value) INT: Spindle number Get selected T number. If no spindle number is specified, the command for the master spindle applies. SETPIECE INT: Count INT: Spindle number Takes account of set piece number for all tools assigned to the spindle. If no spindle number is specified, the command for the master spindle applies. SETDNO INT: Tool number T INT: Tool edge no. INT: D no. Set D no. of tool (T) and its tool edge to new. DZERO Set D numbers of all tools of the TO unit assigned to the channel to invalid DELDL INT: Tool number T INT: D no. Delete all additive offsets of the tool edge (or of a tool if D is not specified). SETMTH INT: Tool-holder no. Set toolholder no. POSM INT: Location no. for positioning INT: No. of the magazine to be moved INT: Location number of the internal magazine INT: Magazine number of the internal magazine Position magazine SETTIA VAR INT: Status = result of the operation (return value) INT: Magazine number INT: Wear group no. Deactivate tool from wear group SETTA VAR INT: Status = result of the operation (return value) INT: Magazine number INT: Wear group no. Activate tool from wear group RESETMON VAR INT: Status = result of the operation (return value) INT: Internal T no. INT: D no. of tool Set actual value of tool to setpoint Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals 602 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 25. Synchronous spindle Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st param. 2nd param. 3rd param. 4th param. 5th parameter Block change behavior 6th parameter Explanation COUPDEF AXIS: Follow- ing axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) REAL: Nume- rator trans- forma- tion ratio (FA) or (FS) REAL: Denomi- nator transfor- mation ratio (LA) or (LS) STRING[8]: Block change behavior: "NOC": No block change control, block change is enabled immediately, "FINE": Block change on "synchronism fine", "COARSE": Block change on synchronism coarse and "IPOSTOP": block change in setpoint-dependent termination of overlaid movement. If the block change behavior is not specified, the set behavior is applicable and there is no change. STRING[2]: "DV": Setpoint coupling "AV": Actual- value coupling Couple definition: Definition of synchronized spindle grouping. COUPDEL AXIS: Follow- ing axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) Couple delete: Delete synchronized spindle grouping. COUPOF AXIS: Follow- ing axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) The block change is enabled immediately. Fastest possible deactivation of synchronous operation. COUPOF AXIS: Follow- ing axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) REAL: POSFS Block change is not enabled until this position has been crossed. Deselection of synchronous operation after deactivation position POSFS has been crossed. Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 603 COUPOF AXIS: Follow- ing axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) REAL: POSFS REAL: POSLS Block change is not enabled until both programmed positions have been crossed. Range of POSFS, POSLS: 0 ... 359.999 degrees. Deselection of synchronous operation after the two deactivation positions. POSFS and POSLS have been crossed. COUPOFS AXIS: Follow- ing axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) Block change performed as quickly as possible with immediate block change. Deactivation of couple with following- spindle stop. COUPOFS AXIS: Follow- ing axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) REAL: POSFS After the programmed deactivation position that refers to the machine coordinate system has been crossed, the block change is not enabled until the deactivation positions POSFS have been crossed. Value range 0 ... 359.999 degrees. Only deactivated after programmed following- axis deactivation position has been crossed. COUPON AXIS: Follow- ing axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) The block change is enabled immediately. Fastest possible activation of synchronous operation with any angular reference between the leading and following spindles. Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals 604 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 COUPON AXIS: Follow- ing axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) REAL: POSFS The block change is enabled according to the defined setting. Range of POSFS: 0 ... 359.999 degrees. Activation with a defined angular offset POSFS between the following and leading spindles. This offset is referred to the zero degrees position of the leading spindle in a positive direction of rotation. COUPONC AXIS: Follow- ing axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) An offset position cannot be pro- gram- med. Acceptance of activation with previously programmed M3 S.. or M4 S... Immediate acceptance of rotational speed difference. COUPRES AXIS: Follow- ing axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) Couple reset: Reset synchronous spindle group. The programmed values become invalid. The machine data values are valid. For synchronous spindles, the axis parameters are programmed with SPI(1) or S1. Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 605 26. Structure statements in the STEP editor (editor-based program support) Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter Explanation SEFORM STRING[128]: section name INT: level STRING[128]: icon Current section name for STEP editor Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter 4th parameter Explanation COUPON AXIS: Following axis AXIS: Leading axis REAL: Activation position of following axis Couple on: Activate ELG group/synchronous spindle pair. If no activation positions are specified, the couple is activated as quickly as possible (ramp). If an activation position is specified for the following axis and spindle, this refers absolutely or incrementally to the master axis or spindle. Parameters 4 and 5 only have to be programmed if the 3rd parameter is specified. COUPOF AXIS: Following axis AXIS: Leading axis REAL: Deactivation position of following axis (absolute) REAL: Deactivation position of master axis (absolute) Couple OFF: Deactivate ELG group/synchronous spindle pair. The couple parameters are retained. If positions are specified, the couple is only canceled when all the specified positions have been overtraveled. The following spindle continues to revolve at the last speed programmed before deactivation of the couple. Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls Fundamentals 606 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 WAITC AXIS: Axis/ spindle STRING[8]: Block change criterion AXIS: Axis/ spindle STRING[8]: Block change criterion Wait for couple condition: Wait until couple block change criterion for the axes/spindles is fulfilled. Up to two axes/spindles can be programmed. Block change criterion: "NOC": No block change control, block change is enabled immediately, "FINE": Block change on "synchronism fine", "COARSE": Block change on synchronism coarse and "IPOSTOP": Block change in setpoint-dependent termination of overlaid movement. If the block change behavior is not specified, the set behavior is applicable and there is no change. AXCTSWE AXIS: Axis/spindle Advance container axis. Tables 16.5 Predefined subroutine calls in motion-synchronous actions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 607 16.5 16.5 Predefined subroutine calls in motion-synchronous actions 27. Synchronous procedures Keyword/ function identifier 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter to 5th parameter Explanation STOPREOF Stop preparation OFF: A synchronized action with a STOPREOF command causes a preprocessing stop after the next output block (= block for the main run). The preprocessing stop is canceled with the end of the output block or when the STOPREOF condition is fulfilled. All synchronized action statements with the STOPREOF command are therefore interpreted as having been executed. RDISABLE Read-in disable Read-in disable DELDTG AXIS: Axis for axial delete distance-to-go (optional). If the axis is omitted, delete distance- to-go is triggered for the path distance Delete distance-to-go: A synchronized action with the DELDTG command causes a preprocessing stop after the next output block (= block for the main run). The preprocessing stop is canceled with the end of the output block or when the first DELDTG condition is fulfilled. The axial distance to the destination point on an axial delete distance-to-go is stored in $AA_DELT[axis]; the distance-to-go is stored in $AC_DELT. SYNFCT INT: Number of polynomial function defined with FCTDEF. VAR REAL: Result variable*) VAR REAL: Input variable **) If the condition in the motion synchronous action is fulfilled, the polynomial determined by the first expression is evaluated at the input variable. The upper and lower range of the value is limited and the input variable is assigned. FTOC INT: Number of polynomial function defined with FCTDEF VAR REAL: Input variable **) INT: Length 1, 2, 3 INT: Channel number INT: Spindle number Modify tool fine compensation according to a function defined with FCTDEF (polynomial no higher than 3rd degree). The number used here must be specified in FCTDEF. *) Only special system variables are permissible as result variables. These are described in the Programming Manual Advanced in the section on "Write main run variable". **) Only special system variables are permissible as input variables. These variables are described in the Programming Manual Advanced in the list of system variables. Tables 16.6 Predefined functions Fundamentals 608 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 16.6 16.6 Predefined functions Predefined functions Predefined functions are invoked by means of a function call. Function calls return a value. They can be included as an operand in an expression. 1. Coordinate system Keyword/ function identifier Result 1st parameter 2nd parameter Explanation CTRANS FRAME AXIS REAL: Offset 3rd-15th parameter as 1 ... 4th-16th parameter as 2 ... Translation: Zero offset for multiple axes. One axis identifier is programmed at a time, with its respective value in the next parameter. CTRANS can be used to program offset for up to 8 axes. CROT FRAME AXIS REAL: Rotation 3rd/5th parameter as 1 ... 4th/6th parameter as 2 ... Rotation: Rotation of the current coordinate system. Maximum number of parameters: 6 (one axis identifier and one value per geometry axis) Tables 16.6 Predefined functions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 609 CSCALE FRAME AXIS REAL: Scale factor 3rd-15th parameter as 1 ... 4th-16th parameter as 2 ... Scale: Scale factor for multiple axes. Maximum number of parameters is 2* maximum number of axes (axis identifier and value). One axis identifier is programmed at a time, with its respective value in the next parameter. CSCALE can be used to program scale factors for up to 8 axes. CMIRROR FRAME AXIS 2nd - 8th parameter as 1 ... Mirror: Mirror on a coordinate axis MEAFRAME FRAME 2-dim. REAL array 2-dim. REAL array 3rd parameter REAL variables Frame calculation from 3 measuring points in space Frame functions CTRANS, CSCALE, CROT and CMIRROR are used to generate frame expressions. Tables 16.6 Predefined functions Fundamentals 610 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 2. Geometry functions Keyword/ function identifier Result 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter Explanation CALCDAT BOOL: Error status VAR REAL [,2]: Table with input points (abscissa and ordinate for points 1, 2, 3, etc.) INT: Number of input points for calculation (3 or 4) VAR REAL [3]: Result: Abscissa, ordinate and radius of calculated circle center point CALCDAT: Calculate circle data Calculates radius and center point of a circle from 3 or 4 points (according to parameter 1), which must lie on a circle. The points must be different. Names Result 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter 4th parameter 5th parameter 6th parameter CALCPOSI INT: Status 0 OK -1 DLIMIT neg. -2 Trans. n.def. 1 SW limit 2 Working area 3 Prot. zone See PGA for more REAL: Starting position in WCS [0] Abscissa [1] Ordinate [2] Applicate REAL: Increment: Path definition [0] Abscissa [1] Ordinate [2] Applicate referred to starting position REAL: Minimum clearances of limits to be observed [0] Abscissa [1] Ordinate [2] Applicate [3] Lin. machine Axis [4] Rot. Axis REAL: Return value possible incr. path if path from parameter 3 cannot be fully traversed without violating limit BOOL: 0: Evaluation G code group 13 (inch/metr.) 1: Reference to basic control system, independen t of active G codes group 13 bin encoded to be monitored 1 SW limits 2 working area 4 active protection zone 8 preactive protection zone Explanation: CALCPOSI CALCPOSI is for checking whether, starting from a defined starting point, the geometry axes can traverse a defined path without violating the axis limits (software limits), working area limitations, or protection zones. If the defined path cannot be traversed without violating limits, the maximum permissible value is returned. Tables 16.6 Predefined functions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 611 INTERSEC BOOL: Error status VAR REAL [11]: First contour element VAR REAL [11]: Second contour element VAR REAL [2]: Result vector: Intersection coordinate, abscissa and ordinate Intersection: Calculation of intersection The intersection between two contour elements is calculated. The intersection coordinates are return values. The error status indicates whether an intersection was found. 3. Axis functions Result 1st parameter 2nd parameter Explanation AXNAME AXIS: Axis identifier STRING [ ]: Input string AXNAME: Get axis identifier Converts the input string to an axis identifier. An alarm is generated if the input string does not contain a valid axis identifier. AXTOSPI INT: Spindle number AXIS: Axis identifier AXTOSPI: Convert axis to spindle Converts an axis identifier into a spindle number. An alarm is set if the transfer parameter does not contain a valid axis identifier. SPI AXIS: Axis identifier INT: Spindle number SPI: Convert spindle to axis Converts a spindle number to an axis identifier. An alarm is generated if the passed parameter does not contain a valid spindle number. ISAXIS BOOL TRUE: Axis exists: Otherwise: FALSE INT: Number of the geometry axis (1 to 3) Check whether the geometry axis 1 to 3 specified as parameter exists in accordance with $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB. AXSTRING STRING AXIS Convert axis identifier into string. Tables 16.6 Predefined functions Fundamentals 612 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 4. Tool management Result 1st parameter 2nd parameter Explanation NEWT INT: T number STRING [32]: Tool name INT: Duplo number Create new tool (prepare tool data). The duplo number can be omitted. GETT50 INT: T number STRING [32]: Tool name INT: Duplo number Get T number for tool identifier. GETACTT INT: Status INT: T number STRING[32]: Tool name Get active tool from a group of tools with the same name. TOOLENV INT: Status STRING: Name Save a tool environment in SRAM with the specified name. DELTOOLENV INT: Status STRING: Name Delete a tool environment in SRAM with the specified name. All tool environments if no name specified. GETTENV INT: Status STRING: Name INT: Number = [0] Number = [1] Number = [2] Reading: T number, D number, DL number from a tool environment with the specified name Result 1st par. 2nd par. 3rd par. 4th par. 5th par. 6th par. Explanation GETTCOR INT: Status REAL: Length [11] STRING: Compo- nents: Coordi- nate system STRING: Tool environ- ment/ " " INT: Int. T number INT: D number INT: DL number Read tool lengths and tool length components from tool environment or current environment Details: See /FB1/ Function Manual Basic Functions; (W1) Result 1st par. 2nd par. 3rd par. 4th par. 5th par. 6th par. 7th par. 8th par. 9th par. SETTCOR INT: Status REAL: Offset vector [0-3] STRING: Compo- nent(s) INT: Compo- nent(s) to be offset INT: Type of write operation INT: Index of geo. axis STRING: Name of tool environ- ment INT: Int. T number INT: D number INT: DL number Explanation Changing tool components whilst observing all marginal conditions that are included in the evaluation of the individual components. Details: See Function Manual Basic Functions; (W1) Tables 16.6 Predefined functions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 613 Result 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter Explanation LENTOAX INT: Status INT: Axis index [0-2] REAL: L1, L2, L3 for abscissa, ordinate, applicate [3], [3] Matrix STRING: Coordinate system for the assignment The function provides information about the assignment of the tool lengths L1, L2, L3 of the active tools to abscissa, ordinate, applicate. The assignment to the geometry axes is affected by frames and the active plane (G17 - 19). Details: See Function Manual Basic Functions; (W1) 5. Arithmetic Result 1st parameter 2nd parameter Explanation SIN REAL REAL Sine ASIN REAL REAL Arcsine COS REAL REAL Cosine ACOS REAL REAL Arccosine TAN REAL REAL Tangent ATAN2 REAL REAL REAL Arctangent 2 SQRT REAL REAL Square root ABS REAL REAL Generate absolute value POT REAL REAL Square TRUNC REAL REAL Truncate decimal places ROUND REAL REAL Round decimal places LN REAL REAL Natural logarithm EXP REAL REAL Exponential function ex MINVAL REAL REAL REAL Determines the smaller value of two variables MAXVAL REAL REAL REAL Determines the larger value of two variables Result 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter Explanation BOUND REAL: Check status REAL: Minimum REAL: Maximum REAL: Check variable Checks whether the variable value lies within the defined min/max value range Explanation The arithmetic functions can also be programmed in synchronized actions. Arithmetic functions are calculated and evaluated in the main run. Synchronized action parameter $AC_PARAM[n] can also be used for calculations and as buffer memory. Tables 16.6 Predefined functions Fundamentals 614 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 6. String functions Result 1st parameter 2nd parameter to 3rd parameter Explanation ISNUMBER BOOL STRING Check whether the input string can be converted to a number. Result is TRUE if conversion is possible. ISVAR BOOL STRING Check whether the transfer parameter contains a variable known in the NC. (Machine data, setting data, system variable, general variables such as GUDs) Result is TRUE if all the following checks produce positive results according to the (STRING) transfer parameter: – The identifier exists – It is a 1- or 2-dimensional array – An array index is allowed. For axial variables, the axis names are accepted as an index but not checked. NUMBER REAL STRING Convert the input string into a number. TOUPPER STRING STRING Convert all alphabetic characters in the input string to upper case. TOLOWER STRING STRING Convert all alphabetic characters in the input string to lower case. STRLEN INT STRING The result is the length of the input string up to the end of the string (0). INDEX INT STRING CHAR Find the character (2nd parameter) in the input string (1st parameter). The reply gives the place, at which the character was first found. The search is from left to right. The 1st character in the string has the index 0. RINDEX INT STRING CHAR Find the character (2nd parameter) in the input string (1st parameter). The reply gives the place, at which the character was first found. The search is from right to left. The 1st character in the string has the index 0. Tables 16.6 Predefined functions Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 615 MINDEX INT STRING STRING Find one of the characters specified in the 2nd parameter in the input string (1st parameter). The place where one of the characters was first found is output. The search is from left to right. The first character in the string has the index 0. SUBSTR STRING STRING INT Returns the substring of the input string (1st parameter), defined by the start character (2nd parameter) and number of characters (3rd parameter). Example: SUBSTR("ACKNOWLEDGEMENT:10 to 99", 10, 2) returns substring "10". Tables 16.6 Predefined functions Fundamentals 616 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 617 A Appendix A A.1 A.1 List of abbreviations A Output AS Automation system ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit: User switching circuit ASUB Asynchronous subroutine AuxF Auxiliary function AV Job planning BA Operating mode BB Ready to run BCD Binary Coded Decimals: Decimal numbers encoded In binary code BCS Basic Coordinate System BIN Binary files (Binary Files) BIOS Basic Input Output System BOT Boot files: Boot files for SIMODRIVE 611 digital BP Basic program C Bus Communication bus CAD Computer-Aided Design CAM Computer-Aided Manufacturing CNC Computerized Numerical Control COM Communication COR Coordinate rotation CP Communications Processor CPU Central Processing Unit CR Carriage Return CRC Cutter radius compensation CRT Cathode Ray Tube picture tube CSB Central Service Board: PLC module CSF Function plan (PLC programming method) CTS Clear To Send: Signal from serial data interfaces CUTOM Cutter radius compensation: Tool radius compensation Appendix A.1 List of abbreviations Fundamentals 618 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 DAC Digital-to-Analog Converter DB Data block in the PLC DBB Data block byte in the PLC DBW Data block word in the PLC DBX Data block bit in the PLC DC Direct Control: Movement of the rotary axis via the shortest path to the absolute position within one revolution DCD Data Carrier Detect DDE Dynamic Data Exchange DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm (German Industry Standard) DIO Data Input/Output: Data transfer display DIR Directory DLL Dynamic Link Library DOE Data transmission equipment DOS Disk Operating System DPM Dual-Port Memory DPR Dual-Port RAM DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory DRF Differential Resolver Function (DRF) DRY Dry Run: Dry run feedrate DSB Decoding Single Block DTE Data Terminal Equipment DW Data word E Input EIA code Special punched tape code, number of holes per character always odd ENC Encoder: Actual value encoder EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Error Error from printer FB Function block FBS Slimline screen FC Function Call: Function block in the PLC FDB Product database FDD Floppy Disk Drive FDD Feed Drive FEPROM Flash-EPROM: Read and write memory Appendix A.1 List of abbreviations Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 619 FIFO First In First Out: Memory that works without address specification and whose data are read in the same order in which they were stored. FIPO Fine InterPOlator FM Function Module FPU Floating Point Unit Floating Point Unit FRA Frame block FRAME Data record (frame) FST Feed Stop GUD Global User Data HD Hard Disk HEX Abbreviation for hexadecimal number HHU Handheld unit HMI Human Machine Interface HMI Human Machine Interface: Operator functionality of SINUMERIK for operation, programming and simulation. HMS High-resolution Measuring System HW Hardware I/O Input/Output I/R Infeed/regenerative-feedback unit (power supply) of the SIMODRIVE 611digital IBN Startup IF Drive module pulse enable IK (GD) Implicit communication (global data) IKA Interpolative Compensation: Interpolatory compensation IM Interface Module Interconnection module IMR Interface Module Receive: Interconnection module for receiving data IMS Interface Module Send: Interconnection module for sending data INC Increment INI Initializing Data IPO Interpolator IS Interface signal ISA Industry Standard Architecture ISO International Standardization Organization ISO code Special punched tape code, number of holes per character always even JOG Jogging: Setup mode K1 .. K4 Channel 1 to channel 4 KUE Speed ratio Kv Servo gain factor Appendix A.1 List of abbreviations Fundamentals 620 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 LAD Ladder diagram (PLC programming method) LCD Liquid Crystal Display LEC Leadscrew error compensation LED Light-Emitting Diode LF Line Feed LR Position controller LUD Local User Data MB Megabyte MC Measuring circuit MCP Machine control panel MCS Machine coordinate system MD Machine data MDI Manual Data Automatic: Manual input MLFB Machine-readable product designation Mode group Mode group MPF Main Program File: NC part program (main program) MPI Multiport Interface Multiport Interface MS Microsoft (software manufacturer) MSD Main Spindle Drive NC Numerical Control NCK Numerical Control Kernel: NC kernel with block preparation, traversing range, etc. NCU Numerical Control Unit: Hardware unit of the NCK NRK Name for the operating system of the NCK NURBS Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline OB Organization block in the PLC OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer OP Operator Panel OP Operator Panel: Operating setup OPI Operator Panel Interface OPI Operator Panel Interface: Interface for connection to the operator panel OPT Options OSI Open Systems Interconnection: Standard for computer communications Appendix A.1 List of abbreviations Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 621 P bus Peripheral Bus PC Personal Computer PCIN Name of the SW for data exchange with the control PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association: Standard for plug-in memory cards PCU PC Unit: PC box (computer unit) PG Programming device PLC Programmable Logic Control: Interface control PLC Programmable Logic Controller PMS Position measuring system POS Positioning RAM Random Access Memory: Program memory that can be read and written to REF Reference point approach function REPOS Reposition function RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer: Type of processor with small instruction set and ability to process instructions at high speed ROV Rapid override: Input correction RPA R-Parameter Active: Memory area on the NCK for R parameter numbers RPY Roll Pitch Yaw: Rotation type of a coordinate system RS-232-C Serial interface (definition of the exchange lines between DTE and DCE) RTS Request To Send: RTS, control signal of serial data interfaces SBL Single Block SD Setting Data SDB System Data Block SEA Setting Data Active: Identifier (file type) for setting data SFB System Function Block SFC System Function Call SK Softkey SKP SKiP: Skip block SM Stepper Motor SPF Sub Routine File: Subroutine SR Subroutine SRAM Static RAM (non-volatile) SSI Serial Synchronous Interface: Synchronous serial interface STL Statement list SW Software SYF System Files System files Appendix A.1 List of abbreviations Fundamentals 622 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 T Tool TC Tool change TEA Testing Data Active: Identifier for machine data TLC Tool length compensation TNRC Tool Nose Radius Compensation TO Tool offset TOA Tool Offset Active: Identifier (file type) for tool offsets TRANSMIT TRANSform Milling Into Turning: Coordinate conversion on turning machine for milling operations TRC Tool Radius Compensation UFR User Frame: Zero offset UI User interface WCS Workpiece coordinate system WOP Workshop-oriented Programming WPD Workpiece Directory ZO Zero offset ZOA Zero Offset Active: Identifier (file type) for zero offset data µC Micro Controller Appendix A.2 Feedback on the documentation Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 623 A.2 A.2 Feedback on the documentation This document will be continuously improved with regard to its quality and ease of use. Please help us with this task by sending your comments and suggestions for improvement via e-mail or fax to: E-mail: mailto:[email protected] Fax: +49 9131 - 98 2176 Please use the fax form on the back of this page. Appendix A.2 Feedback on the documentation Fundamentals 624 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 To SlEMENS AG l DT MC MS1 P.O. Box 3180 D-91050 Erlangen / Germany Fax: +49 9131 - 98 2176 (Documentation) From Name: Address of your company/department Street: Zip code: City: Phone: / Fax: / Suggestions and/or corrections Appendix A.3 Documentation overview Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 625 A.3 A.3 Documentation overview General Documentation SlNUMERlK Sales Brochure Document Overview SlNUMERlK 840D sl / 840Di sl SlNUMERlK 840D sl 840Di sl Catalog NC 61 *) SlNAMlCS S120 Catalog D21.1 Converter chassis units *) User Documentation SlNUMERlK 840D sl Operating Manual - HMl sl Universal / Turning / milling *) ದ HMl Embedded *) ದ ShopMill ದ ShopTurn SlNUMERlK 840D sl 840D 840Di sl Operating Manual ದ HMl Advanced *) ದ Operation (compact) SlNUMERlK 840D sl 840Di sl Programming Manual ದ Fundamentals *) ದ Job planning *) ದ Programming (compact) ದ System Variable Lists ದ lSO Turning/Milling Manufacturer/service documentation SlNUMERlK 840D sl Manual ದ NCU *) ದ Machine configuration SlNUMERlK 840D sl 840Di sl Manual Operator Components and Networking *) SlNUMERlK 840D sl Commissioning Manual CNC ದ NCK, PLC, Drive *) ದ HMl sl *) ದ HMl Embedded *) ದ HMl Advanced *) ದ ShopMill/ShopTurn Manufacturer/service documentation SlNUMERlK 840D sl 840Di sl Function Manual ದ Basic Functions *) ದ Extended Functions ದ Special functions ದ Synchronous Actions SlNUMERlK 840D sl 840Di sl Function Manual ದ Tool management ದ lSO Dialects ದ SinuCOM SlNAMlCS S120 Function Manual Drive functions SlNUMERlK 840D sl 840D 840Di sl Programming Manual ದ Cycles ದ Measuring cycles SlNUMERlK 840D sl 840Di sl Diagnostics Manual *) SlNUMERlK 840Di sl ದ Commissioning Manual ದ ADl4 SlNUMERlK 840D sl 840Di sl Parameter Manual *) ದ Part 1 ದ Part 2 SlNUMERlK 840D sl Function Manual Safety lntegrated SlNUMERlK EMC Guidelines Electronic documentation SlNUMERlK SlNAMlCS Motors DOCONCD *) DOCONWEB *) Recommended minimum scope of documentation Appendix A.3 Documentation overview Fundamentals 626 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 627 Glossary Absolute dimensions A destination for an axis movement is defined by a dimension that refers to the origin of the currently active coordinate system. See → Incremental dimension Acceleration with jerk limitation In order to optimize the acceleration response of the machine whilst simultaneously protecting the mechanical components, it is possible to switch over in the machining program between abrupt acceleration and continuous (jerk-free) acceleration. Address An address is the identifier for a certain operand or operand range, e.g. input, output etc. Alarms All → messages and alarms are displayed on the operator panel in plain text with date and time and the corresponding symbol for the cancel criterion. Alarms and messages are displayed separately. 1. Alarms and messages in the part program: Alarms and messages can be displayed in plain text directly from the part program. 2. Alarms and messages from PLC Alarms and messages for the machine can be displayed in plain text from the PLC program. No additional function block packages are required for this purpose. Archive Reading out of files and/or directories on an external memory device. Glossary Fundamentals 628 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Asynchronous subroutine Part program that can be started asynchronously to (independently of) the current program status using an interrupt signal (e.g. "Rapid NC input" signal). Automatic Operating mode of the control (block sequence operation according to DIN): Operating mode for NC systems in which a → subprogram is selected and executed continuously. Auxiliary functions Auxiliary functions enable → part programs to transfer → parameters to the → PLC, which then trigger reactions defined by the machine manufacturer. Axes In accordance with their functional scope, the CNC axes are subdivided into: ● Axes: interpolating path axes ● Auxiliary axes: non-interpolating feed and positioning axes with an axis-specific feed rate. Auxiliary axes are not involved in actual machining, e.g. tool feeder, tool magazine. Axis address See → Axis identifier Axis identifier Axes are identifed using X, Y, and Z as defined in DIN 66217 for a dextrorotatory, right- angled → coordinate system. Rotary axes rotating around X, Y, and Z are identified using A, B, and C. Additional axes situated parallel to the specified axes can be designated using other letters. Axis name See → Axis identifier Glossary Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 629 Backlash compensation Compensation for a mechanical machine backlash, e.g. backlash on reversal for ball screws. Backlash compensation can be entered separately for each axis. Backup battery The backup battery ensures that the → user program in the → CPU is stored so that it is safe from power failure and so that specified data areas and bit memory, timers and counters are stored retentively. Base axis Axis whose setpoint or actual value position forms the basis of the calculation of a compensation value. Basic Coordinate System Cartesian coordinate system which is mapped by transformation onto the machine coordinate system. The programmer uses axis names of the basic coordinate system in the → part program. The basic coordinate system exists parallel to the → machine coordinate system if no → transformation is active. The difference between the two coordinate systems lies in the → axis identifiers. Baud rate Rate of data transfer (Bit/s). Blank Workpiece as it is before it is machined. Block "Block" is the term given to any files required for creating and processing programs. Glossary Fundamentals 630 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Block search For debugging purposes or following a program abort, the "Block search" function can be used to select any location in the part program at which the program is to be started or resumed. Booting Loading the system program after power ON. C axis Axis around which the tool spindle describes a controlled rotational and positioning movement. Channel A channel is characterized by the fact that it can process a → part program independently of other channels. A channel exclusively controls the axes and spindles assigned to it. Part program runs of different channels can be coordinated through → synchronization. Circular interpolation The → tool moves on a circle between specified points on the contour at a given feed rate, and the workpiece is thereby machined. CNC See → NC COM Component of the NC for the implementation and coordination of communication. Compensation axis Axis with a setpoint or actual value modified by the compensation value Glossary Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 631 Compensation memory Data range in the control, in which the tool offset data are stored. Compensation table Table containing interpolation points. It provides the compensation values of the compensation axis for selected positions on the basic axis. Compensation value Difference between the axis position measured by the encoder and the desired, programmed axis position. Connecting cables Connecting cables are pre-assembled or user-assembled 2-wire cables with a connector at each end. This connecting cable connects the → CPU to a → programming device or to other CPUs by means of a → multi-point interface (MPI). Continuous-path mode The objective of continuous-path mode is to avoid substantial deceleration of the → path axes at the part program block boundaries and to change to the next block at as close to the same path velocity as possible. Contour Contour of the → workpiece Contour monitoring The following error is monitored within a definable tolerance band as a measure of contour accuracy. An unacceptably high following error can cause the drive to become overloaded, for example. In such cases, an alarm is output and the axes are stopped. Coordinate system See → Machine coordinate system, → Workpiece coordinate system Glossary Fundamentals 632 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 CPU Central processing unit, see → PLC C-Spline The C-Spline is the most well-known and widely used spline. The transitions at the interpolation points are continuous, both tangentially and in terms of curvature. 3rd order polynomials are used. Curvature The curvature k of a contour is the inverse of radius r of the nestling circle in a contour point (k = 1/r). Cycles Protected subroutines for execution of repetitive machining operations on the → workpiece. Data Block 1. Data unit of the → PLC that → HIGHSTEP programs can access. 2. Data unit of the → NC: Data modules contain data definitions for global user data. These data can be initialized directly when they are defined. Data word Two-byte data unit within a → data block. Diagnosis 1. Operating area of the control. 2. The control has both a self-diagnostics program as well as test functions for servicing purposes: status, alarm, and service displays Dimensions specification, metric and inches Position and lead values can be programmed in inches in the machining program. Irrespective of the programmable dimensions (G70/G71), the controller is set to a basic system. Glossary Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 633 DRF Differential Resolver Function: NC function which generates an incremental zero offset in Automatic mode in conjunction with an electronic handwheel. Drive The drive is the unit of the CNC that performs the speed and torque control based on the settings of the NC. Dynamic feedforward control Inaccuracies in the → contour due to following errors can be practically eliminated using dynamic, acceleration-dependent feedforward control. This results in excellent machining accuracy even at high → path velocities. Feedforward control can be selected and deselected on an axis-specific basis via the → part program. Editor The editor makes it possible to create, edit, extend, join, and import programs/texts/program blocks. Exact stop When an exact stop statement is programmed, the position specified in a block is approached exactly and, if necessary, very slowly. To reduce the approach time, → exact stop limits are defined for rapid traverse and feed. Exact stop limit When all path axes reach their exact stop limits, the control responds as if it had reached its precise destination point. A block advance of the → part program occurs. External zero offset Zero offset specified by the → PLC. Glossary Fundamentals 634 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Fast retraction from contour When an interrupt occurs, a motion can be initiated via the CNC machining program, enabling the tool to be quickly retracted from the workpiece contour that is currently being machined. The retraction angle and the distance retracted can also be parameterized. After fast retraction, an interrupt routine can also be executed (SINUMERIK 840D). Feed override The programmed velocity is overriden by the current velocity setting made via the → machine control panel or from the → PLC (0 to 200%). The feedrate can also be corrected by a programmable percentage factor (1-200%) in the machining program. Finished-part contour Contour of the finished workpiece. See → Raw part. Fixed machine point Point that is uniquely defined by the machine tool, e.g. machine reference point. Fixed-point approach Machine tools can approach fixed points such as a tool change point, loading point, pallet change point, etc. in a defined way. The coordinates of these points are stored in the control. The control moves the relevant axes in → rapid traverse, whenever possible. Frame A frame is an arithmetic rule that transforms one Cartesian coordinate system into another Cartesian coordinate system. A frame contains the following components: → zero offset, → rotation, → scaling, → mirroring. Geometry Description of a → workpiece in the → workpiece coordinate system. Geometry axis Geometry axes are used to describe a 2- or 3-dimensional area in the workpiece coordinate system. Glossary Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 635 Ground Ground is taken as the total of all linked inactive parts of a device which will not become live with a dangerous contact voltage even in the event of a malfunction. Helical interpolation The helical interpolation function is ideal for machining internal and external threads using form milling cutters and for milling lubrication grooves. The helix comprises two movements: ● Circular movement in one plane ● A linear movement perpendicular to this plane High-level CNC language The high-level language offers: → user-defined variables, → system variables, → macro techniques. High-speed digital inputs/outputs The digital inputs can be used for example to start fast CNC program routines (interrupt routines). The digital CNC outputs can be used to trigger fast, program-controlled switching functions (SINUMERIK 840D). HIGHSTEP Summary of programming options for → PLCs of the AS300/AS400 system. Identifier In accordance with DIN 66025, words are supplemented using identifiers (names) for variables (arithmetic variables, system variables, user variables), subroutines, key words, and words with multiple address letters. These supplements have the same meaning as the words with respect to block format. Identifiers must be unique. It is not permissible to use the same identifier for different objects. Glossary Fundamentals 636 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Inch measuring system Measuring system, which defines distances in inches and fractions of inches. Inclined surface machining Drilling and milling operations on workpiece surfaces that do not lie in the coordinate planes of the machine can be performed easily using the function "inclined-surface machining". Increment Travel path length specification based on number of increments. The number of increments can be stored as → setting data or be selected by means of a suitably labeled key (i.e. 10, 100, 1000, 10000). Incremental dimension Also incremental dimension: A destination for axis traversal is defined by a distance to be covered and a direction referenced to a point already reached. See → Absolute dimension. Intermediate blocks Motions with selected → tool offset (G41/G42) may be interrupted by a limited number of intermediate blocks (blocks without axis motions in the offset plane), whereby the tool offset can still be correctly compensated for. The permissible number of intermediate blocks which the control reads ahead can be set in system parameters. Interpolator Logic unit of the → NCK that defines intermediate values for the motions to be carried out in individual axes based on information on the end positions specified in the part program. Interpolatory compensation Interpolatory compensation is a tool that enables manufacturing-related leadscrew error and measuring system error compensations (SSFK, MSFK). Glossary Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 637 Interrupt routine Interrupt routines are special → subroutines that can be started by events (external signals) in the machining process. A part program block which is currently being worked through is interrupted and the position of the axes at the point of interruption is automatically saved. Inverse-time feedrate With SINUMERIK 840D, the time required for the path of a block to be traversed can be programmed for the axis motion instead of the feed velocity (G93). JOG Control operating mode (setup mode): In JOG mode, the machine can be set up. Individual axes and spindles can be traversed in JOG mode by means of the direction keys. Additional functions in JOG mode include: → Reference point approach, → Repos, and → Preset (set actual value). Key switch The key switch on the → machine control panel has four positions that are assigned functions by the operating system of the control. The key switch has three different colored keys that can be removed in the specified positions. Keywords Words with specified notation that have a defined meaning in the programming language for → part programs. KV Servo gain factor, a control variable in a control loop. Leading axis The leading axis is the → gantry axis that exists from the point of view of the operator and programmer and, thus, can be influenced like a standard NC axis. Leadscrew error compensation Compensation for the mechanical inaccuracies of a leadscrew participating in the feed. The control uses stored deviation values for the compensation. Glossary Fundamentals 638 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Limit speed Maximum/minimum (spindle) speed: The maximum speed of a spindle can be limited by specifying machine data, the → PLC or → setting data. Linear axis In contrast to a rotary axis, a linear axis describes a straight line. Linear interpolation The tool travels along a straight line to the destination point while machining the workpiece. Load memory The load memory is the same as → RAM for the CPU 314 of the → PLC. Look Ahead The Look Ahead function is used to achieve an optimal machining speed by looking ahead over an assignable number of traversing blocks. Machine axes Physically existent axes on the machine tool. Machine control panel An operator panel on a machine tool with operating elements such as keys, rotary switches, etc., and simple indicators such as LEDs. It is used to directly influence the machine tool via the PLC. Machine coordinate system A coordinate system, which is related to the axes of the machine tool. Machine zero Fixed point of the machine tool to which all (derived) measuring systems can be traced back. Glossary Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 639 Machining channel A channel structure can be used to shorten idle times by means of parallel motion sequences, e.g. moving a loading gantry simultaneously with machining. Here, a CNC channel must be regarded as a separate CNC control system with decoding, block preparation and interpolation. Macro techniques Grouping of a set of statements under a single identifier. The identifier represents the set of consolidated statements in the program. Main block A block prefixed by ":" introductory block, containing all the parameters required to start execution of a -> part program. Main program The → part program designated by a number or an identifer in which additional main programs, subroutines, or → cycles can be called. MDA Control operating mode: Manual Data Automatic. In the MDA mode, individual program blocks or block sequences with no reference to a main program or subroutine can be input and executed immediately afterwards through actuation of the NC start key. Messages All messages programmed in the part program and → alarms detected by the system are displayed on the operator panel in plain text with date and time and the corresponding symbol for the cancel criterion. Alarms and messages are displayed separately. Glossary Fundamentals 640 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Metric measuring system Standardized system of units: For length, e.g. mm (millimeters), m (meters). Mirroring Mirroring reverses the signs of the coordinate values of a contour, with respect to an axis. It is possible to mirror with respect to more than one axis at a time. Mode group Axes and spindles that are technologically related can be combined into one mode group. Axes/spindles of a BAG can be controlled by one or more → channels. The same → mode type is always assigned to the channels of the mode group. Mode of operation An operating concept on a SINUMERIK control. The following modes are defined: → Jog, → MDA, → Automatic. NC Numerical Control: Numerical control (NC) includes all components of machine tool control: → NCK, → PLC, HMI, → COM. Note A more correct term for SINUMERIK 840D controls would be: Computerized Numerical Control Glossary Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 641 NCK Numerical Control Kernel: Component of NC that executes the → part programs and basically coordinates the motion operations for the machine tool. Network A network is the connection of multiple S7-300 and other end devices, e.g. a programming device via a → connecting cable. A data exchange takes place over the network between the connected devices. NRK Numeric robotic kernel (operating system of → NCK) NURBS The motion control and path interpolation that occurs within the control is performed based on NURBS (Non Uniform Rational B-Splines). As a result, a uniform process is available within the control for all interpolations for SINUMERIK 840D. OEM The scope for implementing individual solutions (OEM applications) for the SINUMERIK 840D has been provided for machine manufacturers, who wish to create their own operator interface or integrate process-oriented functions in the control. Operator Interface The user interface (UI) is the display medium for a CNC in the form of a screen. It features horizontal and vertical softkeys. Glossary Fundamentals 642 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Oriented spindle stop Stops the workpiece spindle in a specified angular position, e.g. in order to perform additional machining at a particular location. Oriented tool retraction RETTOOL: If machining is interrupted (e.g. when a tool breaks), a program command can be used to retract the tool in a user-specified orientation by a defined distance. Overall reset In the event of an overall reset, the following memories of the → CPU are deleted: ● → Work memory ● Read/write area of → load memory ● → System memory ● → Backup memory Override Manual or programmable control feature, which enables the user to override programmed feedrates or speeds in order to adapt them to a specific workpiece or material. Glossary Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 643 Part program block Part of a → part program that is demarcated by a line feed. There are two types: → main blocks and → subblocks. Part program management Part program management can be organized by → workpieces. The size of the user memory determines the number of programs and the amount of data that can be managed. Each file (programs and data) can be given a name consisting of a maximum of 24 alphanumeric characters. Path axis Path axes include all machining axes of the → channel that are controlled by the → interpolator in such a way that they start, accelerate, stop, and reach their end point simultaneously. Path feedrate Path feed affects → path axes. It represents the geometric sum of the feed rates of the → geometry axes involved. Path velocity The maximum programmable path velocity depends on the input resolution. For example, with a resolution of 0.1 mm the maximum programmable path velocity is 1000 m/min. PCIN data transfer program PCIN is an auxiliary program for sending and receiving CNC user data (e.g. part programs, tool offsets, etc.) via a serial interface. The PCIN program can run in MS-DOS on standard industrial PCs. Glossary Fundamentals 644 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Peripheral module I/O modules represent the link between the CPU and the process. I/O modules are: ● → Digital input/output modules ● → Analog input/output modules ● → Simulator modules PLC Programmable Logic Control: → Programmable logic controller. Component of → NC: Programmable controller for processing the control logic of the machine tool. PLC program memory SINUMERIK 840D: The PLC user program, the user data and the basic PLC program are stored together in the PLC user memory. PLC Programming The PLC is programmed using the STEP 7 software. The STEP 7 programming software is based on the WINDOWS standard operating system and contains the STEP 5 programming functions with innovative enhancements. Polar coordinates A coordinate system, which defines the position of a point on a plane in terms of its distance from the origin and the angle formed by the radius vector with a defined axis. Polynomial interpolation Polynomial interpolation enables a wide variety of curve characteristics to be generated, such as straight line, parabolic, exponential functions (SINUMERIK 840D). Glossary Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 645 Positioning axis Axis that performs an auxiliary movement on a machine tool (e.g. tool magazine, pallet transport). Positioning axes are axes that do not interpolate with → path axes. Pre-coincidence Block change occurs already when the path distance approaches an amount equal to a specifiable delta of the end position. Program block Program blocks contain the main program and subroutines of → part programs. Programmable frames Programmable → frames enable dynamic definition of new coordinate system output points while the part program is being executed. A distinction is made between absolute definition using a new frame and additive definition with reference to an existing starting point. Programmable Logic Control Programmable logic controllers (PLC) are electronic controls, the function of which is stored as a program in the control unit. This means that the layout and wiring of the device do not depend on the function of the control. The programmable logic controller has the same structure as a computer; it consists of a CPU (central module) with memory, input/output modules and an internal bus system. The peripherals and the programming language are matched to the requirements of the control technology. Glossary Fundamentals 646 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Programmable working area limitation Limitation of the motion space of the tool to a space defined by programmed limitations. Programming key Character and character strings that have a defined meaning in the programming language for → part programs. Protection zone Three-dimensional zone within the → working area into which the tool tip must not pass. Quadrant error compensation Contour errors at quadrant transitions, which arise as a result of changing friction conditions on the guideways, can be virtually entirely eliminated with the quadrant error compensation. Parameterization of the quadrant error compensation is performed by means of a circuit test. R parameters Arithmetic parameter that can be set or queried by the programmer of the → part program for any purpose in the program. Rapid traverse The highest traverse rate of an axis. For example, rapid traverse is used when the tool approaches the → workpiece contour from a resting position or when the tool is retracted from the workpiece contour. The rapid traverse velocity is set on a machine-specific basis using a machine data element. Glossary Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 647 Reference point Machine tool position that the measuring system of the → machine axes references. Rotary axis Rotary axes apply a workpiece or tool rotation to a defined angular position. Rotation Component of a → frame that defines a rotation of the coordinate system around a particular angle. Rounding axis Rounding axes rotate a workpiece or tool to an angular position corresponding to an indexing grid. When a grid index is reached, the rounding axis is "in position". Safety functions The control is equipped with permanently active montoring functions that detect faults in the → CNC, the → PLC, and the machine in a timely manner so that damage to the workpiece, tool, or machine is largely prevented. In the event of a fault, the machining operation is interrupted and the drives stopped. The cause of the malfunction is logged and output as an alarm. At the same time, the PLC is notified that a CNC alarm has been triggered. Scaling Component of a → frame that implements axis-specific scale modifications. Glossary Fundamentals 648 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Selecting Series of statements to the NC that act in concert to produce a particular → workpiece. Likewise, this term applies to execution of a particular machining operation on a given → raw part. Serial RS-232-C interface For data input/output, the PCU 20 has one serial V.24 interface (RS232) while the PCU 50/70 has two V.24 interfaces. Machining programs and manufacturer and user data can be loaded and saved via these interfaces. Setting data Data, which communicates the properties of the machine tool to the NC, as defined by the system software. Softkey A key, whose name appears on an area of the screen. The choice of soft keys displayed is dynamically adapted to the operating situation. The freely assignable function keys (soft keys) are assigned defined functions in the software. Software limit switch Software limit switches limit the traversing range of an axis and prevent an abrupt stop of the slide at the hardware limit switch. Two value pairs can be specified for each axis and activated separately by means of the → PLC. Spline interpolation With spline interpolation, the controller can generate a smooth curve characteristic from only a few specified interpolation points of a set contour. Glossary Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 649 SRT Transformation ratio Standard cycles Standard cycles are provided for machining operations, which are frequently repeated: ● Cycles for drilling/milling applications ● for turning technology The available cycles are listed in the "Cycle support" menu in the "Program" operating area. Once the desired machining cycle has been selected, the parameters required for assigning values are displayed in plain text. Subblock Block preceded by "N" containing information for a sequence, e.g. positional data. Subroutine Sequence of statements of a → part program that can be called repeatedly with different defining parameters. The subroutine is called from a main program. Every subroutine can be protected against unauthorized read-out and display. → Cycles are a form of subroutines. Synchronization Statements in → part programs for coordination of sequences in different → channels at certain machining points. Glossary Fundamentals 650 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Synchronized actions 1. Auxiliary function output During workpiece machining, technological functions (→ auxiliary functions) can be output from the CNC program to the PLC. For example, these auxiliary functions are used to control additional equipment for the machine tool, such as quills, grabbers, clamping chucks, etc. 2. Fast auxiliary function output For time-critical switching functions, the acknowledgement times for the → auxiliary functions can be minimized and unnecessary hold points in the machining process can be avoided. Synchronized axes Synchronized axes take the same time to traverse their path as the geometry axes take for their path. Synchronized axis A synchronized axis is the → gantry axis whose set position is continuously derived from the motion of the → leading axis and is, thus, moved synchronously with the leading axis. From the point of view of the programmer and operator, the synchronized axis "does not exist". System memory The system memory is a memory in the CPU in which the following data is stored: ● Data required by the operating system ● The operands times, counters, markers System variables A variable that exists without any input from the programmer of a → part program. It is defined by a data type and the variable name preceded by the character $. See → User- defined variable. Glossary Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 651 Tapping without compensating chuck This function allows threads to be tapped without a compensating chuck. By using the interpolating method of the spindle as a rotary axis and the drilling axis, threads can be cut to a precise final drilling depth, e.g. for blind hole threads (requirement: spindles in axis operation). Text editor See → Editor TOA area The TOA area includes all tool and magazine data. By default, this area coincides with the → channel area with regard to the reach of the data. However, machine data can be used to specify that multiple channels share one → TOA unit so that common tool management data is then available to these channels. TOA unit Each → TOA area can have more than one TOA unit. The number of possible TOA units is limited by the maximum number of active → channels. A TOA unit includes exactly one tool data block and one magazine data block. In addition, a TOA unit can also contain a toolholder data block (optional). Tool Active part on the machine tool that implements machining (e.g. turning tool, milling tool, drill, LASER beam, etc.). Tool nose radius compensation Contour programming assumes that the tool is pointed. Because this is not actually the case in practice, the curvature radius of the tool used must be communicated to the control which then takes it into account. The curvature center is maintained equidistantly around the contour, offset by the curvature radius. Glossary Fundamentals 652 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Tool offset Consideration of the tool dimensions in calculating the path. Tool radius compensation To directly program a desired → workpiece contour, the control must traverse an equistant path to the programmed contour taking into account the radius of the tool that is being used (G41/G42). Transformation Additive or absolute zero offset of an axis. Traversing range The maximum permissible travel range for linear axes is ± 9 decades. The absolute value depends on the selected input and position control resolution and the unit of measurement (inch or metric). User memory All programs and data, such as part programs, subroutines, comments, tool offsets, and zero offsets/frames, as well as channel and program user data, can be stored in the shared CNC user memory. User program User programs for the S7-300 automation systems are created using the programming language STEP 7. The user program has a modular layout and consists of individual blocks. The basic block types are: ● Code blocks These blocks contain the STEP 7 commands. ● Data blocks These blocks contain constants and variables for the STEP 7 program. User-defined variable Users can declare their own variables for any purpose in the → part program or data block (global user data). A definition contains a data type specification and the variable name. See → System variable. Glossary Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 653 Variable definition A variable definition includes the specification of a data type and a variable name. The variable names can be used to access the value of the variables. Velocity control In order to achieve an acceptable traverse rate in the case of very slight motions per block, an anticipatory evaluation over several blocks (→ Look Ahead) can be specified. WinSCP WinSCP is a freely available open source program for Windows for the transfer of files. Working area Three-dimensional zone into which the tool tip can be moved on account of the physical design of the machine tool. See → Protection zone. Working area limitation With the aid of the working area limitation, the traversing range of the axes can be further restricted in addition to the limit switches. One value pair per axis may be used to describe the protected working area. Working memory RAM is a work memory in the → CPU that the processor accesses when processing the application program. Workpiece Part to be made/machined by the machine tool. Workpiece contour Set contour of the → workpiece to be created or machined. Workpiece coordinate system The workpiece coordinate system has its starting point in the → workpiece zero-point. In machining operations programmed in the workpiece coordinate system, the dimensions and directions refer to this system. Workpiece zero The workpiece zero is the starting point for the → workpiece coordinate system. It is defined in terms of distances to the → machine zero. Glossary Fundamentals 654 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Zero offset Specifies a new reference point for a coordinate system through reference to an existing zero point and a → frame. 1. Settable SINUMERIK 840D: A configurable number of settable zero offsets are available for each CNC axis. The offsets - which are selected by means of G functions - take effect alternately. 2. External In addition to all the offsets which define the position of the workpiece zero, an external zero offset can be overridden by means of the handwheel (DRF offset) or from the PLC. 3. Programmable Zero offsets can be programmed for all path and positioning axes using the TRANS statement. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 655 Index $ $AA_ACC, 153 $AA_FGREF, 127 $AA_FGROUP, 127 $AA_OFF, 415 $AC_F_TYPE, 171 $AC_FGROUP_MASK, 127 $AC_FZ, 171 $AC_S_TYPE, 107 $AC_SVC, 107 $AC_TOFF, 93 $AC_TOFFL, 93 $AC_TOFFR, 93 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_MINUS, 434 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_PLUS, 434 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_MINUS_ENABLE, 434 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE, 434 $P_F_TYPE, 171 $P_FGROUP_MASK, 127 $P_FZ, 171 $P_GWPS, 117 $P_S_TYPE, 107 $P_SVC, 107 $P_TOFF, 93 $P_TOFFL, 93 $P_TOFFR, 93 $PA_FGREF, 127 $PA_FGROUP, 127 $TC_DPNT, 165 $TC_TP_MAX_VELO, 102 $TC_TPG1/...8/...9, 116 A A, 119 A=..., 191 Absolute dimensions, 19 AC, 183, 236 ACC, 152 Acceleration Mode, 449 ACCLIMA, 452 ACN, 191 ACP, 191 Address, 39 Adjustable, 562 Extended address, 478 Fixed addresses, 559 modally effective, 477 non-modal, 477 Value assignment, 43 With axial extension, 477 With axis expansion, 560 Address letters, 558 Addresses, 475 ADIS, 357 ADISPOS, 357 ALF, 290 AMIRROR, 371 AMIRROR, 403 ANG, 260, 265 ANG1, 262 ANG2, 262, 265 Angle Contour angle, 260 Contour definition angle, 262, 265 AP, 217, 222, 225, 239, 250 AP, 213 Approach point/angle, 314 AR, 225, 236, 250, 253 AROT, 371, 384 AROTS, 396 ASCALE, 371, 398 ATRANS, 371, 376 Auxiliary function output High-speed, 421 In continuous-path mode, 422 Auxiliary function outputs, 419 Availability System-dependent, 5 Axes Channel, 465 Command, 467 Geometry, 463 Lead link axis, 470 Link, 468 Machine, 465 Main, 463 Path, 465 PLC, 467 Index Fundamentals 656 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Positioning, 466 Synchronized, 467 Axis Container, 469 Types, 461 Axis types Special axes, 464 B B=..., 191 Basic coordinate system (BCS), 31 Basic offset, 33 Basic zero system, 33 Binary Constant, 482 Block, 39 Components, 39 End, 42 Length, 42 Number, 42 Order of the statements, 43 Skip, 45, 46 Structure, 39 Blocking point, 25 Bottleneck Detection, 342 BRISK, 449 BRISKA, 449 BZS, 33 C C=..., 191 CALCPOSI, 432, 610 Cartesian coordinates, 15 CDOF, 340 CDOF2, 340 CDON, 340 CFC, 158 CFIN, 158 CFTCP, 158 Chamfer, 295 Channel Axes, 465 Character set, 49 CHF, 295 CHR, 262, 265, 295 CIP, 225, 242 Circular interpolation Helical interpolation, 250 Circular-path programming With center and end points, 225, 229 With interpolation and end points, 225, 242 With opening angle and center point, 225, 236 With polar angle and polar radius, 225 With polar coordinates, 239 With radius and end point, 225, 233 With tangential transition, 225 Clamping torque, 446 Collision detection, 340 Command, 39 Axes, 467 Comments, 44 Compensation Plane, 346 Tool length, 70 Tool radius, 71 Compensation memory, 72 Constant Binary constant, 482 Hexadecimal constant, 481 Integer constant, 481 Continuous-path mode, 357 Contour Accuracy, programmable, 457 Approach/leave, 312 Calculator, 259 Definition, 259 Element, 207 Point, 317 Contour corner Chamfer, 295 Round, 295 Contour definitions 3 straight lines, 265 Straight line with angle, 260 Two straight lines, 262 Coordinate system Workpiece, 35 Coordinate systems, 13 Coordinate systems, 27 Coordinate transformations (frames), 35 Coordinates Cartesian, 15, 209 Cylindrical, 214 Polar, 18, 213 Corner rounding, 357 CORROF, 415 CPRECOF, 457 CPRECON, 457 CR, 225, 233, 253 CROTS, 396 Index Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 657 CT, 225, 246 CUT2D, 344 CUT2DF, 344 CUTCONOF, 347 CUTCONON, 347 Cutting edge Center point, 72 Position, 72 Radius, 72 Cutting edges Number of contour tools, 345 Cutting rate, 100 Constant, 108 Cylinder thread, 275 Cylindrical coordinates, 214 D D number, 84 D..., 84 D0, 84 DAC, 200 DC, 191 DIACYCOFA, 200 DIAM90, 197 DIAM90A, 200 DIAMCHAN, 200 DIAMCHANA, 200 DIAMCYCOF, 197 Diameter programming, 197 DIAMOF, 197 DIAMOFA, 200 DIAMON, 197 DIAMONA, 200 DIC, 200 DILF, 290 Dimensions, 183 For rotary axes and spindles, 191 In inches, 194 In millimeters, 194 In the diameter, 197 In the radius, 197 Dimensions in inches, 194 Dimensions in millimeters, 194 DIN 66025, 39 DIN 66217, 28 Direction of rotation, 29 DISC, 319 DISCL, 323 DISR, 323 Distance Calculation, 474 DITE, 278 DITS, 278 DRFOF, 415 Drill, 77 DRIVE, 449 DRIVEA, 449 Dwell time, 458 DYNFINISH, 454 DYNNORM, 454 DYNPOS, 454 DYNROUGH, 454 DYNSEMIFIN, 454 E Edges Number, 85 Effectiveness modal, 477 Non-modal, 477 End of block LF, 49 Exact stop, 353 Extended address, 478 F F..., 119, 222, 281 FA, 129, 146 Face thread, 276 FAD, 323 FB, 164 FD, 154 FDA, 154 Feed for positioning axes, 146 Feedrate, 119, 222 For path axes, 122 For synchronized axes, 123 Inverse-time, 123 Override, 156 Override, programmable, 150 Tooth, 165 Units, 124 With handwheel override, 154 FFWOF, 456 FFWON, 456 FGREF, 119 FGROUP, 119 Fixed point Approach, 437 Index Fundamentals 658 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Fixed stop, 443 Clamping torque, 446 Monitoring, 446 FL, 119 FMA, 161 FP, 437 FPR, 146 FPRAOF, 146 FPRAON, 146 Frame, 369 Deselect, 414 Mirroring, programmable, 403 Operations, 371 Rotation, with solid angle, 396 Scaling, programmable, 398 Frames, 35 FRC, 295 FRCM, 295 FXS, 443 FXST, 443 FXSW, 443 FZ, 165 G G function groups, 568 G functions, 568 G group Technology, 454 G0, 213, 217 G1, 213, 222 G110, 211 G111, 211 G112, 211 G140, 323 G141, 323 G142, 323 G143, 323 G147, 323 G148, 323 G153, 173, 414 G17, 179, 345 G18, 179 G19, 179, 345 G2, 213, 225, 229, 233, 236, 239 G247, 323 G248, 323 G25, 118, 429 G26, 118, 429 G3, 213, 225, 229, 233, 236, 239 G33, 270 G331, 283 G332, 283 G34, 281 G340, 323 G341, 323 G347, 323 G348, 323 G35, 281 G4, 458 G40, 301 G41, 84, 301 G42, 84, 301 G450, 319 G451, 319 G460, 335 G461, 335 G462, 335 G500, 173 G505 to G599, 173 G53, 173, 414 G54, 173 G55, 173 G56, 173 G57, 173 G58, 381 G59, 381 G60, 353 G601, 353 G602, 353 G603, 353 G63, 288 G64, 357 G641, 357 G642, 357 G643, 357 G644, 357 G645, 357 G70, 194 G700, 194 G71, 194 G710, 194 G74, 436 G75, 437 G751, 437 G9, 353 G90, 183 G91, 186 G93, 119 G94, 119 G95, 119 G96, 108 G961, 108 G962, 108 Index Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 659 G97, 108 G971, 108 G972, 108 G973, 108 Geometry Axes, 463 Geometry axes, 31 Grinding tools, 78 Grinding wheel Peripheral speed, 115 GWPS, 78, 115 GWPSOF, 115 GWPSON, 115 H Handwheel Override, 154 Helix interpolation, 250 Hexadecimal Constant, 481 I I, 283 I..., 270, 281 IC, 186 Identifier, 40, 479 for character string, 49 for special numerical values, 49 for system variables, 49 Variable identifiers, 480 Incremental dimension, 21 Incremental dimensions, 21, 186 Internal preprocessing stop, 460 Interpolation Linear, 220 Non-linear, 220 Interpolation parameter IP, 477 INVCCW, 253 INVCW, 253 Involute, 253 IP, 477 J J, 229, 283 J..., 281 Jerk Limitation, 449 JERKLIMA, 452 K K, 225, 229, 283 K..., 270, 281 Kinematic transformation, 31 KONT, 312 KONTC, 312 KONTT, 312 L Left-hand thread, 272 LF, 49 LFOF, 290 LFON, 290 LFPOS, 290 LFTXT, 290 LFWP, 290 LIMS, 108 LINE FEED, 42 Link Axes, 468 Lead link axis, 470 LookAhead, 362 M M functions, 423 M..., 423 M0, 423 M1, 423 M19, 135, 423 M2, 423 M3, 95 M4, 95 M40, 423 M41, 423 M42, 423 M43, 423 M44, 423 M45, 423 M5, 95 M6, 61, 423 M70, 135 Machine coordinate system, 27 Machines Axes, 465 Master spindle, 464 MCS, 27 MD10652, 259 MD10654, 259 Messages, 427 Index Fundamentals 660 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Milling tools, 75 MIRROR, 371 MIRROR, 403 Modal, 41 Monitoring Fixed stop, 444 MSG, 357, 427 N Names, 37 NC high-level language, 40 NC program Creating, 47 NC programming Character set, 49 Non-modal, 41 NORM, 312 O OFFN, 301 Offset Tool length, 88 Tool radius, 88 Operations List, 483 Optional stop, 426 OVR, 150 OVRA, 150 OVRRAP, 150 P PAROT, 410 PAROTOF, 410 Path Axes, 465 Path tangent, 316 Planes Change, 390 PLC Axes, 467 PM, 323 Polar angle, 18, 214 Polar coordinates, 18, 213 Polar radius, 18, 214 Pole, 211 POLF, 290 POLFMASK, 290 POLFMLIN, 290 POS, 129 POSA, 129 Position offset, 415 Positioning axes, 466 Positions Read, 334 POSP, 129 PR, 323 Preprocessing stop Internal, 460 Program End, 41, 426 Header, 51 Name, 37 Programmed stop, 426 Programming commands List, 483 Programming the end point, 329 Punch tape format, 38 Q QU, 421 R RAC, 200 Radius Effective, 126 Radius programming, 197 Rapid traverse motion, 217 Rate Cutting, 100 Reference point, 25 Reference point approach, 436 Reference points, 25 Reference radius, 126 Retraction Direction for thread cutting, 291 RIC, 200 Right-hand thread, 272 Risk of collision, 315 RND, 265, 295 RNDM, 295 ROT, 371, 384 Rotation Programmable, 384 ROTS, 396 Rounding, 295 RP, 213, 217, 222, 225, 239, 250 RPL, 384 Index Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 661 RTLIOF, 217 RTLION, 217 S S, 95, 115 S1, 95 S2, 95 SCALE, 371, 398 Scale factor, 398 SCC, 108 SD42440, 187 SD42442, 187 SD42465, 364 SD42940, 91 SD42950, 91 SD43240, 138 SD43250, 138 SETMS, 95 SF, 270 Skip levels, 46 Slotting saw, 82 SOFT, 449 SOFTA, 449 Solid angle, 396 SPCOF, 134 SPCON, 134 Special axes, 464 Special characters, 49 Special tools, 82 Spindle Direction of rotation, 95 M functions, 426 Main, 464 Mode, position-controlled, 134 Positioning, 135 Speed, 95, 100 Speed limitation, 118 SPOS, 135 SPOSA, 135 SR, 161 SRA, 161 ST, 161 STA, 161 Start point offset For thread cutting, 271 Starting point, 25, 207 Statement, 39 Stop At the end of the cycle, 426 Optional, 426 Programmed, 426 Straight lines Interpolation, 222 SUPA, 173, 414 S-value Interpretation, 98 SVC, 100 Synchronized Axes, 467 SZS, 34 T T..., 61 T=..., 60 T0, 60, 61 Tapered thread, 277 Tapping With compensating chuck, 288 Without compensating chuck, 283 Target point, 207 Thread Chain, 271 Cutting, 270, 290 Direction of rotation, 272 Multiple, 271 Thread cutting, 281 Thread lead, 281 Three-finger rule, 28 TOFF, 88 TOFFL, 88 TOFFR, 88 TOFRAME, 410 TOFRAMEX, 410 TOFRAMEY, 410 TOFRAMEZ, 410 Tool Change point, 25 Compensation memory, 72 Cutting edge, 84 Group, 74 Length compensation, 70 Radius compensation, 71, 301 Speed, maximum, 102 Tip, 72 Type, 74 Type number, 74 Tool edge Reference point, 350 Tool Offset, 88 Tool point Direction, relevant, 350 Index Fundamentals 662 Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Tool radius compensation At outside corners, 319 CUT2D, 345 Toolholder Reference point, 25 Tooth feedrate, 165 TOROT, 410 TOROTOF, 410 TOROTX, 410 TOROTY, 410 TOROTZ, 410 TRAFOOF, 436 TRANS, 371, 376 Transition circle, 343 Transition radius, 320 Transverse axis, 197, 206 Travel command, 207 TURN, 250 Turning tools, 80 V Value assignment, 43 Variable identifiers, 480 VELOLIMA, 452 W WAB, 323 WAITMC, 129 WAITP, 129 WAITS, 135 WALCS0, 433 WALCS1-10, 433 WALIMOF, 429 WALIMON, 429 WCS, 35 Working area limitation in BCS, 429 in WCS/SZS, 433 Reference points on the tool, 432 Working plane, 23, 179 Workpiece Contour, 208 Workpiece coordinate system, 35 Align on workpiece, 410 X X..., 209 X2, 260 X3, 262 Y Y..., 209 Z Z..., 209 Z1, 262, 265 Z2, 260, 262, 265 Z3, 265 Z4, 265 Zero frame, 175 Zero offset Offset values, 177 Settable, 34 Variable, 173 Zero point Offset, programmable, 376 Zero point Machine, 25 Workpiece, 25 Zero point Offset, axial, 381 Zero points, 25 For turning, 205 Zero system Settable, 34 Legal information Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NÜRNBERG GERMANY Order number: 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Ⓟ 06/2009 Copyright © Siemens AG 2009. Technical data subject to change Preface SINUMERIK Documentation The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in three parts: ● General Documentation ● User Documentation ● Manufacturer/service documentation Information on the following topics is available at http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/docu: ● Ordering documentation Here you can find an up-to-date overview of publications ● Downloading documentation Links to more information for downloading files from Service & Support. ● Researching documentation online Information on DOConCD and direct access to the publications in DOConWeb. ● Compiling individual documentation on the basis of Siemens contents with the My Documentation Manager (MDM), refer to http://www.siemens.com/mdm. My Documentation Manager provides you with a range of features for generating your own machine documentation. ● Training and FAQs Information on our range of training courses and FAQs (frequently asked questions) are available via the page navigation. Target group This publication is intended for: ● Programmers ● Project engineers Benefits With the programming manual, the target group can develop, write, test, and debug programs and software user interfaces. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 3 Preface Standard scope This Programming Manual describes the functionality afforded by standard functions. Extensions or changes made by the machine tool manufacturer are documented by the machine tool manufacturer. Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when servicing. Further, for the sake of simplicity, this documentation does not contain all detailed information about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case of installation, operation or maintenance. Technical Support If you have any questions, please contact our hotline: Europe/Africa Phone Fax Internet +49 180 5050 - 222 +49 180 5050 - 223 http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request €0.14/min. from German landlines, mobile phone prices may differ America Phone Fax E-mail +1 423 262 2522 +1 423 262 2200 mailto:[email protected] Asia/Pacific Phone Fax E-mail +86 1064 757575 +86 1064 747474 mailto:[email protected] Note You will find telephone numbers for other countries for technical support on the Internet: http://www.automation.siemens.com/partner 4 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Preface Questions about the manual If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this documentation, please fax or e-mail us: Fax: E-mail: +49 9131- 98 2176 mailto:[email protected] A fax form is available in the appendix of this document. SINUMERIK Internet address http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik "Fundamentals" and "Job planning" Programming Manual The description of the NC programming is divided into two manuals: 1. Fundamentals This "Fundamentals" Programming Manual is intended for use by skilled machine operators with the appropriate expertise in drilling, milling and turning operations. Simple programming examples are used to explain the commands and statements which are also defined according to DIN 66025. 2. Job planning The Programming Manual "Job planning" is intended for use by technicians with in-depth, comprehensive programming knowledge. By virtue of a special programming language, the SINUMERIK control enables the user to program complex workpiece programs (e.g. for free-form surfaces, channel coordination, ...) and makes programming of complicated operations easy for technologists. Availability of the described NC language elements All NC language elements described in the manual are available for the SINUMERIK 840D sl. The availability regarding SINUMERIK 828D can be found in column "828D" of the "List of statements (Page 483) ". Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 5 Preface 6 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Table of contents Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 Fundamental geometrical principles ........................................................................................................ 13 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.4.5 1.4.6 2 2.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 4 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 Workpiece positions.....................................................................................................................13 Workpiece coordinate systems ....................................................................................................13 Cartesian coordinates ..................................................................................................................14 Polar coordinates .........................................................................................................................18 Absolute dimensions....................................................................................................................19 Incremental dimension.................................................................................................................21 Working planes ............................................................................................................................23 Zero points and reference points .................................................................................................25 Coordinate systems .....................................................................................................................27 Machine coordinate system (MCS)..............................................................................................27 Basic coordinate system (BCS) ...................................................................................................31 Basic zero system (BZS) .............................................................................................................33 Settable zero system (SZS) .........................................................................................................34 Workpiece coordinate system (WCS)..........................................................................................35 What is the relationship between the various coordinate systems? ............................................36 Name of an NC program..............................................................................................................37 Structure and contents of an NC program ...................................................................................39 Blocks and block components .....................................................................................................39 Block rules....................................................................................................................................42 Value assignments.......................................................................................................................43 Comments....................................................................................................................................44 Skipping blocks ............................................................................................................................45 Basic procedure ...........................................................................................................................47 Available characters.....................................................................................................................49 Program header ...........................................................................................................................51 Program examples.......................................................................................................................53 Example 1: First programming steps ...........................................................................................53 Example 2: NC program for turning .............................................................................................54 Example 3: NC program for milling ..............................................................................................56 Tool change without tool management........................................................................................60 Tool change with T command......................................................................................................60 Tool change with M6....................................................................................................................61 Tool change with tool management (option)................................................................................63 Tool change with T command with active tool management (option)..........................................63 Tool change with M6 with active tool management (option)........................................................66 Fundamental principles of NC programming............................................................................................ 37 Creating an NC program.......................................................................................................................... 47 Tool change............................................................................................................................................. 59 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 7 Table of contents 4.3 5 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5 5.5.6 5.5.7 5.6 5.7 5.8 6 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 7 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 8 8.1 Behavior with faulty T programming ........................................................................................... 68 General information about the tool offsets .................................................................................. 69 Tool length compensation ........................................................................................................... 70 Tool radius compensation ........................................................................................................... 71 Tool compensation memory........................................................................................................ 72 Tool types.................................................................................................................................... 74 General information about the tool types .................................................................................... 74 Milling tools ................................................................................................................................. 75 Drills ............................................................................................................................................ 77 Grinding tools .............................................................................................................................. 78 Turning tools ............................................................................................................................... 80 Special tools................................................................................................................................ 82 Chaining rule ............................................................................................................................... 83 Tool offset call (D) ....................................................................................................................... 84 Change in the tool offset data ..................................................................................................... 87 Programmable tool offset (TOFFL, TOFF, TOFFR).................................................................... 88 Spindle speed (S), direction of spindle rotation (M3, M4, M5).................................................... 95 Cutting rate (SVC)..................................................................................................................... 100 Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) ....................... 108 Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPSON, GWPSOF).......................................... 115 Programmable spindle speed limitation (G25, G26)................................................................. 118 Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF).............................................................. 119 Traversing positioning axes (POS, POSA, POSP, FA, WAITP, WAITMC) .............................. 129 Position-controlled spindle operation (SPCON, SPCOF) ......................................................... 134 Positioning spindles (SPOS, SPOSA, M19, M70, WAITS)....................................................... 135 Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA, FPR, FPRAON, FPRAOF) .................................. 146 Programmable feedrate override (OVR, OVRRAP, OVRA) ..................................................... 150 Programmable acceleration override (ACC) (option)................................................................ 152 Feedrate with handwheel override (FD, FDA) .......................................................................... 154 Feedrate optimization for curved path sections (CFTCP, CFC, CFIN)..................................... 158 Several feedrate values in one block (F, ST, SR, FMA, STA, SRA)......................................... 161 Non-modal feedrate (FB) .......................................................................................................... 164 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) ........................................................................................................... 165 Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) ......................... 173 Tool offsets .............................................................................................................................................. 69 Spindle motion ......................................................................................................................................... 95 Feed control........................................................................................................................................... 119 Geometry settings.................................................................................................................................. 173 8 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Table of contents 8.2 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6 8.3.7 8.4 9 9.1 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 9.5.4 9.5.5 9.5.6 9.5.7 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.8.1 9.8.2 9.8.3 9.8.4 9.9 9.9.1 9.9.2 9.10 9.11 9.12 9.13 9.14 Selection of the working plane (G17/G18/G19) .........................................................................179 Dimensions ................................................................................................................................183 Absolute dimensions (G90, AC).................................................................................................183 Incremental dimensions (G91, IC) .............................................................................................186 Absolute and incremental dimensions for turning and milling (G90/G91) .................................190 Absolute dimension for rotary axes (DC, ACP, ACN)................................................................191 Inch or metric dimensions (G70/G700, G71/G710) ...................................................................194 Channel-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMON, DIAM90, DIAMOF, DIAMCYCOF) ............................................................................................................................197 Axis-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMONA, DIAM90A, DIAMOFA, DIACYCOFA, DIAMCHANA, DIAMCHAN, DAC, DIC, RAC, RIC) ............................................200 Position of workpiece for turning................................................................................................205 Travel commands with Cartesian coordinates (G0, G1, G2, G3, X..., Y..., Z...)........................209 Travel commands with polar coordinates ..................................................................................211 Reference point of the polar coordinates (G110, G111, G112).................................................211 Travel commands with polar coordinates (G0, G1, G2, G3, AP, RP)........................................213 Rapid traverse movement (G0, RTLION, RTLIOF) ...................................................................217 Linear interpolation (G1) ............................................................................................................222 Circular interpolation ..................................................................................................................225 Circular interpolation types (G2/G3, ...) .....................................................................................225 Circular interpolation with center point and end point (G2/G3, X... Y... Z..., I... J... K...) ...........229 Circular interpolation with radius and end point (G2/G3, X... Y... Z.../ I... J... K..., CR) .............233 Circular interpolation with opening angle and center point (G2/G3, X... Y... Z.../ I... J... K..., AR)......................................................................................................................................236 Circular interpolation with polar coordinates (G2/G3, AP, RP)..................................................239 Circular interpolation with intermediate point and end point (CIP, X... Y... Z..., I1... J1... K1...)...........................................................................................................................................242 Circular interpolation with tangential transition (CT, X... Y... Z...)..............................................246 Helical interpolation (G2/G3, TURN) .........................................................................................250 Involute interpolation (INVCW, INVCCW)..................................................................................253 Contour definitions .....................................................................................................................259 Contour definitions: One straight line (ANG) .............................................................................260 Contour definitions: Two straight lines (ANG)............................................................................262 Contour definitions: Three straight line (ANG)...........................................................................265 Contour definitions: End point programming with angle ............................................................269 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33)....................................................................................270 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33, SF) .............................................................................270 Programmable run-in and run-out paths (DITS, DITE) ..............................................................278 Thread cutting with increasing or decreasing lead (G34, G35) .................................................281 Tapping without compensating chuck (G331, G332) ................................................................283 Tapping with compensating chuck (G63) ..................................................................................288 Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON, LFOF, DILF, ALF, LFTXT, LFWP, LFPOS, POLF, POLFMASK, POLFMLIN)...............................................................................................290 Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM)....................................................295 Motion commands ................................................................................................................................. 207 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 9 Table of contents 10 Tool radius compensation...................................................................................................................... 301 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.4.1 10.4.2 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) ................................................................. 301 Contour approach and retraction (NORM, KONT, KONTC, KONTT)....................................... 312 Compensation at the outside corners (G450, G451, DISC) ..................................................... 319 Smooth approach and retraction............................................................................................... 323 Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) ......................................................................................... 323 Approach and retraction with enhanced retraction strategies (G460, G461, G462)................. 335 Collision monitoring (CDON, CDOF, CDOF2) .......................................................................... 340 2D tool compensation (CUT2D, CUT2DF)................................................................................ 344 Keep tool radius compensation constant (CUTCONON, CUTCONOF) ................................... 347 Tools with a relevant cutting edge position ............................................................................... 350 Exact stop (G60, G9, G601, G602, G603)................................................................................ 353 Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS)................. 357 Frames ...................................................................................................................................... 369 Frame instructions..................................................................................................................... 371 Programmable zero offset......................................................................................................... 376 Zero offset (TRANS, ATRANS)................................................................................................. 376 Axial zero offset (G58, G59)...................................................................................................... 381 Programmable rotation (ROT, AROT, RPL) ............................................................................. 384 Programmable frame rotations with solid angles (ROTS, AROTS, CROTS) ........................... 396 Programmable scale factor (SCALE, ASCALE)........................................................................ 398 Programmable mirroring (MIRROR, AMIRROR) ...................................................................... 403 Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME, TOROT, PAROT) ...................... 410 Deselect frame (G53, G153, SUPA, G500) .............................................................................. 414 Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF, CORROF) ............................................................ 415 M functions ................................................................................................................................ 423 Messages (MSG) ...................................................................................................................... 427 Working area limitation.............................................................................................................. 429 Working area limitation in BCS (G25/G26, WALIMON, WALIMOF) ......................................... 429 Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 ... WALCS10) ................................................ 433 Reference point approach (G74) .............................................................................................. 436 Fixed-point approach (G75, G751) ........................................................................................... 437 Travel to fixed stop (FXS, FXST, FXSW).................................................................................. 443 11 Path action............................................................................................................................................. 353 11.1 11.2 12 Coordinate transformations (frames) ..................................................................................................... 369 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.3.1 12.3.2 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 12.9 12.10 13 14 Auxiliary function outputs ....................................................................................................................... 419 13.1 14.1 14.2 14.2.1 14.2.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 Supplementary commands .................................................................................................................... 427 10 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Table of contents 14.6 14.6.1 14.6.2 14.6.3 14.7 14.8 14.9 14.10 15 15.1 15.1.1 15.1.2 15.1.3 15.1.4 15.1.5 15.1.6 15.1.7 15.1.8 15.1.9 15.1.10 15.1.11 15.1.12 15.2 15.3 15.4 15.5 15.6 16 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 16.6 A A.1 A.2 A.3 Acceleration behavior ................................................................................................................449 Acceleration mode (BRISK, BRISKA, SOFT, SOFTA, DRIVE, DRIVEA) .................................449 Influence of acceleration on following axes (VELOLIMA, ACCLIMA, JERKLIMA)....................452 Activation of technology-specific dynamic values (DYNNORM, DYNPOS, DYNROUGH, DYNSEMIFIN, DYNFINISH) ......................................................................................................454 Traversing with feedforward control, FFWON, FFWOF.............................................................456 Contour accuracy, CPRECON, CPRECOF ...............................................................................457 Dwell time (G4) ..........................................................................................................................458 Internal preprocessing stop........................................................................................................460 Axes ...........................................................................................................................................461 Main axes/Geometry axes .........................................................................................................463 Special axes...............................................................................................................................464 Main spindle, master spindle .....................................................................................................464 Machine axes .............................................................................................................................465 Channel axes .............................................................................................................................465 Path axes ...................................................................................................................................465 Positioning axes .........................................................................................................................466 Synchronized axes.....................................................................................................................467 Command axes ..........................................................................................................................467 PLC axes....................................................................................................................................467 Link axes ....................................................................................................................................468 Lead link axes ............................................................................................................................470 From travel command to machine movement ...........................................................................473 Path calculation..........................................................................................................................474 Addresses ..................................................................................................................................475 Identifiers....................................................................................................................................479 Constants ...................................................................................................................................481 List of statements.......................................................................................................................483 Addresses ..................................................................................................................................558 G function groups.......................................................................................................................568 Predefined subroutine calls........................................................................................................588 Predefined subroutine calls in motion-synchronous actions......................................................607 Predefined functions ..................................................................................................................608 List of abbreviations ...................................................................................................................617 Feedback on the documentation................................................................................................623 Documentation overview............................................................................................................625 Other information ................................................................................................................................... 461 Tables.................................................................................................................................................... 483 Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 617 Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 627 Index...................................................................................................................................................... 655 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 11 Table of contents 12 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.1 1.1.1 1 1.1 Workpiece positions Workpiece coordinate systems In order that the machine or the control can work with the positions specified in the NC program, these specifications have to be made in a reference system that can be transferred to the directions of motion of the machine axes. A coordinate system with the axes X, Y and Z is used for this purpose. DIN 66217 stipulates that machine tools must use clockwise, right-angled (Cartesian) coordinate systems. Figure 1-1 Workpiece coordinate system for milling Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 13 it is possible to clearly describe every point in the coordinate system and therefore every workpiece position through the direction (X. 1. positions that are to the left of the zero point are assigned a negative sign ("-").Fundamental geometrical principles 1. and Z0. Sometimes it is advisable or even necessary to work with negative position specifications. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .1.2 Cartesian coordinates The axes in the coordinate system are assigned dimensions. In this way. Y0.1 Workpiece positions Figure 1-2 Workpiece coordinate system for turning The workpiece zero (W) is the origin of the workpiece coordinate system. 14 Fundamentals Programming Manual. For this reason. 06/2009. Y and Z) and three numerical values The workpiece zero always has the coordinates X0. Fundamental geometrical principles 1. the X/Y plane: Points P1 to P4 have the following coordinates: Position P1 P2 P3 P4 Coordinates X100 Y50 X-50 Y100 X-105 Y-115 X70 Y-75 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 15 . we will only consider one plane of the coordinate system in the following example.1 Workpiece positions Position specifications in the form of Cartesian coordinates To simplify things. 06/2009. 1 Workpiece positions Example: Workpiece positions for turning With lathes.5 X40 Z-15 X40 Z-25 X60 Z-35 16 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 06/2009. one plane is sufficient to describe the contour: Points P1 to P4 have the following coordinates: Position P1 P2 P3 P4 Coordinates X25 Z-7.Fundamental geometrical principles 1. the third coordinate (in this case Z) must also be assigned a numerical value. 06/2009.e.Fundamental geometrical principles 1. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 17 . the feed depth must also be described. i.1 Workpiece positions Example: Workpiece positions for milling For milling. Points P1 to P3 have the following coordinates: Position P1 P2 P3 Coordinates X10 Y45 Z-5 X30 Y60 Z-20 X45 Y20 Z-15 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Negative polar angles are in the clockwise direction.1 Workpiece positions 1. This is useful when a workpiece or part of a workpiece has been dimensioned with radius and angle. Example Points P1 and P2 can then be described – with reference to the pole – as follows: Position P1 P2 Polar coordinates RP=100 AP=30 RP=60 AP=75 RP: Polar radius AP: Polar angle 18 Fundamentals Programming Manual. The point from which the dimensioning starts is called the "pole". Position specifications in the form of polar coordinates Polar coordinates are made up of the polar radius and the polar angle. positive polar angles in the counterclockwise direction.Fundamental geometrical principles 1. The polar angle is the angle between the polar radius and the horizontal axis of the working plane. 06/2009.3 Polar coordinates Polar coordinates can be used instead of Cartesian coordinates to describe workpiece positions. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .1. The polar radius is the distance between the pole and the position. Applied to tool movement this means: the position. 06/2009. to which the tool is to travel.4 Absolute dimensions Position specifications in absolute dimensions With absolute dimensions.1.5 X40 Z-15 X40 Z-25 X60 Z-35 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 19 . Example: Turning In absolute dimensions.1 Workpiece positions 1.Fundamental geometrical principles 1. all the position specifications refer to the currently valid zero point. the following position specifications result for points P1 to P4: Position P1 P2 P3 P4 Position specification in absolute dimensions X25 Z-7. Fundamental geometrical principles 1.1 Workpiece positions Example: Milling In absolute dimensions, the following position specifications result for points P1 to P3: Position P1 P2 P3 Position specification in absolute dimensions X20 Y35 X50 Y60 X70 Y20 20 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.1 Workpiece positions 1.1.5 Incremental dimension Position specifications in incremental dimensions In production drawings, the dimensions often do not refer to a zero point, but to another workpiece point. So that these dimensions do not have to be converted, they can be specified in incremental dimensions. In this method of dimensional notation, a position specification refers to the previous point. Applied to tool movement this means: The incremental dimensions describe the distance the tool is to travel. Example: Turning In incremental dimensions, the following position specifications result for points P2 to P4: Position P2 P3 P4 Position specification in incremental dimensions The specification refers to: X15 Z-7.5 Z-10 X20 Z-10 P1 P2 P3 Note With DIAMOF or DIAM90 active, the set distance in incremental dimensions (G91) is programmed as a radius dimension. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 21 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.1 Workpiece positions Example: Milling The position specifications for points P1 to P3 in incremental dimensions are: In incremental dimensions, the following position specifications result for points P1 to P3: Position P1 P2 P3 Position specification in incremental dimensions X20 Y35 X30 Y20 X20 Y -35 The specification refers to: Zero point P1 P2 22 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.2 Working planes 1.2 1.2 Working planes An NC program must contain information about the plane in which the work is to be performed. Only then can the control unit calculate the correct tool offsets during the execution of the NC program. The specification of the working plane is also relevant for certain types of circular-path programming and polar coordinates. Two coordinate axes define a working plane. The third coordinate axis is perpendicular to this plane and determines the infeed direction of the tool (e.g. for 2D machining). Working planes for turning/milling Figure 1-3 Working planes for turning Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 23 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.2 Working planes Figure 1-4 Working planes for milling Programming of the working planes The working planes are defined in the NC program with the G commands G17, G18 and G19 as follows: G command G17 G18 G19 Working plane X/Y Z/X Y/Z Infeed direction Z Y X Abscissa X Z Y Ordinate Y X Z Applicate Z Y X 24 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.3 Zero points and reference points 1.3 1.3 Zero points and reference points Various zero points and reference points are defined on an NC machine: Zero points M Machine zero The machine zero defines the machine coordinate system (MCS). All other reference points refer to the machine zero. W Workpiece zero = program zero The workpiece zero defines the workpiece coordinate system in relation to the machine zero. A Blocking point Can be the same as the workpiece zero (only for lathes). Reference points R Reference point Position defined by output cam and measuring system. The distance to the machine zero M must be known so that the axis position at this point can be set exactly to this value. B T Starting point Can be defined by the program. The first machining tool starts here. Toolholder reference point Is on the toolholder. By entering the tool lengths, the control calculates the distance between the tool tip and the toolholder reference point. N Tool change point Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 25 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.3 Zero points and reference points Zero points and reference points for turning Zero points for milling 26 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.4 Coordinate systems 1.4 1.4 Coordinate systems A distinction is made between the following coordinate systems: ● Machine coordinate system (MCS) (Page 27) with the machine zero M ● Basic coordinate system (BCS) (Page 31) ● Basic zero system (BZS) (Page 33) ● Settable zero system (SZS) (Page 34) ● Workpiece coordinate system (WCS) (Page 35) with the workpiece zero W 1.4.1 Machine coordinate system (MCS) The machine coordinate system comprises all the physically existing machine axes. Reference points and tool and pallet changing points (fixed machine points) are defined in the machine coordinate system. If programming is performed directly in the machine coordinate system (possible with some G functions), the physical axes of the machine respond directly. Any workpiece clamping that is present is not taken into account. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 27 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.4 Coordinate systems Note If there are various machine coordinate systems (e.g. 5-axis transformation), then an internal transformation is used to map the machine kinematics on the coordinate system in which the programming is performed. Three-finger rule The orientation of the coordinate system relative to the machine depends on the machine type. The axis directions follow the so-called "three-finger rule" of the right hand (according to DIN 66217). Seen from in front of the machine, the middle finger of the right hand points in the opposite direction to the infeed of the main spindle. Therefore: ● the thumb points in the +X direction ● the index finger points in the +Y direction ● the middle finger points in the +Z direction Figure 1-5 "Three-finger rule" 28 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.4 Coordinate systems Rotary motions around the coordinate axes X, Y and Z are designated A, B and C. If the rotary motion is in a clockwise direction when looking in the positive direction of the coordinate axis, the direction of rotation is positive: Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 29 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.4 Coordinate systems Position of the coordinate system in different machine types The position of the coordinate system resulting from the "three-finger rule" can have a different orientation for different machine types. Here are a few examples: 30 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.4 Coordinate systems 1.4.2 Basic coordinate system (BCS) The basic coordinate system (BCS) consists of three mutually perpendicular axes (geometry axes) as well as other special axes, which are not interrelated geometrically. Machine tools without kinematic transformation BCS and MCS always coincide when the BCS can be mapped onto the MCS without kinematic transformation (e.g. 5-axis transformation, TRANSMIT/TRACYL/TRAANG). On such machines, machine axes and geometry axes can have the same names. Figure 1-6 MCS = BCS without kinematic transformation Machine tools with kinematic transformation BCS and MCS do not coincide when the BCS is mapped onto the MCS with kinematic transformation (e.g. 5-axis transformation, TRANSMIT/TRACYL/TRAANG). On such machines the machine axes and geometry axes must have different names. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 31 Fundamental geometrical principles 1.4 Coordinate systems Figure 1-7 Kinematic transformation between the MCS and BCS Machine kinematics The workpiece is always programmed in a two or three dimensional, right-angled coordinate system (WCS). However, such workpieces are being programmed ever more frequently on machine tools with rotary axes or linear axes not perpendicular to one another. Kinematic transformation is used to represent coordinates programmed in the workpiece coordinate system (rectangular) in real machine movements. References Function Manual, Extended Functions; Kinematic Transformation (M1) Function Manual, Special Functions; 3-Axis to 5-Axis Transformation (F2) 32 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 for example. Basic Functions. to define the palette window zero. Basic offset The basic offset describes the coordinate transformation between BCS and BZS. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 33 . The basic offset comprises: ● Zero offset external ● DRF offset ● Overlaid movement ● Chained system frames ● Chained basic frames References Function Manual. 06/2009.3 Basic zero system (BZS) The basic zero system (BZS) is the basic coordinate system with a basic offset.Fundamental geometrical principles 1. It can be used.4. Frames (K2) Fundamentals Programming Manual. Axes.4 Coordinate systems 1. Coordinate Systems. .G57 and G505. Settable zero offsets are activated in the NC program with the G commands G54. 06/2009.4 Settable zero system (SZS) Settable zero offset The "settable zero system" (SZS) results from the basic zero system (BZS) through the settable zero offset..G599 as follows: If no programmable coordinate transformations (frames) are active. then the "settable zero system" is the workpiece coordinate system (WCS)..4. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Fundamental geometrical principles 1. 34 Fundamentals Programming Manual..4 Coordinate systems 1. In other words.4 Coordinate systems Programmable coordinate transformations (frames) Sometimes it is useful or necessary within an NC program. Fundamentals Programming Manual.5 Workpiece coordinate system (WCS) The geometry of a workpiece is described in the workpiece coordinate system (WCS). The workpiece coordinate system is always a Cartesian coordinate system and assigned to a specific workpiece. 1. See Section: "Coordinate transformations (frames)" Note Programmable coordinate transformations (frames) always refer to the "settable zero system". 06/2009. This is performed using programmable coordinate transformations (frames).4. if required. to rotate it.Fundamental geometrical principles 1. mirror it and/or scale it. to move the originally selected workpiece coordinate system (or the "settable zero system") to another position and. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 35 . the data in the NC program refer to the workpiece coordinate system. 4 Coordinate systems 1.4. i.6 What is the relationship between the various coordinate systems? The example in the following figure should help clarify the relationships between the various coordinate systems: ① ② ③ ④ A kinematic transformation is not active. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 36 Fundamentals Programming Manual. The "settable zero system" (SZS) for Workpiece 1 or Workpiece 2 is specified by the settable zero offset G54 or G55. 06/2009. the machine coordinate system and the basic coordinate system coincide.Fundamental geometrical principles 1. The workpiece coordinate system (WCS) results from programmable coordinate transformation. The basic zero system (BZS) with the pallet zero result from the basic offset.e. . Examples: _MPF100 SHAFT SHAFT_2 Fundamentals Programming Manual.. 06/2009.Z. 2.. However. a. then an NC program can be called as subroutine from another program just by specifying the program name. ● Permissible characters are: – Letters: A...1 2..9 – Underscores: _ ● The first two characters should be: – Two letters or – An underscore and a letter If this condition is satisfied.Fundamental principles of NC programming 2 Note DIN 66025 is the guideline for NC programming. taking the following conditions into account: ● The name should not have more than 24 characters as only the first 24 characters of a program name are displayed on the NC.1 Name of an NC program Rules for program names Each NC program has a different name. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 37 . the name can be chosen freely during program creation.z – Numbers: 0. if the program name starts with a number then the subroutine call is only possible via the CALL statement. 38 Fundamentals Programming Manual.1 Name of an NC program Files in punch tape format Externally created program files that are read into the NC via the RS-232-C must be present in punch tape format. creating and storing part programs.Fundamental principles of NC programming 2. please refer to the Operating Manual for your user interface. The following additional rules apply for the name of a file in punch tape format: ● The program name must begin with "%": %<Name> ● The program name must have a 3-character identifier: %<Name>_xxx Examples: ● %_N_SHAFT123_MPF ● %Flange3_MPF Note The name of a file stored internally in the NC memory starts with "_N_". 06/2009. References For further information on transferring. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 2. 06/2009. Meaning G function (preparatory function) Position data for the X axis Spindle speed Fundamentals Programming Manual. The sequence of digits can contain a sign and decimal point.2 2. Each block contains the data for the execution of a step in the workpiece machining. Block components NC blocks consist of the following components: ● Commands (statements) according to DIN 66025 ● Elements of the NC high-level language Commands according to DIN 66025 The commands according to DIN 66025 consist of an address character and a digit or sequence of digits representing an arithmetic value. Positive signs (+) and leading zeroes (0) do not have to be specified.1 Blocks 2. Address character (address) The address character (generally a letter) defines the meaning of the command. The sign always appears between the address letter and the sequence of digits. Examples: Address character G X S Digit sequence The digit sequence is the value assigned to the address character.Fundamental principles of NC programming 2.2 Structure and contents of an NC program 2. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 39 .2 Structure and contents of an NC program Blocks and block components An NC program consists of a sequence of NC blocks. e.Fundamental principles of NC programming 2. – OVR for speed override – SPOS for spindle positioning ● Identifiers (defined names) for: – System variables – User-defined variables – Subroutine – Keywords – Jump markers – Macros NOTICE An identifier must be unique and cannot be used for different objects.g. 40 Fundamentals Programming Manual. the commands of the NC high-level language consist of several address letters.2 Structure and contents of an NC program Elements of the NC high-level language As the command set according to DIN 66025 is no longer adequate for the programming of complex machining sequences in modern machine tools. it has been extended by the elements of the NC high-level language. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . These include. 06/2009. for example: ● Commands of the NC high-level language In contrast to the commands according to DIN 66025. End of program The last block in the execution sequence contains a special word for the end of program: M2. Section: Flexible NC programming Effectiveness of commands Commands are either modal or non-modal: ● Modal Modal commands retain their validity with the programmed value (in all following blocks) until: – A new value is programmed under the same command – A command is programmed that revokes the effect of the previously valid command ● Non-modal Non-modal commands only apply for the block in which they were programmed. M17 or M30. Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 41 .2 Structure and contents of an NC program ● Relational operators ● Logic operators ● Arithmetic functions ● Control structures References: Programming Manual. Job Planning. 06/2009.Fundamental principles of NC programming 2. e. Note Block numbers must be unique within a program in order to achieve an unambiguous result when searching. End of block A block ends with character "LF" (LINE FEED = new line).g. 06/2009.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . block numbers in rising order are recommended. Comments are also displayed. N40 . Note "LF" does not have to be written. however. The order of the block numbers is arbitrary..Fundamental principles of NC programming 2. Block length A block can contain a maximum of 512 characters (including the comment and end-of-block character "LF").2. Messages are displayed in a separate message window. These consist of the character "N" and a positive integer.2 Block rules Start of block NC blocks can be identified at the start of the block by block numbers.2 Structure and contents of an NC program 2. 42 Fundamentals Programming Manual. It is generated automatically by the line change. Note Three blocks of up to 66 characters each are normally displayed in the current block display on the screen. The "="-sign can be omitted if the address is a single letter and the value consists of only one constant. H… 2. ● Signs are permitted.g. the statements in a block should be arranged in the following order: N… G… X… Y… Z… F… S… T… D… M… H… Address N G X. 06/2009.Z F S T D M H Meaning Address of block number Preparatory function Positional data Feed Spindle speed Tool Tool offset number Additional function Auxiliary function Note Certain addresses can be used repeatedly within a block. ● Separators are permitted after the address letter.Y. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 43 .2 Structure and contents of an NC program Order of the statements In order to keep the block structure as clear as possible.Fundamental principles of NC programming 2. G….3 Value assignments Values can be assigned to the addresses. M…. The following rules apply: ● An "=" sign must be inserted between the address and the value if: – The address comprises more than one letter – The value includes more than one constant. e.2. Fundamentals Programming Manual. on November 21. A comment is at the end of a block and is separated from the program section of the NC block by a semicolon (". Smith. 2. comments can be added to the NC blocks. in order to distinguish an address with numeric extension from an address letter with a value. 12. or an operator. 12A71 . housing for submersible pump type TP23A Note Comments are stored and appear in the current block display when the program is running.".2. "=" required Value assignment by means of a numeric expression.Fundamental principles of NC programming 2. "("."). Dept. "[".2 Structure and contents of an NC program Examples: X10 X1=10 X=10*(5+SIN(37. "=" required Note A numeric extension must always be followed by one of the special characters "=".5)) Value assignment (10) to address X. 44 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Company G&S. Section no. "=" not required Value assignment (10) to address (X) with numeric extension (1). TV 4 . Program written by H. order no. ")".4 Comments To make an NC program easier to understand. 06/2009. 1994 . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . ". "]". Comment to explain the NC block Example 2: Program code N10 N20 N50 Comment . Example 1: Program code N10 G1 F100 X10 Y20 Comments . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 45 . the program continues with the next block. which are to be skipped are marked with an oblique "/" in front of the block number.2 Structure and contents of an NC program 2. execute a trial program run). Skipped . Is executed . The statements in the skipped blocks are not executed. which is not skipped. Is executed Fundamentals Programming Manual.5 Skipping blocks NC blocks.g. Example: Program code N10 /N20 … N30 … /N40 … N70 … Comment . which are not to be executed in every program pass (e.2. Several consecutive blocks can also be skipped. Skipped . Is executed . 06/2009. Programming Blocks.Fundamental principles of NC programming 2. can be skipped. . followed by the number of the skip level.. Block is skipped (8th skip level) . /8 N080... Programming is performed by assigning a forward slash. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . /7 N100.. 06/2009. Block is skipped (3rd skip level) Note The number of skip levels that can be used depends on a display machine data item. 46 Fundamentals Programming Manual. /1 N010. Block is skipped (1st skip level) . Only one skip level can be specified for each block.. ..Fundamental principles of NC programming 2. 10). Block is skipped (2nd skip level) .2 Structure and contents of an NC program Skip levels Blocks can be assigned to skip levels (max. Block is skipped (10th skip level) Comment . Note System and user variables can also be used in conditional jumps in order to control program execution. Block is skipped (1st skip level) . Example: Program code / . /0 .. /9 N090...... /2 N020... which can be activated via the user interface.. . Block is skipped (9th skip level) . rotating. As every part is not identical. it does not make sense to create every program in the same way. Procedure 1. mirroring and scaling useful or necessary (frame concept)? Fundamentals Programming Manual. However.1 Basic procedure 3 3. 06/2009. which is clear and free of errors. Prepare the workpiece drawing – Define the workpiece zero – Draw the coordinate system – Calculate any missing coordinates 2. Clearly structured programs are especially advantageous when changes have to be made later. the faster and easier it will be to produce a complete program. Programming of the actual instructions should be preceded by the planning and preparation of the operation steps.Creating an NC program 3. the following procedure has shown itself to be suitable in the most cases. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 47 . Define the machining sequence – Which tools are used when and for the machining of which contours? – In which order will the individual elements of the workpiece be machined? – Which individual elements are repeated (possibly also rotated) and should be stored in a subroutine? – Are there contour sections in other part programs or subroutines that could be used for the current workpiece? – Where are zero offsets.1 The programming of the individual operation steps in the NC language generally represents only a small proportion of the work in the development of an NC program. The more accurately you plan in advance how the NC program is to be structured and organized. Compile machining steps in the programming language – Write each individual step as an NC block (or NC blocks).g.1 Basic procedure 3.Creating an NC program 3. e. 06/2009. – Rapid traverse movements for positioning – Tool change – Define the machining plane – Retraction for checking – Switch spindle. 4. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Combine the individual steps into a program 48 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 5. coolant on/off – Call up tool data – Feed – Path correction – Approaching the contour – Retraction from the contour – etc. Create a machining plan Define all machining operations step-by-step. D. c.2 Available characters The following characters are available for writing NC programs: ● Upper-case characters: A. . . b. s. W. E. same effect as space character End of block Separator Separator (blank) Fundamentals Programming Manual. B. n. K. R. i. chain operator Assignment. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 49 . t. x. v. L. H. o. binary System variable identifiers Underscore. 1. h. end of label. I. q. r. identifier for special numerical values: hexadecimal. z ● Numbers: 0. 3. part of equation Division. l. 2.(O). k. d. G. g. & LF Tab character Space character Meaning Program start character (used only for writing programs on an external PC) For bracketing parameters or expressions For bracketing parameters or expressions For bracketing addresses or indexes For bracketing addresses or indexes Less than Greater than Main block. p. parameter separator Comment start Format character. C. 06/2009. Y. f. X. F. 9 ● Special characters: See the table below. w. e. u. identifier for character string Single quotation marks. j. Special characters % ( ) [ ] < > : = / * + " ' $ _ ? ! . Q. J. y. 6. 5. U. 4. 8.2 Available characters 3. T. S. belonging to letters Reserved Reserved Decimal point Comma.P. m. block suppression Multiplication Addition Subtraction. minus sign Double quotation marks.2 3. Z ● Lower-case characters: a.Creating an NC program 3. M. V. 7. N. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Note Non-printable special characters are treated like blanks. Note No distinction is made between upper and lower-case characters (exception: tool call).Creating an NC program 3.2 Available characters NOTICE Take care to differentiate between the letter "O" and the digit "0". 50 Fundamentals Programming Manual. speed limitation = 3000 rpm. Fundamentals Programming Manual. N50 DIAMON N60 G54 G18 G0 X82 Z0. X axis will be programmed in diameter.2 .3 3. . cooling on. approach starting position. . Call zero offset and working plane. are called the program header. The program header contains information/statements regarding: ● Tool change ● Tool offsets ● Spindle motion ● Feed control ● Geometry settings (zero offset. selection of the working plane) Program header for turning The following example shows the typical structure of an NC program header for turning: Program code N10 G0 G153 X200 Z500 T0 D0 N20 T5 N30 D1 N40 G96 S300 LIMS=3000 M4 M8 Comment .. 06/2009.3 Program header The NC blocks that are placed in front of the actual motion blocks for the machining of the workpiece contour. Swing in tool 5. Retract toolholder before tool turret is rotated. Constant cutting rate (Vc) = 300 m/min. direction of rotation counterclockwise. . . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 51 .3 Program header 3..Creating an NC program 3. . Activate cutting edge data record of the tool. spindle and coolant on If tool orientation / coordinate transformation is being used... TRANSMIT..3 Program header Program header for milling The following example shows the typical structure of an NC program header for milling: Program code N10 T="SF12" N20 M6 N30 D1 N40 G54 G17 N50 G0 X0 Y0 Z2 S2000 M3 M8 . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Creating an NC program 3. Alternative: T123 . Resetting of the swiveled plane . Trigger tool change . Zero offset and working plane . Approach to the workpiece. . TRACYL. Activate cutting edge data record of the tool . 06/2009... Comment . Comment .. 52 Fundamentals Programming Manual. any transformations still active should be deleted at the start of the program: Program code N10 CYCLE800() N20 TRAFOOF . Resetting of TRAORI. Retraction in rapid traverse . straight line in X . tool offset. End of block Fundamentals Programming Manual. Start the part program References: Operating Manual for the existing user interface Note In order that the program can run on the machine. Message "THIS IS MY NC PROGRAM" displayed in the alarm line . Feedrate. spindle clockwise . tool. Edit the part program 3. spindle. Create a new part program (name) 2.4 3. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 53 .4 Program examples Example 1: First programming steps Program example 1 is to be used to perform and test the first programming steps on the NC. Program example 1 Program code N10 MSG("THIS IS MY NC PROGRAM") N20 F200 S900 T1 D2 M3 N30 G0 X100 Y100 N40 G1 X150 N50 Y120 N60 X100 N70 Y100 N80 G0 X0 Y0 N100 M30 Comment . Straight line in X . 06/2009.4 Program examples 3. These alarms have to be reset first. Straight line in Y .Creating an NC program 3. Approach position in rapid traverse . Activate single block 5. Procedure 1. Note Alarms can occur during program verification. Select the part program 4. the machine data must have been set appropriately (→ machine manufacturer!).4. Rectangle with feedrate.1 3. Straight line in Y . 2 Example 2: NC program for turning Program example 2 is intended for the machining of a workpiece on a lathe. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Note In order that the program can run on the machine.4. Dimension drawing of the workpiece Figure 3-1 Top view 54 Fundamentals Programming Manual. the machine data must have been set appropriately (→ machine manufacturer!).Creating an NC program 3. It contains radius programming and tool radius compensation. 06/2009.4 Program examples 3. 06/2009. Select tool selection and offset .12 N120 G2 X50 Z-80 I6. End of program . Select constant cutting rate .245 K-5 N125 G0 G40 X100 Z50 M9 N130 G0 G53 X280 Z380 D0 M5 N135 M30 . Set tool with tool radius compensation Fundamentals Programming Manual. Call tool and select offset .4 Program examples Program example 2 Program code N5 G0 G53 X280 Z380 D0 N10 TRANS X0 Z250 N15 LIMS=4000 N20 G96 S250 M3 N25 G90 T1 D1 M8 N30 G0 G42 X-1. Turn radius 3 . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 55 . Turn radius 3 . Speed limitation (G96) . Set tool with tool radius compensation . Turn diameter 50 .25 N40 G3 X16 Z-4 I0 K-10 N45 G1 Z-12 N50 G2 X22 Z-15 CR=3 N55 G1 X24 N60 G3 X30 Z-18 I0 K-3 N65 G1 Z-20 N70 X35 Z-40 N75 Z-57 N80 G2 X41 Z-60 CR=3 N85 G1 X46 N90 X52 Z-63 N95 G0 G40 G97 X100 Z50 M9 N100 T2 D2 N105 G96 S210 M3 N110 G0 G42 X50 Z-60 M8 N115 G1 Z-70 F0. Deselect tool radius compensation and approach tool change location . Approach tool change location .5 Z1 N35 G1 X0 Z0 F0.Creating an NC program 3. Zero offset . Turn radius 3 . Select constant cutting rate . Retract tool and deselect tool radius compensation . Turn radius 10 Comment . Starting point . Turn radius 8 . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . It contains surface and side milling as well as drilling. Note In order that the program can run on the machine.3 Example 3: NC program for milling Program example 3 is intended for the machining of a workpiece on a vertical milling machine.Creating an NC program 3.4. the machine data must have been set appropriately (→ machine manufacturer!). Dimension drawing of the workpiece Figure 3-2 Side view 56 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009.4 Program examples 3. Fundamentals Programming Manual. . . . Load the tool into the spindle. Preselection of the tool with name PF60.Creating an NC program 3. . Basic settings of the geometry and approach starting point. Travel to the contour with feedrate = 1200 mm/min. direction of rotation. Speed. Z axis at safety clearance. . cooling on.4 Program examples Figure 3-3 Top view Program example 3 Program code N10 T="PF60" N20 M6 N30 S2000 M3 M8 N40 G90 G64 G54 G17 G0 X-72 Y-72 N50 G0 Z2 N60 G450 CFTCP N70 G1 Z-10 F3000 N80 G1 G41 X-40 N90 G1 X-40 Y30 RND=10 F1200 N100 G1 X40 Y30 CHR=10 N110 G1 X40 Y-30 N120 G1 X-41 Y-30 Comment . Milling tool at working depth with feedrate = 3000 mm/min. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 57 . . . Behavior with active G41/G42. . Activation of the milling tool radius compensation. .45.-13. . Basic settings of the geometry and approach starting point.0.0. Position pattern for drilling. Exact stop G60 for exact positioning. Call twist drill D 5 mm. .0. .800. 06/2009..5.21. direction of rotation. spindle + cooling off.-2.0.-5..2..1. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .0. N220 T="ZB6" N230 M6 N240 S5000 M3 M8 N250 G90 G60 G54 G17 X25 Y0 N260 G0 Z2 N270 MCALL CYCLE82(2. . .1. Speed.5) N210 G0 Z200 M5 M9 . N150 T="SF10" N160 M6 N170 S2800 M3 M8 N180 G90 G64 G54 G17 G0 X0 Y0 N190 G0 Z2 N200 POCKET4(2.1.25.1300. Retraction of the milling tool. Modal call of the drilling cycle.0. Resetting of the drilling cycle End of program..5. Load the tool into the spindle.0) N380 REPEAT POSITION N390 MCALL N400 G0 Z200 M5 M9 N410 M30 . . spindle + cooling off. .0.0. .Creating an NC program 3.6. Modal call of the drilling cycle.15. Resetting of the modal call. Repetition of the position description from centering. . End identifier for repetition. . Retraction of the milling tool. Preselection of the tool with name SF10. cooling on.0. . Call center drill 6 mm. . .0.0) N280 POSITION: N290 HOLES2(0.4 Program examples Program code N130 G1 G40 Y-72 F3000 N140 G0 Z200 M5 M9 Comment .0. . Jump mark for repetition. .6) N300 ENDLABEL: N310 MCALL N320 G0 Z200 M5 M9 N330 T="SPB5" N340 M6 N350 S2600 M3 M8 N360 G90 G60 G54 G17 X25 Y0 N370 MCALL CYCLE82(2. 58 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Deselection of the milling tool radius compensation. Call of the pocket milling cycle.0. . The two options are therefore described separately. 06/2009. In circular magazines on turning machines. Note The tool change method is set via a machine data (→ machine manufacturer). ● The appropriate working plane has to be programmed (basic setting: G18). a tool change normally takes place in two stages: 1. that is. This ensures that the tool length compensation is assigned to the correct axis. Conditions Together with the tool change: ● The tool offset values stored under a D number have to be activated.Tool change 4 Tool change method In chain. the T command carries out the entire tool change. The tool is sought in the magazine with the T command. locates and inserts the tool. 2. rotary-plate and box magazines. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 59 . Tool management (option) The programming of the tool change is performed differently for machines with active tool management (option) than for machines without active tool management. Fundamentals Programming Manual. The tool is then loaded into the spindle with the M command. 1 4..1 Function 4. Syntax Tool selection: T<number> T=<number> T<n>=<number> Tool deselection: T0 T0=<number> Meaning T: <n>: Command for tool selection including tool change and activation of the tool offset Spindle number as address extension Note: The possibility of programming a spindle number as address extension depends on the configuration of the machine.1 Tool change without tool management Tool change with T command There is a direct tool change when the T command is programmed. N70 T0 .. Comment .Tool change 4. Application For turning machines with circular magazine.32000 Command for deselection of the active tool Example Program code N10 T1 D1 . Loading of tool T1 and activation of the tool offset D1. 06/2009. 60 Fundamentals Programming Manual.1. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Deselect tool T1... → see machine manufacturer's specifications) <number>: T0: Number of the tool Range of values: 0 . .1 Tool change without tool management 4. . 06/2009.32000 M function for the tool change (according to DIN 66025) M6 activates the selected tool (T…) and the tool offset (D.2 Function Tool change with M6 The tool is selected when the T command is programmed.Tool change 4.1 Tool change without tool management 4. <number>: M6: T0: Number of the tool Range of values: 0 .1. → see machine manufacturer's specifications. Application For milling machines with chain. Syntax Tool selection: T<number> T=<number> T<n>=<number> Tool change: M6 Tool deselection: T0 T0=<number> Significance T: <n>: Command for the tool selection Spindle number as address extension Note: The possibility of programming a spindle number as address extension depends on the configuration of the machine. The tool only becomes active with M6 (including tool offset).. rotary-plate or box magazines.). 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 61 . Command for deselection of the active tool Fundamentals Programming Manual. Machining with T1. .. . 06/2009.. .1 Tool change without tool management Example Program code N10 T1 M6 N20 D1 N30 G1 X10 .. Loading of tool T1.Tool change 4..... N100 M6 N110 D1 G1 X10 . . Loading of tool T5. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Machining with tool T5 . Selection of tool length compensation. 62 Fundamentals Programming Manual. . N70 T5 N80 ... Preselection of tool T5.. Machining with T1.. .. Comment . . . Tool name On a machine tool with active tool management. "Drill". The tool call can then be via the tool name.2. T="Drill" NOTICE The tool name may not contain any special characters.g. "3").Tool change 4.2 4. It also allows fast tool changes and avoids both scrap by monitoring the tool service life and machine downtimes by using spare tools.2 Tool change with tool management (option) Tool management The optional "Tool management" function ensures that at any given time the correct tool is in the correct location and that the data assigned to the tool are up to date.2 Tool change with tool management (option) 4.g. Syntax Tool selection: T=<location> T=<name> T<n>=<location> T<n>=<name> Tool deselection: T0 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. Application For turning machines with circular magazine. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 63 . 4.1 Function Tool change with T command with active tool management (option) There is a direct tool change when the T command is programmed. e. the tools must be assigned a name and number for clear identification (e. = 3 Not occupied T10 T1 Enabled Active Tool group T15 State Blocked 64 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 20 Tool Drill. = 2 Drill. <n>: Spindle number as address extension Note: The possibility of programming a spindle number as address extension depends on the configuration of the machine.. 06/2009. Command for the tool deselection (magazine location not occupied) Example A circular magazine has locations 1 to 20 with the following tool assignment: Location 1 2 3 4 5 . duplo no. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . → see machine manufacturer's specifications) T0: Note If the selected magazine location is not occupied in a tool magazine. duplo no. the command acts as for T0. duplo no.2 Tool change with tool management (option) Significance T=: Command for tool change and activation of the tool offset The following specifications are possible: <location>: Number of the magazine location <name>: Name of tool Note: The correct notation (upper/lower case) must be observed when programming a tool name.Tool change 4. The selection of the next occupied magazine location can be used to position the empty location. = 1 Not occupied Drill.. " 4.2 Tool change with tool management (option) The following tool call is programmed in the NC program: N10 T=1 The call is processed as follows: 1. 2.Tool change 4. Fundamentals Programming Manual. In this case group T10 is loaded. T1 is loaded. duplo no. When the strategy "Take the first tool with "active" status from the group" is applied. 3 (at magazine location 4) This completes the tool selection process and the tool change is initiated. A tool search for T="drill" is initiated in accordance with the search method set: "Find the active tool. The following usable tool is then found: "Drill". 06/2009. as T15 is blocked. The tool management recognizes that this tool is blocked and therefore cannot be used. Note If the "Select the first available tool from the group" search method is employed. Magazine location 1 is considered and the tool identifier determined. select the one with the next highest duplo number. or else. 3. the sequence must first be defined within the tool group being loaded. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 65 . Syntax Tool selection: T=<location> T=<name> T<n>=<location> T<n>=<name> Tool change: M6 Tool deselection: T0 Significance T=: Command for the tool selection The following specifications are possible: <location>: Number of the magazine location <name>: Name of tool Note: The correct notation (upper/lower case) must be used when programming a tool name.). 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .2 Function Tool change with M6 with active tool management (option) The tool is selected when the T command is programmed. rotary-plate or box magazines. Command for tool deselection (magazine location not occupied) 66 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. The tool only becomes active with M6 (including tool offset).. <n>: Spindle number as address extension Note: The possibility of programming a spindle number as an address extension depends on the configuration of the machine..2. → see machine manufacturer's specifications.2 Tool change with tool management (option) 4. Application For milling machines with chain. M6: T0: M function for the tool change (according to DIN 66025) M6 activates the selected tool (T…) and the tool offset (D.Tool change 4. .. . . Machining with tool T=1.Tool change 4. .. Comment . Fundamentals Programming Manual.. . 06/2009. Preselection of the tool with name "Drill". Loading of the drill. ... The selection of the next occupied magazine location can be used to position the empty location. N70 T="Drill" N80 . N100 M6 N140 D1 G1 X10 .. Machining with tool T=1. .. Selection of tool length compensation. .... the command acts as for T0. Example Program code N10 T=1 M6 N20 D1 N30 G1 X10 . Loading of the tool from magazine location 1..2 Tool change with tool management (option) Note If the selected magazine location is not occupied in a tool magazine. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 67 .. Machining with drill. . for example.3 4.3 Behavior with faulty T programming The behavior with faulty T programming depends on the configuration of the machine: MD22562 TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE Bit 7 Value 0 Meaning Basic setting! With the T programming. This response is desirable if. 06/2009. an alarm is issued during D selection. If not. If the NCK does not recognize the tool number.3 Behavior with faulty T programming 4. a check is made immediately as to whether the NCK recognizes the T number. 1 The programmed T number will only be checked following D selection.Tool change 4. tool programming is also intended to achieve positioning and the tool data is not necessarily available (circular magazine). 68 Fundamentals Programming Manual. an alarm is triggered. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 69 . the tool data must be entered in the tool compensation memory of the control. While the program is being processed. 06/2009.. cutting edge position of the turning tool (counterclockwise/clockwise turning tool) and tool length does not have to be taken into consideration when creating the program.. The control corrects the travel path When machining a workpiece. Only the required tool (T. Therefore.1 Workpiece dimensions are programmed directly (e. In order that the control can calculate the tool paths.g.) are called via the NC program.1 General information about the tool offsets 5 5.. the control fetches the offset data it requires from the tool compensation memory and corrects the tool path individually for different tools: Fundamentals Programming Manual. the tool paths are controlled according to the tool geometry such that the programmed contour can be machined using any tool. according to the production drawing)..) and the required offset data record (D.Tool offsets 5. tool data such as milling tool diameter. From this data. 06/2009.2 Tool length compensation 5.2 Tool length compensation The tool length compensation compensates for the differences in length between the tools used.2 5.Tool offsets 5. 70 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Note The offset value for the tool length is dependent upon the spatial orientation of the tool. the control calculates the traversing movements in the infeed direction. The tool length is the distance between the toolholder reference point and the tool tip: F F F F This length is measured and entered in the tool compensation memory of the control together with definable wear values. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . To do this. the control requires data about the tool form (radius) from the tool compensation memory. the programmed tool center point path is offset during the program processing in such a way that the tool edge travels exactly along the programmed contour: NOTICE Tool radius compensation is applied according to the default CUT2D or CUT2DF (see " 2D tool compensation (CUT2D.3 Tool radius compensation 5. The milling tool or cutting edge center must travel along a path that is equidistant from the contour.3 Tool radius compensation The contour and tool path are not identical. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 71 . References The various options for the tool radius compensation are described in detail in Section "Tool radius compensations".3 5. CUT2DF) (Page 344) "). Depending on the radius and the machining direction. Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009.Tool offsets 5. 4 Tool compensation memory 5. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . The cutting edge position is required together with the cutting edge radius for the calculation of the tool radius compensation for turning tools (tool type 5xx). Which parameters are required for a tool depends on the tool type. Cutting edge position The cutting edge position describes the position of the tool tip P in relation to the cutting edge center point S. NOTICE Values that have been entered once in the compensation memory are included in the processing at each tool call. milling or turning tool) determines which geometry data is necessary and how this is taken into account.4 5. radius) This data is entered as tool parameters (max. Any tool parameters that are not required must be set to "zero" (corresponds to the default setting of the system). 06/2009. 72 Fundamentals Programming Manual.Tool offsets 5.4 Tool compensation memory The following data must be available in the tool compensation memory of the control for each tool edge: ● Tool type ● Cutting edge position ● Tool geometry variables (length. 25). Tool type The tool type (drill. Basic Functions. References Function Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 73 . total radius). wear). overall length 1. The control computes the components to a certain dimension (e.g.4 Tool compensation memory Tool geometry variables (length. How these values are calculated in the axes is determined by the tool type and the current plane (G17/G18/G19). The respective overall dimension becomes effective when the compensation memory is activated. Section "Tool edge" Fundamentals Programming Manual. Tool Offsets (W1).Tool offsets 5. 06/2009. radius) The tool geometry variables consist of several components (geometry. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .5 5.1 5.5.5 Tool types 5. Each tool type is assigned a 3-digit number.5 Tool types General information about the tool types Tools are divided into tool types.Tool offsets 5. 06/2009. The first digit assigns the tool type to one of the following groups depending on the technology used: Tool type 1xy 2xy 3xy 4xy 5xy 6xy 7xy Tool group Milling tools Drills Reserved Grinding tools Turning tools Reserved Special tools such as a slotting saw 74 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 5 Tool types 5.Tool offsets 5.) for milling tools are entered in the compensation memory: Fundamentals Programming Manual.5. 06/2009..2 Milling tools The following tool types are available in the "Milling tools" group: 100 110 111 120 121 130 131 140 145 150 151 155 156 157 160 Milling tool according to CLDATA (Cutter Location Data) Ballhead cutter (cylindrical die milling tool) Ballhead cutter (tapered die milling tool) End mill (without corner rounding) End mill (with corner rounding) Angle head cutter (without corner rounding) Angle head cutter (with corner rounding) Facing tool Thread cutter Side mill Saw Bevel cutter (without corner rounding) Bevel cutter (with corner rounding) Tapered die milling tool Drill and thread milling cutter Tool parameters The following figures provide an overview of which tool parameters (DP.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 75 . Tool Offset (W1) 76 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .5 Tool types Note Brief description of the tool parameters can be found on the user interface. Basic Functions. 06/2009.Tool offsets 5. For further information. see: References: Function Manual. 5. Tool Offset (W1) Fundamentals Programming Manual.5 Tool types 5. Basic Functions.) for drills are entered in the compensation memory: Note Brief description of the tool parameters can be found on the user interface. see: References: Function Manual..3 Drills The following tool types are available in the "Drills" group: 200 205 210 220 230 231 240 241 242 250 Twist drill Drill Boring bar Center drill Countersink Counterbore Tap regular thread Tap fine thread Tap Whitworth thread Reamer Tool parameters The following figure provides an overview of which tool parameters (DP.. 06/2009.Tool offsets 5. For further information. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 77 . Tool offsets 5.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 ..) for grinding tools are entered in the compensation memory: 78 Fundamentals Programming Manual.5.4 Grinding tools The following tool types are available in the "Grinding tools" group: 400 401 402 403 410 411 412 413 490 Surface grinding wheel Surface grinding wheel with monitoring Surface grinding wheel without monitoring without base dimension (TOOLMAN) Surface grinding wheel with monitoring without base dimension for grinding wheel peripheral speed GWPS Facing wheel Facing wheel (TOOLMAN) with monitoring Facing wheel (TOOLMAN) without monitoring Facing wheel with monitoring without base dimension for grinding wheel peripheral speed GWPS Dresser Tool parameters The following figure provides an overview of which tool parameters (DP.5 Tool types 5. 06/2009. Tool offsets 5.5 Tool types Note Brief description of the tool parameters can be found on the user interface. Tool Offset (W1) Fundamentals Programming Manual. For further information. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 79 . see: References: Function Manual. Basic Functions. 06/2009.Tool offsets 5.5 Tool types 5..) for turning tools are entered in the compensation memory: 80 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .5.5 Turning tools The following tool types are available in the "Turning tools" group: 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 580 Roughing tool Finishing tool Plunge cutter Parting tool Threading tool Button tool/forming tool (TOOLMAN) Rotary drill (ECOCUT) Probe with cutting edge position parameters Tool parameters The following figures provide an overview of which tool parameters (DP.. 06/2009. Tool Offset (W1) Fundamentals Programming Manual. For further information.Tool offsets 5. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 81 .5 Tool types Note Brief description of the tool parameters can be found on the user interface. Basic Functions. see: References: Function Manual. .) for "Slotting saw" tool type are entered in the compensation memory: Note Brief description of the tool parameters can be found on the user interface. Basic Functions. For further information.6 Special tools The following tool types are available in the "Special tools" group: 700 710 711 730 Slotting saw 3D probe Edge probe Stop Tool parameters The following figure provides an overview of which tool parameters (DP. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 06/2009.5 Tool types 5.Tool offsets 5..5. Tool Offset (W1) 82 Fundamentals Programming Manual. see: References: Function Manual. then the values are also automatically entered for the right cutting edge and vice versa. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 83 . Grinding (W4) Fundamentals Programming Manual.5. i. wear and base dimension can be chained for both the left and the right tool nose radius compensation. Extended Functions. if the tool length compensations are changed for the left cutting edge. 06/2009.7 Chaining rule The geometry tool length compensations. References Function Manual.5 Tool types 5.e.Tool offsets 5. . different offset values for the left and right cutting edge of a grooving tool).6 Function 5.. Notice: A tool length compensation can also take effect without D programming. 06/2009. the default setting defined via the machine data is active for a tool change (→ see machine manufacturer's specifications).6 Tool offset call (D) 5. Activation of the offset data (including the data for the tool length compensation) of a special cutting edge is performed by calling the D number. Deactivation of the tool offsets: D0 G40 Significance D: Command for the activation of an offset data record for the active tool The tool length compensation is applied with the first programmed traverse of the associated length compensation axis. offsets for the tool have no effect..6 Tool offset call (D) Cutting edges 1 to 8 (with active TOOLMAN 12) of a tool can be assigned different tool offset data records (e. When D0 is programmed. Syntax Activation of a tool offset data record: D<number> Activate the tool radius compensation: G41 . If no D number is programmed. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 84 Fundamentals Programming Manual.Tool offsets 5.g. G42 . Note Tool length offsets take immediate effect when the D number is programmed.. when the automatic activation of a tool edge has been configured for the tool change (→ see machine manufacturer's specifications). A tool radius compensation must also be activated via G41/G42. ● Free selection of D numbers The D numbers can be freely assigned to the cutting edge numbers of a tool. ● Absolute D number without reference to the T number Independence between D number and T number can be selected in systems without tool management. References: Function Manual. cutting edge and offset by the D number is defined by the user. 12 are available for every tool T<number> or T="Name" (with TOOLMAN). These D numbers are assigned directly to the tool cutting edges.Tool offsets 5. Range of values: D0: G41: G42: G40: Note The tool radius compensation is described in detail in the section "Tool radius compensation" section. 06/2009. The upper limit for the D numbers that can be used is limited by a machine data. Tool Management. A compensation data record ($TC_DPx[t.d]) belongs to each D number (= cutting edge number). The reference of T number.6 Tool offset call (D) The tool offset data record to be activated is specified via the <number> parameter.32.000 Command for the deactivation of the offset data record for the active tool Command for the activation of the tool radius compensation with machining direction left of the contour Command for the activation of the tool radius compensation with machining direction right of the contour Command for the deactivation of the tool radius compensation <number>: Type of D programming The type of D programming is defined via machine data. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 85 . Basic Functions. This can be done as follows: ● D number = cutting edge number D numbers ranging from 1 to max. Chapter: "Variants of D-number assignments" Fundamentals Programming Manual. The type of D programming depends on the configuration of the machine (see paragraph "Type of D programming"). The range of D numbers is between 1 and 32000. Tool Offset (W1). Function Manual. 0 . D6 Z-5 X 10 -20 -5 Z 86 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009.. Comment . N50 T4 D2 . Activate other cutting edge D1 for tool T4. N70 G0 Z. The tool length compensations are applied. D1 .. Load tool T4 and activate tool offset data record D2 of T4. .. Z... Load tool T1 and activate tool offset data record D1 of T1. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Example 2: Different offset values for the left and right cutting edge of a grooving tool N10 T2 N20 G0 N30 G1 X35 Z-20 D1 X10 N40.6 Tool offset call (D) Examples Example 1: Tool change with T command (turning) Program code N10 T1 D1 N11 G0 X.... .Tool offsets 5... are applied when the part program is continued. Set tool offset data to be active immediately The following machine data can be used to specify that entered tool offset data takes effect immediately: MD9440 $MM_ACTIVATE_SEL_USER DANGER If MD9440 is set.7 Change in the tool offset data Effectiveness A change in the tool offset data takes effect the next time the T or D number is programmed.Tool offsets 5. tool offsets resulting from changes in tool offset data during the part program stop.7 5. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 87 . Fundamentals Programming Manual.7 Change in the tool offset data 5. 06/2009. TOFFR) The user can use the commands TOFFL/TOFF and TOFFR to modify the effective tool length or the effective tool radius in the NC program. Tool radius offset The command TOFFR is available for the programming of a tool radius offset.8 Programmable tool offset (TOFFL. 06/2009. These programmed offsets are deleted again at the end of the program. TOFF. TOFF. The programmed offsets are treated accordingly for a plane change (G17/G18/G19 ↔ G17/G18/G19): ● If the offset values are assigned to the tool length components. Tool length offset Depending on the type of programming. are replaced accordingly. programmed tool length offsets are assigned either to the tool length components L1.8 Function 5. without changing the tool offset data stored in the compensation memory. TOFFR) 5. the directions in which the programmed offsets apply. a plane change does not effect the assignment in relation to the coordinate axes. Syntax Tool length offset: TOFFL=<value> TOFFL[1]=<value> TOFFL[2]=<value> TOFFL[3]=<value> TOFF[<geometry axis>]=<value> Tool radius offset: TOFFR=<value> 88 Fundamentals Programming Manual.8 Programmable tool offset (TOFFL. ● If the offset values are assigned to the geometry axes.Tool offsets 5. L2 and L3 (TOFFL) stored in the compensation memory or to the geometry axes (TOFF). 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . TOFFL[2]= or TOFFL[3]= The programmed offset value is applied in the same direction as the tool length component L1. i. 06/2009.8 Programmable tool offset (TOFFL. L2 or L3 stored in the offset memory.Tool offsets 5. but the tool in the basic tool position. TOFF. TOFF: Command for the compensation of the tool length in the component parallel to the specified geometry axis TOFF is applied in the direction of the tool length component. the workpiece coordinate system (WCS) is not used for the assignment of the tool length components to the geometry axes. TOFFR) Significance TOFFL: Command for the compensation of the effective tool length TOFFL can be programmed with or without index: • Without index: TOFFL= The programmed offset value is applied in the same direction as the tool length component L1 stored in the compensation memory.e. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 89 . Note: A frame does not influence the assignment of the programmed values to the tool length components. • With index: TOFFL[1]=. <geometry axis> TOFFR: Identifier of the geometry axis Command for the compensation of the effective tool radius TOFFR changes the effective tool radius with active tool radius compensation by the programmed offset value. which is effective with non-rotated tool (orientable toolholder or orientation transformation) parallel to the <geometry axis> specified in the index. Note: How these tool length offset values are calculated in the axes is determined by the tool type and the current working plane (G17/G18/G19). The commands TOFFL and TOFFL[1] have an identical effect. <value>: Offset value for the tool length or radius Type: REAL Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. They then generally have an additive effect (except for slot side compensation). 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . but by TOFFR with a positive sign. However. OFFN and TOFFR can be effective simultaneously. In this case.8 Programmable tool offset (TOFFL. There is only a difference with active peripheral curve transformation (TRACYL) and active slot side compensation. In this way. commands of the TOFFL/TOFFL[1. 90 Fundamentals Programming Manual. However. the components not programmed remain unchanged. the tool radius is affected by OFFN with a negative sign. TOFFL and TOFFL[1] may also not be written simultaneously in one block.Tool offsets 5.3] group and commands of the TOFF[<geometry axis>] may not be used simultaneously in one block. TOFF. this only applies as long as the tool components have been modified either only with TOFFL or only with TOFF. Changing the programming type from TOFFL to TOFF or vice versa deletes any previously programmed tool length offsets (see example 3). TOFFR) Note The TOFFR command has almost the same effect as the OFFN command (see "Tool radius compensation (Page 301)"). Further syntax rules ● The tool length can be changed simultaneously in all three components. ● If all three tool length components are not programmed in a block. it is possible to build up offsets for several components block-by-block.. The active plane is G17. then these take preference over the contents of G code group 6 (plane selection G17 . 06/2009.g. i.e. this setting data influences the evaluation of the offsets in the same way as the tool length components L1 to L3. Examples Example 1: Positive tool length offset The active tool is a drill with length L1 = 100 mm.e.G19) or the tool type ($TC_DP1[<T no. the drill points in the Z direction. e. The effective drill length is to be increased by 1 mm. TOFF.Tool offsets 5.>]) contained in the tool data.>. ● Tool change All offset values are retained during a tool change (cutting edge change). <D no. The following variants are available for the programming of this tool length offset: TOFFL=1 or TOFFL[1]=1 or TOFF[Z]=1 Fundamentals Programming Manual. i. SD42950 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE (assignment of the tool length compensation independent of tool type) If this setting data has valid values not equal to 0. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 91 . TOFFR) Supplementary conditions ● Evaluation of setting data The following setting data is evaluated when assigning the programmed offset values to the tool length components: SD42940 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST (change of tool length components on change of planes).8 Programmable tool offset (TOFFL. they are also effective for the new tool (new cutting edge). The effective drill length is to be decreased by 1 mm. in block N100. . Machine axis position X0 Y101 Z0. L3=5 . 92 Fundamentals Programming Manual.1]=120 N20 $TC_DP3[1. 06/2009. .8 Programmable tool offset (TOFFL. L2=4. Offset in Z direction (corresponds to L1 for G17). TOFF. Machine axis position X0 Y0 Z101 . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . the offset of 1 mm in the Z axis is retained when changing to G18 in block N60.1]= 100 N30 T1 D1 G17 N40 TOFF[Z]=1.3 Comment . Machine axis position X0 Y0 Z101. Effective offsets: L1=0.e. L2=0. L2=0. TOFFR) Example 2: Negative tool length offset The active tool is a drill with length L1 = 100 mm. L3=5 . the effective tool length in the Y axis is the unchanged tool length of 100 mm. Machine axis position X0 Y100 Z1 . Effective offsets: L1=3. the drill points in the Y direction.0 N50 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 N60 G18 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 N70 G17 N80 TOFFL=1. Tool change L1=100mm Comment In this example. i. Offset in L1 direction (corresponds to Z for G17).0 N90 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 N100 G18 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 . the offset is effective in the Y axis when changing to G18 as it was assigned to tool length L1 in the programming and this length component is effective in the Y axis with G18. The active plane is G18. Effective offsets: L1=3. Program code N10 TOFFL[1]=3 TOFFL[3]=5 N20 TOFFL[2]=4 N30 TOFF[Z]=1. .3 Example 4: Plane change Program code N10 $TC_DP1[1. The following variants are available for the programming of this tool length offset: TOFFL=-1 or TOFFL[1]=-1 or TOFF[Y]=1 Example 3: Changing the programming type from TOFFL to TOFF The active tool is a milling tool. L3=1. The active plane is G17. .Tool offsets 5. However. generally the tool tip is measured when measuring the tool and stored as tool length in the compensation memory. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 93 . $AC_TOFF and AC_TOFFR trigger an automatic preprocessing stop when reading from the preprocessing context (NC program).Tool offsets 5.. with 0 ≤ n ≤ 3 Reads the current offset value of TOFFL (for n = 0) or TOFFL[1. TOFF. However. $P_TOFF [<geometry axis>] $P_TOFFR $AC_TOFFL[<n>] $AC_TOFF[<geometry axis>] $AC_TOFFR Note The system variables $AC_TOFFL. 3) in the preprocessing context. 06/2009. Reads the current offset value of TOFFR in the preprocessing context.8 Programmable tool offset (TOFFL. 2.3] (for n = 1. System variables for reading the current offset values The currently effective offsets can be read with the following system variables: System variables $P_TOFFL [<n>] with 0 ≤ n ≤ 3 Meaning Reads the current offset value of TOFFL (for n = 0) or TOFFL[1.. Reads the current offset value of TOFFR in the main run context (synchronized actions).3] (for n = 1. Reads the current offset value of TOFF[<geometry axis>] in the main run context (synchronized actions). TOFFR) Further information Applications The "Programmable tool offset" function is especially interesting for ball mills and milling tools with corner radii as these are often calculated in the CAM system to the ball center instead of the ball tip.. Reads the current offset value of TOFF[<geometry axis>] in the preprocessing context. 3) in the main run context (synchronized actions).. Fundamentals Programming Manual. 2. TOFFR) 94 Fundamentals Programming Manual.Tool offsets 5. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 06/2009.8 Programmable tool offset (TOFFL. TOFF. 1 Spindle speed (S). direction of spindle rotation (M3. the main spindle is declared the master spindle in the machine data. M5) Figure 6-1 Spindle motion during turning Other spindles may be available in addition to the main spindle (e. 6 6. 06/2009. the counterspindle or an actuated tool on turning machines). This assignment can be changed using an NC command.g. M4. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 95 . As a rule.Spindle motion 6. Fundamentals Programming Manual.1 Function The spindle speed and direction of rotation values set the spindle in rotary motion and provide the conditions for chip removal. SETMS Significance S… : S<n>=. e.: S. 06/2009. M3: M<n>=3: M4: M<n>=4: M5: M<n>=5: SETMS(<n>): SETMS: Direction of spindle rotation clockwise for master spindle Spindle direction of rotation CW for spindle <n> Direction of spindle rotation counterclockwise for master spindle Spindle direction of rotation CCW for spindle <n> Spindle stop for master spindle Spindle stop for spindle <n> Set spindle <n> as master spindle If SETMS is programmed without a spindle name.Spindle motion 6. S3=. Note SETMS must be in a separate block.. the configured master spindle is used instead. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 96 Fundamentals Programming Manual... : Spindle speed in rpm for the master spindle Spindle speed in rpm for spindle <n> Note: The speed specified with S0=… applies to the master spindle. / S<n>=.1 Spindle speed (S)... M5) Syntax S....g. direction of spindle rotation (M3.. M4. Note Up to three S-values can be programmed per NC block... S2=.... M3 / M<n>=3 M4 / M<n>=4 M5 / M<n>=5 SETMS(<n>) . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 97 . Speed for new master spindle .. To do this. S2 is now the master spindle . N160 SETMS Comment . After the cut-off point. Switching back to master spindle S1 Fundamentals Programming Manual..Spindle motion 6. To do this. Speed and direction of rotation for drive spindle = preset master spindle .. Machining of the right-hand workpiece side . it is necessary to divide the operations into steps. Machining of the left-hand workpiece side . M5) Example S1 is the master spindle. Program code N10 S300 M3 . N100 SETMS(2) N110 S400 G95 F… . direction of spindle rotation (M3. the synchronizing device (S2) takes over machining of the workpiece after the cut off. 06/2009..1 Spindle speed (S). M4. The part is to be machined from two sides. this spindle S2 is defined as the master spindle to which G95 then applies. S2 is the second spindle. Preset M commands M3. M5 are activated before the axis movements commence (basic setting on the control). either once the spindle has powered up to the setpoint speed. 06/2009. direction of spindle rotation (M3. M4. the S-value is interpreted as a constant cutting rate in m/min. 98 Fundamentals Programming Manual.Spindle motion 6. otherwise. the interpretation of the S-value will depend upon G function group 15 (feedrate type): If G96. or immediately after the programmed switching operations have been traversed. changing from G331/G332 to a function within the G function group other than G331/G332 sets the speed value to zero. Example: Program code N10 G1 F500 X70 Y20 S270 M3 N100 G0 Z150 M5 Comment . M5) Further information Interpretation of the S-value for the master spindle If function G331 or G332 is active in G function group 1 (modally valid motion commands). The corresponding S-values have to be reprogrammed if required. M4. then the movements are executed in X and Y. The spindle ramps up to 270 rpm.1 Spindle speed (S). Spindle stop before the retraction movement in Z. it is interpreted as a speed in rpm. . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . M4. M5 In a block with axis commands. Changing from G96/G961/G962 to G331/G332 sets the value of the constant cutting rate to zero. the programmed S-value will always be interpreted as the speed in rpm. Note Machine data can be used to set when axis movements should be executed. functions M3. G961 or G962 is active. Otherwise. along with the functions programmed with M3. Master spindle: 300 rpm. M5. SETMS must be in a separate block. CCW rotation Programmable switchover of master spindle The SETMS(<n>) command can be used in the NC program to define any spindle as the master spindle.. revolutional feedrate. and dwell time apply to this spindle. a second spindle and an actuated tool) the numbers corresponding to the speed and the direction of rotation/spindle stop must be specified. One of the spindles is defined in machine data as the master spindle..g. Example: Program code N10 SETMS (2) Comment . M4. Spindle 2 is now the master spindle. direction of spindle rotation (M3. M4. Special functions such as thread cutting. CW rotation 2nd spindle: 780 rpm. If SETMS is programmed without a spindle name.Spindle motion 6. Note The speed specified with S. the master spindle programmed in the machine data is used instead..1 Spindle speed (S). Fundamentals Programming Manual. tapping. M5) Working with multiple spindles 5 spindles (master spindle plus 4 additional spindles) can be available in one channel at the same time. 06/2009. For the remaining spindles (e. now apply to the newly declared master spindle. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 99 . Example: Program code N10 S300 M3 S2=780 M2=4 Comment . The programmed cutting rate is independent of the path feedrate F and G function group 15. 06/2009. 100 Fundamentals Programming Manual.2 Cutting rate (SVC) 6. can be programmed for milling operations. The control uses the radius of the active tool to calculate the effective spindle speed from the programmed tool cutting rate: S = (SVC * 1000) / (RT * 2π) where: S: SVC: R T: Spindle speed in rpm Cutting rate in m/min or feet/min Radius of the active tool in mm The tool type ($TC_DP1) of the active tool is not taken into account. which is more commonly used in practice. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Spindle motion 6.2 Function 6. the tool cutting rate.2 Cutting rate (SVC) As an alternative to the spindle speed. The direction of rotation and the spindle start are programmed using M3 and M4 respectively and the spindle stop using M5. Changing the tool or selecting/deselecting a tool offset data record generates a recalculation of the effective spindle speed. A change to the tool radius data in the offset memory will be applied the next time a tool offset is selected or the next time the active offset data is updated. the rate is always applied to the master spindle. There is no fixed sequence for SVC and T/D selection during programming in the same block. Note: A separate cutting rate can be preset for each spindle. the user will need to select a tool accordingly. Note: Programming SVC without an address extension requires that the master spindle has the active tool. a corresponding tool including a tool offset data record must be active or selected in the block. the tool radius must be known. In the absence of an address extension. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 101 .2 Cutting rate (SVC) Conditions The programming of the cutting speed requires: ● the geometric ratios of a rotating tool (milling cutter or drilling tool) ● An active tool offset data record Syntax SVC[<n>]=<value> Note In the block with SVC. in other words. Unit: m/min or ft/min (dependent upon G700/G710) Fundamentals Programming Manual. If the master spindle changes.Spindle motion 6. Significance SVC: Cutting rate [<n>]: Number of spindle This address extension specifies which spindle the programmed cutting rate is to be applied for. 06/2009. If no speed limit has been defined. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Spindle motion 6.2 Cutting rate (SVC) Note Changing between SVC and S Changing between SVC and S programming is possible at will. 06/2009.g. 102 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Note SVC programming is not possible if the following are active: • G96/G961/G962 • GWPS • SPOS/SPOSA/M19 • M70 Conversely. using CAD systems which already take the tool radius into account and only contain the deviation from the standard tool in the tool nose radius are not supported in conjunction with SVC programming. there will be no monitoring. programming one of these commands will lead to the deselection of SVC. Note Maximum tool speed System variable $TC_TP_MAX_VELO[<tool number>] can be used to preset a maximum tool speed (spindle speed). Note The tool paths of "standard tools" generated e. In each case. even while the spindle is turning. the value that is not active is deleted. The effective speed is different for spindle 3 and spindle 5. 06/2009.93 rpm N30 G1 X50 G95 FZ=0. cutting rate 100 m/min . SVC and revolutional feedrate Comment Example 3: Defining cutting rates for two spindles Program code N10 SVC[3]=100 M6 T1 D1 N20 SVC[5]=200 . .000) / (6.0 mm * 2 * 3. The tool radius of the active tool offset is the same for both spindles.03 .14) = 2653.Spindle motion 6. Selection of milling cutter with e.1] = 6 (tool radius = 6 mm) . Cutting rate = 100 m/min ⇒ Resulting spindle speed: S = (100 m/min * 1..2 Cutting rate (SVC) Examples The following shall apply to all examples: Toolholder = spindle (for standard milling) Example 1: Milling cutter 6 mm radius Program code N10 G0 X10 T1 D1 N20 SVC=100 M3 Comment .3 G95 . $TC_DP6[1. Tool and offset data record selection together with SVC in block (no specific sequence) .. SVC and tooth feedrate Example 2: Tool selection and SVC in the same block Program code N10 G0 X20 N20 T1 D1 SVC=100 N30 X30 M3 N40 G1 X20 F0. Spindle start with CW direction of rotation. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 103 .g. Comment Fundamentals Programming Manual. Radius = 5.000) / (5.. A tool offset for the new tool is only activated when D is programmed: MD20270 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = .0 N40 $TC_TP2[8]="WZ8" N41 $TC_DP6[8. . Toolholder 4 is assigned to spindle 6 104 Fundamentals Programming Manual.000) / (7. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Corresponds to M4=6 Tool "WZ8" is in the master toolholder. S6 = (300 m/min * 1. but because MD20270=–2. offset D4 . Tool T2 is loaded and offset D1 is activated. Magazine location is toolholder .1]=2 N11 $TC_MPP5[9998.0 mm * 2 * 3. 06/2009. offset D1 Comment .1]=1 N12 $TC_MPP_SP[9998.2 Program code N10 $TC_MPP1[9998. Toolholder 1 is assigned to spindle 3 . S3 = (50 m/min * 1. Magazine location is toolholder .0 mm of T8.2]=2 N21 $TC_MPP5[9998.14) = 3184. Corresponds to T8="WZ8" .39 rpm Spindle 6 is assigned to toolholder 4. . N100 SETMTH(1) N110 T="WZ2" M6 D1 N120 G1 G94 F1000 M3=3 SVC=100 N130 SETMTH(4) N140 T="WZ8" N150 M6 . S3 = (100 m/min * 1.0 mm of T2.2 Cutting rate (SVC) Example 4: Assumptions: Master or tool change is determined by the toolholder.Spindle motion 6..14) = 6824. offset D1 . Radius = 9.2]=4 N22 $TC_MPP_SP[9998. Magazine location is toolholder 1 .0 N42 $TC_DP6[8.0 .1]=5.0 mm * 2 * 3. .0 mm of T8.14) = 1592.4]=7. Set master toolholder number . Radius = 7.2]=6 N30 $TC_TP2[2]="WZ2" N31 $TC_DP6[2.1]=9.000) / (5. Set master toolholder number .1]=3 N20 $TC_MPP1[9998. N170 D4 N180 SVC=300 Offset D4 of the new tool "WZ8" becomes active (in toolholder 4). Magazine location is toolholder 4 . the old tool offset remains active.71 rpm . MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER > 1 In the event of a tool change the old tool offset is retained.36 rpm The offset applied to toolholder 1 is still active and toolholder 1 is assigned to spindle 3. N160 SVC=50 .0 mm * 2 * 3. 14) = 884. Radius = 9. .0 mm * 2 * 3.71 rpm ..14) = 1137.0 N40 $TC_TP2[8]="WZ8" N41 $TC_DP6[8.0 mm of T2..0 mm * 2 * 3. .1]=5. Tool T2 is loaded and offset D1 is activated.1]=1 N20 $TC_MPP1[9998. Offset D1 of new tool "WZ8" active. N220 T="WZ8" N230 M4 SVC=200 ..0 mm of T8. S3 = (50 m/min * 1.2]=3 N30 $TC_TP2[2]="WZ2" N31 $TC_DP6[2.4]=7. offset D1 . Spindle 1 = master spindle .1]=9.0 N42 $TC_DP6[8.07 rpm Refers to tool offset D1 of T="WZ2".14) = 5307.0 mm * 2 * 3. .0 mm * 2 * 3. S1 = (100 m/min * 1. tool offset D4 of the new tool becomes active. offset D1 Comment .0 mm of T8.1]=2 N11 $TC_MPP5[9998.2]=2 N21 $TC_MPP5[9998.40 rpm Offset D4 on master spindle is active.2 Cutting rate (SVC) Example 5: Assumptions: Spindles are toolholders at the same time: MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 0 In the event of a tool change tool offset data record D4 is selected automatically. Magazine location is toolholder . .64 rpm . Spindle 3 = master spindle .000) / (5. Corresponds to M3=6 Tool "WZ8" is in the master spindle.14) = 6369. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 105 .14) = 3184. Radius = 5.000) / (5. S3 = (200 m/min * 1. Radius = 7. N240 M6 ..Spindle motion 6. Magazine location is toolholder .86 rpm S3 = (50 m/min * 1.0 mm * 2 * 3. N250 SVC=50 N260 D1 N270 SVC[1]=300 .0 . 06/2009. offset D4 .000) / (9. S1 continues to turn at previous speed. N100 SETMS(1) N110 T="WZ2" M6 D1 N120 G1 G94 F1000 M3 SVC=100 N200 SETMS(3) N210 M4 SVC=150 . MD20270 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = 4 Program code N10 $TC_MPP1[9998. S1 = (300 m/min * 1. Corresponds to T8="WZ8" . Magazine location is toolholder 1 = spindle 1 . Magazine location is toolholder 3 = spindle 3 Fundamentals Programming Manual.14) = 4777.000) / (9.43 rpm Refers to tool offset D1 of T="WZ2".0 mm * 2 * 3.000) / (5.000) / (7. S3 = (150 m/min * 1. with regard to function.wear) ● $TC_SCPx6 (offset for $TC_DP6) ● $TC_ECPx6 (offset for $TC_DP6) The following are not taken into account: ● Online radius compensation ● Allowance on the programmed contour (OFFN) Tool radius compensation (G41/G42) Although tool radius compensation (G41/G42) and SVC both refer to the tool radius. 106 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Tapping without compensating chuck (G331. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Spindle motion 6. 06/2009.2 Cutting rate (SVC) Further information Tool radius The following tool offset data (associated with the active tool) affect the tool radius when: ● $TC_DP6 (radius .geometry) ● $TC_DP15 (radius . Synchronized actions SVC cannot be programmed from synchronized actions. G332) SVC programming is also possible in conjunction with G331 or G332. they are not linked and are independent of one another. 2 Cutting rate (SVC) Reading the cutting rate and the spindle speed programming variant The cutting rate of a spindle and the speed programming variant (spindle speed S or cutting rate SVC) can be read using system variables: ● With preprocessing stop in the part program via system variables: $AC_SVC[<n>] $AC_S_TYPE[<n>] Cutting rate applied when the current main run record for spindle number <n> was preprocessed. Spindle speed programming variant applied when the current main run record for spindle number <n> was preprocessed.Spindle motion 6. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 107 . Value: 1 2 Significance: Spindle speed S in rpm Cutting rate SVC in m/min or ft/min ● Without preprocessing stop in the part program via system variables: $P_SVC[<n>] $P_S_TYPE[<n>] Programmed cutting rate for spindle <n> Programmed spindle speed programming variant for spindle <n> Value: 1 2 Significance: Spindle speed S in rpm Cutting rate SVC in m/min or ft/min Fundamentals Programming Manual. 3 Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962.3 Function 6. the spindle speed is modified as a function of the respective workpiece diameter so that the cutting rate S in m/min or ft/min remains constant at the tool edge. G97/G971/G972. G973.. LIMS. G973. SCC) 6. 06/2009... . SCC) When the "Constant cutting rate" function is active. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .. This results in the following advantages: ● Uniformity and consequently improved surface quality of turned parts ● Machining process is kinder to tools Syntax Activating/Deactivating constant cutting rate for the master spindle: G96/G961/G962 S. G97/G971/G972/G973 Speed limitation for the master spindle: LIMS=<value> LIMS[<spindle>]=<value> Other reference axis for G96/G961/G962: SCC[<axis>] 108 Fundamentals Programming Manual. LIMS.Spindle motion 6. G97/G971/G972.3 Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962. . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 109 . G961: G962: Constant cutting rate with feedrate type G94: ON Constant cutting rate with feedrate type G94 or G95: ON Note: See " Feedrate (G93.. a new feedrate value F.3 Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962. SCC) Note SCC[<axis>] can be programmed together with G96/G961/G962 or in isolation. G971: G972: G973: Deactivate constant cutting rate with feedrate type G94 Deactivate constant cutting rate with feedrate type G94 or G95 Deactivate constant cutting rate without activating spindle speed limitation Fundamentals Programming Manual.9 m/min Deactivate constant cutting rate with feedrate type G95 After G97 (or G971).. G97/G971/G972. S. F. FL.Spindle motion 6. the last speed set with G96 (or G961) is retained. : In conjunction with G96. is not interpreted as a spindle speed but as a cutting rate. S. If G95 has not been activated previously. is again interpreted as a spindle speed in rpm. 06/2009.... FGREF) (Page 119)" for information about G94 and G95.1 m/min to 9999 9999. G961 or G962.. The cutting rate is always applied to the master spindle. LIMS. G95. will have to be specified when G96 is called. Unit: Range of values: G97: m/min (for G71/G710) or feet/min (for G70/G700) 0. Significance G96: Constant cutting rate with feedrate type G95: ON G95 is activated automatically with G96. S. In the absence of a new spindle speed being specified. G973. G94.. FGROUP. Spindle motion 6. SCC) Speed limitation for the master spindle (only applied if G96/G961/G97 active) On machines with selectable master spindles.. G973.. G97/G971/G972. N60 G96 G90 X0 Z10 F8 S100 LIMS=444 . speed 2. Note The speed limitation programmed with LIMS must not exceed the speed limit programmed with G26 or defined in the setting data. must be entered. when G96/G961/G962 is selected again. Note When G96/G961/G962 is selected for the first time. Note The reference axis for G96/G961/G962 must be a geometry axis assigned to the channel at the time when SCC[<axis>] is programmed. a constant cutting rate S. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Constant cutting rate = 100 m/min. SCC[<axis>] can also be programmed when any of the G96/G961/G962 functions are active.500 rpm Comment 110 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Examples Example 1: Activating the constant cutting rate with speed limitation Program code N10 SETMS (3) N20 G96 S100 LIMS=2500 . speed = 444 rpm . SCC[<axis>] can be used to assign any geometry axis as a reference axis.. Max. the entry is optional.3 Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962. <spindle>: <value>: SCC: Number of spindle Spindle speed upper limit in rpm LIMS: If any of the G96/G961/G962 functions are active.. 06/2009. max. LIMS. limitations of differing values can be programmed for up to four spindles within one block. Fundamentals Programming Manual. 3.. . Y axis is assigned to G96 and G96 is activated (can be achieved in a single block). N140 Y30 N150 G01 F1. feedrate F = 1. Constant cutting rate = 20 m/min. Face cutting in X at 1. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 111 . LIMS. G973.Spindle motion 6. 06/2009. Grooving in Y.2 Y=27 N160 G97 N170 G0 Y100 . Constant cutting rate = 40 m/min.. Speed limitation to 3.3 Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962. G97/G971/G972.2 mm/revolution. is dependent upon X axis.000 rpm .2 mm/revolution. . Example 3: Y-axis assignment for face cutting with X axis Program code N10 G18 LIMS=3000 T1 D1 N20 G0 X100 Z200 N30 Z100 N40 G96 S20 M3 N50 G0 X80 N60 G1 F1.. SCC) Example 2: Defining speed limitation for 4 spindles Speed limitations are defined for spindle 1 (master spindle) and spindles 2. Constant cutting rate off. Comment . and 4: Program code N10 LIMS=300 LIMS[2]=450 LIMS[3]=800 LIMS[4]=1500 . is dependent upon X axis..2 X34 N70 G0 G94 X100 N80 Z80 N100 T2 D1 N110 G96 S40 SCC[Y] . . it is advisable to specify a speed limit for the spindle with LIMS (maximum spindle speed).g. all programmed values are transferred into the setting data. G961. LIMS is not applied when G971is selected. programmable frames such as SCALE. if there is a change in the effective diameter in the case of SCALE). and G97 are active.Spindle motion 6. Speed limitation LIMS If a workpiece that varies greatly in diameter needs to be machined. LIMS. 112 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Note Frames between WCS and SZS (e. G973. TRANS or ROT) are taken into account in the calculation of the spindle speed and can bring about a change in speed (for example. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . This prevents excessively high speeds with small diameters. LIMS is only applied when G96. SCC) Further information Calculation of the spindle speed The ENS position of the face axis (radius) is the basis for calculating the spindle speed from the programmed cutting rate. G97/G971/G972. Note On loading the block into the main run. 06/2009.3 Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962. SCC[<axis>] can be used to assign any geometry axis as a reference axis. path command. G973. the last speed set with G96/G961 is retained..Spindle motion 6. the constant cutting rate can be deactivated without activating a spindle speed limitation. If the TCP reference position for G96/G961/G962 is affected by a geometry axis exchange. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 113 . the spindle will reach the new speed via a ramp. the control interprets an S value as a spindle speed in rpm again. the resulting spindle speed will be reached via the set braking or acceleration ramp. In this case. The G96/G961 function can also be deactivated with G94 or G95. If the reference axis changes. which will in turn affect the TCP (tool center point) reference position for the constant cutting rate. Other reference axis for G96/G961/G962 If any of the G96/G961/G962 functions are active. Using G973. If you do not specify a new spindle speed. Exception: If the contour is approached in rapid traverse and the next NC block contains a G1/G2/G3/etc. Axis replacement of the assigned channel axis The reference axis property for G96/G961/G962 is always assigned to a geometry axis. Note The transverse axis must be defined in machine data. the speed is adjusted in the G0approach block for the next path command. Rapid traverse G0 With rapid traverse G0.3 Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962.. is used for subsequent machining operations. The function then has the same effect as G95. there is no change in speed. A geometry axis exchange will not affect how the geometry axis is assigned to the constant cutting rate. LIMS. the last speed programmed S. In the event of an axis exchange involving the assigned channel axis. G97 can be programmed without G96 beforehand. 06/2009. Fundamentals Programming Manual. LIMS can also be programmed. G97/G971/G972. SCC) Deactivating the constant cutting rate (G97/G971/G973) After G97/G971. the reference axis property for G96/G961/G962 is retained in the old channel. X1 is not a geometry axis.2 mm/revolution. . X2) N40 G96 M3 S20 . Examples for geometry axis exchange with assignments of the reference axis: Program code N05 G95 F0.1 N10 GEOAX(1. . alarm. Channel axis X2 becomes first geometry axis.1 N10 GEOAX(1. Channel axis X2 becomes first geometry axis. G973. Program code N05 G0 Z50 N10 X35 Y30 N15 SCC[X] N20 G96 M3 S20 N25 G1 F1. Program code N05 G95 F0. no alarm. Channel axis X2 becomes first geometry axis.X)). LIMS. SCC) If no new channel axis is assigned as a result of a geometry axis exchange (e. X1) N20 SCC[X] N30 GEOAX(1. . Reference axis for G96 is X2 or X. . Comment Program code N05 G95 F0. X1 and implicitly the first geometry axis (X) becomes the reference axis for G96/G961/G962. . 06/2009. . .Spindle motion 6. Face cutting in Y at 1. Reference axis for G96 is channel axis X2. Basic Functions.3 Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962. X1) N20 SCC[X1] N30 GEOAX(1. References: Function Manual. X2) N40 G96 M3 S20 Comment .5 mm/revolution.g.2 Y25 Comment . . X2) N20 SCC[X1] Comment . GEOAX(0. Face cutting in X at 1. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Reference axis for G96 is Y. First geometry axis (X) becomes reference axis for G96/G961/G962. . Channel axis X1 becomes first geometry axis.5 X20 N30 G0 Z51 N35 SCC[Y] N40 G1 F1. Channel axis X1 becomes first geometry axis. Transverse Axes (P1) and Feedrates (V1) 114 Fundamentals Programming Manual.1 N10 GEOAX(1. . G97/G971/G972. Reference axis for G96/G961/G962 is X. Constant cutting rate ON at 10 mm/min. the spindle speed will be frozen in accordance with G97. reduction in spindle speed (Y30). . GWPSOF) The "Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPS)" function is used to set the grinding wheel speed so that./S<n>=..>) S. Peripheral speed in m/s or ft/s for the master spindle Peripheral speed in m/s or ft/s for spindle <n> Note: The peripheral speed specified with S0=… applies to the master spindle. Significance GWPSON: GWPSOF: <t no..4 Function 6.>: S…: S<n>=… : Select constant grinding wheel peripheral speed Deselect constant grinding wheel peripheral speed It is only necessary to specify the T number if the tool with this T number is not active.Spindle motion 6. taking account of the current radius. Note A grinding wheel peripheral speed can only be programmed for grinding tools (types 400 to 499). 06/2009. Syntax GWPSON(<t no. the grinding wheel peripheral speed remains constant.>) GWPSOF(<t no.. Fundamentals Programming Manual. GWPSOF) 6.4 Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPSON. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 115 .4 Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPSON.. The GWPS can be active for several spindles on a channel with different tool numbers. 1000 rpm for spindle 1 . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . PUTFTOCF) must be taken into account when changing speed. each subsequent S value for this spindle is interpreted as a grinding wheel peripheral speed. When the GWPS function is active. TMOF" or PUTFTOC. Set GWPS to 60 m/s for active tool. Deactivate GWPS for active tool. programming GWPS After selecting the GWPS with GWPSON. T1 is the active tool.4 Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPSON. Selection of GWPS for active tool. Set GWPS to 40 m/s for spindle 2. Deactivate GWPS for tool 5 (spindle 2). . the active GWPS must first be deselected with GWPSOF. even online offset values (= wear parameters. Program code N20 T1 D1 N25 S1=1000 M1=3 N30 S2=1500 M2=3 … N40 GWPSON N45 S1=60 … N50 GWPSON(5) N55 S2=40 … N60 GWPSOF N65 GWPSOF(5) . cf. 1500 rpm for spindle 2 Further information Tool-specific parameters In order to activate the function "Constant peripheral speed". Comment . . GWPSOF) Example A constant grinding wheel peripheral speed is to be used for grinding tools T1 and T5. . . "Grinding-specific tool monitoring in the parts program TMON. . If GWPS is to be selected for a new tool on a spindle where GWPS is already active. Select T1 and D1. $TC_TPG8 and $TC_TPG9 must be set accordingly.Spindle motion 6. 06/2009. . 116 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Selection of grinding wheel peripheral speed with GWPSON does not cause the automatic activation of tool length compensation or tool monitoring. Select GWPS: GWPSON. the tool-specific grinding data $TC_TPG1. GWPS selection for tool 5 (spindle 2). >] This system variable can be used to query from the parts program whether the GWPS is active for a specific spindle. TRUE: GWPS is active. Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 117 . 06/2009. FALSE: GWPS is inactive. GWPS programming is reset at the end of the parts program or on RESET.4 Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPSON.Spindle motion 6. GWPSOF) Deactivate GWPS: GWPSOF When GWPS is deselected with GWPSOF. Query active GWPS: $P_GWPS[<spindle no. the last speed to be calculated remains valid as the setpoint. CAUTION A spindle speed limitation programmed with G25 or G26 overwrites the speed limits in the setting data and. Upper speed limit for master spindle.5 Function 6. Programmed spindle speed limitations are possible for all spindles of the channel. remains stored even after the end of the program.Spindle motion 6. S1=… S2=… : Lower spindle speed limit Upper spindle speed limit Minimum or maximum spindle speed(s) Note: A maximum of three spindle speed limits can be programmed for each block. Syntax G25 S… S1=… S2=… G26 S… S1=… S2=… Significance G25: G26: S. Range of values: 0. G26) 6. therefore.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . spindle 2 and spindle 3. 118 Fundamentals Programming Manual.. 06/2009.5 Programmable spindle speed limitation (G25.1 to 9999 9999. G26) The minimum and maximum spindle speeds defined in the machine and setting data can be modified by means of a part program command.5 Programmable spindle speed limitation (G25.9 rpm Example Program code N10 G26 S1400 S2=350 S3=600 Comment . Fundamentals Programming Manual. geometry axes). geometry axis or orientation axis).. FGREF is used to program the effective radius (<reference radius>) for each of the rotary axes specified under FGROUP.) FGREF[<rotary axis>]=<reference radius> FL[<axis>]=<value> Significance G93: G94: G95: Inverse-time feedrate (in rpm) Linear feedrate (in mm/min. FGROUP.. One FL value can be programmed per axis (channel axes. inch/min or °/min) Revolutional feedrate (in mm/revolution or inch/revolution) G95 refers to the revolutions of the master spindle (usually the cutting spindle or the main spindle on the turning machine) F. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 119 .1 Function 7 7. FGROUP(<axis1>. G95. etc. FGREF) These commands are used in the NC program to set the feedrates for all axes involved in the machining sequence. 06/2009. Limit velocity for synchronized/path axes The unit set with G94 applies. FL. <axis>: The axis identifiers of the basic coordinate system should be used (channel axes.Feed control 7. : FGROUP: FGREF: FL: Feedrate of the geometry axes involved in the movement The unit set with G93/G94/G95 applies. The feedrate programmed under F is valid for all axes specified under FGROUP (geometry axes/rotary axes). Syntax G93/G94/G95 F..<axis2>. G94.1 Feedrate (G93. F.. R2 = approx. G94. path = 254 mm. R9 = approx. 6 s . F.A) N120 G91 G1 G710 F100 N130 DO $R1=$AC_TIME N140 X10 N150 DO $R2=$AC_TIME N160 X10 A10 N170 DO $R3=$AC_TIME N180 A10 N190 DO $R4=$AC_TIME N200 X0. path = 10 degrees. path = 10 mm.14 mm. Feedrate = 100 degrees/min.001 A10 N300 FGREF[A]=360/(2*$PI) N310 DO $R9=$AC_TIME N320 X0. path = 10 degrees. Program code N10 G0 X0 Y0 N20 FGROUP(X) N30 G1 X1000 Y1000 G94 F1000 FL[Y]=500 N40 Z-50 120 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Feedrate = 100 mm/min. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 8 s . Feedrate = 2540 mm/min.2 mm. 6 s . 0. Feedrate = 2540 mm/min. path = 10 mm. Feedrate = 100 mm/min or 100 degrees/min Comment Example 2: Traverse synchronized axes with limit velocity FL The path velocity of the path axes is reduced if the synchronized axis Z reaches the limit velocity. R4 = approx. Feedrate = 2540 mm/min. Feedrate = 100 mm/min. R8 = approx. FGREF) Examples Example 1: Mode of operation of FGROUP The following example is intended to demonstrate the effect of FGROUP on the path and path feedrate. path = 254 mm.001 A10 N330 M30 . Set 1 degree = 1 inch via the effective radius. path = 14. Feedrate = 2540 mm/min. R3 = approx.1 Feedrate (G93. FGROUP. Program code N100 G0 X0 A0 N110 FGROUP(X.001 A10 N210 G700 F100 N220 DO $R5=$AC_TIME N230 X10 N240 DO $R6=$AC_TIME N250 X10 A10 N260 DO $R7=$AC_TIME N270 A10 N280 DO $R8=$AC_TIME N290 X0. FL. . The variable $AC_TIME contains the time of the block start in seconds. It can only be used in synchronized actions. Feedrate = 100 mm/min. 6 s . 6 s . 6 s . 06/2009. R5 = approx. Feedrate = 2540 mm/min or 100 degrees/min . Feedrate = 100 degrees/min.288 s . G95.Feed control 7. R6 = approx. 6 s . path = 10 mm. R7 = approx. R1 = approx. 6 s . path = 254. Y) N30 G2 X10 Y20 Z-15 I15 J0 F1000 FL[Z]=200 Comment . The limit speed is deselected by reading the speed from the MD. Z is a synchronized axis. End of program. the infeed axis Z is a synchronized axis. Axes X/Y are path axes. On the circular path. FGROUP.Z] N110 M30 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Feed of the tool. N100 FL[Z]=$MA_AX_VELO_LIMIT[0. the feedrate is 1.000 mm/min.Feed control 7. Read the value from the MD. 06/2009. G95. FL. . Program code N10 G17 G94 G1 Z0 F500 N20 X10 Y20 N25 FGROUP(X. Approach of the starting position . F..1 Feedrate (G93. . traversing in the Z direction is synchronized. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 121 . . G94.. . FGREF) Example 3: Helical interpolation Path axes X and Y traverse with the programmed feedrate. . 1 Feedrate (G93. the path feedrate value has to be reprogrammed. G95. the feedrate can also be specified in degrees/min. F. Depending on the default setting in the machine data. Separators are permitted after the address F. The feedrate F acts only on path axes and remains active until a new feedrate is programmed. One F value can be programmed per NC block. The feedrate is specified under address F.Feed control 7. G94. In the event of switching between G93. FGREF) Further information Feedrate for path axes (F) The path feedrate is generally composed of the individual speed components of all geometry axes participating in the movement and refers to the center point of the cutter or the tip of the turning tool. the units of measurement specified with the G commands are either in mm or inch.5 F=2*FEED Feedrate type (G93/G94/G95) The G commands G93. FL. When machining with rotary axes. 122 Fundamentals Programming Manual. G94 and G95. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . FGROUP. 06/2009. G94 and G95 are modal. Examples: F100 or F 100 F. The feedrate unit is defined using one of the G commands G93/G94/G95. 06/2009. FL.1 Feedrate (G93. and all axes reach their end point at the same time. Feedrate for synchronized axes The feedrate programmed under address F applies to all the path axes programmed in a block but not to the synchronized axes. G95.5 min. the rapid traverse velocity applies.Feed control 7. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 123 . Fundamentals Programming Manual. a new F value should be specified in each block with G93. FGREF) Inverse-time feedrate (G93) The inverse-time feedrate specifies the time required to execute the motion commands in a block. Limit velocity for synchronized axes (FL) The FL command can be used to program a limit velocity for synchronized axes. Note If the path lengths vary greatly from block to block. The synchronized axes are controlled such that they require the same time for their path as the path axes. the feedrate can also be specified in degrees/min. FL is deselected by assignment to MD (MD36200 $MA_AX_VELO_LIMIT). In the absence of a programmed FL. FGROUP. Unit: rpm Example: N10 G93 G01 X100 F2 Significance: the programmed path is traversed in 0. F. When machining with rotary axes. G94. axis identifiers must be the names of channel axes. FGREF) Traverse path axis as synchronized axis (FGROUP) FGROUP is used to define whether a path axis should be traversed with path feedrate or as a synchronized axis. FGROUP(X. the G commands are also used to define the measuring system for the feedrates F.1 Feedrate (G93. In other words: ● For G700: [inch/min] ● For G710: [mm/min] Note G70/G71 have no effect on feedrate settings. Note With FGROUP. The infeed axis Z is the synchronized axis in this case. FL. G94. FGROUP. Example: FGROUP(X. X and Y. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Y) Change FGROUP The setting made with FGROUP can be changed: 1. Units of measurement for feedrate F In addition to the geometrical settings G700 and G710. Unit of measurement for synchronized axes with limit speed FL The unit set for F using G command G700/G710 is also valid for FL. F.Feed control 7.g. In helical interpolation. it is possible to define that only two geometry axes. the initial setting in the machine data applies: Geometry axes are now once again traversed in the path axis grouping. 124 Fundamentals Programming Manual.Y. are to be traversed at the programmed feedrate.Z) 2. G95. By reprogramming FGROUP: e. 06/2009. for example. By programming FGROUP without a specific axis: FGROUP() In accordance with FGROUP(). F. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 125 . The tangential velocity of the rotary axis in mm/min or inch/min is calculated according to the following formula: F[mm/min] = F'[degrees/min] * π * D[mm]/360[degrees] where: F: F': π: D: Tangential velocity Angular velocity Circle constant Diameter F F' D Fundamentals Programming Manual. G94.Feed control 7. FL. FGREF) Unit for rotary and linear axes For linear and rotary axes which are combined with FGROUP and traverse a path together. the feedrate is interpreted in the unit of the linear axes (depending on the default with G94/G95.1 Feedrate (G93. G95. FGROUP. in mm/min or inch/min and mm/rev or inch/rev). In order to ensure compatibility with the behavior with no FGREF programming.296 • For G70/G700: FGREF[A]=57.0001 F100 With this type of programming.Feed control 7.296/25. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . F. This requires the specification of an effective radius (reference radius) for each of the rotary axes involved. The unit of the reference radius depends on the G70/G71/G700/G710 setting. the factor 1 degree = 1 mm is activated on system power up and RESET. G95. Special situations: Program code N100 FGROUP(X. the F value programmed in N110 is evaluated as the rotary axis feedrate in degrees/min.A) N110 G1 G91 A10 F100 N120 G1 G91 A10 X0. FGROUP. in which the tool or the workpiece or both are moved by a rotary axis. while the feedrate evaluation in N120 is either 100 inch/min or 100 mm/min.Z. 06/2009. dependent upon the currently active G70/G71/G700/G710 setting. All axes involved must be included in the FGROUP command to be taken into account in the calculation of the path feedrate.1 Feedrate (G93. G94. Note This default is independent of the active basic system (MD10240 $MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC) and the currently active G70/G71/G700/G710 setting. FL. CAUTION FGREF evaluation also works if only rotary axes are programmed in the block.Y. The normal F value interpretation as degree/min applies in this case only if the radius reference corresponds to the FGREF default: • For G71/G710: FGREF[A]=57. This corresponds to a reference radius of FGREF= 360 mm/(2π) = 57.296 mm. FGREF) Traverse rotary axes with path velocity F (FGREF) For machining operations. the effective machining feedrate is to be interpreted as a path feed in the usual way by reference to the F value.4 126 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 1 Feedrate (G93. 06/2009. For linear axes. FGREF) Read reference radius The value of the reference radius of a rotary axis can be read using system variables: ● In synchronized actions or with preprocessing stop in the part program via system variable: $AA_FGREF[<axis>] Current main run value ● Without preprocessing stop in the part program via system variable: $PA_FGREF[<axis>] Programmed value If no values are programmed. FGROUP. Returns a bit key of the channel axes programmed with FGROUP which are to affect the path velocity. Otherwise. $P_FGROUP_MASK Fundamentals Programming Manual. the variable returns the value "0". the value in both variables is always 1 mm. $AC_FGROUP_MASK ● Without preprocessing stop in the part program via system variables: $PA_FGROUP[<axis>] Returns the value "1" if the specified axis affects the path velocity by means of the basic setting or through FGROUP programming. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 127 . the variable returns the value "0". F.Feed control 7. FL. Otherwise. G95. G94. Read path axes affecting velocity The axes involved in path interpolation can be read using system variables: ● In synchronized actions or with preprocessing stop in the part program via system variables: $AA_FGROUP[<axis>] Returns the value "1" if the specified axis affects the path velocity in the current main run record by means of the basic setting or through FGROUP programming. Returns a bit key of the channel axes programmed with FGROUP which are to affect the path velocity. the default 360 mm/(2π) = 57.296 mm (corresponding to 1 mm per degree) will be read in both variables. G94. G95. FL. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . the root of the product of the two axial factors: FGREF[effective] = square root of [(FGREF[A] * FGREF[B])] Note It is. the effective factor is. is applied. possible to use the effective factor for orientation axes FGREF to define a reference point on the tool to which the programmed path feedrate refers.)] where: A: B: C: n: Example: Since there are two orientation axes for a standard 5-axis transformation. F. as is the case with rotary axes. therefore.Feed control 7. FGROUP. the relevant FGREF factors of the orientation axes are calculated individually as reference radius for the axis paths. In the case of rotary axis interpolation. FGREF[effective] = nth root of [(FGREF[A] * FGREF[B]. In the case of vector interpolation. Axis identifier of 1st orientation axis Axis identifier of 2nd orientation axis Axis identifier of 3rd orientation axis Number of orientation axes 128 Fundamentals Programming Manual.1 Feedrate (G93. FGREF) Path reference factors for orientation axes with FGREF With orientation axes the mode of operation of the FGREF[] factors is dependent upon whether the change in the orientation of the tool is implemented by means of rotary axis or vector interpolation. which is calculated as the geometric mean value of the individual FGREF factors.. 06/2009. an effective FGREF factor.. therefore. WAITMC loads the next NC block immediately when the specified wait marker is received. Syntax POS[<axis>]=<position> POSA[<axis>]=<position> POSP[<axis>]=(<end position>. WAITMC) Positioning axes are traversed independently of the path axes at a separate. POSP.<mode>) FA[<axis>]=<value> WAITP(<axis>) . WAITP. Programming in a separate NC block.2 Traversing positioning axes (POS. POSP. The POS/POSA/POSP commands are used to traverse the positioning axes and coordinate the motion sequences at the same time. WAITP.2 Traversing positioning axes (POS. There are no interpolation commands. POSA. 06/2009. WAITMC(<wait marker>) Fundamentals Programming Manual. WAITMC) 7. FA.<partial length>. FA.Feed control 7.2 Function 7. axis-specific feedrate. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 129 . POSA. The following are typical examples of positioning axes: ● Pallet feed equipment ● Gauging stations WAITP can be used to identify a position in the NC program where the program is to wait until an axis programmed with POSA in a previous NC block reaches its end position. <axis>: <position>: POSP: Name of the axis to be traversed (channel or geometry axis identifier) Axis position to be approached Type: <end position>: <partial length>: <mode>: REAL Axis end position to be approached Length of a section Approach mode = 0: For the last two sections. Chapter "Oscillation" FA: Feedrate for the specified positioning axis <axis>: <value>: Name of the axis to be traversed (channel or geometry axis identifier) Feedrate Unit: mm/min or inch/min or deg/min Move positioning axis to specified end position in sections Note: Up to 5 FA values can be programmed for each NC block. Job Planning. WAITP. = 1: The partial length is adjusted so that the total of all calculated partial lengths corresponds exactly to the path up to the end position. Note: POSP is used specifically to program oscillating motion. FA. • POSA enables the NC block even if the position has not been reached. POSP.2 Traversing positioning axes (POS. the path remaining until the end position is split into two residual sections of equal size (preset). 06/2009. WAITMC) Significance POS/POSA: Move positioning axis to specified position POS and POSA have the same functionality but differ in their block change behavior: • POS delays the enabling of the NC block until the position has been reached.Feed control 7. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . References: Programming Manual. POSA. 130 Fundamentals Programming Manual. is read in a following block.2 Traversing positioning axes (POS. <wait marker>: CAUTION Travel with POSA If a command. WAITMC) Wait for a positioning axis to be traversed The subsequent blocks are not processed until the specified positioning axis programmed in a previous NC block with POSA has reached its end position (with exact stop fine). which are already preprocessed and stored have been executed. The previous block is stopped in exact stop (as G9). which implicitly causes a preprocessing stop. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 131 . FA. WAITP.Feed control 7. Number of the wait marker Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. this block is not executed until all other blocks. the next NC block is loaded immediately. <axis>: Name of the axis (channel or geometry axis identifier) for which the WAITP command is to be applied WAITP: Note: With WAITP. an axis can be made available as an oscillating axis or for traversing as a concurrent positioning axis (via PLC). WAITMC: Wait for the specified wait marker to be received When the wait marker is received. POSA. POSP. .2 Traversing positioning axes (POS. 06/2009. WAITMC) Examples Example 1: Travel with POSA and access to machine status data The control generates an internal preprocessing stop on access to machine status data ($A. Program execution does not resume until axis U reaches the end point programmed in N20.Feed control 7. Traverse positioning and path axes . Machining is stopped until all preprocessed and saved blocks have been executed in full. Axis-specific feedrate specifications for the individual positioning axes U and V . N20 POSA[V]=90 POSA[U]=100 G0 X50 Y70 N50 WAITP(U) … 132 Fundamentals Programming Manual. WAITP. POSA. FA.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .. .). Access to machine status data. Comment Example 2: Wait for end of travel with WAITP Pallet feed equipment Axis U: Axis V: Pallet store Transport of workpiece pallet to working area Transfer line to a gauging station where spot checks are carried out to assist the process Program code N10 FA[U]=100 FA[V]=100 Comment . POSP. Program code N40 POSA[X]=100 N50 IF $AA_IM[X]==R100 GOTOF LABEL1 N60 G0 Y100 N70 WAITP(X) N80 LABEL1: N.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 133 . The movement to the end position can be performed during execution of subsequent NC blocks. After a WAITMC. 06/2009.Feed control 7. Travel with POS The next block is not executed until all axes programmed under POS reach their end positions. Block change in the braking ramp with IPOBRKA and WAITMC An axis is only decelerated if the wait marker has not yet been reached or if another end-ofblock criterion is preventing the block change. Wait for end of travel with WAITP After a WAITP.2 Traversing positioning axes (POS. or as a reciprocating axis from the NC program/PLC or HMI. FA. Fundamentals Programming Manual. WAITMC) Further information Travel with POSA Block step enable or program execution is not affected by POSA. POSA. assignment of the axis to the NC program is no longer valid. this applies until the axis is programmed again. This axis can then be operated as a positioning axis through the PLC. POSP. the axis starts immediately if no other end-of-block criterion is preventing the block change. WAITP. Note SPCON requires a maximum of 3 interpolation cycles.) Significance SPCON: Activate position-controlled mode The specified spindle is switched over from speed control to position control. 134 Fundamentals Programming Manual. <n>: Number of the spindle to be switched over. etc.3 Position-controlled spindle operation (SPCON. The SPCON NC command is used to switch over to position-controlled spindle mode. SPCON/SPCOF will be applied to the master spindle. in conjunction with large-pitch thread cutting with G33. where better quality can be achieved.<m>. If a spindle number is not specified.g. the master spindle must be operated in position-control mode. SPCOF) 7.. M4 and M5 apply in respect of the directions of rotation and spindle stop. SPCOF: Deactivate position-controlled mode The specified spindle is switched over from position control to speed control. <n>.) . SPCOF/SPCOF(<n>)/SPCOF(<n>.3 Function 7. 06/2009. Note The speed is specified with S…. etc.<m>. SPCON s modal and is retained until SPCOF. M3. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Feed control 7. e..<m>. SPCOF) Position-controlled spindle mode may be advisable in some cases.3 Position-controlled spindle operation (SPCON. Syntax SPCON/SPCON(<n>)/SPCON(<n>. etc.: SPCON or SPCOF can even be used to switch over multiple spindles in one block. Note With synchronized spindle setpoint value linkage. M70 switches the spindle directly to axis mode. 06/2009. SPOSA. Synchronization In order to synchronize spindle movements. SPOS.g.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS. during tool change.Feed control 7. SPOSA. synchronized axis or positioning axis at the address defined in the machine data. M19. Positioning in axis mode The spindle can also be operated as a path axis.4 Function 7. The program advances to the next block if the end of motion criteria for all spindles or axes programmed in the current block plus the block change criterion for path interpolation are fulfilled. CORSEA. the spindle is in axis mode. SPOSA and M19 induce a temporary switchover to position-controlled mode until the next M3/M4/M5/M41 to M45. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 135 . M70. M19. End of positioning The end-of-motion criterion when positioning the spindle can be programmed using FINEA. M70. SPOSA or M19 can be used to set spindles to specific angular positions.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS. WAITS) 7. IPOENDA or IPOBRKA. WAITS can be used to wait until the spindle position is reached. WAITS) SPOS. When the axis identifier is specified. Fundamentals Programming Manual. e. 4 Positioning spindles (SPOS. M19. SPOSA.<m>) . Syntax Position spindle: SPOS=<value>/SPOS[<n>]=<value> SPOSA=<value>/SPOSA[<n>]=<value> M19/M<n>=19 Switch spindle over to axis mode: M70/M<n>=70 Define end-of-motion criterion: FINEA/FINEA[S<n>] COARSEA/COARSEA[S<n>] IPOENDA/IPOENDA[S<n>] IPOBRKA/IPOBRKA(<axis>[. Programming in a separate NC block. M70. WAITS) Conditions The spindle to be positioned must be capable of operation in position-controlled mode.Feed control 7.<instant in time>]) . Programming in a separate NC block. 136 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Synchronize spindle movements: WAITS/WAITS(<n>. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 9999 0 … ±99 999. • SPOSA enables the NC block even if the position has not been reached. M19. Unit: Type: degrees REAL The following options are available about programming the position approach mode: =AC(<value>): =IC(<value>): =DC(<value>): =ACN(<value>): =ACP(<value>): =<value>: Absolute dimensions Range of values: Range of values: 0 … 359. <n>: Number of the spindle to be positioned.Feed control 7. WAITS) Significance SPOS/SPOSA: Set spindle to specified angle SPOS and SPOSA have the same functionality but differ in their block change behavior: • SPOS delays the enabling of the NC block until the position has been reached. If a spindle number is not specified or if the spindle number is set to "0". 06/2009. <value>: Angular position to which the spindle is to be set.999 Incremental dimensions Approach absolute value directly Absolute dimension. M70.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS. approach in negative direction Absolute dimension. SPOSA. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 137 . SPOS or SPOSA will be applied to the master spindle. approach in positive direction as DC(<value>) Fundamentals Programming Manual. SPOSA. M70. The NC block is not enabled until the position has been reached. M19.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS. 06/2009. No defined position is approached. M<n>=70: Switch the master spindle (M70 or M0=70) or spindle number <n> (M<n>=70) over to axis mode.Feed control 7. IPOBRKA: A block change is possible in the braking ramp. the current value of the setting data is applied: SD43600 $SA_IPOBRAKE_BLOCK_EXCHANGE Note: IBOBRKA with an instant in time of "0" is identical to IPOENDA. <axis>: <instant in time>: Channel axis identifier Instant in time of the block change with reference to the braking ramp Unit: Range of values: Percent 100 (application point of the braking ramp) to 0 (end of the braking ramp) M<n>=19: If a value is not assigned to the <instant in time> parameter. 138 Fundamentals Programming Manual. The NC block is enabled after the switchover has been performed. the programmed end-of-motion criterion will be applied to the master spindle. WAITS) Set the master spindle (M19 or M0=19) or spindle number <n> (M<n>=19) to the angular position preset with SD43240 $SA_M19_SPOS with the position approach mode preset in SD43250 $SA_M19_SPOSMODE. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . FINEA: COARSEA: IPOENDA: S<n>: Motion end when "Exact stop fine" reached Motion end when "Exact stop coarse" reached End of motion on reaching "interpolator stop" Spindle for which the programmed end-of-motion criterion is to be effective <n>: Spindle number If a spindle is not specified in [S<n>] or a spindle number of "0" is specified. Note If position control was activated with SPCON prior to SPOS. WAITS: Fundamentals Programming Manual. Numbers of the spindles to which the synchronization command is to be applied. this remains active until SPCOF is issued. If a spindle number is not specified or if the spindle number is set to "0". Wait for the specified spindle(s) to reach their setpoint speed. M70. However. therefore. Note Three spindle positions are possible for each NC block. WAITS) Synchronization command for the specified spindle(s) The subsequent blocks are not processed until the specified spindle(s) programmed in a previous NC block with SPOSA has (have) reached its (their) end position(s) (with exact stop fine). M70 can continue to be programmed.Feed control 7.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS. SPOSA.<m>: Wait for the specified spindle(s) to come to a standstill. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 139 . 06/2009. M19.g to increase the legibility of the part program. WAITS after M5: WAITS after M3/M4: <n>. Explicit programming of M70 in the part program is. e. spindle positioning can take place over several revolutions. essentially no longer necessary. Note With incremental dimensions IC(<value>). WAITS will be applied to the master spindle. Note The control detects the transition to axis mode automatically from the program sequence. WAITS) Examples Example 1: Position spindle with negative direction of rotation Spindle 2 is to be positioned at 250° with negative direction of rotation: Program code N10 SPOSA[2]=ACN(250) Comment . M70. M19. SPOSA. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .4 Positioning spindles (SPOS. 06/2009.Feed control 7. The spindle is decelerated if necessary and accelerated in the opposite direction to that of the positioning movement. 140 Fundamentals Programming Manual. spindle 2 positioned to 0. WAITS) Example 2: Spindle positioning in axis mode Program variant 1: Program code . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 141 . 06/2009.. Spindle 2 (C axis) is traversed with linear interpolation synchronized with X.. Spindle 2 switches to axis mode. Spindle 2 is positioned to 90 degrees.. Spindle 2 is positioned to 90 degrees. . N10 M3 S500 . N90 SPOS[2]=0 N100 X50 C180 N110 Z20 SPOS[2]=90 . Spindle 2 (C axis) is traversed with linear interpolation synchronous to X. Comment Fundamentals Programming Manual. Position control on. Comment Program variant 2: Program code . M70.Feed control 7.... N90 M2=70 N100 X50 C180 N110 Z20 SPOS[2]=90 .. N10 M3 S500 .4 Positioning spindles (SPOS. M19.. . axis mode can be used in the next block. . SPOSA. . M70. Feedrate in mm/min (G96 is suitable only for the multi-edge turning tool and synchronous spindle. Set main spindle to 0° immediately. stopped and so on. . Switch on the drill while the spindle is taking up position. Program code . WAITS) Example 3: Drill cross holes in turned part Cross holes are to be drilled in this turned part. SPOSA. but not for power tools on the cross slide.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS. ending up in the absolute 270° position. The spindle is positioned at 180° relative to the spindle zero point.. the program will advance to the next block straight away.) . . . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . N125 G0 X34 Z-35 N130 WAITS N135 G1 G94 X10 F250 N140G0 X34 N145 SPOS=IC(90) N150 G1 X10 N155 G0 X34 N160 SPOS=AC(180) N165 G1 X10 N170 G0 X34 N175 SPOS=IC(90) .. The running drive spindle (master spindle) is stopped at zero degrees and then successively turned through 90°.. Switch on cross drilling attachment. M19. N180 G1 X10 N185 G0 X50 .. ..Feed control 7. 06/2009. . 142 Fundamentals Programming Manual. The spindle turns in a positive direction through 90° from the absolute 180° position. The spindle is positioned through 90° with read halt in a positive direction. N110 S2=1000 M2=3 N120 SPOSA=DC(0) Comment . Wait for the main spindle to reach its position. DC. execution of this block is delayed until all positioning spindles are stationary. Velocity of the movements: The velocity and the delay response for positioning are stored in the machine data. ACN. FPRAOF) (Page 146) ● Programmable acceleration override (ACC) (option) (Page 152) Specification of spindle positions: As the G90/G91 commands are not effective here. If no specifications are made. The spindle positioning can be performed during execution of subsequent NC blocks. which implicitly causes a preprocessing stop. the corresponding dimensions apply explicitly. FPR.g. Fundamentals Programming Manual. FPRAON. M19. NOTICE If a command. e. traversing automatically takes place as for DC. WAITS) Further information Positioning with SPOSA The block step enable or program execution is not affected by SPOSA. M70. 06/2009. SPOSA.Feed control 7. Positioning with SPOS/M19 The block step enabling condition is met when all functions programmed in the block reach their end-of-block criterion (e. ACP. The configured values can be modified by programming or by synchronized actions. The spindle positioning operation may be programmed over several blocks (see WAITS). IC.g. The program moves onto the next block if all the functions (except for spindle) programmed in the current block have reached their block end criterion. is read in a following block. all axes at their end point) and the spindle reaches the programmed position.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS. all auxiliary functions acknowledged by the PLC. see: ● Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 143 . AC. Comment WAITS can be used after M5 to wait until the spindle(s) has (have) stopped. 144 Fundamentals Programming Manual.Feed control 7. N40 WAITS(2. the positive direction of rotation is taken from the machine data (state on delivery). WAITS) Synchronize spindle movements with WAITS WAITS can be used to identify a point at which the NC program waits until one or more spindles programmed with SPOSA in a previous NC block reach their positions. The block waits until spindles 2 and 3 have reached the positions specified in block N10. M19. 06/2009. Example: Program code N10 SPOSA[2]=180 SPOSA[3]=0 ... SPOSA.3) .4 Positioning spindles (SPOS. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . WAITS can be used after M3/M4 to wait until the spindle(s) has (have) reached the specified speed/direction of rotation. Note If the spindle has not yet been synchronized with synchronization marks. M70. WAITS) Position spindle from rotation (M3/M4) When M3 or M4 is active. With IC. SPOSA. rotation continues in the direction selected by M3/M4 until the absolute end position is reached. the spindle comes to a standstill at the programmed value. deceleration takes place if necessary. Position a spindle from standstill (M5) The exact programmed distance is traversed from standstill (M5).Feed control 7. There is no difference between DC and AC dimensioning. Fundamentals Programming Manual. M19. and the appropriate approach direction is taken.4 Positioning spindles (SPOS. 06/2009. the spindle rotates additionally to the specified value starting at the current spindle position. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 145 . M70. With ACN and ACP. In both cases. FPR. etc. Syntax Feedrate for positioning axis: FA[<axis>]=… Axis feedrate for spindle: FA[SPI(<n>)]=… FA[S<n>]=… Derive revolutional feedrate for path/synchronized axes: FPR (<rotary axis>) FPR(SPI(<n>)) FPR(S<n>) Derive rotational feedrate for positioning axes/spindles: FPRAON(<axis>.S<n>) FPRAON(SPI(<n>).) 146 Fundamentals Programming Manual. It is also possible to derive the revolutional feedrate for path and synchronized axes or for individual positioning axes/spindles from another rotary axis or spindle.<rotary axis>) FPRAON(<axis>. FPRAON. FPRAOF) Positioning axes such as workpiece transport systems. A separate feedrate is therefore defined for each positioning axis.S<n>.5 Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA.Feed control 7.SPI(<n>)) FPRAON(S<n>. 06/2009. tool turrets and end supports are traversed independently of path and synchronized axes. A separate axial feedrate can also be programmed for spindles.S<n>) FPRAOF(<axis>. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .<rotary axis>) FPRAON(S<n>. FPR. etc.5 Function 7.5 Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA. FPRAOF) 7.SPI(<n>)) FPRAON(<axis>. FPRAON.) FPRAOF(<axis>.SPI(<n>).<rotary axis>) FPRAON(SPI(<n>). .): <axis>: SPI(<n>)/S<n>: Fundamentals Programming Manual. The second parameter (<rotary axis>/SPI(<n>)/S<n>) identifies the rotary axis/spindle from which the revolutional feedrate is to be derived. FPR. in which case the feedrate will be derived from the master spindle. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 147 ... FPRAOF) Significance FA[.. : Feedrate for the specified positioning axis or positioning speed (axial feedrate) for the specified spindle Unit: mm/min or inch/min or deg/min … 39 999.): FPR is used to identify the rotary axis (<rotary axis>) or spindle (SPI(<n>)/S<n>) from which the revolutional feedrate for the revolutional feedrate of the path and synchronized axes programmed under G95 is to be derived. FPRAON.5 Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA.. Axis identifier (positioning or geometry axis) Spindle identifier SPI(<n>) and S<n> are identical in terms of function.. FPRAOF(. Range of values: … 999 999... The transfer parameter (<n>) must contain a valid spindle number.]=..): FPRAOF is used to deselect the derived revolutional feedrate for the specified axes or spindles.999 mm/min. 06/2009.Feed control 7.. Note: The second parameter can be omitted. Derive rotational feedrate for positioning axes and spindles The first parameter (<axis>/SPI(<n>)/S<n>) identifies the positioning axis/spindle to be traversed with revolutional feedrate. <n>: Spindle number Note: SPI converts spindle numbers into axis identifiers.9999 inch/min FPR(. deg/min FPRAON(. Feed control 7... Position master spindle. Y must be traversed at the revolutional feedrate derived from rotary axis A: Program code . Deselect revolutional feedrate for the master spindle. FPRAON.g.. . Note The derived feedrate is calculated according to the following formula: Derived feedrate = programmed feedrate * absolute master feedrate Examples Example 1: Synchronous spindle coupling With synchronous spindle coupling.. Positioning speed of the following spindle (spindle 2) = 100 deg/min Comment Example 2: Derived revolutional feedrate for path axes Path axes X. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Example 3: Derive revolutional feedrate for master spindle Program code N30 FPRAON(S1.. FA[S2]=100 . The revolutional feedrate for the master spindle (S1) must be derived from spindle 2.. Up to five feedrates for positioning axes or spindles can be programmed in each NC block. for positioning operations. Program code . . FPR. the positioning speed of the following spindle can be programmed independently of the master spindle.. FPRAOF) Note The programmed feedrate FA[. 06/2009.. N40 FPR(A) N50 G95 X50 Y50 F500 ..] is modal. .5 Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA. 148 Fundamentals Programming Manual..S2) N40 SPOS=150 N50 FPRAOF(S1) Comment . e. 06/2009. When G70/G71 is active. If the rotary axis/spindle specified in the FPR command is operating on position control. FPRAON. Further information FA[…] The feedrate type is always G94. The revolutional feedrate for positioning axis X must be derived from the master spindle. FPRAON(…) FPRAON is used to derive the revolutional feedrate for positioning axes and spindles from the current feedrate of another rotary axis or spindle. G95 FPR(…) is valid for path and synchronized axes. FPR. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 149 . the value defined in the machine data applies.Feed control 7. the unit is metric/inches according to the default setting in the machine data. . FPRAOF(…) The revolutional feedrate can be deactivated for one or a number of axes/spindles simultaneously with the FPRAOF command. The positioning axis is traversing at 500 mm/revolution of the master spindle. Otherwise the actual-value linkage is effective. then the setpoint linkage is active. NOTICE If no FA is programmed. G700/G710 can be used to modify the unit in the program.5 Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA. Fundamentals Programming Manual. FPRAOF) Example 4: Derive revolutional feedrate for positioning axis Program code N30 FPRAON(X) N40 POS[X]=50 FA[X]=500 N50 FPRAOF(X) Comment . FPR(…) As an extension of the G95command (revolutional feedrate referring to the master spindle). FPR allows the revolutional feedrate to be derived from any chosen spindle or rotary axis. Syntax OVR=<value> OVRRAP=<value> OVRA[<axis>]=<value> OVRA[SPI(<n>)]=<value> OVRA[S<n>]=<value> Significance OVR: OVRRAP: OVRA: Feedrate modification for path feedrate F Feedrate modification for rapid traverse velocity Feedrate modification for positioning feedrate FA or for spindle speed S Axis identifier (positioning or geometry axis) Spindle identifier SPI(<n>) and S<n> are identical in terms of function.6 Programmable feedrate override (OVR. <axis>: SPI(<n>)/S<n>: 150 Fundamentals Programming Manual.6 Programmable feedrate override (OVR. <n>: Spindle number Note: SPI converts spindle numbers into axis identifiers. OVRA) 7. 06/2009. OVRRAP. OVRA) The velocity of path/positioning axes and spindles can be modified in the NC program. integers Note: With path and rapid traverse override. the maximum velocities set in the machine data are not overshot. The transfer parameter (<n>) must contain a valid spindle number. Range of values: … 200%. <value>: Feedrate modification in percent The value refers to or is combined with the feedrate override set on the machine control panel. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .6 Function 7. OVRRAP.Feed control 7. 8 * 0.5).. OVRA[SPI(1)]=35 Comment . The path feedrate is reduced to 25% and the positioning feedrate for positioning axis A1 is reduced to 70%. Fundamentals Programming Manual. The rapid traverse velocity is reduced to 5%. Example 3: Program code N. OVR=25 OVRA[A1]=70 Comment ... F1000 N20 OVR=50 .. Comment Example 2: Program code N10 OVRRAP=5 . The programmed path feedrate F1000 is changed in F400 (1000 * 0. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 151 . OVRA[S1]=35 Comment .6 Programmable feedrate override (OVR. The speed for spindle 1 is reduced to 35%.. OVRA) Examples Example 1: Set feedrate override: 80% Program code N10 . Example 4: Program code N...Feed control 7. OVRRAP. . Comment . N100 OVRRAP=100 . 06/2009. The speed for spindle 1 is reduced to 35%... or Program code N.. The rapid traverse velocity is reset to 100% (= default setting). <n>: Spindle number Note: SPI converts spindle numbers into axis identifiers. <axis>: SPI(<n>)/S<n>: 152 Fundamentals Programming Manual.7 Function 7.7 Programmable acceleration override (ACC) (option) 7. it may be necessary to limit the acceleration to below the maximum values. 06/2009.. Range of values: 1 to 200%. The transfer parameter (<n>) must contain a valid spindle number.g. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . The limit is effective for all types of interpolation. <value>: Acceleration change in percent The value refers to or is combined with the feedrate override set on the machine control panel. the values permitted by the manufacturer may be exceeded.7 Programmable acceleration override (ACC) (option) In critical program sections. integers NOTICE With a greater acceleration rate.. e. Channel axis name of path axis Spindle identifier SPI(<n>) and S<n> are identical in terms of function. to prevent mechanical vibrations from occurring.]=100 Syntax ACC: Acceleration change for the specified path axis or speed change for the specified spindle. Syntax ACC[<axis>]=<value> ACC[SPI(<n>)]=<value> ACC(S<n>)=<value> Deactivate: ACC[. The programmable acceleration override can be used to modify the acceleration for each path axis or spindle via a command in the NC program. The values defined in the machine data apply as 100% acceleration.Feed control 7. Synchronized Actions).. The axis slide in the X direction should only be traversed with 80% acceleration. The preset acceleration can also be changed via synchronized actions (see Function Manual. In the part program The value written in the part program is then only taken into consideration in system variable $AA_ACC as written in the part program if ACC has not been changed in the meantime by a synchronized action. .. Machine data can be used to define whether the last ACC value set should apply on RESET/part program end or whether 100% should apply. In synchronized actions The following thus applies: The value written to a synchronized action is then only considered in system variable $AA_ACC as written to the synchronized action if ACC has not been changed in the meantime by a part program.. 06/2009.Feed control 7.] is always taken into consideration on output as in system variable $AA_ACC. Readout in the parts program and in synchronized actions takes place at different times in the NC processing run.. Further information Acceleration override programmed with ACC The acceleration override programmed with ACC[. Example: Program code .7 Programmable acceleration override (ACC) (option) Example Program code N50 ACC[X]=80 N60 ACC[SPI(1)]=50 Comment . N100 EVERY $A_IN[1] DO POS[X]=50 FA[X]=2000 ACC[X]=140 The current acceleration value can be called with system variable $AA_ACC[<axis>]. Spindle 1 should only accelerate or brake with 50% of the acceleration capacity. Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 153 . The programmed settings for traversing the axes are then overlaid with the handwheel pulses evaluated as path or velocity defaults.Feed control 7. ● Velocity override The handwheel pulses evaluated per interpolation cycle dependent on the direction of rotation correspond to the axial velocity to be overlaid. ● Path override The handwheel pulses evaluated dependent on the direction of rotation correspond to the axis path to be traveled.8 Function 7. FDA) 7. Positioning axes In the case of positioning axes. Path axes In the case of path axes. The handwheel pulses evaluated per interpolation cycle dependent on the direction of rotation correspond to the path velocity to be overlaid. The path velocity limit values which can be achieved by means of handwheel override are: – Minimum: 0 – Maximum: Machine data limit values of the positioning axis A detailed description of how to set handwheel parameters appears in: References: /FB2/ Function Manual. the programmed path feedrate can be overlaid. FDA) The FD and FDA commands can be used to traverse axes with handwheels during execution of the part program. Extended Functions. The handwheel assigned to the axis is evaluated. The handwheel is evaluated as the first geometry axis of the channel. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 06/2009. the travel path or velocity can be overlaid as an axial value. Only handwheel pulses in the direction of the programmed position are evaluated.8 Feedrate with handwheel override (FD. The path velocity limit values which can be achieved by means of handwheel override are: ● Minimum: 0 ● Maximum: Machine data limit values of the path axes involved in traversing Note Path feedrate The path feedrate F and the handwheel feedrate FD cannot be programmed in the same NC block.8 Feedrate with handwheel override (FD. Manual Travel and Handwheel Travel (H1) 154 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 8 Feedrate with handwheel override (FD. 06/2009. The operator can continue to feed manually until the sparks are flying uniformly. FDA) Syntax FD=<velocity> FDA[<axis>]=<velocity> Significance FD=<velocity>: Path feedrate and enabling of velocity override with handwheel <velocity>: • Value = 0: Not allowed! • Value ≠ 0: Path velocity FDA[<axis>]=<velocity>: Axial feedrate <velocity>: • Value = 0: Path default with handwheel • Value ≠ 0: Axial velocity <axis>: Note FD and FDA are non-modal. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 155 .Feed control 7. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Axis identifier of positioning axis Example Path definition: The grinding wheel oscillating in the Z direction is traversed to the workpiece in the X direction with the handwheel. Activating "Delete distance-to-go" switches to the next NC block and machining continues in AUTOMATIC mode. The handwheel . 06/2009. FDA) Further information Traverse path axes with velocity override (FD=<velocity>) The following conditions must be met for the part program block in which path velocity override is programmed: ● Path command G1.8 Feedrate with handwheel override (FD. Feedrate = 700 mm/min and velocity override .Feed control 7. Acceleration from 500 to 700 mm/min in N20. 156 Fundamentals Programming Manual. can be used to vary the speed dependent on the direction of rotation between . 0 and the maximum value (machine data). . with handwheel. Example: Program code N10 X… Y… F500 N20 X… Y… FD=700 Description . Traverse positioning axes with path default (FDA[<axis>]=0) In the NC block with programmed FDA[<axis>]=0 the feed is set to zero so that the program cannot generate any travel movement. G2 or G3 active ● Exact stop G60 active ● Linear feedrate G94 active Feedrate override The feedrate override only affects the programmed path velocity and not the velocity component generated with the handwheel (exception: (except if feed override = 0). The programmed travel movement to the target position is now controlled exclusively by the operator rotating the handwheel. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Feedrate = 500 mm/min . . and velocity override with handwheel.8 Feedrate with handwheel override (FD. the higher the traversing speed. The values set as parameters in the machine data serve as the maximum velocity. Target position = 90 mm. . 06/2009. Acceleration from 100 to 200 mm/min in N20. Fundamentals Programming Manual. path override with handwheel. The faster the handwheel rotates. Forward and backwards travel is possible dependent on the direction of rotation. the feedrate from the last programmed FA value is accelerated or decelerated to the value programmed under FDA. Traverse positioning axis with velocity override (FDA[<axis>]=<velocity>) In NC blocks with programmed FDA[…]=…. Axial feedrate = 100 mm/min . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 157 . Traversing range: The traversing range is limited by the starting position and the programmed end point. The . N20 POS[V]=90 FDA[V]=0 . axial feedrate = 200 mm/min . Axial target position = 100. FDA) Example: Program code .Feed control 7. . Traversing range: The traversing range is limited by the starting position and the programmed end point. Path and speed defaults are set using handwheel pulses Description Direction of movement. between 0 and the maximum value (machine data).. axial feedrate = 0 mm/min and . Example: Program code N10 POS[V]=… FA[V]=100 N20 POS[V]=100 FAD[V]=200 Description . travel velocity The axes follow the path set by the handwheel in the direction of the sign.. Starting from the current feedrate FDA. Velocity of axis V at start of block = 0 mm/min. direction of rotation . the handwheel can be turned to accelerate the programmed movement to the target position or decelerate it to zero. handwheel can be used to vary the velocity dependent on the . the feedrate needs to be controlled accordingly for curved contours. The path that the outside of the milling tool must travel is considerably longer than the path along the contour.9 Function 7. Because of this. When you mill a circle (the same applies to polynomial and spline interpolation) the extent to which the feedrate varies at the cutter edge is so significant under certain circumstances that it can impair the quality of the machined part.Feed control 7. To prevent adverse effects.9 Feedrate optimization for curved path sections (CFTCP. machining at the contour takes place with a very low feedrate.9 Feedrate optimization for curved path sections (CFTCP. CFC. Example: Milling a small outside radius with a large tool. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 06/2009. Syntax CFTCP CFC CFIN 158 Fundamentals Programming Manual. the programmed feedrate for the milling cutter radius initially refers to the milling cutter center path (see the chapter titled "Coordinate transformations (frames)"). CFIN) 7. CFC. CFIN) With activated offset mode G41/G42. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 159 . 06/2009. Constant feedrate at the tool cutting edge only at concave contours. Subroutine call .Feed control 7. Subroutine call Fundamentals Programming Manual. the cutting base is also machined with CFIN. Example In this example. The feedrate is reduced for inside radii. Program code N10 G17 G54 G64 T1 M6 N20 S3000 M3 CFC F500 G41 N30 G0 X-10 N40 Y0 Z-10 N50 CONTOUR1 N40 CFIN Z-25 N50 CONTOUR1 N60 Y120 N70 X200 M30 Comment . This function is preset per default. CFC. During finishing. Constant feedrate at the contour (tool cutting edge). This prevents the cutting base being damaged at the outside radii by a feedrate that is too high. the contour is first produced with CFC-corrected feedrate. Feed to first cutting depth . otherwise on the milling cutter center path. CFIN) Significance CFTCP: CFC: CFIN: Constant feedrate on the milling cutter center path The control keeps the feedrate constant and feedrate offsets are deactivated. Feed to second cutting depth .9 Feedrate optimization for curved path sections (CFTCP. 9 Feedrate optimization for curved path sections (CFTCP. CFC. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . CFIN) Further information Constant feedrate on contour with CFC The feedrate is reduced for inside radii and increased for outside radii. 160 Fundamentals Programming Manual. This ensures a constant speed at the tool edge and thus at the contour.Feed control 7. . STA.. Syntax F2=.10 Several feedrate values in one block (F. : Retraction path The unit for the retraction path refers to the current valid unit of measurement (mm or inch). to F7=. SR.. ST=. ST. STA. up to 6 further feedrates can be programmed in the block.10 Several feedrate values in one block (F. Significance F2=. : The path feedrate is programmed under the address F and remains valid during the absence of an input signal.. Input bit: Effective: 0 non-modal 1 non-modal Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009... : non-modal Dwell time in s (for grinding technology: sparking-out time) Input bit: Effective: SR=. The numerical expansion indicates the bit number of the input that activates the feedrate when changed: Effective: ST=. STA[<axis>]=.10 Function 7. In addition to the path feedrate.. FMA..Feed control 7. SR.<axis>]=.. The HW input signals are combined in one input byte..... SR=. dependent on external digital and/or analog inputs. a dwell time or a retraction motion-synchronously. ST. to F7=.. FMA..<axis>]=. SRA) 7.... SRA) The "Multiple feedrates in one block" function can be used to activate different feedrate values for an NC block.. SRA[<axis>]=... FMA[2.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 161 . to FMA[7... 1 non-modal 0 non-modal Axial retraction path 162 Fundamentals Programming Manual. : non-modal Axial dwell time in s (for grinding technology: sparking-out time) Input bit: Effective: SRA[<axis>]=. In this way. to FMA[7. 06/2009. dwell time or return path are programmed for an axis on account of an external input. In addition to the axial feedrate FA up to 6 further feedrates per axis can be programmed in the block with FMA. SRA) FMA[2.... Note The axial feedrate (FA or FMA value) or path feedrate (F value) corresponds to 100% feedrate. the current feedrate is restricted by the Look Ahead value. STA. this axis must not be programmed as POSA axis (positioning axis over multiple blocks) in this block.<axis>]=.. ST. The "Multiple feedrate values in one block" function can be used to achieve feedrates smaller than or equal to the axial feedrate or path feedrate. Note If feedrates. the distance to go for the path axes or the relevant single axes is deleted and the dwell time or return started.<axis>]=.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . : Input bit: Effective: Note If input bit 1 is activated for the dwell time or bit 0 for the return path..Feed control 7. FMA.10 Several feedrate values in one block (F. Note Look Ahead is also active for multiple feedrates in one block. Effective: STA[<axis>]=. : The axial feedrate is programmed under the address FA and remains valid during the absence of an input signal... The first parameter indicates the bit number of the input and the second the axis for which the feedrate is to apply. SR. Example 3: Multiple operations in one block Program code N20 T1 D1 F500 G0 X100 N25 G1 X105 F=20 F7=5 F3=2. smooth-finishing with F2.10 Several feedrate values in one block (F. 06/2009. SRA) Examples Example 1: Path motion Program code F7=1000 F2=20 ST=1 SR=0.000 for X axis. Fundamentals Programming Manual. dwell time 1. 3 corresponds to input bit 3.5 Comment . Initial setting .5 Comment . FMA. Normal feedrate with F.5 s.5 mm . STA. ST. Return path (mm) input bit 0 Example 2: Axial motion Program code FMA[3.Feed control 7. roughing with F7. Axial feedrate with the value 1. 2 corresponds to input bit 2 .5 ST=1. 7 corresponds to input bit 7 . return path 0.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 163 ..5 SR=0.x]=1000 Comment . SR. finishing with F3.5 F2=0. Dwell time (s) input bit 1 . Comment .Feed control 7. Initial setting .11 Function 7.. computation block). the FB has no effect. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 ..11 Non-modal feedrate (FB) 7. Feedrate is 100 mm/min again.g. Feedrate 100 mm/min .11 Non-modal feedrate (FB) The "Non-modal feedrate" function can be used to define a separate feedrate for a single block. If no explicit feedrate for chamfering/rounding is programmed. 06/2009. Feedrate 80 mm/min . 164 Fundamentals Programming Manual. FCUB. Feedrate interpolations FLIN. Syntax FB=<value> Significance FB: <VALUE>: Feedrate for current block only The programmed value must be greater than zero. etc. the previous modal feedrate is active again. then the value of FB also applies for any chamfering/rounding contour element in this block. After this block. Values are interpreted based on the active feedrate type: • G94: feedrate in mm/min or degrees/min • G95: feedrate in mm/rev or inch/rev • G96: Constant cutting rate Note If no traversing motion is programmed in the block (e. are also possible without restriction. Example Program code N10 G0 X0 Y0 G17 F100 G94 N20 G1 X10 N30 X20 FB=80 N40 X30 . Simultaneous programming of FB and FD (handwheel travel with feedrate override) or F (modal path feedrate) is not possible. can be programmed instead of the revolutional feedrate: The control uses the $TC_DPNT (number of teeth) tool parameter associated with the active tool offset data record to calculate the effective revolutional feedrate for each traversing block from the programmed tooth feedrate. which is more commonly used in practice. A change to the $TC_DPNT tool parameter associated with the active tool cutting edge will be applied the next time a tool offset is selected or the next time the active offset data is updated. the tooth feedrate. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 165 .Feed control 7. The programmed tooth feedrate is independent of the tool change and the selection/deselection of a tool offset data record.12 Function 7. it is retained in modal format. 06/2009.12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) 7.12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) Primarily for milling operations. Fundamentals Programming Manual. F = FZ * $TC_DPNT where: F: FZ: $TC_DPNT: Revolutional feedrate in mm/rev or inch/rev Tooth feedrate in mm/tooth or inch/tooth Tool parameter: Number of teeth/rev The tool type ($TC_DP1) of the active tool is not taken into account. Note The tooth feedrate refers only to the path (axis-specific programming is not possible).Feed control 7... FGROUP. FL. 06/2009. Significance G95: Type of feedrate: Revolutional feedrate in mm/rev or inch/rev (dependent upon G700/G710) For G95 see "Feedrate (G93.. FGREF) (Page 119)" FZ: Tooth feedrate Activation: Effective: Unit: with G95 modal mm/tooth or inch/tooth (dependent upon G700/G710) Note Switchover between G95 F.. Switching over between G95 F. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . G95. (revolutional feedrate) and G95 FZ.12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) Changing the tool or selecting/deselecting a tool offset data set generates a recalculation of the effective revolutional feedrate.. and G95 FZ.. G94.. F. There is no fixed programmed sequence. Note In the block. G95 and FZ can be programmed together or in isolation. (tooth feedrate) will delete the non-active feedrate value in each case... Syntax G95 FZ.. 166 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 02 mm/tooth . . along with the path geometry (straight line. FPRAOF) (Page 146)"). are not taken into account automatically.1 mm/rev * 200 rpm = 20 mm/min … Comment Fundamentals Programming Manual. CAUTION Technological concerns such as climb milling or conventional milling. FPR. front face milling or peripheral face milling.Feed control 7. reprogramming FZ. Examples Example 1: Milling cutter with 5 teeth ($TC_DPNE = 5) Program code N10 G0 X100 Y50 N20 G1 G95 FZ=0. FPRAON.02 N30 T3 D1 M40 M3 S200 N50 X20 . Milling with: FZ = 0. Tooth feedrate 0. CAUTION Tool change/Changing the master spindle A subsequent tool change or changing the master spindle must be taken into account by the user by means of corresponding programming.). etc.1 mm/rev or: F = 0.g. FPR can also be used to derive the tooth feedrate of any rotary axis or spindle (see "Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA.02 mm/tooth ⇒ effective revolutional feedrate: F = 0. Load tool and activate tool offset data record. 06/2009. Spindle speed 200 rpm .02 mm/tooth * 5 teeth/rev = 0. Therefore. e. these factors have to be given consideration when programming the tooth feedrate. circle.. etc. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 167 .12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) Note Derive feedrate with FPR As is the case with the revolutional feedrate. . 06/2009.03 mm/tooth ⇒ effective revolutional feedrate: 0.1 N30 T1 M6 N35 M3 S100 D1 N40 X20 N50 G0 X100 M5 N60 M6 T3 D1 N70 X22 M3 S300 N80 G1 X3 G95 FZ=0. Comment Example 4: Subsequent tool change Program code N10 G0 X50 Y5 N20 G1 G95 FZ=0. Tooth feedrate modal 0. Tooth feedrate 0.g.5 mm/tooth dependent upon spindle S4. Tool in spindle 4 (not the master spindle).1 mm/rev Comment Example 3: Derive tooth feedrate of a spindle (FBR) Program code … N41 FPR(S4) N51 G95 X51 FZ=0.03 N30 M6 T11 D1 N30 M3 S100 N40 X30 N50 G0 X100 M5 N60 M6 T33 D1 N70 X22 M3 S300 N80 G1 X3 … . tooth feedrate active with 0. Load tool with e. 7 teeth ($TC_DPNT = 7). . Load tool with e.03 mm/tooth . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 ..5 … .g. Comment 168 Fundamentals Programming Manual.12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) Example 2: Switchover between G95 F. Program code N10 G0 X100 Y50 N20 G1 G95 F0. Effective revolutional feedrate 0. Tooth feedrate 0.15 mm/rev . Revolutional feedrate 0. and G95 FZ. 5 teeth ($TC_DPNT = 5).Feed control 7.02 mm/tooth. 5 teeth ($TC_DPNT = 5). Change G95 F… to G95 FZ…. Load tool with e.g. . ..21 mm/rev . .02 … .. The tooth feedrate FZ . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 169 . Tool 1 is changed to spindle 2.The speed of spindle 1 . the effective feedrate is dependent upon: .. . Path motion. Path motion. therefore. Spindle 1 is the master spindle. . N100 SETMS(2) N110 T1 D1 M6 N120 S500 M3 N130 G95 G1 FZ0. the effective feedrate is dependent upon: . Fundamentals Programming Manual.The number of teeth of the active tool T3 N60 G0 X60 .Feed control 7. .. T1). .03 N50 X50 Comment . Tooth feedrate 0. Speed S400 of spindle 1 (and.03 mm/tooth . Tool 3 is changed to spindle 1. Speed S500 of spindle 2 (and. .The speed of spindle 2 . T3).The number of teeth of the active tool T1 Note Following the change in master spindle (N100) the user also has to select an offset affecting the tool actuated by spindle 2.The tooth feedrate FZ . . 06/2009.03 X20 . Spindle 2 becomes the master spindle. therefore.12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) Example 5: Changing the master spindle Program code N10 SETMS (1) N20 T3 D3 M6 N30 S400 M3 N40 G95 G1 FZ0. although it will have no effect and is deleted when G95 is selected. G94 and G95 FZ can also be programmed when G95 is not active.. Reselection of G95 Reselecting G95 when G95 is already active has no effect (unless a change between F and FZ has been programmed). the FZ value is also deleted. in the same way as with F.. 170 Fundamentals Programming Manual.Feed control 7. Synchronized actions FZ cannot be programmed from synchronized actions. a non-modal feedrate FB.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . when changing between G93. 06/2009. Multiple feedrate values in one block The "Multiple feedrate values in one block" function is not possible with tooth feedrate. (modal) is active.12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) Further information Changing between G93. G94. is interpreted as a tooth feedrate. and G95. In other words. SAVE mechanism In subprograms with the SAVE attribute FZ is written to the value prior to the subprogram starting (in the same way as F).. Non-modal feedrate (FB) When G95 FZ. Value: 0 1 2 3 11 31 Significance: mm/min mm/rev inch/min inch/rev mm/tooth inch/tooth ● Without preprocessing stop in the part program via system variables: $P_FZ $P_F_TYPE Programmed tooth feedrate Programmed path feedrate type Value: 0 1 2 3 11 31 Significance: mm/min mm/rev inch/min inch/rev mm/tooth inch/tooth Note If G95 is not active. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 171 . Path feedrate type effective when the current main run record was preprocessed.Feed control 7.12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) Read tooth feedrate and path feedrate type The tooth feedrate and the path feedrate type can be read using system variables. Fundamentals Programming Manual. ● With preprocessing stop in the part program via system variables: $AC_FZ $AC_F_TYPE Tooth feedrate effective when the current main run record was preprocessed. the $P_FZ and $AC_FZ variables will always return a value of zero. 06/2009.12 Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) 172 Fundamentals Programming Manual.Feed control 7. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 173 . G505 to G599. G500. SUPA. G153) The workpiece zero in relation to the zero point of the basic coordinate system is set up by the settable zero offset (G54 to G57 and G505 to G599) in all axes. 06/2009. G53.1 Function 8 8.1 Settable work offset (G54 to G57. Milling: Fundamentals Programming Manual.Geometry settings 8.g. In this way it is possible to call zero points program-wide per G command (e. for different devices). . SUPA.. Syntax Activating settable zero offset: G54 .1 Settable work offset (G54 to G57. the offset value for returning of the chuck is entered in G54. for example.Geometry settings 8. G153) Turning: Note During turning.. G500. G57 G505 . 06/2009. G599 Deactivating settable zero offset: G500 G53 G153 SUPA 174 Fundamentals Programming Manual. G53. G505 to G599. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .. e. G53: G153: SUPA: G53 suppresses the settable work offset and the programmable work offset non-modally. 06/2009.1 Settable work offset (G54 to G57. Fundamentals Programming Manual. SUPA. SUPA has the same effect as G153 and also suppresses: • Handwheel offsets (DRF) • Overlaid movements • External zero offset • PRESET offset References: See Section "Coordinate transformations (frames)" for the programmable zero offset. G153 has the same effect as G53 and also suppresses the entire basic frame.g. G53. G153) Meaning G54 to G57: G505 to G599: G500: Call of the 1st to 4th settable zero offset (ZO) Call of the 5th to 99th settable zero offset Deactivation of the current settable zero offset G500=zero frame: (default setting. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 175 . Note The basic setting at the start of the program. G500. G54 or G500. Activation of the first settable zero offset ($P_UIFR[0]) and activation of the entire basic frame ($P_ACTBFRAME) or possibly a modified basic frame is activated. contains no offset. rotation. G505 to G599. activation of the entire basic frame ($P_ACTBFRAME). mirroring or scaling) G500 not equal to 0: Deactivation of the settable zero offset until the next call. can be set via machine data.Geometry settings 8. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Approach . G53. end of program 176 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Suppress zero offset. Program code N10 G0 G90 X10 Y10 F500 T1 N20 G54 S1000 M3 N30 L47 N40 G55 G0 Z200 N50 L47 N60 G56 N70 L47 N80 G53 X200 Y300 M30 Comment .Geometry settings 8. Program pass as subroutine . G153) Example Three workpieces that are arranged on a pallet in accordance with the zero offset values G54 to G56 are to be machined in succession. Call of the third ZO . spindle clockwise . Z via obstruction . SUPA. Program pass as subroutine . G500. 06/2009. G505 to G599. Program pass as subroutine . Call of the second ZO.1 Settable work offset (G54 to G57. The machining sequence is programmed in subroutine L47. Call of the first ZO. G153) Further information Setting offset values On the operator panel or universal interface.1 Settable work offset (G54 to G57. 06/2009. enter the following values in the internal control zero offset table: ● Coordinates for the offset ● Angle for rotated clamping ● Scaling factors (if required) Zero offset G54 to G57 The call of one of the four commands G54 to G57 in the NC program moves the zero point from the basic coordinate system to the workpiece coordinate system. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 177 . G500. G505 to G599. Fundamentals Programming Manual. SUPA. G53.Geometry settings 8. G500. Further settable zero offsets: G505 to G599 The command numbers G505 to G599 are available for further settable zero offsets. Note With the four available zero offsets. G505 to G599. all of the positional parameters and thus the tool movements refer to the workpiece zero. 178 Fundamentals Programming Manual. SUPA.1 Settable work offset (G54 to G57.g. for multiple machining) to simultaneously describe four workpiece clampings and call them in the program. G53. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 06/2009. which is now valid. G153) In the next NC block with a programmed movement.Geometry settings 8. a total of 100 settable zero offsets can be created in the zero point memory via machine data including the four preset zero offsets G54 to G57. Therefore. it is possible (e. 2 Selection of the working plane (G17/G18/G19) 8. in which the desired contour is to be machined also defines the following functions: ● The plane for tool radius compensation ● The infeed direction for tool length compensation depending on the tool type ● The plane for circular interpolation Syntax G17 G18 G19 Significance G17: G18: G19: Working plane X/Y Infeed direction Z.2 Selection of the working plane (G17/G18/G19) The specification of the working plane.Geometry settings 8. 06/2009.3rd geometry axis Fundamentals Programming Manual.1st geometry axis Working plane Y/Z Infeed direction X. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 179 . plane selection 2nd .2nd geometry axis Working plane Z/X Infeed direction Y. plane selection 3rd .2 Function 8. plane selection 1st . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Program code N10 G17 T5 D8 Comment . call tool. Program traversing movements. Tool length compensation is performed in the Z direction. Example The "conventional" approach for milling is: 1. the working plane must be defined so that the control can correct the tool length and radius. 06/2009.2 Selection of the working plane (G17/G18/G19) Note In the default setting.5 Y40 I50 J40 180 Fundamentals Programming Manual. . Select tool type (T) and tool offset values (D). Selection of working plane X/Y. Radius compensation is performed in the X/Y plane. N20 G1 G41 X10 Y30 Z-5 F500 N30 G2 X22. 3. 4. When calling the tool path correction G41/G42 (see Section "Tool radius compensation"). Switch on path correction (G41). Circular interpolation/tool radius compensation in the X/Y plane. 2. G17 (X/Y plane) is defined for milling and G18 (Z/X plane) is defined for turning. Define working plane (G17 default setting for milling).Geometry settings 8. . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 181 . Turning: The control requires the specification of the working plane for the calculation of the direction of rotation (see circular interpolation G2/G3).2 Selection of the working plane (G17/G18/G19) Further information General It is recommended that the working plane G17 to G19 be selected at the start of the program.Geometry settings 8. Fundamentals Programming Manual. The working planes rotate accordingly. the Z/X plane is preset for turning G18. Machining on inclined planes Rotate the coordinate system with ROT (see Section "Coordinate system offset") to position the coordinate axes on the inclined surface. In the default setting. 06/2009. CUT2DF. see Section "Coordinate system offset". 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Geometry settings 8. Milling: Note The tool length components can be calculated according to the rotated working planes with the functions for "Tool length compensation for orientable tools". the tool length compensation always refers to the fixed. For further information on this and for the description of the available calculation methods. 06/2009. The offset plane is selected with CUT2D. 182 Fundamentals Programming Manual.2 Selection of the working plane (G17/G18/G19) Tool length compensation on inclined planes As a general rule. refer to Section "Tool offsets" The control provides convenient coordinate transformation functions for the spatial definition of the working plane. non-rotated working plane. For further information. AC) With absolute dimensions. J. Generally it applies to all axes programmed in subsequent NC blocks. Syntax G90 <axis>=AC(<value>) Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009.Geometry settings 8. the AC command can be used to set non-modal absolute dimensions for individual axes. SPOSA) and interpolation parameters (I. Modal absolute dimensions Modal absolute dimensions are activated with the G90 command.1 Function Absolute dimensions (G90.3 Dimensions The basis of most NC programs is a workpiece drawing with specific dimensions. K).3 8. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 183 . Note Non-modal absolute dimensions (AC) are also possible for spindle positioning (SPOS. the absolute position is programmed.e. These dimensions can be: ● In absolute dimensions or in incremental dimensions ● In millimeters or inches ● In radius or diameter (for turning) Specific programming commands are available for the various dimension options so that the data from a dimension drawing can be transferred directly (without conversion) to the NC program. Non-modal absolute dimensions With preset incremental dimensions (G91). on which the tool is to traverse. i.3 Dimensions 8. 8. the position specifications always refer to the zero point of the currently valid coordinate system.3. End of block N20 G1 Z-5 F500 N30 G2 X20 Y35 I=AC(45) J=AC(35) N40 G0 Z2 N50 M30 Note For information on the input of the circle center point coordinates I and J. circle end point and circle center point in absolute dimensions. feed of the tool. tool selection. . Absolute dimension input.Geometry settings 8. spindle on with clockwise direction of rotation. . Linear interpolation.3 Dimensions Significance G90: AC: <axis>: <value>: Command for the activation of modal absolute dimensions Command for the activation of non-modal absolute dimensions Axis identifier of the axis to be traversed Position setpoint of the axis to be traversed in absolute dimensions Examples Example 1: Milling Program code N10 G90 G0 X45 Y60 Z2 T1 S2000 M3 Comment . Traverse . 184 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. in rapid traverse to position XYZ. Clockwise circular interpolation. see Section "Circular interpolation". 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . . . see Section "Circular interpolation". spindle on with clockwise direction of rotation. Linear interpolation. Counterclockwise circular interpolation.2 N30 G3 X11 Z-27 I=AC(-5) K=AC(-21) Comment .Geometry settings 8. . Loading of tool T1. End of block N40 G1 Z-40 N50 M30 Note For information on the input of the circle center point coordinates I and J. in rapid traverse to position XZ. See also Absolute and incremental dimensions for turning and milling (G90/G91) (Page 190) Fundamentals Programming Manual. Absolute dimension input. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 185 .3 Dimensions Example 2: Turning Program code N5 T1 D1 S2000 M3 N10 G0 G90 X11 Z1 N20 G1 Z-15 F0. circle end point and circle center point in absolute dimensions. Traverse . 06/2009. . . feed of the tool. the programming in incremental dimensions describes by how much the tool is to be traversed. K). Modal incremental dimensions Modal incremental dimensions are activated with the G91 command. the IC command can be used to set non-modal incremental dimensions for individual axes. The active zero offset or tool length compensation is not traversed.3 Dimensions 8. i.3. 186 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Non-modal incremental dimensions With preset absolute dimensions (G90). Note Non-modal incremental dimensions (IC) are also possible for spindle positioning (SPOS. Generally it applies to all axes programmed in subsequent NC blocks. J. 06/2009.2 Function Incremental dimensions (G91.Geometry settings 8. it is necessary that only the programmed distance is traversed in incremental dimensions. SPOSA) and interpolation parameters (I. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . IC) With incremental dimensions. Syntax G91 <axis>=IC(<value>) Significance G91: IC: <axis>: <value>: Command for the activation of modal incremental dimensions Command for the activation of non-modal incremental dimensions Axis identifier of the axis to be traversed Position setpoint of the axis to be traversed in incremental dimensions G91 extension For certain applications.e. such as scratching. the position specification refers to the last point approached. . Traverse .3 Dimensions This behavior can be set separately for the active zero offset and tool length compensation via the following setting data: SD42440 $SC_FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG (zero offsets in frames) SD42442 $SC_TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG (tool length compensations) Value 0 1 Meaning With incremental programming (incremental dimensions) of an axis. . the zero offset or the tool length compensation is traversed. With incremental programming (incremental dimensions) of an axis. the zero offset or the tool length compensation is not traversed. Clockwise circular interpolation. circle end point in absolute dimensions. circle center point in incremental dimensions. 06/2009. End of block N20 G1 Z-5 F500 N30 G2 X20 Y35 I0 J-25 N40 G0 Z2 N50 M30 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Absolute dimension input. feed of the tool. in rapid traverse to position XYZ.Geometry settings 8. Examples Example 1: Milling Program code N10 G90 G0 X45 Y60 Z2 T1 S2000 M3 Comment . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 187 . tool selection. spindle on with clockwise direction of rotation . Linear interpolation. spindle on with clockwise direction of rotation.3 Dimensions Note For information on the input of the circle center point coordinates I and J. feed of the tool. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . circle center point in incremental dimensions. see Section "Circular interpolation".2 N30 G3 X11 Z-27 I-8 K-6 Comment . Traverse . End of block N40 G1 Z-40 N50 M30 Note For information on the input of the circle center point coordinates I and J.Geometry settings 8. 06/2009. . see Section "Circular interpolation". 188 Fundamentals Programming Manual. circle end point in absolute dimensions. . . . Example 2: Turning Program code N5 T1 D1 S2000 M3 N10 G0 G90 X11 Z1 N20 G1 Z-15 F0. Loading of tool T1. Linear interpolation. in rapid traverse to position XZ. Absolute dimension input. Counterclockwise circular interpolation. Absolute dimensions active. . Incremental dimensions active. 06/2009. traversing in X of 10 mm (the zero offset is not traversed).3 Dimensions Example 3: Incremental dimensions without traversing of the active zero offset Settings: ● G54 contains an offset in X of 25 ● SD42440 $SC_FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG = 0 Program code N10 G90 G0 G54 X100 N20 G1 G91 X10 N30 G90 X50 . traverse to position X75 (the zero offset is traversed). 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 189 .Geometry settings 8. Comment See also Absolute and incremental dimensions for turning and milling (G90/G91) (Page 190) Fundamentals Programming Manual. Milling: Turning: Note On conventional turning machines.3 Dimensions 8. it is usual to consider incremental traversing blocks in the transverse axis as radius values. 06/2009.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions for turning and milling (G90/G91) The two following figures illustrate the programming with absolute dimensions (G90) or incremental dimensions (G91) using turning and milling technology examples.Geometry settings 8. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 190 Fundamentals Programming Manual. This conversion for G90 is performed using the commands DIAMON. while diameter specifications apply for the reference dimensions.3. DIAMOF or DIAM90. ACP and ACN differ in the basic approach strategy: Syntax <rotary axis>=DC(<value>) <rotary axis>=ACP(<value>) <rotary axis>=ACN(<value>) Significance <rotary axis>: Identifier of the rotary axis that is to be traversed (e. DC. Fundamentals Programming Manual. A.g. B or C) DC: Command for the direct approach to the position The rotary axis approaches the programmed position directly on the shortest path.4 Function Absolute dimension for rotary axes (DC. ACN) The non-modal and G90/G91-independent commands DC. The rotary axis traverses a maximum range of 180°. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 191 . 06/2009. ACP and ACN are available for the positioning of rotary axes in absolute dimensions.3.Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions 8. ACP. ACP: Command to approach the position in a positive direction The rotary axis traverses to the programmed position in the positive direction of axis rotation (counterclockwise). Example: SPOS=DC(45) ACN: 192 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Note The traversing range between 0° and 360° must be set in the machine data (modulo behavior) for positioning with direction specification (ACP. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Geometry settings 8. G91 or IC must be programmed to traverse modulo rotary axes more than 360° in a block.360 degrees Note The positive direction of rotation (clockwise or counterclockwise) is set in the machine data. ACN). ACP and ACN can also be used for spindle positioning (SPOS. SPOSA) from standstill. <value>: Rotary axis position to be approached in absolute dimensions Range of values: 0 . Note The commands DC.3 Dimensions Command to approach the position in a negative direction The rotary axis traverses to the programmed position in the negative direction of axis rotation (clockwise). the table turns to 270° in a clockwise direction to produce a circular groove. Table turns clockwise to 270 degrees (positive). Rotary Axes (R2) Fundamentals Programming Manual. feed tool T1 in rapid traverse.Geometry settings 8. Absolute dimensions.3 Dimensions Example Milling on a rotary table The tool is stationary. Program code N10 SPOS=0 N20 G90 G0 X-20 Y0 Z2 T1 N30 G1 Z-5 F500 N40 C=ACP(270) N50 G0 Z2 M30 Comment . end of program References Function Manual. Extended Functions. Spindle in position control . 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 193 . Lower tool during feed . . the tool mills a circular groove. Retraction. . feedrates. G71: Activation of the metric measuring system The metric measuring system is used to read and write geometric data in units of length. Technological data in units of length. as well as machine data and system variables. are read and written using the parameterized basic system (MD10240 $MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC). tool offsets or settable work offsets. 194 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . e. feedrates. G700: Activation of the inch measuring system All geometrical and technological data in units of length (see above) is read and written using the inch measuring system.g. G71/G710) The following G functions can be used to switch between the metric measuring system and the inch measuring system.g. tool offsets or settable work offsets. as well as machine data and system variables.3. Technological data in units of length.5 Function Inch or metric dimensions (G70/G700. are read and written using the parameterized basic system (MD10240 $MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC). G710: Activation of the metric measuring system All geometrical and technological data in units of length (see above) is read and written using the metric measuring system. Syntax G70/G71 G700/G710 Significance G70: Activation of the inch measuring system The inch measuring system is used to read and write geometric data in units of length. 06/2009.Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions 8. e. Y=3. X=90 mm .18 inch.54 inch. F=500 mm/min . Y=30 mm. Z=2 mm. 06/2009.54 N60 G71 X20 Y30 N70 G0 Z2 N80 M30 Comment . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 195 .22 N50 X1. system: metric X=20 mm.22 inch.75 Y3.18 Y3. Prog. meas. system: inch X=2. F=500 mm/min . Z=2 mm. F=500 mm/min . Z=-5 mm. Y=30 mm. meas. F=rapid traverse mm/min .75 inch. X=20 mm. Y=3. Prog. F=500 mm/min .Geometry settings 8.3 Dimensions Example Changeover between inch system and metric system The parameterized basic system is metric: MD10240 $MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC = TRUE Program code N10 G0 G90 X20 Y30 Z2 S2000 M3 T1 N20 G1 Z-5 F500 N30 X90 N40 G70 X2. End of program Fundamentals Programming Manual. X=1. F=rapid traverse mm/min . Closed-Loop Control (G2). in a synchronized action (condition component and/or action component) no explicit measuring system is programmed (G70/G71/G700/G710). K) – Circle radius (CR) ● Pitch (G34. …) ● Circular-path programming: – Interpolation point coordinates (I1. Basic Functions. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Section "Metric/inch dimension system" ● Programming Manual. Speeds. J1. J. NOTICE Read position data in synchronized actions If a measuring system has not been explicitly programmed in the synchronized action (condition component and/or action component) position data specified in units of length in the synchronized action are always read in the parameterized basic system. Job Planning. Synchronized Actions 196 Fundamentals Programming Manual. only the following geometric data is interpreted in the relevant measuring system: ● Position data (X. G35) ● Programmable zero offset (TRANS) ● Polar radius (RP) Synchronized actions If. Section "Motion-synchronous actions" ● Function Manual. K1) – Interpolation parameters (I. 06/2009. Y. References ● Function Manual. Setpoint/Actual-Value System. Z.3 Dimensions Further information G70/G71 With G70/G71 active.Geometry settings 8. the measuring system which was active in the channel at the point of execution will be applied to the synchronized action (condition component and/or action component). 6 Channel-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMON.3 Dimensions 8.Geometry settings 8.3. DIAM90. the dimensions for the transverse axis can be specified in the diameter (①) or in the radius (②): So that the dimensions from a technical drawing can be transferred directly (without conversion) to the NC program. channel-specific diameter or radius programming is activated using the modal commands DIAMON. DIAMCYCOF) Function During turning. 06/2009. Only one transverse axis per channel can be defined via MD20100. and DIAMCYCOF. DIAM90. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 197 . Syntax DIAMON DIAM90 DIAMOF Fundamentals Programming Manual. DIAMOF. DIAMOF. Note The channel-specific diameter/radius programming refers to the geometry axis defined as transverse axis via MD20100 $MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF (→ see machine manufacturer's specifications). The last G function active in this group remains active for the position indicator and the basic block indicator. This also applies to reading of actual values in the workpiece coordinate system with MEAS. Note With DIAMON or DIAM90. In this way. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .3 Dimensions Significance DIAMON: Command for the activation of the independent channel-specific diameter programming The effect of DIAMON is independent of the programmed dimensions mode (absolute dimensions G90 or incremental dimensions G91): • for G90: Dimensions in the diameter • for G91: DIAM90: Dimensions in the diameter Command for the activation of the dependent channel-specific diameter programming The effect of DIAM90 depends on the programmed dimensions mode: • for G90: Dimensions in the diameter • for G91: DIAMOF: Dimensions in the radius Command for the deactivation of the channel-specific diameter programming Channel-specific radius programming takes effect when diameter programming is deactivated. computations in the cycle can always be made in the radius. 198 Fundamentals Programming Manual. $P_EP[x] and $AA_IW[x]. 06/2009.Geometry settings 8. MEAW. the transverse-axis actual values will always be displayed as a diameter. The effect of DIAMOF is independent of the programmed dimensions mode: • for G90: Dimensions in the radius • for G91: DIAMCYCOF: Dimensions in the radius Command for the deactivation of channel-specific diameter programming during cycle processing. $P_EP[X]. . 06/2009. Incremental dimensions active. If I. The diameter programming is active for the transverse axis. Approach starting point. K are programmed incrementally (IC). MEAW. J. . K for G2/G3. $AA_IW[X] Fundamentals Programming Manual.3 Dimensions Example Program code N10 G0 X0 Z0 N20 DIAMOF N30 G1 X30 S2000 M03 F0. ● Reading actual values in the workpiece coordinate system for: MEAS. N80 G91 X10 Z-20 N90 G90 X10 N100 M30 Further information Diameter values (DIAMON/DIAM90) The diameter values apply for the following data: ● Actual value display of the transverse axis in the workpiece coordinate system ● JOG mode: Increments for incremental dimensions and handwheel travel ● Programming of end positions: Interpolation parameters I. Absolute dimensions active. X axis = transverse axis. if these have been programmed absolutely with AC. the radius is always calculated.Geometry settings 8.7 N40 DIAMON N50 G1 X70 Z-20 N60 Z-30 N70 DIAM90 . . Diameter programming for absolute dimensions and radius programming for incremental dimensions. Comment . . J. . Traverse to diameter position X70 and Z-20. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 199 . radius programming active. Diameter programming off. . End of program. traverse to radius position X30. . DIACYCOFA. RIC) Function In addition to channel-specific diameter programming. DAC. 06/2009. DIAMCHANA.3. RAC. DIAMCHAN. DIC. Note The axis-specific diameter programming is only possible for axes that are permitted as further transverse axes for the axis-specific diameter programming via MD30460 $MA_BASE_FUNCTION_MASK (→ see machine manufacturer's specifications).7 Axis-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMONA. Syntax Modal axis-specific diameter programming for several transverse axes in the channel: DIAMONA[<axis>] DIAM90A[<axis>] DIAMOFA[<axis>] DIACYCOFA[<axis>] Acceptance of the channel-specific diameter/radius programming: DIAMCHANA[<axis>] DIAMCHAN Non-modal axis-specific diameter/radius programming: <axis>=DAC(<value>) <axis>=DIC(<value>) <axis>=RAC(<value>) <axis>=RIC(<value>) Meaning Modal axis-specific diameter programming DIAMONA: Command for the activation of the independent axis-specific diameter programming The effect of DIAMONA is independent of the programmed dimensions mode (G90/G91 or AC/IC): • for G90. the axis-specific diameter programming function enables the modal or non-modal dimensions and display in the diameter for one or more axes. DIAM90A.3 Dimensions 8. IC: Dimensions in the diameter 200 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Geometry settings 8. DIAMOFA. AC: Dimensions in the diameter • for G91. In this way. The last G function active in this group remains active for the position indicator and the basic block indicator. • Rotary axes are not permitted to serve as transverse axes. AC: Dimensions in the diameter • for G91. 06/2009. IC: DIAMOFA: Dimensions in the radius Command for the deactivation of the axis-specific diameter programming Axis-specific radius programming takes effect when diameter programming is deactivated. The effect of DIAMOFA is independent of the programmed dimensions mode: • for G90. computations in the cycle can always be made in the radius.Geometry settings 8. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 201 . IC: DIACYCOFA: Dimensions in the radius Command for the deactivation of axis-specific diameter programming during cycle processing. DIAM90A: Fundamentals Programming Manual. <axis>: Axis identifier of the axis for which the axis-specific diameter programming is to be activated Permitted axis identifiers are as follows: • Geometry/channel axis name or • Machine axis name Range of values: The axis specified must be a known axis in the channel.3 Dimensions Command for the activation of the dependent axis-specific diameter programming The effect of DIAM90A depends on the programmed dimensions mode: • for G90. AC: Dimensions in the radius • for G91. Other conditions: • The axis must be permitted for the axis-specific diameter programming via MD30460 $MA_BASE_FUNCTION_MASK. With the DIAMCHAN command. the transverse-axis actual values are always displayed as a diameter. $P_EP[x] and $AA_IW[x]. This also applies to reading of actual values in the workpiece coordinate system with MEAS. the status of the diameter/radius programming in the other channel is accepted with RELEASE[<axis>]. The modal status of diameter/radius programming remains unchanged. 06/2009. DIAMCHAN: Non-modal axis-specific diameter/radius programming The non-modal axis-specific diameter/radius programming specifies the dimension type as a diameter or radius value in the part program and synchronized actions.Geometry settings 8. DAC: The DAC command sets the following dimensions to non-modal for the specified axis: Diameter in absolute dimensions DIC: The DIC command sets the following dimensions to non-modal for the specified axis: Diameter in incremental dimensions RAC: The RAC command sets the following dimensions to non-modal for the specified axis: Radius in absolute dimensions RIC: The RIC command sets the following dimensions to non-modal for the specified axis: Radius in incremental dimensions Note With DIAMONA[<axis>] or DIAM90A[<axis>]. the specified axis accepts the channel status of the diameter/radius programming and is then assigned to the channel-specific diameter/radius programming. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . all axes permitted for the axis-specific diameter programming accept the channel status of the diameter/radius programming and are then assigned to the channel-specific diameter/radius programming. Note During the replacement of an additional transverse axis because of a GET request.3 Dimensions Acceptance of the channel-specific diameter/radius programming DIAMCHANA: With the DIAMCHANA[<axis>] command. MEAW. 202 Fundamentals Programming Manual. . . Channel-specific diameter programming off. . Dimensions effective in this block for X: Radius in absolute dimensions. axis-specific diameter programming is permitted for Y. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 203 . . N25 X=RAC(80) N30 WHEN $SAA_IM[Y]> 50 DO POS[X]=RIC(1) N40 WHEN $SAA_IM[Y]> 60 DO POS[X]=DAC(10) N50 G4 F3 Fundamentals Programming Manual. . . Dimensions effective in this block for X: Radius in incremental dimensions. X is command axis. . . . Example 2: Non-modal axis-specific diameter/radius programming X is the transverse axis in the channel. Dimensions effective in this block for X: Radius in incremental dimensions. Modal axis-specific diameter programming active for Y. Diameter programming active for X and Y.3 Dimensions Examples Example 1: Modal axis-specific diameter/radius programming X is the transverse axis in the channel. Channel-specific diameter programming active for X. Channel-specific diameter programming on. .Geometry settings 8. 06/2009. . axis-specific diameter programming is permitted for Y. . Y accepts the status of the channel-specific diameter/radius programming and is assigned to this. X is command axis. Program code N10 DIAMON N15 G0 G90 X20 Y40 DIAMONA[Y] N20 G01 X=RIC(5) Comment . Dimensions effective in this block for X: Radius in absolute dimensions. Radius programming active for X and Y. Radius programming active for X. Program code N10 G0 X0 Z0 DIAMON N15 DIAMOF N20 DIAMONA[Y] N25 X200 Y100 N30 DIAMCHANA[Y] N35 X50 Y100 N40 DIAMON N45 X50 Y100 Comment . Channel-specific diameter programming on. Modal axis-specific diameter programming active for Y. DIC. G348.. G247. G147. $AA_IW[X] Non-modal axis-specific diameter programming (DAC. OSS. POSA ● Oscillating: OSP1. RAC. RIC) The statements DAC. K for G2/G3.. K ● Contour definition: Straight line with specified angle ● Rapid retraction: POLF[AX] ● Movement in tool direction: MOVT ● Smooth approach and retraction: G140 to G143. the radius is always calculated. J. G340.3 Dimensions Further information Diameter values (DIAMONA/DIAM90A) The diameter values apply for the following data: ● Actual value display of the transverse axis in the workpiece coordinate system ● JOG mode: Increments for incremental dimensions and handwheel travel ● Programming of end positions: Interpolation parameters I. OSP2. ● Reading actual values in the workpiece coordinate system for: MEAS. MEAW. G347. G341 204 Fundamentals Programming Manual. RIC are permissible for any commands for which channelspecific diameter programming is relevant: ● Axis position: X.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . J. OSE. RAC. J. POSP ● Interpolation parameters: I. if these have been programmed absolutely with AC. If I. G148. K are programmed incrementally (IC).Geometry settings 8. DIC. G248. 06/2009. $P_EP[X]. POS. Generally the workpiece zero is on the front or rear side of the workpiece. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 205 . Both the machine and the workpiece zero are on the turning center. the workpiece zero can be freely selected on the longitudinal axis. The settable offset on the X axis is therefore zero.4 Position of workpiece for turning Axis identifiers The two geometry axes perpendicular to one another are usually called: Longitudinal axis = Z axis (abscissa) Transverse axis = X axis (ordinate) Workpiece zero Whereas the machine zero is permanently defined. M W Z X G54 to G599 or TRANS Machine zero Workpiece zero Longitudinal axis Transverse axis Call for the position of the workpiece zero Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009.Geometry settings 8.4 Position of workpiece for turning 8.4 8. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 06/2009.4 Position of workpiece for turning Transverse axis Generally the dimensions for the transverse axis are diameter specifications (double path dimension compared to other axes): The geometry axis that is to serve as transverse axis is defined in the machine data (→ machine manufacturer).Geometry settings 8. 206 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Starting point . This target position is then the starting position for the next travel command. The target positions can be programmed in Cartesian coordinates or in polar coordinates. synchronized axes. 06/2009. Target positions A motion block contains the target positions for the axes to be traversed (path axes. positioning axes). Fundamentals Programming Manual. CAUTION The axis address may only be programmed once per block.target point The traversing motion is always for the last point reached to the programmed target position.Motion commands 9 Contour elements The programmed workpiece contour can be made up of the following contour elements: ● Straight lines ● Circular arcs ● Helical curves (through overlaying of straight lines and circular arcs) Travel commands The following travel commands are available for the creation of these contour elements: ● Rapid traverse motion (G0) ● Linear interpolation (G1) ● Circular interpolation clockwise (G2) ● Circular interpolation counterclockwise (G3) The travel commands are modal. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 207 . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 208 Fundamentals Programming Manual.4 Position of workpiece for turning Workpiece contour The motion blocks produce the workpiece contour when performed in succession: Figure 9-1 Motion blocks for turning Figure 9-2 Motion blocks for milling NOTICE Before machining. 06/2009.Motion commands 8. the workpiece must be positioned in such a way that the tool or workpiece cannot be damaged. Z..) 9.: Z. Z... Y.... Z. Y... G1. Z...1 Travel commands with Cartesian coordinates (G0. .... Y. X... Command for the activation of the rapid traverse motion Command for the activation of the linear interpolation Command for the activation of the clockwise circular interpolation Command for the activation of the counterclockwise circular interpolation Cartesian coordinate of the target position in the X direction Cartesian coordinate of the target position in the Y direction Cartesian coordinate of the target position in the Z direction Fundamentals Programming Manual. G3.... Y.. linear interpolation G1 or circular interpolation G2 /G3.........Motion commands 9..) The position specified in the NC block with Cartesian coordinates can be approached with rapid traverse motion G0.1 Function 9.: Y.. Y. X.. G2. 06/2009. G2. Z.. Significance G0: G1: G2: G3: X.1 Travel commands with Cartesian coordinates (G0.... Y.: Note In addition to the coordinates of the target position X.... G3.... X.. see "Circular interpolation types (Page 225)"). Syntax G0 G1 G2 G3 X. X. G1.......... Y... Z.. the circular interpolation G2 / G3 also requires further data (e. X. ... Z.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 209 .g.... the circle center point coordinates. 06/2009.1 Travel commands with Cartesian coordinates (G0.. Y.. Selection of the working plane.. G2. spindle clockwise . G3. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Motion commands 9. Retraction in rapid traverse for tool change 210 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Activation of the linear interpolation. Z. feed of the tool . G1.. Approach of the starting position specified with Cartesian coordinates in rapid traverse . Travel on an inclined line to an end position specified with Cartesian coordinates ...) Example Program code N10 G17 S400 M3 N20 G0 X40 Y-6 Z2 N30 G1 Z-3 F40 N40 X12 Y-20 N50 G0 Z100 M30 Comment .. X.. . Syntax G110/G111/G112 X… Y… Z… G110/G111/G112 AP=… RP=… Significance G110 .2 Travel commands with polar coordinates Reference point of the polar coordinates (G110.2. the following pole coordinates refer to the zero point of the current workpiece coordinate system. The positive direction of rotation runs counterclockwise.... The pole can be specified in Cartesian or polar coordinates...2 9. X axis for G17).g. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Absolute or incremental dimension inputs therefore have no effect.Motion commands 9.G112 must be programmed in a separate NC block. 06/2009. The reference point for the pole coordinates is clearly defined with the G110 to G112 commands.: G112 .: With the command G110.: G111 . Note: The commands G110. the following pole coordinates refer to the last valid pole..1 Function 9. With the command G112. G112) The point from which the dimensioning starts is called the pole. Range of values: ± 0…360° RP=…: Polar radius The specification is always in absolute positive values in [mm] or [inch]. G111.. With the command G111. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 211 .2 Travel commands with polar coordinates 9. the following pole coordinates refer to the last position reached. X… Y… Z…: AP=… RP=…: Specification of the pole in Cartesian coordinates Specification of the pole in polar coordinates AP=…: Polar angle Angle between the polar radius and the horizontal axis of the working plane (e. . The defined pole is moreover retained up to program end.. 06/2009... Example Poles 1 to 3 are defined as follows: • Pole 1 with G111 X… Y… • Pole 2 with G110 X… Y… • Pole 3 with G112 X… Y… 212 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Note If no pole has been specified.2 Travel commands with polar coordinates Note It is possible to switch block-by-block in the NC program between polar and Cartesian dimensions. the zero point of the current workpiece coordinate system applies. Y. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . It is possible to return directly to the Cartesian system by using Cartesian coordinate identifiers (X.).Motion commands 9... Z... G3. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 213 .2 Function Travel commands with polar coordinates (G0.2. 06/2009. RP) Travel commands with polar coordinates are useful when the dimensions of a workpiece or part of the workpiece are measured from a central point and the dimensions are specified in angles and radii (e. G2. AP. G1. for drilling patterns). Syntax G0/G1/G2/G3 AP=… RP=… Significance G0: G1: G2: G3: Command for the activation of rapid traverse motion Command for the activation of linear interpolation Command for the activation of clockwise circular interpolation Command for the activation of counter-clockwise circular interpolation Fundamentals Programming Manual.g.2 Travel commands with polar coordinates 9.Motion commands 9. . Range of values: ± 0…360° The angle can be specified either incremental or absolute: AP=AC(.. can also be specified in Cartesian coordinates.): AP=IC(.. G112 and apply in the working plane selected with G17 to G19. AP: This enables spatial parameters to be programmed in cylindrical coordinates. The polar radius remains stored until a new value is entered.Motion commands 9.2 Travel commands with polar coordinates Polar angle Angle between the polar radius and the horizontal axis of the working plane (e.. Note The 3rd geometry axis. The polar angle remains stored until a new pole is defined or the working plane is changed. X axis for G17).. 06/2009.g. The positive direction of rotation runs counter-clockwise. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . the last programmed angle applies as reference. RP: Polar radius The specification is always in absolute positive values in [mm] or [inch].. Example: G17 G0 AP… RP… Z… 214 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Note The polar coordinates refer to the pole specified with G110 .): Absolute dimension input Incremental dimension input With incremental dimension input. which lies perpendicular to the working plane. this radius = 0 and alarm 14095 is generated.Motion commands 9. etc. but a polar angle AP. The calculated polar radius is then saved as modal. may be programmed for the selected working plane in NC blocks with polar end point coordinates. G112.2 Travel commands with polar coordinates Supplementary conditions ● No Cartesian coordinates such as interpolation parameters. G112). Fundamentals Programming Manual.. If the difference = 0. ● Only polar angle AP has been programmed If no polar radius RP has been programmed in the current block. This applies irrespective of the selected pole definition (G110 . this difference is used as polar radius and saved as modal.. ● If a pole has not been defined with G110 . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 215 . then when there is a difference between the current position and pole in the workpiece coordinates. then the pole coordinates are specified again and the modal polar radius remains at zero. then the zero point of the current workpiece coordinate system is automatically considered as the pole: ● Polar radius RP = 0 The polar radius is calculated from the distance between the starting point vector in the pole plane and the active pole vector.. 06/2009.. axis addresses. If both points have been programmed identically. 06/2009. Working plane X/Y. Approach starting point.. end of program. . drilling as dimensioned. Retract tool. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Each hole is machined with the same production sequence: Rough-drilling. . . Specification of the pole.. Subprogram call. … … … . reaming … The machining sequence is stored in the subroutine. . Approach next position in rapid traverse.) (Page 225) 216 Fundamentals Programming Manual. . … N60 L10 N70 AP=IC(72) N80 L10 N90 AP=IC(72) N100 L10 N110 AP=IC(72) N120 L10 N130 G0 X300 Y200 Z100 M30 N90 AP=IC(72) N100 L10 See also Circular interpolation types (G2/G3. .2 Travel commands with polar coordinates Example Creation of a drilling pattern The positions of the holes are specified in polar coordinates. Subprogram call.Motion commands 9. polar radius from block N30 remains saved and does not have to be specified. Program code N10 G17 G54 N20 G111 X43 Y38 N30 G0 RP=30 AP=18 Z5G0 N40 L10 N50 G91 AP=72 Comment . workpiece zero. polar angle in incremental dimensions. specification in cylindrical coordinates. . ... Command for the activation of the rapid traverse motion Active: modal End point in Cartesian coordinates End point in polar coordinates..: AP=.. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 217 . linear interpolation is activated with the part program command RTLION. in this case polar angle End point in polar coordinates..Motion commands 9.: RTLIOF: RTLION: Note G0 cannot be replaced by G. Y.3 Function 9. Z..3 Rapid traverse movement (G0.: RP=. in this case polar radius Nonlinear interpolation (each path axis interpolates as a single axis) Linear interpolation (path axes are interpolated together) Fundamentals Programming Manual... RTLION. RTLIOF) 9. RTLIOF) Rapid traverse motion is used: ● For rapid positioning of the tool ● To travel around the workpiece ● To approach tool change points ● To retract the tool Non-linear interpolation is activated with the part program command RTLIOF. RTLION.. Note The function is not suitable for workpiece machining! Syntax G0 X… Y… Z… G0 AP=… G0 RP=… RTLIOF RTLION Significance G0: X.3 Rapid traverse movement (G0. Approach of the starting position . RTLION. Feed of the tool .Motion commands 9. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . RTLIOF) Examples Example 1: Milling Program code N10 G90 S400 M3 N20 G0 X30 Y20 Z2 N30 G1 Z-5 F1000G1 N40 X80 Y65 N50 G0 Z2 N60 G0 X-20 Y100 Z100 M30 Comment . end of program 218 Fundamentals Programming Manual. spindle clockwise . Travel on a straight line .3 Rapid traverse movement (G0. Retract tool. 06/2009. Absolute dimension input. Feed of the tool . end of program Fundamentals Programming Manual.3 Rapid traverse movement (G0. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 219 .Motion commands 9. Absolute dimension input. RTLION. RTLIOF) Example 2: Turning Program code N10 G90 S400 M3 N20 G0 X25 Z5 N30 G1 G94 Z0 F1000G1 N40 G95 Z-7. 06/2009. Retract tool. spindle clockwise .2 N50 X60 Z-35 N60 Z-50 N70 G0 X62 N80 G0 X80 Z20 M30 Comment .5 F0. Approach of the starting position . Travel on a straight line . SOFTA. DRIVEA) applies with reference to the axial jerk. NOTICE Since a different contour can be traversed in nonlinear interpolation mode. RTLIOF) Further information Rapid traverse velocity The tool movement programmed with G0 is executed at the highest traversing speed (rapid traverse). the setting for the appropriate positioning axis (BRISKA. If the rapid traverse movement is executed simultaneously on several axes. RTLION. the rapid traverse speed is determined by the axis. The rapid traverse speed is defined separately for each axis in machine data. With non-linear interpolation. Traverse path axes as positioning axes with G0 Path axes can travel in one of two different modes to execute movements in rapid traverse: ● Linear interpolation (previous behavior): The path axes are interpolated together. ● Non-linear interpolation: Each path axis interpolates as a single axis (positioning axis) independently of the other axes of the rapid traverse motion.Motion commands 9. synchronized actions that refer to coordinates of the original path are not operative in some cases! 220 Fundamentals Programming Manual. which requires the most time for its section of the path. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .3 Rapid traverse movement (G0. Axis Z starts to move while axis X is still in motion.3 Rapid traverse movement (G0. With the combination of ● "Block change settable in the braking ramp of the single axis interpolation" and ● "Traversing path axes in rapid traverse movement as positioning axes with G0" all axes can travel to their end point independently of one another. RTLIOF) Linear interpolation applies in the following cases: ● For a G-code combination with G0 that does not permit positioning axis motion (e.g. The block change to axis Z can be initiated by axis X as a function of the braking ramp time setting (100-0%). Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 221 . Settable block change time with G0 For single-axis interpolation. No revolutional feedrate is active if path POS[X]=100 POS[Z]=100 is traversed. Consecutive axes are handled in G0 like positioning axes. Both axes approach their end point independently of one another. a new end-of-motion criterion FINEA or COARSEA or IPOENDA can be set for block change even within the braking ramp. RTLION. In this way. For further information.Motion commands 9. 06/2009. please refer to "Feed control and spindle motion". two sequentially programmed X and Z axes are treated like positioning axes in conjunction with G0. G40/G41/G42) ● For a combination of G0 with G64 ● When the compressor is active ● When a transformation is active Example: Program code G0 X0 Y10 G0 G40 X20 Y20 G0 G95 X100 Z100 M3 S100 Path POS[X]=0 POS[Y]=10 is traversed in path mode. Linear interpolation permits machining of 3D surfaces.Motion commands 9. 06/2009. in this case polar radius 222 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .: Linear interpolation with feedrate (linear interpolation) End point in Cartesian coordinates End point in polar coordinates. inclined or straight lines arbitrarily positioned in space.4 Linear interpolation (G1) 9. Milling: Syntax G1 X… Y… Z … F… G1 AP=… RP=… F… Significance G1: X.4 Linear interpolation (G1) With G1 the tool travels on paraxial.. grooves. in this case polar angle End point in polar coordinates.: RP=.: AP=.. Y... Z..4 Function 9...... etc. ensuring that all four movements are completed at the same time. Note G1 is modal. The tool travels at feedrate F along a straight line from the current starting point to the programmed destination point. 06/2009. Infeed takes place simultaneously in the Z direction..: Examples Example 1: Machining of a groove (milling) The tool travels from the starting point to the end point in the X/Y direction. You will find more information in the "Path behavior" section. You can enter the destination point in Cartesian or polar coordinates.Motion commands 9. Axis groups. The workpiece is machined along this path. can be defined with FGROUP. Example: G1 G94 X100 Y20 Z30 A40 F100 The end point on X. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 223 . Z is approached at a feedrate of 100 mm/min.. F. Y. for which path feedrate F applies. the rotary axis A is traversed as a synchronized axis.4 Linear interpolation (G1) Feedrate in mm/min. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Spindle speed S and spindle direction M3/M4 must be specified for the machining. Retraction for tool change Example 2: Machining of a groove (turning) Program code N10 G17 S400 M3 N20 G0 X40 Y-6 Z2 N30 G1 Z-3 F40 N40 X12 Y-20 N50 G0 Z100 M30 Comment . Approach of the starting position . spindle clockwise . spindle clockwise . Approach of the starting position . Travel on an inclined line .Motion commands 9. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Feed of the tool . 06/2009.4 Linear interpolation (G1) Program code N10 G17 S400 M3 N20 G0 X20 Y20 Z2 N30 G1 Z-2 F40 N40 X80 Y80 Z-15 N50 G0 Z100 M30 Comment . Selection of the working plane. Travel on an inclined line . Feed of the tool . Retraction for tool change 224 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Selection of the working plane. Z. This allows you to implement almost any type of drawing dimension directly. .. Opening angle AR= end point in Cartesian coordinates X.. Absolute center point and end point with reference to the workpiece zero Center point in incremental dimensions with reference to the circle starting point Circle radius CR= and circle end position in Cartesian coordinates X. G2/G3 X… Y… Z… AR=… .... G2/G3 X… Y… Z… CR=… .. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 225 . Y. Fundamentals Programming Manual.5 Circular interpolation 9... 06/2009.5.1 9.....5 Circular interpolation Circular interpolation types (G2/G3. Y.. G2/G3 X… Y… Z… I… J… K… .5 9... Z.) Possibilities of programming circular movements The control provides a range of different ways to program circular movements.Motion commands 9. Syntax G2/G3 X… Y… Z… I=AC(…) J=AC(…) K=AC(…) .. The circular movement is described by the: ● Center point and end point in the absolute or incremental dimension (default) ● Radius and end point in Cartesian coordinates ● Opening angle and end point in Cartesian coordinates or center point under the addresses ● Polar coordinates with the polar angle AP= and the polar radius RP= ● Intermediate and end point ● End point and tangent direction at the start point... Y.. K1= Circle through starting and end point and tangent direction at starting point Significance G2: G3: CIP: CT: X Y Z: I J K: CR= : AR= : AP= : RP= : I1= J1= K1= : Circular interpolation. J.. Polar coordinates with the polar angle AP= and the polar radius RP= The intermediate point at addresses I1=.. Z direction Circle radius Opening angle End point in polar coordinates. K. CT X… Y… Z… . in this case polar radius corresponding to circle radius Intermediate points in Cartesian coordinates in X.. J1=. Z direction 226 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . CIP X… Y… Z… I1=AC(…) J1=AC(…) K1=(AC…) .5 Circular interpolation G2/G3 I… J… K… AR=… ... clockwise Circular interpolation. Y. Opening angle AR= center point at addresses I. G2/G3 AP=… RP=… .Motion commands 9... counterclockwise Circular interpolation through intermediate point Circle with tangential transition defines the circle End point in Cartesian coordinates Circle center point in Cartesian coordinates in X. in this case polar angle End point in polar coordinates. Opening angle. center point in absolute dimensions . center point in incremental dimensions .52 N30 G2 X115 Y113.35) K1=-6 N40 M30 Comment . 06/2009.3 N30 N30 CIP X80 Y120 Z-10 I1=IC(-85. Coordinates for all three geometry axes .31 X115 Y113.48 S800 M3 N20 G17 G1 Z-5 F1000 N30 G2 X115 Y113. Approach starting point . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 227 . Circle end point. Program code N10 G0 G90 X133 Y44.35) J1=IC(-35. The necessary dimensions are shown in the production drawing on the right. circle end point . Circle end point.3 CR=-50 N30 G2 AR=269. center point in incremental dimensions . Feed of the tool . End of program Fundamentals Programming Manual. Circle end point. Opening angle. Circle end point and intermediate point .3 I-43 J25.52 N30 G2 AR=269. circle radius .31 I-43 J25.3 I=AC(90) J=AC(70) N30 G2 X115 Y113.5 Circular interpolation Examples Example 1: Milling The following program lines contain an example for each circular-path programming possibility.Motion commands 9. 5 Circular interpolation Example 2: Turning Program code N. circle radius .33) K=AC(-54. center point in incremental dimensions .944 N130 G3 I-3. 06/2009. . Circle end point..25) N130 G3 X70 Z-75 CR=30 N130 G3 X70 Z-75 AR=135. center point in absolute dimensions . Polar coordinates . N40 M30 Comment .944 N130 G3 I=AC(33.326 N130 CIP X70 Z-75 I1=93.25) AR=135.2 N130 G3 X70 Y-75 I-3.944 N130 G111 X33.25 N140G1 Z-95 N. Opening angle.. Circle end point.25 N130 G3 X70 Y-75 I=AC(33.33 Z-54... circle end point .25 AR=135. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . center point in incremental dimensions .Motion commands 9.335 K-29. . Circular arc with intermediate point and end point . Opening angle. Polar coordinates .25 N135 G3 RP=30 AP=142. Opening angle. N120 G0 X12 Z0 N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.33 K1=-54.. End of program 228 Fundamentals Programming Manual. center point in absolute dimensions . Circle end point.33) K=AC(-54.335 K-29.. X. K... J.. Y.5... Z and ● The circle center point at addresses I....) Circular interpolation enables machining of full circles or arcs. 06/2009.2 Function Circular interpolation with center point and end point (G2/G3.Motion commands 9. If the circle is programmed with a center point but no end point.5 Circular interpolation 9. Y.... Syntax G2/G3 X… Y… Z… I… J… K… G2/G3 X… Y… Z… I=AC(…) J=AC(…) K=(AC…) Significance G2: G3: X Y Z: I: J: K: =AC(…): Circular interpolation clockwise Circular interpolation counter-clockwise End point in Cartesian coordinates Coordinates of the circle center point in the X direction Coordinates of the circle center point in the Y direction Coordinates of the circle center point in the Z direction Absolute dimensions (non-modal) Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 229 . J.. Z. the result is a full circle. K. I.. The circular movement is described by: ● The end point in Cartesian coordinates X. 5 Circular interpolation Note G2 and G3 are modal. Examples Example 1: Milling Center point data using incremental dimensions N10 G0 X67. K are entered in incremental dimensions in relation to the circle starting point. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .029 I=AC(50) J=AC(50) 230 Fundamentals Programming Manual. K with value 0 can be omitted. K=AC(…).5 Y80.211 F500 Center point data using absolute dimensions N10 G0 X67. J. J=AC(…).Motion commands 9.211 N20 G3 X17.203 Y38. Per default. the center point coordinates I.203 Y38.5 J–30.5 Y80.211 N20 G3 X17. but the associated second parameter must always be specified. J.029 I–17. 06/2009. You can program the absolute center point dimensions in relation to the workpiece zero block-by-block with: I=AC(…). One interpolation parameter I. The default settings G90/G91 absolute and incremental dimensions are only valid for the circle end point. Motion commands 9.25 N135 G1 Z-95 Center point data using absolute dimensions N120 G0 X12 Z0 N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.335 K-29.2 N130 G3 X70 Z-75 I-3. 06/2009.33) K=AC(-54. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 231 .2 N130 G3 X70 Z-75 I=AC(33.25) N135 G1 Z-95 Further information Indication of working plane Fundamentals Programming Manual.5 Circular interpolation Example 2: Turning Center point data using incremental dimensions N120 G0 X12 Z0 N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0. Motion commands 9. 06/2009. Exception: You can also machine circles outside the selected working plane (not with arc angle and helix parameters). the axis addresses that you specify as an end point determine the circle plane. In this case. Programmed feedrate FGROUP can be used to specify which axes are to be traversed with a programmed feedrate. 232 Fundamentals Programming Manual. It is advisable to specify the working plane generally. For more information please refer to the Path behavior section. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .5 Circular interpolation The control needs the working plane parameter (G17 to G19) to calculate the direction of rotation for the circle (G2 is clockwise or G3 is counter-clockwise). Y.... CR) The circular motion is described by the: ● Circle radius CR=and ● End point in Cartesian coordinates X. X.=IC(.. Fundamentals Programming Manual.. These specifications depend on the travel commands G90/G91 or .5../ I..)/. Z...Motion commands 9. 06/2009... A positive leading sign can be omitted. In addition to the circle radius.=AC(. Syntax G2/G3 X… Y… Z… CR= G2/G3 I… J… K… CR= Significance G2: G3: X Y Z: I J K: Circular interpolation clockwise Circular interpolation counter-clockwise End point in Cartesian coordinates.. Note There is no practical limitation on the maximum size of the programmable radius. Y. you must also specify the leading sign +/– to indicate whether the traversing angle is to be greater than or less than 180°... J. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 233 .3 Function Circular interpolation with radius and end point (G2/G3.) Circle center point in Cartesian coordinates (in X.. K. Z.. but via the circle end position and interpolation parameters.... Full circles (traversing angle 360°) are not programmed with CR=. Y.5 Circular interpolation 9.. Z direction) The identifiers have the following meanings: I: Coordinate of the circle center point in the X direction J: Coordinate of the circle center point in the Y direction K: Coordinate of the circle center point in the Z direction CR= : Circle radius The identifiers have the following meanings: CR=+…: Angle less than or equal to 180° CR=–…: Angle more than 180° Note You don't need to specify the center point with this procedure. 5 Circular interpolation Examples Example 1: Milling Program code N10 G0 X67..Motion commands 9.913 F500 .203 Y38. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 234 Fundamentals Programming Manual..511 N20 G3 X17.5 Y80. 06/2009.029 CR=34. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 235 . Fundamentals Programming Manual..Motion commands 9. 06/2009..5 Circular interpolation Example 2: Turning Program code ...2 N130 G3 X70 Z-75 CR=30 N135 G1 Z-95 . N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0. but the associated second parameter must always be specified. Z direction) The identifiers have the following meanings: I: Coordinate of the circle center point in the X direction J: Coordinate of the circle center point in the Y direction K: Coordinate of the circle center point in the Z direction AR= : =AC(…): Note Full circles (traversing angle 360°) cannot be programmed with AR=. J. J. but must be programmed using the circle end position and interpolation parameters. J. K with value 0 can be omitted. Y.5 Circular interpolation 9... Y. K... X. One interpolation parameter I.. Z. The center point coordinates I. J=AC(…).Motion commands 9. K are normally entered in incremental dimensions with reference to the circle starting point. AR) Function The circular movement is described by: ● The opening angle AR = and ● The end point in Cartesian coordinates X... Opening angle. 06/2009. K Syntax G2/G3 X… Y… Z… AR= G2/G3 I… J… K… AR= Significance G2: G3: X Y Z: I J K: Circular interpolation clockwise Circular interpolation counter-clockwise End point in Cartesian coordinates Circle center point in Cartesian coordinates (in X.4 Circular interpolation with opening angle and center point (G2/G3.. range of values 0° to 360° Absolute dimensions (non-modal) 236 Fundamentals Programming Manual./ I.. Z or ● The circle center at addresses I.... J.. Y. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . K=AC(…).5. You can program the absolute center point dimensions in relation to the workpiece zero block-by-block with: I=AC(…). 5 Circular interpolation Examples Example 1: Milling Program code N10 G0 X67.211 AR=140. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 237 .5 Y80.203 Y38.5 J–30.211 N20 G3 X17.Motion commands 9.029 AR=140.134 F500 N20 G3 I–17. 06/2009.134 F500 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 335 K-29.25 95 Ø 40 25 Program code N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.944 N135 G1 Z-95 238 Fundamentals Programming Manual.3 2 6 ° 30 Z Ø 33.944 N130 G3 I=AC(33. 06/2009.33) K=AC(-54.25) AR=135.25 AR=135.5 Circular interpolation Example 2: Turning X 14 2 .944 N130 G3 I-3.2 N130 G3 X70 Z-75 AR=135.Motion commands 9.33 54. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 5 Circular interpolation 9.. AP. RP) The circular movement is described by: ● The polar angle AP=.5 Function Circular interpolation with polar coordinates (G2/G3. in this case polar radius corresponds to circle radius Fundamentals Programming Manual.5.. ● The polar radius RP=.Motion commands 9. 06/2009. ● The polar radius corresponds to the circle radius.. Syntax G2/G3 AP= RP= Significance G2: G3: X Y Z: AP= : RP= : Circular interpolation clockwise Circular interpolation counter-clockwise End point in Cartesian coordinates End point in polar coordinates.. in this case polar angle End point in polar coordinates. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 239 . The following rule applies: ● The pole lies at the circle center. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .211 N20 G111 X50 Y50 N30 G3 RP=34.Motion commands 9.052 F500 240 Fundamentals Programming Manual.913 AP=200. 06/2009.5 Circular interpolation Examples Example 1: Milling Program code N10 G0 X67.5 Y80. 33 Z-54.25 95 Program code N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.Motion commands 9.33 54. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Ø 40 25 241 . 06/2009.2 N130 G111 X33.326 N140 G1 Z-95 Fundamentals Programming Manual.25 N135 G3 RP=30 AP=142.3 2 6 ° 30 Z Ø 33.5 Circular interpolation Example 2: Turning X 14 2 . These arcs can also be inclined in space...) Function CIP can be used to program arcs. Y.5 Circular interpolation 9. Z. Syntax CIP X… Y… Z… I1=AC(…) J1=AC(…) K1=(AC…) 242 Fundamentals Programming Manual..... you describe the intermediate and end points with three coordinates. intermediate point and end point.Motion commands 9. Y. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . The traversing direction is determined by the order of the starting point.5. The circular movement is described by: ● The intermediate point at addresses I1=. K1= and ● The end point in Cartesian coordinates X.6 Circular interpolation with intermediate point and end point (CIP. Z... X.. J1=.. I1. 06/2009. K1.. In this case... J1. .. With G91. Absolute dimensions (non-modal) Incremental dimensions (non-modal) I1= J1= K1= : Fundamentals Programming Manual. the circle starting point is used as the reference for the intermediate point and end point.) Circle center point in Cartesian coordinates (in X. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 243 ..=AC(.. Z direction) The identifiers have the following meanings: I: Coordinate of the circle center point in the X direction J: Coordinate of the circle center point in the Y direction K: Coordinate of the circle center point in the Z direction =AC(…): =IC(…): Note CIP is modal. Y...Motion commands 9.)/.5 Circular interpolation Meaning CIP: X Y Z: Circular interpolation through intermediate point End point in Cartesian coordinates. 06/2009. Input in absolute and incremental dimensions The G90/G91 defaults for absolute or incremental dimensions are valid for the intermediate and circle end points. These specifications depend on the travel commands G90/G91 or .=IC(.. 35)J1=IC(-35. Feed of the tool. . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .35) K1=-6 N40 M30 Comment .5 Circular interpolation Examples Example 1: Milling In order to machine an inclined circular groove. a circle is described by specifying the intermediate point with three interpolation parameters. and the end point with 3 coordinates. . End of program. Coordinates for all 3 geometry axes. 244 Fundamentals Programming Manual. . Program code N10 G0 G90 X130 Y60 S800 M3 N20 G17 G1 Z-2 F100 N30 CIP X80 Y120 Z-10 I1= IC(-85. .Motion commands 9. Circle end point and intermediate point. 06/2009. Approach starting point. 25 N135 G1 Z-95 Fundamentals Programming Manual.33 K1=-54.Motion commands 9. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 245 .665) K1=IC(-29.5 Circular interpolation Example 2: Turning Program code N125 G1 X40 Z-25 F0.25) N130 CIP X70 Z-75 I1=93. 06/2009.2 N130 CIP X70 Z-75 I1=IC(26. 5 Circular interpolation 9. There can be any number of blocks without traversing information between this block and the current block. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Z.. X.Motion commands 9.7 Function Circular interpolation with tangential transition (CT.5. The circle is defined by: ● The start and end point and ● The tangent direction at the start point.) The Tangential transition function is an expansion of the circle programming.. 06/2009... The G code CT produces an arc that lies at a tangent to the contour element programmed previously.. Syntax CT X… Y… Z… 246 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Y. Determination of the tangent direction The tangent direction in the starting point of a CT block is determined from the end tangent of the programmed contour of the last block with a traversing motion.. Circular-path programming with tangential transition.Motion commands 9.: Note CT is modal. the circle is clearly defined by the tangent direction as well as the starting point and end point.. Circle with tangential transition End point in Cartesian coordinates Examples Example 1: Milling Milling a circular arc with CT directly after the straight part. Z.5 Circular interpolation Significance CT: X. . 06/2009. Y. Fundamentals Programming Manual.. Program code N10 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 G90 T1 D1 N20 G41 X30 Y30 G1 F1000 N30 CT X50 Y15 N40 X60 Y-5 N50 G1 X70 N60 G0 G40 X80 Y0 Z20 N70 M30 Comment .. Activation of TRC. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 247 ... As a rule.. Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Example 2: Turning Program code N110 G1 X23.293 Z0 F10 N115 X40 Z-30 F0.2 N120 CT X58.146 Z-42 N125 G1 X70 Comment ; Circular-path programming with tangential transition. 248 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Motion commands 9.5 Circular interpolation Further information Splines In the case of splines, the tangential direction is defined by the straight line through the last two points. In the case of A and C splines with active ENAT or EAUTO, this direction is generally not the same as the direction at the end point of the spline. The transition of B splines is always tangential, the tangent direction is defined as for A or C splines and active ETAN. Frame change If a frame change takes place between the block defining the tangent and the CT block, the tangent is also subjected to this change. Limit case If the extension of the start tangent runs through the end point, a straight line is produced instead of a circle (limit case: circle with infinite radius). In this special case, TURN must either not be programmed or the value must be TURN=0. Note When the values tend towards this limit case, circles with an unlimited radius are produced and machining with TURN unequal 0 is generally aborted with an alarm due to violation of the software limits. Position of the circle plane The position of the circle plane depends on the active plane (G17-G19). If the tangent of the previous block does not lie in the active plane, its projection in the active plane is used. If the start and end points do not have the same position components perpendicular to the active plane, a helix is produced instead of a circle. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 249 Motion commands 9.6 Helical interpolation (G2/G3, TURN) 9.6 Function 9.6 Helical interpolation (G2/G3, TURN) The helical interpolation enables, for example, the production of threads or oil grooves. With helical interpolation, two motions are superimposed and executed in parallel: ● A plane circular motion on which ● A vertical linear motion is superimposed. Syntax G2/G3 G2/G3 G2/G3 G2/G3 G2/G3 X… Y… Z… I… J… K… TURN= X… Y… Z… I… J… K… TURN= AR=… I… J… K… TURN= AR=… X… Y… Z… TURN= AP… RP=… TURN= Significance G2: G3: X Y Z: I J K: AR: TURN= : AP= : RP= : Travel on a circular path in clockwise direction Travel on a circular path in counterclockwise direction End point in Cartesian coordinates Circle center point in Cartesian coordinates Opening angle Number of additional circular passes in the range from 0 to 999 Polar angle Polar radius 250 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Motion commands 9.6 Helical interpolation (G2/G3, TURN) Note G2 and G3 are modal. The circular motion is performed in those axes that are defined by the specification of the working plane. Example Program code N10 G17 G0 X27.5 Y32.99 Z3 N20 G1 Z-5 F50 N30 G3 X20 Y5 Z-20 I=AC(20) J=AC(20) TURN=2 Comment ; Approach of the starting position. ; Feed of the tool. ; Helix with the specifications: Execute 2 full circles after the starting position, then travel to end point. ; End of program. N40 M30 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 251 Motion commands 9.6 Helical interpolation (G2/G3, TURN) Further information Sequence of motions 1. Approach starting point 2. Execute the full circles programmed with TURN=. 3. Approach circle end position, e.g. as part rotation. 4. Execute steps 2 and 3 across the infeed depth. The pitch, with which the helix is to be machined is calculated from the number of full circles plus the programmed circle end position (executed across the infeed depth). Programming the end point for helical interpolation Please refer to circular interpolation for a detailed description of the interpolation parameters. Programmed feedrate For helical interpolation, it is advisable to specify a programmed feedrate override (CFC). FGROUP can be used to specify which axes are to be traversed with a programmed feedrate. For more information please refer to the Path behavior section. 252 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Motion commands 9.7 Involute interpolation (INVCW, INVCCW) 9.7 Function 9.7 Involute interpolation (INVCW, INVCCW) The involute of the circle is a curve traced out from the end point on a "piece of string" unwinding from the curve. Involute interpolation allows trajectories along an involute. It is executed in the plane in which the basic circle is defined and runs from the programmed starting point to the programmed end point. The end point can be programmed in two ways: 1. Directly via Cartesian coordinates 2. Indirectly by specifying an opening angle (also refer to the programming of the opening angle for the circular-path programming) If the starting point and the end point are in the plane of the basic circle, then, analogous to the helical interpolation for circles, there is a superimposition to a curve in space. With additional specification of paths perpendicular to the active plane, an involute can be traversed in space (comparable to the helical interpolation for circles). Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 253 Motion commands 9.7 Involute interpolation (INVCW, INVCCW) Syntax INVCW X... Y... Z... I... J... K... CR=... INVCCW X... Y... Z... I... J... K... CR=... INVCW I... J... K... CR=... AR=... INVCCW I... J... K... CR=... AR=... Meaning INVCW: INVCCW: X... Y... Z... : I... J... K... : Command to travel on an involute in clockwise direction Command to travel on an involute in counterclockwise direction Direct programming of the end point in Cartesian coordinates Interpolation parameters for the description of the center point of the basic circle in Cartesian coordinates Note: The coordinate specifications refer to the starting point of the involute. CR=... : AR=... : Radius of the basic circle Indirect programming of the end point through specification of an opening angle (angle of rotation) The origin of the opening angle is the line from the circle center point to the starting point. AR > 0: AR < 0: The path of the involute moves away from the basic circle. The path of the involute moves towards the basic circle. For AR < 0, the maximum angle of rotation is restricted by the fact that the end point must always be outside the basic circle. 254 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Motion commands 9.7 Involute interpolation (INVCW, INVCCW) Indirect programming of the end point through specification of an opening angle NOTICE With the indirect programming of the end point through specification of an opening angle AR, the sign of the angle must be taken into account, as a sign change would result in another involute and therefore another path. This is demonstrated in the following example: The specifications of the radius and center point of the basic circle as well as the starting point and direction of rotation (INVCW/INVCCW) are the same for involutes 1 and 2. The only difference is in the sign of the opening angle: ● With AR > 0, the path is on involute 1 and end point 1 is approached. ● With AR < 0, the path is on involute 2 and end point 2 is approached. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 255 Motion commands 9.7 Involute interpolation (INVCW, INVCCW) Supplementary conditions ● Both the starting point and the end point must be outside the area of the basic circle of the involute (circle with radius CR around the center point specified by I, J, K). If this condition is not satisfied, an alarm is generated and the program processing is aborted. ● The two options for the programming of the end point (directly via Cartesian coordinates or indirectly via the specification of an opening angle) are mutually exclusive. Consequently, only one of the two programming options may be used in a block. ● If the programmed end point does not lie exactly on the involute defined by the starting point and basic circle, interpolation takes place between the two involutes defined by the starting and end points (see following figure). The maximum deviation of the end point is determined by a machine data (→ machine manufacturer). If the deviation of the programmed end point in the radial direction is greater than that by the MD, then an alarm is generated and the program processing aborted. 256 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Motion commands 9.7 Involute interpolation (INVCW, INVCCW) Examples Example 1: Counterclockwise involute from the starting point to the programmed end point and back again as clockwise involute Program code N10 G1 X10 Y0 F5000 N15 G17 N20 INVCCW X32.77 Y32.77 CR=5 I-10 J0 N30 INVCW X10 Y0 CR=5 I-32.77 J-32.77 Comment ; Approach of the starting position. ; Selection of the X/Y plane as working plane. ; Counterclockwise involute, end point in Cartesian coordinates. ; Clockwise involute, starting point is end point from N20, new end point is starting point from N20, new circle center point refers to a new starting point and is the same as the old circle center point. ... Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 257 Motion commands 9.7 Involute interpolation (INVCW, INVCCW) Example 2: Counterclockwise involute with indirect programming of the end point through specification of an opening angle Program code N10 G1 X10 Y0 F5000 N15 G17 N20 INVCCW CR=5 I-10 J0 AR=360 Comment ; Approach of the starting position. ; Selection of the X/Y plane as working plane. ; Counterclockwise involute and away from the basic circle (as positive angle specification) with one full revolution (360 degrees). ... References For more information about machine data and supplementary conditions that are relevant to involute interpolation, see: Function Manual, Basic Functions; Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2), Chapter: "Settings for involute interpolation" 258 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Motion commands 9.8 Contour definitions 9.8 Function 9.8 Contour definitions The contour definition programming is used for the quick input of simple contours. Programmable are contour definitions with one, two, three or more points with the transition elements chamfer or rounding, through specification of Cartesian coordinates and/or angles. Arbitrary further NC addresses can be used, e.g. address letters for further axes (single axes or axis perpendicular to the machining plane), auxiliary function specifications, G codes, velocities, etc. in the blocks that describe contour definitions. Note Contour calculator The contour definitions can be programmed easily with the aid of the contour calculator. This is a user interface tool that enables the programming and graphic display of simple and complex workpiece contours. The contours programmed via the contour calculator are transferred to the part program. References: Operating Manual Assigning parameters The identifiers for angle, radius and chamfer are defined via machine data: MD10652 $MN_CONTOUR_DEF_ANGLE_NAME (name of the angle for contour definitions) MD10654 $MN_RADIUS_NAME (name of the radius for contour definitions) MD10656 $MN_CHAMFER_NAME (name of the chamfer for contour definitions) Note See machine manufacturer's specifications. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 259 Motion commands 9.8 Contour definitions 9.8.1 Contour definitions: One straight line (ANG) Note In the following description it is assumed that • G18 is active (⇒ active working plane is the Z/X plane). (However, the programming of contour definitions is also possible without restrictions with G17 or G19.) • The following identifiers have been defined for angle, radius and chamfer: – ANG (angle) – RND (radius) – CHR (chamfer) Function The end point of the straight line is defined by the following specifications: ● Angle ANG ● One Cartesian end point coordinate (X2 or Z2) ANG: X1, Z1: X2, Z2: Angle of the straight line Start coordinates End point coordinates of the straight line 260 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Straight line with angle specification.8 Contour definitions Syntax X… ANG=… Z… ANG=… Significance X. Comment . Comment .Motion commands 9. Approach of the starting position.. 06/2009.. Fundamentals Programming Manual.8 ANG=110 N30 . ..5 ANG=110 N30 . Straight line with angle specification. Approach of the starting position.. Example Program code N10 X5 Z70 F1000 G18 N20 X88. or Program code N10 X5 Z70 F1000 G18 N20 Z39. . : Z... 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 261 . : ANG: End point coordinate in the X direction End point coordinate in the Z direction Identifier for the angle programming The specified value (angle) refers to the abscissa of the active working plane (Z axis with G18)... radius and chamfer: – ANG (angle) – RND (radius) – CHR (chamfer) Function The end point of the first straight line can be programmed by specifying the Cartesian coordinates or by specifying the angle of the two straight lines. (However. Z2: X3.2 Contour definitions: Two straight lines (ANG) Note In the following description it is assumed that: • G18 is active (⇒ active working plane is the Z/X plane).8 Contour definitions 9. the programming of contour definitions is also possible without restrictions with G17 or G19. The end point of the second straight line must always be programmed with Cartesian coordinates.8. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . The intersection of the two straight lines can be designed as a corner. 06/2009. ANG1: ANG2: X1. curve or chamfer.Motion commands 9. Z3: Angle of the first straight line Angle of the second straight line Start coordinates of the first straight line End point coordinates of the first straight line or start coordinates of the second straight line End point coordinates of the second straight line 262 Fundamentals Programming Manual.) • The following identifiers have been defined for angle. Z1: X2. .. X… Z… ANG=… ● Chamfer as transition between the straight lines: ANG=… CHR=. X… Z… ANG=… 2..Motion commands 9. 06/2009.. X… Z… ● Chamfer as transition between the straight lines: X… Z… CHR=. Programming of the end point of the first straight line by specifying the coordinates ● Corner as transition between the straight lines: X… Z… X… Z… ● Rounding as transition between the straight lines: X… Z… RND=. X… Z… Fundamentals Programming Manual... 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 263 ..8 Contour definitions Syntax 1.. Programming of the end point of the first straight line by specifying the angle ● Corner as transition between the straight lines: ANG=… X… Z… ANG=… ● Rounding as transition between the straight lines: ANG=… RND=. . : Identifier for the programming of a rounding The specified value corresponds to the radius of the rounding: CHR=... RNDM... 264 Fundamentals Programming Manual... FRC. : Identifier for the programming of a chamfer The specified value corresponds to the width of the chamfer in the direction of motion: X.. FRCM) (Page 295)". : Identifier for angle programming The specified value (angle) refers to the abscissa of the active working plane (Z axis with G18). CHR.Motion commands 9.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .. : Note Coordinates in the X direction Coordinates in the Z direction For further information on the programming of a chamfer or rounding. 06/2009. RND=.8 Contour definitions Significance ANG=. rounding (CHF. see "Chamfer. : Z. RND. 9. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Comment . The end point of the second and third straight lines must always be programmed with Cartesian coordinates. or a chamfer.Motion commands 9. The intersection of the straight lines can be designed as a corner.8. radius and chamfer: – ANG (angle) – RND (radius) – CHR (chamfer) Function The end point of the first straight line can be programmed by specifying the Cartesian coordinates or by specifying the angle of the two straight lines.65 CHR=5. (However.5 N30 X85 Z40 ANG=100 N40 . Note The programming described here for a three point contour definition can be expanded arbitrarily for contour definitions with more than three points. Approach of the starting position.) • The following identifiers have been defined for angle. the programming of contour definitions is also possible without restrictions with G17 or G19.. .. a curve.8 Contour definitions Example Program code N10 X10 Z80 F1000 G18 N20 ANG=148.3 Contour definitions: Three straight line (ANG) Note In the following description it is assumed that: • G18 is active (⇒ active working plane is the Z/X plane). 06/2009. Straight line with angle and chamfer specification. Straight line with angle and end point specification. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 265 . . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Z4: Angle of the first straight line Angle of the second straight line Start coordinates of the first straight line End point coordinates of the first straight line or start coordinates of the second straight line End point coordinates of the second straight line or start coordinates of the third straight line End point coordinates of the third straight line Syntax 1. Z1: X2. X… Z… 266 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009.... Programming of the end point of the first straight line by specifying the angle ● Corner as transition between the straight lines: ANG=… X… Z… ANG=… X… Z… ● Rounding as transition between the straight lines: ANG=… RND=. X… Z… ANG=… RND=. Z2: X3.Motion commands 9.8 Contour definitions ANG1: ANG2: X1. Z3: X4.. X… Z… CHR=. 06/2009....Motion commands 9.. X… Z… RND=.. : Identifier for programming a rounding The specified value corresponds to the radius of the rounding: Fundamentals Programming Manual.. RND=.. : Identifier for angle programming The specified value (angle) refers to the abscissa of the active working plane (Z axis with G18)...8 Contour definitions ● Chamfer as transition between the straight lines: ANG=… CHR=.. Programming of the end point of the first straight line by specifying the coordinates ● Corner as transition between the straight lines: X… Z… X… Z… X… Z… ● Rounding as transition between the straight lines: X… Z… RND=.. X… Z… ANG=… CHR=. X… Z… Significance ANG=. X… Z… 2.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 267 ... X… Z… ● Chamfer as transition between the straight lines: X… Z… CHR=... 8 Contour definitions CHR=.. 268 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Straight line with angle and chamfer specification. Straight line to end point. FRCM)". FRC. 06/2009.5 N30 X80 Z70 ANG=95.824 RND=10 N40 X70 Z50 Comment . Example Program code N10 X10 Z100 F1000 G18 N20 ANG=140 CHR=7. : Note Coordinates in the X direction Coordinates in the Z direction For further information on the programming of a chamfer or rounding. : Z. see "Chamfer. . Approach of the starting position. Straight line to intermediate point with angle and chamfer specification... ..Motion commands 9. : Identifier for programming a chamfer The specified value corresponds to the width of the chamfer in the direction of motion: X.. rounding (CHF.. CHR. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . RND. RNDM. . the missing coordinate is set to the same as the last (modal) position reached. If it is the second block of such a contour definition. either none. Number of programmed axes ● If no axis of the active plane has been programmed.4 Function Contour definitions: End point programming with angle If the address letter A appears in an NC block. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 269 . Fundamentals Programming Manual. The contour definition is then at best a motion perpendicular to the active plane. If the current block has not been preceded by a block with angle programming without programmed axes of the active plane.Motion commands 9. 06/2009. then this is either the first or second block of a contour definition consisting of two blocks. then this means that the starting point and end point in the active plane are identical. ● If two axes of the active plane have been programmed. In the second case. Angle A may only be programmed for linear or spline interpolation.8 Contour definitions 9. one or both of the axes in the active plane may also be programmed. ● If exactly one axis of the active plane has been programmed.8. then this block is not permitted. then this is the second block of a contour definition consisting of two blocks. then this is either a single straight line whose end point can be clearly defined via the angle and programmed Cartesian coordinate or the second block of a contour definition consisting of two blocks. 9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Thread cutting with constant lead (G33.Motion commands 9. 270 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .9 9. 06/2009. SF) Threads with constant lead can be machined with G33: ● Cylinder thread ③ ● Face thread ② ● Tapered thread ① Note Technical requirement for thread cutting with G33 is a variable-speed spindle with position measuring system.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) 9.9.1 Function 9. 06/2009.Motion commands 9. The programming is performed in the G33 block at address SF. Note If no starting point offset is specified. the "starting angle for thread" defined in the setting data is used.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Multiple thread Multiple thread (thread with offset cuts) can be machined by specifying a starting point offset. Thread chain A thread chain can be machined with several G33 blocks programmed in succession: Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 271 . : J. Y...Motion commands 9. Direction of rotation of the thread The direction of rotation of the thread is determined by the direction of rotation of the spindle: ● Clockwise with M3 produces a right-hand thread ● Counterclockwise with M4 produces a left-hand thread Syntax Cylinder thread: G33 Z… K… G33 Z… K… SF=… Face thread: G33 X… I… G33 X… I… SF=… Tapered thread: G33 X… Z… K… G33 X… Z… K… SF=… G33 X… Z… I… G33 X… Z… I… SF=… Significance G33: X. K..... : X. : Command for thread cutting with constant lead End point(s) in Cartesian coordinates Thread lead in X direction Thread lead in Y direction Thread lead in Z direction Longitudinal axis Transverse axis Thread length and lead for cylinder threads Thread diameter and thread lead for face threads 272 Fundamentals Programming Manual..... I. Z.. : Z: X: Z... the blocks are linked by the look-ahead velocity control in such a way that there are no velocity jumps.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Note With continuous-path mode G64. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . : I.. 06/2009.... : K.... 0000 to 359. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 273 . 2nd cut: Starting point offset 180° ... The thread lead is specified with I. or K.. . or K. Retract tool. activate spindle.999 degrees Examples Example 1: Double cylinder thread with 180° starting point offset Program code N10 G1 G54 X99 Z10 S500 F100 M3 N20 G33 Z-100 K4 N30 G0 X102 N40 G0 Z10 N50 G1 X99 N60 G33 Z-100 K4 SF=180 N70 G0 X110 N80 G0 Z10 N90 M30 Comment .... (thread lead in transverse direction). Fundamentals Programming Manual. approach starting point. (thread lead in longitudinal direction).. The thread lead can be specified with I..9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) I.. or K. : The thread lead is specified with K.. Work offset.. . End of program. Value range: 0..... Cylinder thread: end point in Z . .. Starting point offset (only required for multiple threads) The starting point offset is specified as an absolute angle position.Motion commands 9. : Thread lead for tapered threads The specification (I.) refers to the taper angle: < 45°: > 45°: = 45°: SF=.. 06/2009. Retraction to starting position.. end of program. . 06/2009. specification of thread lead with K.. activate spindle. in Z direction (since angle < 45°). Retraction. . N30 G0 Z0 M30 274 Fundamentals Programming Manual.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Example 2: Tapered thread with angle less than 45° Program code N10 G1 X50 Z0 S500 F100 M3 N20 G33 X110 Z-60 K4 Comment ..Motion commands 9. Tapered thread: End point in X and Z. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Approach starting point. Motion commands 9. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Y or Z in absolute or incremental dimensions (for turning machines preferably in the Z direction). across which the feed is accelerated or decelerated.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Further information Feedrate for thread cutting with G33 From the programmed spindle speed and the thread lead. The feedrate F is not taken into account for G33. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 275 . the limitation to maximum axis velocity (rapid traverse) is monitored by the control. Allowance must also be made for the run-in and run-out paths. 06/2009. the control calculates the required feedrate with which the turning tool is traversed over the thread length in the longitudinal and/or transverse direction. Cylinder thread The cylinder thread is described by: ● Thread length ● Thread lead The thread length is entered with one of the Cartesian coordinates X. Motion commands 9. 06/2009. Face thread The face thread is described by: ● Thread diameter (preferably in the X direction) ● Thread lead (preferably with I) 276 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) The thread lead is entered at addresses I. J. K (K is preferable for turning machines). Allowance must also be made for the run-in and run-out paths. across which the feed is accelerated or decelerated. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 277 .Motion commands 9.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Tapered thread The tapered thread is described by: ● End point in the longitudinal and transverse direction (taper contour) ● Thread lead The taper contour is entered in Cartesian coordinates X. Z in absolute or incremental dimensions . The specification of the lead depends on the taper angle (angle between the longitudinal axis and the outside of the taper): Fundamentals Programming Manual.preferentially in the X and Z direction for machining on turning machines. Y. 06/2009. 9. ● Run-out path too short Because of the shoulder at the thread run-out. there is not much room for the tool braking ramp. The tool braking ramp can be specified shorter using DITE.this must then be specified shorter using DITS. there is not much room for the tool starting ramp .Motion commands 9. 06/2009. DITE) The DITS and DITE commands can be used to program the path ramp for acceleration and braking. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . there is still a risk of collision. providing a means of adapting the feedrate accordingly if the tool run-in/run-out is too short: ● Run-in path too short Because of the shoulder at the thread run-in. However. Syntax DITS=<value> DITE=<value> 278 Fundamentals Programming Manual.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) 9.2 Function Programmable run-in and run-out paths (DITS. introducing a risk of collision between the workpiece and the tool cutting edge. reduce the spindle speed. Run-out: Program a shorter thread. .. n Note Only paths. If no run-in/deceleration path is programmed before or in the first thread block. Start of smoothing with Z=53. . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 279 . are programmed with DITS and DITE. and not positions.. N40 G90 G0 Z100 X10 SOFT M3 S500 N50 G33 Z50 K5 SF=180 DITS=1 DITE=3 N60 G0 X20 . the corresponding value is determined by the current value of SD42010.Motion commands 9..1]. Note The DITS and DITE commands relate to setting data SD42010 $SC_THREAD_RAMP_DISP[0. in which the programmed paths are written. 06/2009. 0.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Significance DITS: DITE: <value>: Define thread run-in path Define thread run-out path Value specification for the run-in/run-out path Range of values: -1. Feedrates (V1) Example Program code . Comment Fundamentals Programming Manual. References: Function Manual. Basic Functions. Note DITE acts at the end of the thread as a rounding clearance. The alarm is purely for information and has no effect on part program execution. When a block with the DITS and/or DITE command is loaded to the interpolator.9 Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) Further information If the run-in and/or run-out path is very short. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . therefore. MD10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be used to specify that the value written by the part program is written to the corresponding setting data during RESET. The values are. The current dimensions setting (inch/metric) is applied to the programmed run-in/run-out path. the path programmed under DITS is written to SD42010 $SC_THREAD_RAMP_DISP[0] and the path programmed under DITE is written to SD42010 $SC_THREAD_RAMP_DISP[1]. This causes an acceleration overload on the axis. the acceleration of the thread axis is higher than the configured value.Motion commands 9. 280 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. This achieves a smooth change in the axis movement. Alarm 22280 ("Programmed run-in path too short") is then issued for the thread run-in (with the appropriate configuration in MD11411 $MN_ENABLE_ALARM_MASK). retained following power off/on. .10 Thread cutting with increasing or decreasing lead (G34... Face thread with decreasing lead: G35 X… I… F. Significance G34: G35: X. G35) 9. Taper thread with increasing lead: G34 X… Z… K… F..Motion commands 9.10 Function 9.. Cylinder thread with decreasing lead: G35 Z… K… F. The commands G34 and G35 can therefore be used for the machining of self-tapping threads.... G35) With the commands G34 and G35. 06/2009.: Command for thread cutting with linear increasing lead Command for thread cutting with linear decreasing lead End point(s) in Cartesian coordinates Thread lead in X direction Thread lead in Y direction Thread lead in Z direction Thread lead change If you already know the starting and final lead of a thread.... : K. G34 X… Z… I… F. Y... Z..... G35 X… Z… I… F.10 Thread cutting with increasing or decreasing lead (G34.. : I. the G33 functionality has been extended with the option of programming a change in the thread lead at address F. : J.. this results in a linear increase and with G35 to a linear decrease of the thread lead.... With G34.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 281 ....... : F. Taper thread with decreasing lead: G35 X… Z… K… F. Syntax Cylinder thread with increasing lead: G34 Z… K… F. you can calculate the thread lead change to be programmed according to the following equation: The identifiers have the following meanings: ka: Thread lead (thread lead of axis target point coordinate) [mm/rev] Fundamentals Programming Manual. Face thread with increasing lead: G34 X… I… F.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .10 Thread cutting with increasing or decreasing lead (G34. Thread cutting with constant lead (100 mm/rev) . G35) k G: IG: Starting thread lead (programmed under I. Spindle on.0454 mm/rev2 Lead at end of block: 50mm/rev . Approach starting point. 06/2009. or K) [mm/rev] Thread length [mm] Example Program code N1608 M3 S10 N1609 G0 G64 Z40 X216 N1610 G33 Z0 K100 SF=R14 N1611 G35 Z-200 K100 F17. . .Motion commands 9.045455 N1612 G33 Z-240 K50 N1613 G0 X218 N1614 G0 Z40 N1615 M17 Comment . Traverse thread block without jerk. J. References Function Manual. Lead decrease: 17. Feedrates (V1). Basic Functions. Section "Linear increasing/decreasing thread lead change with G34 and G35" 282 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Motion commands 9.11 Tapping without compensating chuck (G331. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 283 . The spindle prepared for tapping can make the following movements in position-controlled operation with distance measuring system: ● G331: Tapping with thread lead in tapping direction up to end point ● G332: Retraction movement with the same lead as G331 Right-hand or left-hand threads are defined by the sign of the lead: ● Positive lead → clockwise (as M3) ● Negative lead → counter-clockwise (as M4) The desired speed is also programmed at address S. tapping without compensating chuck requires a positioncontrolled spindle with position measuring system.11 Condition 9. Function Tapping without compensating chuck is programmed using the G331 and G332 commands. Fundamentals Programming Manual. G332) With regard to technology.11 Tapping without compensating chuck (G331. G332) 9. the next thread can be tapped with G331...00 mm/rev 284 Fundamentals Programming Manual.. Effective: X..001 to 2000. : modal Drilling depth (end point of the thread in Cartesian coordinates) Thread lead in X direction Thread lead in Y direction Thread lead in Z direction Value range of lead: Note After G332 (retraction)... : K... when machining multiple threads one after the other. Z.. ±0.11 Tapping without compensating chuck (G331. 06/2009. Y.. : I.. The direction of rotation of the spindle is reversed automatically. G332) Syntax SPOS=<value> G331 S.. Effective: G332: modal Command: Tapping retraction This movement is described with the same lead as the G331 movement. : J. SPOS (or M70) does not have to be programmed (advantage: saves time). 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .. G331 X… Y… Z… I… J… K… G332 X… Y… Z… I… J… K… ● SPOS (or M70) only has to be programmed prior to tapping: – For threads requiring multiple machining operations for their production – For production processes requiring a defined thread starting position Conversely. Significance G331: Command: Tapping The hole is defined by the drilling depth and the thread lead. ● The spindle speed has to be in a dedicated G331 block without axis motion before tapping (G331 X… Y… Z… I… J… K…).Motion commands 9.. In order for an automatic change in gear stage to be performed. The programmed drilling speed S800 is output in the current gear stage and.. No automatic gear-stage change is possible following an SPOS operation. Spindles (S1). then the switching thresholds for the maximum and minimum speed must be configured in the relevant machine data of the second gear-stage data record (see the examples below). . 06/2009. Align spindle. is limited to the maximum speed of the gear stage. Basic Functions.11 Tapping without compensating chuck (G331. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Examples Example 1: Output the programmed drilling speed in the current gear stage Program code N05 M40 S500 Comment . . spindle speed is 800 rpm in gear stage 1. a second gear-stage data record for two further configurable switching thresholds (maximum speed and minimum speed) can be preset in axis-specific machine data deviating from the first gear step data record and also independent of these speed switching thresholds. Please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications for further details. G332) Note Second gear-stage data record To achieve effective adaptation of spindle speed and motor torque and be able to accelerate faster. if necessary. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 285 . the spindle must be in speedcontrol mode. Gear stage 1 is engaged since the programmed spindle speed of 500 rpm is in the range between 20 and 1. Note If gear stage 2 is selected at a spindle speed of 800 rpm.Motion commands 9. Chapter: "Configurable gear adaptations". Machine thread. .. References: Function Manual.028 rpm. N55 SPOS=0 N60 G331 Z-10 K5 S800 The appropriate gear stage for the programmed spindle speed S500 with M40 is determined on the basis of the first gear-stage data record. The gear stage as determined in the manner described above is compared with the active gear stage. N55 SPOS=0 N60 G331 Z-10 K5 . 06/2009. spindle acceleration from second gear-stage data record. . Gear stage 1 is selected.Motion commands 9. Program code N05 M40 S500 . Master spindle with second gear-stage data record: Gear stage 2 is selected. 286 Fundamentals Programming Manual. N50 G331 S800 N55 SPOS=0 N60 G331 Z-10 K5 . Tapping. Example 3: No speed programming → monitoring of the gear stage If no speed is programmed when using the second gear-stage data record with G331. Monitoring of spindle speed 800 rpm with gear-stage data record 2: Gear stage 2 should be active. the first gear-stage data record is active.. G332) Example 2: Application of the second gear-stage data record The switching thresholds of the second gear-stage data record for the maximum and minimum speed are evaluated for G331/G332 and when programming an S value for the active master spindle. then the last speed programmed will be used to produce the thread. Comment .. Comment . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . alarm 16748 is signaled. a gear-stage change is performed. If it is not. Automatic M40 gear-stage change must be active. If they are found to be different. However. . alarm 16748 is signaled.11 Tapping without compensating chuck (G331.. Gear stage 1 is selected. monitoring is performed in this case to check that the last speed programmed is within the preset speed range (defined by the maximum and minimum speed thresholds) for the active gear stage.. Program code N05 M40 S800 . Align spindle. The gear stage does not change. Gear stage 1 is selected. Example 5: Programming without SPOS Program code N05 M40 S500 . Note Please note that when machining with multiple spindles.g.. if the gear stage was changed. the speed and gear stage are monitored in the G331 block and alarm 16748 is signaled if necessary. Program code N05 M40 S500 . SETMS(<spindle number>) can be programmed to set the drill spindle as the master spindle. N50 G331 S800 N60 G331 Z-10 K5 . Thread interpolation for the spindle starts from the current position. Comment . e. 06/2009. it will not be possible to change gear stages. spindle acceleration from second gear-stage data record.11 Tapping without compensating chuck (G331. . Master spindle with second gear-stage data record: Gear stage 2 is selected.. G332) Example 4: Gear stage cannot be changed → monitoring of gear stage If the spindle speed is programmed in addition to the geometry in the G331 block when using the second gear-stage data record.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 287 . it might not be possible to remachine the thread. if the speed is not within the preset speed range (defined by the maximum and minimum speed thresholds) of the active gear stage. Machine thread. the drill spindle also has to be the master spindle. because the path motion of the spindle and the infeed axis (axes) would not be retained. Gear stage cannot be changed. which is determined by the previously processed section of the part program. Therefore. Comment . alarm 16748 is signaled.. Fundamentals Programming Manual. N55 SPOS=0 N60 G331 Z-10 K5 S800 . monitoring of spindle speed 800 rpm with gear-stage data record 2: Gear stage 2 should be active. As in the example above. Gear stage 1 is selected.Motion commands 9. ..Motion commands 9.. but with spindle rotation in the opposite direction.. 06/2009. Syntax G63 X… Y… Z… Significance G63: X. Z. : Tapping with compensating chuck Drilling depth (end point) in Cartesian coordinates 288 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Retraction movement Programming also with G63.12 Tapping with compensating chuck (G63) 9.12 Tapping with compensating chuck (G63) With G63 you can tap a compensating chuck...12 Function 9. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . The following are programmed: ● Drilling depth in Cartesian coordinates ● Spindle speed and spindle direction ● Feedrate The chuck compensates for any deviations occurring in the path. Y. G1. End of program. Fundamentals Programming Manual. but also the spindle speed override switch are set to 100% with G63. Program code N10 G1 X0 Y0 Z2 S200 F1000 M3 N20 G63 Z-50 F160 N30 G63 Z3 M4 N40 M30 Comment . . N40 G332 Z3 K-4 N50 G1 F1000 X100 Y100 Z100 S300 M3 N60 M30 Example 2: In this example. . lead K negative = counterclockwise spindle rotation. With a selected speed of 200 rpm. G2.) is reactivated.8 (according to the table). an M5 thread is to be drilled. 06/2009. the feedrate F is 160 mm/min. . Prepare tapping. Retraction. Thumb rule: Feedrate F in mm/min = spindle speed S in rpm x thread lead in mm/rev Not only the feedrate. After a block with programmed G63. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 289 . The lead of an M5 thread is 0. End of program. programmed reversal of direction. Approach starting point. drilling depth 50. Feedrate Note The programmed feed must match the ratio of the speed to the thread lead of the tap. drilling depth 50. . the last interpolation command programmed (G0. .Motion commands 9. etc. Examples Example 1: Program code N10 SPOS[n]=0 N20 G0 X0 Y0 Z2 N30 G331 Z-50 K-4 S200 Comment . Tapping. . activate spindle.12 Tapping with compensating chuck (G63) Note G63 is non-modal. Approach starting point. automatic reversal of direction. . . Retraction. Spindle operates in spindle mode again. Tapping. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 290 Fundamentals Programming Manual. POLFMLIN) 9.) G33 ..<axis 2 name>.Motion commands 9.. Job Planning) Retraction movement to a specific retraction position can be programmed by: ● Specifying the length of the retraction path and the retraction distance or ● Specifying an absolute retraction position Fast retraction cannot be used in the context of tapping (G331/G332). POLFMASK. LFWP. LFWP. POLFMLIN) The "Fast retraction for thread cutting (G33)" function can be used to interrupt thread cutting without causing irreparable damage in the following circumstances: ● NC Stop/NC RESET ● Switching of a rapid input (see "Fast retraction from the contour" in the Programming Manual. LFOF. ALF. Note: The configured MD value is always active following NC-RESET..13 Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON. POLFMASK. LFON Disable fast retraction for thread cutting: LFOF Significance LFON: LFOF: DILF= : Enable fast retraction for thread cutting (G33) Disable fast retraction for thread cutting (G33) Define length of retraction path The value preset during MD configuration (MD21200 $MC_LIFTFAST_DIST) can be modified in the part program by programming DILF. 06/2009. POLF. LFPOS.. LFTXT. etc. LFON DILF=<value> LFTXT/LFWP ALF=<value> Fast retraction for thread cutting with specification of an absolute retraction position: POLF[<geometry axis name>/<machine axis name>]=<value> LFPOS POLFMASK/POLFMLIN(<axis 1 name>. POLF. DILF. LFTXT. DILF. LFPOS. ALF. LFOF.13 Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON.13 Function 9. Syntax Fast retraction for thread cutting with specification of the length of the retraction path and the retraction direction: G33 . Retraction in the Y direction ALF=3 .<axis 1 name>. Release of axes (<axis 1 name>. POLFMASK. The plane in which the retraction movement is executed is the active working plane. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 291 . LFWP: ALF= : The direction is programmed in discrete degree increments with ALF in the plane of the retraction movement. retraction in the tool direction is defined for ALF=1. LFWP. Retraction in the Z direction References: Programming options with ALF are also described in "Traverse direction for fast retraction from the contour" in the Programming Manual. Retraction in the Z direction ALF=3 .) for independent retraction to absolute position Fundamentals Programming Manual. DILF. Retraction in the X direction • G19 (Y/Z plane) ALF=1 . the direction in the working/machining plane has the following assignment: • G17 (X/Y plane) ALF=1 . Retraction in the Y direction • G18 (Z/X plane) ALF=1 . POLFMLIN) LFTXT LFWP: The retraction direction is controlled in conjunction with ALF with G functions LFTXT and LFWP. ALF.13 Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON. Retraction in the X direction ALF=3 . With LFWP. etc. POLF. LFPOS: POLFMASK: Retraction of the axis declared using POLFMASK or POLFMLIN to the absolute axis position programmed with POLF. LFPOS. LFTXT. LFOF. 06/2009.Motion commands 9. LFTXT: The plane in which the retraction movement is executed is calculated from the path tangent and the tool direction (default setting). Job Planning. With LFTXT. ALF. POLFMLIN: 292 Fundamentals Programming Manual.13 Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON. LFTXT. In the case of machine axes. but the evaluation is performed exclusively during thread cutting (G33).Motion commands 9. POLFMASK. the linear relation cannot always be established before the lift position is reached. DILF. 06/2009. POLFMLIN) Release of axes for retraction to absolute position in linear relation Note: Depending on the dynamic response of all the axes involved. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . it is interpreted as a position in the machine coordinate system. LFOF. LFWP. Note POLF with POLFMASK/POLFMLIN are not restricted to thread cutting applications. The values assigned can also be programmed as incremental dimensions: =IC<value> Note LFON or LFOF can always be programmed. POLF. the assigned value is interpreted as a position in the workpiece coordinate system. LFPOS. POLF[]: Define absolute retraction position for the geometry axis or machine axis in the index Effective: =<value>: modal In the case of geometry axes. .. Enable fast retraction for thread cutting. POLF.Motion commands 9.. LFWP. Approach of the starting position . N99 M30 . Feed of the tool Example 2: Deactivate fast retraction before tapping Program code N55 M3 S500 G90 G0 X0 Z0 . LFTXT. Reset before starting the thread. Comment Fundamentals Programming Manual. N87 MSG ("tapping") N88 LFOF N89 CYCLE.. DILF. LFPOS. ALF. .. POLFMLIN) Examples Example 1: Enable fast retraction for thread cutting Program code N55 M3 S500 G90 G18 .. . 06/2009. LFOF. Deactivate fast retraction before tapping.. Comment .13 Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON. Retraction path = 10 mm Retraction plane: Z/X (because of G18) Retraction direction: -X (with ALF=3: Retraction direction +X) N71 G33 Z55 X15 N72 G1 N69 IF $AC_LIFTFAST GOTOB MM_THREAD N90 MSG ("") . Deselect thread cutting.. N90 MSG ("") . If thread cutting has been interrupted. POLFMASK. . N70 M30 . Tapping cycle with G33.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 293 .. N65 MSG ("thread cutting") MM_THREAD: N67 $AC_LIFTFAST=0 N68 G0 Z5 N68 X10 N70 G33 Z30 K5 LFON DILF=10 LFWP ALF=7 . Active machining plane . LFPOS. LFWP. POLFMASK. 06/2009. DILF. LFOF. Program code N10 G0 G90 X200 Z0 S200 M3 N20 G0 G90 X170 N22 POLF[X]=210 LFPOS N23 POLFMASK(X) N25 G33 X100 I10 LFON N30 X135 Z-45 K10 N40 X155 Z-128 K10 N50 X145 Z-168 K10 N55 X210 I10 N60 G0 Z0 LFOF N70 POLFMASK() M30 . Comment 294 Fundamentals Programming Manual. .13 Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON. LFTXT. Activate (enable) fast retraction from axis X. POLFMLIN) Example 3: Fast retraction to absolute retraction position Path interpolation of X is suppressed in the event of a stop and a motion executed to position POLF[X] at maximum velocity instead. ALF. POLF. Disable lift for all axes. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Motion commands 9. The motion of the other axes continues to be determined by the programmed contour or the thread lead and the spindle speed. Fundamentals Programming Manual. RNDM...... X. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 295 .. X.) for chamfering/rounding is derived from either the previous or the next block dependent on the setting of bit 0 in machine data MD20201 $MC_CHFRND_MODE_MASK (chamfer/rounding behavior). CHR/CHF=<value> FRC/FRCM=<value> G. The "Modal rounding" function can be used to round multiple contour corners in the same way one after the other. X.... Z.. a separate feedrate can be programmed for chamfering/rounding. M commands. The recommended setting is the derivation from the previous block (bit 0 = 1). X. RNDM=<value> FRCM=<value> . Syntax Chamfer the contour corner: G.. CHR...... Z. FRCM) 9.14 Function 9. FRCM) Contour corners within the active working plane can be executed as roundings or chamfers. CHR.Motion commands 9..14 Chamfer. rounding (CHF.. FRC. Z... RND. RNDM=0 Note The technology (feedrate.... FRC. etc..14 Chamfer. 06/2009. Z. Modal rounding: G. If a feedrate is not programmed.. Z. Round the contour corner: G.. For optimum surface quality.... feedrate type. the standard path feedrate F will be applied. RNDM. RND.. rounding (CHF. RND=<value> FRC=<value> G... X. FRCM=… : Modal feedrate for chamfering/rounding <value>: Note Chamfering/Rounding If the values programmed for chamfering (CHF/CHR) or rounding (RND/RNDM) are too high for the contour elements involved.Motion commands 9. 06/2009. RND. CHR.14 Chamfer. FRCM) Significance CHF=… : CHR=… : Chamfer the contour corner <value>: <value>: RND=… : RNDM=… : Length of the chamfer (unit corresponding to G70/G71) Width of the chamfer in the original direction of motion (unit corresponding to G70/G71) Radius of the rounding (unit corresponding to G70/G71) Chamfer the contour corner Round the contour corner <value>: Modal rounding (rounding multiple contour corners in the same way one after the other) <value>: Radius of the roundings (unit corresponding to G70/G71) Modal rounding is deactivated with RNDM=0.g. rounding (CHF. FRC=… : Non-modal feedrate for chamfering/rounding <value>: Feedrate in mm/min (with active G94) or mm/rev (with active G95) Feedrate in mm/min (with active G94) or mm/rev (with active G95) FRCM=0 deactivates modal feedrate for chamfering/rounding and activates the feedrate programmed under F. only command outputs) is exceeded 296 Fundamentals Programming Manual. chamfering or rounding will automatically be reduced to an appropriate value. FRC. No chamfering/rounding is performed if: • No straight or circular contour is available in the plane • A movement takes place outside the plane • The plane is changed • A number of blocks specified in the machine data not to contain any information about traversing (e.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . RNDM. an error message will be output. the FRCM value will need to be reprogrammed like F on change G94 ↔ G95. FRC is only effective if a chamfer/rounding is programmed in the block or if RNDM has been activated. Fundamentals Programming Manual. RND. rounding (CHF. the command can be programmed according to the F value without error message. RNDM.Motion commands 9. CHR. 06/2009. FRCM=0 activates the feedrate programmed under F for chamfering/rounding. Examples Example 1: Chamfering between two straight lines • MD20201 Bit 0 = 1 (derived from previous block) • G71 is active. If only F is reprogrammed and if the feedrate type FRCM > 0 before the change. FRCM) Note FRC/FRCM FRC/FRCM has no effect if a chamfer is traversed with G0. FRC. If FRCM is programmed. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 297 . The feedrate programmed under FRC must be greater than zero.14 Chamfer. etc. • The width of the chamfer in the direction of motion (CHR) should be 2 mm and the feedrate for chamfering 100 mm/min. FRC overwrites the F or FRCM value in the current block. • The radius of the rounding should be 2 mm and the feedrate for rounding 50 mm/min. Example 2: Rounding between two straight lines • MD20201 Bit 0 = 1 (derived from previous block) • G71 is active... RND. N30 G1 Z… RND=2 FRC=50 N40 G1 X… .. RNDM. Program code .. N30 G1 Z… CHF=2(cosα*2) FRC=100 N40 G1 X… .. rounding (CHF..14 Chamfer.Motion commands 9. CHR.. N30 G1 Z… CHR=2 FRC=100 N40 G1 X… .. 06/2009.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . ● Programming with CHF Program code . FRCM) Programming can be performed in two ways: ● Programming with CHR Program code ... FRC. 298 Fundamentals Programming Manual.. . Program code .. N120 RNDM=0 .. . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 299 . RNDM.Motion commands 9. Radius of rounding: 2 mm Feedrate for rounding: 50 mm/min N40.. Activate modal rounding... CHR. RND. • MD20201 Bit 0 = 1 (derived from previous block) • G71 is active.. N30 G1 Z… RND=2 FRC=50 N40 G3 X… Z… I… K… . Comment Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. Example 4: Modal rounding to deburr sharp workpiece edges Program code . • The radius of the rounding should be 2 mm and the feedrate for rounding 50 mm/min. N30 G1 X… Z… RNDM=2 FRCM=50 .. rounding (CHF.. Deactivate modal rounding.. FRCM) Example 3: Rounding between straight line and circle The RND function can be used to insert a circle contour element with tangential connection between the linear and circle contours in any combination. FRC.14 Chamfer. Chamfer N40-N60 with FRC=200 mm/min Comment 300 Fundamentals Programming Manual. M02 . Chamfer N120-N130 with G95 FRC=1 mm/rev . Modal rounding N70-N80 with FRCM=50 mm/min . Chamfer N20-N30 with F=100 mm/min . Modal rounding N90-N100 with F=100 mm/min (deselection of FRCM) . Chamfer N80-N90 with FRC=100 mm/min .. Chamfer N40-N60 with FRCM=50 mm/min Comment ● MD20201 Bit 0 = 1: Derived from previous block (recommended setting!) Program code N10 G0 X0 Y0 G17 F100 G94 N20 G1 X10 CHF=2 N30 Y10 CHF=4 FRC=120 N40 X20 CHF=3 FRC=200 N50 RNDM=2 FRCM=50 N60 Y20 N70 X30 N80 Y30 CHF=3 FRC=100 N90 X40 N100 Y40 FRCM=0 N110 S1000 M3 N120 X50 CHF=4 G95 F3 FRC=1 N130 Y50 N140 X60 . Chamfer N30-N40 with FRC=120 mm/min . FRC. M02 . Modal rounding N60-N70 with FRCM=50 mm/min .. Modal rounding N60-N70 with FRCM=50 mm/min .. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Chamfer N80-N90 with FRC=100 mm/min . rounding (CHF. FRCM) Example 5: Apply technology from following block or previous block ● MD20201 Bit 0 = 0: Derived from following block (default setting!) Program code N10 G0 X0 Y0 G17 F100 G94 N20 G1 X10 CHF=2 N30 Y10 CHF=4 N40 X20 CHF=3 FRC=200 N50 RNDM=2 FRCM=50 N60 Y20 N70 X30 N80 Y30 CHF=3 FRC=100 N90 X40 N100 Y40 FRCM=0 N110 S1000 M3 N120 X50 G95 F3 FRC=1 . RND. Modal rounding N70-N80 with FRCM=50 mm/min .Motion commands 9. Chamfer N20-N30 with F=100 mm/min . CHR. RNDM.14 Chamfer. Modal rounding N130-N140 with F=3 mm/rev . Modal rounding N90-N100 with FRCM=50 mm/min . Modal rounding N100-N120 with G95 FRC=1 mm/rev . Modal rounding N100-N120 with F=100 mm/min . Chamfer N30-N40 with FRC=200 mm/min .. 06/2009. Syntax G0/G1 X... 06/2009.g. OFFN) When tool radius compensation (TRC) is active.. G40: Deactivate TRC.Tool radius compensation 10. Allowance on the programmed contour (normal contour offset) (optional). Y… Z. G41/G42 [OFFN=<value>] . Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 301 ... Y… Z.1 Function 10 10.. G40 X..1 Tool radius compensation (G40. Activate TRC with machining direction right of the contour. G42. to generate equidistant paths for rough finishing... e. the control automatically calculates the equidistant tool paths for various tools. G41.. Significance G41: G42: OFFN=<value>: Activate TRC with machining direction left of the contour. 06/2009. point X50/Y50 is approached with compensation. the last position on the second axis is added automatically and traversed with both axes. X50 is approached without compensation. 302 Fundamentals Programming Manual.Tool radius compensation 10. Examples Example 1: Milling Program code N10 G0 X50 T1 D1 N20 G1 G41 Y50 F200 N30 Y100 … Comment . G42. OFFN) Note In the NC block with G40/G41/G42. This can be achieved by means of GEOAX programming. If only one axis is specified on activation.1 Tool radius compensation (G40. G41. Radius compensation is activated. The two axes must be active as geometry axes in the channel. . Only tool length compensation is activated. G0 or G1 has to be active and at least one axis has to be specified on the selected working plane. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . OFFN) Example 2: "Conventional" procedure based on the example of milling "Conventional" procedure: 1. end of program. Activate tool radius compensation. 06/2009. Tool change . Fundamentals Programming Manual.1 Tool radius compensation (G40. G42. tool machines to the left of the contour. Call tool offset values. . Activate working plane and tool radius compensation. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 303 . Change tool. Feed in tool. G41. 3. . Retract tool. Tool call 2. . Program code N10 G0 Z100 N20 G17 T1 M6 N30 G0 X0 Y0 Z1 M3 S300 D1 N40 Z-7 F500 N50 G41 X20 Y20 N60 Y40 N70 X40 Y70 N80 X80 Y50 N90 Y20 N100 X20 N110 G40 G0 Z100 M30 Comment . . .Tool radius compensation 10. select length compensation. Mill contour. Retraction for tool change. Radius compensation is activated. OFFN) Example 3: Turning 20 20 1 Program code … N20 T1 D1 N30 G0 X100 Z20 N40 G42 X20 Z1 N50 G1 Z-20 F0. X100 Z20 is approached without compensation. Only tool length compensation is activated. G42. G41.1 Tool radius compensation (G40.Tool radius compensation 10. Ø 100 304 Fundamentals Programming Manual.2 … Ø 20 Comment . 06/2009. . . point X20/Z1 is approached with compensation. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Select tool selection and offset . Turn radius 3 . Select constant feedrate . Turn radius 3 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Speed limitation (G96) .Tool radius compensation 10. 06/2009. G41.25 N40 G3 X16 Z-4 I0 K-10 N45 G1 Z-12 N50 G2 X22 Z-15 CR=3 N55 G1 X24 N60 G3 X30 Z-18 I0 K-3 N65 G1 Z-20 N70 X35 Z-40 N75 Z-57 N80 G2 X41 Z-60 CR=3 N85 G1 X46 Comment . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 305 . Starting point .1 Tool radius compensation (G40. Set tool with tool radius compensation . Zero offset .5 Z1 N35 G1 X0 Z0 F0. Turn radius 3 . Turn radius 10 . OFFN) Example 4: Turning Program code N5 G0 G53 X280 Z380 D0 N10 TRANS X0 Z250 N15 LIMS=4000 N20 G96 S250 M3 N25 G90 T1 D1 M8 N30 G0 G42 X-1. G42. OFFN) Program code N90 X52 Z-63 N95 G0 G40 G97 X100 Z50 M9 N100 T2 D2 N105 G96 S210 M3 N110 G0 G42 X50 Z-60 M8 N115 G1 Z-70 F0. Retract tool and deselect tool radius compensation .245 K-5 N125 G0 G40 X100 Z50 M9 N130 G0 G53 X280 Z380 D0 M5 N135 M30 Comment . 306 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Deselect tool radius compensation and approach tool change location . (D.12 N120 G2 X50 Z-80 I6. Turn diameter 50 . (T.. Approach tool change location ..) ● Machining direction (G41/G42) ● Working plane (G17/G18/G19) Tool no. G41 G42 G41 G42 G41 With a flat D number structure. G41.)..) The distance between tool path and workpiece contour is calculated from the milling cutter radii or cutting edge radii and the tool point direction parameters... G42. Call tool and select offset . End of program Further information The control requires the following information in order to calculate the tool paths: ● Tool no. Turn radius 8 .1 Tool radius compensation (G40. cutting edge no. 06/2009. cutting edge no..Tool radius compensation 10. Set tool with tool radius compensation . (T. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 ..).. Select constant cutting rate . (D. only the D number has to be programmed. the tool length compensation is performed in the Z direction.. G41. Fundamentals Programming Manual. the control detects the plane and therefore the axis directions for compensation.. Working plane (G17/G18/G19) From this information. tool radius compensation is only possible in "real" planes. Example: Milling cutter Program code . usually with G18. 06/2009. Note A negative offset value has the same significance as a change of offset side (G41 ↔ G42). OFFN) Machining direction (G41/G42) From this information. The tool radius compensation is performed in the X/Y plane.Tool radius compensation 10. Comment . the control detects the direction.. N10 G17 G41 … . Note On 2-axis machines.1 Tool radius compensation (G40. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 307 .. G42. in which the tool path is to be displaced. KONTT) (Page 312)").Tool radius compensation 10.1 Tool radius compensation (G40. Turning: NORM and KONT can be used to define the tool path on activation and deactivation of compensation mode (see "Contour approach and retraction (NORM. 308 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. the tool must be selected again after the plane has been changed. This assignment is not automatically altered when the plane is subsequently changed. OFFN) Tool length compensation The wear parameter assigned to the diameter axis on tool selection can be defined as the diameter value using an MD. To do this. G42. KONTC. G41. KONT. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . G42.000 path increments (corresponds to 1 mm with 3 decimal places).Tool radius compensation 10. 06/2009. the intersection positioned closest to the end of block on the first partial contour is selected. G41. the intersection positioned on the first partial contour closer to the block start is selected. or from one circle block and one linear block. TRUE In the same situation as described above. which consists of two circle blocks following on from one another. A contour is deemed to be (virtually) closed if the distance between the starting point of the first block and the end point of the second block is less than 10% of the effective compensation radius. OFFN) Point of intersection The intersection point is selected in the setting data: SD42496 $SC_CUTCOM_CLSD_CONT (response of tool radius compensation with closed contour) Value FALSE Significance If two intersections appear on the inside when offsetting an (virtually) closed contour. G41 G42 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Change in compensation direction (G41 ↔ G42) A change in compensation direction (G41 ↔ G42) can be programmed without an intermediate G40. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 309 .1 Tool radius compensation (G40. but not more than 1. in accordance with standard procedure. Tool radius compensation 10. G41. 310 Fundamentals Programming Manual. the tool travels along an inclined path between the starting point and end point: Circular interpolation produces spiral movements. OFFN) Changing the working plane The working plane (G17/G18/G19) cannot be changed if G41/G42 is active. in which the new D number is programmed. G42. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . CAUTION The radius change or compensation movement is performed across the entire block and only reaches the new equidistance at the programmed end point. 06/2009.1 Tool radius compensation (G40. In the case of linear movements. Change in tool offset data record (D…) The tool offset data record can be changed in compensation mode. A modified tool radius is active with effect from the block. G42. The sequence is the same as when changing the tool offset data record (D…).g.Tool radius compensation 10. The change only applies with effect from the next block. OFFN) Changing the tool radius The change can be made e. Note A block with a path distance of zero also counts as an interruption! Fundamentals Programming Manual. G41. CAUTION The modified values only take effect the next time T or D is programmed. 06/2009.1 Tool radius compensation (G40. Compensation mode Compensation mode may only be interrupted by a certain number of consecutive blocks or M functions which do not contain drive commands or positional data in the compensation plane. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 311 . Note The number of consecutive blocks or M commands can be set in a machine data item (see machine manufacturer's specifications). using system variables. . KONTC. The tool is oriented perpendicular to the contour point. KONTC or KONTT command can be used to adapt the tool's approach and retract paths to the required contour profile or blank form. KONT. It is. KONTT) If tool radius compensation is active (G41/G42).. Activate direct approach/retraction to/from a straight line. KONT. Y. Z. Activate approach/retraction with constant tangent. 06/2009. KONT. permissible to program a path component perpendicular to the offset plane simultaneously... therefore.. The control replaces these with polynomials for the appropriate approach/retract path.. Condition The KONTC and KONTT commands will only be available if the "Polynomial interpolation" option has been enabled in the control..2 Function 10. Activate approach/retraction with constant curvature. G40 X. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Z.. Significance NORM: KONT: KONTC: KONTT: Note Only G1 blocks are permissible as original approach/retraction blocks for KONTC and KONTT.2 Contour approach and retraction (NORM.. 312 Fundamentals Programming Manual. KONTT) 10.. KONTC or KONTT ensure observance of the continuity conditions in all three axes. Syntax G41/G42 NORM/KONT/KONTC/KONTT X. .Tool radius compensation 10....2 Contour approach and retraction (NORM. KONTC. Y. the NORM. Activate approach/retraction with travel around the starting/end point according to the programmed corner behavior G450 or G451.. KONTC. Infeed takes place in the Z direction in both approach/retraction blocks simultaneously. CUT3DCC. The direction and curvature radius at the block end point of the approach block are identical to the values of the next circle. Retract Comment . KONT.2 Contour approach and retraction (NORM. CUT3DF). The figure below shows the perpendicular projection of the tool path. KONTT) General conditions KONTT and KONTC are not available in 3D variants of tool radius compensation (CUT3DC. Radius 10 mm Fundamentals Programming Manual. Full circle . Example KONTC The full circle is approached beginning at the circle center point.1]=10 N10 G1 X0 Y0 Z60 G64 T1 D1 F10000 N20 G41 KONTC X70 Y0 Z0 N30 G2 I-70 N40 G40 G1 X0 Y0 Z60 N50 M30 . the control switches internally to NORM without an error message. Approach . If they are programmed. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 313 .Tool radius compensation 10. 06/2009.1]=121 $TC_DP6[1. Figure 10-1 Perpendicular projection The associated NC program segment is as follows: Program code $TC_DP1[1. Milling tool . 314 Fundamentals Programming Manual. KONTT) At the same time as the curvature is being adapted to the circular path of the full circle. KONT.2 Contour approach and retraction (NORM. Further information Approach/Retraction with NORM 1. 06/2009. traversing is performed from Z60 to the plane of the circle Z0: Figure 10-2 3D representation. the tool will move directly to the compensated start position along a straight line (irrespective of the preset approach angle programmed for the travel movement) and is positioned perpendicular to the path tangent at the starting point. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Tool radius compensation 10. Approach: If NORM is activated. KONTC. KONT. 06/2009. Fundamentals Programming Manual. to the tool change point. KONTT) 2.Tool radius compensation 10.g. Retract: The tool is perpendicular to the last compensated path end point and then moves (irrespective of the preset approach angle programmed for the travel movement) directly in a straight line to the next uncompensated position. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 315 .2 Contour approach and retraction (NORM. e. KONTC. Modifying approach/retract angles introduces a collision risk: CAUTION Modified approach/retract angles must be taken into account during programming in order that potential collisions can be avoided. KONT. The tool is located behind the contour. The path tangent at the starting point serves as a separation line: Accordingly. two scenarios need to be distinguished where approach/retraction with KONT is concerned: 1. 06/2009. The tool is located in front of the contour.Tool radius compensation 10. KONTC. – Approach: The tool travels around the starting point either along a circular path or over the intersection of the equidistant paths depending on the programmed corner behavior (G450/G451).2 Contour approach and retraction (NORM. KONTT) Approach/Retraction with KONT Prior to the approach the tool can be located in front of or behind the contour. 2. → The approach/retract strategy is the same as with NORM. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . The commands G450/G451 apply to the transition from the current block to the next block: 316 Fundamentals Programming Manual. – Retract: The same applies to retraction as to approach. Approach/Retraction with KONTC The contour point is approached/exited with constant curvature. The center point of the circle is on the starting point. KONTC. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 317 . but in the reverse order. This line is a tangent to a circle with circle radius = tool radius. 06/2009. KONT. KONTT) In both cases (G450/G451). A jump in the acceleration can occur at the contour point. the following approach path is generated: A straight line is drawn from the uncompensated approach point.2 Contour approach and retraction (NORM.Tool radius compensation 10. The path from the start point to the contour point is interpolated as a polynomial. Approach/Retraction with KONTC The contour point is approached/exited with constant tangent. Fundamentals Programming Manual. There is no jump in acceleration at the contour point. The path from the start point to the contour point is interpolated as a polynomial. with this block.2 Contour approach and retraction (NORM. 318 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Due to the extended continuity of curvature associated with KONTC. 06/2009. If the KONTT or KONTC block is the approach block rather than the retraction block. KONTT) Differences between KONTC and KONTT The figure below shows the differences in approach/retraction behavior between KONTT and KONTC. KONT. the contour is exactly the same. but it is machined in the opposite direction. the retraction block first executes a movement with a negative Y component. The end point of the approach blocks is at X40 Y30. This response does not occur with the KONTT retraction block. The tool center point therefore moves along a circular path with radius 40 mm. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . This will often be undesired. an acceleration step change occurs at the block transition. KONTC. The transition between the circular block and the retraction block is at the zero point. However. A circle with a radius of 20 mm about the center point at X0 Y-40 is compensated with a tool with an external radius of 20 mm.Tool radius compensation 10. Note G450/G451 is also used to define the approach path with KONT active and approach point behind the contour (see "Contour approach and retraction (NORM.Tool radius compensation 10.3 Compensation at the outside corners (G450. command G450 or G451 can be used to define the course of the compensated tool path when traveling around outside corners: With G450 the tool center point travels around the workpiece corner across an arc with tool radius. KONTT) (Page 312)"). 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 319 . G451. thereby producing sharper contour corners. G451 applies only to circles and straight lines. G451.3 Compensation at the outside corners (G450. DISC) With tool radius compensation activated (G41/G42). DISC) 10. 06/2009. The DISC command can be used to distort the transition circles with G450. which lie in the distance between the tool radius and the programmed contour. KONT. With G451 the tool center point approaches the intersection of the two equidistants. Fundamentals Programming Manual. KONTC.3 Function 10. Tool radius compensation 10. DISC) Syntax G450 [DISC=<value>] G451 Significance G450: DISC: G450 is used to travel around workpiece corners on a circular path. Both commands are modal. The tool backs off from the workpiece corner. Example In this example. 320 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 1. 06/2009. but can be programmed in a previous block without G450. G451. This prevents the tool stopping and backing off at the change of direction. 2 to 100 Significance: G451 is used to approach the intersection point of the two equidistant paths in the case of workpiece corners. Flexible programming of the circular path with G450 (optional) <value>: Type: INT 0 100 G451: Transition circle Intersection of the equidistant paths (theoretical value) Range of values: 0. a transition radius is programmed for all outside corners (corresponding to the programming of the corner behavior in block N30). Note DISC only applies with call of G450.3 Compensation at the outside corners (G450. Deactivate compensation mode. Starting conditions . These operations are programmed in blocks inserted between the two blocks forming the corner. With G450 the transition circle belongs to the next travel command with respect to the data. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Mill the contour. G451. .3 Compensation at the outside corners (G450. . Feed in tool. the control executes operations such as infeed movements or switching functions. Further information G450/G451 At intermediate point P*. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 321 . 06/2009. DISC When DISC values greater than 0 are specified. . Activate TRC with KONT approach/retract mode and corner behavior G450. DISC) Program code N10 G17 T1 G0 X35 Y0 Z0 F500 N20 G1 Z-5 N30 G41 KONT G450 X10 Y10 N40 Y60 N50 X50 Y30 N60 X10 Y10 N80 G40 X-20 Y50 N90 G0 Y100 N100 X200 M30 Comment . intermediate circles are shown with a magnified height – the result is transition ellipses or parabolas or hyperbolas: An upper limit can be defined in machine data – generally DISC=50. retraction on transition circle.Tool radius compensation 10. there is uniform travel around the contour: When G451 is activated and with acute contour angles. G451. 06/2009. superfluous non-cutting tool paths can result from lift-off movements. 322 Fundamentals Programming Manual. A parameter can be used in the machine data to define automatic switchover to transition circle in such cases. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . In the case of contour angles equal to or greater than 120°. DISC) Traversing behavior When G450 is activated and with acute contour angles and high DISC values.Tool radius compensation 10.3 Compensation at the outside corners (G450. the tool is lifted off the contour at the corners. FAD=.Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Approach and retraction (G140 to G143. G340.. P2 and P3 ● End point P4 Points P0. regardless of the position of the start point. Syntax G140 G141 to G143 G147.1 10.. The approach and retraction movement consists of a maximum of four sub-movements: ● Start point of the movement P0 ● Intermediate points P1.4 Smooth approach and retraction 10. G348. G341.. G247. PR) Function The SAR (Smooth Approach and Retraction) function is used to achieve a tangential approach to the start point of a contour. DISCL=. G248 G347. FAD. DISCL.. but this is not mandatory. G348 G340. according to the parameters defined and the geometrical conditions. P3 and P4 are always defined. G248.4. G347. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Intermediate points P1 and P2 can be omitted. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 323 .. G148 G247... DISR. G147. PM. G148.. G341 DISR=. 06/2009. This function is used preferably in conjunction with the tool radius compensation.4 10. 4 Smooth approach and retraction Significance G140: G141: G142: G143: G147: G148: G247: G248: G347: G348: G340: G341: DISR: Approach and retraction direction dependent on the current compensation side (basic setting) Approach from the left or retraction to the left Approach from the right or retraction to the right Approach and retraction direction dependent on the relative position of the start or end point to the tangent direction Approach with a straight line Retraction with a straight line Approach with a quadrant Retraction with a quadrant Approach with a semicircle Retraction with a semicircle Approach and retraction in space (basic setting) Approach and retraction in the plane Approach and retraction with straight lines (G147/G148) Distance of the milling tool edge to the starting point of the contour Approach and retraction along circles (G247. G348) Radius of the tool center path Notice: For REPOS with a semicircle.) the programmed value is interpreted irrespective of the active G code.. G347/G248. FAD: 324 Fundamentals Programming Manual... the programmed value is applied corresponding to the G code of group 15 (feedrate. DISR is the circle diameter DISCL: DISCL=.. G93.Tool radius compensation 10.) specification of the absolute position of the end point of the fast feed movement Speed of the slow feed movement FAD=.. distance of the end point of the fast feed movement to the machining plane DISCL=AC(.. 06/2009. G94. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . etc....) the programmed value is interpreted irrespective of the active G code..) FAD=PM(. group 15 as linear feedrate (as G94) FAD=PR(. group 15 as revolutional feedrate (as G95). TRC is active (G41) ● Contour offset OFFN=5 (N10) ● Current tool radius=10. with the result that the radius of the tool center path is equal to DISR=10 ● The end point of the circle is obtained from N30. i. the radius of the SAR contour =25. otherwise the contour would be machined further with G0). the radius of the tool center point path=5 Retraction movements from Z8 to Z20 and the movement parallel to the X-Y plane to X70 Y0.Tool radius compensation 10. Z=8 in the end point. G140 applies. – Then to Z0 with FAD=200. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 325 . 06/2009. the active G0 in N30 must be overwritten with G1. ● Smooth retraction (block N60 activated) ● Retraction with quadrant (G248) and helix (G340) ● FAD not programmed. since irrelevant for G340 ● Z=2 in the starting point. since only the Z position is programmed in N20 ● Infeed movement – From Z20 to Z7 (DISCL=AC(7)) with rapid traverse.e.4 Smooth approach and retraction Example ● Smooth approach (block N20 activated) ● Approach with quadrant (G247) ● Approach direction not programmed. and so the effective compensation radius for TRC=15. the radius of the SAR contour=20. Fundamentals Programming Manual. since DISCL=6 ● When DISR=5. – Approach circle in X-Y-plane and following blocks with F1500 (for this velocity to take effect in the following blocks. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . (P4app) . (P0ret) Further information Selecting the approach and retraction contour The appropriate G command can be used: ● to approach or retract with a straight line (G147.Tool radius compensation 10. Approach (P3app) . (P4ret) . 326 Fundamentals Programming Manual. (P0app) .1]=10 N10 G0 X0 Y0 Z20 G64 D1 T1 OFFN=5 N20 G41 G247 G341 Z0 DISCL=AC(7) DISR=10 F1500 FAD=200 N30 G1 X30 Y-10 N40 X40 Z2 N50 X50 N60 G248 G340 X70 Y0 Z20 DISCL=6 DISR=5 G40 F10000 N70 X80 Y0 N80 M30 Comment . 06/2009. Radius .4 Smooth approach and retraction Program code $TC_DP1[1. Retraction (P3ret) . G348). ● a quadrant (G247. Tool definition T1/D1 . G148). G248) or ● a semicircle (G347.1]=120 $TC_DP6[1. 06/2009.4 Smooth approach and retraction Selecting the approach and retraction direction Use the tool radius compensation (G140. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 327 . Fundamentals Programming Manual.Tool radius compensation 10. The G codes are only significant when the approach contour is a quadrant or a semicircle. G142 and G143 provide further approach options. basic setting) to determine the approach and retraction direction with positive tool radius: ● G41 active → approach from left ● G42 active → approach from right G141. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . helical axis. i. The approach characteristic from P0 to P4 is shown in the figure below: In cases which include the position of the active plane G17 to G19 (circular plane. The resultant line length must be positive. i. ● Approach/retract with circles DISR specifies the radius of the tool center point path. The tool radius is only taken into account if it is positive. the length of the straight line when TRC is active is the sum of the tool radius and the programmed value of DISR. Length of the approach straight line or radius for approach circles (DISR) (see figure "Selecting approach/retraction contour") ● Approach/retract with straight lines DISR specifies the distance of the cutter edge from the starting point of the contour. 06/2009. 328 Fundamentals Programming Manual. infeed motion perpendicular to the active plane). negative values for DISR are allowed provided that the absolute value of DISR is less than the tool radius. If TRC is activated.Tool radius compensation 10. a circle is produced with a radius that results in the tool center point path with the programmed radius.e. any active rotating FRAME is taken into account.e.4 Smooth approach and retraction Motion steps between start point and end point (G340 and G341). Z. Example: Program code $TC_DP1[1. 06/2009.. Comment .1]=7 N10 G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z30 D1 T1 N20 X10 N30 G41 G147 DISCL=3 DISR=13 Z=0 F1000 N40 G1 X40 Y-10 N50 G1 X50 .. i. ● The point defined by DISCL is monitored to ensure that it is located between P1 and P3.. ● Programming during approach – P4 in SAR block. The following applies for DISCL=0: ● With G340: The whole of the approach motion now only consists of two blocks (P1.. the value must be programmed in the form DISCL=AC(. Milling tool T1/D1 Tool with 7 mm radius Fundamentals Programming Manual. only two blocks result (infeed movement from P1 to P3 is omitted). If P0 and P4 are on the same plane. the sign must be identical for the component perpendicular to the machining plane in all motions that possess such a component.. P2 and P3 are combined). More blocks can be inserted between an SAR block and the next traversing block without moving the geometry axes.e.Tool radius compensation 10. ● On detection of a direction reversal.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 329 .. The approach contour is formed by P1 to P4.. a tolerance defined by the machine data SAR_CLEARANCE_TOLERANCE is permitted.4 Smooth approach and retraction Distance of the point from the machining plane (DISCL) (see figure when selecting approach/retraction contour) If the position of point P2 is to be specified by an absolute reference on the axis perpendicular to the circle plane. . ● With G341: The whole approach contour consists of three blocks (P2 and P3 are combined). Y..1]=120 $TC_DP6[1. – P4 is defined by means of the end point of the next traversing block.).. Programming the end point P4 for approach or P0 for retraction The end point is generally programmed with X. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 06/2009.Tool radius compensation 10. Program code N30 G41 G147 DISCL=3 DISR=13 F1000 N40 G1 X40 Y-10 Z0 Comment 330 Fundamentals Programming Manual.4 Smooth approach and retraction N30/N40 can be replaced by: 1. Program code N30 G41 G147 DISCL=3 DISR=13 X40 Y-10 Z0 F1000 Comment 2. Tool radius compensation 10. The axis component perpendicular to this is defined by DISCL. The positions of the remaining axes will result. as described above. the contour ends in P2. – If only one axis on the machining plane is programmed. The positions of the remaining axes will result. the contour will end at P1. – If in the SAR block only the axis perpendicular to the machining plane is programmed. – For an SAR block without programmed geometry axis.4 Smooth approach and retraction ● Programming during retraction – For an SAR block without programmed geometry axis. The axis component perpendicular to this is defined by DISCL. the missing second axis is modally added from its last position in the previous block. as described above. movement runs fully in the plane. – If only one axis on the machining plane is programmed. the contour ends in P2. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 331 . The position in the axes that form the machining plane are obtained from the retraction contour. – If in the SAR block only the axis perpendicular to the machining plane is programmed. If the SAR block is also the TRC disable block. Fundamentals Programming Manual. The position in the axes that form the machining plane are obtained from the retraction contour. an additional path from P1 to P0 is inserted such that no motion results at the end of the contour when disabling the TRC. 06/2009. If the SAR block is also the TRC disable block. the missing second axis is modally added from its last position in the previous block. an additional path from P1 to P0 is inserted such that no motion results at the end of the contour when disabling the TRC. If DISCL=0. the contour will end at P1. movement runs fully in the plane. If DISCL=0. the motion parallel to the machining plane and the part of the infeed motion up to the safety clearance.4 Smooth approach and retraction Approach and retraction velocities ● Velocity of the previous block (G0): All motions from P0 up to P2 are executed at this velocity. ● Programmed feedrate F: This feedrate value is effective as of P3 or P2 if FAD is not programmed. Example: Program code $TC_DP1[1.1]=120 $TC_DP6[1. . this part of the contour is also traversed at the modally active speed of the previous block. 06/2009.1]=7 N10 G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z20 D1 T1 N20 G41 G341 G247 DISCL=AC(5) DISR=13 FAD 500 X40 Y-10 Z=0 F200 N30 X50 N40 X60 . ● Programming with FAD: Specification of the feedrate for – G341: infeed movement perpendicular to the machining plane from P2 to P3 – G340: from point P2 or P3 to P4 If FAD is not programmed. i. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 ...Tool radius compensation 10. Milling tool T1/D1 Tool with 7 mm radius 332 Fundamentals Programming Manual.e. If no F word is programmed in the SAR block. Comment . if no F word is programmed in the SAR block. the speed of the previous block is active. the roles of the modally active feedrate from the previous block and the programmed feedrate value in the SAR block are reversed.4 Smooth approach and retraction During retraction. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 333 . 06/2009.e.Tool radius compensation 10. the actual retraction contour is traversed with the old feedrate and a new speed programmed with the F word applies from P2 up to P0. Fundamentals Programming Manual. i. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . ● $P_APR: reading P ● ● 3 (initial point) (contour starting point) ● $P_AEP: reading P 4 ● $P_APDV: read whether $P_APR and $P_AEP contain valid data 334 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009.Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Reading positions Points P3 and P4 can be read in the WCS as a system variable during approach. 4 Smooth approach and retraction 10.e. the block is extended by its end tangent (default setting). and whose radius is the same as the tool radius.Tool radius compensation 10.2 Function Approach and retraction with enhanced retraction strategies (G460. A collision detection can result. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 335 . Machining is performed up to the extension of the last contour element (i. up to the end of the contour). Fundamentals Programming Manual. G462) In certain special geometrical situations. G461. Up to the intersection. if it is not possible to have an intersection.e. in a section of the contour not being completely machined. until shortly before the end of the contour). are required in order to activate or deactivate tool radius compensation. for example.4. machining is performed with an auxiliary circle around the contour end point (i. special extended approach and retraction strategies. compared with the previous implementation with activated collision detection for the approach and retraction block. see following figure: Figure 10-3 Retraction behavior with G460 Syntax G460 G461 G462 Significance G460: G461: As previously (activation of the collision detection for the approach and retraction block) Insertion of a circle in the TRC block. G462: Insertion of a circle in the TRC block. if it is not possible to have an intersection whose center point is in the end point of the uncorrected block. Examples Example 1: Retraction behavior with G460 The following example describes only the situation for deactivation of tool radius compensation: The behavior for approach is exactly the same. 06/2009.1]=120 N20 $TC_DP6[1. The approach/retraction behavior is determined by the state of the G command in the approach/retraction block. Program code G42 D1 T1 . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Tool radius compensation 10. Tool radius 336 Fundamentals Programming Manual..1]=10 N30 X0 Y0 F10000 T1 D1 N40 Y20 N50 G42 X50 Y5 G461 N60 Y0 F600 N70 X30 N80 X20 Y-5 N90 X0 Y0 G40 N100 M30 Comment . The approach behavior can therefore be set independently of the retraction behavior.. G1 X110 Y0 N10 X0 N20 Y10 N30 G40 X50 Y50 Comment .4 Smooth approach and retraction Note The approach behavior is symmetrical to the retraction behavior. Tool radius 20 mm Example 2: Approach with G461 Program code N10 $TC_DP1[1. Milling tool type . 4 Smooth approach and retraction Further information G461 If no intersection is possible between the last TRC block and a preceding block. The control attempts to cut this circle with one of the preceding blocks. If CDON is active. alarm 10751 (collision danger) is output.e. The inserted circle is used exclusively to calculate the intersection and does not produce a traversing movement. 06/2009. Figure 10-4 Retraction behavior with G461 Collision monitoring CDON. i.. Fundamentals Programming Manual. CDOF If CDOF is active (see section Collision monitoring. which is found in this way. the search continues for further intersections after the first intersection is found. CDON. the search is aborted when an intersection is found.Tool radius compensation 10. Note If no intersection is found. CDOF). the system does not check whether further intersections with previous blocks exist. the offset curve of this block is extended with a circle whose center point lies at the end point of the uncorrected block and whose radius is equal to the tool radius. An intersection point. is the new end point of a preceding block and the start point of the deactivation block. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 337 . Tool radius compensation 10. the corner generated by N10 and N20 in the example program is not machined to the full extent actually possible with the tool used. this behavior may be necessary if the part contour (as distinct from the programmed contour). at the end point of the last block with tool radius compensation (the block is extended by its end tangent). on retraction with G462 (initial setting). a straight line is inserted. 06/2009. However. Retraction behavior with G462 (see example) With G462. The search for the intersection is then identical to the procedure for G461. to the left of N20 in the example.4 Smooth approach and retraction G462 If no intersection is possible between the last TRC block and a preceding block. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 338 Fundamentals Programming Manual. is not permitted to be violated even with y values greater than 10 mm. In the second case. G460-462 has no effect. 06/2009. the behavior differs according to whether the end point is in front of or behind the contour. if no interface of the inserted contour element with the preceding blocks is found. If the last traversing block in this situation has no intersection with a preceding block. a remaining section of the circle still has to be traversed. This property does not change even if the last contour block for G451 is extended with a straight line or a circle. In general.Tool radius compensation 10.4 Smooth approach and retraction Corner behavior with KONT If KONT is active (travel round contour at start or end point). For the linear part of the retraction block. the retraction behavior is the same as with NORM. ● End point behind contour If the end point is behind the contour. a behavior that deviates from G460 can only occur with active G461 or G462 either if NORM is active or the behavior with KONT is geometrically identical to that with NORM. the intersection between the retraction straight line and a preceding block is traversed. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 339 . an intersection with the inserted contour element or with the straight line of the end point of the bypass circle to the programmed endpoint can result. and this forms an interface with the preceding block. this is equal to the interface that would occur with NORM and G461. however. If the inserted contour element is a circle (G450). a circle or straight line is always inserted depending on G450/G451. In this case. Additional circumnavigation strategies to avoid a contour violation in the vicinity of the contour end point are therefore not required. ● End point in front of contour If the end point is in front of the contour. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Therefore. no further calculation of intersection is required. Tool radius compensation 10. This Look Ahead function allows possible collisions to be detected in advance and permits the control to actively avoid them. a search is made in the previous traversing block (at inside corners) for a common intersection for the current block.5 Collision monitoring (CDON. With deactivated collision detection. for example. 340 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . from missing information that is not available in the NC program. Collision detection can be activated or deactivated in the NC program. CDOF. resulting. 06/2009. CDOF. CDOF2) 10. Note: CDOF can be used to avoid the faulty detection of bottlenecks.5 Function 10. if necessary the search is extended to even earlier blocks . Syntax CDON CDOF CDOF2 Significance CDON: CDOF: Command for the activation of the collision detection. the tool paths are monitored through look-ahead contour calculation. CDOF2) With the collision detection and active tool radius compensation.5 Collision monitoring (CDON. Command for the deactivation of the collision detection. the control does not know in block N40 if N10 has to be completely processed. which is shown unrealistically large to demonstrate the geometric relationships in the following figure. can be set via machine data. The tool offset direction is determined from adjacent block parts with CDOF2.g. The contour for a tool that is actually used results in undersize.Tool radius compensation 10. an active CDOF or CDON would result in an alarm. CDOF. Only a single block can therefore be omitted. CDOF2: Example Milling on the center point path with standard tool The NC program describes the center point path of a standard tool. the compensation motion shown in the figure is executed and not stopped. Fundamentals Programming Manual. The control also only has an overview of three blocks in the example.5 Collision monitoring (CDON. 3D face milling). Figure 10-5 Compensation motion for missing intersection Since an intersection exists only between the offset curves of the two blocks N10 and N40. In the example. 06/2009. With active CDOF2. In this situation. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 341 . the two blocks N20 and N30 would have to be omitted. CDOF2) Command for the deactivation of the collision detection during 3D circumferential milling. Note The number of NC blocks that are included in the collision detection. CDOF2 is only effective for 3D circumferential milling and has the same significance as CDOF for all other types of machining (e. 5 Collision monitoring (CDON. In all examples. Example 1: Bottleneck detection As the tool radius selected for the machining of this inside contour is too large. CDOF. 06/2009. An alarm is output. the tool with the largest radius from the range of used tools should always be used during the program test. 342 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Examples of compensation motions for critical machining situations The following examples show critical machining situations that are detected by the control and compensated through modified tool paths.Tool radius compensation 10. a tool with too large a radius has been used for the machining of the contour. the "bottleneck" is bypassed. CDOF2) Further information Program test To avoid program stops. the contours are machined only as much as is possible without causing a contour violation. Basic Functions. Example 3: Tool radius too large for internal machining In such cases. Tool Offset (W1). References Function Manual. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 343 . CDOF.Tool radius compensation 10.5 Collision monitoring (CDON. Chapter: "Collision detection and bottleneck detection" Fundamentals Programming Manual. then continues on the programmed path. CDOF2) Example 2: Contour path shorter than tool radius The tool bypasses the workpiece corner on a transition circle. CUT2D is generally the standard setting and does not. have to be specified explicitly. Syntax CUT2D CUT2DF 2D tool radius compensation for contour tools is activated if either of the two machining directions G41 or G42 is programmed with CUT2D or CUT2DF.6 2D tool compensation (CUT2D. 06/2009. 2D tool radius compensation with contour tools The tool radius compensation for contour tools is used for automatic cutting-edge selection in the case of non-axially symmetrical tools that can be used for piece-by-piece machining of individual contour segments. Tool length compensation The tool length compensation generally always refers to the fixed. therefore. a contour tool will behave like a standard tool with only the first cutting edge. Significance CUT2D: CUT2DF: Activate 2 1/2 D radius compensation (default) Activate 2 1/2 D radius compensation. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . tool radius compensation relative to the current frame or to inclined planes CUT2D is used when the orientation of the tool cannot be changed and the workpiece is rotated for machining on inclined surfaces. Note If tool radius compensation is not activated. CUT2DF) 10. CUT2DF) With CUT2D or CUT2DF you define how the tool radius compensation is to act or to be interpreted when machining in inclined planes.6 Function 10.6 2D tool compensation (CUT2D. 344 Fundamentals Programming Manual. non-rotated working plane.Tool radius compensation 10. Tool offset values For machining on inclined surfaces. CUT2D As for many applications.6 2D tool compensation (CUT2D. Please contact the machine manufacturer if not all of the 12 cutting edges are available. 06/2009. Example of G17 (X/Y plane): Tool radius compensation is active in the non-rotated X/Y plane. or be calculated using the functions for "Tool length compensation for orientable tools". tool length compensation in the Z direction. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 345 . the tool compensation values have to be defined accordingly. Machine manufacturer The valid tool types for non-axially symmetrical tools and the maximum number of cutting edges (Dn = D1 to D12) are defined by the machine manufacturer via machine data.Tool radius compensation 10. tool length compensation and tool radius compensation are calculated in the fixed working plane specified with G17 to G19. Fundamentals Programming Manual. For more information on this calculation method. CUT2DF) Cutting-edge selection with contour tools Up to a maximum of 12 cutting edges can be assigned to each contour tool in any order. Further information Tool radius compensation. see chapter "Tool orientation and tool length compensation". 06/2009. The tool radius compensation is calculated in the rotated machining plane. Tool Offset (W1) 346 Fundamentals Programming Manual. The first cutting edge of a contour tool is the cutting edge that is selected when the tool is activated. D5 is activated on T3 D5. CUT2D. CUT2DF A contour tool is defined by the number of cutting edges (on the basis of D nos) associated with a T no. the compensation plane is also rotated with CUT2DF. If. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . CUT2DF In this case. The previous cutting edges will be ignored. Note The tool length compensation continues to be active relative to the non-rotated working plane. for example. References Function Manual. Basic Functions. then it is this cutting edge and the subsequent cutting edges that define the contour tool either partially or as a whole. CUT2DF) Tool radius compensation. Definition of contour tools.6 2D tool compensation (CUT2D.Tool radius compensation 10. If a frame containing a rotation is programmed. it is possible to arrange the tool orientation perpendicular to the inclined working plane on the machine. 7 Keep tool radius compensation constant (CUTCONON. CUTCONOF) 10. 3D circumferential milling). Syntax CUTCONON CUTCONOF Significance CUTCONON: CUTCONOF: Command to activate the "Keep tool radius compensation constant" function Command to deactivate the "Keep tool radius compensation constant" function Fundamentals Programming Manual.7 Keep tool radius compensation constant (CUTCONON. 3D face milling. CUTCONOF) The "Keep tool radius compensation constant" function is used to suppress tool radius compensation for a number of blocks. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 347 . It can be used independently of the type of tool radius compensation (21/2D.7 Function 10.Tool radius compensation 10. whereby a difference between the programmed and the actual tool center path traveled set up by tool radius compensation in the previous blocks is retained as the compensation. but the contours produced by the tool radius compensation (follow strategies) are not wanted. It can be an advantage to use this method when several traversing blocks are required during line milling in the reversal points. 06/2009. 7 Keep tool radius compensation constant (CUTCONON. insert bypass circle when deactivating the compensation suppression. CUTCONOF) Example Program code N10 N20 $TC_DP1[1.1] = 110 N30 $TC_DP6[1. Definition of tool d1. 06/2009. If required. No bypass circle when deactivating the TRC. Type . Radius . Activation of the compensation suppression.Tool radius compensation 10. . N40 N50 X0 Y0 Z0 G1 G17 T1 D1 F10000 N60 N70 X20 G42 NORM N80 X30 N90 Y20 N100 X10 CUTCONON N110 Y30 KONT Comment . .1]= 10. . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . N120 X-10 CUTCONOF N130 Y20 NORM N140 X0 Y0 G40 N150 M30 348 Fundamentals Programming Manual. i. the last programmed traversing block with active CUTCONON. are treated as though they had CUTCONON programmed. This implicit activation of the offset suppression is automatically canceled in the first traversing block that contains a traversing motion in the offset plane and is not such a circle. i. is compensated normally. Fundamentals Programming Manual.Tool radius compensation 10. All following blocks in which offset suppression is active are traversed without offset. and this point.e. CUTCONOF) Further information Tool radius compensation is normally active before the compensation suppression and is still active when the compensation suppression is deactivated again. Circular blocks. they are offset by the vector from the end point of the last offset block to its offset point. However. These blocks can have any type of interpolation (linear. the offset point in the block end point is approached. 06/2009. the block that contains CUTCONOF.e. Vertical circle in this sense can only occur during circumferential milling. It starts in the offset point of the starting point.7 Keep tool radius compensation constant (CUTCONON. The deactivation block of the compensation suppression. circular. In the last traversing block before CUTCONON. One linear block is inserted between the end point of the previous block. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 349 . polynomial). for which the circle plane is perpendicular to the compensation plane (vertical circles). see the following figure: 350 Fundamentals Programming Manual. see chapter "Sign evaluation wear"). Tool radius compensation with variable tool orientation at transformation Further information The original functionality has been modified as follows: ● A change from G40 to G41/G42 and vice-versa is no longer treated as a tool change. Deviations from the previous behavior occur only in relatively rare cases where the approach or retraction block does not intersect with an adjacent traversing block. ● The straight line between the tool edge center points at the block start and block end is used to calculate intersection points with the approach and retraction block.8 10. If a transformation is active (e. Therefore. superimposition takes place in the linear part block of the approach or retraction motion. Preprocessing stop on TRANSMIT 2. a preprocessing stop no longer occurs with TRANSMIT. The difference between the tool edge reference point and the tool edge center point is superimposed on this movement.Tool radius compensation 10. 06/2009. TRANSMIT). a change from G40 to G41/G42 or vice-versa is treated as a tool change. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . The geometric conditions are therefore identical for tools with and without a relevant tool point direction. see above subsection "Contour approach and retraction").g.. On approach and retraction with KONT (tool circumnavigates the contour point.8 Tools with a relevant cutting edge position In the case of tools with a relevant tool point direction (turning and grinding tools – tool types 400–599. this leads to a preprocessing stop (decoding stop) and hence possibly to deviations from the intended part contour.8 Tools with a relevant cutting edge position 10. Calculation of intersection points at approach and retraction with KONT 3. This original functionality changes with regard to: 1. Tool change with active tool radius compensation 4. With other types of interpolation. TRANSMIT). is treated as a ball end mill with the specified radius. Tools with a relevant tool point direction are therefore not permitted for 3D peripheral milling (an alarm is output). which has not been explicitly approved. the transformation from the tool edge reference point to the tool edge center point can no longer be performed by means of a simple zero offset.. Note The subject is irrelevant with respect to face milling as only defined tool types without relevant tool point direction are permitted for this operation anyway. it is not permitted to change a tool with active tool radius compensation in cases where the distance between the tool edge center point and the tool edge reference point changes.Tool radius compensation 10. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 351 . ● For tool radius compensation with variable tool orientation. A tool point direction parameter is ignored). it is now possible to change when a transformation is active (e. Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009.g.8 Tools with a relevant cutting edge position ● In circle blocks and in motion blocks containing rational polynomials with a denominator degree > 4. (A tool with a type. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Tool radius compensation 10.8 Tools with a relevant cutting edge position 352 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. . G9 . The actual position or the following error of the axes involved are not taken into account Note The tolerance limits for "Exact stop fine" and "Exact stop coarse" can be set for each axis via the machine data.Path action 11... 06/2009. all path axes and special axes involved in the traversing motion that are not traversed modally. The exact stop specifies how exactly the corner point has to be approached and when the transition is made to the next block: ● "Exact stop fine" The block change is performed as soon as the axis-specific tolerance limits for "Exact stop fine" are reached for all axes involved in the traversing motion. Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 353 .1 Exact stop (G60. Syntax G60 . ● "Exact stop coarse" The block change is performed as soon as the axis-specific tolerance limits for "Exact stop coarse" are reached for all axes involved in the traversing motion. Exact stop is used when sharp outside corners have to be machined or inside corners finished to exact dimensions.. G603) In exact stop traversing mode. are decelerated at the end of each block until they come to a standstill. ● "Interpolator end" The block change is performed as soon as the control has calculated a set velocity of zero for all axes involved in the traversing motion. G602. G9. G601. etc.1 Function 11 11. G601/G602/G603. . Command for activation of the modal exact stop Command for activation of the non-modal exact stop Command for activation of the exact stop criterion "Exact stop fine" Command for activation of the exact stop criterion "Exact stop coarse" Command for activation of the exact stop criterion "Interpolator end" Example Program code N5 G602 N10 G0 G60 Z.. N20 X. . .. 06/2009.. . Exact stop acts only in this block.Path action 11.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Comment .. N50 G1 G601 N80 G64 Z.. . G9. G602. G60 continues to act. Switchover to continuous-path mode..1 Exact stop (G60. . 354 Fundamentals Programming Manual... G603) Significance G60: G9: G601: G602: G603: Note The commands for activating the exact stop criteria (G601/G602/G603) are only effective if G60 or G9 is active. N100 G0 G9 N110 .. Z. G601. . Criterion "Exact stop fine" selected... Exact stop modal active.. Continuous-path mode active again. .. Criterion "Exact stop coarse" selected. 1 Exact stop (G60.Path action 11. G602. G603) Further information G60. G60 in the current block and in all following blocks. G601. G602 The movement is decelerated and stopped briefly at the corner point. The tighter the limits. G9 G9 generates the exact stop in the current block. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 355 . Fundamentals Programming Manual. Continuous-path-mode commands G64 or G641 . G9. 06/2009. G601.G645 are used to deactivate G60. Note Do not set the limits for the exact stop criteria any tighter than necessary. the longer it takes to position and approach the target position. G9. G601. At this point. G602.Path action 11. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Exact Stop.1 Exact stop (G60. Basic Functions. Configured exact stop criterion A channel-specific setting can be made for G0 and the other commands in the first G function group indicating that contrary to the programmed exact stop criterion a preset criterion should be used automatically (see machine manufacturer's specifications). The workpiece corners can now be rounded. the actual value lags behind by a proportionate factor depending on the dynamic response of the axes and the path velocity. G603) G603 The block change is initiated when the control has calculated a set velocity of zero for the axes involved. References Function Manual. Look Ahead (B1) 356 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. Continuouspath Mode. 06/2009.Path action 11.2 Function 11. to avoid rapid deceleration of the path axes at the blockchange point so that the axis velocity remains as constant as possible when the program moves to the next block.g. ADISPOS) 11. ADISPOS) In continuous-path mode. with rapid traverse) ● The exact contour may deviate from the programmed contour within a specific tolerance for the purpose of obtaining a continuous contour Continuous-path mode is not suitable if: ● A contour needs to be traversed precisely ● An absolutely constant velocity is required Note Continuous-path mode is interrupted by blocks which trigger a preprocessing stop implicitly.) • Auxiliary function outputs Fundamentals Programming Manual. G641. G642. G644. G645.. To achieve this objective. ADIS. G644. in fact. e..g.2 Continuous-path mode (G64. the "LookAhead" function is also activated when continuous-path mode is selected. G643. Continuouspath mode with smoothing facilitates the tangential shaping and/or smoothing of angular block transitions caused by local changes in the programmed contour. G645. Continuouspath operation: ● Rounds the contour ● Reduces machining times by eliminating braking and acceleration processes that are required to fulfill the exact-stop criterion ● Improves cutting conditions because of the more constant velocity Continuouspath mode is suitable if: ● A contour needs to be traversed as quickly as possible (e. G642.2 Continuous-path mode (G64. G643. The objective of this mode is. due to: • Access to specific machine status data ($A. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 357 . G641. the path velocity at the end of the block (for the block change) is not decelerated to a level which would permit the fulfillment of an exact stop criterion. ADIS. . etc. G642: Continuous-path mode with smoothing within the defined tolerances In this mode. G3. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 ... ADISPOS) Syntax G64.. Meaning G64: G641: ADIS=. under normal circumstances smoothing takes place within the maximum permissible path deviation. or the distance after the end of block within which the rounding block must be terminated respectively.. However. Note: Expansion to include contour and orientation tolerance is only supported on systems featuring the "Polynomial interpolation" option. G642... observation of the maximum contour deviation (contour tolerance) or the maximum angular deviation of the tool orientation (orientation tolerance) can be configured. G641..2 Continuous-path mode (G64. a value of "zero" applies and the traversing behavior therefore corresponds to G64.. G643. G2. 358 Fundamentals Programming Manual. : ADISPOS=... instead of these axis-specific tolerances. G644.. : Continuous-path mode with reduced velocity as per the overload factor Continuous-path mode with smoothing as per distance criterion Distance criterion with G641 for path functions G1. G645. Note: If ADIS/ADISPOS is not programmed. The rounding clearance is automatically reduced (by up to 36%) for short traversing distances.. G643.. G641 ADIS=… G641 ADISPOS=… G642. Distance criterion with G641 for rapid traverse G0 The distance criterion (= rounding clearance) ADIS or ADISPOS describes the maximum distance the rounding block may cover before the end of the block. G644. 06/2009.Path action 11. ADIS. G645. Rounding on the contour is therefore only practical with small ADIS values. G644 or G645 is interrupted. G642.Path action 11. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 359 . G644: Continuous-path mode with smoothing with maximum possible dynamic response Note: G644 is not available with an active kinematic transformation. 06/2009. e. RND must be used if a defined contour is to be traversed at the corner.g. The system switches internally to G642. ADIS. G645: Continuous-path mode with smoothing and tangential block transitions within the defined tolerances G645 has the same effect on corners as G642. G645. The rounding clearance can be different for each axis. G643: Fundamentals Programming Manual. ADISPOS) Continuous-path mode with smoothing within the defined tolerances (block-internal) G643 differs from G642 in that is not used to generate a separate rounding block. The type of rounding can depend on dynamic conditions. The user should not make any assumptions with respect to the appearance of the contour within the rounding area. G643. the starting or end point of the original traversing block (as appropriate for REPOS mode) will be used for subsequent repositioning (REPOS). G644.2 Continuous-path mode (G64. G642. instead. G641. rounding blocks are also only generated on tangential block transitions if the curvature of the original contour exhibits a jump in at least one axis. on the tool path velocity. axis-specific block-internal rounding movements are inserted. rather than the interruption point. NOTICE If a rounding movement initiated by G641. Note Rounding cannot be used as a substitute for smoothing (RND). G643. With G645. G645.Path action 11. Comment . ADIS. . activate spindle. Tool infeed. . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Approach starting position. Approach position exactly with exact stop fine.5 N40 Y40 N50 X60 Y70 G60 G601 N60 Y50 N70 X80 N80 Y70 N90 G641 ADIS=0. G641.2 Continuous-path mode (G64.5 X100 Y40 N100 X80 Y10 N110 X10 N120 G40 G0 X-20 N130 Z10 M30 . Radius as dimension. Program code N05DIAMOF N10 G17 T1 G41 G0 X10 Y10 Z2 S300 M3 N20 G1 Z-7 F8000 N30 G641 ADIS=0. Retract tool. ADISPOS) Example The two outside corners on the groove are to be approached exactly. . G644. G642. Otherwise machining should be performed in continuous-path mode. . . Deactivate path compensation. end of program. 06/2009. Contour transitions are smoothed. path compensation. . Contour transitions are smoothed. 360 Fundamentals Programming Manual. G643. G641.Path action 11. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 361 . G643. LookAhead deceleration is applied before corners and blocks with exact stop.2 Continuous-path mode (G64. G642. Note The extent of smoothing of the contour transitions depends on the feedrate and the overload factor. the velocity is reduced according to an acceleration limit and an overload factor. Fundamentals Programming Manual. G645. The overload factor can be set in MD32310 $MA_MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR. G644. Setting MD20490 $MC_IGNORE_OVL_FACTOR_FOR_ADIS means that block transitions will always be rounded irrespective of the set overload factor. the tool travels across tangential contour transitions with as constant a path velocity as possible (no deceleration at block boundaries). ADIS. ADISPOS) Further information Continuous-path mode G64 In continuous-path mode. Corners are also traversed at a constant velocity. 06/2009. In order to minimize the contour error. G643. However. intermediate blocks containing only comments. 362 Fundamentals Programming Manual. continuouspath mode is interrupted on the path axes. positioning window fine (as for G601). calculation blocks or subprogram calls do not affect continuous-path mode. If an NC block has to wait for positioning axes.2 Continuous-path mode (G64. G641. which "smoothes" the specific positional interrelationship between the path axes. the control limits this change in velocity to the permissible values set in MD32300 $MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL and MD32310 $MA_MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR. ADIS. G642. This enables acceleration and deceleration across multiple blocks with almost tangential transitions. 06/2009. ● Positioning axes always traverse according to the exact stop principle. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Look Ahead is particularly suitable for the machining of movement sequences comprising short traverse paths with high path feedrates. This braking operation can be avoided through the application of a rounding function. G645. The number of NC blocks included in the Look Ahead calculation can be defined in machine data. Note If FGROUP does not contain all the path axes. there is often a step change in the velocity at block transitions for those axes excluded from FGROUP. LookAhead predictive velocity control In continuous-path mode the control automatically determines the velocity control for several NC blocks in advance. G644.Path action 11. ADISPOS) The following points should be noted in order to prevent an undesired stop in path motion (relief cutting): ● Auxiliary functions enabled after the end of the movement or before the next movement interrupt continuous-path mode (exception: high-speed auxiliary functions). Path action 11.5 G1 X. BSPLINE. The rounding clearance ADIS (or ADISPOS for G0) specifies the maximum extent to which the corners can be rounded. G641 works with LookAhead predictive velocity control.. ADISPOS) Continuous-path mode with smoothing as per distance criterion (G641) With G641. Y. Fundamentals Programming Manual. This setting remains modal.5 mm before the programmed end of the block and must finish 0. Corner rounding blocks with a high degree of curvature are approached at reduced velocity.2 Continuous-path mode (G64. the control is free to ignore the path construct and replace it with a dynamically optimized distance. Note Smoothing cannot and should not replace the functions for defined smoothing (RND. G643. however.5 mm after the end of the block. 06/2009. Within this rounding clearance.. CSPLINE). G645. G642. The effect of G641 is similar to RNDM. Like G64. RNDM. Comment . The rounding block must begin no more than 0. it is not restricted to the axes of the working plane. Example: Program code N10 G641 ADIS=0. G641. the control inserts transition elements at contour transitions. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 363 .. ADIS.. G644. ASPLINE. Disadvantage: Only one ADIS value is available for all axes. the rounding clearance of each axis can be different. Note Expansion to include contour and orientation tolerance is only supported on systems featuring the "Polynomial interpolation" option. G643 is not used to generate a separate rounding block. a contour tolerance and an orientation tolerance can be applied. G641. but axis-specific block-internal rounding movements are inserted. ADISPOS) Smoothing with axial precision with G642 With G642. G643. Smoothing with contour and orientation tolerance with G642/G643 MD20480 $MC_SMOOTHING_MODE can be used to configure rounding with G642 and G643 so that instead of the axis-specific tolerances. The contour tolerance and orientation tolerance are set in the channel-specific setting data: SD42465 $SC_SMOOTH_CONTUR_TOL (maximum contour deviation) SD42466 $SC_SMOOTH_ORI_TOL (maximum angular deviation of the tool orientation) The setting data can be programmed in the NC program. 06/2009. Block-internal smoothing with G643 The maximum deviations from the precise contour in the case of smoothing with G643 are defined for each axis using machine data MD33100 $MA_COMPRESS_POS_TOL. G642. This value is taken into account when generating a rounding block.2 Continuous-path mode (G64. smoothing does not take place within a defined ADIS range. Note An orientation transformation must be active for smoothing within the orientation tolerance. G645. Very different specifications for the contour tolerance and the tolerance of the tool orientation can only take effect with G643. 364 Fundamentals Programming Manual. this means that it can be specified differently for each block transition. In the case of G643.Path action 11. The rounding clearance is determined based on the shortest rounding clearance of all axes. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . but the axial tolerances defined with MD33100 $MA_COMPRESS_POS_TOL are complied with. G644. ADIS. In the case of angular non-tangential block transitions. the smoothing behavior is the same as with G642. Smoothing of tangential block transitions with G645 With G645. ADISPOS) Corner rounding with greatest possible dynamic response in G644 Smoothing with maximum possible dynamic response is configured in the thousands place with MD20480 $MC_SMOOTHING_MODE. both the maximum acceleration and the maximum jerk of each axis is maintained. ADIS.2 Continuous-path mode (G64. the jerk is not limited. G645. Value 0 1 2 Significance Specification of maximum axial deviations with: MD33100 $MA_COMPRESS_POS_TOL Specification of maximum rounding clearance by programming: ADIS=. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Each axis traverses around a corner with the maximum possible dynamic response. G643. neither the tolerance nor the rounding distance are monitored. G642. the smoothing movement is defined so that the acceleration of all axes involved remains smooth (no jumps) and the parameterized maximum deviations from the original contour (MD33120 $MA_PATH_TRANS_POS_TOL) are not exceeded. instead. G644. Specification of the maximum possible frequencies of each axis occurring in the rounding area with: MD32440 $MA_LOOKAH_FREQUENCY The rounding area is defined such that no frequencies in excess of the specified maximum can occur while the rounding motion is in progress. G641. 06/2009. or ADISPOS=... each axis travels at the maximum possible acceleration.Path action 11. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 365 . 3 When rounding with G644. With SOFT.. With the BRISK command.. Corner rounding would increase the machining time. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . ADISPOS) No intermediate rounding blocks An intermediate rounding block is not inserted in the following cases: ● The axis stops between the two blocks. The overload factor has no effect in the case of smoothing with G643 (this behavior can also be set for G641 and G642 by setting MD20490 $MC_IGNORE_OVL_FACTOR_FOR_ADIS to TRUE). 366 Fundamentals Programming Manual. ADIS. G642. 06/2009. for oscillation. G643. – Before tapping. – The previous block traverses geometry axes and the following block does not. G641. positioning axes). the following block uses G33 as preparatory function and the previous block does not. G645. – Axes involved in the transformation are not completely assigned to the path motion (e. G644. the added intermediate block would double the machining time. – If a block transition G64 (continuous-path mode without smoothing) can be traversed without a reduction in velocity. This means that the value of the permitted overload factor (MD32310 $MA_MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR) affects whether a block transition is rounded or not. – The following block does not contain a path movement. Since each block requires at least one interpolation cycle. This occurs when: – The following block contains an auxiliary function output before the movement. – The following block traverses geometry axes and the previous block does not.2 Continuous-path mode (G64.g. ● The rounding block would slow down the part program execution. The overload factor is only taken into account for corner rounding with G641/G642.Path action 11. This occurs: – Between two very short blocks. – A change is made between BRISK and SOFT. – An axis is traversed for the first time as a path axis for the following block when it was previously a positioning axis. – An axis is traversed for the first time as a positioning axis for the following block when it was previously a path axis. Basic Functions. This allows the synchronous action to also switch. Exact Stop. an exact stop is initiated corresponding to the active programming. ● The block does not contain traversing motion (zero block).G645. – ForG642/G643. In so doing.1) If MSG is programmed without the second parameter. all axis-specific tolerances are zero. G643. the default in the machine data is used. the message is output with the next executable block. To do this. the interpreter eliminates zero blocks. LookAhead (B1). if synchronous actions are active. This occurs when: – For G641 in G0 blocks ADISPOS = 0 (default!) – For G641 in non-G0 blocks ADIS = 0 (default!) – For G641 on transition from G0 and non-G0 or non-G0 and G0 respectively. Otherwise. – Zero blocks are generated by program jumps. this zero block is included and also executed. Normally. ADIS. Continuous-path mode in rapid traverse G0 One of the specified functions G60/G9 or G64. ADISPOS) ● Rounding is not parameterized.Path action 11. or G641 . This occurs when: – Synchronized actions are active. Fundamentals Programming Manual. G644. G645. 06/2009. a message from the part program can also be output as executable block. G641. Continuous-Path Mode. Message as executable block During continuous-path mode. G642. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 367 . However.2 Continuous-path mode (G64. the MSG command must be programmed with the second call parameter and the parameter value "1": MSG("Text". References For further information about continuous-path mode see: Function Manual. the smaller value from ADISPOS and ADIS applies. also has to be specified for rapid traverse motion. ADIS. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . ADISPOS) 368 Fundamentals Programming Manual.Path action 11. 06/2009. G645. G642. G644. G641.2 Continuous-path mode (G64. G643. Settable frames Settable frames are the configurable work offsets which can be called from within any NC program with the G54 to G57 and G505 to G599 commands.1 Frames The frame is a self-contained arithmetic rule that transforms one Cartesian coordinate system into another Cartesian coordinate system. The offset values are predefined by the user and stored in the zero offset memory on the control. They are used to define the settable zero system (SZS). G500. See: ● Settable zero system (SZS) (Page 34) ● Settable work offset (G54 to G57. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 369 .1 Frame 12 12. G53. G505 to G599. G153) (Page 173) Fundamentals Programming Manual. SUPA. 06/2009. Basic frame (basic offset) The basic frame describes coordinate transformation from the basic coordinate system (BCS) to the basic zero system (BZS) and has the same effect as settable frames. See Basic coordinate system (BCS) (Page 31).Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. 370 Fundamentals Programming Manual. to rotate it. if required. 06/2009. This can be achieved using programmable frames. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .1 Frames Programmable frames Sometimes it is useful or necessary to move the originally selected workpiece coordinate system (or the "settable zero system") to another position within an NC program and.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. mirror it and/or scale it. See Frame instructions (Page 371). G505 to G599). They function as either additive or substitute elements: ● Substitute operation Deletes all previously programmed frame operations. ● Additive operation Appended to existing frames. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 371 . The reference is provided by the currently set workpiece zero or the last workpiece zero programmed with a frame operation.2 Function 12. 06/2009. Fundamentals Programming Manual.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.2 Frame instructions The operations for programmable frames apply in the current NC program.2 Frame instructions 12. The reference is provided by the last settable work offset called (G54 to G57. 06/2009. Advantages In one setting: ● Inclined surfaces can be machined ● Drill holes with various angles can be produced ● Multi-face machining can be performed Note Depending on the machine kinematics.2 Frame instructions Applications ● Offset the zero point to any position on the workpiece.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. ● Align the coordinate axes by rotating parallel to the desired working plane. the conventions for working plane and tool offsets must be taken into account for the machining in inclined working planes 372 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . . Y.2 Frame instructions Syntax Substitute operations: TRANS X… Y… Z… ROT X… Y… Z… ROT RPL=… ROTS/CROTS X. Y.. ASCALE X… Y… Z… AMIRROR X0/Y0/Z0 Significance Fundamentals Programming Manual. Additive operations: ATRANS X… Y… Z… AROT X… Y… Z… AROT RPL=… AROTS X.. SCALE X… Y… Z… MIRROR X0/Y0/Z0 Note Each frame operation is programmed in a separate NC block..Coordinate transformations (frames) 12... 06/2009... 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 373 . X'' With Euler angle: Range of values: Z. X'.. Z'' The angles of rotation are only defined unambiguously in the following ranges: With RPY notation: With Euler angle: -180 -90 -180 0 -180 -180 ≤ < ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ x y z x y z ≤ < ≤ < ≤ ≤ 180 90 180 180 180 180 374 Fundamentals Programming Manual.2 Frame instructions Workpiece coordinate system offset in the direction of the specified geometry axis or axes Workpiece coordinate system rotation: • By linking individual rotations around the specified geometry axis or axes or • Around the angle RPL=.. Y'. 06/2009. in the current working plane (G17/G18/G19) Direction of rotation: TRANS/ATRANS: ROT/AROT: Rotation sequence: With RPY notation: Z.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . . X. 06/2009.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12... 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 375 . Z. up to 2 solid angles may be programmed: ROTS/AROTS X... The basic functions defined in the main program are not lost after the end of the subroutine if the subroutine has been programmed with the SAVE attribute. CROTS works in the same way as ROTS but refers to the valid frame in the database.2 Frame instructions Workpiece coordinate system rotation by means of the specification of solid angles The orientation of a plane in space is defined unambiguously by specifying two solid angles. / Z. Scaling in the direction of the specified geometry axis or axes to increase/reduce the size of a contour Workpiece coordinate system mirroring by means of mirroring (direction change) the specified geometry axis Value: Note Frame operations can be used individually or combined at will... freely selectable (in this case "0") ROTS/AROTS: CROTS: SCALE/ASCALE: MIRROR/AMIRROR: Fundamentals Programming Manual. Y... CAUTION Frame operations are executed in the programmed sequence.. Note Additive statements are frequently used in subroutines.. Therefore.. / Y. ATRANS) TRANS/ATRANS can be used to program work offsets for all path and positioning axes in the direction of the axis specified in each case.1 Function 12.3 Programmable zero offset Zero offset (TRANS. during repetitive machining operations at different workpiece positions.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. Milling: Z ZM Turning: YM Y TRANS G5 X 4 XM Syntax TRANS X… Y… Z… ATRANS X… Y… Z… Note Each frame operation is programmed in a separate NC block.3. e.3 Programmable zero offset 12. 06/2009.3 12.g. This means that it is possible to work with changing zero points. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 376 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Program code N10 G1 G54 N20 G0 X0 Y0 Z2 N30 TRANS X10 Y10 N40 L10 N50 TRANS X50 Y10 N60 L10 N70 M30 Comment . G505 to G599... 06/2009. Work offset is used to set the workpiece zeros required in each case and then call the subprogram. the illustrated shapes recur several times in the same program. but with additive work offset Offset values in the direction of the specified geometry axes Examples Example 1: Milling With this workpiece.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.. Working plane X/Y. Subroutine call ..3 Programmable zero offset Significance TRANS: ATRANS: X. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 377 . End of program Fundamentals Programming Manual. Approach starting point . Absolute offset .. Subroutine call . workpiece zero . with reference to the currently valid workpiece zero set with G54 to G57. As TRANS. Y.. : Absolute work offset. Z. Absolute offset . The machining sequence for this shape is stored in a subroutine. . ... N10 TRANS X0 Z150 N15 L20 N20 TRANS X0 Z140 (or ATRANS Z-10) N25 L20 N30 TRANS X0 Z130 (or ATRANS Z-10) N35 L20 N. Absolute offset . Absolute offset .3 Programmable zero offset Example 2: Turning Program code N. 06/2009. Subroutine call 378 Fundamentals Programming Manual. . Subroutine call .. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .. Comment .. Subroutine call .Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. Absolute offset . . Z. Y. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 379 .3 Programmable zero offset Further information TRANS X. The reference is provided by the last settable work offset called (G54 to G57. Translation through the offset values programmed in the specified axis directions (path.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. NOTICE The TRANS command resets all frame components of the previously activated programmable frame. G505 to G599)... 06/2009. synchronized axes and positioning axes).... Fundamentals Programming Manual. Note ATRANS can be used to program an offset to be added to existing frames. 3 Programmable zero offset ATRANS X..Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.. The currently set or last programmed zero point is used as the reference. 380 Fundamentals Programming Manual.. 06/2009.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .. Y. Translation through the offset values programmed in the specified axis directions.. Z. 3.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. G59) The G58 and G59 functions can be used to substitute translation components of the programmable work offset with specific axes: ● G58 is used for the absolute translation component (coarse offset). Fundamentals Programming Manual. Syntax G58 X… Y… Z… A… G59 X… Y… Z… A… Note Each of the substitute operations G58 and G59 has to be programmed in a separate NC block. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 381 . ● G59 is used for the additive translation component (fine offset).3 Programmable zero offset 12.2 Function Axial zero offset (G58. Conditions The G58 and G59 functions can only be used if fine offset has been configured (MD24000 $MC_FRAME_ADD_COMPONENTS = 1). . Additive translation component X5 Y5 ⇒ Total offset: X15 Y15 Z10 . Additive translation component X10 Y10 + absolute translation component X20 Y10 ⇒ Total offset X30 Y20 Z10 . but the programmed absolute offset remains valid Offset values in the direction of the specified geometry axes G59: X… Y… Z…: Example Program code . but the programmed additive offset remains valid The reference is provided by the last settable work offset called (G54 to G57.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . G505 to G599).3 Programmable zero offset Significance G58: G58 replaces the absolute translation component of the programmable work offset for the specified axis. 06/2009. Absolute translation component X10 Y10 Z10 .Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. N50 TRANS X10 Y10 Z10 N60 ATRANS X5 Y5 N70 G58 X20 . Absolute translation component X20 + additive translation component X5 Y5 ⇒ Total offset X25 Y15 Z10 N80 G59 X10 Y10 .. G59 replaces the additive translation component of the programmable work offset for the specified axis. Comment 382 Fundamentals Programming Manual.. FI]=10 CTRANS(X.10) Coarse or absolute offset 10 10 10 unchanged unchanged unchanged 10 0 0 Fine or additive offset unchanged unchanged unchanged Fine (old) + 10 10 10 0 0 10 Comment Absolute offset for X Overwrites absolute offset for X Progr.10) CTRANS() CFINE(X.FI] The table below describes the effect of various program commands on the absolute and additive offsets.TR]=10 ATRANS X10 G59 X10 $P_PFRAME[X. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 383 .TR] The additive translation component is modified by the following commands: ● ATRANS ● G59 ● CTRANS ● CFINE ● $P_PFRAME[X. 06/2009. offset in X Additive offset for X Overwriting additive offset for X Progr. fine offset in X Offset for X Deselection of offset (including fine offset component) Fine offset in X Fundamentals Programming Manual.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.3 Programmable zero offset Further information The absolute translation component is modified by the following commands: ● TRANS ● G58 ● CTRANS ● CFINE ● $P_PFRAME[X. Command TRANS X10 G58 X10 $P_PFRAME[X. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. Y. RPL) ROT/AROT can be used to rotate the workpiece coordinate system around each of the three geometry axes X. 06/2009.4 Function 12. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . AROT. Syntax ROT X… Y… Z… ROT RPL=… AROT X… Y… Z… AROT RPL=… Note Each frame operation is programmed in a separate NC block. 384 Fundamentals Programming Manual.4 Programmable rotation (ROT. RPL) 12. AROT. Z or through an angle RPL in the selected working plane G17 to G19 (or around the perpendicular infeed axis). This allows inclined surfaces or multiple workpiece faces to be machined in one setting.4 Programmable rotation (ROT. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. Z. Y.. with reference to the currently valid workpiece zero set with G54 to G57. G505 to G599.. AROT: X. Y. X.. Rotation in the plane: Angle through which the coordinate system is rotated (plane set with G17 to G19) The sequence in which the rotation is to be performed can be specified via the machine data. 06/2009. RPL) Significance ROT: RPL: Absolute rotation. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 385 . Yaw) with Z.4 Programmable rotation (ROT... : Additive rotation in relation to the currently valid set or programmed zero point Rotation in space: Geometry axes around which the rotation is performed Fundamentals Programming Manual. Pitch.. The default setting is RPY notation (= Roll. AROT. Subroutine call . Additive rotation through 60° .4 Programmable rotation (ROT. Absolute offset (resets all previous offsets) . Program code N10 G17 G54 N20 TRANS X20 Y10 N30 L10 N40 TRANS X55 Y35 N50 AROT RPL=45 N60 L10 N70 TRANS X20 Y40 N80 AROT RPL=60 N90 L10 N100 G0 X100 Y100 N110 M30 Comment . 06/2009. as the shapes are not arranged paraxially. Subroutine call .Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. In addition to the zero offset. Working plane X/Y. Absolute offset . Rotation of the coordinate system through 45° . workpiece zero . Absolute offset . Subroutine call . End of program 386 Fundamentals Programming Manual. the shapes shown recur in a program. Retraction . rotations have to be performed. AROT. RPL) Examples Example 1: Rotation in the plane With this workpiece. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Condition: The tool must be aligned perpendicular to the inclined surface in the rotated Z direction. Retraction. Working plane X/Y.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. Rotation around the Y axis . Absolute offset . Program code N10 G17 G54 N20 TRANS X10 Y10 N30 L10 N40 ATRANS X35 N50 AROT Y30 N60 ATRANS X5 N70 L10 N80 G0 X300 Y100 M30 Comment . Additive offset . RPL) Example 2: Spatial rotation In this example. 06/2009. paraxial and inclined workpiece surfaces are to be machined in a clamping. workpiece zero . Additive offset . Subroutine call . AROT. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 387 . end of program Fundamentals Programming Manual. Subroutine call .4 Programmable rotation (ROT. Working plane X/Y. Absolute offset 388 Fundamentals Programming Manual. In the new coordinate system on the right-hand workpiece surface. the conditions required for the subroutine execution still apply: working plane G17. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . infeed direction Z. workpiece zero .Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. Therefore. coordinate plane X/Y. infeed direction. AROT. identical shapes are machined in two workpiece surfaces perpendicular to one another via subroutines. RPL) Example 3: Multi-face machining In this example. Subroutine call . working plane and the zero point have been set up as on the top surface. Program code N10 G17 G54 N20 L10 N30 TRANS X100 Z-100 Comment .4 Programmable rotation (ROT. 06/2009. end of program Fundamentals Programming Manual. Rotation of the coordinate system around Z Y X Y AROT Z90 Z Z X N60 L10 N70 G0 X300 Y100 M30 . Subroutine call . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 389 . 06/2009. RPL) Program code N40 AROT Y90 Comment . AROT. Retraction. Rotation of the coordinate system around Y Z Y Y AROT Y90 X Z X N50 AROT Z90 .4 Programmable rotation (ROT.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. therefore.4 Programmable rotation (ROT.. It is. Plane change WARNING If you program a change of plane (G17 to G19) after a rotation. or additive operation AROT RPL=. RPL) Further information Rotation in the plane The coordinate system is rotated: ● in the plane selected with G17 to G19. 390 Fundamentals Programming Manual.. AROT. ● in the current plane around the angle of rotation programmed with RPL=.... Substitute operation ROT RPL=. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .. Note See "Rotation in space" for more information..Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. 06/2009. advisable to deactivate rotation before a change of plane. the angles of rotation programmed for the relevant axes are retained and continue to apply in the new working plane. . Z..Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. Y. 06/2009.4 Programmable rotation (ROT. NOTICE The ROT command resets all frame components of the previously activated programmable frame.. AROT. The center of rotation is provided by the last settable work offset specified (G54 to G57. RPL) Deactivate rotation For all axes: ROT (without axis parameter) CAUTION All frame components of the previously programmed frame are reset. G505 to G599).. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 391 . ROT X. Note AROT can be used to program a new rotation to be added to existing frames.. The coordinate system is rotated through the programmed angle around the specified axes.. Fundamentals Programming Manual. AROT..Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.. The center of rotation is the currently set or last programmed zero point.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . please bear in mind the sequence and direction in which the rotations are being executed! Direction of rotation The following is defined as the positive direction of rotation: The view in the direction of the positive coordinate axis and clockwise rotation.. 06/2009. 392 Fundamentals Programming Manual.4 Programmable rotation (ROT. RPL) AROT X. Y. Note In the case of both operations. Rotation through the angle values programmed in the axis direction parameters... Z. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Rotation around the 3rd geometry axis (Z) 2. X'' or ● Euler angles: Z. Z'' RPY notation (the default setting) results in the following sequence: 1. The sequence in which the rotations are to be executed is defined using machine data (MD10600 $MN_FRAME_ANGLE_INPUT_MODE): ● RPY notation: Z. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 393 . X'. RPL) Order of rotation Up to 3 geometry axes can be rotated simultaneously in one NC block. AROT. Rotation around the 1st geometry axis (X) Z Y 0 1 2 X This order applies if the geometry axes are programmed in a single block. Y'. 06/2009. Rotation around the 2nd geometry axis (Y) 3. It also applies irrespective of the input sequence. the parameter for the 3rd axis (value zero) can be omitted.4 Programmable rotation (ROT.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. If only two axes are to be rotated. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Y. 160) When frame rotation components are read and written. Y. Z.4 Programmable rotation (ROT. AROT. 0. RPL) Value range with RPY angle The angles are defined uniquely only within the following value ranges: Rotation around 1st geometry axis: -180° ≤ X ≤ +180° Rotation around 2nd geometry axis: -90° ≤ Y ≤ +90° Rotation around 3rd geometry axis: -180° ≤ Z ≤ +180° All possible rotations can be represented with this value range. Value range with Euler angle The angles are defined uniquely only within the following value ranges: Rotation around 1st geometry axis: 0° ≤ X ≤ +180° Rotation around 2nd geometry axis: -180° ≤ Y ≤ +180° Rotation around 3rd geometry axis: -180° ≤ Z ≤ +180° All possible rotations can be represented with this value range. This value range applies to all frame variables. -200) returns on reading back $P_UIFR[1] = CROT(X. 06/2009.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. 40) returns on reading back: $P_UIFR[1] = CROT(X. 10. Y. or repeat write operations. 0. Z. 190. the value range limits must be observed to ensure that the same results are obtained for read or write. 0. Y. -170. Values outside the range are normalized by the control into the above range. 90. it is absolutely essential to observe the defined value ranges. CAUTION To ensure the angles written are read back unambiguously. Examples of reading back in RPY $P_UIFR[1] = CROT(X. This value range applies to all frame variables. Z. 394 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Values outside the range are normalized by the control into the above range during writing and reading. 90. Z. 30) $P_UIFR[1] = CROT(X. AROT. the workpiece coordinate system is positioned on the top surface of the workpiece. Translation and rotation is used to move the coordinate system to one of the side faces. G18 or G19 rotates with the spatial rotation. Fundamentals Programming Manual. The working plane also rotates The working plane defined with G17.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. This feature can be used to program plane destination positions in X/Y coordinates and the infeed in the Z direction. program the desired rotation successively for each axis with AROT.4 Programmable rotation (ROT. The positive direction of the infeed axis points in the direction of the toolholder. Example: Working plane G17 X/Y. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 395 . Working plane G17 also rotates. Condition: The tool must be positioned perpendicular to the working plane. Specifying CUT2DF activates the tool radius compensation in the rotated plane. RPL) Note If you want to define the order of the rotations individually. ... ROTS Y. CROTS X.5 Programmable frame rotations with solid angles (ROTS.. X... the new Z axis lies in the old Y/Z plane.. AROTS X... The ROTS. X.. up to 2 solid angles may be programmed: ● When programming the solid angles X and Y. 396 Fundamentals Programming Manual... Z.. Z.... Z. AROTS. Y.. Note Each frame operation is programmed in a separate NC block.5 Function 12.. Therefore. ● When programming the solid angles Z and X. Y..Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . ● When programming the solid angles Y and Z. CROTS Z..... Y. CROTS) Orientations in space can be defined by programming frame rotations with solid angles. Syntax The orientation of a plane in space is defined unambiguously by specifying two solid angles.... AROTS.. ROTS Z.. CROTS Y... AROTS and CROTS commands are available for this purpose. 06/2009. the new Y axis lies in the old X/Y plane... CROTS) 12. AROTS Z. X...5 Programmable frame rotations with solid angles (ROTS... ROTS X. AROTS Y. the new X axis lies in the old Z/X plane. ROTS and AROTS behave in the same way asROT and AROT. 06/2009. CROTS) Significance ROTS: Absolute frame rotations with solid angles. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 397 . AROTS.. Fundamentals Programming Manual. with reference to the currently valid workpiece zero set with G54 to G57. with reference to the valid frame in the database with rotations in the specified axes Specification of solid angles AROTS: CROTS: X… Y… / Z… X… / Y… Z… : Note ROTS/AROTS/CROTS can also be programmed together with RPL to generate a rotation in the plane set with G17 to G19: ROTS/AROTS/CROTS RPL=..Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.5 Programmable frame rotations with solid angles (ROTS. G505 to G599. Additive frame rotations with solid angles with reference to the currently valid set or programmed zero point Frame rotations with solid angles. Scale up/down additive in relation to the currently valid set or programmed coordinate system Scale factors in the direction of the specified geometry axes 398 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. Syntax SCALE X… Y… Z… ASCALE X… Y… Z… Note Each frame operation is programmed in a separate NC block.6 Function 12. and positioning axes in the direction of the axes specified in each case.6 Programmable scale factor (SCALE. G505 to G599. ASCALE) 12. synchronized. Significance SCALE: ASCALE: X… Y… Z…: Scale up/down absolute in relation to the currently valid coordinate system set with G54 to G57. This makes it possible. ASCALE) SCALE/ASCALE can be used to program up or down scale factors for all path.6 Programmable scale factor (SCALE. therefore. to take geometrically similar shapes or different shrinkage allowances into account in the programming. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Absolute offset . 06/2009. Scaling factor for the small pocket .7 Y0. Machine small pocket . Retraction. but with different sizes and rotated in relation to one another. the contour is scaled down with scaling and the subprogram is then called again.7 N70 L10 N80G0 X300 Y100 M30 Comment . Program code N10 G17 G54 N20 TRANS X15 Y15 N30 L10 N40 TRANS X40 Y20 N50 AROT RPL=35 N60 ASCALE X0. Working plane X/Y. workpiece zero . ASCALE) Example The pocket occurs twice on this workpiece. Rotation in the plane through 35° .6 Programmable scale factor (SCALE. Absolute offset .Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. Machine large pocket . The machining sequence is stored in the subroutine. The required workpiece zeroes are set with work offset and rotation. end of program Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 399 . by which the shape is to be reduced or enlarged.. You can specify an individual scale factor for each axis.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 06/2009..6 Programmable scale factor (SCALE.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. Z... G505 to G599. 400 Fundamentals Programming Manual. CAUTION The SCALE command resets all frame components of the previously activated programmable frame.. The scale refers to the workpiece coordinate system set with G54 to G57. Y. ASCALE) Further information SCALE X. .6 Programmable scale factor (SCALE. the last valid scale factor is multiplied by the new one. AS CA LE AROT TRANS Scaling and offset Note If an offset is programmed with ATRANS after SCALE.... The currently set or last programmed coordinate system is used as the reference for the scale change. The ASCALE command is used to program scale changes to be added to existing frames. Fundamentals Programming Manual..Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. In this case. ASCALE) ASCALE X.. Y. the offset values will also be scaled. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 401 . 06/2009. Z. Note However. for example. 06/2009. 402 Fundamentals Programming Manual.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. ASCALE) Different scale factors CAUTION Please take great care when using different scale factors! Circular interpolations can. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .6 Programmable scale factor (SCALE. only be scaled using identical factors. different scale factors can be used specifically to program distorted circles. Note Each frame operation is programmed in a separate NC block.. G505 to G599. Y. Syntax MIRROR X. Fundamentals Programming Manual... Z.. The value specified here can be chosen freely... All traversing movements programmed after the mirror call (e.. in the subprogram) are executed with mirroring.g.7 Function 12.. Z.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 403 . Additive mirror image with reference to the currently valid set or programmed coordinate system Geometry axis whose direction is to be changed.. Significance MIRROR: AMIRROR: X..7 Programmable mirroring (MIRROR.. Y. 06/2009... : Mirror absolute in relation to the currently valid coordinate system set with G54 to G57. Y.7 Programmable mirroring (MIRROR. AMIRROR X..g. AMIRROR) MIRROR/AMIRROR can be used to mirror workpiece shapes on coordinate axes.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. AMIRROR) 12.. Z. X0 Y0 Z0... e. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. MIRROR resets previous frames.7 Programmable mirroring (MIRROR. Program code N10 G17 G54 N20 L10 N30 MIRROR X0 N40 L10 N50 AMIRROR Y0 N60 L10 N70 MIRROR Y0 N80 L10 N90 MIRROR N100 G0 X300 Y100 M30 Comment . Working plane X/Y. Retraction. Machine fourth contour at bottom right . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Mirror X axis (the direction is changed in X) . The 3 other contours are generated using mirroring. AMIRROR) Examples Example 1: Milling The contour shown here is programmed once as a subprogram. The workpiece zero is located at the center of the contours. Machine third contour at bottom left . Machine first contour at top right . 06/2009. end of program 404 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Mirror Y axis (the direction is changed in Y) . Machine second contour at top left . Mirror Y axis (the direction is changed in Y) . Deactivate mirroring . workpiece zero . Zero offset to W1 .. AMIRROR) Example 2: Turning The actual machining is stored as a subprogram and execution at the respective spindle is implemented by means of mirroring and offsets.. Machining of the first side with spindle 1 . Mirroring of the Z axis .7 Programmable mirroring (MIRROR. Program code N10 TRANS X0 Z140 . Zero offset to spindle 2 .. Comment . Zero offset to W . Machining of the second side with spindle 2 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 405 . N30 TRANS X0 Z600 N40 AMIRROR Z0 N50 ATRANS Z120 . 06/2009.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.. AMIRROR) Further information MIRROR X. Z...Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. The contour is then mirrored on the opposite side of the mirror axis Y. G505 to G599.. Y. Example: Working plane G17 X/Y The mirror (on the Y axis) requires a direction change in X and. 06/2009. CAUTION The MIRROR command resets all frame components of the previously activated programmable frame.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .. is programmed with MIRROR X0.. 406 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Mirroring is implemented in relation to the currently valid coordinate system set with G54 to G57.7 Programmable mirroring (MIRROR. accordingly. The mirror is programmed by means of an axial change of direction in the selected working plane. . The currently set or last programmed coordinate system is used as the reference. Deactivate mirroring For all axes: MIRROR (without axis parameter) All frame components of the previously programmed frame are reset. Fundamentals Programming Manual. AMIRROR) AMIRROR X... Y.7 Programmable mirroring (MIRROR. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 407 . 06/2009. A mirror image...Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. is programmed with AMIRROR.. Z. which is to be added to an existing transformation. you may have to work with reversed directions of rotation (positive/negative or negative/positive). 408 Fundamentals Programming Manual. where appropriate. The same applies to the direction of circle rotation (G2/G3 or G3/G2). This also applies to settable zero offsets. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.7 Programmable mirroring (MIRROR. AMIRROR) Tool radius compensation Note The mirror command causes the control to automatically change the path compensation commands (G41/G42 or G42/G41) according to the new machining direction. Mirrors on the geometry axes are converted automatically by the control into rotations and. mirrors on the mirror axis specified in the machine data. 06/2009. Note If you program an additive rotation with AROT after MIRROR. The reference axis is the X axis. • For a programmed axis value = 0 mirroring is deactivated. The reference axis is the Y axis. Programmed axis values are evaluated: • For programmed axis values ≠ 0 the axis is mirrored if it has not yet been mirrored. AMIRROR) Mirror axis The axis to be mirrored can be set in machine data: MD10610 $MN_MIRROR_REF_AX = <value> Value 0 1 2 3 Significance Mirroring is performed around the programmed axis (negation of values). 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 409 .Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. Fundamentals Programming Manual.7 Programmable mirroring (MIRROR. Interpreting the programmed values Machine data is used to specify how the programmed values are to be interpreted: MD10612 $MN_MIRROR_TOGGLE = <value> Value 0 1 Significance Programmed axis values are not evaluated. 06/2009. The reference axis is the Z axis. All other components remain unchanged. PAROT) TOFRAME generates a rectangular frame whose Z axis coincides with the current tool orientation.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. TOFRAME and TOROT are designed for milling operations in which G17 (working plane X/Y) is typically active.8 Function 12. PAROT aligns the workpiece coordinate system on the workpiece. however. frames are needed where the X or Y axis matches the orientation of the tool. These frames are programmed with the TOFRAMEX/TOROTX or TOFRAMEY/TOROTY commands.8 Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME. In the case of turning operations or generally when G18 or G19 is active. This means that the user can retract the tool in the Z direction without risk of collision (e. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . The resulting frame describing the orientation is written in the system variable for the programmable frame ($P_PFRAME). The position of the X and Y axes is determined by the setting in machine data MD21110 $MC_X_AXES_IN_OLD_X_Z_PLANE (coordinate system with automatic frame definition). 410 Fundamentals Programming Manual.8 Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME. TOROT. TOROT. 06/2009.g. TOROT only overwrites the rotation component in the programmed frame. PAROT) 12. after a tool break in a 5-axis program). The new coordinate system is either left as generated from the machine kinematics or is turned around the new Z axis additionally so that the new X axis lies in the old Z/X plane (see machine manufacturer's specifications). .8 Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME... PAROT) Syntax TOFRAME/TOFRAMEZ/TOFRAMEY/TOFRAMEX .. 06/2009.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. TOROT. TOROTZ: TOROTY: TOROTX: TOROTOF: As TOROT Align the Y axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame Align the X axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame Deactivate orientation parallel to tool orientation Fundamentals Programming Manual. PAROTOF Significance TOFRAME: TOFRAMEZ: TOFRAMEY: TOFRAMEX: TOROT: Align the Z axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame As TOFRAME Align the Y axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame Align the X axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame Align the Z axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame The rotation defined with TOROT is the same as that defined with TOFRAME. TOROTOF TOROT/TOROTZ/TOROTY/TOROTX .. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 411 .. TOROTOF PAROT . TOFRAME is included in the calculation. all programmed geometry axis movements refer to the new coordinate system. Language command PAROT is not rejected if no toolholder with orientation capability is active.8 Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME. PAROT) Rotate frame to align workpiece coordinate system on workpiece Translations. This defines a frame which changes the position of the workpiece coordinate system in such a way that no compensatory movement is performed on the machine. PAROT: Note The TOROT command ensures consistent programming with active orientable toolholders for each kinematic type. Comment N160 X50 . TOROT. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Just as in the situation for rotatable toolholders. PAROTOF: The workpiece-specific frame rotation activated with PAROT is deactivated with PAROTOF. 412 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Example Program code N100 G0 G53 X100 Z100 D0 N120 TOFRAME N140 G91 Z20 . PAROT can be used to activate a rotation of the work table. scaling and mirroring in the active frame remain valid. 06/2009..Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.. Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. TOROTY commands is programmed instead of TOFRAME/TOFRAMEZ or TOROT/TOROTZ. PAROT) Further information Assigning axis direction If one of the TOFRAMEX.8 Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME. For this purpose. 06/2009. The programmable frame remains unchanged. see: ● Programming Manual. Differences occur when the programmable frame is processed further elsewhere. Basic Functions. Tool Offset (W1). 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 413 . the axis direction commands listed in this table will apply: Command TOFRAME/TOFRAMEZ / TOROT/TOROTZ TOFRAMEY/TOROTY TOFRAMEX/TOROTX Tool direction (applicate) Z Y X Secondary axis (abscissa) X Z Y Secondary axis (ordinate) Y X Z Separate system frame for TOFRAME or TOROT The frames resulting from TOFRAME or TOROT can be written in a separate system frame $P_TOOLFRAME. TOFRAMEY. TOROTX. bit 3 must be enabled in machine data MD28082 $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK. References For further information about machines with orientable toolholder. Chapter: "Toolholder with orientation capability" Fundamentals Programming Manual. Chapter: "Tool orientation" ● Function Manual. Job Planning. TOROT. TRANS/ROT/SCALE/MIRROR without an axis parameter will delete the programmable frames. 06/2009.9 Function 12.9 Deselect frame (G53. G153. SUPA. G505 to G599) if G500 does not contain a value. Syntax Non-modal suppression: G53/G153/SUPA Modal deactivation: G500 Delete: TRANS/ROT/SCALE/MIRROR Meaning G53: G153: Non-modal suppression of all programmable and settable frames G153 has the same effect as G53 and also suppresses the entire basic frame ($P_ACTBFRAME). G500) 12.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. various frame components have to be defined and suppressed at different times. SUPA. SUPA: G500: TRANS/ROT/SCALE/MIRROR: 414 Fundamentals Programming Manual. such as approaching the tool change point. G500) When executing certain processes. SUPA has the same effect as G153 and also suppresses: • Handwheel offsets (DRF) • Overlaid movements • External work offset • PRESET offset Modal deactivation of all settable frames (G54 to G57.9 Deselect frame (G53. Programmable frames can be suppressed or deleted non-modally. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . G153. Settable frames can either be deactivated modally or suppressed non-modally. the value of system variable $AA_IW[<axis>] (current workpiece coordinate system setpoint of an axis) does change. not via synchronized actions. Deselection triggers a preprocessing stop and the position component of the deselected overlaid movement (DRF offset or position offset) is written to the position in the basic coordinate system (in other words. The value of system variable $AA_IM[<axis>] (current machine coordinate system setpoint of an axis) does not change.10 Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF.10 Function 12.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. CORROF) 12. 06/2009. Syntax DRFOF CORROF(<axis>. geometry or machine axis identifier) "<character == "DRF": DRF offset of axis is deselected string>": == "AA_OFF": $AA_OFF position offset of axis is deselected Note CORROF is only possible from the part program. CORROF) The additive work offsets set by means of handwheel traversal (DRF offsets) and the position offsets programmed using system variable $AA_OFF[<axis>] can be deselected using the part program commands DRFOF and CORROF. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 415 . Fundamentals Programming Manual.<axis>.10 Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF. because it now contains the deselected component from the overlaid movement."<character string>"[. no axes are traversed)."<character string>"]) Significance DRFOF: Command for the deactivation (deselection) of DRF handwheel offsets for all active axes in the channel Active: CORROF: modal Command for the deactivation (deselection) of the DRF offset/position offset ($AA_OFF) for individual axes Effective: modal <axis>: Axis identifier (channel. . Example 2: Axial deselection of a DRF offset (2) A DRF offset is generated in the X and Y axes by DRF handwheel traversal. N80 CORROF(X. . the DRF offset of the Y axis is retained (in the case of DRFOF both offsets would have been deselected). Program code N10 CORROF(X. … Comment . CORROF) Examples Example 1: Axial deselection of a DRF offset (1) A DRF offset is generated in the X axis by DRF handwheel traversal. Only the DRF offset of the X axis is deselected. CORROF has the same effect as DRFOF here. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Example 3: Axial deselection of a $AA_OFF position offset Program code N10 WHEN TRUE DO $AA_OFF[X]=10 G4 F5 . 06/2009.. Program code N10 CORROF(X.."DRF") Comment ..10 Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF."AA_OFF") . The position offset of the X axis is deselected with: $AA_OFF[X]=0 The X axis is not traversed. A position offset == 10 is interpolated for the X axis. 416 Fundamentals Programming Manual. No DRF offsets are operative for any other axes in the channel.. Comment .."DRF") . No DRF offsets are operative for any other axes in the channel. The position offset is added to the current position of the X axis.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12. 10 Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF. 06/2009. Program code N10 WHEN TRUE DO $AA_OFF[X]=10 G4 F5 ."AA_OFF") . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 417 . Only the DRF offset and the position offset of the X axis are deselected.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.. No DRF offsets are operative for any other axes in the channel.X. Example 5: Axial deselection of a DRF offset and a $AA_OFF position offset (2) A DRF offset is generated in the X and Y axes by DRF handwheel traversal. No DRF offsets are operative for any other axes in the channel. N70 CORROF(X."DRF".... A position offset == 10 is interpolated for the X axis. Program code N10 WHEN TRUE DO $AA_OFF[X]=10 G4 F5 .. .. Fundamentals Programming Manual.. Comment . the DRF offset of the X axis is retained.X.. N70 CORROF(Y. The DRF offset of the Y axis and the position offset of the X axis are deselected."AA_OFF") ."DRF". . CORROF) Example 4: Axial deselection of a DRF offset and a $AA_OFF position offset (1) A DRF offset is generated in the X axis by DRF handwheel traversal. Comment . the DRF offset of the Y axis is retained. A position offset == 10 is interpolated for the X axis. 418 Fundamentals Programming Manual. system variable $AA_OFF_VAL (integrated distance of axis override) for the corresponding axis will equal zero. CORROF) Further information $AA_OFF_VAL Once the position offset has been deselected by means of $AA_OFF. if $AA_OFF changes. e. However. it will be pulled into the channel when the axis changes (condition: MD30552 $MA_AUTO_GET_TYPE > 0) and then the position offset and/or the DRF offset will be deselected. and alarm 21660 will be signaled. Automatic channel axis exchange If an axis for which CORROF has been programmed is active in another channel. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . in the block after CORROF. then $AA_OFF will be deselected and not reset."AA_OFF") part program command. the position offset will be interpolated as an overlaid movement if this function has been enabled via machine data MD 36750 $MA_AA_OFF_MODE. 06/2009.g.Coordinate transformations (frames) 12.10 Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF. $AA_OFF will remain set and a position offset will be interpolated. $AA_OFF in JOG mode In JOG mode too. $AA_OFF in synchronized action If a synchronized action which immediately resets $AA_OFF (DO $AA_OFF[<axis>]=<value>) is active when the position offset is deselected using the CORROF(<axis>. if the synchronized action becomes active later. machine data is used to define whether the output is triggered before. The auxiliary functions are output. 06/2009.Auxiliary function outputs 13 Function The auxiliary function output sends information to the PLC indicating when the NC program needs the PLC to perform specific switching operations on the machine tool. The PLC can be programmed to acknowledge auxiliary function outputs in various ways. together with their parameters. Fundamentals Programming Manual. with or after the traversing motion. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 419 . to the PLC interface. DL F/FA S M H For each function group or single function. The values and signals must be processed by the PLC user program. Auxiliary functions The following auxiliary functions can be transferred to the PLC: Auxiliary Function Tool selection Tool offset Feedrate Spindle speed M functions H functions Address T D. M2=5.8*10308 1 D DL 1-6 INT REAL Tool offset selection Tool fine offset selection Path feedrate Axial feedrate D0: Deselection Default setting: D1 Refers to previously selected D number..g..8*10308 T Spindle no. M4. Without spindle number.Auxiliary function outputs 12..12 1 .. ± 1. only to be implemented on the PLC. M19. Mandatory without address extension: M0. M1. M30 Spindle no.8*10308 INT REAL Function Spindle speed Any INT REAL INT Tool selection User M function* Without spindle number.999 REAL REAL 6 * The meaning of the functions is defined by the machine manufacturer (see machine manufacturer's specifications). 06/2009. 0 . 1 1 F FA 1 .12 100 .001 999 999.* Tool names are not passed to the PLC interface. the 3 function applies for the master spindle.001 999 999...99 1 . Functions have no effect in the NCK. Any S Spindle no. 1 ..12 0 . M70 with address extension spindle no. 2147483647 0 .99 0 . (e. ± 1..32000 (or tool names with active tool management) 0 . ± 2147483647 ± 1. spindle stop for spindle 2). CORROF) Properties Important properties of the auxiliary function are shown in the following overview table: Function Address extension Meaning M Range 0 (implicit) Value Range 0 . M17. M5. 3 Explanations Maximum number per block 5 H Any 0 .999 0. 99 INT Function M3... (for active tool manageme nt) Locationdependent offset Axis No. 420 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 1 . the function applies for the master spindle.12 0 ...31 0. M2.10 Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF. 99 Type INT Meaning Function The address extension is 0 for the range between 0 and 99. 06/2009. The acknowledgment behavior can be defined by the grouping. High-speed function outputs (QU) Functions. can be defined as highspeed outputs for individual outputs with the keyword QU. Synchronized Actions Grouping The functions described can be grouped together. This helps avoid unnecessary hold points and interruptions to traversing movements. Function outputs for travel commands The transfer of information as well as waiting for the appropriate response takes time and therefore influences the traversing movements. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 421 . Fundamentals Programming Manual.10 Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF. which have not been programmed as high-speed outputs. Program execution continues without waiting for the acknowledgment of the miscellaneous function (the program waits for the transport acknowledgment). Auxiliary functions can also be output from the action component of synchronized actions.Auxiliary function outputs 12. Note The appropriate machine data must be set for the "High-speed function outputs" function (→ machine manufacturer). References: Function Manual. CORROF) Further information Number of function outputs per NC block Up to 10 function outputs can be programmed in one NC block. Group assignment is predefined for some M commands. Auxiliary function outputs 12. The following block is executed with no acknowledgment delay.10 Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF. The auxiliary function output takes place during the block. Important: A wait for an outstanding acknowledgment signal from the PLC can also interrupt the continuous-path mode.g. During the movement After the movement CAUTION Function outputs in continuous-path mode Function outputs before the traversing movements interrupt the continuous-path mode (G64/G641) and generate an exact stop for the previous block. 06/2009. e. The following block is executed with no acknowledgment delay. CORROF) High-speed acknowledgment without block change delay Block change behavior can be influenced by machine data. 422 Fundamentals Programming Manual. The auxiliary function output takes place in the first interpolation cycle of the block. the system response with respect to high-speed auxiliary functions is as follows: Auxiliary function output Before the movement Response The block transition between blocks with high-speed auxiliary functions occurs without interruption and without a reduction in velocity. The movement stops at the end of the block. The block transition between blocks with high-speed auxiliary functions occurs without interruption and without a reduction in velocity. When the "without block change delay" setting is selected. for M command sequences in blocks with extremely short path lengths. The auxiliary function output takes place at the end of the block. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . The following block is executed with no acknowledgment delay. Function outputs after the traversing movements interrupt the continuous-path mode (G64/G641) and generate an exact stop for the current block. Assignment is made to a certain machine function through the value assignment (M function number).1 M functions The M functions initiate switching operations. Type: INT Range of values: 0 ..1 Function 13. The extended address notation applies for some M functions (e. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 423 . 2147483647 (max.Auxiliary function outputs 13. specification of the spindle number for spindle functions). Syntax M<value> M[<address extension>] = <value> Significance M: <address extension>: Address for the programming of the M functions..g.1 M functions 13. INT value) <value>: Fundamentals Programming Manual. such as "Coolant ON/OFF" and other functions on the machine. Auxiliary function outputs 13. M2. The commands M0. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 424 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. M17 and M30 are always issued after the traversing movement.1 M functions Predefined M functions Certain important M functions for program execution are supplied as standard with the control: M function M0* M1* M2* M3 M4 M5 M6 M17* M19 M30* M40 M41 M42 M43 M44 M45 M70 Meaning Programmed stop Optional stop End of main program with return to beginning of program Spindle clockwise Spindle counterclockwise Spindle stop Tool change (default setting) End of subroutine Position the spindle End of program (as M2) Automatic gear change Gear stage 1 Gear stage 2 Gear stage 3 Gear stage 4 Gear stage 5 Spindle is switched to axis mode NOTICE Extended address notation cannot be used for the functions marked with *. M1. e.. M7 has been programmed as high-speed output so that the continuous-path mode (G64) is not interrupted. Note Only use this function in special cases as. Examples Example 1: Maximum number of M functions in a block Program code N10 S. for switching functions to control the clamping devices or for the activation/deactivation of further machine functions. 06/2009.g. . Fundamentals Programming Manual. for example.. Fast output for H735. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 425 . M3 . NOTICE The functions assigned to the free M function numbers are machine-specific.1 M functions M functions defined by the machine manufacturer All free M function numbers can be used by the machine manufacturer.Auxiliary function outputs 13. . spindle accelerates before the X axis movement . Refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications for the M functions available on a machine and their functions. M function in the block with axis movement. Maximum of five M functions in the block Comment N180 M789 M1767 M100 M102 M376 Example 2: M function as high-speed output Program code N10 H=QU(735) N10 G1 F300 X10 Y20 G64 N20 X8 Y90 M=QU(7) Comment .. N20 X.. the chronological alignment is changed in combination with other function outputs. Fast output for M7. A certain M function can therefore have a different functionality on another machine. End of program: M2. Spindle functions: M3.1 M functions Further information about the predefined M commands Programmed stop: M0 The machining is stopped in the NC block with M0. M19. If the main program is called from another program (as subroutine). the function applies for the master spindle. Clockwise spindle rotation for the second spindle If an address extension has not been programmed. M4. to remove chip flows. e. 426 Fundamentals Programming Manual. In this way.an auxiliary function associated with M1 with stop in the program execution Programmed stop 2 can be set via the HMI / dialog box "Program Control" and allows the technological sequences to be interrupted at any time at the end of the part to be machined. M30 A program is terminated with M2. etc. M2/M30 has the same effect as M17 and vice versa. Example: Program code M2=3 Comment .e. the operator can interrupt the production. M17 has the same effect in the main program as M2/M30. M17 or M30 and reset to the start of the program.optional stop: M1 M1 can be set via: ● HMI / dialog box "Program Control" or ● NC/PLC interface The program execution of the NC is stopped by the programmed blocks. M70 The extended address notation with specification of the spindle number applies for all spindles. Programmed stop 2 . remeasure. 06/2009. Programmed stop 1 .g. M17. You can now remove chips.Auxiliary function outputs 13. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . i. M5. Character string that is to be displayed as a message. Syntax MSG("<message text>") MSG () Significance MSG: <message text>: Keyword for the programming of a message text.1 Function 14 14. Contents of variables can also be displayed in message texts. Type: STRING A message text can be up to 124 characters long and is displayed in two lines (2*62 characters). Fundamentals Programming Manual. A message can be deleted by programming MSG() without message text. 06/2009.1 Messages (MSG) Messages can be programmed to provide the user with information about the current machining situation during program execution.Supplementary commands 14. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 427 . Delete message from N20 Comment . Delete message from N10 Comment .1 Messages (MSG) Examples Example 1: Activate/delete messages Program code N10 MSG ("Roughing the contour") N20 X… Y… N … N90 MSG () .Supplementary commands 14. Current position of the X axis in R12 . Activate message Example 2: Message text contains variable Program code N10 R12=$AA_IW [X] N20 MSG ("Check position of X axis"<<R12<<) N … N90 MSG () . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Activate message 428 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. WALIMOF) G25/G26 limits the working area (working field. working space) in which the tool can traverse.2 14. The coordinates for the individual axes apply in the basic coordinate system: Fundamentals Programming Manual. WALIMON.1 Function 14. The areas outside the working area limitations defined with G25/G26 are inhibited for any tool motion. 06/2009.Supplementary commands 14.2 Working area limitation 14. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 429 .2.2 Working area limitation Working area limitation in BCS (G25/G26. Supplementary commands 14. The WALIMOF command deactivates the working area limitation. it only has to be programmed if the working area limitation has been disabled beforehand. are carried-out for a specific direction using the axis-specific setting data that becomes immediately effective: SD43400 $SA_WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE (Working area limitation active in the positive direction) SD43410 $SA_WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE (Working area limitation active in the negative direction) Using the direction-specific activation/de-activation. Therefore. values can also be entered using axisspecific setting data: SD43420 $SA_WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS (Working area limitation plus) SD43430 $SA_WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS (Working area limitation minus) Activating and de-activating the working area limitation. parameterized using SD43420 and SD43430. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . it is possible to limit the working range for an axis in just one direction.2 Working area limitation The working area limitation for all validated axes must be programmed with the WALIMON command. WALIMON is the default setting. Syntax G25 X…Y…Z… G26 X…Y…Z… WALIMON WALIMOF Significance G25: G26: X… Y… Z…: WALIMON: WALIMOF: Lower working area limitation Assignment of values in channel axes in the basic coordinate system Upper working area limitation Assignment of values in channel axes in the basic coordinate system Lower or upper working area limits for individual channel axes The limits specified refer to the basic coordinate system. 06/2009. 430 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Switch working area limitation on for all axes Switch working area limitation off for all axes In addition to programming values using G25/G26. has priority and overwrites the values entered in SD43420 and SD43430. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 431 . programmed with G25/G26. Note G25/G26 can also be used to program limits for spindle speeds at the address S. . . .Supplementary commands 14.5 N90 G0 Z200 N100 WALIMON N110 X70 M30 Comment . . measuring station. . For more information see " Programmable spindle speed limitation (G25. G26) (Page 118) ". etc. Default setting: WALIMON Program code N10 G0 G90 F0.5 T1 N20 G25 X-80 Z30 N30 G26 X80 Z330 N40 L22 N50 G0 G90 Z102 T2 N60 X0 N70 WALIMOF N80 G1 Z-2 F0. Example Using the working area limitation G25/26. .are protected against damage. .2 Working area limitation Note The programmed working area limitation. Define the lower limit for the individual coordinate axes Define the upper limit Cutting program To tool change point Deactivate working area limitation Drilling Back Activate working area limitation End of program Fundamentals Programming Manual. . the working area of a lathe is limited so that the surrounding devices and equipment . 06/2009. .such as revolver. Chapter: "Monitoring the working area limitation" Programmable working area limitation.Supplementary commands 14. G25/G26 An upper (G26) and a lower (G25) working area limitation can be defined for each axis. Basic Functions. Protection Zones (A3). This is done using channelspecific machine data: MD21020 $MC_WORKAREA_WITH_TOOL_RADIUS If the tool reference point lies outside the working area defined by the working area limitation or if this area is left. then tool data are taken into consideration (tool length and tool radius) can deviate from the described behavior. Consideration of the tool radius must be activated separately.2 Working area limitation Further information Reference point at the tool When tool length compensation is active. otherwise it is the toolholder reference point. 432 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Note If transformations are active. the program sequence is stopped. 06/2009. Note The CALCPOSI subroutine is described in the Job Planning Programming Manual Using this subroutine before any traversing motion is made. the tip of the tool is monitored as reference point. Axis Monitoring. References: /FB1/ Function Manual. These values are effective immediately and remain effective for the corresponding MD setting (→ MD10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB) after RESET and after being powered-up again. it can be checked as to whether the predicted path is moved through taking into account the working area limits and/or the protection zones. a data set (working area limitation group) is selected under the up to ten channel-specific data sets for the coordinate system-specific working area limitations. but is limited coordinate system-specific in the workpiece coordinate system (WCS) or in the settable zero system (SZS). 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 433 .Supplementary commands 14.when moving the axis "manually" to define a working area limitation referred to the workpiece. 10 The de-activation of the "working area limitation in the WCS/SZS" is realized using G commands: WALCS0 De-activating the active working area limitation group Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009.2..WALCS10 ("Working area limitation in the WCS/SZS") is mainly used for working area limitations for conventional lathes. G commands are used to make the selection: WALCS1 .. Using the G commands WALCS1 . The limitations are defined by channel-specific system variables. WALCS10) In addition to the working area limitation with WALIMON (see "Working area limitation in BCS (G25/G26. Application The working area limitation with WALCS1 .2 Function Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 . Syntax The "working area limitation in the "WCS/SZS" is activated by selecting a working area limitation group. Contrary to the working area limitation with WALIMON.. WALIMON.. the working area here is not in the basic coordinate system. WALIMOF) (Page 429)") there is an additional working area limitation that is activated using the G commands WALCS1 to WALCS10. 1 Activating working area limitation group No. A data set contains the limit values for all axes in the channel. They allow the programmer to use the defined "end stops" .2 Working area limitation 14. WALCS10 Activating working area limitation group No.WALCS10. WALCS10.Supplementary commands 14. ax] $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_PLUS [WALimNo. ax] Validity of the working area limitation in the positive axis direction. by writing to channel-specific system variables: System variable Setting the working area limits $AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE [WALimNo. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .2 Working area limitation Meaning The working area limitations of the individual axes are set and the reference frame (WCS or SZS). Only effective. activated with WALCS1 . if: $AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE = TRUE Selecting the reference frame $AC_WORKAREA_CS_COORD_SYSTEM [WALimNo] Coordinate system to which the working area limitation group is referred: Value 1 3 Description Workpiece coordinate system (WCS) Settable zero system (SZS) Description <WALimNo>: <ax>: Number of the working area limitation group. in which the working area limits are to be effective. 2 is to be defined and then activated in which the axes are to be limited in the WCS acc. Y and Z A working area limitation group No. if: $AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE = TRUE $AC_WORKAREA_CS_MINUS_ENABLE [WALimNo. Working area limitation in the positive axis direction. to the following specifications: ● X axis in the plus direction: 10 mm ● X axis in the minus direction: No limitation ● Y axis in the plus direction: 34 mm ● Y axis in the minus direction: -25 mm ● Z axis in the plus direction: No limitation ● Z axis in the minus direction: -600 mm 434 Fundamentals Programming Manual. ax] $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_MINUS [WALimNo. Example Three axes are defined in the channel: X. Channel axis name of the axis for which the value is valid. Working area limitation in the negative axis direction. ax] Validity of the working area limitation in the negative axis direction. 06/2009. Only effective. 2 Working area limitation Program code .Y]=TRUE N73 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_MINUS[2.Y]=TRUE N73 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_PLUS[2.... .. Further information Effectivity The working area limitation with WALCS1 .Z]=FALSE N82 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_MINUS_ENABLE[2. . .Supplementary commands 14.Y]=–25 N80 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE[2. .. Fundamentals Programming Manual. . 06/2009. If both functions are active.WALCS10 acts independently of the working area limitation with WALIMON. .Z]=–600 . .X]=FALSE N70 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE[2.Y]=34 N72 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_MINUS_ENABLE[2.Z]=TRUE N83 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_PLUS[2. The working area limitation of working area limitation group 2 applies in the WCS. N90 WALCS2 . N60 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE[2.. Reference point at the tool Taking into account the tool data (tool length and tool radius) and therefore the reference point at the tool when monitoring the working area limitation corresponds to the behavior for the working area limitation with WALIMON. Activating working area limitation group No. . that limit becomes effective which the axis motion first reaches. N51 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_COORD_SYSTEM[2]=1 Comment . . .X]=TRUE N61 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_PLUS[2. .X]=10 N62 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_MINUS_ENABLE[2. . 2. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 435 . . B1. Syntax G74 X1=0 Y1=0 Z1=0 A1=0 … . the reference point is approached and the workpiece zero point is initialized. Y1. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Supplementary commands 14.3 Reference point approach (G74) 14. all of the axis slides must approach their reference mark. 436 Fundamentals Programming Manual. N30 G54 N40 L47 N50 M30 . . Note A transformation must not be programmed for an axis which is to approach the reference point with G74. Z1… Search for reference for linear axes Specified machine axis address A1.3 Function 14. Spindle in position control Reference point approach for linear axes and rotary axes Zero offset Cutting program End of program N20 G74 X1=0 Y1=0 Z1=0 C1=0 . The transformation is deactivated with command TRAFOOF. C1… Search for reference for rotary axes. Example When the measurement system is changed. Only then can traversing movements be programmed. The reference point can be approached in the NC program with G74. Programmed in a separate NC block Significance G74: X1=0 Y1=0 Z1=0 … : A1=0 B1=0 C1=0 … : Search for reference Specified machine axis address X1. 06/2009. Program code N10 SPOS=0 Comment .3 Reference point approach (G74) When the machine has been powered up (where incremental position measuring systems are used). etc.4 Fixed-point approach (G75.g. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 437 . The fixed points can be approached from every NC program irrespective of the current tool or workpiece positions. G751) 14. to tool change points. pallet change points. G751) The non-modal command G75/G751 can be used to move axes individually and independently of one another to fixed points in the machine space. 06/2009. An internal preprocessing stop is executed prior to moving the axes. The approach can be made directly (G75) or via an intermediate point (G751): Fundamentals Programming Manual. loading points. The fixed points are positions in the machine coordinate system which are stored in the machine data (MD30600 $MA_FIX_POINT_POS[n]). e.4 Function 14.4 Fixed-point approach (G75.Supplementary commands 14. A maximum of four fixed points can be defined for each axis. Supplementary commands 14. A value of "0" is. FP=: Fixed point that is to be approached <n>: Fixed point number Range of values: 1. ● None of the axes to be traversed must be involved in active transformation. Syntax G75/G751 <axis name><axis position> . ● None of the axes to be traversed must be an axis in a gantry grouping. FP=<n> Significance G75: G751: <axis name>: <axis position>: Approach fixed point directly Approach fixed point via intermediate point Name of the machine axis to be traversed to the fixed point All axis identifiers are permitted. usually specified. 438 Fundamentals Programming Manual. this is interpreted as FP=1 and fixed point 1 is approached.. In the case of G75 the specified position value is irrelevant. 3. Things are different for G751. ● A kinematic transformation may not be active. ● The fixed points must be located within the valid traversing range (→ note the software limit switch limits!) ● The axes to be traversed must be referenced. therefore. ● None of the axes to be traversed must be a following axis in an active coupling. 4 Note: In the absence of FP=<n> or a fixed point number.. G751) Conditions The following conditions must be satisfied to approach fixed points with G75/G751: ● The fixed-point coordinates must have been calculated exactly and written to machine data. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .4 Fixed-point approach (G75. 06/2009. where the position of the intermediate point to be approached has to be specified as the value. ● No tool radius compensation must be active. 2. or if FP=0 has been programmed. ● Compile cycles must not activate motion components. G751) Note Multiple axes can be programmed in one G75/751 block.6 ● MD30600 $MA_FIX_POINT[AX3. a stop is inserted here.3 (in the machine coordinate system). axes X (= AX1) and Z (= AX3) need to move to the fixed machine axis position 1 where X = 151. Examples Example 1: G75 For a tool change. Note The following applies for G751: Axes which are to only approach the fixed point without first moving to an intermediate point cannot be programmed. Machine data: ● MD30600 $MA_FIX_POINT_POS[AX1. To continue to prevent any additional movements once the end positions have been reached. Each axis travels at the maximum velocity it is capable of reaching. Approach positions in workpiece coordinate system. Comment N130 X10 Y30 Z40 … Fundamentals Programming Manual.4 Fixed-point approach (G75. The work offset is reactivated.Supplementary commands 14. . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 439 .0] = 17. Activate adjustable work offset.6 and the Z axis moves to 17. Note The value of the address FP must not be greater than the number of fixed points specified for each programmed axis (MD30610 $MA_NUM_FIX_POINT_POS).6 and Z = -17. No additional movements are permitted to be active in this block.3 NC program: Program code … N100 G55 N110 X10 Y30 Z40 N120 G75 X0 Z0 FP=1 M0 . 06/2009. The X axis moves to 151.0] = 151. . . The axes are then traversed simultaneously to the specified fixed point. The position of N110 is approached again.3. .Supplementary commands 14. as with G75. (typically M6) will not be sufficient to trigger a block change inhibit at the end of G75 motion. If the conditions for "RTLIOF" (single-axis interpolation) are not met. the axes come to a standstill within the "Exact stop fine" tolerance window. the auxiliary function T… or M. Program code … N40 G751 X20 Z30 FP=2 . 440 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Then the distance from X20 Z30 to the second fixed point in the X and Y axis is traversed. followed by the fixed machine axis position 2. the fixed point is approached as a path. 06/2009. G751) Note If the "Tool management with magazines" function is active. Position X20 Z30 is approached first in rapid traverse as a path. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .4 Fixed-point approach (G75. Reason: With "Tool management with magazines is active". The motion is mapped internally using the "SUPA" (suppress all frames) and "G0 RTLIOF" (rapid traverse motion with singleaxis interpolation) functions.. auxiliary functions for tool change are not output to the PLC. When the fixed point is reached. Example 2: G751 Position X20 Z30 is to be approached first. Comment … Further information G75 The axes are traversed as machine axes in rapid traverse. 4 Fixed-point approach (G75. and will offset the target position accordingly. The destination point is monitored as the starting point of the following block. WALCS10) is not effective in the block with G75/G751.Supplementary commands 14. frames. the additional axis movements are not permitted to change until the end of traversing is reached by the G75/G751 block.. G751) G751 The intermediate position is approached with rapid traverse and active offset (tool offset.). etc. Additional axis movements The following additional axis movements are taken into account at the point at which the G75/G751 block is interpolated: ● External work offset ● DRF ● Synchronization offset ($AA_OFF) After this. irrespective of the point at which interpolation takes place. Working area limitation in the workpiece coordinate system/SZS Coordinate-system-specific working area limitation (WALCS0 .. Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. ● Online tool offset ● Additional movements from compile cycles in the BCS and machine coordinate system Active frames All active frames are ignored. Traversing is performed in the machine coordinate system. The next fixed-point approach is executed as with G75. The following additional movements are not taken into account. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 441 . Additional movements following interpretation of the G75/G751 block will offset the approach to the fixed point accordingly. Once the fixed point has been reached the offsets are reactivated (as with G75). and the axes move with interpolation. 4 Fixed-point approach (G75. G751) Axis/Spindle movements with POSA/SPOSA If programmed axes/spindles were previously traversed with POSA or SPOSA. then additional spindle functions (e. positioning with SPOS/SPOSA) can be programmed in the G75/G751 block. Modulo axes In the case of modulo axes. Spindle functions in the G75/G751 block If the spindle is excluded from "Fixed-point approach". these movements will be completed first before the fixed point is approached. References For further information about "Fixed-point approach". 06/2009.g. Manual and Handwheel Travel (H1). see: Function Manual. the fixed point is approached along the shortest distance. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Extended Functions. Chapter: "Fixedpoint approach in JOG" 442 Fundamentals Programming Manual.Supplementary commands 14. The "travel to fixed stop" function can be implemented for axes as well as for spindles with axis-traversing capability.Supplementary commands 14. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 443 . With sufficiently reduced torque. FXST.5 Travel to fixed stop (FXS. FXST. 06/2009.5 Function 14. FXSW) 14. FXSW) The "Travel to fixed stop" function can be used to establish defined forces for clamping workpieces. it is also possible to perform simple measurement operations without connecting a probe.5 Travel to fixed stop (FXS. The function can also be used for the approach of mechanical reference points. quills and grippers. Syntax FXS[<axis>]=… FXST[<axis>]=… FXSW[<axis>]=… FXS[<axis>]=… FXST[<axis>]=… FXS[<axis>]=… FXST[<axis>]=… FXSW[<axis>]=… Fundamentals Programming Manual. such as those required for tailstocks. inches or degrees Machine axis name Machine axes (X1. FXST and FXSW are modal.3% of the maximum drive torque.Supplementary commands 14. 06/2009. Activate travel to fixed stop: FXS[<axis>] = 1 The movement to the destination point can be described as a path or positioning axis movement. 444 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . The clamping torque is 12. monitoring is performed in a 2 mm wide window. Example: Program code X250 Y100 F100 FXS[X1]=1 FXST[X1]=12.3 FXSW[X1]=2 Comment . FXSW) Significance FXS: Command for activation and deactivation of the "Travel to fixed stop" function FXS[<axis>]=1: FXS=[<axis>]=0: FXST: FXSW: Activate function Deactivate function Optional command for setting the clamping torque Specified as % of the maximum drive torque Optional command for setting the window width for the fixed stop monitoring Specified in mm. The fixed stop must be located between the start and end positions. Y1.) are programmed <axis>: Note The commands FXS.. FXST. Travel to fixed stop can be performed simultaneously for several axes and parallel to the movement of other axes. etc. The programming of FXST and FXSW is optional: If no parameter is specified.5 Travel to fixed stop (FXS. the function can be performed across block boundaries. . Axis X1 travels with feed F100 (parameter optional) to destination position X=250 mm. the last programmed value or the value set in the relevant machine data applies. With positioning axes.. Z1. FXSW) CAUTION It is not permissible to program a new position for an axis if the "Travel to fixed stop" function has already been activated for an axis/spindle. The block change takes place when the retraction position has been reached. FXST. 06/2009. otherwise damage to the stop or to the machine may result. All other parameters are optional. Axis X1 is retracted from the fixed stop to position X = 200 mm.. Deactivate travel to fixed stop: FXS[<axis>] = 0 Deselection of the function triggers a preprocessing stop. the block change takes place immediately the torque limit has been deactivated. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 445 .5 Travel to fixed stop (FXS. Fundamentals Programming Manual. CAUTION The traversing movement to the retraction position must move away from the fixed stop.Supplementary commands 14. . The block with FXS[<axis>]=0 may and should contain traversing movements.. Spindles must be switched to position-controlled mode before the function is selected. Example: Program code X200 Y400 G01 G94 F2000 FXS[X1]=0 Comment . If no retraction position is specified. the torque is limited instantaneously. insertion of a quill).5 Travel to fixed stop (FXS. FXST and FXSW can be programmed and changed in the part program at any time. The changes take effect before traversing movements in the same block. but also in the reference point for the center of the window if the axis has moved prior to reprogramming. FXSW) Clamping torque (FXST) and monitoring window (FXSW) Any programmed torque limiting FXST is effective from the block start. the limit stop monitor is activated.e. 06/2009. 446 Fundamentals Programming Manual. The actual position of the machine axis when the window is changed is the new window center point. FXST. the fixed stop is also approached at a reduced torque. As soon as the axis is moved via a setpoint. They can be activated without initiation of a motion. Programming of a new fixed stop monitoring window causes a change not only in the window width.Supplementary commands 14. Activating The commands for travel to fixed stop can be called from synchronized actions or technology cycles. CAUTION The window must be selected such that only a breakaway from the fixed stop causes the fixed stop monitoring to respond. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Alarm suppression The fixed stop alarm can be suppressed for applications by the part program by masking the alarm in a machine data item and activating the new MD setting with NEW_CONF.g. Further information Rise ramp A rate of rise ramp for the new torque limit can be defined in MD to prevent any abrupt changes to the torque limit setting (e. i. Deactivation from synchronized actions Example: If an anticipated event ($R3) has occurred and the status "Limit stop contacted" (system variable $AA_FXS) is reached. ● The drive torque increases to the programmed limit value FXSW and then remains constant. FXSW) Activation from synchronized actions Example: If the expected event ($R1) occurs and travel to fixed stop is not yet running.Supplementary commands 14. FXS should be activated for axis Y. FXST. then FXS must be deselected. Program code IDS=4 WHENEVER (($R3==1) AND ($AA_FXS[Y]==1)) DO FXS[Y]=0 FA[Y]=1000 POS[Y]=0 Fixed stop reached When the fixed stop has been reached: ● The distance-to-go is deleted and the position setpoint is corrected. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 447 .5 Travel to fixed stop (FXS. Program code N10 IDS=1 WHENEVER (($R1=1) AND ($AA_FXS[Y]==0)) DO $R1=0 FXS[Y]=1 FXST[Y]=10 The normal part program must ensure that $R1 is set at the desired point in time. The torque must correspond to 10% of the rated torque value. Fundamentals Programming Manual. ● Fixed stop monitoring is activated within the specified window width. 06/2009. The width of the monitoring window is set to the default. the block change is performed irrespective of the fixed stop movement. check the contour deviation to make sure it is not greater than the deviation with an unlimited torque. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Supplementary commands 14. an increase in the torque limit may result in sudden. ● Positioning axes For "Travel to fixed stop" with positioning axes. Subject: "Travel to fixed stop (FXS and FOCON/FOCOF)" ● Travel to fixed stop is not possible: – With gantry axes – For concurrent positioning axes that are controlled exclusively from the PLC (FXS must be selected from the NC program). The status of the assigned machine axis is maintained beyond the container rotation. jerky movements. References: – Function Manual. To ensure that the axis can follow the setpoint. the position controller then goes to the limit and the contour deviation increases. the axis will not be able to follow the specified setpoint. ● Contour monitoring Contour monitoring is not performed while "Travel to fixed stop" is active. Job Planning. FXST. ● Link and container axes Travel to fixed stop is also permitted for link and container axes. Distributed Systems (B3) – Programming Manual. This also applies for modal torque limiting with FOCON. 448 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Exception: One function acts on a path axis and the other on a positioning axis or both act on positioning axes. In this operating state. Extended Functions. Several Control Panels on Multiple NCUs.5 Travel to fixed stop (FXS. FXSW) Supplementary conditions ● Measurement with deletion of distance-to-go "Measure with deletion of distance-to-go" (MEAS command) and "Travel to fixed stop" cannot be programmed at the same time in one block. ● If the torque limit is reduced too far. 6 Acceleration behavior 14.6 14.1 Function 14. Figure 14-1 Path velocity curve with BRISK and SOFT Fundamentals Programming Manual. DRIVEA) The following part program commands are available for programming the current acceleration mode: ● BRISK. The acceleration rate is then reduced (MD setting) until the programmed feedrate is reached. BRISKA The single axes or the path axes traverse with maximum acceleration until the programmed feedrate is reached (acceleration without jerk limitation).6.Supplementary commands 14. BRISKA. ● SOFT. 06/2009. DRIVEA The single axes or the path axes traverse with maximum acceleration up to a programmed velocity limit (MD setting!). 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 449 . SOFTA The single axes or the path axes traverse with constant acceleration until the programmed feedrate is reached (acceleration with jerk limitation). SOFTA.6 Acceleration behavior Acceleration mode (BRISK. SOFT. ● DRIVE. DRIVE. Command for activating the "acceleration without jerk limitation" for single axis movements (JOG. oscillating axis.Supplementary commands 14.<axis2>.…) SOFT SOFTA(<axis1>. 06/2009. Command for activating the "acceleration with jerk limitation" for single axis movements (JOG. oscillating axis. Command for activating the reduced acceleration above a configured velocity limit (MD35220 $MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT) for the path axes. positioning axis. JOG/INC. etc.6 Acceleration behavior Figure 14-2 Path velocity curve with DRIVE Syntax BRISK BRISKA(<axis1>.). SOFT: SOFTA: DRIVE: 450 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .<axis2>.). etc. positioning axis.…) DRIVE DRIVEA(<axis1>.…) Significance BRISK: BRISKA: Command for activating the "acceleration without jerk limitation" for the path axes.<axis2>. Command for activating the "acceleration with jerk limitation" for the path axes. JOG/INC. . Example 2: DRIVE and DRIVEA Program code N05 DRIVE N10 G1 X… Y… F1000 N20 DRIVEA (AX4. etc. Examples Example 1: SOFT and BRISKA Program code N10 G1 X… Y… F900 SOFT N20 BRISKA(AX5. then there is a block change with exact stop at the end of the block during the transition even with continuous-path mode.6 Acceleration behavior Command for activating the reduced acceleration above a configured velocity limit (MD35220 $MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT) for single axis movements (JOG. DRIVEA: (<axis1>.).AX6) .): Single axes for which the called acceleration mode is to apply. oscillating axis. Supplementary conditions Changing acceleration mode during machining If the acceleration mode is changed in a part program during machining (BRISK ↔ SOFT). Acceleration (B2) Fundamentals Programming Manual. References Function Manual. AX6) .. Basic Functions. 06/2009.. positioning axis. etc.<axis2>. JOG/INC. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 451 ..Supplementary commands 14. 06/2009. Extended Functions. and JERKLIMA functions from the part program or from synchronized actions. Synchronous Spindle (S3) Note Availability for SINUMERIK 828D The VELOLIMA. electronic gear.Supplementary commands 14. master value coupling. ACCLIMA and JERKLIMA functions can only be used with SINUMERIK 828D in conjunction with the "coupled motion" function! Syntax VELOLIMA(<axis>)=<value> ACCLIMA(<axis>)=<value> JERKLIMA(<axis>)=<value> Significance VELOLIMA: ACCLIMA: JERKLIMA: <axis>: <value>: Command to correct the parameterized maximum velocity Command to correct the parameterized maximum acceleration Command to correct the parameterized maximum jerk Following axis whose dynamics limits need to be corrected Percentage offset value 452 Fundamentals Programming Manual. even if the axis coupling is already active.6 Acceleration behavior 14.6. JERKLIMA) In the case of axis couplings (tangential correction.2 Function Influence of acceleration on following axes (VELOLIMA. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Special Functions. → see Programming Manual. Job Planning) following axes/spindles are traversed dependent on one or more master axes/spindles. ACCLIMA. The dynamics limits of the following axes/spindles can be manipulated using the VELOLIMA. References: • Function Manual. coupled motion. Note The JERKLIMA function is not available for all types of coupling. Axis Couplings (M3) • Function Manual. ACCLIMA. Supplementary commands 14... Synchronized action . N120 ACCLIMA[AX4]=70 N130 VELOLIMA[AX4]=50 ..1.2) .. . Master value coupling on Comment Fundamentals Programming Manual. .. Program code . 06/2009.X... Limits correction to 75% of the maximum axial velocity stored in the machine data ... Once the coupling has been activated successfully. Limits correction to 50% of the maximum axial jerk stored in the machine data Comment Example 2: Electronic gear Axis 4 is coupled to axis X via an "electronic gear" coupling. VELOLIMA[AX4]=75 ACCLIMA[AX4]=50 JERKLIMA[AX4]=50 . N120 IDS=2 WHENEVER $AA_IM[AX4] > 100 DO ACCLIMA[AX4]=80 N130 LEADON(AX4. . Program code . the maximum permissible velocity is restored to 100%.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 453 ... Full maximum velocity .. N200 VELOLIMA[AX4]=100 . Activation of the EG coupling .. 2) ."FINE".. The acceleration response is limited to position 80% by static synchronized action 2 from position 100.6 Acceleration behavior Examples Example 1: Correction of the dynamics limits for a following axis (AX4) Program code .. The maximum permissible velocity is limited to 50% of the maximum velocity. Reduced maximum velocity Comment Example 3: Influencing master value coupling by static synchronized action Axis 4 is coupled to X by master value coupling. X. N150 EGON(AX4. The acceleration capacity of the following axis is limited to 70% of the maximum acceleration. Limits correction to 50% of the maximum axial acceleration stored in the machine data . Reduced maximum acceleration . [n.Supplementary commands 14. Read or write a specific field element: R<m>=$MA. References: Function Manual. DYNFINISH) Function Using the "Technology" G group.X] $MA. dependent on machine data settings (→ machine manufacturer). 06/2009. DYNPOS. Basic Functions..6.. DYNROUGH.. Machining is not stopped. DYNSEMIFIN. Dynamic values and G commands can be configured and are. Continuous-Path Mode. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .6 Acceleration behavior 14.. tapping G command for activating the dynamic response for roughing G command for activating the dynamic response for finishing G command for activating the dynamic response for smooth-finishing 454 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Exact Stop.[n.3 Activation of technology-specific dynamic values (DYNNORM. the appropriate dynamic response can be activated for five varying technological machining steps. therefore. Look Ahead (B1) Syntax Activate dynamic values: DYNNORM DYNPOS DYNROUGH DYNSEMIFIN DYNFINISH Note The dynamic values are already active in the block in which the associated G command is programmed.X]=<value> Significance DYNNORM: DYNPOS: DYNROUGH: DYNSEMIFIN: DYNFINISH: G command for activating normal dynamic response G command for activating the dynamic response for positioning mode. X]=5 Comment . axis X Program code R1=$MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL[2. tapping .6 Acceleration behavior R-parameter with number <m> Machine data with field element affecting dynamic response Array index Range of values: 0 . 4 0 1 2 3 4 <X> : <value>: Normal dynamic response (DYNNORM) Dynamic response for positioning mode (DYNPOS) Dynamic response for roughing (DYNROUGH) Dynamic response for finishing (DYNSEMIFIN) Dynamic response for smooth-finishing (DYNFINISH) R<m>: $MA.[n. Smooth finishing Example 2: Read or write a specific field element Maximum acceleration for roughing. Finishing . 06/2009.. Basic position . Roughing .Supplementary commands 14. Write Fundamentals Programming Manual.X] $MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL[2..X]: <n>: Axis address Dynamic value Examples Example 1: Activate dynamic values Program code DYNNORM G1 X10 DYNPOS G1 X10 Y20 Z30 F… DYNROUGH G1 X10 Y20 Z30 F10000 DYNSEMIFIN G1 X10 Y20 Z30 F2000 DYNFINISH G1 X10 Y20 Z30 F1000 Comment . Read ... Positioning mode. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 455 . FFWON. 06/2009. Default: Velocity-dependent feedforward control Option: Acceleration-dependent feedforward control Command to activate the feedforward control Command to deactivate the feedforward control Example Program code N10 FFWON N20 G1 X… Y… F900 SOFT 456 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Traversing with feedforward control permits higher path accuracy and thus improved machining results. FFWOF The feedforward control reduces the velocity-dependent overtravel when contouring towards zero.Supplementary commands 14.7 Traversing with feedforward control. FFWOF 14. FFWON.7 Traversing with feedforward control.7 Function 14. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Syntax FFWON FFWOF Significance FFWON: FFWOF: Note The type of feedforward control and which path axes are to be traversed with feedforward control is specified via machine data. CPRECON. Automatic feed limitation in circular block . Activate programmable contour accuracy Deactivate programmable contour accuracy Example Program code N10 X0 Y0 G0 N20 CPRECON N30 F10000 G1 G64 X100 N40 G3 Y20 J10 N50 X0 . On the basis of the value of the contour violation $SC_CONTPREC and the servo gain factor (velocity/following error ratio) of the geometry axes concerned. CPRECOF 14. CPRECOF In machining operations without feedforward control (FFWON).8 Function 14. errors may occur on curved contours as a result of velocity-related differences between setpoint and actual positions.8 Contour accuracy.8 Contour accuracy. which is not undershot. Syntax CPRECON CPRECOF Significance CPRECON: CPRECOF: Note A minimum velocity can be defined via the setting data item $SC_MINFEED.Supplementary commands 14. Activate contour accuracy . 06/2009. The programmable contour accuracy function CPRECON makes it possible to store a maximum permissible contour violation in the NC program which must never be overshot. Machining at 10 m/min in continuous-path mode . the control calculates the maximum path velocity at which the contour violation produced by the overtravel does not exceed the minimum value stored in the setting data. CPRECON. and the same value can also be written directly out from the part program via the system variable $SC_CONTPREC. Feedrate without limitation 10 m/min Comment Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 457 . The Look Ahead function allows the entire path to be traversed with the programmed contour accuracy. The magnitude of the contour violation is specified with setting data $SC_CONTPREC. for relief cutting. Note G4 must be programmed in a separate NC block. 458 Fundamentals Programming Manual.Supplementary commands 14. Note G4 interrupts continuous-path mode.9 Function 14. Syntax G4 F…/S<n>=. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 ..9 Dwell time (G4) 14. Application For example.9 Dwell time (G4) G4 can be used to program a "dwell time" between two NC blocks during which workpiece machining is interrupted.. 06/2009. ) the dwell time will be applied to the master spindle. Dwell time: 3 s N50 X.1 min). ... Dwelling 30 revolutions of the spindle (at S=300 rpm and 100% speed override.. Note Addresses F and S are only used for time parameters in the G4 block.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 459 ... The feedrate F.9 Dwell time (G4) Significance G4: F…: S<n>=…: Activate dwell time The dwell time is programmed in seconds at address F.. Example Program code N10 G1 F200 Z-5 S300 M3 N20 G4 F3 N30 X40 Y10 N40 G4 S30 . <n>: The numeric extension indicates the number of the spindle to which the dwell time is to be applied. In the absence of a numeric extension (S.Supplementary commands 14. Comment . The dwell time is programmed in spindle revolutions at address S. Feedrate F. and the spindle speed S. programmed upstream of the G4 block are retained.. Fundamentals Programming Manual. corresponds to t = 0. The feedrate and spindle speed programmed in N10 continue to apply. 06/2009. spindle speed S . Example Program code .). 460 Fundamentals Programming Manual. The previous block is stopped in exact stop (as G9).. The following block is not executed until all preprocessed and saved blocks have been executed in full...10 Internal preprocessing stop The control generates an internal preprocessing stop on access to machine status data ($A.10 Function 14. 06/2009... N40 POSA[X]=100 N50 IF $AA_IM[X]==R100 GOTOF MARKE1 .. Access to machine status data ($A.10 Internal preprocessing stop 14.). 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . the control generates an internal preprocessing stop... Comments N60 G0 Y100 N70 WAITP(X) N80 LABEL1: .Supplementary commands 14. Other information 15.1 Axes Fundamentals Programming Manual.1 Axis types A distinction is made between the following types of axes when programming: ● Machine axes ● Channel axes ● Geometry axes ● Special axes ● Path axes ● Synchronized axes ● Positioning axes ● Command axes (motion-synchronous actions) ● PLC axes ● Link axes ● Lead link axes 15 15. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 461 . 06/2009. ● Command axes traverse asynchronously to all other axes. ● Positioning axes traverse asynchronously to all other axes.1 Axes Behavior of programmed axis types Geometry. 06/2009. The traversing movements take place independently of path and synchronized movements. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . ● Synchronized axes traverse synchronously to path axes and take the same time to traverse as all path axes. These traversing movements take place independently of path and synchronized movements. These traversing movements take place independently of path and synchronized movements. synchronized and positioning axes are programmed.Other information 15. ● PLC axes are controlled by the PLC and can traverse asynchronously to all other axes. ● Path axes traverse with feedrate F in accordance with the programmed travel commands. 462 Fundamentals Programming Manual. right-handed coordinate system. Geometry axis and channel axis names can be the same in any channel so that the same programs can be executed. the main axes are called geometry axes. 06/2009. Axis identifier For turning machines: Geometry axes X and Z are used. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 463 . Replaceable geometry axes The "Replaceable geometry axes" function (see Function Manual.Other information 15. provided a reference is possible. Job Planning) can be used to alter the geometry axes grouping configured using machine data from the part program. and sometimes Y. For milling machines: Geometry axes X. In NC technology.1 Axes 15. Here any geometry axis can be replaced by a channel axis defined as a synchronous special axis.1. The identifiers for geometry and channel axes may be the same. This term is also used in this Programming Manual. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Y and Z are used. Further information A maximum of three geometry axes are used for programming frames and the workpiece geometry (contour).1 Main axes/Geometry axes The main axes define a right-angled. Tool movements are programmed in this coordinate system. SETMS can be used without specifying a spindle number to switch back to the master spindle defined in the machine data.1 Axes 15.3 Main spindle. for example: ● Revolver position U ● Tailstock V Programming example Program code N10 G1 X100 Y20 Z30 A40 F300 N20 POS[U]=10POS[X]=20 FA[U]=200 FA[X]=350 N30 G1 X500 Y80 POS[U]=150FA[U]=300 F550 N40 G74 X1=0 Z1=0 Comment . 06/2009. This spindle is usually declared as the master spindle in the machine data. Path axis movements . Path and positioning axis .2 Special axes In contrast to the geometry axes.1.1.Other information 15. Approach home position 15. no geometrical relationship is defined between the special axes. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . which spindle is the main spindle. master spindle The machine kinematics determine. Typical special axes are: ● Tool revolver axes ● Swivel table axes ● Swivel head axes ● Loader axes Axis identifier On a turning machine with circular magazine. Positioning axis movements . Special functions such as thread cutting are supported by the master spindle. Spindle identifier S or S0 464 Fundamentals Programming Manual. This assignment can be changed with the SETMS(<spindle number>) program command. For more information about FGROUP. U. AX<n> 15. U1. B.1. for reference point or fixed point approach). B1. As a rule. F. FGREF) (Page 119)".4 Machine axes Machine axes are the axes physically existing on a machine. which traverse in a channel. these are the geometry axes. …. Y. The movements of axes can still be assigned by transformations (TRANSMIT. Standard identifiers: X1. which axes are the path axes. G94. and therefore determine the velocity. V1 There are also standard axis identifiers that can always be used: AX1. or TRAORI) to the machine axes. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Axis identifier X. A1. The axes involved in this path reach their position at the same time. see "Feedrate (G93.1 Axes 15. C.Other information 15. If transformations are intended for the machine.5 Channel axes Channel axes are all axes. Path axes can be specified in the NC program with FGROUP. V 15. The programmed feed is active for this path. A. Axis identifier The axis identifiers can be set in the machine data. G95.6 Path axes Path axes define the path and therefore the movement of the tool in space. default settings define.1. Z1. AX2. The machine axis names are only programmed in special circumstances (e. 06/2009. FL.1.g. different axis names must be specified during the commissioning (machine manufacturer). Z. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 465 . However. C1. Y1. TRACYL. FGROUP. Continuous-path mode (G64) for path axes is only possible if the positioning axes (POS) reach their final position before the path axes.Other information 15. Note Positioning axes become synchronized axes if they are traversed without the special POS/POSA identifier. Positioning axes do not interpolate with the path axes. Positioning axes are traversed by the NC program or the PLC. If an axis is to be traversed simultaneously by the NC program and the PLC. Path axes programmed with POS/POSA are removed from the path axis grouping for the duration of this block. POSP. POSP axes The movement of these positioning axes for approaching the end position takes place in sections. 466 Fundamentals Programming Manual. an error message appears. each positioning axis has its own axis interpolator and its own feedrate. and POSP. POSA. For more information about POS.1 Axes 15. POS axes Block change occurs at the end of the block when all the path and positioning axes programmed in this block have reached their programmed end point.7 Positioning axes Positioning axes are interpolated separately. Typical positioning axes are: ● Loaders for moving workpieces to machine ● Loaders for moving workpieces away from machine ● Tool magazine/turret Types A distinction is made between positioning axes with synchronization at the block end or over several blocks. FA. see "Traversing positioning axes (POS. 06/2009. WAITP. POSA. WAITMC) (Page 129)". in other words. POSA axes The movement of these positioning axes can extend over several blocks. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .1. The feedrate programmed in F applies to all the path axes programmed in the block.1 Axes 15. Synchronized axes take the same time as the path axes to traverse.Other information 15. but does not apply to synchronized axes. References: Function Manual. in other words. An axis cannot be moved from the part program and from synchronized actions simultaneously. each command axis has its own axis interpolator and its own feedrate.9 Command axes Command axes are started from synchronized actions in response to an event (command). Command axes are interpolated separately. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 467 . 15. and stopped fully asynchronous to the parts program.1. Fundamentals Programming Manual.8 Synchronized axes Synchronized axes traverse synchronously to the path from the start position to the programmed end position. 06/2009. their movements can be asynchronous to all other axes. which is traversed synchronously to the path interpolation. started.10 PLC axes PLC axes are traversed by the PLC via special function blocks in the basic program. Synchronized Actions 15. Traversing movements take place independently of path and synchronized movements. They can be positioned.1. A synchronized axis can be a rotary axis.1. Link axes are non-local axes from the perspective of a specific NCU. References: Configuration Manual. ● The "Link axis" option must be installed. Further information Prerequisites ● The participating NCUs. NCU1 and NCU2. The axis container concept is used for the dynamic modification of the assignment to an NCU. NCU ● The axis must be configured appropriately by machine data.1 Axes 15.1. Link axes can be assigned dynamically to channels of another NCU. which are physically connected to another NCU and whose position is controlled from this NCU. 06/2009.11 Link axes Link axes are axes. must be connected by means of high-speed communication via the link module.Other information 15. 468 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Axis exchange with GET and RELEASE from the part program is not available for link axes. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . This type of reference consists of: ● A container number and ● a slot (circular buffer location within the container) The entry in a circular buffer location contains: ● a local axis or ● a link axis Axis container entries contain local machine axes or link axes from the perspective of an individual NCU. 06/2009. Multiple Operator Panels and NCUs (B3) Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 469 . the link axis configuration in the logical machine axis image also allows references to axis containers.Other information 15. in which local axes and/or link axes are assigned to channels. Advanced Functions. The position setpoints for link axes are generated on another NCU and communicated via the NCU link. References: The axis container function is described in: Function Manual. The link communication must provide the means of interaction between the interpolators and the position controller or PLC interface. Multiple Operator Panels and NCUs (B3) Axis container An axis container is a circular buffer data structure. Advanced Functions. The entries in the logical machine axis image (MD10002 $MN_AXCONF_LOGIC_MACHAX_TAB) of an individual NCU are fixed. This NCU also contains the associated axis VDI interface. References: For more detailed information about link axes see: Function Manual. In addition to the direct reference to local axes or link axes. The entries in the circular buffer can be shifted cyclically. The setpoints calculated by the interpolators must be transported to the position control loop on the home NCU and.1 Axes Description The position control is implemented on the NCU on which the axis is physically connected to the drive. vice versa. the actual values must be returned from there back to the interpolators. 1. which are connected to the affected axis via a leading link axis.1 Axes 15. simulated master value) ● Coupled motion ● Tangential correction ● Electronic gear (ELG) ● Synchronous spindle 470 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Other information 15. 06/2009. actual master value. NCUs that are dependent on the leading link axis can utilize the following coupling relationships with it: ● Master value (setpoint.12 Lead link axes A leading link axis is one that is interpolated by one NCU and utilized by one or several other NCUs as the master axis for controlling slave axes. An axial position controller alarm is sent to all other NCUs. 1 Axes Programming Master NCU: Only the NCU. NCU ● The axis must be configured appropriately via machine data. i. must be interconnected via the link module for high-speed communication.Other information 15. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 471 . Further information Conditions ● The dependent NCUs. NCUs of slave axes: The travel program on the NCUs of the slave axes must not contain any travel commands for the leading link axis (master value axis). References: Configuration Manual. i. ● A master axis which is a leading link axis cannot be a container axis. it cannot be traversed by NCUs other than its home NCU. ● Axis replacement can only be implemented within the home NCU of the leading link axis. The travel program must not contain any special functions or operations. 06/2009. Fundamentals Programming Manual. of 8).e. The states of the leading link axis can be accessed by means of selected system variables. Restrictions ● A master axis which is a leading link axis cannot be a link axis.e. it cannot be addressed alternately by different NCUs.e. i. ● The same interpolation cycle must be configured for all NCUs connected to the leading link axis. The leading link axis is addressed in the usual way via channel axis identifiers. which is physically assigned to the master value axis can program travel motions for this axis. ● Couplings with leading link axes cannot be cascaded. NCU1 to NCU<n> (n equals max.. Any violation of this rule triggers an alarm. ● A leading link axis cannot be the programmed leading axis in a gantry grouping. ● The "Link axis" option must be installed. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 06/2009. which wish to control slave axes as a function of this master axis.velocity If these system variables are updated by the home NCU of the master axis.Other information 15. Extended Functions.1 Axes System variables The following system variables can be used in conjunction with the channel axis identifier of the leading link axis: System variables $AA_LEAD_SP $AA_LEAD_SV Significance Simulated master value . References: Function Manual. the new values are also transferred to any other NCUs.position Simulated master value . Multiple Operator Panels and NCUs (B3) 472 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 2 From travel command to machine movement 15.2 15.Other information 15.2 From travel command to machine movement The relationship between the programmed axis movements (travel commands) and the resulting machine movements is illustrated in the following figure: Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 473 . 06/2009. 474 Fundamentals Programming Manual.Other information 15.3 Path calculation The path calculation determines the distance to be traversed in a block.3 15. ● With incremental dimensioning: Distance = incremental dimension + (WO P2 .TO P1).absolute dimension P1) + (WO P2 .actual value + zero offset (ZO) + tool offset (TO) If a new zero offset and a new tool offset are programmed in a new program block.3 Path calculation 15.WO P1) + (TO P2 .TO P1). In general: Distance = setpoint . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .WO P1) + (TO P2 . taking into account all offsets and compensations. the following applies: ● With absolute dimensioning: Distance = (absolute dimension P2 . .. F.. FA[axis]=.. D... M.... 06/2009. Some important addresses are listed in the following table. H.. Meaning (default setting) Rotary axis Name Settable Rounding clearance for path functions Rotary axis Fixed Settable Rotary axis Settable Chamfer the contour corner Cutting edge number Feedrate Axial feedrate (only if spindle no....4 15..e....) C=DC(..... M=QU N...) B=ACP(....... or FA[spindle]=. J. OVR P. POS[Axis]=.) A=ACP(. The last column indicates whether it is a fixed or a settable address..) ADIS B=DC(..... i...) C=ACN(.. H=QU(. ● Settable addresses The machine manufacturer may assign another name to these addresses via machine data.. G.) I.....) C=ACP(.) CHR=.4 Addresses Fixed and settable addresses Addresses can be divided into two groups: ● Fixed addresses These addresses are permanently set.. L.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 475 . K.) A=ACN(..4 Addresses 15.Other information 15. Address A=DC(. or [SPI(spindle)]=. defined by variable) Preparatory function Auxiliary function Auxiliary function without read stop Interpolation parameter Interpolation parameter Interpolation parameter Subroutine call Additional function Additional function without read stop Subblock Path override Number of program passes Positioning axis Positioning axis across block boundary Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Settable Settable Settable Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fundamentals Programming Manual. the address characters cannot be changed......) B=ACN(... POSA[Axis]=... .4 Addresses SPOS=. SPOSA=.. Spindle position Spindle position across block boundary Axis .Axis Round the contour corner Round contour corner (modal) Spindle speed Tool number Axis Axis Axis Axis " absolute " incremental Axis Settable Fixed Fixed Settable Fixed Settable Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Settable Settable Settable Settable Axis Settable Opening angle Polar angle Circle radius Polar radius Settable Settable Settable Settable Note Settable addresses Settable addresses must be unique within the control..... U.... R... W.R parameter..) Z=IC AR+=.Other information 15... SPOS[n]=.. X. 06/2009. n can be set via MD (standard 0 ... T...99) .. to Rn=...) X=IC Y... R0=... X=AC(. V. the same address name may not be used for different address types.e.. Z=AC(. RP=. spindle behavior 476 Fundamentals Programming Manual... AP=....) Y=IC Z.. i...... 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . SPOSA[n Q... RND RNDM S... CR=.. Y=AC(. A distinction is made between the following address types: • Axis values and end points • Interpolation parameters • Feedrates • Corner rounding criteria • Measurement • Axis.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 477 . in which they were programmed. Addresses with axial extension In addresses with axial extension. Example: Program code N10 G01 F500 X10 N20 X10 Comment .Other information 15. Example: Program code FA[U]=400 Comment . Non-modal addresses only apply in the block. 06/2009. Axis-specific feedrate for U axis. Fixed addresses with axial extension: Address AX ACC FA FDA FL IP OVRA PO POS POSA Meaning (default setting) Axis value (variable axis programming) Axial acceleration Axial feedrate Axis feedrate for handwheel override Axial feedrate limitation Interpolation parameter (variable axis programming) Axial override Polynomial coefficient Positioning axis Positioning axis across block boundary Fundamentals Programming Manual. The axis name assigns the axis. .4 Addresses Modal/non-modal addresses Modal addresses remain valid with the programmed value (in all subsequent blocks) until a new value is programmed at the same address. an axis name is inserted in square brackets after the address. Feedrate F from N10 remains active until a new feedrate is entered. . whose number is stored in the SPINU variable. J. Examples: Program code S[SPINU]=470 Comment . No "=" required. "=" is required . Selection of the tool for the spindle. Axis X4. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Speed for the spindle. SPOSA M H T F Meaning Axis addresses Interpolation parameters Spindle speed Spindle position Special functions Auxiliary functions Tool number Feedrate Examples: Program code X7 X4=20 CR=7. whose number is stored in the SPINU variable. … I.3 S1=470 M3=5 Comment . An extended address consists of a numeric extension and an arithmetic expression assigned with an "=" character. 7 is a value. Spindle stop for third spindle The numeric extension can be replaced by a variable for addresses M. The numeric extension has one or two digits and is always positive. . 06/2009. Speed for first spindle: 470 RPM . M[SPINU]=3 T[SPINU]=7 478 Fundamentals Programming Manual. H. K S SPOS. but the "=" character can also be used here . Z. The variable identifier is enclosed in square brackets. whose number is stored in the SPINU variable. Two letters. Clockwise rotation for the spindle. Y.Other information 15. S and for SPOS and SPOSA. "=" is required .4 Addresses Extended address notation Extended address notation enables a larger number of axes and spindles to be organized in a system. The extended address notation is only permitted for the following direct addresses: Address X. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 479 . Rules for names The following rules apply when assigning identifier names: ● Maximum number of characters: – For program names: 24 – Axis identifiers: 8 – Variable identifiers: 31 ● Permissible characters are: – Letters – Numbers – Underscores ● The first two characters must be letters or underscores. 06/2009.5 15. ● Separators are not permitted between the individual characters. Fundamentals Programming Manual. It is not permissible to use the same identifier for different objects.5 Identifiers The commands according to DIN 66025 are supplemented with so-called identifiers by the NC high-level language.Other information 15.5 Identifiers 15. Identifiers can stand for: ● System variables ● User-defined variables ● Subroutines ● Keywords ● Jump markers ● Macros Note Identifiers must be unique. Note Reserved keywords must not be used as identifiers. Further reservations are: ● The identifier "RL" is reserved for conventional turning machines. ● User compile cycles begin with "CC”. Note Users should select identifiers. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Examples: System variables $P_IFRAME $P_F Note The "$" character may not be used for user-defined variables.5 Identifiers Reserved character combinations The following reservations must be noted when assigning cycle identifiers in order to avoid name collisions: ● All identifiers beginning with "CYCLE" or "_" are reserved for SIEMENS cycles. ● All identifiers beginning with "CCS" are reserved for SIEMENS compile cycles. as these identifiers are not used by the system. 06/2009. the first letter is replaced by the "$" character. which either begin with "U" (User) or contain underscores. compile cycles or SIEMENS cycles.Other information 15. Variable identifiers In variables used by the system. Meaning Active settable frame Programmed path feedrate 480 Fundamentals Programming Manual. ● All identifiers beginning with "E_ " are reserved for EASY-STEP programming. The letters "A" to "F" stand for the digits 10 to 15. more decimal places are specified than actually provided for the address.6 Constants Integer constants An integer constant is an integer value with or without sign.6 15.25 X-10.1EX-3 X0 Note If. followed by the value in hexadecimal notation.25 X. Hexadecimal constants are enclosed in single quotation marks and start with the letter "H".25 to address X Assignment of the value +0. Separators are allowed between the letters and digits. Examples: X10.25 to address X Assignment of the value +0. in an address.6 Constants 15.25 to address X Assignment of the value -10. which permits decimal point input. a value assignment to an address. then they are rounded to fit the number of places provided.Other information 15.25 to address X without leading "0" Assignment of the value -0. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 481 . Example: Program code $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK='H3C7F' Comment . 06/2009. Assignment of hexadecimal constants to machine data: MD18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Fundamentals Programming Manual.25 X0.25 X=-. Assignment of the value +10.1*10-3 to address X Assignment of the value 0 to address X (X0 cannot be replaced by X) Hexadecimal constants Constants can also be interpreted in hexadecimal format.g. e. 6 Constants Note The maximum number of characters is limited by the value range of the integer data type. Example: Program code $MN_AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC='B10000001' Comment . In this case. Note The maximum number of characters is limited by the value range of the integer data type.Other information 15. followed by the binary value. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 482 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Binary constants Constants can also be interpreted in binary format. only the digits "0" and "1" are used. Binary constants are enclosed in single quotation marks and start with the letter "B". The assignment of binary constants sets Bit0 and Bit7 in the machine data. Separators are allowed between the digits. 06/2009. jump label termination.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● : NC main block number. concatenation operator PGA * + - Operator for multiplication PGA Operator for addition Operator for subtraction ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● PGA PGA Fundamentals Programming Manual. Extended Functions (with the alphanumeric abbreviation of the corresponding function description in brackets) Function Manual.. Basic Functions (with the alphanumeric abbreviation of the corresponding function description in brackets) Function Manual. Special Functions (with the alphanumeric abbreviation of the corresponding function description in brackets) Function Manual. Job Planning Operating Manual. F = Milling): ● ○ - 4) Default setting at beginning of program (factory settings of the control.1 List of statements Reference to the document containing the detailed description of the operation: PG PGA BHD BHF FB1 ( ) FB2 ( ) FB3 ( ) FBSI FBSY FBW 2) Programming Manual. HMI sl Turning Operating Manual.. Synchronized Actions Function Manual. if nothing else programmed). Tool Management modal non-modal Standard Option Not available Effectiveness of the operation: m n 3) Availability for SINUMERIK 828D (D = Turning.1 Legend: 1) 16 16. HMI sl Milling Function Manual. Safety Integrated Function Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 483 . 06/2009. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .Tables 16. . less than or equal to Assignment operator Comparison operator.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 06/2009. greater than or equal to Operator for division Block is skipped (1st skip level) Block is skipped (8th skip level) Axis name Tool orientation: RPY or Euler angle Tool orientation: Direction/surface normal vector component Tool orientation: Surface normal vector for beginning of block Tool orientation: Surface normal vector for end of block Absolute value (amount) Absolute dimensions of coordinates/positions PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PG Skipping blocks (Page 45) ○ ○ ● ● ● ○ ● ● ● ○ ● ● ● PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PG Absolute dimensions (G90.Tables 16.. less than Concatenation operator for strings Comparison operator.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● < << <= = >= / /0 … … /7 A A2 A3 Comparison operator. AC) (Page 183) m/n n n ● ● ● A4 n ● ● ● ● A5 n ● ● ● ● ABS AC ● n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 484 Fundamentals Programming Manual. G644. G3. G643. ACP.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 485 . G645. G641. ADISPOS) (Page 357) m ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual. G642.Tables 16. G642. function) Absolute dimensions for rotary axes. Inclusion and possible activation of a measured frame Rounding clearance for path functions G1.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . ACP. approach position in negative direction Arc cosine (trigon.. approach position in positive direction Output of current block number of an alarm block.. even if "current block display suppressed" (DISPLOF) is active. G644. ACN) (Page 191) n ● ● ● ● ACOS ACP PGA PG Absolute dimension for rotary axes (DC. ADISPOS) (Page 357) ● ● ● ● ADIS m ● ● ● ● ADISPOS Rounding clearance for rapid traverse G0 PG Continuous-path mode (G64. G2. FB1(K2) PG Continuous-path mode (G64.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● ACC Effect of current axial acceleration PG Programmable acceleration override (ACC) (option) (Page 152) m ACCLIMA Effect of current maximum axial acceleration PG Influence of acceleration on following axes (VELOLIMA. ADIS. JERKLIMA) (Page 452) m ● ● ● ● ACN Absolute dimensions for rotary axes.. G641. ACN) (Page 191) n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ACTBLOCNO PGA ● ● ● ● ADDFRAME PGA. 06/2009. . G645. ADIS. PG Absolute dimension for rotary axes (DC. ACCLIMA. G643. AMIRROR) (Page 403) m m n AND ANG Logical AND Contour angle PGA PG Contour definitions: One straight line (ANG) (Page 260) n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● AP Polar angle PG Travel commands with polar coordinates (G0. OPI Read access right.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ADISPOSA ALF AMIRROR Size of the tolerance window for IPOBRKA LIFTFAST angle Programmable mirroring PGA PGA PG Programmable mirroring (MIRROR. G2. 06/2009. part program Write access protection Write access right. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . G1. part program Definition of the access right for executing the specified language element PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 486 Fundamentals Programming Manual. AP... G3. OPI Write access right.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .Tables 16. RP) (Page 213) m/n ● ● ● ● APR APRB APRP APW APWB APWP APX Read/show access protection Read access right. . AROT.... 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 487 .PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● AR Opening angle PG Circular interpolation with opening angle and center point (G2/G3.. orientation smoothing and smoothing types Additive programmable translation Variable axis identifier Advance container axis ATRANS PG Zero offset (TRANS.. AR) (Page 236) m/n AROT Programmable rotation PG Programmable rotation (ROT.. AROTS.. arc sine Akima spline Arc tangent 2 PGA PGA PGA m ● ● - ● ○ ● ● ● ● - ● ○ ● ● Axis-specific tolerance for PGA compressor functions. J. ATRANS) (Page 376) n ● ● ● ● AX AXCSWAP PGA PGA m/n ● - ● - ● - ● - Fundamentals Programming Manual. X. ASCALE) (Page 398) n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ASIN ASPLINE ATAN2 ATOL Arithmetic function.. RPL) (Page 384) n ● ● ● ● AROTS Programmable frame PG rotations with solid angles Programmable frame rotations with solid angles (ROTS.. Z../ I.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . K..Tables 16. CROTS) (Page 396) Macro definition Programmable scaling n ● ● ● ● SL ASCALE PGA PG Programmable scale factor (SCALE. 06/2009... Y.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . axis address Converts input string into axis identifier Converts string spindle number PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA Request axis for a PGA specific channel. 06/2009.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● AXCTSWE AXCTSWED AXIS AXNAME AXSTRING AXTOCHAN Advance container axis Rotate axis container Axis identifier.Tables 16.. Possible from NC program and synchronized action. Converts axis identifier into a spindle index Axis name Tool orientation: RPY or Euler angle Tool orientation: Direction/surface normal vector component Tool orientation: Surface normal vector for beginning of block Tool orientation: Surface normal vector for end of block Bit AND Bit OR AXTOSPI B B2 B3 PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA m/n n n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● B4 n ● ● ● ● B5 n ● ● ● ● B_AND B_OR ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 488 Fundamentals Programming Manual.. 1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .Tables 16. SOFTA.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● m ● ● ○ ● ● ● ● ○ B_NOT B_XOR BAUTO Bit negation Bit exclusive OR Definition of the first spline section by means of the next 3 points Together with the keyword TO defines the program part to be processed in an indirect subprogram call Processing of interrupt routine is only to start with the next block change Natural transition to first spline block Data type: Boolean value TRUE/FALSE or 1/0 Tests whether the value falls within the defined value range. BRISKA. BRISKA. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 489 . SOFTA. DRIVE. If the values are equal. 06/2009. the test value is returned. SOFT. DRIVEA) (Page 449) m ● ● ● ● BRISKA Switch on brisk path acceleration for the programmed axes B-spline Tangential transition to first spline block PG Acceleration mode (BRISK. DRIVE. Fast non-smoothed path acceleration PGA PGA PGA PGA BLOCK ● ● ● ● BLSYNC PGA ● ● ● ● BNAT 4) BOOL BOUND PGA PGA PGA m ● ● ○ ● ● ● ● ○ ● ● BRISK 4) PG Acceleration mode (BRISK.. DRIVEA) (Page 449) ● ● ● ● BSPLINE BTAN PGA PGA m m - ○ ○ - ○ ○ Fundamentals Programming Manual. SOFT.. .1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . working area limitation and software limits Indirect subroutine call Programmable search path for subroutine calls PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA m/n n n C4 n ● ● ● ● C5 n ● ● ● ● CAC CACN ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● CACP ● ● ● ● CALCDAT ● ● ● ● CALCPOSI ● ● ● ● CALL CALLPATH PGA PGA ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 490 Fundamentals Programming Manual.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● C C2 C3 Axis name Tool orientation: RPY or Euler angle Tool orientation: Direction/surface normal vector component Tool orientation: Surface normal vector for beginning of block Tool orientation: Surface normal vector for end of block Absolute position approach Absolute approach of the value listed in the table in negative direction Absolute approach of the value listed in the table in positive direction Calculates radius and center point of circle from 3 or 4 points Checking for protection zone violation.Tables 16.. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Tables 16. CDOF2) (Page 340) m ● ● ● ● CDON PG Collision monitoring (CDON. CDOF2) (Page 340) m ● ● ● ● CFC 4) Constant feedrate on contour PG Feedrate optimization for curved path sections (CFTCP.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● CANCEL CASE CDC CDOF 4) Cancel modal synchronized action Conditional program branch Direct approach of a position Collision detection OFF PGA PGA PGA PG Collision monitoring (CDON. CDOF.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . CFIN) (Page 158) m ● ● ● ● CFIN Constant feedrate for internal radius only. CFC. CDOF2) (Page 340) CDOF2 Collision detection OFF.. CDOF. CFC. CDOF. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 491 .. CFIN) (Page 158) m ● ● ● ● CFINE CFTCP PGA PG Feedrate optimization for curved path sections (CFTCP. CFIN) (Page 158) m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● CHAN PGA ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual. for 3D circumferential milling Collision detection ON PG Collision monitoring (CDON. CFC. not for external radius Assignment of fine offset to a FRAME variable Constant feedrate in tool center point (center point path) Specify validity range for data PG Feedrate optimization for curved path sections (CFTCP. . J1... RNDM. FRC.) (Page 242) m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● CLEARM Reset one/several markers for channel coordination Deselect interrupt: Mirror on a coordinate axis Motion end when "Exact stop coarse" reached PGA PGA PGA PGA m - - - - CLRINT CMIRROR COARSEA ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 492 Fundamentals Programming Manual.. value = length of chamfer in direction of movement Approach position by increments Circular interpolation through intermediate point FBW PGA PG Chamfer... Y. RND... RND. FRC. RNDM. X. FRCM) (Page 295) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● CIC CIP PGA PG Circular interpolation with intermediate point and end point (CIP. I1.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● CHANDATA CHAR CHECKSUM Set channel number for channel data access Data type: ASCII character Forms the checksum over an array as a fixedlength STRING Chamfer.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 ... rounding (CHF.. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . CHR.. FRCM) (Page 295) CHF n ● ● ● ● CHKDM CHKDNO CHR Uniqueness check within a magazine Check for unique D numbers Chamfer. Z. rounding (CHF. CHR...Tables 16. K1.. value = length of chamfer PGA PGA PGA PG Chamfer. CORROF) (Page 415) COS COUPDEF PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA ● ○ ● - ● ○ ● - COUPDEL COUPOF COUPOFS ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○ ○ - COUPON PGA ○ - ○ - Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ○ ○ COMPCAD Compressor ON: Optimum surface quality for CAD programs Compressor ON: Polynomials with constant curvature Control instruction for reading and writing data Compressor OFF Compressor ON PGA PGA m COMPCURV m - ○ - ○ COMPLETE COMPOF 4) COMPON CONTDCON CONTPRON CORROF PGA ● m ● ● ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ● PGA PGA Tabular contour decoding PGA ON Activate reference preprocessing All active overlaid movements are deselected Cosine (trigon. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 493 ..Tables 16. function) Definition ELG group/synchronous spindle group Delete ELG group ELG group/synchronous spindle pair ON Deactivate ELG group/synchronous spindle pair with stop of following spindle ELG group/synchronous spindle pair ON PGA PG Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF.. Y. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 ...... K... CPRECON.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .. CROTS) (Page 396) n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● CRPL FB1(K2) ● ● ● ● 494 Fundamentals Programming Manual.. CPRECOF (Page 457) m m ○ ● ● ● ● ○ ● ● ● ● CPRECON PG Contour accuracy.. 06/2009. Z. Programmable frame rotations with solid angles (rotation in the specified axes) Frame rotation in any plane PGA PG Programmable frame rotations with solid angles (ROTS. CPRECOF (Page 457) m ● ● ● ● CPROT CPROTDEF CR PGA PGA PG Circular interpolation with radius and end point (G2/G3. X...PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ○ ○ - COUPONC Transfer activation of ELG group/synchronous spindle pair with previous programming Reset ELG group Path motion Programmable contour accuracy OFF Programmable contour accuracy ON Channel-specific protection zone ON/OFF Definition of a channelspecific protection zone Circle radius PGA COUPRES CP CPRECOF 4) PGA PGA PG Contour accuracy..Tables 16. AROTS. CR) (Page 233) n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● CROT CROTS Rotation of the current coordinate system.. J. CPRECON./ I.. ....PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● m m ● ● ○ ● ● ● ● ○ ● CSCALE CSPLINE CT Scale factor for multiple axes Cubic spline Circle with tangential transition PGA PGA PG Circular interpolation with tangential transition (CT.. Y.Tables 16. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 495 .1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 ..) (Page 246) CTAB Define following axis PGA position according to leading axis position from curve table Table definition ON Clear curve table Table definition OFF Checks the curve table with number n Number of curve tables still possible in the memory Number of polynomials still possible in the memory Number of curve segments still possible in the memory Returns table number of the nth curve table Define leading axis position according to following axis position from curve table - - - - CTABDEF CTABDEL CTABEND CTABEXISTS CTABFNO PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA - - - - CTABFPOL - - - - CTABFSEG - - - - CTABID CTABINV - - - - Fundamentals Programming Manual. X.. 06/2009. Z.. 1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . number of curve segments still possible in the memory CTABMPOL PGA PGA - - - - CTABMSEG - - - - CTABNO CTABNOMEM CTABPERIOD Number of defined curve FB3(M3) tables in SRAM or DRAM Number of defined curve PGA tables in SRAM or DRAM Returns the table periodicity of curve table number n Number of polynomials already used in the memory - - - - PGA PGA CTABPOL - - - - CTABPOLID Number of the curve PGA polynomials used by the curve table with number n Number of curve PGA segments already used in the memory Number of the curve PGA segments used by the curve table with number n - - - - CTABSEG - - - - CTABSEGID - - - - 496 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009..PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F - CTABISLOCK Returns the lock state of the curve table with number n Delete and overwrite. number of polynomials still possible in the memory Max. lock PGA PGA CTABLOCK CTABMEMTYP - - - - Returns the memory in PGA which curve table number n is created Max.Tables 16.. CUT2DF) (Page 344) m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . orientation smoothing and smoothing types Zero offset for multiple axes 2D tool offset - - - - CTABTMAX - - - - CTABTMIN - - - - CTABTSP PGA PGA PGA PGA - - - - CTABTSV - - - - CTABUNLOCK CTOL - ○ - ○ CTRANS CUT2D 4) PGA PG 2D tool compensation (CUT2D..Tables 16.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F - CTABSEV Returns the final value of the following axis of a segment of the curve table Returns the initial value of the following axis of a segment of the curve table Returns the value of the leading axis at curve table end PGA CTABSSV PGA - - - - CTABTEP PGA - - - - CTABTEV Returns the value of the PGA the following axis at curve table end Returns the maximum PGA value of the following axis of the curve table Returns the minimum PGA value of the following axis of the curve table Returns the value of the leading axis at curve table start Returns the value of the following axis at curve table start Revoke delete and overwrite lock Contour tolerance for compressor functions.. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 497 . CUTCONOF) (Page 347) m ● ● ● ● CUTCONON Constant radius compensation ON PG Keep tool radius compensation constant (CUTCONON.Tables 16.. CUTCONOF) (Page 347) m ● ● ● ● CUTMOD Activate "Modification of the offset data for rotatable tools" Measuring cycles PGA BHD/BHF ● ● ● ● CYCLE..1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . 06/2009.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● CUT2DF 2D tool offset The tool offset is applied relative to the current frame (inclined plane). CUT2DF) (Page 344) m CUT3DC CUT3DCC PGA PGA PGA m m - - - - CUT3DCCD m - - - - CUT3DF CUT3DFF PGA PGA m m - - - - CUT3DFS PGA m - - - - CUTCONOF 4) PG Keep tool radius compensation constant (CUTCONON... 498 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 3D tool offset circumferential milling 3D tool offset circumferential milling with limitation surfaces 3D tool offset circumferential milling with limitation surfaces with differential tool 3D tool offset face milling 3D tool offset face milling with constant tool orientation dependent on active frame 3D tool offset face milling with constant tool orientation independent of active frame Constant radius compensation OFF PG 2D tool compensation (CUT2D. PG Tool offset call (D) (Page 84) PG Tool offset call (D) (Page 84) Absolute non-modal axis. DIACYCOFA. DIAMCHAN. DAC. RAC. DIC. 06/2009.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 499 . ACN) (Page 191) n ● ● ● ● DEF DEFINE DEFAULT DELAYFSTON DELAYFSTOF DELDL DELDTG DELETE PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA m m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Deletion of distance-to-go PGA Delete the specified file.PG specific diameter Axis-specific diameter/radius programming programming (DIAMONA. DIAMCHANA. DIAMOFA.. RIC) (Page 200) Absolute dimensions for rotary axes.Tables 16. offsets for the tool are ineffective. DIAM90A. approach position directly Variable definition Keyword for macro definitions Branch in CASE branch Define the start of a stop delay section Define the end of a stop delay section Delete additive offsets DC PG Absolute dimension for rotary axes (DC. PGA Fundamentals Programming Manual.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● D D0 DAC Tool offset number With D0. The file name can be specified with path and file identifier. ACP.. DIACYCOFA. radius programming for G91 FB1(W1) FB1(P1) PGA Channel-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMON. DIAMCHANA. DIACYCOFA. 06/2009. DAC.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . RIC) (Page 200) ● ● ● ● DIAMCHANA Transfer of the diameter programming channel status PG Axis-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMONA. DAC. DIAMCYCOF) (Page 197) DIACYCOFA m ● ● ● ● DIAM90 m ● ● ● ● DIAM90A Axis-specific modal diameter programming for G90 and AC. RIC) (Page 200) m ● ● ● ● DIAMCHAN Transfer of all axes from MD axis functions to diameter programming channel status PG Axis-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMONA. DIAMCHANA. DIAMOF. DIAMCHANA. DIAMCHAN. DIAM90A. DIACYCOFA.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . RIC) (Page 200) ● ● ● ● 500 Fundamentals Programming Manual. DIAMCHAN. RAC. DIAMOFA. DIAMOFA. DIC. DIC. DIAM90A. DIAMCHAN.. radius programming for G91 and IC PG Axis-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMONA. DIAMOFA. RAC. DIC.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● DELTOOLENV Delete data records describing tool environments Axis-specific modal diameter programming: OFF in cycles Diameter programming for G90.Tables 16. RAC. DAC. DIAM90A. DIAM90. DIAM90A. DIC.. see machine manufacturer Axis-specific modal diameter programming: OFF Normal position. DIAMCHAN. DIAMOF. DIAMOFA.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . DIC.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● DIAMCYCOF Channel-specific diameter programming: OFF in cycles Diameter programming: OFF Normal position. see machine manufacturer FB1(P1) PG Channel-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMON. DIAMCHAN. DAC. see machine manufacturer PG Axis-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMONA. DIAMCHAN. DIACYCOFA. DIAM90A. DIAMCYCOF) (Page 197) m DIAMOF 4) m ● ● ● ● DIAMOFA PG Axis-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMONA.Tables 16. DIACYCOFA. RAC. DIAMOFA. DIAM90A. RIC) (Page 200) n ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual. DAC. DIAMOF. DAC. DIAMCYCOF) (Page 197) m ● ● ● ● DIAMONA Axis-specific modal diameter programming: ON Activation. DIACYCOFA. RAC. DIAM90. RAC. DIAMOFA. 06/2009. DIAMCHANA. DIAM90. DIC. DIAMCHANA. RIC) (Page 200) m ● ● ● ● DIAMON Diameter programming: ON PG Channel-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMON. DIAMCHANA.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 501 . RIC) (Page 200) m ● ● ● ● DIC Relative non-modal axisspecific diameter programming PG Axis-specific diameter/radius programming (DIAMONA. ALF. G147. FAD. 06/2009. G341. LFWP. LFTXT. G348. LFPOS. DISCL.. G340. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . PR) (Page 323) ● ● ● ● DISPLOF DISPLON DISPR DISR DITE Suppress current block display Revoke suppression of the current block display Path differential for repositioning PGA PGA PGA n n m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Distance for repositioning PGA Thread run-out path PG Programmable run-in and runout paths (DITS. DISC) (Page 319) m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● DISCL PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143. G451. G248. G347.. POLFMASK. DITE) (Page 278) m ● ● ● ● 502 Fundamentals Programming Manual. POLF. DITE) (Page 278) DITS Thread run-in path PG Programmable run-in and runout paths (DITS. PM.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● DILF Retraction path (length) PG Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON. DILF. G247. G148.Tables 16. DISR. POLFMLIN) (Page 290) m DISABLE DISC Interrupt OFF Transition circle overshoot tool radius compensation Clearance between the end point of the fast infeed motion and the machining plane PGA PG Compensation at the outside corners (G450. LFOF. DYNSEMIFIN. SOFT..PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● m ● ● ● - DIV DL Integer division Select locationdependent additive tool offset (DL. 06/2009. SOFT. DYNROUGH. BRISKA.Tables 16. DRIVEA) (Page 449) m ● ● ● ● DRIVEA Activate bent acceleration PG characteristic curve for Acceleration mode (BRISK. DYNFINISH) (Page 454) m ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual.. DYNPOS. CORROF) (Page 415) m ● ● ● ● DRIVE PG Acceleration mode (BRISK. DYNSEMIFIN. total set-up offset) Keyword for synchronized action.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . DRIVE. DRIVEA) (Page 449) Dynamic response for smooth finishing ● ● ● ● DYNFINISH PG Activation of technology-specific dynamic values (DYNNORM. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 503 . DYNROUGH. DYNPOS. DRIVE. triggers action when condition is fulfilled Deactivation of handwheel offsets (DRF) Velocity-dependent path acceleration PGA PGA DO PGA ● ● ● ● DRFOF PG Deselecting overlaid movements (DRFOF. DYNFINISH) (Page 454) m ● ● ● ● DYNNORM Standard dynamic response PG Activation of technology-specific dynamic values (DYNNORM. SOFTA. the programmed axes BRISKA. SOFTA. Tables 16.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● DYNPOS Dynamic response for PG positioning mode, tapping Activation of technology-specific dynamic values (DYNNORM, DYNPOS, DYNROUGH, DYNSEMIFIN, DYNFINISH) (Page 454) Dynamic response for roughing m DYNROUGH PG Activation of technology-specific dynamic values (DYNNORM, DYNPOS, DYNROUGH, DYNSEMIFIN, DYNFINISH) (Page 454) m ● ● ● ● DYNSEMIFIN Dynamic response for finishing PG Activation of technology-specific dynamic values (DYNNORM, DYNPOS, DYNROUGH, DYNSEMIFIN, DYNFINISH) (Page 454) m ● ● ● ● DZERO EAUTO Marks all D numbers of the TO unit as invalid Definition of the last spline section by means of the last 3 points Definition of an electronic gear Delete coupling definition for the following axis Turn off electronic gear continuously Turn off electronic gear selectively Turn on electronic gear Turn on electronic gear PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA m ● - ● ○ ● - ● ○ EGDEF EGDEL EGOFC EGOFS EGON EGONSYN - - - - 504 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Tables 16.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F - EGONSYNE Turn on electronic gear, with specification of approach mode Program branch, if IF condition not fulfilled Interrupt ON Natural transition to next traversing block End line of FOR counter loop End line of IF branch End label for part program repetitions with REPEAT End line of endless program loop LOOP End line of program with start line PROC End line of WHILE loop Tangential transition to next traversing block at spline begin Execute synchronized action on transition of condition from FALSE to TRUE Keyword for value assignment in exponential notation PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA, FB1(K1) PGA m ELSE ENABLE ENAT 4) ENDFOR ENDIF ENDLABEL ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ○ ● ● ● ENDLOOP ENDPROC ENDWHILE ETAN ● ● ● ● ● ○ ● ● ● - ● ● ● ○ PGA PGA PGA m ● - EVERY ● ● ● ● EX PGA ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 505 Tables 16.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● EXECSTRING Transfer of a string variable with the executing part program line Execute an element from a motion table Program execution ON Exponential function ex Execute external subprogram Declaration of a subprogram with parameter transfer Feedrate value (in conjunction with G4 the dwell time is also programmed with F) Axial feedrate PGA EXECTAB EXECUTE EXP EXTCALL EXTERN PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PG Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) (Page 119) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● F ● ● ● ● FA PG Traversing positioning axes (POS, POSA, POSP, FA, WAITP, WAITMC) (Page 129) m ● ● ● ● FAD Infeed rate for soft approach and retraction PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) ● ● ● ● FALSE FB Logical constant: Incorrect Non-modal feedrate PGA PG Non-modal feedrate (FB) (Page 164) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 506 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Tables 16.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F m n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● FCTDEF FCUB FD Define polynomial function Feedrate variable according to cubic spline Path feedrate for handwheel override Axis feedrate for handwheel override Corner deceleration OFF Feedforward control OFF PGA PGA PG Feedrate with handwheel override (FD, FDA) (Page 154) FDA PG Feedrate with handwheel override (FD, FDA) (Page 154) n ● ● ● ● FENDNORM FFWOF 4) PGA PG Traversing with feedforward control, FFWON, FFWOF (Page 456) m m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● FFWON Feedforward control ON PG Traversing with feedforward control, FFWON, FFWOF (Page 456) m ● ● ● ● FGREF Reference radius for rotary axes or path reference factors for orientation axes (vector interpolation) Definition of axis/axes with path feedrate PG Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) (Page 119) m ● ● ● ● FGROUP PG Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) (Page 119) ● ● ● ● FI FIFOCTRL Parameter for access to frame data: Fine offset Control of preprocessing buffer PGA PGA m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 507 Tables 16.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● FILEDATE FILEINFO Returns date of most recent write access to file Returns summary information listing FILEDATE, FILESIZE, FILESTAT, and FILETIME Returns current file size Returns file status of rights for read, write, execute, display, delete (rwxsd) Returns time of most recent write access to file End of motion when "Exact stop fine" reached Limit velocity for synchronized axis Feed linear variable Multiple feedrates axial PGA PGA FILESIZE FILESTAT PGA PGA ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● FILETIME FINEA FL FLIN FMA PGA PGA PG PGA PG Several feedrate values in one block (F, ST, SR, FMA, STA, SRA) (Page 161) m m m m ● ● ● ● - ● ● ● ● - ● ● ● ● - ● ● ● ● - FNORM 4) FOCOF FOCON Feedrate normal to DIN 66025 Deactivate travel with limited torque/force Activate travel with limited torque/force PGA PGA PGA m m m ● ○ ○ ● - ● ○ ○ ● - 508 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Tables 16.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● FOR FP Counter loop with fixed number of passes Fixed point: Number of fixed point to be approached Feedrate characteristic programmed via a polynomial Rotary axis identifier PGA PG Fixed-point approach (G75, G751) (Page 437) FPO PGA PG Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA, FPR, FPRAON, FPRAOF) (Page 146) - - - - FPR ● ● ● ● FPRAOF Deactivate revolutional feedrate PG Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA, FPR, FPRAON, FPRAOF) (Page 146) ● ● ● ● FPRAON Activate revolutional feedrate PG Feedrate for positioning axes/spindles (FA, FPR, FPRAON, FPRAOF) (Page 146) ● ● ● ● FRAME Data type for the definition of coordinate systems Feedrate for radius and chamfer PGA PG Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM) (Page 295) ● ● ● ● FRC n ● ● ● ● FRCM Feedrate for radius and chamfer, modal PG Chamfer, rounding (CHF, CHR, RND, RNDM, FRC, FRCM) (Page 295) m ● ● ● ● FROM The action is executed if the condition is fulfilled once and as long as the synchronized action is active PGA ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 509 Tables 16.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● m m m m ● ● ● ● ● m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● FTOC FTOCOF 4) FTOCON FXS FXST FXSW FZ Change fine tool offset Online fine tool offset OFF Online fine tool offset ON Travel to fixed stop ON Torque limit for travel to fixed stop Monitoring window for travel to fixed stop Tooth feedrate PG PGA PGA PG PG PG PG Tooth feedrate (G95 FZ) (Page 165) G0 Linear interpolation with rapid traverse (rapid traverse motion) Linear interpolation with feedrate (linear interpolation) Circular interpolation clockwise Circular interpolation counter-clockwise Dwell time, preset Oblique plunge-cut grinding Compensatory motion during oblique plunge-cut grinding PG Rapid traverse movement (G0, RTLION, RTLIOF) (Page 217) m ● ● ● ● G1 4) PG Linear interpolation (G1) (Page 222) m ● ● ● ● G2 PG Circular interpolation types (G2/G3, ...) (Page 225) m ● ● ● ● G3 PG Circular interpolation types (G2/G3, ...) (Page 225) m ● ● ● ● G4 G5 G7 PG Dwell time (G4) (Page 458) n n n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● PGA PGA 510 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Tables 16.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● G9 Exact stop - deceleration PG Exact stop (G60, G9, G601, G602, G603) (Page 353) n G17 4) Selection of working plane X/Y Selection of working plane Z/X Selection of working plane Y/Z Lower working area limitation PG Selection of the working plane (G17/G18/G19) (Page 179) m ● ● ● ● G18 PG Selection of the working plane (G17/G18/G19) (Page 179) m ● ● ● ● G19 PG Selection of the working plane (G17/G18/G19) (Page 179) m ● ● ● ● G25 PG Programmable spindle speed limitation (G25, G26) (Page 118) n ● ● ● ● G26 Upper working area limitation PG Programmable spindle speed limitation (G25, G26) (Page 118) n ● ● ● ● G33 Thread cutting with constant lead Thread cutting with linear increasing lead PG Thread cutting with constant lead (G33) (Page 270) m ● ● ● ● G34 PG Thread cutting with increasing or decreasing lead (G34, G35) (Page 281) m ● ● ● ● G35 Thread cutting with linear decreasing lead PG Thread cutting with increasing or decreasing lead (G34, G35) (Page 281) m ● ● ● ● G40 4) Tool radius compensation PG OFF Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) (Page 301) Tool radius compensation PG left of contour Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) (Page 301) m ● ● ● ● G41 m ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 511 Tables 16.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● G42 Tool radius compensation PG right of contour Tool radius compensation (G40, G41, G42, OFFN) (Page 301) Suppression of current work offset (non-modal) m G53 PG Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) (Page 173) n ● ● ● ● G54 1st adjustable work offset PG Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) (Page 173) m ● ● ● ● G55 2nd adjustable work offset PG Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) (Page 173) m ● ● ● ● G56 3rd adjustable work offset PG Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) (Page 173) m ● ● ● ● G57 4th adjustable work offset PG Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) (Page 173) m ● ● ● ● G58 Axial programmable work PG offset, absolute, coarse Axial zero offset (G58, G59) offset (Page 381) Axial programmable work PG offset, additive, fine offset Axial zero offset (G58, G59) (Page 381) Exact stop - velocity deceleration n ● ● ● ● G59 n ● ● ● ● G60 4) PG Exact stop (G60, G9, G601, G602, G603) (Page 353) m ● ● ● ● 512 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Tables 16.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● G62 Corner deceleration at inside corners when tool radius offset is active (G41, G42) Tapping with compensating chuck Continuous-path mode PGA m G63 PG Tapping with compensating chuck (G63) (Page 288) n ● ● ● ● G64 PG Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642, G643, G644, G645, ADIS, ADISPOS) (Page 357) m ● ● ● ● G70 Inch dimensions for geometric specifications (lengths) Metric dimensions for geometric specifications (lengths) Search for reference PG Inch or metric dimensions (G70/G700, G71/G710) (Page 194) m ● ● ● ● G71 4) PG Inch or metric dimensions (G70/G700, G71/G710) (Page 194) m ● ● ● ● G74 PG Reference point approach (G74) (Page 436) n ● ● ● ● G75 Fixed point approach PG Fixed-point approach (G75, G751) (Page 437) n ● ● ● ● G90 4) Absolute dimensions PG Absolute dimensions (G90, AC) (Page 183) m/n ● ● ● ● G91 Incremental dimensions PG Incremental dimensions (G91, IC) (Page 186) m/n ● ● ● ● G93 Inverse-time feedrate rpm PG Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) (Page 119) m ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 513 Tables 16.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● G94 4) Linear feedrate F in mm/min or inch/min and degree/min PG Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) (Page 119) m G95 Revolutional feedrate F in PG mm/rev or inch/rev Feedrate (G93, G94, G95, F, FGROUP, FL, FGREF) (Page 119) Constant cutting rate (as for G95) ON m ● ● ● ● G96 PG Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) (Page 108) m ● ● ● ● G97 Constant cutting rate (as for G95) OFF PG Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962, G97/G971/G972, G973, LIMS, SCC) (Page 108) m ● ● ● ● G110 Pole programming relative to the last programmed setpoint position Pole programming relative to zero of current workpiece coordinate system Pole programming relative to the last valid pole SAR approach direction defined by G41/G42 PG Reference point of the polar coordinates (G110, G111, G112) (Page 211) n ● ● ● ● G111 PG Reference point of the polar coordinates (G110, G111, G112) (Page 211) n ● ● ● ● G112 PG Reference point of the polar coordinates (G110, G111, G112) (Page 211) n ● ● ● ● G140 4) PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) m ● ● ● ● 514 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Tables 16.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● G141 SAR approach direction to left of contour PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) m G142 SAR approach direction to right of contour PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) m ● ● ● ● G143 SAR approach direction tangent-dependent PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) m ● ● ● ● G147 Soft approach with straight line PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) n ● ● ● ● G148 Soft retraction with straight line PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) n ● ● ● ● G153 Suppression of current frames including basic frame Soft approach with quadrant PG Settable work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599, G53, G500, SUPA, G153) (Page 173) n ● ● ● ● G247 PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) n ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 515 Tables 16.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 - - - PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● G248 Soft retraction with quadrant PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) n G290 G291 G331 Switch over to SINUMERIK mode ON Switch over to ISO2/3 mode ON Rigid tapping, positive lead, clockwise Rigid tapping, negative lead, counter-clockwise FBW FBW PG Tapping without compensating chuck (G331, G332) (Page 283) m m m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● G332 PG Tapping without compensating chuck (G331, G332) (Page 283) m ● ● ● ● G340 4) Spatial approach block PG (depth and in plane at the Approach and retraction (G140 same time (helix)) to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) Initial infeed on perpendicular axis (z), then approach in plane m ● ● ● ● G341 PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) m ● ● ● ● G347 Soft approach with semicircle PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) n ● ● ● ● G348 Soft retraction with semicircle PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143, G147, G148, G247, G248, G347, G348, G340, G341, DISR, DISCL, FAD, PM, PR) (Page 323) n ● ● ● ● 516 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 G601. G153) (Page 173) m ● ● ● ● G505 to G599 PG Settable work offset (G54 to G57. G603) (Page 353) m ● ● ● ● G602 PG Exact stop (G60... G505 to G599. G603) (Page 353) m ● ● ● ● G603 PG Exact stop (G60.. G153) (Page 173) m ● ● ● ● G601 4) Block change on exact stop fine Block change on exact stop coarse Block change at IPO block end PG Exact stop (G60. G53. SUPA. G603) (Page 353) m ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual. G461. G602. DISC) (Page 319) m ● ● ● ● G460 4) Activation of collision detection for the approach and retraction block Insertion of a circle into the TRC block PG Approach and retraction with enhanced retraction strategies (G460. G451. 06/2009.. basic frames are active 5th . G500. G9. 99th adjustable work offset PG Settable work offset (G54 to G57. G461.Tables 16. G462) (Page 335) m ● ● ● ● G461 PG Approach and retraction with enhanced retraction strategies (G460. G505 to G599.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . DISC) (Page 319) m G451 Intersection of equidistances PG Compensation at the outside corners (G450. G461. G602. G53. G602. G462) (Page 335) m ● ● ● ● G500 4) Deactivation of all adjustable frames. G9. G462) (Page 335) m ● ● ● ● G462 Insertion of a straight line into the TRC block PG Approach and retraction with enhanced retraction strategies (G460. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 517 .PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● G450 4) Transition circle PG Compensation at the outside corners (G450. SUPA. G601. G500. G601. G9. G451. G643. ADISPOS) (Page 357) m ● ● ● ● G645 PG Continuous-path mode (G64. G643.Tables 16. G644. G644. . G641. G71/G710) (Page 194) m ● ● ● ● G710 4) PG Inch or metric dimensions (G70/G700. G644. ADISPOS) (Page 357) m m G642 PG Continuous-path mode (G64. G642. G645. G645. G645. G641.. ADIS. ADISPOS) (Page 357) m ● ● ● ● G700 PG Inch or metric dimensions (G70/G700. ADIS. G642. G751) (Page 437) m ● ● ● ● G751 n ● ● ● ● G810 4).PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● G621 G641 Corner deceleration at all corners Continuous-path mode with smoothing as per distance criterion (= programmable rounding clearance) Continuous-path mode with smoothing within the defined tolerances PGA PG Continuous-path mode (G64. G641.. ADIS. ADIS.. G71/G710) (Page 194) PG Fixed-point approach (G75. G643. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .. ADISPOS) (Page 357) m ● ● ● ● G644 PG Continuous-path mode (G64. G641. G643. G641. ADISPOS) (Page 357) m ● ● ● ● G643 Continuous-path mode with smoothing within the defined tolerances (blockinternal) Continuous-path mode with smoothing with maximum possible dynamic response Continuous-path mode with smoothing and tangential block transitions within the defined tolerances Inch dimensions for geometric and technological specifications (lengths. G645.. 06/2009. G819 PGA ● ● ● ● 518 Fundamentals Programming Manual. feedrate) Approach fixed point via intermediate point G group reserved for the OEM user PG Continuous-path mode (G64. G644.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . G642. G642. feedrate) Metric dimensions for geometric and technological specifications (lengths. G645. ADIS. G644. G642. G643. LIMS. G973. SCC) (Page 108) m ● ● ● ● G972 Freeze linear or revolutional feedrate and constant spindle speed PG Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 519 .1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . G973. SCC) (Page 108) m ● ● ● ● G971 Freeze spindle speed and linear feedrate PG Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● m m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● G820 4).. LIMS.. SCC) (Page 108) m ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual. .. 06/2009. G973. G97/G971/G972. G97/G971/G972. G829 G931 G942 G group reserved for the OEM user Feedrate specified by traversing time Freeze linear feedrate and constant cutting rate or spindle speed Freeze revolutional feedrate and constant cutting rate or spindle speed Constant cutting rate and linear feedrate PGA G952 m ● ● ● ● G961 PG Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962.. LIMS. G97/G971/G972. G97/G971/G972. LIMS. SCC) (Page 108) m ● ● ● ● G962 Linear or revolutional feedrate and constant cutting rate PG Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962.Tables 16. G973. 1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● G973 Revolutional feedrate without spindle speed limitation PG Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962. 06/2009. SCC) (Page 108) m GEOAX GET GETACTT Assign new channel axes PGA to geometry axes 1 .3 Replace enabled axis between channels Gets active tool from a group of tools with the same name Gets the T number associated with an absolute D number Replace axis directly between channels Returns the D number of a cutting edge (CE) of a tool (T) Reading of the loaded T number Find a free space in the magazine for a given tool Return selected T number Get T number for tool name Read out tool lengths and/or tool length components ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● PGA FBW PGA PGA PGA FBW FBW FBW FBW FB1(W1) GETACTTD ● ● ● ● GETD GETDNO ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● GETEXET GETFREELOC GETSELT GETT GETTCOR ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 520 Fundamentals Programming Manual..Tables 16. G973. G97/G971/G972. LIMS. hole BHD/BHF circle ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual... but suppress alarm 14080 "Jump destination not found" FB1(W1) PGA GOTOB PGA PGA ● ● ● ● GOTOC ● ● ● ● GOTOF GOTOS GP Jump forward (toward the PGA end of the program) Jump back to beginning of program Keyword for the indirect programming of position attributes Deselect constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPS) Select constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPS) Auxiliary function output to the PLC ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● PGA PGA PG Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPSON. hole BHD/BHF sequence Drilling pattern cycle..1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .. PG/FB1(H2) Auxiliary function outputs (Page 419) ● ● ● ● HOLES1 HOLES2 Drilling pattern cycle. D and DL numbers Jump operation first forward then backward (direction initially to end of program and then to beginning of program) Jump backward (toward the beginning of the program) As GOTO. GWPSOF) (Page 115) n ● ● ● ● H.Tables 16.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● GETTENV GOTO Read T. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 521 . 06/2009. GWPSOF) (Page 115) GWPSOF n ● ● ● ● GWPSON PG Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPSON. ..1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .. K.... X.... 06/2009. J. Y..........Tables 16...... I. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 ..PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● I Interpolation parameters PG Circular interpolation with center point and end point (G2/G3. AR) (Page 236) n ● ● ● ● IC Incremental dimensions PG Incremental dimensions (G91. IC) (Page 186) n ● ● ● ● ICYCOF All blocks of a technology PGA cycle are processed in one interpolation cycle following ICYCOF Each block of a technology cycle is processed in a separate interpolation cycle following ICYCON Identifier for modal synchronized actions Identifier for modal static synchronized actions Introduction of a conditional jump in the part program/technology cycle Define index of character in input string Initialization of variables at POWER ON Initialization of variables at reset ● ● ● ● ICYCON PGA ● ● ● ● ID IDS IF PGA PGA PGA m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● INDEX INIPO INIRE PGA PGA PGA ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 522 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Y. K.... Z. X. J.) (Page 229) n I1 Intermediate point coordinate PG Circular interpolation with opening angle and center point (G2/G3../ I. Z. Tables 16. INVCCW) (Page 253) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● INVCCW m - - - - INVCW PG Involute interpolation (INVCW. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 523 .1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . counterclockwise Trace involute. clockwise INITIAL INT INTERSEC PGA PGA PGA PG Involute interpolation (INVCW.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● - INICF INIT Initialization of variables at NewConfig PGA Selection of a particular PGA NC program for execution in a particular channel Generation of an INI file across all areas Data type: Integer with sign Calculate intersection between two contour elements Trace involute... 06/2009. INVCCW) (Page 253) m - - - - INVFRAME IP IPOBRKA IPOENDA IPTRLOCK Calculate the inverse frame from a frame Variable interpolation parameter Motion criterion from braking ramp activation End of motion when “IPO stop” reached Freeze start of the untraceable program section at next machine function block FB1(K2) PGA PGA PGA PGA m m m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual. .. X..1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 ....... I1... Z.. Y. 06/2009.. J..Tables 16... X..PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● IPTRUNLOCK Set end of untraceable program section at current block at time of interruption Check if geometry axis 1 specified as parameter Insertion depth Check whether the file exists in the NCK application memory Check whether the input string can be converted to a number Indirect call of a program programmed in an ISO language Check whether the transfer parameter contains a variable declared in the NC Interpolation parameters PGA m ISAXIS ISD ISFILE PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ISNUMBER ● ● ● ● ISOCALL ● ● ● ● ISVAR ● ● ● ● J PG Circular interpolation with center point and end point (G2/G3. Z...) (Page 242) n ● ● ● ● JERKA Activate acceleration response set via MD for programmed axes ● ● ● ● 524 Fundamentals Programming Manual.... Y.. I.) (Page 229) n ● ● ● ● J1 Intermediate point coordinate PG Circular interpolation with intermediate point and end point (CIP. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .. K.... J1.. K1. . I1. KONTC... Y.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .. JERKLIMA) (Page 452) Interpolation parameters m m K PG Circular interpolation with center point and end point (G2/G3.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● JERKLIM JERKLIMA Reduction or overshoot of PGA maximum axial jerk Reduction or overshoot of PG maximum axial jerk Influence of acceleration on following axes (VELOLIMA.) (Page 242) n ● ● ● ● KONT Travel around contour on tool offset PG Contour approach and retraction (NORM.. X. Tool orientation 2....... Orientation polynomial PG Contour approach and retraction (NORM. KONTC. K..) (Page 229) n ● ● ● ● K1 Intermediate point coordinate PG Circular interpolation with intermediate point and end point (CIP. 06/2009.. KONT... KONTT) (Page 312) m ● ● ● ● KONTC Approach/retract with continuous-curvature polynomial Approach/retract with continuous-tangent polynomial Subprogram number Lead angle 1. K1.. J1. KONT. I.Tables 16.... J. KONTT) (Page 312) m ● ● ● ● KONTT PG Contour approach and retraction (NORM. X.... Z.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 525 . ACCLIMA.. KONT. KONTC. Z... KONTT) (Page 312) m ● ● ● ● L LEAD PGA PGA n m ● ● ● ● ● - ● - ● - ● - Fundamentals Programming Manual.. Y.. LFOF. LFPOS.. LFTXT. LFTXT. POLF. ALF. LFPOS. DILF.Tables 16. LFPOS. LFWP. POLFMASK. POLFMASK.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . LFWP. POLFMLIN) (Page 290) m ● ● ● ● LFTXT PG Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON. LFOF. DILF. POLFMASK. LFOF.. LFTXT. and L3 of the active tool to the abscissa. DILF. POLFMLIN) (Page 290) m ● ● ● ● LFON Fast retraction for thread cutting ON PG Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON. POLFMLIN) (Page 290) m ● ● ● ● 526 Fundamentals Programming Manual. L2. DILF. ordinate and applicate Fast retraction for thread cutting OFF LFOF 4) PG Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON. ALF. LFPOS. POLFMLIN) (Page 290) m ● ● ● ● LFPOS Retraction of the axis declared with POLFMASK or POLFMLIN to the absolute axis position programmed with POLF The plane of the retraction movement for fast retraction is determined from the path tangent and the current tool direction PG Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● LEADOF LEADON LENTOAX Master value coupling OFF Master value coupling ON PGA PGA Provides information FB1(W1) about the assignment of tool lengths L1. POLFMASK. LFWP. LFWP. POLF. ALF. POLF. POLF. LFTXT. LFOF. 06/2009. ALF. . LFTXT. POLFMASK. SCC) (Page 108) m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● LLI LN LOCK Lower limit value of variables Natural logarithm Disable synchronized action with ID (stop technology cycle) Milling pattern cycle of elongated holes on a circle PGA PGA PGA BHD/BHF ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● LONGHOLE - - - - LOOP M0 M1 M2 Introduction of an endless PGA loop Programmed stop Optional stop ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● PG M functions (Page 423) PG M functions (Page 423) End of main program with PG return to beginning of M functions (Page 423) program Direction of spindle rotation clockwise for master spindle M3 PG M functions (Page 423) ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual. G973. LFOF. POLF.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● LFWP The plane of the retraction movement for fast retraction is determined by the current working plane (G17/G18/G19) Fast retraction Speed limitation for G96/G961 and G97 PG Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON. G97/G971/G972. LFPOS.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 527 .1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . LFWP.Tables 16. ALF. LIMS. POLFMLIN) (Page 290) m LIFTFAST LIMS PG PG Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962. DILF. 06/2009. 1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 ..Tables 16..PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● M4 Direction of spindle rotation counterclockwise for master spindle Spindle stop for master spindle Tool change End of subprogram For SSL accumulated spindle programming End of program.. . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .. 06/2009. same effect as M2 Automatic gear change Gear stage 1.. 5 Transition to axis mode Define master/slave axis grouping Uncouple master/slave axis grouping and clear grouping definition Deactivation of a temporary coupling Deactivation of a temporary coupling with automatic slave axis stop Activation of a temporary coupling Search for string in string PG M functions (Page 423) M5 M6 M17 M19 M30 M40 M41 to M45 M70 MASLDEF MASLDEL PG M functions (Page 423) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● PG M functions (Page 423) PG M functions (Page 423) PG M functions (Page 423) PG M functions (Page 423) PG M functions (Page 423) PG M functions (Page 423) PG M functions (Page 423) PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA MASLOF MASLOFS ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● MASLON MATCH ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 528 Fundamentals Programming Manual. . AMIRROR) (Page 403) n n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● MEAW n ● ● ● ● MEAWA MI MINDEX MINVAL n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● MIRROR n ● ● ● ● MMC Call the dialog window interactively from the part program on the HMI PGA ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual. function) Programmable mirroring MEAFRAME MEAS MEASA MEASURE PGA PGA PGA FB2(M5) PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA Programmable mirroring (MIRROR. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 529 ..Tables 16. 06/2009.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . function) Modal subprogram call PGA PGA n MCALL MEAC ● - ● - ● - ● - Continuous measurement PGA without deletion of distance-to-go Frame calculation from measuring points Measurement with touchtrigger probe Measurement with deletion of distance-to-go Calculation method for workpiece and tool measurement Measurement with touchtrigger probe without deletion of distance-to-go Measurement without deletion of distance-to-go Access to frame data: Mirroring Define index of character in input string Smaller value of two variables (arithm.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● MAXVAL Larger value of two variables (arithm. KONT. 06/2009... KONTT) (Page 312) m NEWT NORM 4) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● NOT NPROT NPROTDEF NUMBER PGA PGA PGA PGA ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 530 Fundamentals Programming Manual.Tables 16. KONTC. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● MOD MODAXVAL Modulo division Determine modulo position of a modulo rotary axis Start positioning axis PGA PGA PGA m MOV MSG MVTOOL N NCK NEWCONF ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Programmable messages PG Messages (MSG) (Page 427) Language command to move tool NC auxiliary block number Specification of range of validity for data Apply modified machine data (corresponds to "Activate machine data") Create new tool Standard setting in starting point and end point with tool offset Logic NOT (negation) Machine-specific protection zone ON/OFF Definition of a machinespecific protection zone Convert input string to number FBW PG Block rules (Page 42) PGA PGA PGA PG Contour approach and retraction (NORM.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . OFFN) (Page 301) OMA1 OMA2 OMA3 OMA4 OMA5 OR m m m m m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● PGA ORIAXES PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIAXPOS m ● ● ● ● ORIC 4) PGA m ● ● ● ● ORICONCCW PGA/FB3(F3) PGA/FB3(F4) m ● ● ● ● ORICONCW m ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual. OR operation Linear interpolation of machine axes or orientation axes Orientation angle via virtual orientation axes with rotary axis positions Orientation changes at outside corners are overlaid on the circle block to be inserted Interpolation on a circular peripheral surface in CCW direction Interpolation on a circular peripheral surface in CW direction PG Tool radius compensation (G40.Tables 16.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● OEMIPO1 OEMIPO2 OF OFFN OEM interpolation 1 OEM interpolation 2 PGA PGA m m Keyword in CASE branch PGA Allowance on the programmed contour OEM address 1 OEM address 2 OEM address 3 OEM address 4 OEM address 5 Logic operator..1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . G41. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 531 . 06/2009. G42.. Tables 16. large-radius circular interpolation Initial tool orientation with up to 3 orientation axes Angle of rotation to an absolute direction of rotation PGA/FB3(F4) m ORICONTO PGA/FB3(F5) m ● ● ● ● ORICURVE PGA/FB3(F6) m ● ● ● ● ORID PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIEULER ORIMKS m m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ORIPATH ORIPATHS m m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ORIPLANE PGA m ● ● ● ● ORIRESET ORIROTA PGA PGA m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 532 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009...PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● ORICONIO Interpolation on a circular peripheral surface with intermediate orientation setting Interpolation on circular peripheral surface in tangential transition (final orientation) Interpolation of orientation with specification of motion of two contact points of tool Orientation changes are performed before the circle block Orientation angle via Euler angle Tool orientation in the machine coordinate system Tool orientation in relation to path Tool orientation in relation to path. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . blips in the orientation characteristic are smoothed Interpolation in a plane (corresponds to ORIVECT).1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 533 .PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● ORIROTC Tangential rotational vector in relation to path tangent Angle of rotation relative to the plane between the start and end orientation Angle of rotation relative to the change in the orientation vector Orientation angle via RPY angle (XYZ) Orientation angle via RPY angle (ZYX) Change in orientation Smoothing of the orientation characteristic OFF Smoothing of the orientation characteristic ON Large-radius circular interpolation (identical to ORIPLANE) Orientation angle via virtual orientation axes (definition 1) Orientation angle via virtual orientation axes (definition 1) Tool orientation in the workpiece coordinate system Oscillation on/off Oscillating: Starting point Continuous tool orientation smoothing PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA FB2(P5) PGA m ORIROTR m ● ● ● ● ORIROTT m ● ● ● ● ORIRPY ORIRPY2 ORIS ORISOF 4) m m m m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ORISON m ● ● ● ● ORIVECT m ● ● ● ● ORIVIRT1 m ● ● ● ● ORIVIRT2 m ● ● ● ● ORIWKS 4) m ● ● ● ● OS OSB OSC m m ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .Tables 16. 06/2009.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● OSCILL OSCTRL OSD Axis: 1 . 06/2009..3 infeed axes Oscillation options Smoothing of tool orientation by specifying smoothing distance with SD Oscillation end position Oscillating: Number of spark-out cycles Tool orientation smoothing OFF Oscillating: Left reversal point Oscillation right reversal point PGA PGA PGA m m m OSE OSNSC OSOF 4) OSP1 OSP2 OSS OSSE PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA m m m m m m m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Tool orientation PGA smoothing at end of block Tool orientation smoothing at start and end of block Smoothing of tool orientation by specifying angular tolerance in degrees with SD (maximum deviation from programmed orientation characteristic) Oscillating: Stopping point in left reversal point Oscillating: Stopping point in right reversal point PGA PGA OST m ● ● ● ● OST1 OST2 PGA PGA m m - - - - 534 Fundamentals Programming Manual..1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .Tables 16. OVRA) (Page 150) m ● ● ● ● OVRRAP Rapid traverse override PGA Programmable feedrate override (OVR. OVRA) (Page 150) m ● ● ● ● OVRA Axial speed offset PGA Programmable feedrate override (OVR. OVRA) (Page 150) m ● ● ● ● P PAROT Number of subprogram cycles Align workpiece coordinate system on workpiece Deactivate frame rotation in relation to workpiece PGA PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 535 . 06/2009. TOROT.Tables 16. OVRRAP. OVRRAP. TOROT.. OVRRAP.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 ..PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● OTOL Orientation tolerance for compressor functions. PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● PAROTOF PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME. orientation smoothing and smoothing types Speed offset PGA OVR PGA Programmable feedrate override (OVR. PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● PCALL Call subprograms with absolute path and parameter transfer Punching with delay OFF Punching with delay ON PGA PGA PGA ● ● ● ● PDELAYOF PDELAYON 4) m m - - - - Fundamentals Programming Manual. DILF. LFWP.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . G148. ALF. PM Per minute PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . G248.. POLF. FAD. circular pocket (any milling cutter) LIFTFAST retraction position BHD/BHF PG/PGA Fast retraction for thread cutting (LFON. POLFMLIN) (Page 290) ● ● ● ● POLFMASK m ● ● ● ● 536 Fundamentals Programming Manual. rectangular BHD/BHF pocket (any milling cutter) Milling cycle. ALF. LFTXT. LFOF. LFTXT. POLFMLIN) (Page 290) m POLF m ● ● ● ● POLFA Start retraction position of PG single axes with Fast retraction for thread cutting $AA_ESR_TRIGGER (LFON. G348. POLFMASK. G340. LFPOS. POLF. DISR.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● n ● ○ ● ● ○ - PHU PL Physical unit of a variable PGA 1. 2. DILF. Polynomial interpolation: Length of the parameter interval for polynomial interpolation PGA 1. G341. POLFMASK. POLFMASK. G147. LFWP. LFPOS. B spline: Node clearance 2. LFOF.. G347. ALF. PM. LFOF. 06/2009. PR) (Page 323) ● ● ● ● PO POCKET3 POCKET4 Polynomial coefficient for polynomial interpolation PGA n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Milling cycle. DILF. G247. POLFMLIN) (Page 290) Enable axes for retraction PG without a connection Fast retraction for thread cutting between the axes (LFON. LFWP. POLF. LFTXT. LFPOS.Tables 16. DISCL. LFOF. POSA.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . POSP. LFPOS. FA.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● POLFMLIN Enable axes for retraction PG with a linear connection Fast retraction for thread cutting between the axes (LFON.. WAITP. FA. FA. LFWP. LFTXT. POSA.Tables 16.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 537 . POSP. WAITP. POLFMLIN) (Page 290) Polynomial interpolation Polynomial interpolation can be selected for the AXIS or VECT axis groups Punching ON Punching ON in interpolation cycle Position axis m POLY POLYPATH PGA PGA m m - - - - PON PONS POS PGA PGA PG Traversing positioning axes (POS. ALF. POLF. WAITMC) (Page 129) m m ● ● ● ● POSA Position axis across block PG boundary Traversing positioning axes (POS. 06/2009. POSP. WAITMC) (Page 129) Position magazine Positioning in sections (oscillating) ● ● ● ● POSM POSP FBW PG Traversing positioning axes (POS. WAITP. WAITMC) (Page 129) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● POSRANGE Determine whether the currently interpolated position setpoint of an axis is located in a window at a predefined reference position Square (arithmetic function) PGA ● ● ● ● POT PGA ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual. POLFMASK. DILF. POSA. 1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● PR Per revolution PG Approach and retraction (G140 to G143. G248. G147. G340. G148.. G341. PM. G347.. G247.Tables 16. PR) (Page 323) PREPRO PRESETON PRIO Identify subprograms with PGA preparation Set actual values for programmed axes Keyword for setting the priority for interrupt processing First operation in a program Point-to-point motion ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● PGA PGA PGA PGA m m PROC PTP PTPG0 PUNCHACC PUTFTOC PUTFTOCF ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Point-to-point motion only PGA with G0. DISCL. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 06/2009. DISR. otherwise CP Travel-dependent acceleration for nibbling Tool fine offset for parallel dressing Tool fine offset dependent on a function for parallel dressing defined with FCTDEF B spline. FAD. point weight Quadrant error compensation learning OFF Quadrant error compensation learning ON Fast additional (auxiliary) function output PGA PGA PGA PW QECLRNOF PGA PGA PGA PG Auxiliary function outputs (Page 419) n ● ○ ● ● ○ ● QECLRNON ● ● ● ● QU ● ● ● ● 538 Fundamentals Programming Manual. G348. .1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . PGA NC language elements and system variables.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● R. DAC. RIC) (Page 200) Read-in disable Reads one or more lines in the specified file and stores the information read in the array Data type: Floating-point variable with sign (real numbers) n RAC ● ● ● ● RDISABLE READ PGA PGA ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REAL PGA ● ● ● ● REDEF Setting for machine data. DIAM90A. Arithmetic parameter also PGA as settable address identifier and with numerical extension Absolute non-modal axis. DIAMCHAN.. DIACYCOFA.Tables 16.PG specific radius Axis-specific diameter/radius programming programming (DIAMONA. RAC. DIAMCHANA. DIAMOFA. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 539 . DIC. specifying the user groups they are displayed for Release machine axes for axis exchange ● ● ● ● RELEASE REP PGA ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Keyword for initialization PGA of all elements of an array with the same value Fundamentals Programming Manual... 1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .Tables 16. geometry axes in quadrant Reset technology cycle Language command for setpoint activation End of subprogram Relative non-modal axisspecific radius programming Define index of character in input string PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA FBW PGA PG PGA n REPOSL REPOSQ REPOSQA n n n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● RESET RESETMON RET RIC ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● RINDEX ● ● ● ● 540 Fundamentals Programming Manual.. 06/2009.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● n n n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REPEAT REPEATB REPOSA REPOSH REPOSHA Repetition of a program loop Repetition of a program line Linear repositioning with all axes Repositioning with semicircle Repositioning with all axes. geometry axes in semicircle Linear repositioning Repositioning in a quadrant Linear repositioning with all axes.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . AROT.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . CHR. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 541 . RP) (Page 213) m/n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual. RPL) (Page 384) n ● ● ● ● ROTS Programmable frame PG rotations with solid angles Programmable frame rotations with solid angles (ROTS. FRC. G1. RND..PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● RMB RME RMI 4) RMN RND Repositioning to start of block Repositioning to end of block Repositioning to interrupt point Repositioning to the nearest path point PGA PGA PGA PGA m m m m n Round the contour corner PG Chamfer. G3.Tables 16. CHR. rounding (CHF. 06/2009. G2. FRC. AROTS.. rounding (CHF. RND. RNDM. RNDM. FRCM) (Page 295) m ● ● ● ● ROT Programmable rotation PG Programmable rotation (ROT. CROTS) (Page 396) Rounding of decimal places Rounding up of an input value Polar radius n ● ● ● ● ROUND ROUNDUP RP PGA PGA PG Travel commands with polar coordinates (G0. AP. FRCM) (Page 295) RNDM Modal rounding PG Chamfer. G96/G961 different significance) Attribute for saving information when subprograms are called Suppress single block Revoke suppression of single block Parameter for access to frame data: Scaling Programmable scaling PGA PG Rapid traverse movement (G0. AROTS. M4. RTLION. LIMS. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . SCC) (Page 108) ● ● ● ● SCPARA Program servo parameter PGA set ● ● ● ● 542 Fundamentals Programming Manual. direction of spindle rotation (M3. RTLIOF) (Page 217) m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● RTLION PG Rapid traverse movement (G0. channel or machine axes PG Constant cutting rate (G96/G961/G962.. M5) (Page 95) m/n ● ● ● ● SAVE PGA PGA PGA PGA PG Programmable scale factor (SCALE.. G973. RTLION.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● RPL Rotation in the plane PG Programmable frame rotations with solid angles (ROTS. Axis identifiers may take the form of geometry.Tables 16. 06/2009. ASCALE) (Page 398) n ● ● ● ● SBLOF SBLON SC SCALE ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● SCC Selective assignment of transverse axis to G96/G961/G962. G97/G971/G972. RTLIOF) (Page 217) m ● ● ● ● S PG Spindle speed (S). CROTS) (Page 396) n RT RTLIOF Parameter for access to frame data: Rotation G0 without linear interpolation (single-axis interpolation) G0 with linear interpolation Spindle speed (with G4.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . Tables 16. M4. M5) (Page 95) ● ● ● ● SETMS(n) PG Spindle speed (S).. direction of spindle rotation (M3. M5) (Page 95) ● ● ● ● SETMTH SETPIECE Set master toolholder number Set piece number for all tools assigned to the spindle FBW FBW ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . M4. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 543 .PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ○ ● ● ○ ● SD SEFORM Spline degree Structuring operation in the Step editor to generate the step view for HMI Advanced Keyword for initialization of all elements of an array with listed values Set alarm PGA PGA n SET PGA PGA ● ● ● ● SETAL SETDNO ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Assign the D number of a PGA cutting edge (CE) of a tool (T) Define which interrupt routine is to be activated when an NCK input is present Setting of markers in dedicated channel Reset to the master spindle defined in machine data Set spindle n as master spindle SETINT PGA ● ● ● ● SETM SETMS PGA Spindle speed (S).. direction of spindle rotation (M3. . SF) (Page 270) SIN SIRELAY PGA FBSI ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● SIRELIN SIRELOUT SIRELTIME SLOT1 SLOT2 SOFT Initialize input variables of FBSI function block Initialize output variables of function block Initialize timers of function block Milling pattern cycle. 06/2009. SIRELOUT. SOFT.. SOFTA.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . groove on a circle Milling pattern cycle. BRISKA. and SIRELTIME ● m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● PG Thread cutting with constant lead (G33. circular groove Soft path acceleration ● ● ● ● ● m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● FBSI FBSI BHD/BHF BHD/BHF PG Acceleration mode (BRISK. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . DRIVEA) (Page 449) 544 Fundamentals Programming Manual. DRIVE.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● SETTA SETTCOR Activate tool from wear group Modification of tool components taking all general conditions into account FBW FB1(W1) SETTIA SF Deactivate tool from wear FBW group Starting point offset for thread cutting Sine (trigon.Tables 16. function) Activate the safety functions parameterized with SIRELIN. 1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . BRISKA. nibbling. punching OFF PG Acceleration mode (BRISK. DRIVE. SPCOF) (Page 134) m m m ● ● ● ● SPCOF m ● ● ● ● SPCON PGA Position-controlled spindle operation (SPCON.. 06/2009. SOFT. SOFTA.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● SOFTA Activate soft axis acceleration for the programmed axes Nibbling ON Nibbling ON in interpolation cycle Path reference for FGROUP axes is arc length Switch master spindle or spindle(s) from position control to speed control Switch master spindle or spindle(s) from speed control to position control Converts spindle number into axis identifier Fast NCK inputs/outputs for punching/nibbling byte 1 Fast NCK inputs/outputs for punching/nibbling byte 2 Define spline grouping Number of path sections per block Stroke OFF. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 545 ..Tables 16. SPCOF) (Page 134) m ● ● ● ● SPI SPIF1 4) PGA FB2(N4) FB2(N4) PGA PGA PGA n m m ● - ● - ● - ● - SPIF2 m - - - - SPLINEPATH SPN SPOF 4) - ○ - - ○ - Fundamentals Programming Manual. DRIVEA) (Page 449) SON SONS SPATH 4) PGA PGA PGA PG Position-controlled spindle operation (SPCON. M19.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● SPOS Spindle position PG Positioning spindles (SPOS. SRA) (Page 161) n - - - - STA PG Several feedrate values in one block (F. STA. FMA. M70. SPOSA. SRA) (Page 161) Oscillation sparking-out time for synchronized action Oscillation sparking-out time axial for synchronized action Start selected programs simultaneously in several channels from current program Execute. SPOSA. ST. ST. 06/2009. STA.Tables 16. SRA) (Page 161) m - - - - START PGA - - - - STARTFIFO 4) PGA m ● ● ● ● 546 Fundamentals Programming Manual. FMA.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . SR. SR. WAITS) (Page 135) m ● ● ● ● SPP SQRT Length of a path section Square root (arithmetic function) PGA PGA m ● ● ● ● SR Oscillation retraction path PG for synchronized action Several feedrate values in one block (F. fill preprocessing memory simultaneously n - - - - SRA m - - - - ST PG Several feedrate values in one block (F. FMA. M19. SRA) (Page 161) Oscillation retraction path PG with external input axial Several feedrate values in one for synchronized action block (F. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . M70. FMA. ST. SR.. STA. ST. STA. WAITS) (Page 135) m SPOSA Spindle position across block boundaries PG Positioning spindles (SPOS. SR.. user variables. string field PGA PGA n m STOPRE PGA PGA PGA PGA ● ● ● ● STOPREOF STRING STRINGFELD ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● STRINGIS Checks the present PGA scope of NC language and the NC cycle names. are valid. and label names belonging specifically to this command to establish whether these exist.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● STAT STOPFIFO Position of joints Stop machining. string Define string length Define index of character in input string ● ● ● ● STRINGVAR PGA PGA PGA - - - - STRLEN SUBSTR ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual. preprocessing memory is full or end of program Preprocessing stop until all prepared blocks in main run are executed Revoke preprocessing stop Data type: Character string Selection of a single character from the progr.. macros.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . fill preprocessing memory until STARTFIFO is detected. 06/2009. defined or active Selection of a single character from the progr. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 547 .Tables 16.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . otherwise M6 command necessary) Tangent (trigon. including Deselect frame (G53.Tables 16. external work offset. handwheel offsets (DRF).PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● SUPA Suppression of current PG work offset... function) Definition of axis grouping tangential correction n SVC SYNFCT PG Cutting rate (SVC) (Page 100) m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● PGA SYNR PGA PGA ● ● ● ● SYNRW ● ● ● ● SYNW PGA PG Tool change with T command (Page 60) ● ● ● ● T ● ● ● ● TAN TANG PGA PGA ● - ● - ● - ● - 548 Fundamentals Programming Manual. i. SUPA. and overlaid movement Tool cutting rate Evaluation of a polynomial as a function of a condition in the motion-synchronous action The variable is read synchronously.e. i.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . at the time of execution The variable is read and written synchronously.e. 06/2009. programmed offsets. at the time of execution The variable is written synchronously.e. G153. at the time of execution Call tool (only change if specified in machine data. G500) (Page 414) system frames. i. 06/2009... tool points in X direction Determine tool orientation PGA of an active frame on selection of tool. tool points in Z direction m - ● - ● TCOFRY m - ● - ● TCOFRZ m - ● - ● Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 549 .Tables 16.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . tool points in Y direction Determine tool orientation PGA of an active frame on selection of tool.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F - TANGDEL Deletion of definition of axis grouping tangential correction Tangential correction OFF Tangential correction ON Tool selection/tool change irrespective of tool status Request toolholder (number "m") Load tool from buffer into magazine Determine tool length components from the orientation of the current toolholder Determine tool length components from the orientation of the active frame PGA PGA PGA FBW PGA FBW PGA m TANGOF TANGON TCA ● ● ● ● TCARR TCI TCOABS4) ● - ● ● ● ● - ● ● ● TCOFR PGA m - ● - ● TCOFRX Determine tool orientation PGA of an active frame on selection of tool. TOFFR) (Page 88) 550 Fundamentals Programming Manual. TOFF.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● - THETA TILT TLIFT Angle of rotation Tilt angle PGA PGA n m In tangential control insert PGA intermediate block at contour corners Deselect tool monitoring Activate tool monitoring TMOF TMON TO TOFF PGA PGA ● ● ● m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Designates the end value PGA in a FOR counter loop Tool length offset in the direction of the tool length component that is effective parallel to the geometry axis specified in the index PG Programmable tool offset (TOFFL. TOFFR) (Page 88) Deactivate online tool offset m ● ● ● ● TOFFOF TOFFON TOFFR PGA ● ● m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Activate online tool length PGA offset Tool radius offset PG Programmable tool offset (TOFFL. TOFFR) (Page 88) TOFFL Tool length offset in the PG direction of the tool length Programmable tool offset component L1.Tables 16... TOFF.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . 06/2009. L2 or L3 (TOFFL. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . TOFF. . PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● TOFRAMEZ PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .Tables 16. TOROT. TOROT. TOROT. TOROT. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 551 . PAROT) (Page 410) m TOFRAMEX PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME. TOROT. PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● TOLOWER TOOLENV Convert the letters of a string into lowercase PGA ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Save current states which FB1(W1) are of significance to the evaluation of the tool data stored in the memory Align the Z axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame Frame rotations in tool direction OFF TOROT PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME. PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● TOROTOF PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME.. PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● TOFRAMEY PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● TOFRAME Align the Z axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame Align the X axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame Align the Y axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame As TOFRAME PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME. TOROT. 1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● TOUPPER TOWBCS TOWKCS Convert the letters of a string into uppercase Wear values in basic coordinate system (BCS) Wear values in the coordinate system of the tool head for kinetic transformation (differs from machine coordinate system through tool rotation) Wear values in machine coordinate system Initial setting value for offsets in tool length PGA PGA PGA m m ● - ● ● ● ● - ● ● ● TOWMCS TOWSTD PGA PGA m m - ● ● - ● ● 552 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● TOROTX Align the X axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame Align the Y axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame As TOROT PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME. PAROT) (Page 410) m ● ● ● ● TOROTZ PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME. TOROT.Tables 16. TOROT. TOROT. 06/2009. PAROT) (Page 410) m TOROTY PG Frame generation according to tool orientation (TOFRAME... PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● TOWTCS Wear values in the tool coordinate system (toolholder ref. ATRANS) (Page 376) n TRAILOF TRAILON TRANS ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● TRANSMIT TRAORI Pole transformation (face machining) 4-axis.Tables 16. point T at the tool holder) PGA m TOWWCS TR TRAANG TRACON TRACYL TRAFOOF Wear values in workpiece PGA coordinate system Offset component of a frame variable Transformation inclined axis Cascaded transformation Cylinder: Peripheral surface transformation Deactivate active transformations in the channel Asynchronous coupled motion OFF Asynchronous coupled motion ON Programmable offset m ● ○ ● ● ● ○ ● ● ○ ○ ○ ● ● ● ○ ● PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PG Zero offset (TRANS. generic transformation Logical constant: True PGA PGA PGA ○ - ○ ● ○ - ○ ● TRUE ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 553 . 06/2009..1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .. 5-axis transformation. .. 06/2009.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 . ACCLIMA.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● n n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● TRUNC TU TURN Truncation of decimal places Axis angle Number of turns for helix PGA PGA PG Helical interpolation (G2/G3. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . TURN) (Page 250) ULI UNLOCK Upper limit value of variables Enable synchronized action with ID (continue technology cycle) Condition for end of REPEAT loop Path reference for FGROUP axes is curve parameter Keyword: Type of parameter transfer Reduction of an overshoot of the maximum axial velocity PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA PGA m m ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● UNTIL UPATH ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● VAR VELOLIM ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● VELOLIMA Reduction or overshoot of PG the maximum axial Influence of acceleration on velocity following axes (VELOLIMA.Tables 16. JERKLIMA) (Page 452) m ● ● ● ● 554 Fundamentals Programming Manual. . Wait for end of traversing PGA WAITE WAITM PGA PGA - - - - WAITMC PGA - - - - WAITP PG Traversing positioning axes (POS. WAITMC) (Page 129) ● ● ● ● WAITS Wait for spindle position to be reached PG Positioning spindles (SPOS. SPOSA.. exact stop only if the other channels have not yet reached the marker. WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALCS1 PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 .Tables 16.. terminate previous block with exact stop Wait for marker in specified channel. POSP. POSA.. WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALCS2 PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 ..PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ○ - WAITC Wait for the coupling block change criterion to be fulfilled for the axes/spindles Wait for end of program in another channel Wait for marker in specified channel.. M70. WAITS) (Page 135) ● ● ● ● WALCS0 Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation deselected Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 1 active Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 2 active PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 .1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .. 06/2009. WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual. FA. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 555 . WAITP.. M19. Tables 16. WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALCS7 PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 . WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALCS10 PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 . WALIMOF) (Page 429) m ● ● ● ● 556 Fundamentals Programming Manual. WALIMON.... WALCS10) (Page 433) m WALCS4 PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 ... 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALCS9 PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 .......... WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALCS5 PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 .PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● WALCS3 Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 3 active Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 4 active Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 5 active Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 6 active Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 7 active Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 8 active Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 9 active Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation group 10 active BCS working area limitation OFF PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 . WALIMON..1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .. WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALCS6 PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 . WALIMOF) (Page 429) m ● ● ● ● WALIMON 4) BCS working area limitation ON PG Working area limitation in BCS (G25/G26. WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALCS8 PG Working area limitation in WCS/SZS (WALCS0 . WALCS10) (Page 433) m ● ● ● ● WALIMOF PG Working area limitation in BCS (G25/G26... ) (Page 209) m/n ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Z Axis name PG Travel commands with Cartesian coordinates (G0. G1. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 557 .. G2.. X. G3..... Z. Y. G1... Y.1 List of statements Operation Meaning Description see 1) W 2) 828D 3) PPU260 / 261 .. Start of WHILE program loop Write text to file system Appends a block to the end of the specified file.Tables 16.. Delays the machining job without interrupting continuous-path mode Axis name PGA PGA PGA PGA WHENEVER ● ● ● ● WHILE WRITE ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● WRTPR ● ● ● ● X PG Travel commands with Cartesian coordinates (G0..) (Page 209) m/n ● ● ● ● Fundamentals Programming Manual.PPU280 / 281 D-----F-----D-----F ● ● ● ● WHEN The action is executed cyclically when the condition is fulfilled. X. G1..) (Page 209) m/n ● ● ● ● XOR Y Logic exclusive OR Axis name PGA PG Travel commands with Cartesian coordinates (G0... Z. The action is executed once whenever the condition is fulfilled... Z........ G3.. G2. Y. G3. G2.. 06/2009. X.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Tables 16. subroutine call M function Subblock number Unassigned Number of program runs Settable address identifier Variable identifier (arithmetic parameter) / settable address identifier without numerical extension Spindle value dwell time in spindle revolutions Tool number Settable address identifier Settable address identifier Settable address identifier Settable address identifier Settable address identifier x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Numeric extension x x x 558 Fundamentals Programming Manual.2 Addresses List of addresses The list of addresses consists of: ● Address letters ● Fixed addresses ● Fixed addresses with axis expansion ● Settable addresses Address letters The following address letters are available: Letter A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Meaning Settable address identifier Settable address identifier Settable address identifier Selection/deselection of tool length compensation. tool cutting edge Settable address identifier Feedrate dwell time in seconds G function H function Settable address identifier Settable address identifier Settable address identifier Subroutines.2 16. 06/2009.2 Addresses 16. dwell time Override Spindle. CAC.Tables 16. ACN. n Number of subroutine passes Block number G function n Integer without sign Integer without sign Integer without sign Integer without sign N G n See list of G functions m. CDC. dwell time Spindle position Spindle position beyond block limits Tool number Real without sign Real without sign Real without sign Real Real T D M. 06/2009. n m m. CACP Qu Data type L P Subroutine no. CACN. n m m x x x x x x x x x F OVR S SPOS SPOSA Feed. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 559 .2 Addresses Letter Z % : / Meaning Settable address identifier Start character and separator for file transfer Main block number Skip identifier Numeric extension x Available fixed addresses Axis identifier Address type Modal/ G70/ G71 nonmodal G700/ G90/ G710 G91 IC AC DC. ACP CIC. H. m x x x Integer without sign Integer without sign M: Integer without sign H: Real Offset number m Auxiliary functions n Fundamentals Programming Manual. ACP CIC. CACP Qu Data type AX: Axis IP: Interpolation parameter POS: Positioning axis POSA: Positioning axis above end of block Variable axis identifier Variable interpolation parameter Positioning axis Positioning axis across block boundaries *) n x x x x x x x x x x x Real Real m x x x x x x x Real m x x x x x x x Real POSP: Positioning Positioning axis in parts axis in parts (oscillation) PO: Polynomial FA: Feed axial FL: Feed limit OVRA: Override Polynomial coefficient Axial feedrate Axial feed limit Axial override m x x x x x x Real: End position / Real: Partial length Integer: Option Real without sign 1 . CACN. 06/2009.8 times x Real without sign Real without sign Real without sign Real without sign n x x m m m m m x x x ACC: Axial Axial acceleration acceleration FMA: Feedrate multiple axial STA: Sparkingout time axial Synchronous feedrate axial x Real without sign Sparking out time axial m Real without sign 560 Fundamentals Programming Manual.Tables 16. ACN. CDC.2 Addresses Fixed addresses with axis expansion Axis identifier Address type Modal/ G70/ G71 nonmodal G700/ G90/ G710 G91 IC AC DC. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . CAC. ACP CIC.Tables 16. CDC. integer without sign: reset options Axis: 1 . CACP Qu Data type SRA: Sparkingout retract OS: Oscillating ON/OFF OST1: Oscillating time 1 OST2: Oscillating time 2 OSP1: Oscillating position 1 OSP2: Oscillating position 2 OSB: Oscillating start Retraction path on external input axial Oscillation ON/OFF m x x Real without sign m Integer without sign Real Stopping time m at left reversal point (oscillation) Stopping time at right reversal point (oscillation) Left reversal point (oscillation) Right reversal point (oscillation) position m Real m x x x x x x Real m x x x x x x Real m x x x x x x Real OSE: Oscillation Oscillating end position end position OSNSC: Oscillating: number spark-out cycles OSCTRL: Oscillating control Number of spark-out cycles (oscillation) Oscillation control options m x x x x x x Real m Integer without sign m Integer without sign: set options. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 561 . ACN. 06/2009.2 Addresses Axis identifier Address type Modal/ G70/ G71 nonmodal G700/ G90/ G710 G91 IC AC DC. CACN. CAC.3 infeed axes OSCILL: Oscillating Axis assignment for oscillation activate oscillation m Fundamentals Programming Manual. CACP Qu Data type FDA: Feedrate DRF axial FGREF POLF FXS: Fixed stop FXST: Fixed stop torque FXSW: Fixed stop window Axis feedrate n for handwheel override Reference radius LIFTFAST position m m x Real without sign x x Real without sign Real without sign Integer without sign Real x x Travel to fixed m stop ON Torque limit for travel to fixed stop Monitoring window for travel to fixed stop m m Real In these addresses. ACN. CAC. CACP x 8 1 x x 1 Max. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . CACN. DC.2 Addresses Axis identifier Address type Modal/ G70/ G71 nonmodal G700/ G90/ G710 G91 IC AC DC. otherwise modal/nonmodal depending on syntax of G function. Settable addresses Axis identifier Address type Modal/ nonmodal G70/ G700/ G71 G710 G90/ IC G91 AC Qu CIC. an axis or an expression of axis type is specified in square brackets. The data type in the above column shows the type of value assigned. A. C AP: Angle polar RP: Polar radius Axis Polar angle *) m/n* x x x x x x x x x x x Real Real Real without sign Polar radius m/n* 562 Fundamentals Programming Manual. number Data type Axis values and end points X. ACN. incremental end points: non-modal.Tables 16. *) Absolute end points: modal. CDC. CAC. Y. ACP CDC. Z. ACP CIC. 06/2009. CACN. B. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 563 . C7 standardized vector LEAD: Lead angle THETA: Third degree of freedom tool orientation Direction vector component Intermediate orientation component Lead angle Angle of rotation. C6 standardized vector A7. CACN. C3 n 3 Real A4. number Data type Tool orientation A2.Tables 16. B2. C2 1) Euler angle or RPY angle Direction vector component n Real A3. CAC. ACP CDC. B5. rotation around the tool direction Tilt angle Orientation change (referring to the path) n 3 Real n 3 Real n 3 Real n 3 Real m n x x x 1 1 Real Real TILT: Tilt angle ORIS: Orientation smoothing factor m m 1 1 Real Real Fundamentals Programming Manual. B4. B3. B7.2 Addresses Axis identifier Address type Modal/ nonmodal G70/ G700/ G71 G710 G90/ IC G91 AC Qu CIC. 06/2009. DC. C4 for Normal start of block vector component A5. B6. ACN. CACP 3 Max. C5 for Normal end of block vector component A6. CAC. J1.Tables 16. CACN. J.2 Addresses Axis identifier Address type Modal/ nonmodal G70/ G700/ G71 G710 G90/ IC G91 AC Qu CIC. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . CACP 3 Max. DC. ACP CDC. ACN. K** I1. number Data type Interpolation parameters I. K1 Interpolation parameter Intermediate point coordinate Rotation in the plane Circle radius Opening angle Number of turns for helix Parameter interval length weight Spline degree Turn State Starting point offset for thread cutting n n n x x x x x x** x x** x Real Real RPL: Rotation plane CR: Circle radius AR: Angle circular TURN n 1 Real n x x 1 1 1 Real without sign Real without sign Integer without sign Real without sign Real without sign Integer without sign Integer without sign Integer without sign PL: Parameter interval length PW: Point SD: Spline degree TU: Turn STAT: State SF: Spindle offset n 1 n n m m m 1 1 1 Real DISR: Distance for repositioning DISPR: Distance path for repositioning ALF: Angle lift fast Distance for n repositioning Repos path difference n x x 1 Real without sign Real without sign x x 1 Fast retraction angle m 1 Integer without sign 564 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. ACP CDC.2 Addresses Axis identifier Address type Modal/ nonmodal G70/ G700/ G71 G710 G90/ IC G91 AC Qu CIC. CACN. ACN. CAC.m out path x x x x 1 1 Real Real Fundamentals Programming Manual. DC. 06/2009. number Data type DILF: Distance lift fast FP Fast retraction length m x x Real Fixed point: n Number of fixed point to approach Modal rounding Non-modal rounding Chamfer non-modal Chamfer in initial direction of motion Contour angle Insertion depth Transition circle overshoot tool offset Offset contour normal m n n n x x x x x x x x 1 Integer without sign RNDM: Round modal RND: Round CHF: Chamfer CHR: Chamfer 1 1 1 1 Real without sign Real without sign Real without sign Real without sign ANG: Angle ISD: Insertion depth DISC: Distance n m x x 1 1 Real Real m x x 1 Real without sign OFFN m x x 1 Real DITS DITE Thread run.m in path Thread run. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 565 .Tables 16. CACP 1 Max. Tables 16. DC. CACP 1 Max.2 Addresses Axis identifier Address type Modal/ nonmodal G70/ G700/ G71 G710 G90/ IC G91 AC Qu CIC. ACP CDC. number Data type Nibbling/punching SPN: Stroke/punch number 1) SPP: Stroke/punch path 1) Grinding ST: Sparking-out time SR: Sparking-out retract path ADIS ADISPOS Sparkingout time n 1 Real without sign Real without sign Number of n path sections per block Length of a m path section INT 1 Real Return path n x x 1 Approximate positioning criteria Rounding clearance Rounding clearance for rapid traverse Measure with touchtrigger probe m m x x x x 1 1 Real without sign Real without sign Measurement MEAS: Measure n 1 Integer without sign MEAW: Measure without deleting distance-to-go LIMS: Limit spindle speed Measure n without deleting distance-togo Spindle speed limitation m 1 Integer without sign Axis. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . ACN. spindle behavior 1 Real without sign 566 Fundamentals Programming Manual. CAC. CACN. **) As circle center points. IPO parameters act incrementally. incremental end points: non-modal. CACN.2 Addresses Axis identifier Address type Modal/ nonmodal G70/ G700/ G71 G710 G90/ IC G91 AC Qu CIC. DC. CAC. They can be programmed in absolute mode with AC. 06/2009. CACP 1 Max.Tables 16. number Data type Feedrates FAD Speed of the slow infeed motion Path feed for handwheel override Feed for radius and chamfer Feed for radius and chamfer.g. ACP CDC. modal OEM address 1 OEM address 2 OEM address 3 OEM address 4 OEM address 5 n x Real without sign FD: Feed DRF n x 1 Real without sign FRC n x Real without sign Real without sign FRCM m x OEM addresses OMA1: OEM address 1 1) OMA2: OEM address 2 1) OMA3: OEM address 3 1) OMA4: OEM address 4 1) OMA5: OEM address 5 1) m m m m m x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 1 1 1 1 1 Real Real Real Real Real *) Absolute end points: modal. 1) The keyword is not valid for NCU571. The address modification is ignored when the parameters have other meanings (e. Fundamentals Programming Manual. ACN. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 567 . thread lead). otherwise modal/nonmodal depending on syntax of G function. A G function can be either modal (until it is canceled by another function of the same group) or only effective for the block in which it is programmed (nonmodal) Key: 1) 2) Internal number (e. 2. 5. Only one G function of a group can be programmed in a block. 11. applies: SAG Default setting Siemens AG MM Default setting Machine Manufacturer (see machine manufacturer's specifications) 5) The G function is not valid for NCU571. 9. 6. 10. 06/2009. 4.3 16. 1) 1. 3. for PLC interface) Configurability of the G function as a delete setting for the function group on power up. reset or end of part program with MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES: + Configurable Not configurable modal non-modal 3) Effectiveness of the G function: m n 4) Default setting If no function from the group is programmed with modal G functions. 12. Group 1: Modally valid motion commands G function G0 G1 G2 G3 CIP ASPLINE BSPLINE CSPLINE POLY G33 G331 G332 No.Tables 16. 7.3 G function groups The G functions are divided into function groups. the default setting. 8. which can be changed in the machine data (MD20150 $MN_$MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES). 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .3 G function groups 16. Meaning Rapid traverse Linear interpolation (linear interpolation) Circular interpolation clockwise Circular interpolation counterclockwise Circular interpolation through intermediate point Akima spline B-spline Cubic spline Polynomial interpolation Thread cutting with constant lead Tapping Retraction (tapping) MD20150 2) + + + + + + + + + + + + W 3) m m m m m m m m m m m m x STD 4) SAG MM 568 Fundamentals Programming Manual.g. 06/2009. 14. 7. 18. dwell time G function G4 G63 G74 G75 REPOSL REPOSQ REPOSH REPOSA REPOSQA REPOSHA G147 G247 G347 G148 G248 G348 G5 G7 No.Tables 16. applies: Group 2: Non-modally valid motions. Significance Dwell time preset Tapping without synchronization Reference point approach with synchronization Fixed-point approach Linear repositioning Repositioning in a quadrant Repositioning in semicircle Linear repositioning with all axes Linear repositioning with all axes. 1) 1. 8. 19. 9. 2. 6. Reserved Reserved Circle with tangential transition Thread cutting with linear increasing lead Thread cutting with linear decreasing lead Involute interpolation clockwise Involute interpolation counter-clockwise + + + + + + + m m m m m m m If no function from the group is programmed with modal G functions. geometry axes in semicircle Approach contour with straight line Approach contour with quadrant Approach contour with semicircle Leave contour with straight line Leave contour with quadrant Leave contour with semicircle Oblique plunge-cut grinding Compensatory motion during oblique plunge-cut grinding MD20150 2) W 3) n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n STD 4) SAG MM Fundamentals Programming Manual. 3. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 569 . 17. 10. 11. geometry axes in quadrant Repositioning with all axes. 4.3 G function groups OEMIPO1 5) OEMIPO2 5) CT G34 G35 INVCW INVCCW 13. 18. the default setting. 16. 13. which can be changed in the machine data (MD20150 $MN_$MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES). 17. 16. 15. 12. 14. 5. 15. 14. 18. 16. 1) 1. 6. 11. 7. Significance TRANSLATION: Programmable offset ROTATION: Programmable rotation SCALE: Programmable scaling MIRROR: Programmable mirroring Additive TRANSLATION: Additive programmable offset Additive ROTATION: Programmable rotation Additive SCALE: Programmable scaling Additive MIRROR: Programmable mirroring Unassigned Minimum working area limitation/spindle speed limitation Maximum working area limitation/spindle speed limitation Pole programming relative to the last programmed setpoint position Polar programming relative to origin of current workpiece coordinate system Pole programming relative to the last valid pole Programmable offset.Tables 16. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 5. 9. + m FIFOCTRL 3. 3. + m 570 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. stop machining. 8. 10. 17. working area limitation and pole programming G function TRANS ROT SCALE MIRROR ATRANS AROT ASCALE AMIRROR G25 G26 G110 G111 G112 G58 G59 ROTS AROTS No. 12. fill preprocessing memory until STARTFIFO is detected. additive axial substitution Rotation with solid angle Additive rotation with solid angle n n n n n n n n n MD20150 2) W 3) n n n n n n n n STD 4) SAG MM Group 4: FIFO G function STARTFIFO No.3 G function groups Group 3: Programmable frame. 4. 13. FIFO is full or end of program Activation of automatic preprocessing memory control MD20150 2) + W 3) m x STD 4) SAG MM STOPFIFO 2. absolute axial substitution Programmable offset. 1) 1. 15. 2. Significance Start FIFO Execute and simultaneously fill preprocessing memory STOP FIFO. therefore.2nd geometry axis Plane selection 3rd . 3. G505 corresponds to frame $P_UIFR[5]. Significance No tool radius compensation Tool radius compensation left of contour Tool radius compensation right of contour MD20150 2) + W 3) m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 8: Settable zero offset G function G500 G54 G55 G56 G57 G505 . Significance Deactivation of adjustable work offset (G54 to G57. 2. G599 No. 1) 1. Significance Plane selection 1st .3 G function groups Group 6: Plane selection G function G17 G18 G19 No. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 571 . 2..Tables 16. 100. 4. G54 corresponds to frame $P_UIFR[1]. The number of adjustable user frames and.. . can be parameterized using machine data MD28080 $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES. 99th adjustable work offset MD20150 2) + + + + + + + + W 3) m m m m m m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Each of the G functions in this group is used to activate an adjustable user frame $P_UIFR[ ]. the number of G functions in this group. 5.1st geometry axis Plane selection 2nd .3rd geometry axis MD20150 2) + + + W 3) m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 7: Tool radius compensation G function G40 G41 G42 No. 6. 1) 1. 1) 1. 06/2009.. Fundamentals Programming Manual. 3. G505 to G599) 1st settable zero offset 2nd adjustable work offset 3rd adjustable work offset 4th adjustable work offset 5th adjustable work offset . 3... 2.. [external work offset]. Significance Exact stop Continuous-path mode Continuous-path mode with smoothing as per distance criterion (= programmable rounding clearance) Continuous-path mode with smoothing within the defined tolerances Continuous-path mode with smoothing within the defined tolerances (block-internal) Continuous-path mode with smoothing with maximum possible dynamic response Continuous-path mode with smoothing and tangential block transitions within the defined tolerances MD20150 2) + + + W 3) m m m x STD 4) SAG MM G642 G643 G644 G645 4. 3.3 G function groups Group 9: Frame suppression G function G53 No. 1) 1. 1) 1. - n G153 3. Significance Exact stop MD20150 2) W 3) n STD 4) SAG MM 572 Fundamentals Programming Manual. + + + + m m m m Group 11: Exact stop. - n Group 10: Exact stop . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . PAROT including handwheel offsets (DRF). overlaid movement As for G53 including suppression of all channelspecific and/or NCU-global basic frames MD20150 2) W 3) n STD 4) SAG MM SUPA 2. non-modal G function G9 No. Significance Suppression of current frames: Programmable frame including system frame for TOROT and TOFRAME and active adjustable frame (G54 to G57. 6. 2. ext. 1) 1.Tables 16. 06/2009. scratching. As for G153 including suppression of system frames for actual-value setting. 5. G505 to G599). 7.continuous-path mode G function G60 G64 G641 No. work offset. 1) 1. mm/min (lengths + velocity + system variable) MD20150 2) + + + + W 3) m m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 14: Workpiece measuring absolute/incremental G function G90 G91 No. 4. inch/rev Constant cutting rate and type of feedrate as for G95 ON Constant cutting rate and type of feedrate as for G95 OFF Feedrate specification by means of traversing time. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 573 . inch/min (lengths + velocity + system variable) Input system metric mm. 2. 1) 1. 3. deactivate constant path velocity MD20150 2) + + + + + + W 3) m m m m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. Significance Inverse-time feedrate 1/rpm Linear feedrate in mm/min. inch/min Revolutional feedrate in mm/rev.3 G function groups Group 12: Block change criteria at exact stop (G60/G9) G function G601 G602 G603 No. 4. 1) 1.Tables 16. Significance Absolute dimension Incremental dimension input MD20150 2) + + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 15: Feed type G function G93 G94 G95 G96 G97 G931 No. Significance Input system inches (length) Input system metric mm (lengths) Input system inch. 1) 1. 3. 6. 3. Significance Block change at exact stop fine Block change at exact stop coarse Block change at IPO .end of block MD20150 2) + + + W 3) m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 13: Workpiece measuring inch/metric G function G70 G71 G700 G710 No. 5. 2. 2. 2. 4. 8. 13 Constant cutting rate and type of feedrate as for G94 ON Constant cutting rate and type of feedrate as for G94 OFF Freeze linear feedrate and constant cutting rate or spindle speed Freeze revolutional feedrate and constant cutting rate or spindle speed Linear feedrate or revolutional feedrate and constant cutting rate Freeze linear feedrate or revolutional feedrate and constant cutting rate Revolutional feedrate without spindle speed limitation (G97 without LIMS for ISO mode) + + + + + + + m m m m m m m Group 16: Feedrate override on inside and outside curvature G function CFC CFTCP CFIN No. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 9. tool offset G function NORM KONT KONTT KONTC No. 12.Tables 16. 3. Significance Normal position at starting and end points Travel around contour at starting and end points Approach/retraction with constant tangent Approach/retraction with constant curvature MD20150 2) + + + + W 3) m m m m x STD 4) SAG MM 574 Fundamentals Programming Manual.3 G function groups G961 G971 G942 G952 G962 G972 G973 7. 3. acceleration for external radius MD20150 2) + + + W 3) m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 17: Approach and retraction response. 10. 1) 1. 11. 2. 2. Significance Constant feedrate at contour effective for internal and external radius Constant feedrate in tool center point (center point path) Constant feedrate for internal radius only. 1) 1. 1) 1. 1) 1. 2. 1) 1. 06/2009. Significance Transition circle (tool travels around workpiece corners on a circular path) Intersection of equidistant paths (tool backs off from the workpiece corner) MD20150 2) + W 3) m x STD 4) SAG MM G451 2. Significance Natural transition to first spline block Tangential transition to first spline block Definition of the first spline section by means of the next 3 points MD20150 2) + + + W 3) m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 20: Curve transition at end of spline G function ENAT ETAN EAUTO No. 3. Significance Fast non-smoothed path acceleration Soft smoothed path acceleration Velocity-dependent path acceleration MD20150 2) + + + W 3) m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Fundamentals Programming Manual. 1) 1. Significance Natural transition to next traversing block Tangential transition to next traversing block Definition of the last spline section by means of the last 3 points MD20150 2) + + + W 3) m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 21: Acceleration profile G function BRISK SOFT DRIVE No. 2. 3.3 G function groups Group 18: Corner behavior. + m Group 19: Curve transition at beginning of spline G function BNAT BTAN BAUTO No. tool offset G function G450 No. 3. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 575 . 2.Tables 16. Significance Feedforward control OFF Feedforward control ON MD20150 2) + + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM 576 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 2. 3D tool offset circumferential milling 3D tool offset face milling with non-constant tool orientation 3D tool offset face milling with constant tool orientation independent of active frame 3D tool offset face milling with fixed tool orientation dependent on active frame 3D tool offset circumferential milling with limitation surfaces 3D tool offset circumferential milling with limitation surfaces and differential tool MD20150 2) + + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM CUT3DC 5) CUT3DF 5) 3. 06/2009. 1) 1. 1) 1.3 G function groups Group 22: Tool offset type G function CUT2D CUT2DF No. 2. 7. 4. 1) 1. 3. Significance Collision detection OFF Collision detection ON Collision detection OFF (currently only for CUT3DC) MD20150 2) + + + W 3) m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 24: Feedforward control G function FFWOF FFWON No. 6. 5. 2. Significance 2½D tool offset determined by G17-G19 2½D tool offset determined by frame The tool offset is effective in relation to the current frame (inclined plane). 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Tables 16. 8. + + + + + + m m m m m m CUT3DFS 5) CUT3DFF 5) CUT3DCC 5) CUT3DCCD 5) Group 23: Collision monitoring at inside contours G function CDOF CDON CDOF2 No. 1) 1. 2. 2. 1) 1. Significance Reapproach to start of block position Reapproach to interruption point Repositioning to end-of-block position Reapproach to nearest path point MD20150 2) + + + + W 3) m m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 27: Tool offset for change in orientation at outside corners G function ORIC 5) No. 3. Significance Working area limitation ON Working area limitation OFF MD20150 2) + + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM Fundamentals Programming Manual. 2.3 G function groups Group 25: Tool orientation reference G function ORIWKS 5) No. Significance Orientation changes at outside corners are superimposed on the circle block to be inserted Orientation changes are performed before the circle block MD20150 2) + + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM ORID 5) Group 28: Working area limitation G function WALIMON WALIMOF No. 4. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 577 . 1) 1. 06/2009. 1) 1. Significance Tool orientation in workpiece coordinate system (WCS) Tool orientation in machine coordinate system (MCS) MD20150 2) + + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM ORIMKS 5) Group 26: Repositioning point for REPOS G function RMB RMI RME RMN No. 2.Tables 16. 1) 1. 2. Modal independent channel-specific diameter programming ON The effect is independent of the programmed dimensions mode (G90/G91). Significance Modal channel-specific diameter programming OFF Deactivation activates channel-specific radius programming.Tables 16. Modal dependent channel-specific diameter programming ON The effect is dependent on the programmed dimensions mode (G90/G91). DIAM90 3.3 G function groups Group 29: Radius/diameter programming G function DIAMOF No. DIAMCYCOF 4. 5) Significance NC block compression OFF Compressor function COMPON ON Compressor function COMPCURV ON Compressor function COMPCAD ON MD20150 2) + + + + W 3) m m m m x STD 4) SAG MM COMPON 5) COMPCURV 5) COMPCAD 578 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 3. DIAMON 2. Modal channel-specific diameter programming during cycle processing OFF + m + m + m MD20150 2) + W 3) m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 30: NC block compression G function COMPOF 5) No. 4. 1) 1. 06/2009. 1) 1. 4. 10. 10. Significance OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function MD20150 2) - W 3) m m m m m m m m m m STD 4) SAG MM G811 5) 5) 5) G814 5) 5) G816 5) 5) 5) G819 5) Two G function groups are reserved for the OEM user.Tables 16. 2. 1) 1. 3.3 G function groups Group 31: OEM G function group G function G810 G812 G813 G815 G817 G818 5) No. 9. 8.G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function OEM G function MD20150 2) - W 3) m m m m m m m m m m STD 4) SAG MM G822 5) 5) G824 5) 5) 5) G827 5) 5) 5) Two G function groups are reserved for the OEM user. 06/2009. 3. Group 32: OEM G function group G function G820 G821 G823 G825 G826 G828 G829 5) 5) No. 9. Significance Online fine tool offset OFF Online fine tool offset ON MD20150 2) + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6. Significance OEM . 1) 1. This enables the OEM to program functions that can be customized. 2. 8. 2. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 579 . 7. This enables the OEM to program functions that can be customized. 7. 4. Group 33: Settable fine tool offset G function FTOCOF 5) FTOCON 5) No. 6. 5. 5. 3. 5 6 Significance Tool orientation smoothing OFF Continuous tool orientation smoothing Tool orientation smoothing at end of block Tool orientation smoothing at start and end of block Block-internal smoothing with specification of path length Block-internal smoothing with specification of angular tolerance MD20150 2) + + + + + + W 3) m m m m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 35: Punching and nibbling G function SPOF 5) No. 2.3 G function groups Group 34: Tool orientation smoothing G function OSOF OSC 5) OSS 5) OSSE OSD 5) OST 5) 5) 5) No. 3. 3. Significance Stroke OFF. 4. 2. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Significance Feed normal (as per DIN 66025) Feed linear variable Feedrate variable according to cubic spline MD20150 2) + + + W 3) m m m x STD 4) SAG MM 580 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 2. 2. 1) 1. 1) 1. 5.Tables 16. 1) 1. Significance Punching with delay ON Punching with delay OFF MD20150 2) + + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 37: Feed profile G function FNORM 5) FLIN 5) FCUB 5) No. 06/2009. 4. 1) 1. nibbling and punching OFF Nibbling ON Punching ON Nibbling ON in interpolation cycle Punching ON in interpolation cycle MD20150 2) + + + - W 3) m m m m m x STD 4) SAG MM SON 5) PON 5) SONS 5) PONS 5) Group 36: Punching with delay G function PDELAYON 5) PDELAYOF 5) No. 2. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 581 . Significance Interruptible thread cutting OFF Interruptible thread cutting ON MD20150 2) + + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM Fundamentals Programming Manual. 1) 1. 06/2009. 2. 1) 1. 1) 1. 2. Significance Programmable contour precision OFF Programmable contour precision ON MD20150 2) + + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 40: Tool radius compensation constant G function CUTCONOF CUTCONON No.Tables 16. Significance Fast NCK inputs/outputs for punching/nibbling byte 1 Fast NCK inputs/outputs for punching/nibbling byte 2 MD20150 2) + + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM SPIF2 5) Group 39: Programmable contour accuracy G function CPRECOF CPRECON No.3 G function groups Group 38: Assignment of fast inputs/outputs for punching/nibbling G function SPIF1 5) No. Significance Constant tool radius compensation OFF Constant tool radius compensation ON MD20150 2) + + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 41: Interruptible thread cutting G function LFOF LFON No. 1) 1. 2. Significance Determine tool length components from the current tool orientation Determine tool length components from the orientation of the active frame Determine tool orientation of an active frame on selection of tool. 1) 1. Significance Spatial approach block. 2. 2. tool points in Y direction Determine tool orientation of an active frame on selection of tool. 5. then approach in plane MD20150 2) + + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 45: Path reference for FGROUP axes G function SPATH UPATH No. 4. 4.3 G function groups Group 42: Toolholder G function TCOABS TCOFR TCOFRZ TCOFRY TCOFRX No. 1) 1. tool points in Z direction Determine tool orientation of an active frame on selection of tool. in other words. 2.Tables 16. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 1) 1. 1) 1. 3. Significance Path reference for FGROUP axes is arc length Path reference for FGROUP axes is curve parameter MD20150 2) + + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM 582 Fundamentals Programming Manual. tool points in X direction MD20150 2) + + + + W 3) m m m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 43: SAR approach direction G function G140 G141 G142 G143 No. Significance SAR approach direction defined by G41/G42 SAR approach direction to left of contour SAR approach direction to right of contour SAR approach direction tangent-dependent MD20150 2) + + + + W 3) m m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 44: SAR path segmentation G function G340 G341 No. 2. infeed depth and approach in plane in one block Start with infeed on perpendicular axis (Z). 3. 06/2009. otherwise path motion CP MD20150 2) + + + W 3) m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Fundamentals Programming Manual. 1) 1. 2. 3. Significance Collision detection for approach and retraction block ON Extend border block with arc if no intersection in TRC block Extend border block with straight line if no intersection in TRC block MD20150 2) + + + W 3) m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 49: Point-to-point motion G function CP PTP PTPG0 No. Significance The plane is determined from the path tangent and the current tool orientation The plane is determined by the current working plane (G17/G18/G19) Axial retraction to a position MD20150 2) + + + W 3) m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 47: Mode switchover for external NC code G function G290 G291 No. 2. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 583 .3 G function groups Group 46: Plane selection for fast retraction G function LFTXT LFWP LFPOS No. Significance Path motion Point-to-point motion (synchronized axis motion) Point-to-point motion only with G0. 2. 1) 1. 06/2009. 2. Significance Activate SINUMERIK language mode Activate ISO language mode MD20150 2) + + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 48: Approach and retraction response with tool radius compensation G function G460 G461 G462 No. 1) 1. 3. 3.Tables 16. 1) 1. 06/2009.3 G function groups Group 50: Orientation programming G function ORIEULER ORIRPY ORIVIRT1 ORIVIRT2 ORIAXPOS ORIRPY2 No. 2. 9. Significance Orientation angle via Euler angle Orientation angle via RPY angle (rotation sequence XYZ) Orientation angle via virtual orientation axes (definition 1) Orientation angle via virtual orientation axes (definition 2) Orientation angle via virtual orientation axes with rotary axis positions Orientation angle via RPY angle (rotation sequence ZYX) MD20150 2) + + + + + + W 3) m m m m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 51: Interpolation type for orientation programming G function ORIVECT ORIAXES ORIPATH ORIPLANE ORICONCW ORICONCCW ORICONIO ORICONTO ORICURVE ORIPATHS No. blips in the orientation characteristic are smoothed MD20150 2) + + + + + + + + + + W 3) m m m m m m m m m m x STD 4) SAG MM 584 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 3. 5. 4. 5. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 7. 10.Tables 16. 4. 1) 1. Significance Large-radius circular interpolation (identical to ORIPLANE) Linear interpolation of machine axes or orientation axes Tool orientation trajectory referred to path Interpolation in plane (identical to ORIVECT) Interpolation on a peripheral surface of the cone in clockwise direction Interpolation on the peripheral surface of a taper in the counter-clockwise direction Interpolation on a conical peripheral surface with intermediate orientation setting Interpolation on a peripheral surface of the cone with tangential transition Interpolation with additional space curve for orientation Tool orientation in relation to path. 6. 3. 1) 1. 6. 2. 8. + m TOFRAMEZ TOFRAMEY 7. 3. 1) 1. 2. + m Group 54: Vector rotation for polynomial programming G function ORIROTA ORIROTR ORIROTT ORIROTC No. + + m m TOFRAMEX 9. 8. 4. 2. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 585 . Significance Frame rotation in relation to workpiece OFF Frame rotation in relation to workpiece ON The workpiece coordinate system is aligned on the workpiece. Significance Frame rotation in relation to tool OFF Align the Z axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame As TOROT Align the Y axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame Align the X axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame Align the Z axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame As TOFRAME Align the Y axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame Align the X axis of the workpiece coordinate system parallel to the workpiece orientation by rotating the frame MD20150 2) + + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM TOROTZ TOROTY 3. 2.3 G function groups Group 52: Frame rotation in relation to workpiece G function PAROTOF PAROT No. 1) 1. 06/2009. Significance Vector rotation absolute Vector rotation relative Vector rotation tangential Tangential rotational vector in relation to path tangent MD20150 2) + + + + W 3) m m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Fundamentals Programming Manual. 4. MD20150 2) + + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 53: Frame rotation in relation to tool G function TOROTOF TOROT No. 1) 1.Tables 16. + m TOFRAME 6. + + m m TOROTX 5. 1) 1.Tables 16. point T at the tool holder) Wear values in the coordinate system of the tool head for kinetic transformation (differs from machine coordinate system through tool rotation) MD20150 2) + + + + + + W 3) m m m m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 57: Corner deceleration G function FENDNORM G62 G621 No. 1) 1. Significance Corner deceleration OFF Corner deceleration at inside corners when tool radius compensation is active (G41/G42) Corner deceleration at all corners MD20150 2) + + + W 3) m m m x STD 4) SAG MM 586 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 4. 6. Significance Initial setting value for offsets in tool length Wear values in the machine coordinate system Wear values in the workpiece coordinate system Wear values in the basic coordinate system (BCS) Wear values in the tool coordinate system (toolholder ref. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 3. 2. 3. Significance Rapid traverse motion with linear interpolation ON Rapid traverse motion with linear interpolation OFF Rapid traverse motion is achieved with single-axis interpolation. 2. 2.3 G function groups Group 55: Rapid traverse with/without linear interpolation G function RTLION RTLIOF No. MD20150 2) + + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 56: Inclusion of tool wear G function TOWSTD TOWMCS TOWWCS TOWBCS TOWTCS TOWKCS No. 5. 1) 1. as previously Positioning mode. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 587 . 1) 1. 3. 2. tapping Roughing Finishing Smooth-finishing MD20150 2) + + + + + W 3) m m m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 60: Working area limitation G function WALCS0 WALCS1 WALCS2 WALCS3 WALCS4 WALCS5 WALCS6 WALCS7 WALCS8 WALCS9 WALCS10 No. 1) 1. Significance Tool orientation smoothing OFF Tool orientation smoothing ON MD20150 2) + + W 3) m m x STD 4) SAG MM Fundamentals Programming Manual.Tables 16. Significance Standard dynamic. 1) 1.3 G function groups Group 59: Dynamic response mode for path interpolation G function DYNNORM DYNPOS DYNROUGH DYNSEMIFIN DYNFINISH No. 3. 06/2009. 2. 5. 4. 2. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Significance Workpiece coordinate system working area limitation OFF WCS working area limitation group 1 active WCS working area limitation group 2 active WCS working area limitation group 3 active WCS working area limitation group 4 active WCS working area limitation group 5 active WCS working area limitation group 6 active WCS working area limitation group 7 active WCS working area limitation group 8 active WCS working area limitation group 9 active WCS working area limitation group 10 active MD20150 2) + + + + + + + + + + + W 3) m m m m m m m m m m m x STD 4) SAG MM Group 61: Tool orientation smoothing G function ORISOF ORISON No. as long as the reference is unambiguous.4 Predefined subroutine calls 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd-15th parameter REAL: Preset offset G700/G7100 context 3rd-15th parameter as 1 .4 Predefined subroutine calls 16.4 Keyword/ subroutine identifier PRESETON 16.Tables 16. 06/2009. with its respective value in the next parameter. Explanation 1.. One axis identifier is programmed at a time. PRESETON can be used to program preset offsets for up to 8 axes. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .. Maximum axis number: 8 The default setting for the F value reference is activated with FGROUP ( ) without parameters. 588 Fundamentals Programming Manual. geometry or special axis identifiers can also be used instead of the machine axis identifier. 2.. 2nd-9th parameter AXIS: Geometry or special axis identifier Explanation Definition of the spline group Maximum number of axes: 8 1st-8th parameter SPLINEPATH INT: Spline group (must be 1) AXIS AXIS AXIS BRISKA SOFTA JERKA Switch on brisk axis acceleration for the programmed axes Switch on jerk limited axis acceleration for programmed axes The acceleration behavior set in machine data $MA_AX_JERK_ENABLE is active for the programmed axes. 4th-16th parameter 4th-16th parameter as 2 .. Deletes the DRF offset for all axes assigned to the channel. DRFOF *) As a general rule. Coordinate system AXIS*: Axis identifier Machine axis Sets the actual value for programmed axes. Axis groupings Keyword/ subroutine identifier FGROUP 1st-8th parameter Channel axis identifiers Explanation Variable F value reference: defines the axes to which the path feed refers. Optimization: See PGA Tangential follow-up mode ON: par. Coupled motion Keyword/ subroutine identifier TANG 1st parameter 2nd param.Tables 16. 6 = "P" Tangential follow-up mode OFF TANGON AXIS: Axis name following axis AXIS: Axis name following axis REAL: Offset Angle REAL: Rounding travel TANGOF TLIFT AXIS: Following REAL: axis Lift-off path AXIS: Following AXIS: axis Leading axis AXIS: Following AXIS: axis Leading axis REAL: Factor Tangential lift: tangential follow-up mode. 6th param. 4 with TANG Par. AXIS: Leading axis 1 3rd param. system REAL: Angle tolerance Preparatory statement for the definition of a tangential follow-up: The tangent for the follow-up is determined by the two master axes specified. The coupling factor specifies the relationship between a change in the angle of tangent and the following axis. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 589 . AXIS: Leading axis 2 4th param. angle tolerance Explanation AXIS: Axis name following axis REAL: CHAR: Coupling Option: factor "B": follow-up in basic coord. 5th param. CHAR Optimizat ion: "S" default "P" autom. with rounding travel. stop at contour end rotary axis lift-off possible Trailing ON: Asynchronous coupled motion ON Trailing OFF: Asynchronous coupled motion OFF TRAILON REAL: Coupling factor TRAILOF Fundamentals Programming Manual. It is usually 1. system "W": follow-up in workpiece coord. 3.4 Predefined subroutine calls 3. Feedrate per revolution: Selection of a rotary axis or spindle from which the revolutional feedrate of the path is derived if G95 is programmed. for which revolutional feedrate is activated AXIS: Axis/spindle. The revolutional feedrate can be deactivated for several axes at once. Revolutional feedrate Keyword/ subroutine identifier FPRAON 1st parameter 2nd parameter Explanation AXIS: Axis. the revolutional feedrate is derived from the master spindle. If no axis has been programmed. the revolutional feedrate is derived from the master spindle. You can program as many axes as are permitted in a block. Feedrate per revolution axial ON: Axial revolutional feedrate ON. from which revolutional feedrate is derived. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . FPR AXIS: Axis/spindle. the revolutional feedrate is derived from the master spindle. from which revolutional feedrate is derived.4 Predefined subroutine calls 6. FPRAOF AXIS: Axis for which revolutional feedrate is deactivated Feedrate per revolution axial OFF: Axial revolutional feedrate OFF. It is also possible to program a spindle instead of an axis: FPR(S1) or FPR(SPI(1)) 590 Fundamentals Programming Manual.Tables 16. If no axis/spindle has been programmed. 06/2009. The setting made with FPR is modal. If no axis has been programmed. If the second parameter is omitted. Transmit: Polar transformation Several transformations can be set per channel. If the parameter is omitted. The transformation number specifies which transformation is to be activated. The transformation number specifies which transformation is to be activated. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 591 . The transformation number specifies which transformation is to be activated. Transformations Keyword/ subroutine identifier TRACYL 1st parameter 2nd parameter Explanation REAL: Working diameter INT: Number of the transformation Cylinder: Peripheral surface transformation Several transformations can be set per channel. 06/2009. TRANSMIT INT: Number of the transformation TRAANG REAL: Angle INT: Number of the transformation Transformation inclined axis: Several transformations can be set per channel.Tables 16. meaning of the parameters depends on the type of cascading. If there are several transformations of the same transformation type per channel. the transformation group defined in the MD is activated. the last angle applies modally. If no angle programmed: TRAANG ( . If the second parameter is omitted.4 Predefined subroutine calls 7. there is one command for one transformation per channel. TRAORI INT: Number of the transformation INT: Number of the transformation TRACON REAL: Further Transformation concentrated: Cascaded transformation. the transformation can be selected with the corresponding command and parameters. the transformation group defined in the MD is activated. the parameters. Transformation oriented: 4. Fundamentals Programming Manual. It is possible to deselect the transformation by a transformation change or an explicit deselection. The transformation number specifies which transformation is to be activated. the transformation group defined in the MD is activated.2) or TRAANG. MD-dependent Deactivate transformation TRAFOOF For each transformation type. 5-axis transformation Several transformations can be set per channel. Spindle position control OFF: Switch to speed-controlled spindle operation. then grinding wheel peripheral speed is selected for the spindle of the active tool. 9. If the spindle number is not programmed. Tool monitoring OFF: If no T number is programmed. Tool monitoring ON: If no T number is programmed. Set master spindle: Declaration of spindle as master spindle for current channel. the machine-data default applies automatically without any need for parameterization. Grinding Keyword/ subroutine identifier GWPSON 1st parameter Explanation INT: Spindle number INT: Spindle number Grinding wheel peripheral speed ON: Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed ON. Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed OFF. monitoring is deactivated for the active tool. If the spindle number is not programmed. Spindles Keyword/ subroutine identifier SPCON SPCOF SETMS 1st parameter 2nd parameter and others INT: Spindle number INT: Spindle number Explanation INT: Spindle number INT: Spindle number INT: Spindle number Spindle position control ON: Switch to position-controlled spindle operation. grinding wheel peripheral speed is deselected for the spindle of the active tool. With SETMS( ). GWPSOF TMON TMOF INT: Spindle number INT: T number 592 Fundamentals Programming Manual.4 Predefined subroutine calls 8. monitoring is activated for the active tool. 06/2009. Grinding wheel peripheral speed OFF.Tables 16. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 593 . EXECUTE INT: Error status 11. EXECUTE: Activate program execution.4 Predefined subroutine calls 10. "P": Face turning: External mach. Execute table Keyword/ subroutine identifier EXECTAB 1st parameter Explanation REAL [ 11]: Element from motion table Execute table: Execute an element from a motion table. The contour programs or NC blocks which are called in the following steps are divided into individual movements and stored in the contour table. CONTDCON REAL [ . 11]: Contour table INT: Number CHAR: Stock of relief cuts removal method "L": Longitudinal turning: External mach.Tables 16. 6]: Contour table Contour decoding The blocks for a contour are stored in a named table with one table line per block and coded to save memory. The number of relief cuts is returned. 06/2009. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Stock removal Keyword/ subroutine identifier CONTPRON 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter 4th parameter INT: Status of calculation: 0: unchanged 1: Calculation forwards and backwards Explanation REAL [ . This switches back to normal program execution from reference-point-editing mode or after setting up a protection zone. "N": Face turning: Internal machining "G": Longitudinal turning: Internal machining INT: 0: In programmed direction Contour preparation on: Activate reference-point editing. 4 Predefined subroutine calls 12.Tables 16. Protection zones Keyword/ subroutine identifier CPROTDEF 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter 4th parameter 5th parameter Explanation INT: Number of the protection zone BOOL: TRUE: Tool-oriented protection zone INT: 0: 4th and 5th parameters not evaluated 1: 4th parameter evaluated 2: 5th parameter evaluated 3: 4th and 5th parameters evaluated REAL: Limit in plus direction REAL: Limit in minus direction Channelspecific protection zone definition: Definition of a channelspecific protection zone NPROTDEF INT: Number of the protection zone BOOL: TRUE: Tool-oriented protection zone INT: 0: 4th and 5th parameters not evaluated 1: 4th parameter evaluated 2: 5th parameter evaluated 3: 4th and 5th parameters evaluated REAL: Limit in plus direction REAL: Limit in minus direction NCKspecific protection zone definition: Definition of a machinespecific protection zone 594 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Tables 16. only with protection zones active EXECUTE VAR INT: Error status EXECUTE: Activate program execution. This switches back to normal program execution from reference point editing mode or after setting up a protection zone. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 595 . REAL: Offset of protection zone in 1st geometry axis REAL: Offset of protection zone in 2nd geometry axis REAL: Offset of protection zone in 3rd geometry axis Machinespecific protection zone ON/OFF REAL: Offset of protection zone in 1st geometry axis REAL: Offset of protection zone in 2nd geometry axis REAL: Offset of protection zone in 3rd geometry axis Channelspecific protection zone ON/OFF 13. Preprocessing/single block STOPRE Stop processing: Preprocessing stop until all prepared blocks are executed in main run Fundamentals Programming Manual. only with protection zones active NPROT INT: Number of the protection zone INT: Option 0: Protection zone OFF 1: Preactivate protection zone 2: Protection zone ON 3: Preactivate protection zone with conditional stop. 06/2009.4 Predefined subroutine calls CPROT INT: Number of the protection zone INT: Option 0: Protection zone OFF 1: Preactivate protection zone 2: Protection zone ON 3: Preactivate protection zone with conditional stop. DISABLE CLRINT 15. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Deactivate interrupt: Deactivates the interrupt routine assigned to the hardware input with the specified number.Tables 16. An interrupt is enabled after the SETINT statement. 596 Fundamentals Programming Manual.4 Predefined subroutine calls 14. Motion synchronization Keyword/ subroutine identifier CANCEL 1st parameter Explanation INT: Number of synchronized action Aborts the modal motion-synchronous action with the specified ID 16. The assignment between the hardware input and the interrupt routine made with SETINT remains valid and can be reactivated with ENABLE. Fast retraction is not executed. Function definition Keyword/ subroutine identifier FCTDEF 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter 4th-7th parameter REAL: Coefficients a0 – a3 Explanation INT: Function number REAL: Lower limit value REAL: Upper limit value Define polynomial. The interrupt routine is deactivated and no reaction occurs when the interrupt is generated. 06/2009. This is evaluated in SYFCT or PUTFTOCF. Select interrupt: Cancel the assignment of interrupt routines and attributes to an interrupt input. Interrupts Keyword/ subroutine identifier ENABLE 1st parameter Explanation INT: Number of the interrupt input INT: Number of the interrupt input INT: Number of the interrupt input Activate interrupt: Activates the interrupt routine assigned to the hardware input with the specified number. 2 : 2nd channel or channel name defined in $MC_CHAN_NAME.10 or STRING: Channel name $MC_CHAN _NAME START # Fundamentals Programming Manual. the channel name defined in $MC_CHAN_NAME can also be used. As an alternative to the channel number. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 597 . Communication Keyword/ subroutine identifier MMC 1st parameter STRING: Command 2nd parameter Explanation CHAR: Acknowledgement mode** "N": Without acknowledgment "S": Synchronous acknowledgment "A": Asynchronous acknowledgment MMC command: Command ON MMC command interpreter for the configuration of windows via NC program see /IAM/ Commissioning CNC. Starts selected programs simultaneously on multiple channels from running program. Program coordination Keyword/ subroutine identifier INIT # 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter CHAR: Acknowledg ement mode** 4th parameter 5th param eter 6th-8th Explanation param eter Selection of a module for execution in a channel. 2 : 2nd channel.Tables 16. Without acknowledgement: Program execution is continued when the command has been transmitted. 1 : 1st channel.10 or STRING: Channel name $MC_CHAN _NAME INT: Channel numbers 1 . The command has no effect on the existing channel. Expanding base software and HMI Embedded/Advanced in BE1 user interface ** Acknowledgement mode: Commands are acknowledged on request from the executing component (channel. NC. 1 : 1st channel. 18. The sender is not informed if the command cannot be executed successfully. INT: STRING: Channel path numbers 1 . etc.).4 Predefined subroutine calls 17. 06/2009. 4 Predefined subroutine calls WAITE # INT: or channel numbers 1 . End of subroutine with no function output to the PLC.10 or STRING: Channel name $MC_CHAN _NAME INT: Channel numbers 1 . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Tables 16. 06/2009. WAITMC # INT: Marker numbers 0-9 WAITP AXIS: Axis identifier WAITS INT: Spindle INT: Spindle INT: Spindle INT: Spindle INT: number number number number Spindle number RET GET # GETD# AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS Assign machine axis Assign machine axis directly Release machine axis RELEASE # AXIS 598 Fundamentals Programming Manual. WAITM # Wait: Wait for a marker to be reached in other channels. The number of the own channel can also be specified.10 INT: Marker numbers 0-9 STRING: Channel name $MC_CHAN _NAME INT: Channel numbers 1 . The program waits until the WAITM with the relevant marker has been reached in the other channel. Wait for positioning spindle: Wait until programmed spindles previously programmed with SPOSA reach their programmed end point. Exact stop only if the other channels have not yet reached the marker. The program waits until the WAITMC with the relevant marker has been reached in the other channel. Wait: Waits conditionally for a marker to be reached in other channels.10 or STRING: Channel name $MC_CHAN _NAME AXIS: Axis identifier AXIS: Axis identifier AXIS: Axis identifier AXIS: Axis identifier AXIS: Axis identifier Wait for end of program: Waits until end of program in another channel (number or name). Wait for positioning axis: Wait for positioning axes to reach their programmed end point. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 599 . Without acknowledgement: Program execution is continued when the command has been transmitted.10 or STRING: Channel name $MC_CHAN _NAME INT: Spindle number Put fine tool correction: Fine tool compensation PUTFTOCF # INT: No. etc. 3rd degree polynomial). the next command is executed. synchronous acknowledgement is the default response. VAR REAL: Reference value *) Put fine tool correction function dependent: Change online tool compensation according to a function defined with FCTDEF (max. If the acknowledgement mode is not specified. Synchronous acknowledgement: The program execution is paused until the receiving component acknowledges the command. If the acknowledgement is negative an error is output.Tables 16. for others it is programmable. of function The number used here must be specified in FCTDEF. "s" or to be omitted. The executing component is not informed if the command cannot be executed successfully. the acknowledgement response is predefined.). Acknowledgement "S". The SPI function can also be used to program a spindle instead of an axis: GET(SPI(1)) #) The keyword is not valid for NCU571. ** Acknowledgement mode: Commands are acknowledged on request from the executing component (channel. Fundamentals Programming Manual. NC. The acknowledgement response for program-coordination commands is always synchronous. If the acknowledgement is positive. For some commands.4 Predefined subroutine calls PUTFTOC # REAL: Offset value INT: Parameter number INT: INT: Spindle Channel number number or STRING: Channel name $MC_CHAN _NAME INT: Parameter number INT: Channel numbers 1 . Acknowledgment mode "N" or "n". 06/2009. Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls 19. Data access Keyword/ subroutine identifier 1st parameter Explanation CHANDATA INT: Channel number Set channel number for channel data access (only permitted in initialization block); the subsequent accesses refer to the channel set with CHANDATA. 20. Messages Keyword/ subroutine identifier MSG 1st parameter STRING: STRING: signal 2nd parameter INT: Continuouspath-mode call parameter Explanation Message modal: The message is active until the next message is queued. If the 2nd parameter = 1 is programmed, e.g. MSG(Text, 1), the message will even be output as an executable block in continuous-path mode. 22. Alarms Keyword/ subroutine identifier SETAL 1st parameter INT: Alarm number (cycle alarms) 2nd parameter STRING: Character string Explanation Set alarm: Sets alarm. A character string with up to four parameters can be specified in addition to the alarm number. The following predefined parameters are available: %1 = channel number %2 = block number, label %3 = text index for cycle alarms %4 = additional alarm parameters 23. Compensation Keyword/ subroutine identifier QECLRNON QECLRNOF 1st parameter4th parameter AXIS: Axis number Explanation Quadrant error compensation learning ON: Quadrant error compensation learning ON Quadrant error compensation learning OFF: Quadrant error compensation learning OFF 600 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls 24. Tool management Keyword/ subroutine identifier DELT GETSELT 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter INT: Duplo number INT: Spindle number INT: Spindle number Explanation STRING[32]: Tool designation VAR INT: T number (return value) INT: Count Delete tool. Duplo number can be omitted. Get selected T number. If no spindle number is specified, the command for the master spindle applies. Takes account of set piece number for all tools assigned to the spindle. If no spindle number is specified, the command for the master spindle applies. INT: D no. Set D no. of tool (T) and its tool edge to new. Set D numbers of all tools of the TO unit assigned to the channel to invalid SETPIECE SETDNO DZERO INT: Tool number T INT: Tool edge no. DELDL INT: Tool number T INT: D no. Delete all additive offsets of the tool edge (or of a tool if D is not specified). Set toolholder no. SETMTH POSM INT: Tool-holder no. INT: Location no. for positioning INT: No. of the INT: magazine to Location be moved number of the internal magazine INT: Magazine INT: Wear number group no. INT: Magazine number of the internal magazine Position magazine SETTIA VAR INT: Status = result of the operation (return value) VAR INT: Status = result of the operation (return value) VAR INT: Status = result of the operation (return value) Deactivate tool from wear group SETTA INT: Magazine INT: Wear number group no. Activate tool from wear group RESETMON INT: Internal T INT: D no. of no. tool Set actual value of tool to setpoint Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 601 Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls 25. Synchronous spindle Keyword/ subroutine identifier COUPDEF 1st param. AXIS: Following axis or following spindle (FS) 2nd param. AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) 3rd param. REAL: Numerator transformation ratio (FA) or (FS) 4th param. REAL: Denominator transformation ratio (LA) or (LS) 5th parameter Block change behavior STRING[8]: Block change behavior: "NOC": No block change control, block change is enabled immediately, "FINE": Block change on "synchronism fine", "COARSE": Block change on synchronism coarse and "IPOSTOP": block change in setpoint-dependent termination of overlaid movement. If the block change behavior is not specified, the set behavior is applicable and there is no change. 6th parameter STRING[2]: "DV": Setpoint coupling "AV": Actualvalue coupling Explanation Couple definition: Definition of synchronized spindle grouping. COUPDEL AXIS: Following axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Following axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Following axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) REAL: POSFS The block change is enabled immediately. Couple delete: Delete synchronized spindle grouping. Fastest possible deactivation of synchronous operation. Deselection of synchronous operation after deactivation position POSFS has been crossed. COUPOF COUPOF Block change is not enabled until this position has been crossed. 602 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls COUPOF AXIS: Following axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) REAL: POSFS REAL: POSLS Block change is not enabled until both programmed positions have been crossed. Range of POSFS, POSLS: 0 ... 359.999 degrees. Deselection of synchronous operation after the two deactivation positions. POSFS and POSLS have been crossed. Deactivation of couple with followingspindle stop. COUPOFS AXIS: Following axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Following axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) REAL: POSFS Block change performed as quickly as possible with immediate block change. COUPOFS After the programmed deactivation position that refers to the machine coordinate system has been crossed, the block change is not enabled until the deactivation positions POSFS have been crossed. Value range 0 ... 359.999 degrees. Only deactivated after programmed followingaxis deactivation position has been crossed. Fastest possible activation of synchronous operation with any angular reference between the leading and following spindles. COUPON AXIS: Following axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) The block change is enabled immediately. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 603 Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls COUPON AXIS: Following axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) REAL: POSFS The block change is enabled according to the defined setting. Range of POSFS: 0 ... 359.999 degrees. Activation with a defined angular offset POSFS between the following and leading spindles. This offset is referred to the zero degrees position of the leading spindle in a positive direction of rotation. Acceptance of activation with previously programmed M3 S.. or M4 S... Immediate acceptance of rotational speed difference. Couple reset: Reset synchronous spindle group. The programmed values become invalid. The machine data values are valid. COUPONC AXIS: Following axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) An offset position cannot be programmed. COUPRES AXIS: Following axis or following spindle (FS) AXIS: Leading axis or leading spindle (LS) For synchronous spindles, the axis parameters are programmed with SPI(1) or S1. 604 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls 26. Structure statements in the STEP editor (editor-based program support) Keyword/ subroutine identifier SEFORM 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter Explanation STRING[128]: section name INT: level STRING[128]: icon Current section name for STEP editor Keyword/ subroutine identifier COUPON 1st parameter AXIS: Following axis 2nd parameter 3rd parameter 4th parameter Explanation AXIS: REAL: Leading axis Activation position of following axis Couple on: Activate ELG group/synchronous spindle pair. If no activation positions are specified, the couple is activated as quickly as possible (ramp). If an activation position is specified for the following axis and spindle, this refers absolutely or incrementally to the master axis or spindle. Parameters 4 and 5 only have to be programmed if the 3rd parameter is specified. REAL: Deactivation position of master axis (absolute) Couple OFF: Deactivate ELG group/synchronous spindle pair. The couple parameters are retained. If positions are specified, the couple is only canceled when all the specified positions have been overtraveled. The following spindle continues to revolve at the last speed programmed before deactivation of the couple. COUPOF AXIS: Following axis AXIS: REAL: Leading axis Deactivation position of following axis (absolute) Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 605 Tables 16.4 Predefined subroutine calls WAITC AXIS: Axis/ spindle STRING[8]: Block change criterion AXIS: Axis/ spindle STRING[8]: Block change criterion Wait for couple condition: Wait until couple block change criterion for the axes/spindles is fulfilled. Up to two axes/spindles can be programmed. Block change criterion: "NOC": No block change control, block change is enabled immediately, "FINE": Block change on "synchronism fine", "COARSE": Block change on synchronism coarse and "IPOSTOP": Block change in setpoint-dependent termination of overlaid movement. If the block change behavior is not specified, the set behavior is applicable and there is no change. Advance container axis. AXCTSWE AXIS: Axis/spindle 606 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Tables 16.5 Predefined subroutine calls in motion-synchronous actions 16.5 Keyword/ function identifier STOPREOF 16.5 Predefined subroutine calls in motion-synchronous actions 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter to 5th parameter Explanation 27. Synchronous procedures Stop preparation OFF: A synchronized action with a STOPREOF command causes a preprocessing stop after the next output block (= block for the main run). The preprocessing stop is canceled with the end of the output block or when the STOPREOF condition is fulfilled. All synchronized action statements with the STOPREOF command are therefore interpreted as having been executed. Read-in disable Read-in disable AXIS: Axis for axial delete distance-to-go (optional). If the axis is omitted, delete distanceto-go is triggered for the path distance INT: Number of polynomial function defined with FCTDEF. VAR REAL: Result variable*) VAR REAL: Input variable **) Delete distance-to-go: A synchronized action with the DELDTG command causes a preprocessing stop after the next output block (= block for the main run). The preprocessing stop is canceled with the end of the output block or when the first DELDTG condition is fulfilled. The axial distance to the destination point on an axial delete distance-to-go is stored in $AA_DELT[axis]; the distance-to-go is stored in $AC_DELT. If the condition in the motion synchronous action is fulfilled, the polynomial determined by the first expression is evaluated at the input variable. The upper and lower range of the value is limited and the input variable is assigned. Modify tool fine compensation according to a function defined with FCTDEF (polynomial no higher than 3rd degree). The number used here must be specified in FCTDEF. RDISABLE DELDTG SYNFCT FTOC INT: Number of VAR REAL: polynomial Input variable function defined **) with FCTDEF INT: Length 1, 2, 3 INT: Channel number INT: Spindle number *) Only special system variables are permissible as result variables. These are described in the Programming Manual Advanced in the section on "Write main run variable". **) Only special system variables are permissible as input variables. These variables are described in the Programming Manual Advanced in the list of system variables. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 607 Tables 16.6 Predefined functions 16.6 16.6 Predefined functions Predefined functions Predefined functions are invoked by means of a function call. Function calls return a value. They can be included as an operand in an expression. 1. Coordinate system Keyword/ function identifier CTRANS Result 1st parameter 2nd parameter Explanation FRAME AXIS REAL: Offset 3rd-15th parameter as 1 ... 4th-16th parameter as 2 ... Translation: Zero offset for multiple axes. One axis identifier is programmed at a time, with its respective value in the next parameter. CTRANS can be used to program offset for up to 8 axes. Rotation: Rotation of the current coordinate system. Maximum number of parameters: 6 (one axis identifier and one value per geometry axis) CROT FRAME AXIS REAL: Rotation 3rd/5th parameter as 1 ... 4th/6th parameter as 2 ... 608 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Tables 16.6 Predefined functions CSCALE FRAME AXIS REAL: Scale factor 3rd-15th parameter as 1 ... 4th-16th parameter as 2 ... Scale: Scale factor for multiple axes. Maximum number of parameters is 2* maximum number of axes (axis identifier and value). One axis identifier is programmed at a time, with its respective value in the next parameter. CSCALE can be used to program scale factors for up to 8 axes. Mirror: Mirror on a coordinate axis 3rd parameter REAL variables Frame calculation from 3 measuring points in space CMIRROR FRAME AXIS 2nd - 8th parameter as 1 ... 2-dim. REAL array MEAFRAME FRAME 2-dim. REAL array Frame functions CTRANS, CSCALE, CROT and CMIRROR are used to generate frame expressions. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 609 Tables 16.6 Predefined functions 2. Geometry functions Keyword/ function identifier CALCDAT Result 1st parameter 2nd parameter 3rd parameter Explanation BOOL: Error status VAR REAL [,2]: Table with input points (abscissa and ordinate for points 1, 2, 3, etc.) INT: Number of input points for calculation (3 or 4) VAR REAL [3]: Result: Abscissa, ordinate and radius of calculated circle center point CALCDAT: Calculate circle data Calculates radius and center point of a circle from 3 or 4 points (according to parameter 1), which must lie on a circle. The points must be different. Names CALCPOSI Result INT: Status 0 OK -1 DLIMIT neg. -2 Trans. n.def. 1 SW limit 2 Working area 3 Prot. zone See PGA for more Explanation: CALCPOSI 1st parameter REAL: Starting position in WCS [0] Abscissa [1] Ordinate [2] Applicate 2nd parameter 3rd parameter 4th parameter REAL: REAL: REAL: Return value possible incr. path if path from parameter 3 cannot be fully traversed without violating limit 5th parameter BOOL: 0: Evaluation G code group 13 6th parameter bin encoded to be monitored 1 SW limits Minimum Increment: Path definition clearances of limits to be [0] Abscissa observed [1] Ordinate [0] Abscissa [2] Applicate [1] Ordinate referred to [2] Applicate starting [3] Lin. position machine Axis [4] Rot. Axis (inch/metr.) 2 working area 1: Reference to basic control system, independen t of active G codes group 13 4 active protection zone 8 preactive protection zone CALCPOSI is for checking whether, starting from a defined starting point, the geometry axes can traverse a defined path without violating the axis limits (software limits), working area limitations, or protection zones. If the defined path cannot be traversed without violating limits, the maximum permissible value is returned. 610 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Tables 16.6 Predefined functions INTERSEC BOOL: Error status VAR REAL [11]: First contour element VAR REAL [11]: Second contour element VAR REAL [2]: Result vector: Intersection coordinate, abscissa and ordinate Intersection: Calculation of intersection The intersection between two contour elements is calculated. The intersection coordinates are return values. The error status indicates whether an intersection was found. 3. Axis functions Result AXNAME AXIS: Axis identifier 1st parameter STRING [ ]: Input string 2nd parameter Explanation AXNAME: Get axis identifier Converts the input string to an axis identifier. An alarm is generated if the input string does not contain a valid axis identifier. AXTOSPI: Convert axis to spindle Converts an axis identifier into a spindle number. An alarm is set if the transfer parameter does not contain a valid axis identifier. SPI: Convert spindle to axis Converts a spindle number to an axis identifier. An alarm is generated if the passed parameter does not contain a valid spindle number. Check whether the geometry axis 1 to 3 specified as parameter exists in accordance with $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB. AXTOSPI INT: Spindle number AXIS: Axis identifier AXIS: Axis identifier SPI INT: Spindle number ISAXIS BOOL TRUE: Axis exists: Otherwise: FALSE STRING INT: Number of the geometry axis (1 to 3) AXIS AXSTRING Convert axis identifier into string. Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 611 Tables 16.6 Predefined functions 4. Tool management Result NEWT GETT50 GETACTT TOOLENV DELTOOLENV INT: T number INT: T number INT: Status INT: Status INT: Status INT: Status 1st parameter STRING [32]: Tool name STRING [32]: Tool name INT: T number STRING: Name STRING: Name STRING: Name INT: Number = [0] Number = [1] Number = [2] 2nd parameter INT: Duplo number INT: Duplo number STRING[32]: Tool name Explanation Create new tool (prepare tool data). The duplo number can be omitted. Get T number for tool identifier. Get active tool from a group of tools with the same name. Save a tool environment in SRAM with the specified name. Delete a tool environment in SRAM with the specified name. All tool environments if no name specified. Reading: T number, D number, DL number from a tool environment with the specified name GETTENV Result GETTCOR INT: Status 1st par. 2nd par. REAL: Length [11] Components: Coordinate system 3rd par. Tool environment/ "" 4th par. Int. T number 5th par. INT: D number 6th par. INT: DL number Explanation Read tool lengths and tool length components from tool environment or current environment Details: See /FB1/ Function Manual Basic Functions; (W1) STRING: STRING: INT: Result SETTCOR INT: Status 1st par. 2nd par. REAL: Offset vector [0-3] Component(s) 3rd par. Component(s) to be offset 4th par. INT: 5th par. INT: 6th par. Name of tool environment 7th par. Int. T number 8th par. INT: D number 9th par. INT: DL number STRING: INT: STRING: INT: Type of Index of write geo. axis operation Explanation Changing tool components whilst observing all marginal conditions that are included in the evaluation of the individual components. Details: See Function Manual Basic Functions; (W1) 612 Fundamentals Programming Manual, 06/2009, 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 ordinate. Details: See Function Manual Basic Functions. Arithmetic Result SIN ASIN COS ACOS TAN ATAN2 SQRT ABS POT TRUNC ROUND LN EXP MINVAL MAXVAL BOUND REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL Result REAL: Check status 1st parameter REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL 1st parameter REAL: Minimum REAL REAL 2nd parameter REAL: Maximum REAL 2nd parameter Explanation Sine Arcsine Cosine Arccosine Tangent Arctangent 2 Square root Generate absolute value Square Truncate decimal places Round decimal places Natural logarithm Exponential function ex Determines the smaller value of two variables Determines the larger value of two variables 3rd parameter REAL: Check variable Explanation Checks whether the variable value lies within the defined min/max value range Explanation The arithmetic functions can also be programmed in synchronized actions. The assignment to the geometry axes is affected by frames and the active plane (G17 . Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009.6 Predefined functions Result LENTOAX INT: Status 1st parameter INT: Axis index [0-2] 2nd parameter REAL: L1.19). L2. [3] Matrix 3rd parameter STRING: Coordinate system for the assignment Explanation The function provides information about the assignment of the tool lengths L1.Tables 16. applicate. L2. applicate [3]. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 613 . L3 for abscissa. L3 of the active tools to abscissa. Arithmetic functions are calculated and evaluated in the main run. Synchronized action parameter $AC_PARAM[n] can also be used for calculations and as buffer memory. (W1) 5. ordinate. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . String functions Result 1st parameter 2nd parameter to 3rd parameter Explanation ISNUMBER BOOL STRING Check whether the input string can be converted to a number. Find the character (2nd parameter) in the input string (1st parameter). RINDEX INT STRING CHAR 614 Fundamentals Programming Manual. The 1st character in the string has the index 0. For axial variables. Result is TRUE if conversion is possible. The search is from left to right. 06/2009. Check whether the transfer parameter contains a variable known in the NC.Tables 16. setting data. The 1st character in the string has the index 0. the axis names are accepted as an index but not checked. The reply gives the place. Find the character (2nd parameter) in the input string (1st parameter). at which the character was first found. Convert all alphabetic characters in the input string to lower case. at which the character was first found. general variables such as GUDs) Result is TRUE if all the following checks produce positive results according to the (STRING) transfer parameter: – The identifier exists – It is a 1.6 Predefined functions 6. The reply gives the place. The search is from right to left. system variable.or 2-dimensional array – An array index is allowed. Convert all alphabetic characters in the input string to upper case. (Machine data. ISVAR BOOL STRING NUMBER TOUPPER TOLOWER STRLEN INDEX REAL STRING STRING INT INT STRING STRING STRING STRING STRING CHAR Convert the input string into a number. The result is the length of the input string up to the end of the string (0). 10.Tables 16. SUBSTR STRING STRING INT Fundamentals Programming Manual. Returns the substring of the input string (1st parameter). defined by the start character (2nd parameter) and number of characters (3rd parameter). The first character in the string has the index 0. The search is from left to right.6 Predefined functions MINDEX INT STRING STRING Find one of the characters specified in the 2nd parameter in the input string (1st parameter). Example: SUBSTR("ACKNOWLEDGEMENT:10 to 99". 06/2009. The place where one of the characters was first found is output. 2) returns substring "10". 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 615 . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Tables 16. 06/2009.6 Predefined functions 616 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009.A Appendix List of abbreviations Output Automation system American Standard Code for Information Interchange Application Specific Integrated Circuit: User switching circuit Asynchronous subroutine Auxiliary function Job planning Operating mode Ready to run Binary Coded Decimals: Decimal numbers encoded In binary code Basic Coordinate System Binary files (Binary Files) Basic Input Output System Boot files: Boot files for SIMODRIVE 611 digital Basic program Communication bus Computer-Aided Design Computer-Aided Manufacturing Computerized Numerical Control Communication Coordinate rotation Communications Processor Central Processing Unit Carriage Return Cutter radius compensation Cathode Ray Tube picture tube Central Service Board: PLC module Function plan (PLC programming method) Clear To Send: Signal from serial data interfaces Cutter radius compensation: Tool radius compensation A A.1 Fundamentals Programming Manual.1 A AS ASCII ASIC ASUB AuxF AV BA BB BCD BCS BIN BIOS BOT BP C Bus CAD CAM CNC COM COR CP CPU CR CRC CRT CSB CSF CTS CUTOM A. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 617 . Appendix A. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . number of holes per character always odd Encoder: Actual value encoder Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Error from printer Function block Slimline screen Function Call: Function block in the PLC Product database Floppy Disk Drive Feed Drive Flash-EPROM: Read and write memory 618 Fundamentals Programming Manual.1 List of abbreviations DAC DB DBB DBW DBX DC DCD DDE DIN DIO DIR DLL DOE DOS DPM DPR DRAM DRF DRY DSB DTE DW E EIA code ENC EPROM Error FB FBS FC FDB FDD FDD FEPROM Digital-to-Analog Converter Data block in the PLC Data block byte in the PLC Data block word in the PLC Data block bit in the PLC Direct Control: Movement of the rotary axis via the shortest path to the absolute position within one revolution Data Carrier Detect Dynamic Data Exchange Deutsche Industrie Norm (German Industry Standard) Data Input/Output: Data transfer display Directory Dynamic Link Library Data transmission equipment Disk Operating System Dual-Port Memory Dual-Port RAM Dynamic Random Access Memory Differential Resolver Function (DRF) Dry Run: Dry run feedrate Decoding Single Block Data Terminal Equipment Data word Input Special punched tape code. 06/2009. K4 KUE Kv First In First Out: Memory that works without address specification and whose data are read in the same order in which they were stored. Fine InterPOlator Function Module Floating Point Unit Floating Point Unit Frame block Data record (frame) Feed Stop Global User Data Hard Disk Abbreviation for hexadecimal number Handheld unit Human Machine Interface Human Machine Interface: Operator functionality of SINUMERIK for operation. number of holes per character always even Jogging: Setup mode Channel 1 to channel 4 Speed ratio Servo gain factor Fundamentals Programming Manual.1 List of abbreviations FIFO FIPO FM FPU FRA FRAME FST GUD HD HEX HHU HMI HMI HMS HW I/O I/R IBN IF IK (GD) IKA IM IMR IMS INC INI IPO IS ISA ISO ISO code JOG K1 . 06/2009.Appendix A. programming and simulation.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 619 . High-resolution Measuring System Hardware Input/Output Infeed/regenerative-feedback unit (power supply) of the SIMODRIVE 611digital Startup Drive module pulse enable Implicit communication (global data) Interpolative Compensation: Interpolatory compensation Interface Module Interconnection module Interface Module Receive: Interconnection module for receiving data Interface Module Send: Interconnection module for sending data Increment Initializing Data Interpolator Interface signal Industry Standard Architecture International Standardization Organization Special punched tape code. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 06/2009. Numerical Control Unit: Hardware unit of the NCK Name for the operating system of the NCK Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline Organization block in the PLC Original Equipment Manufacturer Operator Panel Operator Panel: Operating setup Operator Panel Interface Operator Panel Interface: Interface for connection to the operator panel Options Open Systems Interconnection: Standard for computer communications 620 Fundamentals Programming Manual. etc.Appendix A.1 List of abbreviations LAD LCD LEC LED LF LR LUD MB MC MCP MCS MD MDI MLFB Mode group MPF MPI MS MSD NC NCK NCU NRK NURBS OB OEM OP OP OPI OPI OPT OSI Ladder diagram (PLC programming method) Liquid Crystal Display Leadscrew error compensation Light-Emitting Diode Line Feed Position controller Local User Data Megabyte Measuring circuit Machine control panel Machine coordinate system Machine data Manual Data Automatic: Manual input Machine-readable product designation Mode group Main Program File: NC part program (main program) Multiport Interface Multiport Interface Microsoft (software manufacturer) Main Spindle Drive Numerical Control Numerical Control Kernel: NC kernel with block preparation. traversing range. 06/2009.1 List of abbreviations P bus PC PCIN PCMCIA PCU PG PLC PLC PMS POS RAM REF REPOS RISC ROV RPA RPY RS-232-C RTS SBL SD SDB SEA SFB SFC SK SKP SM SPF SR SRAM SSI STL SW SYF Peripheral Bus Personal Computer Name of the SW for data exchange with the control Personal Computer Memory Card International Association: Standard for plug-in memory cards PC Unit: PC box (computer unit) Programming device Programmable Logic Control: Interface control Programmable Logic Controller Position measuring system Positioning Random Access Memory: Program memory that can be read and written to Reference point approach function Reposition function Reduced Instruction Set Computer: Type of processor with small instruction set and ability to process instructions at high speed Rapid override: Input correction R-Parameter Active: Memory area on the NCK for R parameter numbers Roll Pitch Yaw: Rotation type of a coordinate system Serial interface (definition of the exchange lines between DTE and DCE) Request To Send: RTS. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 621 .Appendix A. control signal of serial data interfaces Single Block Setting Data System Data Block Setting Data Active: Identifier (file type) for setting data System Function Block System Function Call Softkey SKiP: Skip block Stepper Motor Sub Routine File: Subroutine Subroutine Static RAM (non-volatile) Serial Synchronous Interface: Synchronous serial interface Statement list Software System Files System files Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .1 List of abbreviations T TC TEA TLC TNRC TO TOA TRANSMIT TRC UFR UI WCS WOP WPD ZO ZOA µC Tool Tool change Testing Data Active: Identifier for machine data Tool length compensation Tool Nose Radius Compensation Tool offset Tool Offset Active: Identifier (file type) for tool offsets TRANSform Milling Into Turning: Coordinate conversion on turning machine for milling operations Tool Radius Compensation User Frame: Zero offset User interface Workpiece coordinate system Workshop-oriented Programming Workpiece Directory Zero offset Zero Offset Active: Identifier (file type) for zero offset data Micro Controller 622 Fundamentals Programming Manual.Appendix A. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 623 .2 Feedback on the documentation This document will be continuously improved with regard to its quality and ease of use. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Please help us with this task by sending your comments and suggestions for improvement via e-mail or fax to: E-mail: Fax: mailto:docu.com +49 9131 .Appendix A.motioncontrol@siemens. 06/2009.2 Feedback on the documentation A.98 2176 Please use the fax form on the back of this page.2 A. Appendix A.2 Feedback on the documentation 624 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 06/2009.Appendix A.3 A. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 625 .3 Documentation overview A.3 Documentation overview Fundamentals Programming Manual. Appendix A. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .3 Documentation overview 626 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 06/2009. g. Alarms and messages from PLC Alarms and messages for the machine can be displayed in plain text from the PLC program. it is possible to switch over in the machining program between abrupt acceleration and continuous (jerk-free) acceleration. 06/2009.Glossary Absolute dimensions A destination for an axis movement is defined by a dimension that refers to the origin of the currently active coordinate system. Alarms and messages are displayed separately. No additional function block packages are required for this purpose. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 627 . 2. See → Incremental dimension Acceleration with jerk limitation In order to optimize the acceleration response of the machine whilst simultaneously protecting the mechanical components. input. Alarms and messages in the part program: Alarms and messages can be displayed in plain text directly from the part program. Fundamentals Programming Manual. output etc. Alarms All → messages and alarms are displayed on the operator panel in plain text with date and time and the corresponding symbol for the cancel criterion. Archive Reading out of files and/or directories on an external memory device. 1. Address An address is the identifier for a certain operand or operand range. e. and C.g. and Z are identified using A. tool magazine. rightangled → coordinate system. Y. Rotary axes rotating around X. Auxiliary functions Auxiliary functions enable → part programs to transfer → parameters to the → PLC. Auxiliary axes are not involved in actual machining. the CNC axes are subdivided into: ● Axes: interpolating path axes ● Auxiliary axes: non-interpolating feed and positioning axes with an axis-specific feed rate. which then trigger reactions defined by the machine manufacturer. and Z as defined in DIN 66217 for a dextrorotatory. Axis name See → Axis identifier 628 Fundamentals Programming Manual. B. e. Axis address See → Axis identifier Axis identifier Axes are identifed using X.g. 06/2009. Axes In accordance with their functional scope. Automatic Operating mode of the control (block sequence operation according to DIN): Operating mode for NC systems in which a → subprogram is selected and executed continuously. "Rapid NC input" signal). tool feeder.Glossary Asynchronous subroutine Part program that can be started asynchronously to (independently of) the current program status using an interrupt signal (e. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Additional axes situated parallel to the specified axes can be designated using other letters. Y. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Backlash compensation can be entered separately for each axis. The basic coordinate system exists parallel to the → machine coordinate system if no → transformation is active. The programmer uses axis names of the basic coordinate system in the → part program. The difference between the two coordinate systems lies in the → axis identifiers. Blank Workpiece as it is before it is machined.Glossary Backlash compensation Compensation for a mechanical machine backlash. e. Base axis Axis whose setpoint or actual value position forms the basis of the calculation of a compensation value. Basic Coordinate System Cartesian coordinate system which is mapped by transformation onto the machine coordinate system.g. Baud rate Rate of data transfer (Bit/s). 06/2009. Backup battery The backup battery ensures that the → user program in the → CPU is stored so that it is safe from power failure and so that specified data areas and bit memory. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 629 . backlash on reversal for ball screws. timers and counters are stored retentively. Block "Block" is the term given to any files required for creating and processing programs. the "Block search" function can be used to select any location in the part program at which the program is to be started or resumed. Channel A channel is characterized by the fact that it can process a → part program independently of other channels. A channel exclusively controls the axes and spindles assigned to it. and the workpiece is thereby machined.Glossary Block search For debugging purposes or following a program abort. Circular interpolation The → tool moves on a circle between specified points on the contour at a given feed rate. Compensation axis Axis with a setpoint or actual value modified by the compensation value 630 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Part program runs of different channels can be coordinated through → synchronization. CNC See → NC COM Component of the NC for the implementation and coordination of communication. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 06/2009. Booting Loading the system program after power ON. C axis Axis around which the tool spindle describes a controlled rotational and positioning movement. in which the tool offset data are stored. 06/2009. In such cases. Connecting cables Connecting cables are pre-assembled or user-assembled 2-wire cables with a connector at each end. programmed axis position. Contour Contour of the → workpiece Contour monitoring The following error is monitored within a definable tolerance band as a measure of contour accuracy. → Workpiece coordinate system Fundamentals Programming Manual. Compensation table Table containing interpolation points. an alarm is output and the axes are stopped. Coordinate system See → Machine coordinate system. This connecting cable connects the → CPU to a → programming device or to other CPUs by means of a → multi-point interface (MPI). Continuous-path mode The objective of continuous-path mode is to avoid substantial deceleration of the → path axes at the part program block boundaries and to change to the next block at as close to the same path velocity as possible. It provides the compensation values of the compensation axis for selected positions on the basic axis. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 631 . An unacceptably high following error can cause the drive to become overloaded.Glossary Compensation memory Data range in the control. Compensation value Difference between the axis position measured by the encoder and the desired. for example. see → PLC C-Spline The C-Spline is the most well-known and widely used spline. 2. Curvature The curvature k of a contour is the inverse of radius r of the nestling circle in a contour point (k = 1/r). Diagnosis 1. Data unit of the → PLC that → HIGHSTEP programs can access. metric and inches Position and lead values can be programmed in inches in the machining program. 2. Data Block 1. alarm. both tangentially and in terms of curvature. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . These data can be initialized directly when they are defined. Data unit of the → NC: Data modules contain data definitions for global user data. Irrespective of the programmable dimensions (G70/G71). 3rd order polynomials are used. Data word Two-byte data unit within a → data block. The control has both a self-diagnostics program as well as test functions for servicing purposes: status. 632 Fundamentals Programming Manual. the controller is set to a basic system. 06/2009. Cycles Protected subroutines for execution of repetitive machining operations on the → workpiece.Glossary CPU Central processing unit. The transitions at the interpolation points are continuous. and service displays Dimensions specification. Operating area of the control. A block advance of the → part program occurs. if necessary. Exact stop limit When all path axes reach their exact stop limits. edit. very slowly. the control responds as if it had reached its precise destination point. acceleration-dependent feedforward control. Drive The drive is the unit of the CNC that performs the speed and torque control based on the settings of the NC. To reduce the approach time. Editor The editor makes it possible to create. This results in excellent machining accuracy even at high → path velocities. and import programs/texts/program blocks. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Feedforward control can be selected and deselected on an axis-specific basis via the → part program. External zero offset Zero offset specified by the → PLC. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 633 . join. extend. the position specified in a block is approached exactly and. Exact stop When an exact stop statement is programmed. → exact stop limits are defined for rapid traverse and feed. Dynamic feedforward control Inaccuracies in the → contour due to following errors can be practically eliminated using dynamic. 06/2009.Glossary DRF Differential Resolver Function: NC function which generates an incremental zero offset in Automatic mode in conjunction with an electronic handwheel. Fixed-point approach Machine tools can approach fixed points such as a tool change point. in a defined way. Geometry axis Geometry axes are used to describe a 2. See → Raw part.or 3-dimensional area in the workpiece coordinate system. Geometry Description of a → workpiece in the → workpiece coordinate system. The retraction angle and the distance retracted can also be parameterized. enabling the tool to be quickly retracted from the workpiece contour that is currently being machined. an interrupt routine can also be executed (SINUMERIK 840D). e. Feed override The programmed velocity is overriden by the current velocity setting made via the → machine control panel or from the → PLC (0 to 200%).Glossary Fast retraction from contour When an interrupt occurs. Fixed machine point Point that is uniquely defined by the machine tool. The coordinates of these points are stored in the control. etc. After fast retraction. a motion can be initiated via the CNC machining program. A frame contains the following components: → zero offset. The control moves the relevant axes in → rapid traverse. loading point. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . pallet change point. 634 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Frame A frame is an arithmetic rule that transforms one Cartesian coordinate system into another Cartesian coordinate system. 06/2009. → scaling. Finished-part contour Contour of the finished workpiece. → rotation. whenever possible. → mirroring.g. machine reference point. The feedrate can also be corrected by a programmable percentage factor (1-200%) in the machining program. These supplements have the same meaning as the words with respect to block format.Glossary Ground Ground is taken as the total of all linked inactive parts of a device which will not become live with a dangerous contact voltage even in the event of a malfunction. words are supplemented using identifiers (names) for variables (arithmetic variables. Helical interpolation The helical interpolation function is ideal for machining internal and external threads using form milling cutters and for milling lubrication grooves. → system variables. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 635 . HIGHSTEP Summary of programming options for → PLCs of the AS300/AS400 system. and words with multiple address letters. It is not permissible to use the same identifier for different objects. system variables. subroutines. program-controlled switching functions (SINUMERIK 840D). The digital CNC outputs can be used to trigger fast. 06/2009. → macro techniques. Fundamentals Programming Manual. High-speed digital inputs/outputs The digital inputs can be used for example to start fast CNC program routines (interrupt routines). Identifiers must be unique. user variables). The helix comprises two movements: ● Circular movement in one plane ● A linear movement perpendicular to this plane High-level CNC language The high-level language offers: → user-defined variables. key words. Identifier In accordance with DIN 66025. Incremental dimension Also incremental dimension: A destination for axis traversal is defined by a distance to be covered and a direction referenced to a point already reached. The number of increments can be stored as → setting data or be selected by means of a suitably labeled key (i. Interpolatory compensation Interpolatory compensation is a tool that enables manufacturing-related leadscrew error and measuring system error compensations (SSFK. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 636 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Increment Travel path length specification based on number of increments. 06/2009. Interpolator Logic unit of the → NCK that defines intermediate values for the motions to be carried out in individual axes based on information on the end positions specified in the part program.Glossary Inch measuring system Measuring system. See → Absolute dimension.e. 100. 1000. 10. MSFK). Intermediate blocks Motions with selected → tool offset (G41/G42) may be interrupted by a limited number of intermediate blocks (blocks without axis motions in the offset plane). 10000). Inclined surface machining Drilling and milling operations on workpiece surfaces that do not lie in the coordinate planes of the machine can be performed easily using the function "inclined-surface machining". which defines distances in inches and fractions of inches. The permissible number of intermediate blocks which the control reads ahead can be set in system parameters. whereby the tool offset can still be correctly compensated for. Glossary Interrupt routine Interrupt routines are special → subroutines that can be started by events (external signals) in the machining process. Individual axes and spindles can be traversed in JOG mode by means of the direction keys. Leadscrew error compensation Compensation for the mechanical inaccuracies of a leadscrew participating in the feed. JOG Control operating mode (setup mode): In JOG mode. and → Preset (set actual value). Keywords Words with specified notation that have a defined meaning in the programming language for → part programs. Fundamentals Programming Manual. KV Servo gain factor. Inverse-time feedrate With SINUMERIK 840D. can be influenced like a standard NC axis. a control variable in a control loop. thus. The key switch has three different colored keys that can be removed in the specified positions. Additional functions in JOG mode include: → Reference point approach. the machine can be set up. the time required for the path of a block to be traversed can be programmed for the axis motion instead of the feed velocity (G93). Leading axis The leading axis is the → gantry axis that exists from the point of view of the operator and programmer and. A part program block which is currently being worked through is interrupted and the position of the axes at the point of interruption is automatically saved. Key switch The key switch on the → machine control panel has four positions that are assigned functions by the operating system of the control. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 637 . The control uses stored deviation values for the compensation. → Repos. 06/2009. Machine control panel An operator panel on a machine tool with operating elements such as keys.. and simple indicators such as LEDs. Load memory The load memory is the same as → RAM for the CPU 314 of the → PLC. 638 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Linear axis In contrast to a rotary axis. Machine coordinate system A coordinate system. Machine axes Physically existent axes on the machine tool. etc. Look Ahead The Look Ahead function is used to achieve an optimal machining speed by looking ahead over an assignable number of traversing blocks. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . rotary switches. 06/2009.Glossary Limit speed Maximum/minimum (spindle) speed: The maximum speed of a spindle can be limited by specifying machine data. the → PLC or → setting data. Linear interpolation The tool travels along a straight line to the destination point while machining the workpiece. a linear axis describes a straight line. which is related to the axes of the machine tool. It is used to directly influence the machine tool via the PLC. Machine zero Fixed point of the machine tool to which all (derived) measuring systems can be traced back. Macro techniques Grouping of a set of statements under a single identifier. a CNC channel must be regarded as a separate CNC control system with decoding. The identifier represents the set of consolidated statements in the program. Alarms and messages are displayed separately. block preparation and interpolation. In the MDA mode. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 639 . subroutines. 06/2009. Messages All messages programmed in the part program and → alarms detected by the system are displayed on the operator panel in plain text with date and time and the corresponding symbol for the cancel criterion. containing all the parameters required to start execution of a -> part program. MDA Control operating mode: Manual Data Automatic. Main block A block prefixed by ":" introductory block. Here.g. moving a loading gantry simultaneously with machining. or → cycles can be called. Fundamentals Programming Manual. e. Main program The → part program designated by a number or an identifer in which additional main programs.Glossary Machining channel A channel structure can be used to shorten idle times by means of parallel motion sequences. individual program blocks or block sequences with no reference to a main program or subroutine can be input and executed immediately afterwards through actuation of the NC start key. NC Numerical Control: Numerical control (NC) includes all components of machine tool control: → NCK. Mode of operation An operating concept on a SINUMERIK control. It is possible to mirror with respect to more than one axis at a time. 06/2009. with respect to an axis. Mode group Axes and spindles that are technologically related can be combined into one mode group. → PLC. mm (millimeters). Mirroring Mirroring reverses the signs of the coordinate values of a contour. The same → mode type is always assigned to the channels of the mode group. → Automatic. m (meters). 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . e. The following modes are defined: → Jog. Note A more correct term for SINUMERIK 840D controls would be: Computerized Numerical Control 640 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Axes/spindles of a BAG can be controlled by one or more → channels. → COM.g. HMI.Glossary Metric measuring system Standardized system of units: For length. → MDA. As a result.Glossary NCK Numerical Control Kernel: Component of NC that executes the → part programs and basically coordinates the motion operations for the machine tool. Fundamentals Programming Manual. who wish to create their own operator interface or integrate process-oriented functions in the control. e. a programming device via a → connecting cable. OEM The scope for implementing individual solutions (OEM applications) for the SINUMERIK 840D has been provided for machine manufacturers. A data exchange takes place over the network between the connected devices. NRK Numeric robotic kernel (operating system of → NCK) NURBS The motion control and path interpolation that occurs within the control is performed based on NURBS (Non Uniform Rational B-Splines). It features horizontal and vertical softkeys.g. 06/2009. a uniform process is available within the control for all interpolations for SINUMERIK 840D. Network A network is the connection of multiple S7-300 and other end devices. Operator Interface The user interface (UI) is the display medium for a CNC in the form of a screen. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 641 . Glossary Oriented spindle stop Stops the workpiece spindle in a specified angular position. Overall reset In the event of an overall reset.g. e. 642 Fundamentals Programming Manual. when a tool breaks). the following memories of the → CPU are deleted: ● → Work memory ● Read/write area of → load memory ● → System memory ● → Backup memory Override Manual or programmable control feature. which enables the user to override programmed feedrates or speeds in order to adapt them to a specific workpiece or material. 06/2009. a program command can be used to retract the tool in a user-specified orientation by a defined distance. in order to perform additional machining at a particular location.g. Oriented tool retraction RETTOOL: If machining is interrupted (e. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . with a resolution of 0. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 643 . Path axis Path axes include all machining axes of the → channel that are controlled by the → interpolator in such a way that they start. and reach their end point simultaneously. accelerate. stop. It represents the geometric sum of the feed rates of the → geometry axes involved. tool offsets. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Path feedrate Path feed affects → path axes.1 mm the maximum programmable path velocity is 1000 m/min. part programs.g. Path velocity The maximum programmable path velocity depends on the input resolution. Each file (programs and data) can be given a name consisting of a maximum of 24 alphanumeric characters. There are two types: → main blocks and → subblocks. PCIN data transfer program PCIN is an auxiliary program for sending and receiving CNC user data (e. The PCIN program can run in MS-DOS on standard industrial PCs.Glossary Part program block Part of a → part program that is demarcated by a line feed.) via a serial interface. etc. 06/2009. Part program management Part program management can be organized by → workpieces. The size of the user memory determines the number of programs and the amount of data that can be managed. For example. Polar coordinates A coordinate system. such as straight line. Polynomial interpolation Polynomial interpolation enables a wide variety of curve characteristics to be generated. parabolic. which defines the position of a point on a plane in terms of its distance from the origin and the angle formed by the radius vector with a defined axis. exponential functions (SINUMERIK 840D). PLC program memory SINUMERIK 840D: The PLC user program. the user data and the basic PLC program are stored together in the PLC user memory. I/O modules are: ● → Digital input/output modules ● → Analog input/output modules ● → Simulator modules PLC Programmable Logic Control: → Programmable logic controller. Component of → NC: Programmable controller for processing the control logic of the machine tool. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 644 Fundamentals Programming Manual. PLC Programming The PLC is programmed using the STEP 7 software. The STEP 7 programming software is based on the WINDOWS standard operating system and contains the STEP 5 programming functions with innovative enhancements.Glossary Peripheral module I/O modules represent the link between the CPU and the process. g. pallet transport). The peripherals and the programming language are matched to the requirements of the control technology. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 645 . tool magazine. Positioning axes are axes that do not interpolate with → path axes. Programmable Logic Control Programmable logic controllers (PLC) are electronic controls. input/output modules and an internal bus system.Glossary Positioning axis Axis that performs an auxiliary movement on a machine tool (e. the function of which is stored as a program in the control unit. Fundamentals Programming Manual. Programmable frames Programmable → frames enable dynamic definition of new coordinate system output points while the part program is being executed. it consists of a CPU (central module) with memory. The programmable logic controller has the same structure as a computer. Program block Program blocks contain the main program and subroutines of → part programs. 06/2009. This means that the layout and wiring of the device do not depend on the function of the control. A distinction is made between absolute definition using a new frame and additive definition with reference to an existing starting point. Pre-coincidence Block change occurs already when the path distance approaches an amount equal to a specifiable delta of the end position. R parameters Arithmetic parameter that can be set or queried by the programmer of the → part program for any purpose in the program. Protection zone Three-dimensional zone within the → working area into which the tool tip must not pass. The rapid traverse velocity is set on a machine-specific basis using a machine data element.Glossary Programmable working area limitation Limitation of the motion space of the tool to a space defined by programmed limitations. Programming key Character and character strings that have a defined meaning in the programming language for → part programs. Rapid traverse The highest traverse rate of an axis. can be virtually entirely eliminated with the quadrant error compensation. which arise as a result of changing friction conditions on the guideways. Quadrant error compensation Contour errors at quadrant transitions. rapid traverse is used when the tool approaches the → workpiece contour from a resting position or when the tool is retracted from the workpiece contour. 06/2009. For example. Parameterization of the quadrant error compensation is performed by means of a circuit test. 646 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . Rotary axis Rotary axes apply a workpiece or tool rotation to a defined angular position. the rounding axis is "in position". 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 647 . Rounding axis Rounding axes rotate a workpiece or tool to an angular position corresponding to an indexing grid. Scaling Component of a → frame that implements axis-specific scale modifications. and the machine in a timely manner so that damage to the workpiece. the → PLC. the machining operation is interrupted and the drives stopped. When a grid index is reached. or machine is largely prevented. Safety functions The control is equipped with permanently active montoring functions that detect faults in the → CNC. Rotation Component of a → frame that defines a rotation of the coordinate system around a particular angle. tool. 06/2009. In the event of a fault. Fundamentals Programming Manual. The cause of the malfunction is logged and output as an alarm. the PLC is notified that a CNC alarm has been triggered. At the same time.Glossary Reference point Machine tool position that the measuring system of the → machine axes references. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 06/2009. Spline interpolation With spline interpolation. Two value pairs can be specified for each axis and activated separately by means of the → PLC. as defined by the system software. Serial RS-232-C interface For data input/output. 648 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Likewise. The freely assignable function keys (soft keys) are assigned defined functions in the software. this term applies to execution of a particular machining operation on a given → raw part. Machining programs and manufacturer and user data can be loaded and saved via these interfaces. the PCU 20 has one serial V. Softkey A key. The choice of soft keys displayed is dynamically adapted to the operating situation. Setting data Data. the controller can generate a smooth curve characteristic from only a few specified interpolation points of a set contour. Software limit switch Software limit switches limit the traversing range of an axis and prevent an abrupt stop of the slide at the hardware limit switch. which communicates the properties of the machine tool to the NC.24 interfaces. whose name appears on an area of the screen.Glossary Selecting Series of statements to the NC that act in concert to produce a particular → workpiece.24 interface (RS232) while the PCU 50/70 has two V. positional data. Fundamentals Programming Manual. The subroutine is called from a main program.Glossary SRT Transformation ratio Standard cycles Standard cycles are provided for machining operations. Once the desired machining cycle has been selected. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 649 . Subblock Block preceded by "N" containing information for a sequence. Subroutine Sequence of statements of a → part program that can be called repeatedly with different defining parameters. 06/2009. the parameters required for assigning values are displayed in plain text. → Cycles are a form of subroutines. Every subroutine can be protected against unauthorized read-out and display. Synchronization Statements in → part programs for coordination of sequences in different → channels at certain machining points. which are frequently repeated: ● Cycles for drilling/milling applications ● for turning technology The available cycles are listed in the "Cycle support" menu in the "Program" operating area.g. e. Fast auxiliary function output For time-critical switching functions. technological functions (→ auxiliary functions) can be output from the CNC program to the PLC. For example. 06/2009. grabbers. clamping chucks. Auxiliary function output During workpiece machining. 2. such as quills. the acknowledgement times for the → auxiliary functions can be minimized and unnecessary hold points in the machining process can be avoided. 650 Fundamentals Programming Manual. From the point of view of the programmer and operator. markers System variables A variable that exists without any input from the programmer of a → part program. System memory The system memory is a memory in the CPU in which the following data is stored: ● Data required by the operating system ● The operands times. these auxiliary functions are used to control additional equipment for the machine tool. See → Userdefined variable.Glossary Synchronized actions 1. etc. moved synchronously with the leading axis. Synchronized axes Synchronized axes take the same time to traverse their path as the geometry axes take for their path. Synchronized axis A synchronized axis is the → gantry axis whose set position is continuously derived from the motion of the → leading axis and is. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . thus. It is defined by a data type and the variable name preceded by the character $. the synchronized axis "does not exist". counters. A TOA unit includes exactly one tool data block and one magazine data block. TOA unit Each → TOA area can have more than one TOA unit. 06/2009. Tool Active part on the machine tool that implements machining (e. LASER beam. The curvature center is maintained equidistantly around the contour. etc. Fundamentals Programming Manual. this area coincides with the → channel area with regard to the reach of the data. threads can be cut to a precise final drilling depth. turning tool.).g. However. e.Glossary Tapping without compensating chuck This function allows threads to be tapped without a compensating chuck. Because this is not actually the case in practice. Tool nose radius compensation Contour programming assumes that the tool is pointed. By default. offset by the curvature radius. machine data can be used to specify that multiple channels share one → TOA unit so that common tool management data is then available to these channels. a TOA unit can also contain a toolholder data block (optional). Text editor See → Editor TOA area The TOA area includes all tool and magazine data.g. The number of possible TOA units is limited by the maximum number of active → channels. for blind hole threads (requirement: spindles in axis operation). milling tool. drill. the curvature radius of the tool used must be communicated to the control which then takes it into account. By using the interpolating method of the spindle as a rotary axis and the drilling axis. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 651 . In addition. Traversing range The maximum permissible travel range for linear axes is ± 9 decades. User memory All programs and data. the control must traverse an equistant path to the programmed contour taking into account the radius of the tool that is being used (G41/G42). 652 Fundamentals Programming Manual. Tool radius compensation To directly program a desired → workpiece contour. 06/2009. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 .Glossary Tool offset Consideration of the tool dimensions in calculating the path. and zero offsets/frames. The basic block types are: ● Code blocks These blocks contain the STEP 7 commands. A definition contains a data type specification and the variable name. tool offsets. Transformation Additive or absolute zero offset of an axis. ● Data blocks These blocks contain constants and variables for the STEP 7 program. comments. such as part programs. The absolute value depends on the selected input and position control resolution and the unit of measurement (inch or metric). The user program has a modular layout and consists of individual blocks. User-defined variable Users can declare their own variables for any purpose in the → part program or data block (global user data). User program User programs for the S7-300 automation systems are created using the programming language STEP 7. subroutines. as well as channel and program user data. can be stored in the shared CNC user memory. See → System variable. Working area Three-dimensional zone into which the tool tip can be moved on account of the physical design of the machine tool. Working area limitation With the aid of the working area limitation. the traversing range of the axes can be further restricted in addition to the limit switches. Workpiece coordinate system The workpiece coordinate system has its starting point in the → workpiece zero-point. Fundamentals Programming Manual. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 653 . See → Protection zone. The variable names can be used to access the value of the variables. an anticipatory evaluation over several blocks (→ Look Ahead) can be specified. Workpiece Part to be made/machined by the machine tool. the dimensions and directions refer to this system. Working memory RAM is a work memory in the → CPU that the processor accesses when processing the application program. It is defined in terms of distances to the → machine zero. Velocity control In order to achieve an acceptable traverse rate in the case of very slight motions per block. Workpiece zero The workpiece zero is the starting point for the → workpiece coordinate system. In machining operations programmed in the workpiece coordinate system. WinSCP WinSCP is a freely available open source program for Windows for the transfer of files.Glossary Variable definition A variable definition includes the specification of a data type and a variable name. Workpiece contour Set contour of the → workpiece to be created or machined. 06/2009. One value pair per axis may be used to describe the protected working area. Glossary Zero offset Specifies a new reference point for a coordinate system through reference to an existing zero point and a → frame. The offsets . 654 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 1. Programmable Zero offsets can be programmed for all path and positioning axes using the TRANS statement. an external zero offset can be overridden by means of the handwheel (DRF offset) or from the PLC.which are selected by means of G functions . 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . External In addition to all the offsets which define the position of the workpiece zero. Settable SINUMERIK 840D: A configurable number of settable zero offsets are available for each CNC axis. 3. 2. 06/2009.take effect alternately. 127 $P_FZ. 93 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_MINUS. 117 $P_S_TYPE. 93 $P_TOFFL. 260. 116 A A. 478 Fixed addresses. 253 AROT.. 127 $AA_OFF. 463 Path. 06/2009. 384 AROTS. 396 ASCALE. 371. 560 Address letters. 452 ACN.. 419 Availability System-dependent. 152 Acceleration Mode. 422 Auxiliary function outputs. 127 $AA_FGROUP. 165 $TC_TP_MAX_VELO. 191 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 43 With axial extension. 477 non-modal. 470 Link. 475 ADIS. 191 Absolute dimensions. 225.. 262. 371. 171 $AC_FGROUP_MASK. 39 Adjustable. 93 $AC_TOFFL. 171 $P_GWPS. 225.9. 371 AMIRROR. 250 AP. 127 $AC_FZ. 171 $P_FGROUP_MASK. 265 ANG1. 434 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE. 127 $TC_DPNT. 314 AR. 376 Auxiliary function output High-speed. 260 Contour definition angle. 183. 107 $P_TOFF.. 5 Axes Channel. 434 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_PLUS. 467 $ $AA_ACC. 434 $AC_WORKAREA_CS_MINUS_ENABLE. 265 Angle Contour angle. 153 $AA_FGREF. 415 $AC_F_TYPE. 449 ACCLIMA. 265 AP. 217. 239. 465 Command. 559 modally effective.. 467 Geometry. 262. 213 Approach point/angle. 236 ACC. 465 Main. 477 With axis expansion. 171 $AC_S_TYPE. 250. 421 In continuous-path mode. 558 Addresses.. 463 Lead link axis. 93 $PA_FGREF. 290 AMIRROR. 93 $P_TOFFR. 107 $P_SVC. 403 ANG. 107 $AC_SVC. 262 ANG2. 19 AC. 468 Machine. 357 ADISPOS. 477 Value assignment. 236. 127 $PA_FGROUP. 434 $P_F_TYPE. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 655 . 107 $AC_TOFF. 191 ACP. 357 ALF. 93 $AC_TOFFR. 398 ATRANS.8/.Index Address. 102 $TC_TPG1/. 119 A=. 562 Extended address. 222.. 465 PLC. 371. 464 B B=. 295 Channel Axes. 213 Corner rounding. 225 Clamping torque. 225. 461 Axis types Special axes. 469 Types. 357 Contour Accuracy. 33 Basic zero system. 259 Definition. 39 Blocking point. 39 End. 317 Contour corner Chamfer. 482 Block. 265 Straight line with angle. 225. 295 Round. 71 Compensation memory. 27 Coordinate transformations (frames). 49 CHF. 35 Coordinate systems. 158 CFIN. 225. 33 Binary Constant. 15 CDOF. 340 CDON. 253 CROTS. 18. 449 BZS. 340 Command. 481 Continuous-path mode.. 45.. 225. 39 Axes. 44 Compensation Plane. 250 Circular-path programming With center and end points. 295 CIP. 233 With tangential transition. 191 CALCPOSI. 295 Contour definitions 3 straight lines. 233. 35 Coordinates Cartesian. 70 Tool radius. 482 Hexadecimal constant. 340 CFC. 262 Coordinate system Workpiece.. 465 Character set. 242 Circular interpolation Helical interpolation. 396 656 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 260 Two straight lines. 207 Point. 457 Approach/leave. 43 Skip. 33 C C=.. 312 Calculator. 295 CHR. 225 With polar coordinates. 06/2009. 449 BRISKA. 214 Polar. 158 Chamfer. 342 BRISK. 225. 225. 262. 15. 39 Components. 158 CFTCP. 229 With interpolation and end points. 265. 25 Bottleneck Detection.. 72 Constant Binary constant. 340 CDOF2. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 346 Tool length. 42 Number. 259 Element. 209 Cylindrical. 236 With polar angle and polar radius. 446 Collision detection.Index Positioning. 357 CORROF. 467 Comments. 42 Order of the statements. 46 Structure. 457 CPRECON. 467 Axis Container. 466 Synchronized. 242 With opening angle and center point. 432. 481 Integer constant.. 42 Length. 31 Basic offset. programmable. 457 CR. 415 CPRECOF. 239 With radius and end point. 13 Coordinate systems. 191 Basic coordinate system (BCS). 610 Cartesian coordinates. 06/2009. 323 FB. 458 DYNFINISH. 154 FDA. 85 Effectiveness modal. 77 DRIVE. 100 Constant. programmable. 222 For path axes. 119 FGROUP. 290 Dimensions. 29 DISC. 344 CUT2DF. 165 Units. 478 D D number. 347 CUTCONON. 200 DIAMON. 84 D. 344 CUTCONOF. 353 Extended address. 191 DIACYCOFA. 197 DIAMONA. 197 Dimensions in inches. 49 Exact stop. 222. 347 Cutting edge Center point. 200 DILF. 84 DAC. 278 DRFOF. 194 Dimensions in millimeters. 197 DIAM90A. 183 For rotary axes and spindles. 164 FD. 246 CUT2D... 28 Direction of rotation.. 276 FAD. 456 FFWON. 323 DISR. 191 In inches. 200 DIAMCYCOF. 437 657 . 454 E Edges Number. 474 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 154 Feed for positioning axes.. 119. 319 DISCL. 200 DIAMCHAN. 124 With handwheel override. 477 Non-modal. 275 Cylindrical coordinates. 214 DITE. 200 DIAM90. 477 End of block LF. 197 DIAMOFA. 456 FGREF. 119. 197 DIAMOF. 119 Fixed point Approach.. 454 DYNSEMIFIN. 108 Cylinder thread. 150 Tooth. 281 FA. 39 DIN 66217. 449 Dwell time. 123 Inverse-time. 194 In the diameter. 225. 454 DYNPOS. 197 In the radius.. 72 Radius. 200 DIAMCHANA. 197 Diameter programming. 194 DIN 66025. 146 Face thread. 200 DIC. 454 DYNROUGH. 345 Cutting rate. 454 DYNNORM.Index CT. 123 Override. 278 DITS. 154 FFWOF. 449 DRIVEA. 72 Position. 72 Cutting edges Number of contour tools. 129. 122 For synchronized axes. 323 Distance Calculation. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 F F. 200 DC. 415 Drill. 84 D0. 156 Override. 146 Feedrate. 194 In millimeters. 165 G G function groups. 270 G331. 161 FP. 323 G148. 146 FPRAON. 443 FZ. 369 Deselect. 06/2009. 335 G500. 335 G461. 335 G462. 436 G75. programmable. 568 G functions. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 295 FRCM. 233. 194 G710. 357 G641. 323 G348.Index Fixed stop. 301 G41. 454 G0. 213. with solid angle. 443 Clamping torque. 108 G962. 323 G341. 323 G141. 323 G248. 179. 288 G64. 295 FXS. 357 G645. 84. 414 Mirroring. 323 G142. 437 G9. 119 G94. 213. 173. 323 G147. 446 FL. 323 G143. 437 G751. 186 G93. 173 G58. 146 FPRAOF. 213. 119 G95. 568 G group Technology. 236. 119 G96. 283 G332. 403 Operations. 398 Frames. 371 Rotation. 301 G450. 173 G53. 179. 429 G26. 357 G644. 173 G55. 353 G63. 381 G59. 446 Monitoring. 225. 84. 353 G90. 357 G643. 229. 319 G451. 414 G17. 239 G33. 211 G112. 323 G25. 357 G642. 183 G91. 173 G57. 236. 414 G54. 108 658 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 429 G3. 194 G74. 345 G2. 217 G1. 353 G601. 119 FMA. 173 G505 to G599. 229. 443 FXST. 225. programmable. 353 G603. 118. 239 G247. 233. 194 G700. 281 G4. 213. 357 G70. 319 G460. 179 G19. 301 G42. 345 G18. 437 FPR. 173. 211 G111. 458 G40. 194 G71. 396 Scaling. 323 G153. 323 G35. 35 FRC. 381 G60. 118. 146 Frame. 211 G140. 108 G961. 281 G340. 283 G34. 173 G56. 222 G110. 353 G602. 443 FXSW. 323 G347. 21. 115 K K. 186 Identifier. 290 LFWP. 135. 281 IC. 312 L Left-hand thread. 290 LIMS.. 465 Master spindle. 42 Link Axes. 283 J. 49 LFOF.. 95 M6. 423 M44. 253 Involute. 220 Interpolation parameter IP. 423 M5. 115 GWPSON. 477 M M functions. 135 Machine coordinate system. 108 G973. 108 G972. 61... 312 KONTC.. 464 MCS. 477 INVCCW. 423 M70. 95 M4. 281 Jerk Limitation. 423 M3.. 423 M1. 49 for special numerical values. 115 GWPS. 31 KONT. 423 M19. 259 Messages.. 270. 250 Hexadecimal Constant. 283 K. 423 M42. 115 GWPSOF.Index G97. 423 M45. 78 Grinding wheel Peripheral speed. 479 for character string. 290 LFON. 78. 427 J J. 470 LookAhead. 481 I I. 423 M43. 108 G971. 31 Grinding tools. 460 Interpolation Linear. 220 Non-linear. 423 M. 154 Helix interpolation. 272 LF. 186 Internal preprocessing stop. 253 IP.. 281 Kinematic transformation. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 659 . 108 LINE FEED. 312 KONTT. 259 MD10654.. 229. 423 M41.. 49 for system variables. 225. 452 Fundamentals Programming Manual.. 463 Geometry axes. 27 Machines Axes. 423 M2. 283 I. 290 LFTXT. 27 MD10652.. 480 Incremental dimension. 290 LFPOS. 108 Geometry Axes. 362 H Handwheel Override. 40. 253 INVCW. 229. 21 Incremental dimensions. 468 Lead link axis. 95 M40. 423 M0. 49 Variable identifiers. 270. 06/2009. 449 JERKLIMA. 100 Reference point. 410 Path Axes. 290 POLFMASK. 357. 390 PLC Axes. 323 Preprocessing stop Internal. 290 660 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 129 PR. 301 Offset Tool length. 483 Optional stop. 211 POLF. 371 MIRROR. 41 NORM. 460 Program End. 41. 217. 51 Name. 88 Tool radius. 467 PM. 214 Polar coordinates. 312 POS. 18. 129 POSA. 47 NC programming Character set.Index Milling tools. 466 Positions Read. 49 Non-modal. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 426 Header. 371. 295 ROT. 37 Programmed stop. 315 RND. 272 Risk of collision. 214 Pole. 06/2009. 40 NC program Creating. 150 Q QU. 150 OVRA. 290 POLFMLIN. 41 Monitoring Fixed stop. 250 RPL. 75 MIRROR. 239. 483 Programming the end point. 200 Radius Effective. 384 ROTS. 25 Reference radius. 18. 426 OVR. 384 Rotation Programmable. 427 N Names. 410 PAROTOF. 436 Reference points. 25 Reference point approach. 384 P PAROT. 426 Programming commands List. 37 NC high-level language. 334 POSP. 126 Radius programming. 329 Punch tape format. 265. 323 Polar angle. 222. 465 Path tangent. 316 Planes Change. 396 Rounding. 126 Retraction Direction for thread cutting. 200 Right-hand thread. 295 RNDM. 197 Rapid traverse motion. 295 RP. 18. 213. 225. 444 MSG. 213 Polar radius. 217 Rate Cutting. 129 Position offset. 421 R RAC. 291 RIC. 88 Operations List. 415 Positioning axes. 150 OVRRAP. 38 O OFFN. 403 Modal. maximum. 398 Scale factor. 364 SD42940. 138 SETMS. 88 Tool point Direction. 464 Mode.. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 Straight lines Interpolation. 84 Group. 207 Statement. 95 S2. 88 TOFFR. 118 SPOS. 207 Thread Chain. 06/2009. 350 661 . 426 Programmed. 135 Speed.. 46 Slotting saw. 115 S1. 281 Thread lead. 283 Target point. relevant. 74 Tool edge Reference point. 82 SOFT. 426 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 100 Speed limitation. 135 SPOSA. 108 SD42440. 95. 288 Without compensating chuck. 60. 74 Length compensation. 138 SD43250.. 272 Multiple. 72 Cutting edge. 277 Tapping With compensating chuck. 61 Tapered thread. 464 Special characters. 88 TOFFL. 414 S-value Interpretation. 426 Optional. 134 Special axes. 271 Starting point. 161 SRA. 410 TOFRAMEZ. 60 T0. 39 Stop At the end of the cycle.. 161 ST. 95. 49 Special tools. 72 Type. 95 SCALE. 410 TOFRAMEY. 222 SUPA. 74 Type number. 410 TOFRAMEX. 271 Thread cutting. 270 Skip levels. 449 Solid angle. 98 SVC. 187 SD42465. 290 Direction of rotation. 135 SR. 95 SF. 34 T T.. 161 STA. 25 Compensation memory. 25. 217 RTLION. 61 T=. 449 SOFTA. 173. 398 SCC. 217 S S. 134 SPCON. 70 Radius compensation. 281 Three-finger rule. 82 Spindle Direction of rotation. 270. position-controlled. 102 Tip. 161 Start point offset For thread cutting. 88 TOFRAME. 301 Speed. 371. 28 TOFF. 396 SPCOF.. 187 SD42442. 91 SD43240. 71.Index RTLIOF. 410 Tool Change point. 91 SD42950. 350 Tool Offset. 426 Main. 271 Cutting. 95 M functions. 100 Synchronized Axes. 134 Positioning. 467 SZS. 25 Zero point Offset. 376 Transition circle. 209 Z Z. 376 Zero point Machine. 165 TOROT. 410 TOROTX.. 175 Zero offset Offset values. axial.. 197. 371. 25 Workpiece. 410 TOROTOF. 433 WALCS1-10. 429 in WCS/SZS.. 319 CUT2D. 410 TOROTZ.. 429 WALIMON. 6FC5398-1BP20-0BA0 . 345 Toolholder Reference point. 25 Tooth feedrate. 433 Reference points on the tool. 205 Zero system Settable. 432 662 Fundamentals Programming Manual. 381 Zero points. 410 TRAFOOF. 265 Z4. 452 W WAB.. 35 Working area limitation in BCS.. 208 Workpiece coordinate system.. 265 Z3. 43 Variable identifiers.Index Tool radius compensation At outside corners. 410 X X. 25 For turning. 323 WAITMC. 262 Y Y. 173 Zero point Offset. 80 Working plane. 06/2009. 129 WAITP. 35 Align on workpiece. 209 Z1. 265 Z2. 209 X2. 436 TRANS. 207 TURN. 206 Travel command. 320 Transverse axis. 260 X3. 480 VELOLIMA. 23. 262. 262. 410 TOROTY. 129 WAITS. 135 WALCS0. 260.. 34 Variable. 34 V Value assignment. 343 Transition radius. programmable. 250 Turning tools. 265 Zero frame. 177 Settable. 429 WCS.. 433 WALIMOF. 179 Workpiece Contour.
Copyright © 2024 DOKUMEN.SITE Inc.